JP2022177912A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To change the display speed of an image in a performance without increasing the processing load.SOLUTION: When position information based on a display frame position designation is a threshold value or lower, display data corresponding to the display frame position designation among multiple display data is set in display data output means. When the position information is the threshold value or larger, the display data is decoded by decoding means from the display frame position designation, and the decoded display data is set in the display data output means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 402

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachislot machines and pachinko machines.

2. Description of the Related Art A conventional game machine has been proposed that can change the display speed of a display effect (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In the game machine according to such a proposal, the display speed of the display effect is changed by the display speed gradual change unit of the display control device. If the video is played at double speed by changing the , it is necessary to play the 3rd frame after playing the 1st frame. It will be.

JP-A-2005-073743

However, in such a game machine, when a moving image is reproduced at double speed by a program, there is a problem that the above-described seek processing always occurs, resulting in heavy processing. In addition, as in the game machine described above, if the display control device is provided with a dedicated circuit such as the display speed stepwise change unit, the manufacturing cost will increase.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and changes the display speed of an image in an effect without increasing the processing load (for example, from normal speed to n times speed (2 times speed or 5 times speed). etc.).

A further object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of changing the display speed of images in an effect at low cost without providing a dedicated circuit.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
a game board having a game area in which game media can flow down;
a shooting means for shooting a game medium to the game area by a player's operation;
a first start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a second start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start region or the second start region;
an area dividing means for extracting an area in which the game medium appears from an image related to the image data and dividing the area in which the game medium appears into a plurality of divided areas;
warning screen determination means for determining whether or not to display a warning screen based on the number of rotations detected by the number of rotations detection means within a predetermined period after the gaming machine is activated;
effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means by controlling the light emission mode of the optical element based on the control data;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine with the above configuration, it is possible to change the image display speed in the effect without increasing the processing load. Furthermore, according to the gaming machine with the above configuration, it is possible to change the image display speed in the effect at low cost without providing a dedicated circuit.

Further, with the above-configured gaming machine, when an instruction is given to play back a moving image at n-times speed, the user does not have to be aware of the moving image playback status, and according to the comparison result between the numerical value based on the designated frame number and the predetermined threshold value, the Therefore, by specifying an arbitrary frame for reproduction at the double speed, optimum video reproduction processing can be performed.

It is a figure which shows the external structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a game machine according to this embodiment; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the function flow of the gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure for demonstrating the playability of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a diagram for explaining the mode of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the various tables of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining a correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination, a stop operation mode, a display combination, etc., of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a figure for demonstrating the limit process of the 1st gaming machine based on this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of the winning flag storage area, winning operation flag storage area, and symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the carryover combination storage area|region of the 1st gaming machine which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the configuration of a game state flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a diagram showing the configuration of the mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation|movement stop button storage area|region of the 1st game machine which concerns on this embodiment. It is a diagram showing the configuration of the pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 4 is a flowchart showing power-on processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing medal acceptance/start check processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing internal lottery processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a game start state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a flow chart showing processing at the start of a game during an advantageous section, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing reel stop control processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing a game end state control process executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing at the end of a game during an advantageous section, which is executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing regular interruption processing executed by the main control circuit of the first gaming machine according to the present embodiment; 4 is a flow chart showing an overview of sub-side control processing executed by the sub-control circuit of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment; It is a diagram showing a configuration example of a medalless gaming machine according to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the main-control board of the game machine which concerns on this embodiment. 1 is a front perspective view of a gaming machine; FIG. It is a back side perspective view of a game machine. 1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming machine when the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism are opened; 1 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine; FIG. It is an exploded perspective view of a mirror mechanism. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the positional relationship between the projector device and the mirror mechanism; It is explanatory drawing which shows the attachment state of a mirror mechanism. 4 is a longitudinal sectional view of the display unit; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the circuit configuration of the projector device; FIG. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a projector device; FIG. FIG. 4 is a plan view showing an upper pedestal and a lower pedestal for fixing the projector device; FIG. 49 is a cross-sectional view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal along line XXVI-XXVI of FIG. 48; It is an exploded perspective view of an upper side pedestal and a lower side pedestal. It is a figure for demonstrating the positioning method of an upper side base. It is a figure for demonstrating the attitude|position adjustment method of a lower side base. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper side pedestal and a lower side pedestal. It is a top view which shows the state which assembled|attached the upper side base and the lower side base. 55 is a diagram of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. FIG. 55 is a view of the upper pedestal and lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 as viewed obliquely from the rear; 1 is a perspective view of a case that houses internal components of a projector mechanism; FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the state which attached the case to the lower side base. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed; FIG. 4 is a plan view of the projector cover with the top wall removed; FIG. 61 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 60 taken along line LL, and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover; FIG. 4 is a view of the projector cover with the top wall removed, as viewed obliquely from above; 4 is a front view of the projector cover with the top wall removed; FIG. FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 63 taken along line MM; It is a perspective view of a blind. FIG. 4 is a plan view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall portion of the projector cover removed; FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover are removed in a cross section along the arrow NN of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 66; FIG. 66 is a perspective view showing a state in which an opening vicinity fan and a duct cover are attached to the blind shown in FIG. 65 and a case is arranged; FIG. 67 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right punching is removed from the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 66; FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which an opening vicinity fan and a duct cover are attached to the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 67; FIG. 71 is a right side view showing the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 70 with the opening vicinity fan removed; FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of a duct cover and a fan for the vicinity of an opening; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the opening vicinity fan as viewed from the rear and below; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the opening vicinity fan as viewed from the front and below; Fig. 2 is a left perspective view of a state in which a blind and a duct cover are attached; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the projector cover, blinds, and duct cover; 77 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, blinds and duct cover shown in FIG. 76; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of blinds and a duct cover; FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating how to attach an upper door mechanism to a cabinet. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement positions of an intake fan and an exhaust fan; FIG. 4 illustrates an air flow path that may be formed inside a projector cover; It is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko game machine. It is an exploded perspective view showing the decoration unit and the frame member of the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko game machine. It is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko game machine. 4 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the display unit; FIG. It is a perspective view which shows the internal structure of a display unit. 89 is a perspective view showing a state in which a projector and a mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 88; FIG. FIG. 88 is a perspective view showing how light is projected from the projector in a state where the projector and the mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 87; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen; It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. 1 is a front view of a game machine; FIG. (a) is a diagram showing a relationship between an irradiation range of light projected from a projector and a cabinet-side screen. (b) is a diagram showing how light that has not entered the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side right screen. (c) is a diagram showing how light that has not entered the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side left screen. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining images displayed on a cabinet-side screen, a door-side right screen, and a door-side left screen; FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining images displayed on a cabinet-side screen, a door-side right screen, and a door-side left screen; It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of an upper door mechanism and a cabinet. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism. It is an exploded perspective view of an upper door mechanism. 3 is a rear perspective view of the light-transmitting plate, the screen sheet, the lower pressing member, the upper pressing member, and the lower frame; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the lower pressing member and the upper pressing member as seen from the front, while the light-transmitting plate and the screen sheet are seen from the rear; It is the perspective view which looked at the upper pressing member and the upper frame from the downward direction. FIG. 3 is a rear perspective view of the translucent plate, the screen sheet, and the lower frame; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of the upper frame, the first structure, the second structure, the third structure, the fourth structure, and the screen sheet; 3 is a rear perspective view of the transparent plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member. FIG. 3 is a front perspective view of the transparent plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, and the light guide member; FIG. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of a cross section of a transparent plate, a screen sheet, a lower frame, an LED substrate, and a light guide member; It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism, the hook part, and the front side protrusion member from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism, the hook part, and the front side protrusion member from the side. It is the perspective view which looked at the cabinet, the hook part, and the front side projecting member from the side. It is a right side view of the cross section of an upper door mechanism, a cabinet, a hook, and a front side projecting member. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the downward direction. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism from the back. FIG. 2 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism removed; FIG. 4 is a side perspective view of light projected from the projector device; It is the perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the side. It is the perspective view which looked at the irradiation unit from the back. It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a cabinet. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the irradiation unit, closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the gaming machine with the closing lid removed from the rear wall; 126 is a partially enlarged view around the operation window in the game machine shown in FIG. 125; FIG. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged view of the operating window and its surroundings in the game machine with the closing lid attached to the back wall. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the back. FIG. 4 is a front perspective view of a state in which the central screen unit and the front top unit are removed from the upper door mechanism; FIG. 4 is a rear perspective view of a state in which the central screen unit and the front top unit are removed from the upper door mechanism; It is the perspective view which looked at the center screen from the front. FIG. 10 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the uneven portion on the right side of the central screen; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the right side decoration unit in the upper door mechanism; 137 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the side decorative portion is removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 136; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the right side decorative part from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the right side decoration part from the back. It is a sectional view of a right side decorative part. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and right side decoration; It is a front view of an upper door mechanism. FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142 taken along line AA; 4 is a perspective view of a side LED board and a light guide; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of a side LED board and a light guide; FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view of side LEDs and a light guide; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a light guide and a sidelight lens; It is the perspective view which looked at the sidelight lens from the back. It is a sectional view of a sidelight lens. It is a sectional view of a sidelight lens. 3 is a perspective view of a rear light-transmitting plate, a light guide, and a sidelight lens; FIG. It is a perspective view of a side decoration part. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a side decoration and a sidelight lens; 3 is a perspective view of a central screen, a rear translucent plate, and side light shielding plates; FIG. 155 is a perspective view showing a state in which the side light shielding plate is removed from the state shown in FIG. 154; FIG. FIG. 143 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142 taken along line AA; It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the back. 158 is a perspective view showing how the side LED board cover is removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 157; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from the front. It is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the left side of the shielding wall member. It is the perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism from the back. 163 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member and the speaker harness protector are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 162; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which light is projected from a projector in this embodiment, as viewed from above. (b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which light is projected from a projector in another embodiment, viewed from above. It is a front view of a shielding wall member. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a shielding wall member and a light guide; It is the perspective view which looked at the shielding wall member from the back. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top frame base is removed from the upper door mechanism; 169 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper front and rear frames and the duct seal are removed from the state shown in FIG. 168; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the upper front-back frame from the back. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the upper front and rear frames as viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the top frame base as seen from the rear and below; 173 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 172; FIG. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base and upper front and rear frames as viewed from the rear; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a top frame base and upper front and rear frames; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker harness protector is removed from the upper door mechanism; It is the perspective view which looked at the top frame base from the front. FIG. 4 is a bottom view of the top frame base; It is the perspective view which looked at the upper door mechanism slightly from the downward direction. Fig. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and top frame base; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of the flat portion of the central screen and the bottom wall of the top frame base; It is the perspective view which looked at the center screen from the front and the downward direction. It is the perspective view which looked at the center screen from the back and the downward direction. It is the perspective view which looked at the center screen from back and upper direction. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the top frame base as seen from the rear and below; 186 is a partial enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 185; FIG. Fig. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and top frame base; Fig. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and top frame base; Fig. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and top frame base; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a central screen and a rear translucent plate; (a) is a schematic diagram showing from above how light projected from a projector is incident on a rear translucent plate in the present embodiment. (b) is a schematic diagram showing from above how light projected from a projector is incident on a rear translucent plate in another embodiment. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a central screen and a rear translucent plate; It is the perspective view which looked at the rear side translucent plate from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the center screen and the rear side translucent plate from the back. It is a sectional view of an upper door mechanism. It is a perspective view which shows the state which removed the underframe from the upper door mechanism. It is a sectional view of an upper door mechanism. It is a front view which shows the state which removed the top side panel from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top side panel and speaker grill are removed from the upper door mechanism; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top frame decoration is removed from the upper door mechanism; FIG. 4 is a front view showing a state in which a top center panel and a top lens are removed from the upper door mechanism; 202 is a partially enlarged front view of the upper door mechanism in the state shown in FIG. 201; FIG. 202 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top reflector and the arrow eye reflector are removed from the upper door mechanism in the state shown in FIG. 201; FIG. 204 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top frame base and the top inner cover are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 203; FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, top center LED board, and center LED board base; It is the perspective view which looked at the top reflector from the front. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the top reflector; FIG. 4 is a front view of a top reflector and a top center LED substrate; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a top reflector and a top center LED substrate; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of a top reflector and a top center LED substrate; 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top reflector, top center LED board, and top frame base; FIG. Fig. 3 is a front and right perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the left arrow eye reflector; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector; Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the left arrow eye reflector; Fig. 10 is a perspective view of the center LED, top reflector and left arrow eye reflector; Fig. 10 is a perspective view of the center LED, top reflector and left arrow eye reflector; Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the center LED, top reflector, and left arrow eye reflector; FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a top frame base and a top lens; 220 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top lens is removed from the state shown in FIG. 219; FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the top lens from back and upper direction. Fig. 10 is a perspective view of the top center LED substrate, top reflector, left arrow eye reflector, right arrow eye reflector, and top lens; Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the top center LED substrate, top reflector, left arrow eye reflector, right arrow eye reflector, and top lens; Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the top center LED substrate, top reflector, left arrow eye reflector, right arrow eye reflector, and top lens; Fig. 10 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector and top lens; Fig. 3 is a cross-sectional view of the left arrow eye reflector and top lens; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the top center panel as seen from the front; 4 is a partially enlarged front view of the top center panel; FIG. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the top center panel as seen from the rear and above; FIG. 4 is a rear view of the top center panel and top lens; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the top center panel and top lens; FIG. 4 is a front view of the top center panel and top lens; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view showing the top frame base and the top center panel as seen from slightly above; FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top center panel is attached to the top frame base as seen from slightly above; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the top center panel as seen from the rear and slightly below; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base as seen from the front; FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top center panel as seen from the rear and slightly above; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, top lens, and top center panel; It is the perspective view which looked at the top lens from the downward direction. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a top lens; FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram of a top center LED board, a top frame base, a top lens, and a top center panel; FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, top lens, and top center panel; It is a figure which shows the example of lock production. It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1." It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "2." It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3." It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "4." It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5." It is a figure which shows the specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6." It is a flowchart which shows the lock effect|action determination process performed in a main control circuit. It is a flow chart which shows lock effect execution processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device in the pseudo-game. It is a flow chart showing processing during a pseudo-game performed in the main control circuit. It is a flow chart showing processing during normal pseudo-game performed in the main control circuit. It is a flow chart showing a post-pseudo-game reel effect processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a flow chart showing processing during pseudo-game after reel effect performed in the main control circuit. 4 is a flowchart showing reel rotation start processing performed in a main control circuit; 4 is a flowchart showing random delay processing performed in the main control circuit; It is a diagram showing an example of the temporal change of the reel control state when a pseudo-game is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of the temporal change of the reel control state when a pseudo-game is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of the temporal change of the reel control state when a pseudo-game is performed. It is a flow chart which shows lock effect execution processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a flow chart showing a process for starting a pseudo-game performed in the main control circuit. It is a flow chart showing processing during normal pseudo-game performed in the main control circuit. 4 is a flowchart showing stop button operation reception processing performed in the main control circuit; 4 is a flowchart showing swing control processing performed in a main control circuit; It is a flow chart showing a pseudo-game end processing performed in the main control circuit. It is a flow chart showing a pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing bonus winning process performed in the main control circuit; FIG. It is a flow chart showing a lock effect determination process at the time of game end performed in the main control circuit. It is a flow chart showing a lock effect execution process at the end of the game performed in the main control circuit. It is a flow chart showing a lock effect start process at the end of the game performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the memory map of a main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing setting suggestion effect execution processing performed in the sub control circuit; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing setting suggestion effect execution processing for type A performed in the sub control circuit; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing setting suggestion effect execution processing for type B performed in the sub control circuit; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing setting suggestion effect execution processing for type C performed in the sub control circuit; FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device when the AT state ends; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed on the main display device in a setting confirmation state; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect setting screen displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect setting screen displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect setting screen displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state; (A) is a diagram showing an outline of a menu screen displayed on a main display device. (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a menu screen. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a character customization screen for customizing a character; It is a figure which shows an example of a game history screen. It is a figure which shows a game system. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of setting suggestion production|presentation. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock|rock at the time of a 1st stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock|rock at the time of a 1st stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock|rock at the time of an intermediate stop. It is a figure which shows an example of the lock|rock at the time of an intermediate stop. (a) is a diagram showing transition of a game state according to one embodiment of the present invention. (b) is a table summarizing game state transition conditions according to an embodiment of the present invention. (a) is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table. (b) is a diagram showing a symbol code table. It is a figure which shows a design combination table. It is a figure which shows a design combination table. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. It is a figure which shows the combination table classified by flag. (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a bonus non-winning state (double bet game). (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a bonus non-winning state (three bet game). (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the state between 3BB flags (double bet game). (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the state between 3BB flags (three bet game). (a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a state between 2BB flags (double bet game). (b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the state between 2BB flags (three bet game). (c) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for BB gaming state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination, a stop operation mode, and the number of medals to be paid out in a bonus non-winning state and a state between 2BB flags (three-bet game). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination, a stop operation mode, and the number of medals to be paid out in a state between 3BB flags (three-bet game). (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between internal winning combinations and sub-flag numbers. (b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between sub-flag numbers and sub-flag names. It is a figure showing an example of the transition flow of the game state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section according to one embodiment of the present invention. 9 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of a non-advantageous section game performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows an initial bonus winning rate lottery table. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag set lottery table; It is a figure which shows a chance B continuation rate lottery table. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of an advantageous section (normal mode) game performed in the main control circuit; FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing character-related lottery processing performed in the main control circuit; It is a figure which shows a character determination lottery table. It is a figure which shows a character high probability game number lottery table. 7 is a flow chart showing various lottery processes for an advantageous section (normal mode) performed in the main control circuit; 4 is a flowchart showing bonus lottery processing performed in the main control circuit; It is a figure which shows a bonus lottery table. (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between sub-flags and payout flag group (normal) numbers for each character. (b) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a payout flag group (normal) number and a payout flag group (normal). 4 is a flowchart showing bonus promotion lottery processing performed in the main control circuit; It is a figure which shows a bonus promotion lottery table. 4 is a flowchart showing a chance A lottery process performed in the main control circuit; It is a figure which shows the chance A lottery table classified by setting. It is a figure which shows a chance A lottery table. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a number-of-prediction-game lottery process performed in the main control circuit; FIG. It is a figure which shows a sign game number lottery table. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing a precursor game number counter management process performed in the main control circuit; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of an advantageous section (chance A mode) game performed in the main control circuit; FIG. It is a figure which shows a reward lottery table in chance A. FIG. It is a figure which shows a reward lottery table in chance A. FIG. (a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between sub-flags and ball-out flag group (chance A) numbers for each character. (b) is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between a ball-out flag group (chance A) number and a ball-out flag group (chance A). It is a figure which shows the chance B continuation rate UP lottery table for addition. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing non-winning processing during chance A reward lottery performed in the main control circuit; FIG. It is a figure which shows the lottery table for forced cancellation during chance A. FIG. It is a figure which shows a bonus lottery table at the time of reaching regulation chance A point. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of premonitory games during chance A; It is a diagram showing an example of symbols that are stopped and displayed in the pseudo-game. It is a diagram showing a pseudo-game stop position initial setting lottery table. It is a diagram showing a pseudo-game stop position determination table. 10 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of an advantageous section (pseudo-bonus A mode) game performed in the main control circuit; It is a figure which shows a pseudo-bonus A inside chance B&AT lottery table. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a lottery table for increasing chance B continuation rate at the end of pseudo bonus A; 10 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of an advantageous section (pseudo-bonus B mode) game performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows a reward lottery table in a pseudo-bonus B. FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a random selection table for chance B continuation rate UP for medium addition of pseudo bonus B; It is a figure which shows the transition route to chance B mode. 7 is a flow chart showing processing at the time of transition to chance B performed in the main control circuit; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lottery table for conversion of remaining chance A points when chance B rushes; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (chance B basic mode) performed in the main control circuit; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for the first game in the first set during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flow chart showing processing for the first game during Chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows a chance B one-shot victory lottery table. It is a figure which shows a chance B continuation lottery table. It is a figure which shows the lottery table of heaven transfer after AT fixed state. 10 is a flow chart showing processing dedicated to the first game in chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. It is a figure which shows the damage amount lottery table at the time of a set start. It is a figure which shows a follow-up number determination lottery table. 4 is a flowchart showing common processing during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit; It is a figure which shows a rewriting lottery table during chance B. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing after the second game during Chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing final game processing during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing final game processing when chance B is discontinued, which is performed in the main control circuit; FIG. It is a figure which shows the time retrospective lottery table at the time of chance B end. 7 is a flow chart showing processing at the end of chance B performed in the main control circuit; It is a figure which shows the lottery table of chance B point transfer at the time of chance B completion|finish. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a chance B one-shot winning process performed in the main control circuit; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the lock effect execution process at the time of chance B one-shot victory performed in a main control circuit. 10 is a flowchart showing processing for Bell Navi during chance B performed in the main control circuit; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (chance B special mode) performed in the main control circuit; FIG. It is a figure which shows a follow-up number UP lottery table. It is a figure which shows the structure of a sub-control unit etc. with which the game machine based on one Embodiment of this invention is provided. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining how each process is started when power is turned on; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between each process and shared memory; FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a data transmission/reception method in a shared memory; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the flow of basic processing relating to sound processing; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of shared memory data related to processing of a sound process; 4 is a flow chart showing the processing flow of a sound thread of a sound process; 10 is a flow chart showing the processing flow of the inter-process communication thread of the sound process; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the processing flow of a fixed cycle thread of the sound process; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the flow of basic processing relating to the ramp process; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of shared memory data related to the processing of a lamp process; 4 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of a lamp thread of a lamp process; 10 is a flow chart showing the processing flow of the inter-process communication thread of the lamp process; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of a periodic thread of a ramp process; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the flow of basic processing relating to the graphics process; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of data in shared memory related to the processing of graphics processes; 4 is a flow chart showing the processing flow of a graphics thread of a graphics process; 10 is a flow chart showing the processing flow of the file cache thread of the graphics process; 10 is a flow chart showing the processing flow of an inter-process communication thread of a graphics process; 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of a periodic thread of a graphics process; 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of a character object thread of a graphics process; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the flow of basic processing relating to the master process; 10 is a flow chart showing the processing flow of the master thread of the master process; 10 is a flow chart showing the processing flow of an inter-process communication thread of a master process; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of processing of a periodic thread of the master process; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the processing flow of the main board thread of the master process; 4 is a flow chart showing the processing flow of a peripheral device thread of a master process; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing time-series processing of CPU processing, GPU (VPU) processing, and display processing in a graphics process; FIG. 4 is a diagram showing time-series processing of CPU processing, GPU (VPU) processing, and display processing in a graphics process; FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining an overview of blend processing in a graphics process; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the flow of file decompression processing in the graphics thread; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of data referenced and used in a sound process; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of data referenced and used in a sound process; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of data referenced and used in a sound process; FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an example of data referenced and used in a sound process; FIG.

[First embodiment]
A gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described below with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachislot machine will be described as an example of a game machine.

[1. Structure of pachislot machine]
First, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 shows the external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1, and FIG. 2 shows the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. Also, for convenience of explanation, the following description of the external structure may include a portion of the internal structure, and the description of the internal structure may include a portion of the external structure.

[1-1. External structure]
[1-1-1. Housing]
A pachi-slot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2 . The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as a game machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD arranged in the upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower front part of the cabinet G. and a lower door mechanism DD.

The cabinet G has an intermediate support plate G1, a pair of left and right side walls G2, a rear wall G3, a top wall G4, and a bottom wall G5. In addition, in FIG.1 and FIG.2, illustration of the back wall G3 and the bottom wall G5 is abbreviate|omitted. In addition, two openings G4a are formed in the upper surface wall G4 of the cabinet G so as to penetrate in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. A wooden plate member G4b is attached to the top wall G4 so as to block the two openings G4a.

The plate member G4b is used to fix the pachi-slot machine 1 to a game island (not shown) when it is installed in the amusement arcade. or integrally formed with the top wall G4. Moreover, as long as a certain strength is ensured for the cabinet G, a part or all of each component can be made of wood or resin material.

Inside the cabinet G, an upper opening G101 is formed that opens forward with the intermediate support plate G1 interposed therebetween. A side opening G102 is formed. That is, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space with an intermediate support plate G1 interposed therebetween, and the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that partitions the interior of the cabinet G into the upper space and the lower space. there is The upper space is a space on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD inside the cabinet G, and accommodates a main display device 210 and the like, which will be described later. The lower space is a space on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD inside the cabinet G, and accommodates a reel unit RU, a main control board 71, and the like, which will be described later.

Note that the cabinet G does not necessarily have to include the intermediate support plate G1. That is, as long as each device and the like can be properly accommodated in the cabinet G, the upper space and the lower space may not be partitioned. Further, the cabinet G can be simply referred to as a "box" or "main body", and functions as a frame for supporting or fixing the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD. It can also be referred to as a "support", "support frame", or "fixed frame".

[1-1-2. front door]
The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G, and are provided so as to be able to block the upper and lower spaces of the opening in the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. That is, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD function as front doors provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1 .

Each of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD is attached to the cabinet G so as to be openable and closable, for example, by an opening/closing mechanism (not shown) such as a hinge provided on the left side wall G2. Either one of the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be opened and closed by the opening/closing mechanism described above, and the other can be attached and detached only when one of the door mechanisms is in an open state. can also

The upper door mechanism UD has an effect display window UD1 provided at its center and an upper lamp 23 provided above the effect display window UD1. The effect display window UD1 is configured as, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, and enables visual recognition of the effect image displayed on the screen device C constituting the main display device 210, which will be described later, provided on the rear side thereof. Note that, in this embodiment, the main display device 210 that performs the effect display through the effect display window UD1 may be described as the main effect display section 21 in some cases.

The lower door mechanism DD has a main display window 4 provided substantially in the center of its upper portion, and a reel unit RU attached to the inside of the cabinet G behind the main display window 4. there is

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel). Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is composed of, for example, a cylindrically formed reel body and a translucent reel band attached to the peripheral surface of the reel body. ) are drawn at predetermined intervals along the direction of rotation of the reel. The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that they can rotate vertically at a constant speed. The main display window 4 is configured as, for example, a transparent panel made of resin, and allows at least a portion (for example, three) of the symbols on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to be visible. Further, inside each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, a light source (a reel lamp included in lamps and LEDs, which will be described later) is provided at a position where the pattern can be viewed at least through the main display window 4. At least each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R When 3C and 3R are rotating, they are illuminated from the inside with a constant luminance to ensure the visibility of the pattern.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has a sub effect display section 22 provided on the left side of the main display window 4 and a effect button 10b provided on the right side of the main display window 4 . The sub effect display section 22 displays the effect image displayed on the sub display device 220 which will be described later. It should be noted that the sub-rendering display section 22 can be configured as a touch panel so that it functions not only as a function of displaying a performance, but also as one of the buttons for performance. The effect button 10b is an operation unit that receives a player's operation for effect (effect operation).

In addition, the lower door mechanism DD is provided substantially in the center of the substantially horizontal pedestal formed below the main display window 4, with the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the checkout button 9 provided on the left side. and a medal slot 5 provided on the right side.

The MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b are the player's game operations (betting operations, "insertion operations" and "betting operations") for using the medals deposited (credited) inside the pachislot machine 1. ”, etc.). When the MAX bet button 6a is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number (for example, 3) and the number of credited medals is equal to or greater than the difference, the maximum bet number of medals is bet. be. On the other hand, if the credited medals are less than the difference, no medals are bet. Further, when the 1 bet button 6b is operated, if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number and there is one or more credited medals, one medal is bet.

The settlement button 9 is an operation unit that receives a game operation (settlement operation) of the player for returning credited medals (settlement). If the payment button 9 is operated while there are no credited medals, the medals to be inserted or paid out will be credited within the creditable number (for example, 50). A player's game operation (C/P mode selection operation) for enabling selection of either mode (C mode) or a pay mode (P mode) in which the medals are not credited may be accepted. That is, the settlement button 9 can also function as a so-called C/P button. The effect button 10a is an operation unit that receives a player's operation for effect (effect operation).

The medal slot 5 accepts medals that are thrown into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by a player. The received medals are detected by the selector 31, which will be described later, and it is determined whether or not they are proper medals. If the one received medal is not proper, the received medal is returned from a medal payout port 11, which will be described later. Also, if the accepted one medal is correct, and if the current bet number is less than the maximum bet number, one medal is bet. If the current number of bets is the maximum number of bets and the credited medals have not reached the creditable number, one medal is credited. On the other hand, when the credited medals have reached the creditable number, the received medals are returned from the medal payout port 11, which will be described later.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD has an information display device 14 provided between the main display window 4 and the above-described pedestal. The information display device 14 includes a plurality of lamps (LEDs) and 7-segment LEDs, and displays information about the game according to lighting modes thereof.

Further, the lower door mechanism DD includes a start lever 7 provided on the left side, three stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R provided substantially in the center and a and a locking mechanism 15 . The start lever 7 is an operation unit which is attached so as to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range and receives a game operation (start operation) by the player for starting a game. Each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R is provided corresponding to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and is an operation unit that receives a game operation (stop operation) by the player for stopping the rotation of each reel.

The locking mechanism 15 is composed of, for example, a key cylinder lock, and when the lower door mechanism DD is in the closed state, a manager on the amusement arcade side (for example, an amusement arcade clerk, etc.; the same shall apply hereinafter) inserts a door key (not shown) into the keyhole. ) is inserted and turned to the right to unlock, and the lower door mechanism DD is opened. Note that the locking mechanism 15 may have a function as a reset switch as well as a function to manage opening and closing of the door mechanism. For example, when an amusement arcade manager inserts a door key into a keyhole and turns it to the left, it may be possible to detect a reset operation similar to the reset switch 53 described later. Further, in this embodiment, when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, the upper door mechanism UD can also be opened in conjunction therewith. A separate mechanism may be provided so that the opening and closing can be managed independently.

In addition, the lower door mechanism DD includes a waist panel 13 provided in the center of its lower portion, a medal receiving tray 12 provided below the waist panel 13, and a medal dispensing opening 11 provided above the medal receiving tray 12. , and sound transmission holes 24 a and 24 b provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout port 11 .

The waist panel 13 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information such as a logo representing the name of the model or a character representing a motif is drawn, and a light source for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side (such as lamps and LEDs, which will be described later). lumbar ramp included). The medal tray 12 stores medals paid out from the medal payout port 11. - 特許庁The medal pay-out port 11 discharges medals paid out (or returned) from the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal pay-out port 11 include those paid out from a hopper device 32 described below and those returned from a selector 31 described later through a cancel chute (not shown). The sound transmission holes 24a and 24b are located on the back sides of the respective speakers 35a and 35b (the speaker 35a is omitted in FIG. 2) mounted inside the cabinet G. is transmitted toward the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

In this embodiment, an upper door mechanism UD and a lower door mechanism DD are provided in correspondence with the fact that the inside of the cabinet G is divided into an upper space and a lower space. As long as it can be opened and closed, it can be configured as a single door mechanism, or it can be configured as three or more door mechanisms. Moreover, it can also be configured as a double door mechanism (for example, an outer door and an inner door) in the front-rear direction. Further, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD can be simply referred to as "doors" or "doors", and since they function as members capable of opening and closing the opening in the cabinet G, they can be referred to as "opening/closing members" or "doors." It can also be called a "member", or a "door member" or the like.

[1-1-3. Fluctuation display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a main display window 4. As shown in FIG. When the start lever 7 is operated (when the player performs a start operation), the reels 3L, 3C and 3R start rotating by driving and controlling stepping motors 51L, 51C and 51R, which will be described later. As a result, the pattern displayed on the main display window 4 is displayed in a variable manner. When the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R are operated (when the player performs a stop operation), stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, which will be described later, are driven and controlled for the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. to stop each rotation. As a result, the symbols displayed in the main display window 4 are stopped and displayed.

That is, each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the main display window 4 has a variable display section (means) capable of variably displaying (and stopping) a plurality of symbols in a plurality of rows, or a variable displaying (and stopping) display of a plurality of symbols. ) constitute a possible plurality of variable display units (means). The variable display section (means) can also be referred to as a "symbol display section (means)" or a "variable display section (means)". The pattern can also be referred to as a "picture" or "pattern", or as long as it is information visually identifiable by the player, it can also be referred to as "identification information" in that sense.

Further, the main display window 4 is constructed so that when the rotation of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, three symbols arranged consecutively are displayed within the frame. That is, the main display window 4 displays one pattern (three in total) in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions of each column (the frame of the main display window 4 displays 3 rows x 3 columns). The pattern is displayed in the form of ). Note that the main display window 4 is sometimes referred to as a "design display area", a "window", or the like.

A valid line is defined in the main display window 4 . The effective line is a line for determining whether or not a prescribed combination of symbols is displayed when symbols of all rows are stopped and displayed in response to a player's stop operation. In that sense, the activated line can also be referred to as a "win line" or a "decision line". Also, the effective line is configured as a line connecting any of the regions of each column. That is, when the main display window 4 is configured to display patterns in the form of 3 rows×3 columns, it is possible to define a maximum of 27 effective lines. However, in practice, one or more of the lines can be defined as valid lines, and the other lines can be defined as invalid lines that are not valid lines.

For example, the line connecting the middle area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the middle area of the reel 3R is the "center line", the upper area of the reel 3L, the upper area of the reel 3C, and the upper area of the reel 3R. The connecting line is the "top line", the line connecting the lower area of the reel 3L, the lower area of the reel 3C, and the lower area of the reel 3R is the "bottom line", the lower area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the reel 3R. A line connecting the upper area is called a "cross-up line", and a line connecting the upper area of the reel 3L, the middle area of the reel 3C, and the lower area of the reel 3R is called a "cross-down line". One or more of these lines are often defined as effective lines because they are lines that connect each area in a straight line. However, as described above, a so-called irregular line that connects each region of each column with a polygonal line can also be defined as an effective line.

In addition, in order for the activated line to be activated, it is necessary to bet the required amount of medals for the current game (the number of medals that can be used to start the game) prior to the player's start operation. The number of activated lines to be converted may be the same regardless of the number of bets, or may vary according to the number of bets. For example, assuming that the above-mentioned three lines of "center line", "top line", and "bottom line" are defined as active lines, in the case of the former, the number of bets is any of 1 to 3. Even if the 'center line', 'top line', and 'bottom line' are enabled. On the other hand, in the latter case, if the number of bets is 1, only "center line" is activated, and if the number of bets is 2, "center line" and "top line" are activated, and the number of bets is 3. If (maximum number of bets), "center line", "top line" and "bottom line" are enabled.

In this embodiment, the variable display section has three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and a main display window 4 capable of displaying three symbols in each column. Although the symbols are displayed in the form of columns, the pattern display form in the variable display section is not limited to this. For example, the number of reels is set to 1, 2, or 4 or more, and, for example, the number of symbols displayed in each row is set to 1, 2, or 4 or more. You can also display the pattern with . In this case, the number of valid lines that can be defined also increases or decreases as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display section variably displays the symbols by rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but the configuration of the variable display section is not limited to this. For example, a configuration using an image display device similar to the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220, which will be described later, may be used, or a configuration using other display devices (eg, organic EL, 7-segment LED, etc.) may be used. . Also, for example, a configuration using other physical devices (for example, a belt or the like) may be used. Also, the arrangement, size, etc. of the variable display section can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display section functions as a main side display section that is directly related to the game and is controlled by the main control circuit 100, which will be described later. A variable display section may be provided as a sub-side display section related to an effect not directly related to the game, which is controlled by the game. Note that the sub-side display section can be configured using the main display device 210 and the sub-display device 220, for example. That is, a variable display unit that variably displays symbols in accordance with a player's start operation (or other start conditions are met), and stops and displays symbols in response to a player's stop operation (or other stop conditions are met). As such, not only the main side display section but also the sub side display section may be provided. In this case, in order to allow the player to identify whether or not the variable display section is directly related to the game, characters such as "pachislot" or "main reel" are displayed near the main side display section. It is sufficient that an identification mark indicating is attached so that it is possible to identify that the variable display portion is the main side display portion. Note that such an identification display may be displayed on the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 .

[1-1-4. Medal slot]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal slot 5 for receiving medals inserted into the pachi-slot machine 1 from the outside by the player. Note that the medal slot 5 and a selector 31, which will be described later, have the function of betting the number of medals required for one game, like the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b. , for example, can be rephrased as a bet operation. Therefore, it can be said that the medal slot 5 is a betting operation detection unit (means) capable of detecting the player's betting operation. The shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal slot can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the game value that is used in the game or given according to the game result, medals are used as game media. It is not limited to this. For example, coins, game balls, game point data or tokens, etc. may be used. Also, the game value can be simply referred to as "value" or "game value".

[1-1-5. Operation part]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following operation units as operation units that can be operated by the player. It should be noted that each operation unit shown below is merely an example, and may be configured to include an operation unit different from these, or may be configured not to include an operation unit that is not necessarily essential among these. .

[1-1-5-1. bet button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b for receiving a player's bet operation for using medals deposited (credited) therein. Also, such a bet operation is detected by a bet switch 6S, which will be described later. Therefore, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, and the bet switch 6S constitute a bet operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the player's bet operation. Note that the bet button only needs to be able to detect the player's betting operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, although the MAX bet button 6a and the 1-bet button 6b are provided in this embodiment, only the MAX bet button 6a may be provided without providing the 1-bet button 6b. Also, a 2-bet button for betting two medals may be provided separately.

[1-1-5-2. start lever]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a start lever 7 for receiving a player's start operation for starting a game. Also, such a start operation is detected by a start switch 7S, which will be described later. Therefore, the start lever 7 and the start switch 7S constitute a start operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the player's start operation. It should be noted that the start lever only needs to be able to detect the player's start operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-3. stop button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R which are provided corresponding to the respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R and which receive a player's stop operation for stopping the respective rotations. Moreover, such a stop operation is detected by a stop switch 8S, which will be described later. Therefore, the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and the stop switch 8S constitute a stop operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the player's stop operation. It should be noted that the stop button only needs to be able to detect the player's stop operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-4. Settlement button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the checkout button 9 for accepting the player's checkout operation (return operation) for returning (checkout) credited medals. Further, such a settlement operation is detected by a settlement switch 9S, which will be described later. Therefore, the checkout button 9 and the checkout switch 9S constitute a checkout operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the checkout operation of the player. It should be noted that the checkout button only needs to be able to detect the checkout operation of the player, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-5-5. production button]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with effect buttons 10a and 10b for receiving the player's effect operations. Incidentally, such an effect operation is detected by a detection switch (not shown) provided corresponding to each effect button. Therefore, the effect buttons 10a and 10b and the detection switch constitute a effect operation detection section (means) capable of detecting the effect operation of the player. It should be noted that the effect button only needs to be able to detect the player's effect operation, and its shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. In addition, in this embodiment, two production buttons 10a and 10b are provided, but it is possible to configure without providing either of them, or to provide only one of them. can. Also, it can be configured to provide three or more production buttons.

The main uses of the production buttons are to change the production mode when executing a specific production (for example, an operation-linked production described later), and to perform a selection/decision operation in the user menu described later. Therefore, it is also possible to configure so as to provide a presentation button according to the application. For example, for the former purpose, the production buttons 10a and 10b are used, and for the latter purpose, the above-described touch panel may be used. For use in the latter application, a jog dial, a cross key, or the like that can accept selection/decision operations can be provided as separate effect buttons.

[1-1-6. medal outlet]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has the medal payout port 11 for discharging medals paid out (or returned) from inside the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside. When a prize is won and medals are paid out, the medal payout port 11 gives the player the medals paid out from the hopper device 32, which will be described later. It can be said that it is part of the means. Also, the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal payout port can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-1-7. Medal tray]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the medal receiving tray 12 for storing medals paid out from the medal payout port 11 . That is, the medal receiving tray 12 constitutes a storage section (means) capable of storing the given game value. Note that the shape, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal receiving tray can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-1-8. waist panel]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, a decorative panel on which model information is drawn and a waist panel 13 composed of a waist lamp for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side. The waist panel 13 basically indicates to the player what kind of model the pachislot machine 1 is. can also be configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing the effect by configuring with an image display device or the like.

[1-1-9. Information display]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with the information display device 14 that displays game-related information by its lighting mode. In other words, the information display device 14 constitutes an information display section (means) capable of displaying information about games.

The information display device 14 includes, for example, an insert lamp, a start lamp, a replay lamp, a bet number lamp, a credit lamp, a payout number lamp, an instruction monitor, a limit lamp, and the like.

The insert lamp lights up to indicate that medals can be inserted. The start lamp indicates that the game can be started by operating the start lever 7 by turning on the start lamp. The replay lamp lights to indicate that medals have been automatically inserted due to the operation of the replay. The bet number lamp lights up to display the number of medals bet. The credit lamp displays the number of credited medals according to its lighting mode. The number-of-payouts lamp displays the number of medals (number of payouts) paid out according to the game result by its lighting mode.

Further, the instruction monitor includes a notification lamp (stop operation display section) and a section lamp (state display section). The notification lamp lights up in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified under a situation (for example, AT state) in which the information of the stop operation is notified to the player, so that the information of the stop operation is displayed. display. It should be noted that the "mode uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation to be notified" is, for example, the pressing order (in the present embodiment, this may be described as the "batting order"), the 1st (the first stop operation is In the case of announcing "2nd (perform the first stop operation to the reel 3C)", the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor. displays the numerical value "2" on the instruction monitor, and displays the numerical value "3" on the instruction monitor when notifying the pushing order "3rd (performing the first stop operation to the reel 3R)". It's about. Note that the notification lamp may not necessarily be provided separately from the credit lamp and the payout number lamp. For example, either a credit lamp or a payout lamp may be used to display stop operation information.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in a situation where the information of the stop operation is notified to the player, the sub-side notification means (for example, the main effect display section 21) controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, which will be described later. In addition, the information of the stop operation is notified also by the instruction monitor as the main side notification means controlled by the main control circuit 100 which will be described later. The manner of notification by the main-side notification means and the manner of notification by the sub-side notification means may be different from each other. That is, the main-side notification means may perform notification in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the information on the stop operation to be notified, and does not necessarily need to directly notify the information on the stop operation. For example, in the case of announcing the pressing order "1st", even if the indication monitor displays the numerical value "1", there is a possibility that the content of the notification cannot be specified depending on the player. On the other hand, the sub-side notification means may directly notify the information of the stop operation. For example, when informing the pressing order "1st", the main effect display section 21 may directly inform the instruction information for performing the first stop operation on the reel 3L.

In addition, the section lamp indicates that the current state is in an advantageous section, which will be described later, by turning on. For example, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section described later to an advantageous section, the section lamp lights up at an arbitrary timing until the game in the advantageous section starts, and the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. , the lights are turned off at an arbitrary timing until the game in the non-advantageous section is started. Note that the lighting timing of the section lamp is not limited to this. For example, when the production section (normal advantageous section) described later in the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section first shifts to the increased section (AT state) described later in the advantageous section, any time until the game in the increased section is started It is good also as what lights up at timing. That is, the section lamp may indicate that it is in an advantageous section regardless of whether it is a production section or an increase section, or at least the advantageous section including this from the start of the first increase section It may be one that informs the period until the end of.

In addition, the limit lamp indicates that the limit processing described later has been executed or the possibility thereof, depending on its lighting mode. For example, when the limit process is executed, the lighting informs the player that a state advantageous to the player (for example, the AT state) has been forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. In addition, for example, when the execution of the limit process is near, by blinking, it is reported that there is a high possibility that the advantageous state will be forcibly terminated by the execution of the limit process. In addition to these, other information related to the limit processing can be appropriately notified by providing a trigger for lighting, blinking, or extinguishing.

[1-1-10. Effect display section]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes the main effect display section 21 and the sub-effect display section 22 that display effect images. The main effect display portion 21 and the sub effect display portion 22 constitute a effect display portion (means) capable of performing effect display. Also, it is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing a visual effect for the player.

The main effect display unit 21 includes a main display device 210 that displays effects through the effect display window UD1. Also, the main display device 210 is configured as a display unit A that is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 inside the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device having an irradiation unit B that emits irradiation light for image display and a screen device C that makes an image appear by being irradiated with the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B. In the present embodiment, by configuring the main display device 210 in this way, it is possible to display an advanced and powerful effect, but the configuration of the main display device 210 is not limited to this. In other words, it is only necessary to be able to execute a visual effect for the player, and it can be configured as an image display device such as a liquid crystal display device or an organic EL device, a display device such as a 7-segment LED device, or a sub-reel device. It can also be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Moreover, from such a point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. In addition, if the pachi-slot machine 1 is, for example, a type of game mainly focused on entertaining players with so-called winning numbers, the main effect display section 21 may not be provided (the sub-effect display section 22 as well).

The sub effect display section 22 is configured including a sub display device 220 . Also, the sub-display device 220 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. The sub-display device 220 can also be configured as another image display device or display device like the main display device 210, or can be configured as a variable display device or a dot display device. Moreover, from such a point of view, the shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate. In addition, since the main effect display section 21 is composed of a large screen, it mainly displays effects closely related to the current game such as notification of pressing order, notification of winning, continuous effects, etc., and a sub-effect display section. 22 is composed of a small screen, it is possible to divide the display content according to the purpose, such as mainly displaying effects that are not so closely related to the current game, such as game history. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the main effect display portion 21 and the sub effect display portion 22 are provided. It is also possible to configure so as to provide only one of them. Moreover, it is also possible to configure so as to provide three or more effect display sections.

[1-1-11. lamp]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1, like the upper lamp 23 given as an example, includes its light emission mode (lighting, blinking, or light-off, as well as its brightness and emission color when configured as a full-color LED). ), one or more lamps (light emitting means) are provided. Further, such a light emitting means is configured as one of the effect executing means capable of executing a visual effect for the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

Other lamps included in lamps and LEDs to be described later include, for example, side lamps provided on both side end surfaces of the upper door mechanism UD and both side end surfaces of the lower door mechanism DD, and operation units provided in each operation unit. A lamp etc. can be mentioned. The latter includes a function to notify the player whether or not each operation unit can be operated. , can be controlled to emit light according to a unique lighting mode.

[1-1-12. speaker]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 includes speakers 35a and 35b for outputting sounds such as sound effects and BGM. The speakers 35a and 35b constitute audio output means capable of producing effects by outputting audio. In addition, it is configured as one of the effect execution means capable of executing the effect from an auditory point of view for the player. From this point of view, the number, shape, arrangement, size, and the like can be changed as appropriate.

[1-1-13. Other production equipment]
Incidentally, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with an effect device other than the various effect devices (effect execution means) described above. For example, it is possible to provide effects such as a movable production device such as a so-called accessory, a vibration production device that produces production by vibration, or an air production device that produces production by injecting air. That is, an effect device capable of executing an effect that can appeal to any of the player's five senses (visual, auditory, tactile, taste, and olfactory) (allowing the player to recognize that the effect is being performed) Either of them can be used. Therefore, in the present embodiment, unless otherwise specified, "executing a production" means that one or more of the various production devices (production execution means) described above is used to produce a production. indicates that it is permissible to execute

[1-2. Internal structure]
[1-2-1. selector]
The selector 31 (not numbered in FIG. 2) is a downstream passage for medals inserted from the medal slot 5, and is provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD. The selector 31 has, for example, a medal sensor 31S, which will be described later, and a sorting device.

The medal sensor 31S detects medals inserted from the medal slot 5 and determines whether or not the detected medals are appropriate medals. When the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is an appropriate medal, and the medal can be accepted, the sorting device sends the medal to the hopper device 32, which will be described later. It is driven and controlled so as to be guided. In this case, 1 is added to the number of bets or the number of credits. On the other hand, when the medal sensor 31S determines that the detected medal is not an appropriate medal, or when the medal is not ready to be accepted, the sorting device passes the medal through the cancel chute to the medal payout opening 11. is driven and controlled to be returned from A selector error occurs when an abnormality occurs in medal detection by the medal sensor 31S. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal jam).

That is, the selector 31 constitutes a game medium detection unit (means) capable of detecting the inserted game medium. In addition, the selector 31 constitutes a judgment means capable of judging whether or not the inserted game medium is proper. Further, the selector 31 constitutes a sorting means for storing inside when the inserted game media are correct, and discharging them to the outside when the inserted game media are not correct. Also, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the selector 31 can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-2. Hopper device]
The hopper device 32 is provided in the lower space inside the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The hopper device 32 includes, for example, a bucket section for storing medals inserted from the medal slot 5 and guided by the selector 31, and a bottom section of the bucket section for agitating the medals stored in the bucket section. It has a disc portion that guides the medals to the discharge portion one by one, a discharge portion that discharges the medals guided by the disc portion one by one, and a count sensor that counts the medals discharged from the discharge portion.

The bucket section is configured to be able to store a fixed number of medals. Medals exceeding a certain number are guided to a medal auxiliary storage box 33, which will be described later, through a guide passage provided on the upper surface side. A hopper empty error occurs when the medals stored in the bucket become empty. In this case, after replenishing medals, the error state is released when the reset operation is performed.

The disc portion has a plurality of medal-shaped cutouts radially formed from the center, and the central shaft is rotated according to a drive signal to guide the medals fitted in the cutouts to the discharge portion one by one. Note that the medals stored in the bucket section are agitated by the rotation of the disk section. Also, when an abnormality occurs in the rotation of the disk portion, a hopper jam error occurs. In this case, the error state is canceled when the reset operation is performed after eliminating the cause of the abnormality (for example, medal jam).

The count sensor detects the medals discharged from the discharge section and counts the number of medals. For example, when one medal is to be paid out, the disk portion starts rotating, and then the disk portion stops rotating when the count sensor counts one medal payout. In this manner, an appropriate number of medals are paid out.

That is, the hopper device 32 constitutes a game medium payout section (means) capable of paying out game media. Also, as described above, it can be said that it is a part of privilege giving means for giving a privilege to the player. Also, the configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the hopper device 32 can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-3. Auxiliary storage for medals]
The medal auxiliary storage box 33 is provided in the lower space inside the cabinet G. The medal auxiliary storage box 33 is, for example, a storage unit for storing medals guided from the bucket unit of the hopper device 32, and a medal auxiliary storage unit provided near the storage unit for detecting the capacity of the medals stored in the storage unit. It has a storage switch 33S.

The storage section is configured to be able to store a certain number of medals. When it is determined by the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S that the predetermined number or more of medals have been stored, an auxiliary medal storage error occurs. In this case, the error state is released when the reset operation is performed after reducing the number of medals stored in the storage section to at least less than a certain number.

That is, the auxiliary medal storage box 33 constitutes a surplus game medium storage section (means) capable of storing surplus game media. The configuration, arrangement, size, etc. of the medal auxiliary storage box 33 can be changed as appropriate. Also, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine, which will be described later, this configuration is not necessarily essential.

[1-2-4. power supply]
The power supply device 34 is provided in the lower space inside the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The power supply device 34 has, for example, a power board 34a and a power switch 34b, and supplies power to the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power switch 34b is turned on. The power supply device 34 converts AC voltage power of 100 V supplied from a power cable (not shown) into power of DC voltage required for each part, and supplies the converted power to each part. do. That is, the power supply device 34 constitutes a power supply unit (means) capable of supplying necessary power to the gaming machine. Note that the configuration, arrangement, size, and the like of the power supply device 34 can be changed as appropriate.

In this embodiment, the setting key-type switch 52 and the reset switch 53, which will be described later, are provided on the main control board 71 (more specifically, on the main control board case, which will be described later). A switch can also be configured to be provided on the power supply 34 .

[1-2-5. substrate]
The pachi-slot machine 1 includes, for example, the following boards as boards required for various controls. Note that each substrate shown below is merely an example, and a configuration in which substrates different from these are provided may be employed, or a configuration in which non-essential substrates among these are not necessarily provided may be employed.

[1-2-5-1. Main control board]
The main control board 71 is mounted inside the cabinet G on the rear side of the reel unit RU. In addition, the main control board 71 is a game control board that performs control related to the game. are housed in The electrical configuration of the main control board 71 will be described later.

There are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, and basically various electronic components are DIP-mounted. implemented). Also, in this case, a test point may be provided for checking the operation using a tester or an oscilloscope. In addition, small electronic parts not exceeding 6 mm square may be used for some or all of the various electronic parts. Moreover, the board surface of the main control board 71 may be configured to have multiple layers.

[1-2-5-2. Sub control board]
The sub-control board 72 is mounted inside the cabinet G on the back side of the intermediate support plate G1. In addition, the sub-control board 72 is an effect control board that controls effects, and is housed in a sub-control board case (not shown) made of resin. The sub control board case can be configured as a transparent (or substantially transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case, or can be made of other materials that are opaque (or substantially opaque). can also be configured as a case using The electrical configuration of the sub control board 72 will be described later.

[1-2-5-3. Other substrates]
(main relay board)
The main relay board 73 (reference numerals omitted in FIG. 2) is attached to a specific position (for example, the back side of the lower door mechanism DD) in the cabinet G, and various devices connected to the main relay board 73 and the main control board 73 are connected to the main relay board 73. It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the board 71 and between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 . Note that the main relay board 73 is configured as a board separate from the main control board 71 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency. A configuration in which the main relay board 73 is not provided can also be adopted. From this point of view, the main relay board 73 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of substrates may be provided as the main relay substrate.

(Secondary relay board)
The sub-relay board 74 is mounted at a specific position in the cabinet G (for example, on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD), between various devices connected to the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72, and It is an intermediate control board for relaying between the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 . The sub-relay board 74 is configured as a board separate from the sub-control board 72 for convenience of control efficiency and wiring efficiency. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the sub-relay substrate 74 is not provided while the sub-relay substrate 74 is provided. From this point of view, the sub relay board 74 may be further divided into a plurality of relay boards to improve control efficiency and wiring efficiency. That is, a plurality of substrates may be provided as sub-relay substrates.

(External collective terminal board)
The external centralized terminal plate 55 is attached at a specific position (for example, the back side of the lower space) in the cabinet G, and receives signals such as medal insertion signals, medal payout signals, external signals 1 to 4, and security signals. Output to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. The output start conditions and output end conditions of the external signals 1 to 4 can be appropriately set, and the transition of the internal state of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, bonus state or AT state) can be externally controlled according to the game characteristics. Allows you to report. Since the external centralized terminal board 55 is normally connected to an external data display device or a hall computer, these devices can be used not only for inserting/paying out medals and error occurrences in the pachi-slot machine 1, but also for detecting errors. , such internal state transition situations are recognizable.

(Interface board for testing machine)
The first interface board for testing machine 301 and the second interface board for testing machine 302 are both relay boards used for outputting various game-related signals to the testing machine in the certification test (trial test) of the pachi-slot machine 1. (In addition, since these relay boards are not mounted on the pachi-slot machine 1 as a released product for sale, the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for testing machine and the second interface board 301 for testing machine. Various electronic components required to connect to the interface board 302 are also not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling the main operations related to the game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via the tester first interface board 301, and is determined by the main control board 71. The test signal or the like related to the push order navigation thus obtained is output via the second interface board 302 for testing machine.

[2. Electrical Configuration of Pachislot Machine]
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71, a sub-control board 72, a main relay board 73, and a sub-relay board 74. The main control board 71 and the main relay board 73, the main relay board 73 and the sub-relay board 74, and the sub-relay board 74 and the sub-control board 72 are electrically connected. In addition, the main control board 71 and the sub control board 72 are electrically connected via the main relay board 73 and the sub relay board 74 so that one-way serial communication from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72 is possible. properly connected.

The main control circuit board 71 is mounted with a main control circuit 100 as a game control unit that controls games. The main control circuit 100 includes, for example, a main CPU 101, a main ROM 102, a main RAM 103, a clock pulse generation circuit (not shown), a random number circuit (not shown), and the like. The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control instructions (commands) to the sub control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program. The clock pulse generation circuit generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU 101 . The random number circuit generates random numbers within a predetermined range (eg, 0-65535 or 0-255, etc.). The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse signal. Also, one or more values are extracted as random numbers from the generated random numbers as needed. In this way, control relating to game operations in general is performed.

A sub-control circuit 200 is mounted on the sub-control board 72 as a production control unit that controls production. The sub-control circuit 200 includes, for example, a sub-CPU 201, a sub-RAM 203, and the like. A ROM cartridge board 202 is connected to the sub control board 72 . The ROM cartridge substrate 202 contains various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, various data tables, various effect data (for example, video data and drive data for the main display device 210, video data for the sub display device 220, lamp/ lamp data related to the LED group, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.) are stored. The sub-RAM 203 has a storage area for registering performance contents and various performance data determined by executing the control program, a storage area for storing data related to various control instructions (commands) transmitted from the main control board 71, and the like. be provided. In addition, the random number value for the effect related to the effect may be generated and extracted within the sub CPU 201 from a predetermined range of random numbers (for example, 0 to 32767, etc.), or the main control The generation and extraction may be performed by providing a random number circuit similar to the circuit 100 . Alternatively, a sub ROM may be included in the sub control circuit 200 instead of the ROM cartridge board 202, and various control programs may be stored in the sub ROM. Further, the ROM cartridge board 202 may store various performance data, and the sub ROM in the sub control circuit 200 may store various control programs and various data tables. In addition, the sub-control circuit 200 includes an image-dedicated microprocessor such as a GPU (for example, also referred to as "VDP"). may be configured to generate (edit) the

The main control board 71 includes stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, a setting key switch 52, a reset switch 53, a role ratio monitor device 54, an external collective terminal plate 55, a hopper device 32, an auxiliary medal storage switch 33S, and a power supply. Device 34 is electrically connected. In addition, the main control board 71 has a door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, a medal sensor 31S, a bet switch 6S, a start switch 7S, a stop switch 8S, an adjustment switch 9S, and an information display device 14 through the main relay board 73. It is connected to the. If the tester first interface board 301 and the tester second interface board 302 are mounted, they are electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the main relay board 73, for example.

In addition, the external collective terminal plate 55, the hopper device 32, the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S, the power supply device 34, the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, the stop switch 8S, the settlement switch 9S, the information display device 14, and the testing machine. Since the first interface board 301 for the tester and the second interface board 302 for the tester have already been described, description thereof will be omitted here.

Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is connected to each reel 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio, and is driven to rotate and stop each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Since each reel 3L, 3C, 3R rotates at a constant angle each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R, the main CPU 101 controls each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R. The number of times pulses are output to 51C and 51R is counted, and the symbol positions of the respective reels 3L, 3C and 3R are managed based on this count result. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is provided with a reel index (not shown) that determines an initial position for such management, and an index sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the reel index. .

The setting key-type switch 52 is used when changing the setting values of the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, setting 1 to setting 6 in six stages) (setting change), or when checking the setting of the pachi-slot machine 1 (setting confirmation). used for Here, the set value indicates the degree of the player's advantage in the game, and normally, the lower the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 1) the relatively the degree of the player's advantage. The higher the set value (for example, closer to setting 6), the higher the player's degree of advantage. The setting key-type switch 52 is turned on when, for example, the manager of the amusement arcade inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it to the left from the initial position, and returns it to the initial position after turning it to the left. and turn off. When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned off, the settings can be changed by turning on the setting key-type switch 52 and then turning on the power. When the key-shaped switch 52 is turned on, the setting can be confirmed.

The reset switch 53 is capable of detecting a reset operation by an administrator on the amusement arcade side. A reset operation is an operation for canceling various error states. In addition, the reset switch 53 can detect a setting value decision operation by the manager of the game parlor in a state in which the setting can be changed. When the reset switch 53 is operated in a state in which the setting can be changed, the setting value is incremented by 1 each time it is operated (when reaching setting 6, the setting returns to setting 1). In this manner, setting value determination operation can be performed. Further, the set value determined in this manner is fixed when the start lever 7 is operated once thereafter. That is, the start switch 7S is capable of detecting setting value confirmation operation by the manager of the game parlor. In this way, when the setting is to be changed, the setting key-type switch 52 is turned on, the reset switch 53 is operated to select a set value, and the start lever 7 is operated to confirm the selected set value. After that, it is necessary to perform a setting change operation such as turning off the setting key-type switch 52 . It should be noted that this is an example of the setting change operation, and the configuration can be such that the setting can be changed by another operation. Also, when changing settings or confirming settings, for example, the current set value may be displayed in the credit lamp or payout number lamp.

The role ratio monitor device 54 is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and is provided inside the main control board case. The role ratio monitor device 54 sequentially displays various kinds of ratio information related to the game aggregated and calculated by the main CPU 101 . These ratio information are used when the administrator of the gaming parlor confirms whether or not the pachi-slot machine 1 is illegally remodeled. Note that the role ratio monitor device 54 may be mounted on the main control board 71, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a ratio display board) connected to the main control board 71. may Moreover, as long as it is inside the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the main control board case. Also, a management switch for starting the display on the role ratio monitor device 54 or switching the contents thereof may be provided in the cabinet G, and when this switch is operated, the various ratio information described above may be displayed. good. On the premise of using such management switches, for example, the information display device 14 may also be used as the role ratio monitor device 54 . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on or after a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds. The time to be a buffer considering the time required to start up the main control circuit 100 and the sub control circuit 200) after the power is turned on, the role ratio monitor device 54 In order to be able to confirm that the 4-digit 7-segment LED is functioning normally, for example, a test pattern (a pattern in which all seg and decimal LEDs light up) such as "8.8." It is desirable to have a configuration in which the light is lit (or blinked) for a period of time.

In the role ratio monitor device 54, for example, the type of the ratio information is displayed in the upper two digits, and the value (%) indicating the ratio information is displayed in the lower two digits. Here, the various ratio information displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 includes, for example, cumulative specific section ratio information, continuous role ratio information and role ratio information for the most recent 6000 games, and cumulative continuous role ratio information. and role item ratio information.

The specific section ratio information refers to a stop operation that is advantageous to the player among the game sections of the target number of games played (for example, 175,000 games for "total"; 6,000 games for "last 6,000 games"; the same applies hereinafter). Information indicating the ratio of the number of games played in the game section (for example, AT state) (or simply the number of games in the advantageous section may be used) in which the information of . In addition, the continuous role ratio information means that among the number of medals paid out in the game section of the number of games to be played, the first type special role (RB) is in operation It is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out (including during operation of the first class special bonus (RB) in the state where the operating device (BB) is operating). In addition, the accessory ratio information is the number of medals paid out in the game section of the target number of games, the first type special accessory (RB), the second type special accessory (CB), and the normal accessory (SB ) is information indicating the ratio of the number of medals paid out during the operation of the first class special bonus (RB). BB) is in operation and the first class special bonus (RB) is in operation, and the second class special bonus (CB) is in operation It is a concept that includes the operation of the second type special role product (CB) in the state where the role product continuous operation device (MB) is operating.

In addition, the game section (for example, AT state) in which the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is performed is regarded as the operation of the accessory or the operation of the accessory continuous operation device, and in the respective ratio information It can also be subject to aggregation/calculation. That is, the role ratio monitor device 54 may appropriately display the necessary ratio information, and various kinds of ratio information that can be displayed are not limited to these. Also, for example, when displaying continuous accessory ratio information on a model that is not equipped with a first class special accessory (RB), or when displaying specific section ratio information on a model that is not equipped with an advantageous section function (AT function) For models that do not have corresponding numerical information (corresponding information), such as when displaying, the last two digits of the numerical information (% information indicating the ratio) out of the 4-digit 7-segment LED are displayed when the item is displayed. In the 7-segment LED, for example, by lighting up the two vertical bars in the center, such as "--", by performing an identification display for non-compatible information, it is confirmed that the model does not have compatible information. It is desirable to make it recognizable at a glance by a person.

The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. In addition, it may be configured to be provided on the back side of the lower door mechanism DD, or may be configured to be provided on the cabinet G side. Further, the upper door mechanism UD may also be provided with a similar door opening/closing monitoring switch. The door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is turned on when the lower door mechanism DD is opened, and is turned off when the lower door mechanism DD is closed, thereby monitoring the opening/closing of the lower door mechanism DD. A door opening error occurs when the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is turned on. In this case, the error state is canceled when the lower door mechanism DD is closed.

A ROM cartridge board 202 , a main display device 210 and a sub display device 220 are electrically connected to the sub control board 72 . In addition, the sub control board 72, through the sub relay board 74, 24h door monitoring unit 61, production button groups such as production buttons 10a and 10b, lamps and LEDs such as the upper lamp 23, speakers 35a and 35b. etc. are electrically connected.

Since the ROM cartridge board 202, the main display device 210, the sub-display device 220, the effect button group, the lamps/LEDs, and the speaker group have already been described, description thereof will be omitted here.

The 24h door monitoring unit 61, like the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, is provided, for example, on the opening/closing side (right side) of the lower door mechanism DD. The function of monitoring the opening and closing of the lower door mechanism DD is the same as that of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, but by allowing the sub-control circuit 200 to perform such monitoring, the lower door mechanism DD can be monitored even further. The opening/closing history of the door mechanism DD can be saved for a certain period of time. The opening/closing history can be confirmed from the hall menu, which will be described later. Therefore, for example, if there is a history of opening after the manager of the amusement arcade has left outside business hours, or if there is a history of opening and closing for a long period of time during business hours, this may result in fraud. It is possible to recognize that there is a high possibility that the act has been committed.

[3. Function Flow of Pachislot Machine]
Next, a functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the function flow of the pachi-slot machine 1. As shown in FIG.

When the player inserts medals into the pachi-slot machine 1 (performs a bet operation) and operates the start lever 7 (performs a start operation), a random number from a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535) is generated. One random number (in this embodiment, this may be described as an "internal lottery random number") is extracted.

The internal lottery means (the main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process, which will be described later) performs lottery based on the extracted random number value to determine an internal lottery combination. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed on the active line is determined in advance. As for the types of symbol combinations, there are two types of combinations: medal payouts, replay activation, bonus activation, etc. and related items are provided. In addition, a win related to the payout of medals is called a "small win", a win related to replay is called a "replay win", and a win related to the activation of a bonus (bonus state) is called a "bonus win". called. Also, a winning combination that can be internally won (that is, a combination of symbols permitted to be established) is sometimes simply referred to as a "winning combination." Also, the internal winning combination may be referred to as a “winning combination”, a “predetermined result”, or a “derivation permissible condition”. In addition, the internal lottery means may be referred to as a ``winning combination determination means'', a ``winning combination determination means'', a ``prior determination means'', or a ``derivation allowable condition determination means''.

Further, when the start lever 7 is operated (start operation is performed), a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player operates the stop buttons (respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) corresponding to the reels (respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R) (stop operation is performed), reel stop control means (described later) The main CPU 101, which performs reel stop control processing, performs control to stop the rotation of the relevant reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing at which the stop button was pressed (or the pressing order thereof). Note that the operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever-shaped one such as the start lever 7, and any operation means can be used as long as the player can perform the start operation. good. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to button-shaped ones such as the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R. It can be a means.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the relevant reel within a specified time (190 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In this embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reels within the specified time is referred to as "the number of sliding symbols". In this embodiment, when the prescribed period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols (maximum number of sliding symbols) is set to four symbols.

When an internal winning combination that permits the display of a winning combination of symbols is determined, the reel stop control means normally displays the combination of symbols on the effective line within a specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed at the top as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means stops the rotation of the reels by using the specified time so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed on the effective line. The symbols displayed when the rotation of the reels is stopped are sometimes referred to as "stop display" or "display result". Further, the display of symbols when the rotation of the reels stops is sometimes referred to as "derivation of stop display" or "derivation of display result".

Further, the reel stop control means automatically stops each reel even if the player does not perform a stop operation when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the reels are rotated. Stop control may be performed. In this case, since the reels are stopped without intervention of the player's stop operation, even if any internal winning combination is determined, any winning symbol combination is valid. It is desirable to stop spinning the reels so that they are not displayed along the line.

In this way, when all of the plurality of reels stop rotating, the winning determination means (the main CPU 101 that performs a winning operation determination process, which will be described later) determines that the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line is a winning combination. (or other predetermined ones) is determined. That is, it is determined whether or not a winning combination of symbols (or other predetermined combination of symbols) has been established. Then, the combination of the displayed symbols is the one related to the winning (or other predetermined combination) by the winning determination means (that is, the combination of the symbols related to the winning (or other predetermined combination of symbols) ) is established), a privilege such as payout of medals is given to the player, or various controls are performed with this as a trigger. In the pachi-slot machine 1, as an example, a series of the above-described flow is performed as one game (unit game).

Note that the winning judgment means judges whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line corresponds to any combination of symbols among a plurality of predetermined combinations of symbols. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponds to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means. That is, in the former, it may be determined whether or not there is a winning combination of symbols separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the stop control is appropriately performed by the reel stop control means, it is possible to sufficiently ensure the prevention of the occurrence of false winnings, so it is possible to reduce the control load related to false winning detection. On the other hand, in the latter, by making it possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to winning is a combination of symbols for which winning was permitted, even if an erroneous winning occurs due to a problem with the reels, etc. can be detected, security can be improved.

In addition, in pachislot, in the flow of the series of game operations described above, images are displayed by the display device (for example, the main display device 210, the sub display device 220, etc.), various lamps (for example, the upper lamp 23, etc.) , sound output by speakers (for example, speakers 35a, 35b, etc.), or a combination of these, various effects are performed. That is, these are the effect executing means for executing the effect. The content of the effect executed by the effect executing means may be determined on the main control circuit 100 side (main side) or may be determined on the sub control circuit 200 side (sub side). That is, any one of them can be the effect content determining means.

For example, when the start lever 7 is operated (a start operation is performed), a random number for effect is extracted in addition to the random number for internal lottery. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means selects the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery (or according to predetermined determination conditions). decide.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect executing means performs a corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reels start rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not a prize is awarded. to run. In this way, in the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination, the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be targeted, the pressing order to be operated, etc.) The player is provided with an opportunity to know or anticipate what is possible, and the interest of the player can be enhanced.

[4. Basic specifications related to playability of pachislot machines]
Next, the basic specifications of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be explained.

[4-1. Pattern arrangement]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed such that a game is played by displaying a plurality of symbols variably and statically. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured so as to be able to grasp which symbol is arranged at which position on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For this reason, the main ROM 102 stores at least data for identifying the type of symbol at each symbol position on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As long as such a purpose can be achieved, various data configurations can be adopted, and in this embodiment, as an example thereof, a pattern arrangement table (see FIG. 9), which will be described later, is used.

The symbol arrangement table defines symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19") indicating each symbol position in the rotation direction of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. Further, data (for example, a pattern code) for specifying the type of pattern is associated with each pattern position data. Further, in the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the main display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as "0". It should be noted that the number of symbols in each row, the number of types of symbols, the maximum number of sliding symbols, etc. can be appropriately changed and stipulated.

[4-2. Pattern combination]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that the combination of displayed symbols affects the game result. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 gives various benefits, shifts the current state to a relatively advantageous state, or shifts the current state to a relatively disadvantageous state according to the combination of displayed symbols. It makes it possible to migrate. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such a combination of symbols. Therefore, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a combination of symbols. As long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration. ing.

The symbol combination table defines data (for example, "display combination" or "winning operation flag") indicating the type of combination of a plurality of predetermined symbols among the combinations of symbols that can be displayed on the activated line. ing. It should be noted that the symbols forming each combination of symbols can be specified using, for example, the above-described symbol code or the like. In addition, data indicating the type of privilege (for example, "payout etc.") is associated with each combination of symbols. The symbol combination table basically has a data structure corresponding to a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 17), which will be described later. It should be noted that the number of types of combinations of symbols, the content of benefits to be provided, and the like can be appropriately changed and stipulated.

[4-3. Internal winning role]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed such that which combination of symbols is allowed to be displayed (determined in advance) affects the game result. That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 determines the internal winning combination (that is, the type of combination of symbols that can be displayed (or the type of privilege that can be given)) prior to the player's stop operation (in advance). It is possible. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 must be configured to be able to grasp such internal winning combinations. Therefore, data for specifying such an internal winning combination is defined in the main ROM 102 . As long as this purpose is achieved, various data configurations can be employed. In this embodiment, an internal lottery table (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is used as an example.

The internal lottery table contains data indicating the types of a plurality of predetermined internal winning combinations (for example, "No." or "winning number"), and lottery values for determining each internal winning combination in each gaming state. is defined. Note that the lottery value may also vary depending on the set value. Also, each internal winning combination is associated with a type of symbol combination permitted (corresponding) to be displayed. In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to associate a plurality of symbol combinations with one internal winning combination. When such an internal winning combination is determined, which symbol combination is displayed? is determined by stop control.

Here, for example, in the later-described internal lottery process (see FIG. 26; more specifically, the internal winning combination determination process in S64) of the present embodiment, first, a numerical range predetermined by a random number circuit (for example, 0 65535) is sequentially added and updated with a lottery value defined for each internal winning combination. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value+random number) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, in a predetermined internal winning combination, when the result of the determination exceeds 65535, the internal winning combination is won (the internal winning combination is determined). However, if none of the internal winning combinations exceeds 65535 even after the determination is performed for all the internal winning combinations, the internal winning combination in the current game is "lost". Note that this is just an example of internal lottery processing, and various methods can be employed for the lottery processing as long as an appropriate lottery is performed according to the lottery value (winning probability). For example, the extracted random numbers are sequentially subtracted and updated with the lottery values specified for each internal winning combination, and then whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than 0 (lottery result underflows). or not) to determine an internal winning combination.

In this way, in the internal lottery table, the probability (winning probability) of an internal winning combination having a larger defined lottery value is higher. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be represented by "the lottery value defined for each winning number/the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

[4-4. stop control]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, among the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed by the determination of the internal winning combination, which combination of symbols is finally displayed by the player's stop operation is the game result. It is a specification that affects the That is, the pachi-slot machine 1 finally displays not only the type of the determined internal winning combination, but also the player's stop operation timing and pressing order (also referred to as "stop operation mode" or "stop operation procedure"). It is possible to perform control (stop control) to vary (determine) the type of combination of symbols to be played. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to be configured to be able to grasp in what manner the stop control is to be performed for each internal winning combination according to the player's stop operation manner. For this reason, the main ROM 102 defines data for specifying such a mode of stop control. As long as such a purpose is achieved, various configurations can be adopted for the data configuration. there is

In the stop table, data indicating the amount of symbol movement (for example, "number of sliding symbols") is defined for each symbol position data of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. For example, assume that a predetermined stop table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. At this time, it is assumed that the stop start position (symbol position data in the middle area of the reel 3L when the stop operation is performed) is "0". Assume that the number of sliding symbols defined in the symbol position data "0" is "4" in the predetermined stop table. Then, the main control circuit 100 performs control so that the reel 3L is stopped at the symbol position moved by four symbols (position of symbol position data "4") (predicted stop position becomes "4"). In this way, the stop table defines data (the number of sliding symbols) that enables direct determination of the stop position. Note that such a data configuration is also just an example. Also, performing stop control using such a stop table is generally referred to as "table control".

In the attraction priority table, when there are multiple combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed, data indicating which combination of symbols should be preferentially displayed (whether to attract) (for example, "attraction priority ”) is stipulated. For example, assume that a predetermined attraction priority table is selected in a game in which a predetermined internal winning combination is determined. Here, it is assumed that the predetermined internal winning combination permits the display of the symbol combination A and the symbol combination B, and the predetermined pull-in priority table is such that the symbol combination B is preferentially displayed over the symbol combination A. An order of priority shall be specified. Next, it is assumed that a stop operation is performed on the rotating reel 3L. Assume that the stop start position is "0" at this time.

Then, the main control circuit 100 determines that the symbols constituting the symbol combination A and the symbols constituting the symbol combination B are different for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols (for example, "4") including the stop start position. Search to see if there is If neither pattern is available, the stop position is determined according to a predetermined rule (for example, stop at a closer position, stop at a farther position, etc.). If there are only the symbols constituting the symbol combination A, it is decided to stop at the position corresponding to the symbols. If there are only the symbols constituting the symbol combination B, it is decided to stop at the position corresponding to the symbols. If there are both symbols, the symbol combination B is preferentially displayed over the symbol combination A, so it is decided to stop at the position corresponding to the symbols constituting the symbol combination B. The attraction priority may be stored for all symbol positions during the rotation of the target reel according to the selected attraction priority table, or the target reel may be stopped. Each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols including the stop start position may be stored. Also, such a data configuration is merely an example. Moreover, performing stop control using such a pull-in priority table is generally called "control control."

In this embodiment, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which stop control is executed by performing only "table control", or a configuration in which stop control is executed by performing only "control control". Alternatively, first perform "table control" to tentatively determine the stop position, then perform "control control" to search for a more appropriate stop position, and change the stop position depending on the search results. It can also be configured to execute stop control that enables to

Thus, in the pachi-slot machine 1, which symbol combination is finally displayed on the activated line is determined based on, for example, the following three factors.

The first element is the determined internal winning combination (lottery result of internal lottery processing). For example, if the result of the internal lottery process is "lost", any combination of symbols related to the replay hand, the combination of symbols related to the small hand, or the combination of symbols related to the bonus hand will finally be on the active line. It is never displayed. Note that "lose" can be regarded as one of the internal winning combinations, or can be regarded as a lottery result in which no internal winning combination is determined.

The second factor is the timing of the player's stop operation (the position of the symbol (depression position) when the player operates any of the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 4 symbols, so display is permitted even if one of the internal winning combinations is won as a result of the internal lottery process. If the symbols constituting the combination of symbols are arranged in excess of 4 symbols on the effective line (each effective line if there are more than one), the combination of the relevant symbols depends on the timing of the player's stop operation. may not be displayed. This is so-called "dropping".

The third factor is the player's pressing order (the order in which the player operates the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, there is a case where an internal winning combination associated with a combination of multiple symbols is determined, and in this case, it is finally displayed on the activated line according to the player's pressing order. The combination of symbols to be played may change. Such an internal winning combination is called a "push-order combination", and if it is a replay combination, it is sometimes called a "push-order replay", and if it is a small combination, it is called a "push-order small combination". It is sometimes called

[4-5. game state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to provide various game states as states in which the game is played in order to vary the degree of advantage of the player or to achieve the intended game characteristics. An example of the game state will be described below.

[4-5-1. Bonus state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a bonus combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the effective line, it is possible to shift to the bonus state (activate the bonus state). It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such a bonus state is not provided. Also, by providing a plurality of types of bonus combinations, it is possible to provide a plurality of bonus states. When the bonus combination is won, a state (carry-over state) occurs in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the activated line. Such a bonus combination is sometimes referred to as a "carryover combination". In addition, such carry-over state is sometimes referred to as "between (bonus) flags", "(bonus) inside", and the like.

In the bonus state, it is possible to change the lottery mode (including the winning probability and its contents, or the mode of stop control, etc.; the same shall apply hereinafter) of the minor combination with respect to the state in which the bonus state is not activated (non-bonus state). (Because it is also possible to change the lottery mode of the replay combination, the bonus state can be regarded as one mode of the RT state described later). Therefore, when such a lottery mode becomes a relatively advantageous lottery mode for the player, the bonus state becomes a more advantageous game state than the non-bonus state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode becomes a relatively disadvantageous lottery mode for the player, the bonus state becomes a game state more disadvantageous than the non-bonus state.

As a bonus role, for example, the first class special role (RB), the first class special role continuous operation device (BB), the second kind special role (CB) (but not the carryover role) , Accessory continuous operation device (MB) related to the second type special accessory, and ordinary accessory (SB) (but not carryover role), etc. can be mentioned. Also, for example, the bonus state corresponding to each bonus combination is configured as follows. The RB state is a game state that ends when a predetermined number of winnings (for example, the upper limit is 8 times) or a predetermined number of games (for example, the upper limit is 12 times) are played. Configured. The BB state is configured as a game state in which the game ends when the payout of medals exceeds an arbitrary predetermined payout number (for example, the upper limit is 285).

The CB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game is played. The MB state is configured as a game state that ends when the payout of medals exceeds an arbitrary predetermined payout number (for example, the upper limit is 153), or when RB or SB is won during the MB state. be. The SB state is configured as a game state that ends when one game is played.

Note that the operating condition of the bonus state is not limited to the fact that the combination of symbols for the bonus combination is displayed on the active line. For example, during the operation of the accessory continuous operation device (BB) related to the first class special accessory, at the start of operation of the accessory continuous operation device (BB) related to the first class special accessory, the first type special role It is also possible to configure such that the first class special role (RB) is automatically activated at the start of the game when the object is not in action, or at the end of the operation of the first class special role. That is, it is possible to perform control so that RB is always in operation while BB is in operation without defining the combination of symbols related to RB. Here, the RB during BB operation is sometimes referred to as "JAC" or the like, and such a specification in which the RB during BB operation automatically operates is sometimes referred to as "auto JAC" or the like. Also, during the operation of BB, it is possible to control so that RB is in operation when a specified combination of symbols related to RB is displayed on the activated line. The specification in which the RB operates based on the display of the combination of corresponding symbols is sometimes called "manual JAC" or the like. The same applies to the relationship between the accessory continuous operating device (MB) relating to the second type special accessory and the second type special accessory (CB). That is, without specifying the combination of symbols related to the CB, it is possible to control so that the CB is always in operation during the operation of the MB, and during the operation of the MB, the specified symbols related to the CB It is also possible to control so that the CB is in operation when the combination is displayed on the effective line.

[4-5-2. RT state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to shift to the RT state (activate the RT state) when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an RT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of RT states. The RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay combination can be varied with respect to the state in which the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). Therefore, when such a lottery mode becomes a relatively advantageous lottery mode for the player, the RT state becomes a more advantageous game state than the non-RT state. On the other hand, if such a lottery mode becomes a relatively disadvantageous lottery mode for the player, the RT state becomes a game state more disadvantageous than the non-RT state. Moreover, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to between the plurality of RT states. In this case, the RT state in which the lottery mode of the replay combination (in particular, the winning probability) is relatively advantageous to the player is called a "high RT state" or a "high probability replay state". The RT state in which the aspect (particularly, the winning probability) is relatively disadvantageous to the player is sometimes referred to as "low RT state", "low probability replay state", or the like.

The RT state can be transitioned to, for example, when any of the following transition conditions are satisfied. Moreover, when a plurality of RT states are provided, the same applies to between the plurality of RT states.
(1) When RB, BB or MB is won (2) When a combination of symbols related to RB, BB or MB is displayed (3) When RB state, BB state or MB state ends (4) RB, (5) (3) or (4) when a specific combination of symbols is displayed when BB or MB has not been won (not carried over) and neither RB, BB or MB has been won. When a predetermined number of games have been played after the transition condition is established

[4-5-3. AT state]
The pachi-slot machine 1 is capable of shifting to the AT state (activating the AT state) when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied. It should be noted that it is also possible to configure so that such an AT state is not provided. It can also be configured to provide a plurality of AT states. The AT state is more advantageous than the state in which the AT state is not activated (non-AT state), for example, by informing the player of the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player when the above-described push win is won. It is a game state configured as a state.

In the case of providing multiple AT states, the game period of each AT state (including the ease of extension, etc., if the period can be extended (or "additional"; the same applies hereinafter)), The degree of advantage of the player can be varied by varying the type of the notification target combination for which the stop operation information is notified or the probability of occurrence of the notification of the stop operation information. Also, the conditions for transitioning to the AT state and the conditions for ending the game can be appropriately set according to game characteristics (however, termination due to the execution of limit processing, which will be described later, is excluded). Also, the AT state may be handled in the same way as the bonus state described above, and in this case may be referred to as a "pseudo-bonus state" or the like.

In addition, the AT state game period may be managed by the number of games (number of games played) as long as the period is appropriately managed (game number management). may be managed by (set number management). In addition, it may be managed by the number of payouts or the number of net increase (number of difference) during the AT state (number of payouts management, difference number management). In addition, it may be managed by the number of times (navigation count) that notification (for example, push order navigation at the time of winning a push order minor role) that affects the payout of medals in the AT state is performed (navigation count management). The same applies when the AT state is extended. Also, the game period given when shifting to the AT state and the game period given when the AT state is extended may be managed by different management methods. Moreover, when a plurality of AT states are provided, they may be managed by the same management method, or may be managed by different management methods.

[4-5-4. ART state]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined transition condition is established, it is possible to shift to the ART state (activate the ART state) by combining the high RT state and the AT state described above. That is, since the ART state means the AT state performed in the high RT state, at least the low RT state and the high RT state are provided as the RT state, and the state is shifted to the high RT state (or to the low RT state). Although it is different from the AT state in that control is performed (avoiding transition), the basic control is the same as the AT state (a high RT state as a result of notifying the information of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player). If the transition to the state (or the transition to the low RT state is avoided), it can be said to be synonymous with the AT state). In addition, when the transition condition of the ART state is satisfied, the state may be shifted to the AT state first, and then shifted to the high RT state to shift to the ART state. Alternatively, the high RT state and the AT state may be simultaneously ( Alternatively, the state may be shifted to the ART state by shifting at approximately the same time.

[4-5-5. Other game state]
It should be noted that the pachi-slot machine 1 can be provided with game states other than the various game states described above. For example, each mode (see FIG. 5 and FIG. 6) in an advantageous section to be described later is also a state in which a player plays a game, and is advantageous in determining whether or not to shift to an AT state as a pseudo-bonus state. Since the degree can be changed, these can be regarded as game states. Also, from the same point of view, for example, it is possible to provide a game state in which the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to a bonus state can be varied. For example, when a bonus hand is won (carried over), the game state in which the combination of symbols related to the bonus hand is likely to be displayed by the stop control, and the combination of symbols related to the bonus hand are relative to this. By providing a game state that is difficult to be displayed on the screen, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player. Further, for example, a game state in which a bonus combination is won with a predetermined probability (easy to win) and a game state in which the bonus combination is won with a probability lower than the predetermined probability (relatively difficult to win) are provided. By doing so, it is possible to configure such that the degree of advantage of the player can be varied.

In addition, as a method for changing the degree of advantage of whether or not to shift to the AT state (including whether to extend the game period of the AT state in the AT state, the same applies hereinafter), the following method is adopted. You can also For example, a "special combination" can be determined as an internal winning combination. For the specific combination, the number of medals to be awarded varies depending on the player's stop operation mode (stop operation timing, pressing order, or a combination thereof). (For example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer), 8 coins will be paid out, and if inappropriate (wrong answer), 1 coin will be paid out or no payout will be made).

Then, when the specific combination is won in a specific game state, if 8 coins are paid out, whether or not the advantage degree of whether to shift to the AT state in the current game is changed to an advantageous one. decision (whether or not to directly shift to the AT state, or whether or not to directly extend the game period of the AT state, which will be described as "advantageous decision" hereinafter) is not performed. On the other hand, if there are no payouts of 8 coins, the advantageous decision is made in the current game. Alternatively, if the specific combination is won in the above-described specific game state, and 8 coins are paid out, the advantageous decision is made in the current game. On the other hand, if 8 coins are not paid out, the advantageous decision is not made in the current game.

In this way, when a player plays a game in a specific game method, there are cases where an advantageous decision is made in the current game as a result of the game, and where the advantageous decision is not made (advantageous decision is restricted) It can also be configured so that there is a case where the In addition, the player may change between the current game and the next game, and if such restrictions continue after the next game, the (next) player may suffer a significant disadvantage. Therefore, it is desirable that such restrictions be limited to the current game and not to continue after the next game. Such restrictions are also sometimes referred to as "penalties."

[4-6. Game section]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, in order to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high, it is possible to provide various game intervals as states in which the game is played with a concept different from the game state described above. An example of the game section will be described below. The game section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

(Non-advantageous section)
The non-advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is not possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are only examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly.

(1) It is not possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is not possible to control to the AT state or ART state described above.
(2) When the set value is changed (changed in setting), or when an initialization condition such as "RAM abnormality" described later is met, a non-advantageous interval is set as an initial state.
(3) When the limit process described later is executed in the advantageous interval (that is, a predetermined value updated as the game progresses during the advantageous interval (for example, the advantageous interval game number counter and the advantageous interval payout counter described later) value) reaches a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 sheets), a non-advantageous section is set as an initial state. Note that the predetermined value may be referred to, and if the predetermined value reaches a specific update value even before the predetermined value reaches the specified value, the non-advantageous section may be set on that condition. In addition, if a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the advantageous section and the end is determined (for example, if the configuration is such that a lottery for the end of the advantageous section is performed and the lottery is won, etc.), that condition will be used. A non-advantageous section may be set.
(4) In a non-advantageous section, processing related to an advantageous section (for example, processing for determining whether to transition to an advantageous section) can only refer to the determined internal winning combination. It is not possible to perform processing referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the non-advantageous section (or the advantageous section before transition). To determine which internal winning combination has been determined, it is possible to refer to data directly indicating the internal winning combination, such as the winning number, or sub-flag (multiple roles) generated or converted from the data of the internal winning combination. as one piece of determination target data), it is also possible to indirectly refer to data indicating an internal winning combination.
(5) A non-advantageous section basically has one state, and multiple states cannot be set within the non-advantageous section. For example, it is not possible to set different states such that the non-advantageous section A after the end of the advantageous section is the non-advantageous section A, and the non-advantageous section B is the non-advantageous section after the setting change.

(advantageous section)
The advantageous section is configured as a game period in which it is possible to notify the player of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and has the following requirements. The following requirements are only examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly.

(1) It is possible to notify the player of advantageous stop operation modes (for example, push order navigation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to control to the above-described AT state or ART state.
(2) When the set value is changed (changed in setting), or when an initialization condition such as "RAM abnormality" described later is met, the advantageous section cannot be set as the initial state.
(3) When the limit process described later is executed in an advantageous section, it is necessary to terminate the advantageous section.
(4) In the advantageous section, processing related to the advantageous section (for example, determination processing of whether to shift the game state (mode) during the advantageous section, or whether to extend a specific game state (mode), etc.) , not only processing referring to the determined internal winning combination, but also processing referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the advantageous interval. . Other examples of the various parameters that can be referred to include, for example, privilege information such as points that can be given according to the various parameters described above, the type of bonus state, the type of RT state, and the stop operation timing of one of the reels. , or the order of pressing.
(5) A plurality of states can be set within the advantageous section. For example, it is possible to set a state such as a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a CZ state that easily shifts to the AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of increased medals is positive when a stop operation is performed according to the notification. Further, for example, in response to the decision to shift to the CZ state in the normal state, the CZ precursor may be set as a standby state until the transition to the CZ state actually occurs, and a precursor effect suggesting a transition to the CZ state may be performed. In response to the decision to shift to the AT state in the state, normal state or CZ state, the state is set as a waiting state until the actual shift to the AT state, and an indication effect suggesting the shift to the AT state can be performed. A state such as an AT precursor state can also be set according to game characteristics.
(6) It is possible to notify that the area is in an advantageous section by turning on the section lamp (status display unit) that can notify whether it is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section (the section lamp is not lit). If you do, you can notify that you are in a non-advantageous section). It should be noted that the lighting start timing of the section lamp can be set to some arbitrary timing as described above. Basically, lighting may be started when a non-advantageous section transitions to an advantageous section, and lighting may continue until the transition to a non-advantageous section. However, if the transitioned advantageous section is in the normal state, the lighting may not be started, and the lighting may be started when the AT state is first entered. If the transitioned advantageous section is in the AT state, lighting may be started from that time.

[4-7. limiter]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, an upper limit (restriction) is set for the period in which the advantageous section continues continuously in order to prevent gambling from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing too long. is possible. Such an upper limit is called a "limiter". Also, in the present embodiment, the termination of the advantageous section by such a limiter is described as execution of limit processing or actuation of the limiter. An example of the limiter will be described below.

(game number limiter)
The number-of-games limiter is configured as a limiter that executes limit processing when the number of games (the number of games played) in the advantageous interval reaches "1500". For example, the advantageous interval game number counter, which will be described later, starts counting when the advantageous interval starts, and increments the count by one each time one game is completed. Then, based on the value of the advantageous interval game number counter reaching a specified value (for example, "1500" or more), the advantageous interval is forcibly played (for example, even if the AT state gaming period remains). Terminate it and move to a non-advantageous section. It should be noted that the number of games for which the game number limiter is activated can be set to any number of games up to the upper limit of "1500". Also, if the requirement for such a game number limiter is relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly. Also, the gambling aspect may be suppressed step by step according to the number of games in the advantageous section.

(Payout number limiter)
The payout number limiter is configured as a limiter that executes limit processing when the number of payout medals in the advantageous section reaches "2400". For example, the advantageous section payout counter, which will be described later, starts counting from the start of the advantageous section, and each time medals are paid out, the corresponding number of medals (more specifically, the number of payouts minus the number of bets) a few minutes) add up the count. Then, based on the fact that the value of the advantageous section payout number counter reaches a specified value (for example, "2400" or more), the advantageous section is forced (for example, even if the AT state game period remains). Terminate it and move to a non-advantageous section. The number of payouts for which the number-of-payouts limiter operates can be set to an arbitrary number of payouts as long as the number of payouts is equal to or less than the upper limit of "2400". Also, if the requirements for such a payout number limiter are relaxed or tightened, it can be changed accordingly. Alternatively, the gambling aspect may be suppressed in stages according to the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section.

Also, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter, which will be described later, counts the positive amount from the most recent lowest point, with the lowest point (starting point) at which the absolute value of the number of medals has decreased the most since the start of the advantageous section. (That is, if there is no payout, the count may be decremented, etc.). In other words, the payout number limiter executes limit processing when a maximum of "2400" medals are paid out from when the number of medals increases during the advantageous section (for example, when the AT state is started). It can also be configured as a limiter that Further, for example, the advantageous section payout number counter, which will be described later, may simply count the actual payout number (that is, the payout number without subtracting the bet number) instead of the above-described net increase.

The pachi-slot machine 1 may execute limit processing in the advantageous section using only the number-of-games limiter, or limit processing in the advantageous section using only the number-of-payout limiter. Both of the number limiters may be used to limit the advantageous section. When both limiters are used, it is desirable that the advantageous interval is terminated when the operation condition of one of the limiters is satisfied after the advantageous interval starts.

Also, the types of limiters are not limited to the game number limiter and payout number limiter described above. For example, the number of times of navigating the push-order minor combination during the AT state (that is, the number of times the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player regarding the combination related to the payout of medals has been notified) is a predetermined number (for example, "400" times). A navigation count limiter may be provided for executing limit processing when the number of times of navigation is reached. That is, as long as the gambling nature can be appropriately suppressed, it is possible to execute limit processing using various conditions related to the game.

[4-8. External signal]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed to output a plurality of types of external signals to the outside. For example, if the external signal 1 is turned on when the bonus state is started, and is turned off when the bonus state is terminated, the external data display device will also follow this. It is possible to perform an effect during the linked bonus state. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the BB state, the external signal 1 is turned off based on the termination of the BB state, and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the start of the MB state. If the external signal 2 is turned on in response to the termination of the MB state, and the external data display machine is turned off, not only the effect during the bonus state but also the bonus state is performed on the external data display machine. The number of times can be counted by type.

Further, for example, if the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of the AT state and turned off based on the termination of the AT state, the external data display device can In conjunction with this, an effect during the AT state can be performed. Further, for example, the external signal 1 is turned on based on the start of a predetermined AT state, and the external signal 1 is turned off based on the end of the predetermined AT state, and the specific AT state is turned on. If the external signal 2 is turned on when the AT state is started, and turned off when the specific AT state is finished, the external data display device can also be set to the above-mentioned AT state. It is possible not only to perform effects but also to count the number of ATs for each type.

Also, for example, the AT state is configured as an AT state for managing the number of sets, and when the first AT state of the first set is started, the external signal 1 is turned on, and the second and subsequent sets are started. If the external signal 2 is turned on every time the game is played, the number of initial wins in the AT state and the number of extensions in the AT state can also be counted on the external data display. It should be noted that the timing to turn on and the timing to turn off each external signal can be set as appropriate. That is, as long as the situation can be appropriately recognized by an external data display device, hall computer, or the like, the output mode of each external signal can be appropriately set. For example, the period from the OFF state to the ON state and to the OFF state again can adopt various conditions such as a predetermined time, one game, and a state change.

[4-9. command]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is designed so that a plurality of types of commands can be transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200 . In the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control circuit 100 and the sub-control circuit 200 cannot communicate with each other, and communication must be performed only in one direction from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200. ing. Therefore, the main control circuit 100 needs to timely transmit information (commands) for reporting changes in the state of the pachi-slot machine 1 to the sub-control circuit 200 . An example of such a command is described below.

The main control circuit 100 transmits an initialization command to the sub control circuit 200, for example, when a setting change operation is performed. The initialization command includes parameters specifying setting values, game states, and the like. Also, for example, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command is transmitted. The medal insertion command includes parameters for specifying the number of bets and the like. Also, for example, when a start operation is performed, a start command is transmitted. The start command includes parameters specifying internal winning combinations, game states, and the like. Also, for example, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command is transmitted. The lock command includes parameters specifying the contents of the lock effect. Also, for example, when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to rotate, a reel rotation start command is transmitted. The reel rotation start command includes parameters specifying that the rotation of the reels has started.

Also, for example, when a stop operation is performed, a reel stop command is transmitted. The reel stop command includes parameters specifying the reel to be stopped, the position at which the reel is to be stopped, and the like. Further, for example, when all the reels are stopped and the display combination (winning operation flag) is determined, the winning operation command is transmitted. The winning operation command includes parameters specifying the type of display combination, the content of the privilege to be given, and the like. Also, for example, when starting an advantageous interval, an advantageous interval start command is transmitted. The advantageous interval start command includes parameters for specifying the start of the advantageous interval, the mode (game state), and the like. Also, for example, when ending the advantageous section, an advantageous section end command is transmitted. The advantageous section end command includes parameters for specifying the termination of the advantageous section, the cause of the termination, and the like. Further, for example, when a settlement operation is performed, a settlement command is transmitted. The settlement command includes parameters for specifying the number of returned items and the like. Note that these are merely examples, and commands other than these can be transmitted as necessary, and unnecessary commands among these can be prevented from being transmitted.

[4-10. staging]
As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, various effects are executed using various effect devices in order to increase the interest in the game, to inform the player of useful information, or to achieve the desired game characteristics. It is possible. An example of such effects will be described below.

[4-10-1. Main side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side). As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 is capable of informing information about the stop operation by means of the instruction monitor, which is also included in production in a broad sense.

(Rock production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect of stopping the progress of the game for a predetermined period (invalidating the game operation of the player for a predetermined period) can be performed. Such an effect is called a “lock effect” (or simply “lock”), and is also called a “freeze effect” (or simply “freeze”). It should be noted that it is possible to configure such that such a lock effect is not performed, and it is also possible to configure so that a plurality of types of lock effects can be performed.

Also, the game operation to be invalidated may be, for example, a start operation, a stop operation, or any other operation. For example, when the start operation is disabled for a predetermined period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period of time after all stop operations have been performed. Further, for example, when the stop operation is disabled for a predetermined period of time, the progress of the game is stopped for a predetermined period of time after the start operation is performed. In addition, when multiple types of lock effects are provided, the period during which the progress of the game is stopped (the period during which the player's game operation is disabled), the type of game operation to be disabled, etc. are set for each lock effect. You can do so.

(reel production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the effect display mode of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (not only the variable display mode but also the combination with the stop display mode) during the execution of the above lock effect. including) can be performed. Such an effect is called a "reel effect", and is also called a "symbol effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure such that such reel effects are not performed, and it is also possible to configure so that a plurality of types of reel effects can be performed. In addition, the case of "executing (executing) a lock effect" includes both cases in which reel effects are performed and cases in which reel effects are not performed.

The reel effect is, in short, to rotate or stop (temporarily stop) each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R regardless of the game operation of the player during the period in which the game operation of the player is invalidated. The performance is performed in Therefore, it is possible to set an operation pattern for performing such an effect operation without considering the rotation speed, the maximum number of sliding symbols, and the like. Also, by setting a plurality of operation patterns, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of reel effects. Also, by combining multiple types of reel effects and multiple types of lock effects, a wider variety of effects patterns can be set. It should be noted that any one of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be used for the reel effect, two of them may be used, or all three of them may be used.

(pseudo game)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect of performing a pseudo game can be performed during the execution of the lock effect. Such an effect is called a "pseudo game". It should be noted that it is possible to configure such a pseudo-game so as not to be performed, it is also possible to configure so as to be able to perform a plurality of types of pseudo-game. In addition, in the case of "executing (executing) the lock effect", it includes both cases in which pseudo-games are performed and cases in which they are not performed.

In short, the pseudo game accepts the game operation of the player in a pseudo manner during the period in which the game operation of the player is invalidated, thereby rotating or stopping (temporarily stopping) the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. It is a thing that directs by doing. In other words, the above-described reel effect is further effected by intervening the player's game operation. For example, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, the start lever 7, the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, and the checkout button 9 are basically provided for the purpose of being used for game operations. Therefore, it is inherently undesirable to use it for purposes other than this. However, in the pseudo-game, it is possible to accept these operations on the premise that measures are taken so that the player does not misunderstand that the actual game is being played.

Here, an example is given and demonstrated about the flow of a pseudo-game. Pseudo-games, for example, are performed in the following flow.
(1) The player's actual start operation (where the execution condition is established and the pseudo-game starts)
(2) Pseudo-rotation of each reel (during pseudo-game)
(3) Receiving a pseudo stop operation, thereby temporarily stopping each reel (during pseudo game)
(4) After random delay processing, each reel actually starts spinning (actual game starts after simulated game ends)

Note that the random delay process is, for example, a state in which specific symbols are displayed side by side in the above situation (3), and when each reel starts rotating normally in the above situation (4), the player can make it easier to stop using a specific symbol as a mark (it may help the so-called "eye-pressing"), so to correct this, a random delay period is set for each reel. This is a process for starting the rotation after generating it (such a delay period is also called a "rearrangement period"). In addition, when each reel is temporarily stopped in the situations (3) and (4) described above, the phase signal in the excitation control of each stepping motor must always be a predetermined value so as not to misunderstand that it is completely stopped. It is desirable to alternate the reels forward and reverse for less than a period of time (eg, 500 ms).

As one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, when any combination of symbols is temporarily stopped in the above situation (3) (when the third reel is temporarily stopped and all the reels are temporarily stopped), Until the random delay process is started in the above situation (4), each reel may be slightly vibrated (swayed) up and down. As long as the phase signal changes in less than the above-mentioned predetermined time, when the first reel is temporarily stopped and when the second reel is temporarily stopped, such swinging is not performed. can be

In addition, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, a pseudo-game lamp is provided to notify that a pseudo-game is in progress, and after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned (1) situation, the above-mentioned (4 ) until the random delay process is started in the situation, the pseudo-game lamp is lit. In addition, the pseudo-game lamp is preferably installed above the operation unit that receives the game operation of the player and at a position that can be visually recognized during the game. Also, the pseudo-game lamp is an independent lamp that is not used for other purposes, and it is desirable that the entire display portion of the pseudo-game lamp is covered with a monochromatic border. In addition, it is desirable that the pseudo-game lamp has a certain surface area (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm and the surface area exceeds 642 square mm, etc.) including the explanation part of the pseudo-game lamp. In addition, the description part of the pseudo-game lamp is a description that can be recognized as a lamp for notifying that the pseudo-game lamp is in the pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "pseudo-game effect", or " It is desirable that such a description portion occupies ⅓ or more of the surface area. It should be noted that the pseudo-game lamp may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or by the sub-control circuit 200 .

In addition, as one of the above-mentioned measures, for example, after the pseudo-game is started in the above-mentioned (1) situation, the above-mentioned (4 ), the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220 (or both) may be used until the random delay process is started. In addition, it is desirable that the pseudo-game display is displayed above the operation unit that receives the game operation of the player and at a position that can be seen during the game (in this embodiment, the main display device 210 and the sub display device 220 are above the operation unit, so either can be used). In addition, the pseudo-game display has a certain surface area including the explanation part (for example, one side exceeds 10 mm, and if the display screen is less than 7 inches, the surface area exceeds 642 square mm) , if the display screen is 7 inches or more, the surface area is 8.2% or more of the entire screen, etc.). In addition, the description part of the pseudo-game display is a description that can be recognized as a display for notifying that the pseudo-game display is in the middle of a pseudo-game (for example, "FREEPLAY", "pseudo-game effect", Alternatively, it is desirable to have a description such as "reel automatic rendering", etc.), and it is desirable to have a size that can be read by the player without being concealed.

Also, for example, during the pseudo-game (for example, after the pseudo-game is started in the above-described (1) situation until the random delay process is started in the above-described (4) situation), the instruction monitor It is desirable to configure so that the information of the stop operation is not reported (if it is necessary to display the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor in the game, the display is started at the timing when the random delay process is started). In this way, it is possible to further prevent the player from erroneously recognizing that the actual game is being played during the pseudo-game. It should be noted that, if any of the above measures are taken, during the pseudo-game, even if the sub-side effect device (for example, the main display device 210 or the sub display device 220) is notified of the stop operation information good. Similarly, during the pseudo-game, the sub-side effect device may perform an effect (interlocked with the pseudo-game operation) according to the game result of the pseudo-game.

In addition, in an actual game, a test signal corresponding to the game operation of the player or the state in which the game operation becomes possible is output via the first interface board 301 for testing machine. , no test signal corresponding to the player's pseudo game operation or the state in which the pseudo game operation is possible is output. Therefore, during the pseudo-game, a test signal (pseudo-game signal) may be output so that the test machine can recognize that the pseudo-game is in progress. In addition, when the first interface board 301 for the testing machine receives a pseudo-game signal from the main control board 71, it outputs a signal for pseudo-game progress control to the main control board 71, so that the main control board 71 side simulates A game may progress (that is, the first test machine interface board 301 may have a pseudo-game progress function). In addition, when the first interface board 301 for testing machine is provided with such a pseudo-game progress function, a changeover switch capable of switching on/off of the function may be provided. As a result, it is possible to arbitrarily set whether or not to confirm the performance contents of the pseudo-game in the certification test (test shooting test) of the pachi-slot machine 1 .

[4-10-2. Sub side production]
In the pachi-slot machine 1, for example, the following effects can be performed under the control of the sub-control circuit 200 side (sub-side). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to notify the stop operation information by the main display device 210 or the like, but this is also included in the production in a broad sense.

(Normal production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect that the current game is completed (that is, one game ends) can be performed. Such an effect is called a "normal effect", and is also called a "one-time effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to configure such that such a normal effect is not performed, and it is also possible to configure so that a plurality of types of normal effect can be performed.

(Continuous production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is established, an effect that continues over a plurality of games (that is, continues for a plurality of games) can be performed. Such an effect is called a “continuous effect”, as well as a “continuous effect”. It should be noted that it is possible to configure such that such continuous effects are not performed, and it is also possible to configure so that a plurality of types of continuous effects can be performed.

(Operation linked production)
In the pachi-slot machine 1, when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, an effect can be performed in which the content of the effect can be changed according to the player's operation. Such an effect is called an "operation-linked effect", and is also called a "button effect" or the like. It should be noted that it is possible to construct such an operation-linked effect not to be performed, or to perform a plurality of types of operation-linked effect. Also, the operation-linked effect can be configured as a normal effect, or can be configured as a continuous effect. Also, the effect operation can include not only the operation to the effect button group but also various game operations.

Note that the various effects described above can be used for various purposes. For example, it can be used to suggest or notify a set value, an internal winning combination, a game state, a game section, details of awarding of a privilege, a period until the awarding of a privilege, and the like. Also, it can be used to suggest or notify the degree of advantage. Moreover, these applications are only examples.

(Other performances)
The pachi-slot machine 1 can perform effects other than the various effects described above. For example, various notifications to the player or the game parlor (for example, addiction prevention notification, forgotten item prevention notification, error state notification, demonstration state notification, etc.) are also included in the production in a broad sense as what is used for purposes other than the above. . As for the immersion prevention notification, for example, when the advantageous section ends, a warning or the like to that effect can be notified. In addition, for example, when an advantageous section ends or when a checkout operation is performed, a warning or the like indicating that fact can be notified. Further, the error state notification may be such that a warning or the like indicating the error is notified from the occurrence of the error until the error is resolved. In addition, the demonstration state notification can be made such that an empty machine or the like is notified when the period during which no game has been played reaches a predetermined period or when a settlement operation is performed.

[5. First gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 5 to 22, a specific example of the specifications relating to game characteristics of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described as a "first game machine". It should be noted that various specifications, functions, etc., described as the first game machine in this embodiment can be partially or wholly applied to other game machines described as other game machines in this embodiment. Various specifications, functions, and the like, which are described as other gaming machines in this embodiment, can be partially or wholly applied to the first gaming machine as described in this embodiment. In other words, an appropriate combination of these can be used as the invention according to the present embodiment.

First, in the first gaming machine, the activated line is defined as only one line of the above-mentioned "center line". In the first gaming machine, a non-bonus state and a bonus state are provided as game states. In addition, the non-bonus state is between 2BB flags in which "F_2BB" (a bonus combination that can be won only when two cards are bet. Hereinafter, it may be simply referred to as "2BB") described later, and between 2BB flags described later. Between the 3BB flags in which "F_3BB" (a bonus combination that can be won only in a 3-card bet state; hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "3BB") is carried over not flagged). Also, the bonus state includes a 2BB state that shifts when a combination of 2BB symbols is displayed, and a 3BB state that shifts when a combination of 3BB symbols is displayed. be.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to play a game with two medals bet (2 medals bet state) and with three medals bet (3 medals bet state). there is Note that "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal insertion slot 5 for use in the game, or that the player operates the MAX bet button 6a or the 1 bet button 6b. 2 or 3 medals are awarded from credits, and 2 or 3 medals are automatically awarded by winning a replay role.

[5-1. Game Features of the First Gaming Machine]
Next, the game flow in the first gaming machine will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 8. FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a game state transition flow in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section in the first gaming machine, and FIG. 6 is for explaining an example of each mode in the first gaming machine. FIG. 7 and FIG. 8 are diagrams showing examples of various tables in the first gaming machine.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the first gaming machine, the state in which a player plays a game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section. Increased sections (advantageous sections/pseudo bonuses) are provided. The non-advantageous section is a game state (non-AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. The performance section is a game state (non-AT state) in which information about the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, and is similar to the non-advantageous section in that it is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. , differs from the non-advantageous section in that mode transition is performed.

That is, the non-advantageous section is the initial state that is controlled when the game in the advantageous section is completed, when a setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are satisfied, or when the factory is shipped. The effect section is a control state as a normal state in which the player can play a normal game by changing the expectation level of the increase section transition (given) by mode transition or the like.

On the other hand, the increasing section is a game state (AT state) in which information of a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, and is a game state that is advantageous to the player. That is, the increase interval is a control state as an advantageous state in which the player can increase medals. Note that both the performance section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and a series of advantageous sections are formed by shifting between these sections.

In the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7A, non-advantageous section sub-flags as secondary information (sub-flags) corresponding to internal winning combinations (see FIG. 10 to be described later) in non-advantageous sections is determined. It should be noted that the sub-flag indicates an internal winning combination that plays a similar role (whether or not it is a lottery target combination, its winning probability, etc.) in various lotteries (various processes related to advantageous sections) related to game characteristics by the main control circuit 100. By grouping and allocating the same information, this is information for making the group identifiable. Since this eliminates the need to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination, the amount of data can be compressed, and pressure on the capacity of the main ROM 102 can be avoided. In the non-advantageous section, lottery using this non-advantageous section sub-flag is performed.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag “Ripbell” has internal winning combinations of “F_Replay A” (No. “3”), “F_Replay B” (No. “4”), and “F_Bell 123A1” to “F_Bell 321B2”. ” (No. “10” to No. “33”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag “Weak Che” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Cherry” (No. “5”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag “Watermelon” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Watermelon” (No. “9”). The non-advantageous section sub-flag “definite combination” is determined when the internal winning combination is either “F_definite cherry” (No. “6”) or “F_reach” (No. “8”). The non-advantageous interval sub-flag “Medium Che” is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Middle Cherry” (No. “7”). It should be noted that, in the non-advantageous section, as in the advantageous section, the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag can be determined. Moreover, these correspondence relationships are not limited to those described above.

Further, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 7(a), in the advantageous section, an advantageous section winning sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) corresponding to an internal winning combination (see FIG. 10 described later) is determined. Further, in the advantageous section, an advantageous section winning time sub-flag is determined as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the combination of displayed symbols. In the advantageous section, a lottery is performed using these sub-flags for winning an advantageous section and sub-flags for winning an advantageous section.

The sub-flag “Bell” at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is any one of “F_Bell 123A1” to “F_Bell 321B2” (No. “10” to No. “33”). The sub-flag “Weak Che” at the time of winning an advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Cherry” (No. “5”). The sub-flag “Watermelon” at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_Watermelon” (No. “9”). The sub-flag “fixed combination” at the time of advantageous section winning is determined when the internal winning combination is either “F_fixed cherry” (No. “6”) or “F_reach” (No. “8”). . The sub-flag “middle che” at the time of advantageous section winning is determined when the internal winning combination is “F_middle cherry” (No. “7”).

Advantageous section winning sub-flag "Tsutaribu 1" is set to "Right" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. It is determined when the combination of symbols of "rising lips" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "rising lips"). Advantageous section winning sub-flag ``Common replay 2'' is set to ``Parallel It is determined when the symbol combination of "LIP" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "Parallel LIP").

Here, in the first gaming machine, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), the symbol combination of "rising to the right" is between the 3BB flags. Between the 2BB flags and between the non-flags, a combination of "parallel lips" symbols is displayed.

That is, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Common Replay 1" is determined as a sub-flag at the winning of the advantageous section between the 3BB flags, and is advantageous between the 2BB flags and between the non-flags. As a sub-flag at the time of section winning, "Tsuru rep 2" is determined. In the first gaming machine, when the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous zone are different in this way, various lotteries (for example, a pseudo-bonus transition lottery using a pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. The degree of advantage in the mode transition lottery using the mode transition lottery table shown in 8(f) is varied.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, for example, depending on whether it is between 3BB flags or between 2BB flags, "F_Replay A" (No. ) has been described as an example, but the manner in which the sub-flags fluctuate at the time of winning the advantageous section is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is made different between the 3BB flag period and the 2BB flag period. Therefore, when such a winning combination is won, the number of medals to be paid out is not changed (or may be changed), and the combination of displayed symbols is made different. A sub-flag may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lotteries, which will be described later, may be changed in accordance with the difference in the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon" (No. "9"), regardless of which flag (between non-flags) the pressed position (stop operation timing) ) is appropriate, the combination of "watermelon" symbols is displayed. When a winning combination is won, different advantageous section winning time sub-flags may be determined depending on whether a prize can be won without any omissions or when omissions occur. Then, the degree of advantage in various lotteries, which will be described later, may be changed in accordance with the difference in the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), between the 3BB flags, the stop operation is in a specific manner (this particular manner is, for example, a predetermined stop operation It may be performed in any manner, such as a manner in which the hitting order (correct pressing order) is performed, a manner in which the pressing position (timing of the stop operation) is appropriate, and a manner in which these are combined), " A combination of symbols of "parallel lips" is displayed, and if it is not performed in a specific manner, a combination of symbols of "rising to the right" is displayed, thereby determining a sub-flag at the time of winning a different advantageous section You may do so. Then, the degree of advantage in various lotteries, which will be described later, may be changed in accordance with the difference in the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

That is, in the first gaming machine, it is possible that the final stop display mode may differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or a combination of any of these regarding the specific combination, It is possible to apply all modes that make it possible to determine different secondary information according to different stop display modes, thereby making it possible to vary the degree of advantage.

Returning to the description of the game characteristics of the first gaming machine. In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section transition lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in (b) of FIG. At a predetermined timing, a transition destination mode or the like is determined according to the non-game section sub-flag. In addition, when making this decision, if only the type of mode when shifting to the advantageous section is determined (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section start"), not only the type of the mode but also the pseudo bonus can be selected. There is a case where it is determined (in FIG. 5, “advantageous section start+pseudo bonus start”). However, in the non-advantageous section, it is also possible to have a specification in which it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, each mode in the first game machine will be described. In the first gaming machine, the mode is control information (which may be called a game state or a control state) for varying the degree of expectation of transition (granting) to an increase section (pseudo bonus) in the performance section (normal game). Yes, in the production section (normal game), according to this mode, it is decided whether or not to transition to a pseudo bonus, to maintain the advantageous section, or to end the advantageous section and move to the non-advantageous section It is designed to

The start mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (production section), and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (Fig. 7 (c)), and the likelihood of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see FIG. 8 (f), which will be described later). Although not shown, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games" in the start mode. The number of ceiling games is used to forcibly shift to the pseudo bonus when the period during which the transition to the pseudo bonus is not made reaches a certain period. Therefore, the smaller the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous the player, and the larger the number of ceiling games, the more disadvantageous the player.

The normal A mode is the easiest mode for a player to stay in the game, and is a relatively disadvantageous mode. ), and the likelihood of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). In the normal A mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games". In FIG. 6, "approximately 999 G after the pseudo-bonus" means that after the pseudo-bonus is over, the game is shifted to an end A mode or an end-B mode, which will be described later, and 32 games are played in this mode without transitioning to the pseudo-bonus. After a game has been played and the normal A mode is selected when shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section after the game is played, the apparent ceiling number of games is "965 games" + end A. This is expressed because it is the game period "32 games" in the mode or the end B mode + the number of games required to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. The same applies to the normal B mode, heaven preparation mode, and chance mode.

The normal B mode is relatively easy for the player to stay in the game and is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than the normal A mode. It is relatively low (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the degree of expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). In the normal B mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games".

In the heaven preparation mode, although the expectation of shifting to the pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), the number of ceiling games is set to "466 games", and when shifting to the pseudo-bonus , and after that, it is determined that the mode will shift to heaven mode (see (f) of FIG. 8, which will be described later), so this mode is relatively advantageous in that sense.

Chance mode has a relatively high expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the ceiling number of games is set to "222 games", so it is relatively advantageous in that sense. mode. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 8 described later).

End A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay if you do not transition to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and it is expected to transition to a pseudo bonus. is the lowest (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). In the end A mode, when 32 games are played without transitioning to the pseudo bonus after the pseudo bonus ends, the advantageous section itself ends and the game shifts to the non-advantageous section.

End B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than End A mode because it is easy to stay if you do not shift to Heaven mode (including Heaven preparation mode) after transitioning to a pseudo-bonus. mode, and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively low (see (c) in Fig. 7 below), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (Fig. 8 (f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, when 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section. Note that the end A mode and the end B mode can also be collectively referred to as "end mode".

The security mode is a mode in which the player stays when Heaven C mode ends, and the degree of expectation to shift to the pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), and the ceiling number of games is "32 games." , so it is a relatively advantageous mode in that sense. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to heaven mode is not high (see (f) of FIG. 8 described later). That is, when Heaven C mode ends, it is positioned as a mode that maintains (guarantees) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time in order to prevent a decline in interest due to this.

Heaven A mode can also include the extension (addition) in the case of the specification that the pseudo bonus continues (AT state continues by determining extension (addition) during AT state. The same applies hereinafter), the degree of expectation to shift to a pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) of FIG. 7 described later), the number of ceiling games is set to "32 games", and the ceiling It is a relatively advantageous mode in which the probability of maintaining the mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set to a medium level. Although not shown in FIG. 6, for example, the ceiling mode loop rate may have a set difference. For example, when the set values are odd numbers (1, 3, 5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set values are even numbers (2, 4, 6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. The lottery value can also be set such that the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate. The same applies to Heaven B mode and Heaven C mode, which will be described later, and it is possible to provide a set difference in the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which a series of pseudo-bonuses can be expected. , and the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. That is, in terms of ceiling mode loop rate, this mode is more advantageous than Heaven A mode.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which a series of pseudo bonuses can be expected. ”, and the probability of maintaining the ceiling mode (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be relatively high, making it a relatively advantageous mode. That is, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, this mode is more advantageous than Heaven A mode and Heaven B mode. The heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode can be generically called "heaven mode".

Each of the modes described above is merely an example, and the configuration of the mode is not limited to this. Modes other than the above-described modes can be set, and some of the above-described modes can be set not to be set.

Further, although the non-advantageous section has been described as being relatively less advantageous than the advantageous section, the relationship between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section is not limited to such a mode. For example, when it is a non-advantageous section, the transition rate to the increased section is higher than when at least one or more modes are set in the advantageous section, or the average number of games required to transition to the increased section is shorter. It is also possible to set a specification such as that the non-advantageous section is most likely to be an increase section. By doing so, an incentive to play a game is generated even in a state where the non-advantageous section is confirmed after a setting change or the like. In addition, even if the lighting of the section lamp ends when 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo-bonus, the most unfavorable state is not confirmed, so even in such a case, there is a motivation to continue the game. becomes. Also, so far, the presentation section has been described as a game state in which the information of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player is not notified, but compared to the increase section, a disadvantageous aspect (for example, reducing the frequency of notification or ), it is also possible to set the game state in which the information of the stop operation is notified.

Returning to the description of the game characteristics of the first gaming machine. In the performance section (normal game), first, a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning for each game. Specifically, the pseudo bonus transition lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. 7 is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and during the game after the advantageous zone winning sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing, it is determined whether or not to shift to a pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning. In addition, in (c) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means not to shift to the pseudo bonus, "winning (current game)" means to shift to the pseudo bonus from the current game, and " "Winning (next game)" means shifting to a pseudo bonus from the next game.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when "winning (current game)" is determined, the game is started at the start of the current game, and when "winning (next game)" is determined, the game is started at the start of the next game. After the operation (stop operation) is disabled for a certain period of time, and during the disabled period, a reel effect (“red 7 aligned” effect) is performed in which “red 7” symbols are displayed in alignment on the main display window 4. , in a game in which a pseudo-bonus has started and a "red 7 matching" effect has been performed, if it is necessary to notify the information of the stop operation, at least the invalid period ends and the game operation (stop operation) is valid. (It may be before that, but not before the start of the random delay process described above), information about the stop operation is notified.

In the performance section (normal game), as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), when it is determined to shift to the pseudo-bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. Note that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus is finished. Also, as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus, and if the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery described later. (at the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) are not performed.

In the production section (normal game), as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), if it is not decided to move to the pseudo-bonus, for each game (more specifically, "F_replay A" or "F_replay B”), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of winning in the advantageous section. Specifically, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. At a predetermined timing (before the start of the game), it is determined whether or not to shift to a pseudo-bonus according to the advantageous section winning time sub-flag.

In the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in (c) of FIG. 7, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section "Tsut-rep 1" is decided rather than the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section "Tsut-rep 1". The percentage of decisions to shift to a pseudo-bonus is higher in the case of However, the mode of giving preferential treatment to "Telephone 2" over "Telephone 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Common Report 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, it may be decided to shift to a pseudo bonus with a predetermined probability, but "Common Report 1" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. In this case, the transition to the pseudo-bonus may not be decided.

In the performance section (normal game), as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), when it is determined to shift to the pseudo-bonus, a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous zone winning sub-flag. Note that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus is finished. As a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus, and when the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the later-described mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is not performed.

In addition, in the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8, "Tsutaribu 2" was determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section rather than the case where "Tsutaribu 1" was determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In this case, the rate at which it is decided to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is high. However, the mode of giving preferential treatment to "Telephone 2" over "Telephone 1" is not limited to this. For example, when the sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning is set to "2", it can be determined to shift to a relatively advantageous mode for the player with a predetermined probability. It may be arranged such that, when "pass 1" is determined, it cannot be determined to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

In the effect section (normal game), as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), if it is not decided to move to the pseudo-bonus, the number of ceiling games is updated (additional method or subtraction method), and the ceiling game When the number reaches the number of ceiling games associated with the current mode (or predetermined at the time of transition to an advantageous section, etc.), it is decided to shift to a pseudo-bonus. In this case, it is possible to make sure that "win (current game)" is determined, or that "win (next game)" is always determined. Alternatively, any one of these may be determined by lottery.

When it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus due to the number of ceiling games being reached in the performance section (normal game), a mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode. Note that this transition destination mode may be a mode including during the pseudo bonus, or may be a mode after the pseudo bonus is finished.

The processing related to the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow can be controlled using In addition, since the processing related to the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow are used. can be controlled by

Further, if "winning (current game)" is not provided as the type of winning of the pseudo-bonus, at the timing when the advantageous zone winning sub-flag is determined, the advantageous zone winning sub-flag has already been determined, Since the number of ceiling games can also be updated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the pseudo-bonus transition process when reaching the ceiling can be performed together in one process. can. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) can be collectively performed in one process.

Returning to the description of the game characteristics of the first gaming machine. As described above, in the production section (normal game), it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus, and when the pseudo bonus is started ("pseudo bonus start" in FIG. 5), the shift to the increase section (pseudo bonus) . Also, as described above, in the effect section (normal game), if the end A mode or the end B mode is controlled and 32 games are completed without transitioning to the pseudo bonus (in FIG. 5, "advantageous section end (Via end A/B)”) and move to a non-advantageous section. Further, when the conditions for limit processing shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, are met, the advantageous section is forcibly ended ("advantageous section end (limit processing)" in FIG. 5), and as a result, Move to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), when the pseudo-bonus is started, a ceiling reduction lottery is performed. Specifically, the ceiling reduction lottery table shown in (e) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and whether or not to reduce the number of ceiling games after the end of the pseudo-bonus is determined according to the current mode. In (e) of FIG. 8, "non-winning" means that the ceiling game number is not shortened, and "winning (ceiling game number = 0 update)" means that after the pseudo bonus ends, regardless of the mode , means that the ceiling game number to be set is set to "0" (reduced). Note that the ceiling shortening lottery can be performed not only when the pseudo bonus is started, but also every game during the pseudo bonus.

As a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, if it is decided not to shorten the number of ceiling games, when the pseudo bonus ends, if you do not have the 1G consecutive stock described later, the number of ceiling games will be reduced according to the current mode. is set (in the end mode, it is not set because the advantageous section ends after 32 games have elapsed (it is cleared accordingly), but the number of ceiling games may be temporarily set here) , the pseudo-bonus ends ("pseudo-bonus ends" in FIG. 5), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game). On the other hand, if it is decided to reduce the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling reduction lottery, "0 games" is set as the number of ceiling games when the pseudo-bonus ends. As a result, the pseudo bonus is started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus is finished. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the ceiling game number is reached, the above-described mode transition lottery (at the ceiling) is performed.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in a game in which "fixed hand" or "medium check" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning). . Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous section winning sub-flag. It should be noted that the transition destination mode may also be determined when a sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section other than the above is determined, but in this case, in principle, a relatively disadvantageous mode than the current mode will be transitioned. In order not to be determined as the first mode, another mode transition lottery table having a lottery value different from the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 may be referred to.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game in which "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is won). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in (f) of FIG. 8 is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the advantageous zone winning sub-flag. In this case, similarly to the above, in principle, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. A different mode transition lottery table may be referred to.

In the increase section (pseudo bonus), 1G consecutive lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G run lottery table shown in (d) of FIG. 7 is referred to, and whether or not to generate a 1G run is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flags at the time of advantageous section winning or the sub-flags at the time of advantageous section winning. be done. In (d) of FIG. 7, "non-winning" means that 1G-runs are not generated, and "winning (1G-runs + 1)" means that the right to generate 1G-runs (1G-run stock) is one. It means that it is granted (the 1G ream stock counter is incremented by 1). A plurality of 1G ream stocks (maximum 255) can be stocked (stored) by a 1G ream stock counter. Therefore, a plurality of 1G ream stocks may be granted during one pseudo-bonus. The 1G-run lottery table can also be configured so that a plurality of 1G-run stocks can be awarded in one 1G-run lottery.

When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G-run stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G-run stock), one 1G-run stock is consumed (1G-run stock counter is 1 is subtracted), and the pseudo bonus is started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus is finished. In this case, since the pseudo bonus corresponding to the right of 1G ream stock starts, the mode transition lottery described above is not performed. On the other hand, when the pseudo-bonus ends, if the value of the 1G-run stock counter is not 1 or more (that is, if you do not own 1G-run stock), and if you have not won the above-mentioned ceiling reduction lottery, The ceiling game number is set according to the current mode (in the end mode, the advantageous section ends after 32 games have passed (and is cleared accordingly), so it is not set, but here the ceiling game number is assumed to be may be set), the pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus ends” in FIG. 5), and the production section (normal game) is entered.

In addition, if you win the ceiling shortening lottery and you also have 1G consecutive stock, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery will be prioritized, and after the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the 1G consecutive stock will be given. Alternatively, the 1G ream stock may be given priority, and after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G ream stock is executed, the pseudo bonus corresponding to the ceiling reduction may be executed. In the latter case, it is sufficient to separately store information that can carry over the fact that the ceiling is shortened.

In the first game machine, as an example of the configuration of the increase section (pseudo-bonus), it is possible to obtain a maximum of 275 cards by continuing for "55 games", but the configuration of the pseudo-bonus is limited to this. do not have. For example, the pseudo-bonus is configured as a "pseudo-BB (big bonus)", and a "pseudo-RB (regular bonus)", which is a pseudo-bonus that lasts for "22 games" and allows up to 110 cards to be obtained, is installed. You may do so. In this case, in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, ceiling reaching, 1G consecutive lottery, when it is decided to move to a pseudo-bonus (to grant rights), the type (for example, "pseudo BB" and or "pseudo RB") is determined with a predetermined probability (for example, by 50%). It should be noted that the value of the "pseudo RB" differs from that of the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, the value of the "pseudo BB" is lower than that of the "pseudo BB"). BB", but by lowering the bernavi rate (probability of notification of stop operation information), the maximum obtainable number of sheets can be differentiated, and the value can be made different. Further, when the "pseudo RB" is started, a reel effect in which "BAR" symbols are displayed together in the main display window 4, or a reel effect in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. You can do it like this. Furthermore, the increasing section is not limited to being configured as a pseudo bonus. For example, it can be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of games to be continued (game period) can be changed.

Also, during the pseudo-bonus, if the conditions for executing limit processing shown in FIG. ), resulting in transition to a non-advantageous section.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the above-described game flow is based on the premise that the game is basically played in a three-coin bet state. Therefore, when a game is played with two bets, various lotteries using, for example, (a) to (d) of FIG. 7, (e) and (f) of FIG. The number of ceiling games is not updated either. In addition, when a game is played with two coins bet during the pseudo bonus, since the number of medals is not increased in the state of two bets, the interval during the pseudo bonus is not increased. In other words, the first gaming machine is configured such that the player is basically at a disadvantage when playing a game in a two-coin bet state.

Here, when the game is played with two bets, the lottery for the advantageous section (AT) (for example, (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. 8, etc.) is used. Although various lotteries and processing (for example, updating the ceiling game number, etc.) are not performed, the advantageous section game number counter for the above-mentioned game number limiter and the advantageous section payout number counter for the above-mentioned payout number limiter are updated. should be carried out. These limiters have the function of appropriately suppressing gambling by limiting the upper limit of the number of games you can stay in the advantageous section and the number of cards you can win, so if you bet two cards, these counters will not be updated. As a result, there are cases where the upper limit of the number of staying games and the number of winning cards in the set advantageous section is exceeded due to the intervening game with two bets, and as a result, the gambling aspect cannot be suppressed appropriately. in order to obtain Therefore, the limiter counter is desirably configured so that it can be updated every game regardless of the number of bets.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the above-described game flow is basically based on the premise that the game is played in the non-bonus state. Therefore, when a game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), for example, various lotteries using (a) to (d) in FIG. 7, (e) and (f) in FIG. It is not performed, and the number of ceiling games is not updated. In addition, when the bonus state occurs during the pseudo-bonus, the bonus state is configured as a state in which the expected increase in medals is lower than in the non-bonus state (more specifically, in the non-bonus state with three bets). , In some cases, the pseudo bonus does not become an increase section. That is, the first gaming machine is constructed so that the player may be at a disadvantage if he/she plays the game in the bonus state.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, it is recommended to play a game with a 3-card bet state between 2BB flags (in this embodiment, the 3-card bet state between 2BB flags is referred to as a "recommended game state”, and other states may be described as “non-recommended gaming states”). That is, in the first gaming machine, 2BB is a bonus combination that is won only when 2 symbols are bet, and between the 2BB flags, the symbol combination related to 2BB wins only when 2 symbols are bet, and when 3 symbols are bet, it wins. It is configured not to 3BB is a bonus combination that is won only when 3 symbols are bet, and between 3BB flags, a combination of symbols related to 3BB wins only when 3 symbols are bet, and does not win when 2 symbols are bet. In addition, there is no case where 3BB is won between 2BB flags, and there is no case where 2BB is won between 3BB flags.

Then, in the first gaming machine, using these configurations, for example, 2BB is won in the 2-card bet state between non-flags (2BB is not won), and then 3-card bet state after 2BB flags are won. , the game can be played in the above-described recommended game state without worrying about whether or not the bonus combination is won.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the ceiling reduction lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. While the ceiling reduction lottery is won with a probability of /8 (32/256), the ceiling reduction lottery is not won in other modes. That is, in the case of a mode with a ceiling number of games of "32 games", the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games", and in the case of a mode with a ceiling number of games greater than that, There is no case where the number of ceiling games is shortened.

Note that even in a mode in which the number of ceiling games is greater than "32 games", the number of ceiling games is lower than in a mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games" (for example, 1/64). may be determined to be shortened.

Also, the manner in which the number of ceiling games is shortened is not limited to that described above. For example, if "32 games" is shortened to a predetermined number of games (0 to 31 games) that are smaller than that, the same effect can be exhibited, so that the number of games to be shortened will be further determined when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. Alternatively, in the ceiling reduction lottery, the number of games to be shortened may be determined in advance.

Further, the trigger for performing the ceiling reduction lottery is not limited to the above. For example, during the pseudo-bonus, a ceiling-shortening lottery may be performed for each game. Also, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is one of the security mode, heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode, a ceiling shortening lottery will be performed for each game. can be In these cases, the sub-flag for advantageous section winning and the sub-flag for advantageous section winning may be referenced to determine whether or not the ceiling reduction lottery is won.

Further, as described above, in the first gaming machine, a 1G consecutive lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the 1G run lottery table shown in (d) of FIG. 7, 1G run stock may be awarded regardless of the current mode. That is, the right to continue the pseudo-bonus can be granted regardless of whether the mode is the ceiling game number of "32 games" or not.

Note that the mode of granting the right is not limited to the one described above. For example, when the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the 1G consecutive lottery is not performed in consideration of the fact that the ceiling short lottery is performed, and the number of ceiling games is greater than "32 games". By performing the 1G consecutive lottery when , it is possible to prevent the gambling aspect of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, the trigger for performing the 1G consecutive lottery is not limited to the one described above. For example, a 1G run lottery may be performed even in an advantageous section (performance section) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G run stock stocked as a result may be consumed in the next pseudo bonus.

Although illustration is omitted in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when the current mode is heaven mode at the start of the pseudo-bonus or during the pseudo-bonus, it is in an advantageous state. A special bonus mid-effect for suggesting something is executed with a predetermined probability. Therefore, when the special bonus middle effect is executed, it is possible to expect that the ceiling reduction lottery will be executed. In addition, the effect during the special bonus may be executed with a probability of 100% when the ceiling reduction lottery is won. In this way, for example, when the special bonus mid-effect is executed at the start of the pseudo-bonus, it is suggested that the player is staying in the heaven mode at least, and furthermore, it is expected that the player may have won the ceiling reduction lottery. can make you feel. Further, the effect during the special bonus may be executed at a predetermined probability or at a probability of 100% even when the 1G consecutive lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, (1) heaven mode only, (2) heaven mode + ceiling short lottery, (3) heaven mode + 1G consecutive lottery, (4) heaven mode + ceiling short lottery + 1G consecutive lottery, (5) 1G consecutive lottery Various possibilities, such as winning only, can be suggested, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Thus, in the first gaming machine, when it is determined that the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) ends and the control is again made to the advantageous state within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) (for example, , heaven mode), the period can be further shortened. It is possible to prevent the loss of interest in the game by allowing the game to be played in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, even if it is not confirmed that the advantageous state will be controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the end mode), the right (for example, , 1G ream stock) may start the advantageous state again, so the expectation of the player can be heightened and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, although not shown in FIGS. 5 to 8, in the first gaming machine, when a “fixed hand” is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section (that is, “F_fixed cherry” or “F_ If "reach" is determined as an internal winning combination), and as a result of the mode transition lottery described above, it is determined to shift to heaven C mode, the probability is 1/2 (this probability is arbitrary ), a special lock effect can be executed. It should be noted that even when the advantageous section winning sub-flag "middle che" is determined (that is, when "F_middle cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination), the player can set the advantageous section winning sub-flag as "fixed hand". ” is determined, so if the sub-flag “Medium Che” is determined when winning the advantageous section, it is possible to receive the same benefits as when “fixed hand” is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. Similarly, a special lock effect may be made executable.

Here, since the "fixed combination" is a combination that also confirms the transition to the pseudo-bonus (see (c) in FIG. 7), when the special lock effect is executed, the player can transition to the pseudo-bonus and heaven C mode. It is possible to recognize that there was a problem, and the interest is greatly increased for the player. The special lock effect is configured as, for example, an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is disabled for about 20 seconds at the start of the game. During this period, a special reel effect may be performed in which each reel vibrates or rotates in the reverse direction, or a special image or the like that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the main effect display section 21. can be Also, a special piece of music that is not normally output may be output. Of course, it is also possible to produce an effect by combining these. In addition, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be performed until the player performs the next game operation (that is, the effect can be executed to the end or canceled in the middle). The player may be allowed to decide whether to proceed with the game).

However, in the first gaming machine, as shown in FIG. 16, which will be described later, for example, even if the user stays in Heaven C mode, the execution of limit processing may force the advantageous section to end. , it may not be desirable to perform the special lock effect described above many times.

Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special lock effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous sections. Specifically, in a series of advantageous sections, when it is decided to execute a special lock effect first, the special lock effect is executed, but after that, within the same series of advantageous sections, the same conditions are applied. To control so that a special lock performance is not executed even when it is established. In addition, as a method, when the special lock effect is executed once, information indicating that is stored, and after that, if the information is stored in the same series of advantageous sections, the special lock effect is performed in the first place. The decision as to whether or not to execute the effect may not be made, or the decision may be made, but if the information is stored, the result of the decision indicates that the effect will be executed. may be rewritten to indicate that it is not executed. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous section ends.

Note that the manner in which execution of the special lock effect is restricted is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit number of times that the execution of the special lock effect is restricted may be set as "two times" or "three times" instead of "one time". That is, the execution of the special lock effect is limited, but the upper limit may be set as multiple times. This can be appropriately set according to the expected value of the number of balls to be released per special lock effect.

Further, the conditions for determining whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed are not limited to those described above. That is, in the above, the mode transition is performed with the winning of the "fixed combination" as a trigger, and it is determined whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed on the condition that the mode is Heaven C mode. However, for example, there are cases where the transition to heaven C mode is triggered by a trigger other than the winning of the "fixed hand" (see (f) in FIG. 8), so the special lock effect is executed in these cases as well. and a special lock effect is executed with a predetermined probability (the probability may be the same as in the case of winning the “fixed hand”, or the probability may be different). It may be determined that

Further, for example, it is assumed that, with the winning of the "definite win" as a trigger, it is first determined whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed, and if it is determined that the special lock effect is to be executed, the heaven You may make it transfer to C mode. That is, the special lock effect may be executed in response to the determination to shift to the heaven C mode, or the heaven C mode may be executed in response to the determination to perform the special lock effect. You may make it shift to .

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game during the advantageous section may be employed as the condition for determining whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter, which will be described later, is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, or the control game number counter, which will be described later is less than "1201". , it is determined whether or not the special lock effect is to be executed as described above, and when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later becomes "750" or more, or when the advantageous game number counter described later becomes "750" or more When the value of the section payout number counter or the payout number counter for control reaches '1201' or more, it is not determined whether or not the special lock performance is to be executed in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. can also

Thus, in the first gaming machine, the game period of the series of advantageous sections is limited to a fixed period (see FIG. 16 described later). In the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information with a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, Heaven C mode) is set multiple times, a special effect (for example, a special lock effect) is provided each time. is controlled so as not to occur. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting while preventing the gambling aspect of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, in a series of advantageous sections, it is determined that control is performed in an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) upon winning of a specific combination (for example, a "fixed combination"). , control information that is highly advantageous to the player (for example, Heaven C mode) may be set. Even if such a case occurs multiple times within the same series of advantageous sections, control is performed so that the special effect (for example, special lock effect) is not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting while preventing the gambling aspect of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine secondary information (for example, a sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning) according to the determined internal winning combination, and secondary information according to the combination of displayed symbols ( For example, it is possible to determine an advantageous zone winning sub-flag), and whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information about the player's stop operation is notified according to the determined secondary information It is determinable.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, not only when the internal winning combination is determined, but also when the combination of symbols is displayed, it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the provision of an advantageous state. It is possible to diversify the playability related to giving.

Further, in the first gaming machine, information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and information corresponding to the combination of displayed symbols are both managed as common secondary information. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding provision.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the gaming value bet is the first amount (for example, 3 coins), the first special role (for example, 3BB) can be won, while the second special role (for example, , 2BB) are not allowed to be won. Also, when the gaming value bet is the second amount (for example, 2), the second special combination is allowed to be won, but the first special combination is not allowed to be won. Further, when a specific combination (for example, "F_Replay A") is won, if the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags) is displayed, a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, "Right Rising Rip") is displayed. If there are 2 special permission states (for example, between 2 BB flags), it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lips") (see FIG. 15 to be described later).

In the first gaming machine, different secondary information can be determined depending on whether the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed or the combination of specific symbols is displayed. That is, in the first gaming machine, even when the same special combination is determined, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed according to which special permission state it is in. It is possible to further diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the provision of states.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed.

Here, in the first gaming machine, both the combination of the predetermined symbols and the combination of the specific symbols are combinations of symbols related to the replay, and therefore even if either one is displayed, the operation of the replay is called. The same benefits will be granted.

Note that the manner in which the same privilege is granted is not limited to the above. For example, the specific winning combination is configured as a specific small winning combination for giving a game value. Then, when a specific minor combination is won, for example, in the first special permission state, one coin (this value is arbitrary, and may be another value equal to or lower than the bet gaming value, or bet A combination of predetermined symbols (a combination of symbols pertaining to the granting of a game value corresponding to a "Rising Rip") to which a game value is awarded (which may be a value exceeding the value of the game value obtained by the player) is displayed, and the second special permission is displayed. If so, a combination of specific symbols (combination of symbols pertaining to the granting of game value equivalent to "parallel lip") that gives the same number of game values as when the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed is displayed. may

In addition, both the combination of predetermined symbols and the combination of specific symbols are combinations of “losing” symbols (however, since it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state, a different symbol from the case of pure “losing”) A combination of identifiable symbols may be used). Even in this case, the value remains the same.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, even when the same special combination is determined, depending on which special permission state it is in, the content of determination regarding the provision of an advantageous state can be varied. , it is possible to diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the provision of the advantageous state. In addition, in a game in which a specific combination is determined, the same privilege is granted regardless of the special permission state, so even if the game characteristics are changed, the player will not be directly disadvantaged. It is possible to prevent it from being covered.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when the specific combination is won, when the second special permission state is established, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, the combination of the specific symbols can be displayed. It may be configured so as not to allow the combination of specific symbols to be displayed when the stop operation is not performed in the mode.

Then, it may be possible to decide whether or not to give an advantageous state at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed. If the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, even if it is possible to make the degree of advantage in giving an advantageous state different between when the combination of specific symbols is displayed and when the combination of specific symbols is not displayed. good.

Further, when a specific combination is won, if the first special permission state is established, a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if the second special permission state is established, the stop operation is performed in a specific mode. is performed, a combination of specific symbols may be displayed, and when a stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, a combination of predetermined symbols may be displayed.

In this case, the specific combination is determined when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (in this embodiment, this may be described as "pressed position ○" or "correct pressed position"). When a combination of specific symbols is displayed and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in this embodiment, this may be described as "pressed position x" or "incorrect pressed position"), the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. Can be configured as displayed. As a result, the degree of advantage in giving an advantageous state can be varied due to (the timing of) the player's stop operation, so that the player can concentrate more on the game, and the interest in the game can be improved. can.

Further, as described above, the specific combination can also be configured as a specific small combination. In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (in the case of the pressed position ◯), the specific symbol is displayed. A combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game values are awarded, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (in the case of the pressed position x), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are awarded. can do. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Also, a predetermined number of game values may be awarded that is greater than the specific number. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game values may be awarded that is smaller than the specific number. Also, at least one of the combination of the specific symbols and the combination of the predetermined symbols may be used as the combination of symbols when a failure occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, it is possible not only to change the degree of advantage related to the provision of an advantageous state due to (the timing of) the player's stop operation, but also to directly change the content of the privilege, so that the player can The player can concentrate more on the game, further diversify the playability, and improve the amusement of the game.

Also, if there is only one type of specific combination, the timing at which the stop operation is appropriate is limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different timings at which the stop operation is appropriate. For example, in one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing, an appropriate stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed. When the timing of the stop operation is the second timing different from the first timing, the proper stop operation is performed and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed. When the timing is other than the second timing, there is no proper stop operation and the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and the timing of the stop operation is the first timing and the second timing. When the third timing is different, an appropriate stop operation is performed and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the appropriate stop operation is not performed and the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed. A third special combination may be provided, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Also, in this case, for the specific combination, a combination of specific symbols is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of correct pressing order), and a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect pressing order). Can be configured as displayed. As a result, the degree of advantage in giving an advantageous state can be changed due to the player's stop operation (procedure), so the player can concentrate more on the game, and the interest in the game can be improved. can.

In addition, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above. In this case, when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct pressing order), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of games are played. Values are given, and when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect answer pressing order), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are given. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Also, a predetermined number of game values may be awarded that is greater than the specific number. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game values may be awarded that is smaller than the specific number. Also, at least one of the combination of the specific symbols and the combination of the predetermined symbols may be used as the combination of symbols when the omission occurs. That is, either the predetermined number or the specific number may be set to "0". As a result, it is possible not only to change the degree of advantage related to the provision of an advantageous state due to the player's stop operation (procedure), but also to directly change the content of the privilege, so that the player can The player can concentrate more on the game, further diversify the playability, and improve the amusement of the game.

Also, if there is only one type of specific combination, the appropriate batting order is also limited, so it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations with different appropriate batting orders. For example, when it is the left first stop, a proper stop operation is performed and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when it is a middle/right first stop, a proper stop operation is not performed and the specific symbol combination is not displayed. When it is the first specific combination and the middle first stop, the combination of specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when it is the left/right first stop, the specific symbols are displayed without an appropriate stop operation. The second special combination is not displayed, and when it is the first stop on the right, it is an appropriate stop operation and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when it is the first stop on the left and middle, it is not an appropriate stop operation. A third specific combination in which a combination of specific symbols is not displayed is provided in the third combination, and these can be won with the same winning probability.

Up to this point, in the unit game in which the specific role is won, due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing of the stop operation and the batting order), the transition determination process to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section, and the advantageous section (Including pseudo-bonus transition lottery, mode transition lottery, and other processing for changing the advantage of the gaming situation in the advantageous section) regarding the granting of an advantageous state. Of these, changes that are relatively disadvantageous to the player (which may be disadvantageous as a result) can be regarded as the aforementioned penalty. Therefore, when such a change occurs, the configuration may be such that an arbitrary effect (warning notification) for calling attention can be generated.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a specific combination is won, the possibility of being given an advantageous state is higher when a combination of specific symbols is displayed than when a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. It's becoming That is, assuming that three cards are bet, the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) is a state in which an advantageous state is given more preferentially than the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). is.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, when a predetermined combination (for example, "push order bell B" described later) is won, if the first special permission state is met, the combination of given symbols (for example, 8 payouts) regardless of the batting order While the combination of symbols to become) is displayed, in the second special permission state, if the hitting order is the predefined correct pressing order, the combination of the given symbols is displayed, but the hitting order is predefined If it is not in the given correct order of pressing, the combination of given symbols is not displayed and the game value is not given, or only a smaller amount of game value is given than when the combination of given symbols is displayed. It is configured to display a combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols that results in one payout). That is, if the operation of the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state is a state in which the giving of game values is given more preferential treatment than the second special permission state.

That is, even if the player is in a non-recommended gaming state, if the player plays the game with three bets between the 3BB flags, although the probability of giving the advantageous state is not favored, the game value when the advantageous state is not activated is increased. Since the award probability is given preferential treatment, the game can be played with a relatively small difference in slope value between when the advantageous state is activated and when it is not activated. In this way, a state in which the player's gaming value is less likely to decrease, although the possibility of the player's gaming value being able to increase rapidly decreases, can be defined as, for example, a "stable state."

On the other hand, if the player plays the game in the recommended game state, the probability of giving the advantageous state is preferential, but the probability of giving the game value when the advantageous state is not activated is not favored, so the advantageous state is activated. The game can be played in a state in which the difference in the tilt value between when it is activated and when it is not activated is relatively large. In this way, a state in which the player is likely to be able to rapidly increase the game value, but the game value of the player is likely to decrease can be defined as, for example, a “stormy state”.

Here, the method for creating the two states of the stable state and the rough sea state is not limited to the one described above. For example, in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, while raising the probability of transition of the pseudo-bonus more than "rough sea state", in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the probability of transition to heaven mode is higher than "rough sea state" Lower. In addition, in the "rough sea state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, while lowering the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus than in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of heaven mode Increase. In this way, it is possible to create a state in which it is easy to hit the pseudo-bonus at the beginning in the "stable state" but it is difficult to make a succession. state can be created. As described above, the predetermined combination stop control may vary between the 2BB flags and the 3BB flags, or may be different (that is, no preferential treatment between the 3BB flags).

[5-2. Symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, referring to FIG. 9, the symbol arrangement configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol arrangement table of the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 9, in the first gaming machine, "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", " 10 kinds of patterns of "white blank 1" and "white blank 2" are arranged at the positions shown in FIG. 9 on each of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R. Further, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[5-3. Internal Winning Combination Configuration of First Gaming Machine]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15, the internal winning combination configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of the internal lottery table of the first gaming machine. 11 to 14 are diagrams showing an example of the symbol combination table of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 15 is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, the display combination, etc., of the first gaming machine. That is, hereinafter, which symbol is selected according to the type of internal winning combination that is drawn by lottery in the first gaming machine, and the stop operation mode (that is, the batting order, stop operation timing, etc.) when each internal winning combination is won. (which can also be rephrased as a display combination, a winning combination, a stop display mode, a display result, etc.) will be displayed.

First, in the first gaming machine, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 26) described later, each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 10 is won with the probability shown in FIG. Combinations of symbols permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "corresponding symbol combination" in FIG. In FIGS. 11 to 14, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols for a bonus hand, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols for a replay hand, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols for a small hand. is shown.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags) in a 2-coin bet state, while a game is played in a 3-coin bet state. It is configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination when the winning combination is determined. In a game in which "F_2BB" is won in a two-bet state, or in a game in which "losing" between 2BB flags, "BB01" is displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and a 2BB state (based on 2BB) is displayed. bonus status). On the other hand, even between two BB flags, "BB01" is not displayed when three cards are bet.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played in a non-bonus state (more specifically, between non-flags) in a 3-coin bet state, while a game is played in a 2-coin bet state. It is configured not to be determined as an internal winning combination when the winning combination is determined. In a game in which "F_3BB" is won in a three-bet state, or in a game in which "lost" between 3BB flags, "BB02" is displayed if the pressed position is ○ for each reel, and a 3BB state (based on 3BB) is displayed. bonus status). On the other hand, even between the 3BB flags, "BB02" is not displayed when two cards are bet.

In the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the "bonus state" column in FIG. 10 is referred to determine the internal winning combination (the number of possible coins to start the game is only 3 bets). During the 2BB state and the 3BB state, it is always controlled to the state (RB state) in which the RB, which is the first class special item, is in operation. In addition, in the RB state, control is repeated such that when winning occurs twice or the game is played twice after activation, the control is once terminated and then activated again. In addition, in the first gaming machine, the condition for ending the 2BB state is that more than one medal has been paid out in the 2BB state, and the condition for ending the 3BB state is that more than 176 medals have been paid out in the 3BB state. has been paid out.

Here, when the 2BB state or the 3BB state ends, special mode transition processing is performed. For example, when transitioning to the bonus state (during the bonus state, the mode transition is not performed, so it is synonymous with when the bonus state ends), that is, if the current mode is the "start mode", the transition destination mode is "start mode". Also, if the current mode is one of the "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "paradise preparation mode", and "chance mode", the transition destination mode is the "normal A mode". Also, if the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the transition destination mode is "end A mode". Also, if the current mode is any one of "guaranteed mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", and "heaven C mode", the destination mode will be "guaranteed mode".

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, between non-flags and between 2BB flags, regardless of the stop operation mode, one of "REP64" to "REP72" Since these are to be displayed, they can be collectively called “parallel lips.” Also, “REP64” to “REP71” can be collectively called “lower stage lips.” ) is displayed and replay is awarded. On the other hand, between the 3BB flags, regardless of the stop operation mode, "REP73" (because this is to display the "Replay" symbol in an upward-sloping manner, this can be called an "upward-sloping lip"). It is displayed and replay is granted.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, "parallel replay" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in any state, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the double-bet state, the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, any one of "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" if the pressed position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L (these are for displaying the "cherry" symbol on the lower row of the left reel 3L). Therefore, these can be collectively referred to as "cherry lips") are displayed, and a replay is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, "REP57" to "REP59") are displayed and a replay is granted.

"F_definite cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the double-bet state, the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", at least for the left reel 3L, if the pressing position is ○, any of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are The symbol "Cherry" is displayed in the lower part of the left reel 3L. For example, symbols such as "REP42" are also displayed on the other reels to increase the expectation of the player. (which can be collectively referred to as "determined cherry slip") is displayed, and a replay is granted. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, the above-mentioned "Cherry Lip" or "REP29" to "REP41") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. In addition, when the pressing order is either "Battering order 5" or "Battering order 6", the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

"F_middle cherry" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the double-bet state, the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", at least for the left reel 3L, if the pressing position is ○, any of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are Since the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the middle row of the left reel 3L, these can be generically called "middle stage cherry lips") are displayed, and a replay is awarded. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, other replies (for example, "REP20" to "REP27") are displayed, and a replay is granted. In addition, when the pressing order is either "Battering order 5" or "Battering order 6", the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Reach" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that the internal winning combination can be determined in the 3-coin bet state, but it can be configured so that the internal winning combination is not determined in the 2-coin bet state. When the internal winning combination is determined, in the double-bet state, the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded. In the 3-bet state, if the pressing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", regardless of the stop operation mode, any of "REP01" to "REP14" (these are customarily used by players It is configured as a combination of symbols that can confirm (or suggest) a transition to a state that is advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eyes") is displayed, and replay is possible. Granted. In addition, when the pressing order is either "Battering order 5" or "Battering order 6", the "middle stage reply" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a replay is awarded.

"F_Watermelon" is configured to be determined as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressed position is ◯ for each reel, one of “FRU10” to “FRU12” (since these are displayed side by side with “watermelon” symbols, these are selected). "watermelon") is displayed, and three medals are paid out if three medals are bet, and two medals are paid out if two medals are bet. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, either "FRU08" or "FRU09" (because these are not displayed with "watermelon" symbols side by side, they can be collectively called "watermelon spill"). is displayed and one medal is paid out. In addition, in the case of the pressed position x, it is also possible to cause a dropout to occur so that no medals are paid out.

"F_bell 123A1", "F_bell 123A2", "F_bell 132A1", "F_bell 132A2", "F_bell 213A1", "F_bell 213A2", "F_bell 231A1", "F_bell 231A2", "F_ "Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" can be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell A".

As shown in FIG. 15, "push order bell A" is a small push order combination with 6 choices (any one of "hitting order 1" to "hitting order 6" is the correct hitting order). , and when it is determined as an internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct order of pressing, "Right falling bell" ("FRU03"), "Upper bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02") ), "middle bell" ("FRU04"), "right rising bell" ("FRU05"), "mountain bell" ("FRU06"), and "lower bell" ("FRU07") is displayed, and 8 medals are paid out if 3 coins are bet, and 2 coins are paid out if 2 coins are bet. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct order of pressing, if the first stop operation is correct, the rest of the stop operations have a probability of 1/2 at the pressed position ◯, and at the pressed position ◯. If there is, one of the winning "one-coin" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") is displayed, and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, a drop occurs and medals are not paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is not correct, the rest of the stop operations have a probability of 1/8 that the pressed position will be ◯, and if the pressed position is ◯, which one of the winning “one-card roles” will be displayed. , one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, a drop occurs and medals are not paid out.

"F_bell 123B1", "F_bell 123B2", "F_bell 132B1", "F_bell 132B2", "F_bell 213B1", "F_bell 213B2", "F_bell 231B1", "F_bell 231B2", "F_ "Bell 312B1", "F_Bell 312B2", "F_Bell 321B1", and "F_Bell 321B2" can be determined as internal winning combinations regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. It should be noted that these can be collectively referred to as "push order bell B".

As shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" does not have a small push order win between the 3BB flags in the 2-bet state and the 3-bet state. When an internal winning combination is determined, one of the above-described "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if 3 medals are bet, 8 medals are paid out, and if 2 medals are bet, 2 medals are paid out. medals are paid out.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the "push order bell B" is pressed in states other than between the 3BB flags in the 3-bet state (between the non-flags in the 3-bet state and between the 2BB flags in the 3-bet state). If the winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct order, one of the above-described "bells" will be displayed and eight medals will be awarded. paid out. On the other hand, when the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct order of pressing, if the first stop operation is correct, the rest of the stop operations have a probability of 1/2 at the pressed position ◯, and at the pressed position ◯. If there is, one of the winning "one-coin roles" is displayed, and one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, a drop occurs and medals are not paid out. Also, if the first stop operation is not correct, the rest of the stop operations have a probability of 1/8 that the pressed position will be ◯, and if the pressed position is ◯, which one of the winning “one-card roles” will be displayed. , one medal is paid out. On the other hand, if the pressed position is x, a drop occurs and medals are not paid out.

"F_RB combination 8 cards" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When the internal winning combination is determined, one of the above-described "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and 8 medals are paid out.

"One F_RB combination" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "one-card combinations" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one card is displayed. medals are paid out.

The internal lottery table shown in FIG. 10, the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 11 to 14, and the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the display combination shown in FIG. It is not limited to the embodiment.

For example, in the first gaming machine, in a 2-bet state in which ``BB01'' can be displayed when ``losing'', ``BB02'' can be displayed when ``BB01'' is missed and ``losing''. In the 3-bet state, when ``BB02'' is missed and ``losing'' occurs, and when ``losing'' occurs due to 3-betting between 2BB flags, it is 2-betting between 3BB flags. "Loss" may occur in various situations, such as when "losing" due to an event, or "losing" due to missing a "lower winning combination". Therefore, in order to make the combinations of symbols displayed as "lost" different in some or all of these cases, combinations of these different symbols are defined in advance in the symbol combination table, and the determined internal winning combinations are determined. By allowing these to be displayed as ``combination of corresponding symbols'' depending on the condition, the combination of symbols related to ``missing'' to be displayed according to the state or the like can be changed.

[5-4. Limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, with reference to FIG. 16, the limit processing configuration of the first gaming machine will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining an example of each limit process in the first gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 16, in the first gaming machine, normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), semi-limit processing ( Number of games) and semi-limit processing (number of payouts) are executed. Note that this is an example of executable limit processing, and limit processing other than each of these limit processing can be executed. You can also prevent it from happening.

The normal limit process (the number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous interval game number counter becomes "1500" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous interval are played 1500 times in succession). In addition, the advantageous section game number counter starts counting the number of games played when the advantageous section (including the effect section) starts, and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process) It is designed to be cleared (initialized) after completing the counting. Also, the number-of-games-in-advantage-zone counter counts whether the number of bets is two or three. In addition, the advantageous section game number counter performs the counting even in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated), regardless of whether it is during the production section or during the increase section (pseudo bonus), the advantageous section is forcibly ended, and the non-advantageous section move to Also, at this time, information about the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the effect section or the increase section, information regarding the current mode, information regarding the game period of the pseudo bonus, information regarding the number of ceiling games and whether or not the ceiling is shortened) Information, various information obtained during the advantageous interval such as the value of the 1G ream stock counter, and various information necessary for controlling the advantageous interval) are all cleared (initialized).

The normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes "2401" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). The advantageous section payout number counter starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference number)") from the start of the advantageous section (including the performance section). When the interval ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing), the count is ended and cleared (initialized). Also, the advantageous section payout number counter counts both when the number of bets is 2 and 3. In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter performs the counting even in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter counts appropriately according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-2" or "-3") when, for example, "lose" or "dropout" occurs during the advantageous section. value is subtracted. Therefore, if the number of medals does not increase and decreases after the advantageous section starts, the value may be negative (or if the value is negative, "0" is always maintained). can also be configured to be That is, the advantageous section payout number counter can count the number of medals paid out in the advantageous section from the lowest point to the defined highest point (difference number: 2400 medals).

When the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (actuated), regardless of whether it is in the production section or in the increase section (pseudo bonus), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, and the non-advantageous section move to Also, at this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (the number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are played 1445 times in succession). In addition, the control game number counter starts counting the number of games played when the advantageous section (including the performance section) starts, and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit process) It is designed to be cleared (initialized) after completing the counting. Also, the control game number counter counts when the number of bets is three, and does not count when the number of bets is two. In addition, the control game number counter performs the counting in the non-bonus state, and does not perform the counting in the 2BB state and 3BB state. Of course, the control game number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section game number counter.

When the special limit processing (the number of games) is executed (activated), if it is during the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is performed without forcibly ending the pseudo bonus in the middle. is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not during the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is during the performance section), first, the game is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the special limit process (the number of games) is executed to transfer to the pseudo-bonus. Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is finished, the advantageous section is forcibly ended and transferred to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is cleared (initialized).

Here, the value of the advantageous section game number counter for which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed (activated) is "1500", whereas the special limit process (number of games) is executed (activated). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "1445", the maximum number of games (continuable period) during the pseudo-bonus is "55 games" in the first gaming machine (Fig. 5), this difference takes into consideration the playable period during the pseudo bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (the number of games) is executed when the game is played for a predetermined regulation period in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit processing (the number of games) is executed immediately after or during the start of the pseudo-bonus, the player will have a sense of distrust and loss, and the interest in the game will decrease. Sometimes. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, the special limit processing (the number of games) is performed in the game that is before the game in which the normal limit processing (the number of games) is executed by the continuation possible period (55 games) per increase section. By executing this, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or a sense of loss due to the fact that the pseudo bonus ends in the middle.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (the number of games) is executed (activated) is not limited to the above. For example, the special limit processing (number of games) is executed in the game that is before the normal limit processing (number of games) by the continuation possible period (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) per two increases. may be made. In addition, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the continuation possible period (55 games) + grace period (2 games) per increase section is before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. Special limit processing (the number of games) may be executed in the game of . Also, for example, in the case of specifications such as passing through a precursor state before transitioning to a pseudo bonus, and if the maximum number of games in this precursor state is "4 games", normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (the number of games) may be executed in a game that is before the game in which the continuation possible period (55 games) per increase section + the maximum sign period (4 games) is before the game. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (actuated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. It is assumed that it can be set as appropriate according to the game specifications.

The special limit process (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the number-of-payouts counter for control becomes "2126" or more (that is, when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous interval exceeds 2125). Note that the payout number counter for control starts counting the number of medals paid out (here, for example, "net increase (difference number)") from the start of the advantageous section (including the performance section). When the interval ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing), the count is ended and cleared (initialized). Also, the control payout counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Also, the control payout number counter performs the counting in the non-bonus state, and does not perform the counting in the 2BB state and 3BB state.

In addition, the control payout number counter is decremented by a value that is appropriately counted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-3", etc.) when a "loss" occurs during the advantageous interval. However, the control payout number counter does not cause a "dropout" (or a difference) when a "dropout" occurs during the advantageous section (at least when a difference occurs from the maximum value of the medal payout number). count the number of medals paid out. Specifically, for example, in a game in which "push order bell A" is won with a three-bet, if the batting order is appropriate, the payout number (maximum value) of medals is "8" (the difference is "8"). +5”), while if the batting order is not appropriate, if the pressing position is appropriate, the number of medals paid out will be “1” (“-2” as the difference), and if the pressing position is not appropriate. The number of medals to be paid out will be "0" ("-3" as the difference number) due to the occurrence of a dropout, but the control payout counter will indicate the difference number " +5 sheets" are counted.

Further, for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout counter due to the activation of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, etc., the value of the control payout counter becomes the advantageous section payout counter. Corrected to the value of the section payout number counter. It should be noted that the control payout number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section payout number counter.

When the special limit processing (the number of payouts) is executed (actuated), if it is during the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle. is terminated, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated and shifted to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not during the pseudo bonus (that is, if it is during the performance section), first, the game is forcibly shifted to the pseudo bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the special limit process (the number of payouts) is executed to transfer to the pseudo-bonus. Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is finished, the advantageous section is forcibly ended and transferred to the non-advantageous section. Also, at this time, all the information about the above-mentioned advantageous section is cleared (initialized).

Here, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter for which the normal limit process (payout number) is executed (operated) is "2401", whereas the special limit process (payout number) is executed (operated). Focusing on the fact that the value of the number-of-games-for-control counter is "2126", in the first gaming machine, the maximum number of coins obtained in the pseudo bonus (amount of game value that can be given) is "275". (See FIG. 5), this difference takes into consideration the amount of game value that can be given in the pseudo bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (the number of payouts) is performed when a predetermined amount of game value is granted in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling nature of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit processing (payout amount) is executed immediately after the start of the pseudo-bonus or during it, the player will have a sense of distrust and loss, and the interest in the game will decrease. may be lost. Therefore, in the first gaming machine, a game value amount that is less than the game value amount for which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed is given by the amount of game value that can be given per increase section (275 coins). By executing special limit processing (the number of payouts) at times, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus ending in the middle.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (actuated) is not limited to the above. For example, when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount for which normal limit processing (payout number) is executed is given by the amount of game value that can be granted per two increases (275 coins x 2 sets = 550 coins) A special limit process (number of payouts) may be executed. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the amount of game value that can be granted per increase section (275 coins) + grace period is greater than the amount of game value for which normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed. The special limit process (the number of games) may be executed when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount (8 cards) to be played is awarded. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (payout amount) is executed (actuated) may be any timing before the timing at which the normal limit processing (payout amount) is executed. It is assumed that it can be set as appropriate according to the game specifications.

In semi-limit processing (the number of games), the value of the control game number counter is added to the value of the 1G consecutive counter (if the ceiling reduction lottery is won and the ceiling is shortened, "1" is added). ) is multiplied by “55” (that is, the period during which the pseudo bonus can be continued), and the result is “1390” or more. For example, if the value of the 1G run counter is "1" and "the ceiling is shortened", the value of the latter is "55×2=110", so the value of the control game number counter is "1280". , semi-limit processing (number of games) is executed (activated).

In the semi-limit process (number of payouts), the value of the control payout counter is added to the value of the 1G counter (if the ceiling reduction lottery is won and the result is "with ceiling reduction", "1" is added ) is multiplied by “275” (that is, the amount of gaming value that can be imparted with the pseudo bonus), and is executed when the result of the addition becomes “1851” or more. For example, if the value of the 1G counter is ``1'' and ``with ceiling reduction'', the value of the latter is ``275×2=550'', so the value of the payout number counter for control is ``1301''. ”, the quasi-limit process (the number of payouts) is executed (actuated). In addition, since the semi-limit process (number of games) and the semi-limit process (number of payouts) both regulate the same content, after one operating condition is satisfied and activated, the other operating condition Even if is established, it is not necessary to operate redundantly.

When semi-limit processing (number of games) or preparation limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (activated), the above-mentioned 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling reduction lottery are executed during the pseudo bonus in a series of subsequent advantageous sections. will not be. That is, the extension of the game period in the increasing interval is suppressed. Note that the method of suppressing the extension of the game period in the increasing interval is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G run lottery, the winning probability of the 1G run may be lower than usual, and in the above-mentioned ceiling reduction lottery, the winning probability of the ceiling reduction may be lower than usual. . That is, although the above-described 1G consecutive lottery and ceiling reduction lottery itself are executed, it may be made difficult to win these lotteries. Further, for example, in the performance section after execution of the semi-limit process (the number of games), the lottery value to be won in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to shift to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, the lottery value for determining a mode transition advantageous to the player in the mode transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult for the pseudo bonuses to continue.

In addition, when semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (payout number) is executed (operated), in a series of subsequent advantageous sections, during the production section, the "fixed hand" (( Special processing is performed when a) is won. In the following, this special processing will be described by taking as an example a case where the "fixed hand" is "F_fixed cherry" (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "fixed cherry").

When neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, if the "fixed cherry" is won during the production section (may be during the increase section), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery At , "win (next game)" is determined (see (c) in FIG. 7). In addition, in the first gaming machine, since the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol that the player has a high degree of expectation for, in a game in which the information of the stop operation is not reported, the player is left first. It is a general procedure to perform a stop operation with one stop and aiming at a "cherry" symbol (aiming at a "BAR" symbol as a guideline). Therefore, when a game is played according to a general procedure, when a "fixed cherry" is won, first, the "cherry" symbol is stopped on the lower stage of the left reel 3L at the left first stop. In addition, when neither the semi-limit process (number of games) nor the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, if the "fixed cherry" is won, the left first stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2") ”) may be notified. Further, "win (next game)" is not limited to the pseudo bonus starting from the next game, but may be the pseudo bonus starting from the next game.

Here, a skillful player stops aiming at the "BAR" symbol also on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, for example, in order to further discriminate whether it is a "weak che" or a "determined cherry". perform an operation. As a result, the "BAR" symbols are aligned in the middle of each reel, and it can be recognized that the "definite cherry" has been won (see, for example, "REP42" in FIG. 11). On the other hand, an unskilled player, for example, does not perform the stop operation aiming at the "BAR" symbols on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, or is unable to perform the stop operation, and is thus "weak" from the stop display mode. In some cases, it may not be possible to determine whether it is a "fixed cherry" (see, for example, "REP28" in FIG. 11).

In the first gaming machine, when neither the semi-limit processing (number of games) nor the semi-limit processing (payout number) is in operation, the "fixed cherry" is won and the "fixed cherry" is won. symbol combination is displayed, a special winning sound is output. In addition, when "Definite Cherry" was won, the combination of "Definite Cherry Lip" symbols was not displayed, but even if the combination of "Cherry Lip" symbols was displayed, the special winning sound It is designed to be output. Note that the special winning sound may be output with a probability of 100%, or may be output with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, when neither semi-limit processing (number of games) nor semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, if the "fixed cherry" is won, "red 7 matching" will be performed at the start of the next game. ' effect is performed to inform that the pseudo bonus is to be started, and the pseudo bonus is to be started.

On the other hand, after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (payout number) has been activated, if the "fixed cherry" is won during the production section (may be during the increase section), the pseudo-bonus transition Although "winning (next game)" is determined once in the lottery (see (c) in FIG. 7), this determination result is rewritten to "winning (current game)" by executing special processing. Then, at the start of the game this time, it is notified that the pseudo bonus is started by performing the "red 7 matching" effect, and the pseudo bonus is started.

At this time, in this game, the stop operation for displaying the symbol combination of "middle stage" without displaying the combination of "determined cherry lips" (including the combination of "cherry lips"). Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in the first gaming machine, a special notice to the effect that the right first stop ("batting order 5" and "batting order 6") should be made (see FIG. 15). As a result, when neither semi-limit processing (number of games) nor semi-limit processing (number of payouts) is in operation, the flow of the game such as "Determined Cherry Lip" is displayed → Pseudo bonus starts from the next game. After either the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) has been activated, a pseudo-bonus will start from the current game → a stop operation will be performed according to the special notification, resulting in a game called "middle rep" display. is changed to the flow of Note that the special notification may be performed under the control of the main (main control board 71) side. It may be controlled only by the sub (sub control board 72) side.

In addition, after either the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) has been activated, even if the "fixed cherry" is won, the "fixed cherry" is issued despite the special notification. When the symbol combination of "cherry lips" is displayed, no special winning sound is output.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as an internal winning combination, basically, the stop operation procedure is not reported. For this reason, assuming that the stop operation procedure is notified and the "middle comment" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, if such a state occurs, one of the The player clearly recognizes that the quasi-limit processing has been activated, and as a result, there is a possibility that the interest in the game is reduced. Therefore, during the advantageous section, regardless of whether any semi-limit process is in operation (or after any semi-limit process has been activated), "F_replay A" or When "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification may be made with a predetermined probability. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the special notification. Also, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as an internal winning combination, the notification similar to the special notification may be performed when the pseudo-bonus transition lottery is won. Further, in this case, in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, even if "winning (current game)" can be determined with a predetermined probability. good.

So far, in order to activate the normal limit process, the special limit process, and the semi-limit process, the explanation has been given by taking the example of monitoring the game period of the advantageous section using the "number of games" and the "number of payouts". The conditions for executing each limit process are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, and the value of the 1G run counter, when each limit process is executed. And whether or not to shorten the ceiling (that is, variables for activating the semi-limit process) can be appropriately changed according to game specifications, market trends, and the like.

Also, the method for monitoring the game period of the advantageous section is not limited to the one described above. For example, if the "navigation count" is used to monitor the game period of the advantageous section, normal limit processing (navigation count), special limit processing (navigation count), or semi-limit processing (navigation count) number of times) can also be executed. That is, any element (parameter) can be adopted as long as it is an element (parameter) whose value can be counted in order to monitor the gaming period of the advantageous section, and the adopted element is the value for which normal limit processing is performed. , a value for which special limit processing is executed, and a value for which semi-limit processing is executed, each limit processing can be executed in the same manner as described above.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, production section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example, , the value of the advantageous interval game number counter is "1500" or more), or the gaming value given in the series of advantageous intervals reaches a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous interval payout number counter is "2401" or more). ), this series of advantageous intervals is forcibly ended, but the game period in this series of advantageous intervals is a specific period shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445"). or more), or when the amount of gaming value given in this series of advantageous intervals becomes a specific amount smaller than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), If it is in an advantageous state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated when shifting to a specific state.

That is, in the first game machine, the series of advantageous intervals is not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous intervals is ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow upon termination of the advantageous state. It is possible to let As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, so it is possible to consider the player's emotions. and

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, production section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game period in this series of advantageous sections lasts for a predetermined period (for example, advantageous When the value of the section game number counter is "1500" or more), or when the amount of gaming value awarded in the series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). When this occurs, the series of advantageous intervals is forcibly terminated, but the game period in the series of advantageous intervals is a specific period shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more). , or when the amount of game value awarded in this series of advantageous intervals reaches a specific amount smaller than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), the advantageous state is reached. If not, it is shifted to an advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated.

That is, in the first game machine, the series of advantageous intervals is not forcibly ended in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous intervals is ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow upon termination of the advantageous state. It is possible to let In addition, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if it is not in an advantageous state, it is ended after shifting to an advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, so it is possible to consider the player's emotions. and

Further, in the first gaming machine, the specific period or specific amount is set in consideration of the period during which the advantageous state can be continued (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be given (for example, "275 cards"). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely restricted while considering the player's emotion.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous state may be extended by granted rights (for example, "1G consecutive stock" and "ceiling reduction"), but the game period in a series of advantageous sections is limited to a specific period When a special period set according to the number of granted rights is reached (for example, when the value of the control game number counter reaches a value at which semi-limit processing (number of games) is executed), Or when the amount of gaming value granted in a series of advantageous sections is less than a specific amount and becomes a special amount set according to the number of rights granted (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control is a semi-limit When the processing (the number of payouts) reaches a value to be executed), granting of rights is suppressed in a series of subsequent advantageous intervals. As a result, for example, the player is given more rights than they can consume, and as a result of the forced termination of a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust and loss. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high and to consider the emotions of the player.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, in counting the above-mentioned "specific amount" and "special amount", for example, due to the player's operation error or ignoring the instruction, etc. Even if there is a difference between the amount of game value that was actually given and the amount of game value that was actually given, the calculation is based on the amount of game value that was originally supposed to be given without considering this difference. It is supposed to be done. As a result, a series of advantageous intervals may be extended more than necessary due to such behavior of the player, and unfairness may arise between the player who has performed such behavior and the player who has not. Since it is possible to prevent the game from being put away, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, a winning combination (for example, "certain cherry") in which the transition to an advantageous state is confirmed in a state where granting of rights is suppressed (for example, after semi-limit processing is activated) is won. When the player does, a special notification is made so as not to display a combination of special symbols (for example, "Determined Cherry Lip") that clearly recognizes the winning of the determined combination. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a useless win, for example. That is, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the opportunity to start the advantageous state in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high. It also makes it possible to consider people's emotions. Note that any effect executing means may be used to perform the special notification.

In addition, in the first game machine, when the special notification is made, the advantageous state that should have been originally started from the next game is started from the current game. As a result, the player can naturally perform the stop operation according to the special notification, thereby preventing the player from having a sense of incongruity even when such a special notification is given. can.

Further, in the first gaming machine, when a winning combination of special symbols is displayed in a state in which granting of rights is not suppressed, a special notification (e.g., output of a special winning sound) is performed. On the other hand, in a state in which the granting of the right is suppressed, it is not possible to make a special notification when a winning combination is won and a combination of special symbols is displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that the winning of the fixed combination was a useless win, for example. That is, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the opportunity to start the advantageous state in a state where the granting of rights is suppressed, it is possible to prevent the gambling nature from becoming excessively high. It also makes it possible to consider people's emotions. Note that any effect execution means may be used to perform the special notification.

Further, in the first gaming machine, it is determined whether or not a special notification is to be made, depending on whether or not a winning combination has been won, whether or not a combination of special symbols has been displayed, and whether or not a special notification has been made. I am trying to decide. This makes it possible to more appropriately manage the situation in which the special notification is made.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the advantageous interval game number counter and the advantageous interval payout number counter perform counting regardless of the amount of gaming value betted. Normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (payout number) can be executed.

In addition, in the first gaming machine, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter perform counting in the 3-coin bet state, but do not count in the 2-coin betting state. Therefore, in the three-bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (payout number) can be executed, but in the two-bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit It does not allow the transaction (payout number) to be performed. Therefore, in a two-bet state, the execution of the normal limit process (number of games) or the normal limit process (number of payouts) may forcibly end a series of advantageous intervals even during the pseudo bonus.

In the first gaming machine, for example, the odds of winning a small combination and the number of medals to be paid out are different between the 3-coin bet state and the 2-coin bet state (see FIGS. 10 to 15). Playing a game with two bets is more disadvantageous to the player than playing a game with . However, the method in which the player is more disadvantaged when playing a game with two bets is not limited to this. For example, if a game is played with two bets during the pseudo bonus, the procedure for the stop operation may not be reported, thereby disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, in the first gaming machine, when a game is played with a first amount (for example, "three") of game value betted, a series of advantageous intervals is forced in the middle of an advantageous state. A series of advantageous intervals can be ended within a certain period of time in a natural flow following the end of an advantageous state without being terminated suddenly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from having a sense of distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling nature from becoming excessively high, so it is possible to consider the player's emotions. and On the other hand, when a game is played with a second amount of gaming value (for example, "two") betted, a series of advantageous intervals may be forcibly terminated in the middle of an advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to make the player realize that he or she did not play the game by the intended game method, so that the player can be urged to play the game by the intended game method.

It should be noted that, in the series of advantageous intervals, the case where the game is played with the second amount of game value betted is more disadvantageous to the player than the case where the game is played with the first amount of game value betted. Therefore, by enabling such a warning, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous state, and to prevent the player from playing the game in a game method not intended by the player. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to.

[5-5. Storage area configuration of the first gaming machine]
Next, referring to FIGS. 17 to 22, the storage area configuration of the first game machine will be described. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an example of a winning flag storage area, a winning operation flag storage area, and a symbol code storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an example of the carryover combination storing area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of a game state flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of the mode flag storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of the operation stop button storage area of the first gaming machine. Also, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of the pressing order storage area of the first gaming machine.

(Winning flag storage area, winning operation flag storage area, and pattern code storage area)
First, with reference to FIG. 17, configurations of a winning flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), a prize operation flag storage area (display combination storage area), and a symbol code storage area will be described. In addition, in the first game machine, the winning flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area, and the symbol code storage area have the same data configuration.

Each storage area described above is composed of storage areas 1 to 26 each represented by 1-byte data. The data stored in each storage area is only 1-byte data in the "data" column in FIG. 17, but for convenience of explanation, in FIG. (In FIG. 17, the symbols of the reel 3L, the symbols of the reel 3C, and the symbols of the reel 3R are described in this order) and the contents thereof (see FIGS. 11 to 14) are also described.

The data stored in the winning flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination (that is, the type of symbol combination permitted to be displayed in the current game). is used to For example, when 2BB is won in the current game (when it is carried over), bit 0 of the storage area 1 is stored with "1".

The data stored in the winning operation flag storage area allows the main CPU 101 to identify the type of combination of symbols corresponding to the display combination (that is, the type of combination of symbols displayed on the activated line in the current game). used to For example, when a combination of 2BB symbols is displayed on the active line in the current game, bit 0 of the storage area 1 is stored with "1".

The data stored in the symbol code storage area enables the main CPU 101 to identify the types of symbol combinations that can still be displayed on the active line in the current game, at least while any of the reels is spinning. used for For example, when at least one of the reels is spinning in the current game, if a combination of symbols related to 2BB can be displayed on the active line, bit 0 of the storage area 1 is set to "1". is stored.

(Storage area for carryover combination)
Next, referring to FIG. 18, the configuration of the carryover combination storing area will be described. The carryover combination storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data.

As a result of the internal lottery process, when a bonus combination of "F_2BB" (2BB) or "F_3BB" (3BB) is determined as an internal winning combination, these bonus combinations are stored as carryover combinations in the carryover combination storage area ( "1" is stored in the corresponding bit). The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is held without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. Further, while the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination (bonus combination) is stored in the winning flag storage area in addition to the internal winning combination (small combination/replay combination) determined by the internal lottery process. be done.

(Game state flag storage area)
Next, with reference to FIG. 19, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described. The game state flag storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. For example, if the current gaming state is the 2BB state, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area.

In addition, since the RT state is not provided in the first gaming machine, the area indicating the type of the RT state is not provided in the game state flag storage area shown in FIG. If so, "1" is stored in the bit of the storage area corresponding to the current RT state. In the first game machine, data indicating the type of game state (mode) during the advantageous section is separately stored in a mode flag storage area described later, and is stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. You can also The same applies to the non-advantageous and advantageous game sections. It can be managed by providing an advantageous section flag storage area (not shown), or it can be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area. The same applies to game states such as AT state and ART state. An AT state (ART state) flag storage area (not shown) may be provided for management, or may be stored and managed in this game state flag storage area.

(mode flag storage area)
Next, the configuration of the mode flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The mode flag storage area is composed of a storage area 1 and a storage area 2 each represented by 1-byte data. For example, if the current mode is the start mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of storage area 1; Also, for example, if the current mode is the heaven A mode, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the storage area 2. FIG. In the first gaming machine, the pseudo-bonus state is also managed as one of the modes.

(operation stop button storage area)
Next, referring to FIG. 21, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. Bits 0 to 2 of the operation stop button storage area store data indicating the type of stop button that has already been operated (type of reel that has stopped), and bits 4 to 6 store data indicating the type of stop button that has not yet been operated. Stores data indicating the type (type of spinning reel).

For example, if the stop button 8L is the stop button pressed this time, ie, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, if the stop button 8L is a stop button that has not been pressed yet, that is, if it is a valid stop button, bit 4 stores "1". The main CPU 101 identifies the stop button that has been pushed this time and the stop button that has not been pushed yet based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

(Press order storage area)
Next, referring to FIG. 22, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described. The pressing order storage area is composed of a storage area represented by 1-byte data. The pressing order indicates the pressing order of the stop buttons, that is, the pressing order (hitting order).

For example, when all the reels are rotating, "1" is stored in bits 0 to 5 of the pressing order storage area. Then, when the stop button 8L is pressed (because it is the "left" first stop), bits 0 and 1 will still contain "1", but bits 2-5 will contain "0". will be stored. Next, when the stop button 8C is pressed (because of the "left" first stop and the "middle" second stop), bit 0 remains stored with "1", but bit 1 "0" is stored. The main CPU 101 identifies the pressing order of the current game based on the data stored in the pressing order storage area.

[6. Processing by main control circuit]
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 using each program will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 32. FIG. In addition, in the explanation of the various processes shown below, there are cases where one specific example of the processing contents is explained using the specifications of the first gaming machine, but the processing contents of the various processes shown below are limited to this. not a thing

[6-1. Main processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 23, main processing (main operation processing) executed by main CPU 101 of main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the main processing. FIG. 23 also shows power-on processing that is executed prior to the start of the main processing.

First, when power is supplied to the pachi-slot machine 1 (when the power is turned on), the main CPU 101 performs power-on processing (S1). In this process, various processes required when the power is turned on are performed. The details of the power-on processing will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing when one game ends (S2). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. Here, the designated storage area is, for example, a storage area such as a winning flag storage area or a winning operation flag storage area that requires data to be erased for each unit game (game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S3). In this process, for example, the input states of the medal sensor 31S, the bet switch 6S, the start switch 7S, etc. are checked, and various processes necessary at the start of the game are performed. The details of the medal acceptance/start check process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs random number acquisition processing (S4). In this process, random numbers for internal lottery (for example, the range of 0 to 65535) and random numbers for effects used in various lotteries related to game characteristics (other random numbers for lottery) (for example, the range of 0 to 65535, or 0 to 255 range), etc., and stores the various extracted random numbers in a random number storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103 . It should be noted that the manner in which various random numbers are obtained is not limited to the one described above. A necessary number of random numbers can be appropriately obtained from each predetermined numerical range (for example, the range of 0 to 65535, the range of 0 to 32767, the range of 0 to 255, or the range of 0 to 127). .

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs internal lottery processing (S5). In this process, various processes necessary for determining the internal winning combination are performed based on the internal lottery table and the internal lottery random number value corresponding to the current gaming state and the like. Details of the internal lottery process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state control process (S6). In this processing, when a transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on a determined internal winning combination) at the start of a game, the game state is transitioned according to the satisfied transition condition. Alternatively, various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state are performed. The details of the game start state control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs start command generation and storage processing (S7). In this process, start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in a communication data storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103 . The data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see S204 in FIG. 32), which will be described later. Also, the methods of generating, storing, and transmitting data for other commands are basically the same.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a game start main effect control process (S8). In this process, when various effects are to be performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) when the game is started, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when a lock effect is performed at the start of a game, execution of the lock effect is controlled. Also, if this includes a pseudo-game, it controls the progress of the pseudo-game (or notification about the pseudo-game). Further, for example, in the AT state, when the information of the stop operation is notified by the instruction monitor, the notification mode is controlled. Although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop initialization processing (S9). In this process, based on the internal winning combination, game state, etc., various information necessary for stop control such as the type of stop table used in the current game and the type of attraction priority table are set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel rotation start processing (S10). This processing requests the start of rotation of all reels. When all the reels are requested to start rotating, the reel control process (see S203 in FIG. 32), which will be described later, controls the driving of the stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R, thereby causing the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to rotate. rotation is started. Each reel that has started to rotate is accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, after which the constant speed is maintained. Although details are omitted, reel rotation start command generation and storage processing is performed in this processing.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs attraction priority storage processing (S11). In this process, for each symbol (symbol position) of the rotating reel (all reels in this case), the set internal winning combination and the set attraction priority table are referred to determine the attraction priority. The data shown is acquired and stored in an attraction priority data storage area (not shown). Although illustration is omitted, a pattern code storage process, which will be described later, is performed prior to this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop control processing (S12). In this process, the rotation of the relevant reel is stopped based on the determined internal winning combination (or information related to various stop controls set accordingly) and the stop operation mode of each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R. perform various processing necessary for Details of the reel stop control process will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs winning operation determination processing (S13). In this process, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line is any combination of symbols defined in the symbol combination table. For example, it is determined whether or not there is a bit in which "1" is stored in the winning operation flag storage area. Although the details are omitted, in this process, a winning actuation command generating and storing process is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs medal payout/re-game operation processing (S14). In this process, if the combination of symbols determined in the above-described winning operation determination process is a combination of symbols related to a minor combination, the corresponding number of medals is paid out. Various processes necessary for activating a replay in a game are performed. It should be noted that, for example, if the combination of symbols determined in the above-described winning operation determination process is the combination of symbols related to the replay combination, the same value as the number of bets in the current game is set in the automatic insertion medal counter, which will be described later. process. Also, in this process, a medal payout signal corresponding to the number of medals to be paid out is output from the external centralized terminal board 55 .

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a game end state control process (S15). In this processing, when a transition condition is satisfied (for example, based on a combination of displayed symbols) at the end of a game, the game state is transitioned according to the satisfied transition condition. Alternatively, various processes necessary for managing the game period of the current game state are performed. The details of the state control process at the time of game end will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs a main effect control process at the end of the game (S16). In this process, when various effects are performed under the control of the main control circuit 100 side (main side) when the game ends, various processes necessary for performing the effects are performed. For example, when the lock effect is performed at the end of the game, the execution of the lock effect is controlled. Also, if this includes a pseudo-game, it controls the progress of the pseudo-game (or notification about the pseudo-game). Although details are omitted, when a lock effect is performed, a lock command generation and storage process is performed in this process.

Thus, in the pachi-slot machine 1, one unit game is controlled by performing the processes of S2 to S16 described above, and progress of the game is controlled by repeating these processes. It should be noted that it is possible to configure so that processes other than these processes are appropriately performed as necessary, or it is possible to configure so that some of these processes are not performed. In other words, the various types of processing described above are merely examples.

(Processing at power-on)
Next, with reference to FIG. 24, the power-on processing performed in S1 of the main processing described above will be described. Note that FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the power-on process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process (not shown) when the power is turned on, and then performs a write test of the main RAM 103. As a result of the test, it is determined whether or not writing to the main RAM 103 was performed normally ( S21). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an abnormality has occurred in the main RAM 103 .

When the main CPU 101 determines that writing to the main RAM 103 has been performed normally (YES in S21), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state (S22). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting change is possible.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the ON state (YES in S22), the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing when changing the setting (S23). In this process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 103 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area for carryover combinations, a game state flag storage area, a mode flag storage area, or the like, in which data must be erased when settings are changed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs initialization command generation and storage processing (S24). In this process, data of an initialization command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 indicating that the setting change process has started is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting change processing (S25). In this process, after the main RAM 103 is initialized by accepting the above-described set value determination operation or set value confirmation operation, a new set value is set (stored) in a set value storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103. be done. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key-shaped switch 52 is turned off (S26). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting changeable state has ended after the setting value is newly set.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is not in the OFF state (NO in S26), the main CPU 101 waits the processing until the setting key-shaped switch 52 is in the OFF state. On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key-type switch 52 is turned off (YES in S26), an initialization command generation and storage process is performed (S27). In this process, the data of the initialization command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 indicating that the setting change process is completed is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S22 that the setting key-shaped switch 52 is not in the ON state (NO in S22), it determines whether or not the backup data is normal (S28). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the various information backed up when the power supply to the pachi-slot machine 1 is interrupted (at the time of power failure) is normal.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the backup data is normal (YES in S28), the main CPU 101 performs game return processing (S29). In this process, the process of restoring the pachi-slot machine 1 to the state before the power interruption is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the power-on process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S21 that the writing to the main RAM 103 was not performed normally (S21 is NO), and if it determines in S28 that the backup data is not normal (S28 is NO), an error occurs when the power is turned on. Processing is performed (S30). An error generated by this power-on error processing is not resolved by the reset operation described above, but is resolved by setting a new set value. Therefore, after the power-on error processing, the main CPU 101 turns off the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 once, and thereafter, until the setting value is newly set (until the above-described processing of S22 to S26 is performed), the main CPU 101 operates normally. It does not move to the processing (from S2 in FIG. 23).

(Medal reception/start check processing)
Next, referring to FIG. 25, the medal acceptance/start check process performed in S3 of the main process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 25 is a flow chart showing an example of the medal reception/start check process procedure.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatically inserted medal counter is "0" (S41). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a replay combination has been won in the previous unit game (whether or not a replay has been activated).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatically inserted medal counter is not "0" (NO in S41), the main CPU 101 performs automatic inserted medal processing (S42). In this process, the same number of medals as the medals inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted. Also, although the details are omitted, when automatic insertion is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55 .

When the main CPU 101 determines in S41 that the value of the automatically inserted medal counter is "0" (YES in S41), and after the processing in S42, the main CPU 101 performs medal auxiliary storage switch check processing (S43). In this process, it is determined whether or not the auxiliary medal storage switch 33S is in the ON state (that is, whether or not a certain number or more of medals are stored in the auxiliary medal storage 33). If it is determined to be on, a medal auxiliary storage error is generated. In this case, the processing waits until the error is resolved. Also, if it is determined that the medal auxiliary storage switch 33S is not in the ON state, this processing is terminated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs medal insertion state check processing (S44). In this process, the current number of bets and the number of credits are checked. A state in which acceptance is possible (a state in which betting operations can be accepted) is established (acceptance of medals is permitted). If a selector error has occurred, the process waits until the error is resolved.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not medals can be accepted (S45). When the main CPU 101 determines that medals can be accepted (YES in S45), the main CPU 101 performs medal insertion check processing (S46). In this process, the number of bets and the number of credits are updated based on the detection result of the medal sensor 31S and the detection result of the bet switch 6S. Further, although the details are omitted, when a bet operation is performed, a medal insertion command generation and storage process is performed in this process. Also, in this process, a medal insertion signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55 .

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is possible to insert medals or credit (S47). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is not "50". When the main CPU 101 determines that medal insertion or credit is not possible (that is, the number of bets is "3" and the number of credits is also "50") (NO in S49). , the reception of medals is prohibited (S48). That is, the main CPU 101 sets a state in which it is not possible to accept medals (a state in which it is not possible to accept betting operations).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S45 that medals cannot be accepted (NO in S45), if it determines in S47 that medals can be inserted or credited (YES in S47), and After the process of S48, it is determined whether or not the number of inserted coins is the game startable number (S49). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the current number of bets is "2" or "3".

When the main CPU 101 determines that the number of inserted coins is the game-startable number (YES in S49), it determines whether or not the start switch 7S is turned on (S50). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the player has performed a start operation.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 7S is turned on (YES in S50), it prohibits acceptance of medals (S51). After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance/start check process.

If the main CPU 101 determines in S49 that the inserted number is not the game startable number (NO in S49), and if it determines in S50 that the start switch 7S is not in the ON state (NO in S50), the main CPU 101 processes is returned to S44.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, with reference to FIG. 26, the internal lottery process performed in S5 of the main process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs setting value/number of inserted medal check processing (S61). In this process, the set value and the number of bets in the current unit game are checked. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 sets an internal lottery table according to the set values, the number of bets, the game state, etc. (S62). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number for internal lottery from the random number storage area (S63). That is, the main CPU 101 acquires the internal lottery random number data acquired in S4 of the main processing described above. In this process, if it is determined that the set value is other than "1" to "6" or the number of bets is other than "1" to "3", the main CPU 101 determines that a serious error has occurred. Then, the above-described power-on error processing (see S30 in FIG. 24) is executed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs internal winning combination determination processing (S64). In this process, the acquired random number for internal lottery is sequentially updated (for example, updated by addition) using the lottery value of each internal winning combination specified in the set internal lottery table, and the update result becomes a predetermined result. (for example, overflow). When a predetermined result is obtained, the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination of the current unit game. It should be noted that, if the predetermined result is not obtained even if all the internal winning combinations are determined, the result of the current unit game is "loss" ("loss" is determined as the internal winning combination).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an internal winning combination has been determined (S65). When the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination has not been determined (NO in S65), the process returns to S64. That is, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the internal winning combinations to be determined (and also sequentially updates the random number for the internal lottery) until determination is made for all internal winning combinations (or until the internal winning combination is determined halfway through). The process of S64 is repeated until it is determined).

If the main CPU 101 determines that an internal winning combination has been determined (YES in S65), the main CPU 101 determines whether the determined internal winning combination is a non-carryover combination (i.e., not a bonus combination that is a carryover combination, but a small combination or a replay combination). (S66). When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is the carryover non-target combination (YES in S66), it updates the winning flag storage area (S67). In this process, the data in the winning flag storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit of the data corresponding to the combination of symbols allowed to be displayed corresponding to the determined internal winning combination in the winning flag storage area.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S66 that the determined internal winning combination is not the carryover non-target combination (NO in S66), and after the process of S67, determines whether the determined internal winning combination is the carryover target combination ( That is, it is determined whether or not it is a bonus combination that is a carryover combination (S68).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the determined internal winning combination is the carryover combination (YES in S68), it determines whether or not the data in the carryover combination storage area is "0" (S69). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not any bonus combination has been carried over. When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storing area is "0" (YES in S69), the main CPU 101 updates the carryover combination storing area (S70). In this process, the data in the carryover combination storage area is updated based on the internal winning combination determined in the process of S64. That is, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in the bit of the data corresponding to the combination of symbols whose display is permitted corresponding to the determined internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S68 that the determined internal winning combination is not the carryover-target combination (NO in S68), or determines in S69 that the data in the carryover combination storing area is not "0" (NO in S69). ), and after the processing of S70, it is determined again whether or not the data in the carryover combination storing area is "0" (S71).

When the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the carryover combination storing area is not "0" (NO in S71), it updates the winning flag storing area (S72). In this process, the data stored in the carryover combination storing area is reflected in the data in the winning flag storing area. That is, when a bonus combination is carried over (or a win is made in the current unit game), the main CPU 101 stores data corresponding to the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed corresponding to the bonus combination in the winning flag storage area. store "1" in the bit.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S71 that the data in the carryover combination storing area is "0" (YES in S71), and after the processing in S72, the main CPU 101 performs sub-flag setting processing (S73). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, a non-advantageous interval sub-flag and an advantageous interval-winning sub-flag are set based on the internal winning combination. In this process, for example, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor may be set in the AT state. After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the internal lottery process.

(State control process at game start)
Next, with reference to FIG. 27, the game start state control process performed in S6 of the main process described above will be described. FIG. 27 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the game start state control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition satisfaction check process (S81). In this processing, when starting a game, it is checked whether or not a transition condition for shifting from one game state to another game state is established. For example, in the case of shifting to a flag state as a predetermined RT state based on winning of a predetermined bonus combination, whether or not a predetermined bonus combination has been won is checked in this process. In the case of the first gaming machine, the interval between flags is not configured as an RT state (that is, as a game state stored in the game state flag storage area), so checking here is unnecessary. Also, for example, if there is a specific RT state that starts or ends by playing a specific number of games after a specific transition condition is established, this specific number of games can be managed in this process.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a transition condition for transitioning to any game state is established (S82). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for shifting to any game state is established (YES in S82), it updates the game state flag storage area (S83). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the established transition condition. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set game state (S84). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state, or set the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, in response to the transition of the game state. In this case, such setting processing is performed as appropriate.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S82 that the transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states is not established (NO in S82), and after the processing in S84, the current game section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S85). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S85), the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section start condition establishment check processing (S86). In this process, when starting a game, it is checked whether or not a transition condition (advantageous section start condition) for shifting from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section is established. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-described advantageous interval transition lottery is performed, and it is checked whether or not the lottery result is for starting the advantageous interval.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the condition for starting the advantageous section is satisfied (S87). When the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous interval are not satisfied (NO in S87), the main CPU 101 ends the state control process at the start of the game. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for starting the advantageous interval is satisfied (YES in S87), the main CPU 101 performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous interval (S88). That is, the main CPU 101 starts (sets) an advantageous section. In this process, in response to the start of the advantageous interval, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) relating to various limit processes start counting (that is, start monitoring the game period of a series of advantageous intervals). is set as appropriate.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S89). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the advantageous interval that has started. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, the transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-described advantageous zone transition lottery is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S90). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. Such setting processing is appropriately performed when necessary. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, when shifting to the pseudo bonus according to the set destination mode, "55 games" is set as the game period, and the processing shifts to the end mode. In this case, "32 games" is set as the game period, and in the case of shifting to other modes, the number of ceiling games corresponding to each mode is set. In addition, lottery values (lottery table) in various lotteries (see FIGS. 7 and 8) are set. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S85 that the current game section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (NO in S85), the main CPU 101 performs a game start processing during an advantageous section (S91). The details of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous interval will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section end condition satisfaction check processing (S92). In this processing, when starting a game, it is checked whether or not a transition condition (advantageous section end condition) for shifting from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section is established. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the operation conditions for various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of games in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or if the current mode is the end mode, , it is checked whether 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (S93). When the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S93), the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of the advantageous section (S94). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous interval, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processing, the mode (game state) during the advantageous interval, and the game period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) ) etc. (that is, information on the advantageous section) is cleared. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for ending the advantageous section is not satisfied (NO in S93), the main CPU 101 ends the state control process at the start of the game.

(Processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 28, the process at the start of the game during the advantageous section, which is performed in S91 of the above-described state control process at the time of game start, will be described. Note that FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the process at the start of a game during an advantageous interval.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter updating processes (at the start of the game) (S101). In this process, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes based on the number of games played during the advantageous interval, various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game states) during the advantageous interval, or other counters Various counters for managing the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, decrement (add) 1 per game).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S102). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the specific mode (YES in S102), the main CPU 101 performs AT period management processing (at the start of the game) (S103). In this process, for example, when the AT state game period can be extended (for example, the number of games to be extended, the number of sets to be added, etc.) at the start of the game, it is determined whether or not such an extension execution condition is established. or extend the game period based on this determination result (if the game period in the AT state can be shortened, the shortening process is performed). In addition, in this process, the AT state game period may be managed regardless of whether it is extended, or the AT state game period is managed in the process of S101 described above, and only the process related to extension is performed in this process. may be performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-described 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, the 1G consecutive lottery is performed, and the pseudo bonus is extended according to the lottery result. processing is performed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs navigation setting processing (S104). In this process, information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information to be included in the start command, and the like are set. In addition, in this process, it may be possible to determine whether to generate navigation. That is, when the notification target role is won in the AT state, there may be cases where navigation does not necessarily occur. occurrence probability).

If the main CPU 101 determines in S102 that the specific mode is not in progress (NO in S102), and after S104, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied (S105). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S105), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S106). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the transferred advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-described mode transition lottery based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S107). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. Such setting processing is appropriately performed when necessary. In addition, in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the same process as the above-described process of S90 is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game start process during the advantageous interval. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S105), the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the time of starting the game during the advantageous interval.

27, the state control processing at the end of the game shown in FIG. 30, the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous interval shown in FIG. 28, and the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous interval shown in FIG. Basically, they have almost the same processing configuration. This process may be performed either when the game is started or when the game is finished (for example, a game state or mode transition, etc., which refers to a determined internal winning combination. As for the processing that should be reflected until the current game ends (or until the next game starts), it means that it can be performed on either side, and the same applies to both. It does not mean that the processing of is performed redundantly. Therefore, such processing may be performed either when the game is started or when the game is finished.

On the other hand, those that need to be processed when starting the game (for example, the above-mentioned navigation setting processing, etc.) are assumed to be executed when the game starts, and when the game ends. Those that need to be processed (for example, the process of referring to the combination of displayed symbols, etc.) may be executed when the game ends. Further, for example, a process that needs to be performed at a predetermined time after the start of the game but before the end of the game, or a process that should be performed (for example, a process that refers to the stop operation mode of the first stop operation, etc.) ) can be assumed to be performed at that time.

(reel stop control process)
Next, referring to FIG. 29, the reel stop control process performed in S12 of the main process described above will be described. Note that FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotational speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (for example, 80 rpm/1 minute) (that is, whether they are rotating at a constant speed) (S111). When the main CPU 101 determines that all the reels are not rotating at a constant speed (NO in S111), the main CPU 101 waits until all the reels are rotating at a constant speed. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the reels are rotating at a constant speed (YES in S111), each reel is permitted to stop (S112). That is, the main CPU 101 activates each stop button. Also, along with this, the operation stop button storage area is updated (in the case of the first game machine, for example, bits 4 to 6 of the operation stop button storage area are stored with "1").

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been operated (S113). When the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has not been operated (NO in S113), the main CPU 101 waits for processing until a valid stop button is operated. In the case of performing automatic stop control, it is possible to measure this standby time and perform automatic stop control when the measurement result reaches a predetermined time.

When determining that a valid stop button has been operated (YES in S113), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area (S114). In the case of the first gaming machine, for example, when the first stop operation is performed on the reel 3L (when the stop button 8L is pressed), in this process, the operation stop button storage area bit "1" is stored in 0, and bit 4 is updated to "0". Also, bits 2 to 5 of the pressing order storage area are updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines the reel to be controlled from the operation stop button (S115). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the reel 3L is determined as the reel to be controlled.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position from the symbol counter (S116). The symbol counter is configured as a counter for grasping symbol position data (for example, "0" to "19"). In this process, for example, when the stop button 8L is pressed, the symbol position data of the middle area of the reel 3L when the stop button 8L is pressed is stored as the stop start position.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs the number of sliding symbols determination process (S117). In this process, for example, the number of sliding symbols specified in the above-mentioned stop table and the data in the above-mentioned attraction priority data storage area are referred to determine the most appropriate number of sliding symbols (symbol movement amount).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 stores the expected stop position from the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols (S118). In this process, the symbol position data of the position where the symbol finally stops is stored as the expected stop position based on the stop start position stored in the process of S116 described above and the number of sliding symbols determined in the process of S117 described above. .

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel stop command generation and storage processing (S119). In this process, the reel stop command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 is generated, and the generated data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103 . Note that the reel stop command can include parameters that can specify not only the expected stop position but also the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs pattern code storage processing (S120). In this process, the symbol code storage area is updated while also referring to the symbol type (symbol code) of the expected stop position on the reel for which the expected stop position has already been determined. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a valid stop button (S121). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is still a spinning reel (whether or not all the reels have been stopped).

When the main CPU 101 determines that there is a valid stop button (YES in S121), the main CPU 101 performs control change processing (S122). In this process, according to the player's stop operation mode so far, for example, when it is necessary to change the stop table or the attraction priority table set in the above reel stop initial setting process, such a Reconfigure various information necessary for stop control.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs attraction priority storage processing (S123). In this process, each symbol (symbol position) on the rotating reel is set as a set internal winning combination while also referring to the type of symbol at the expected stop position on the reel whose expected stop position has already been determined. The attraction priority order table is referenced to obtain data indicating the attraction priority order, and the acquired data is stored in the attraction priority order data storage area. After this process, the main CPU 101 returns the process to S113. Further, when determining that there is no effective stop button (NO in S121), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process.

(State control process at game end)
Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the state control process at the end of the game, which is performed in S15 of the main process described above, will be described. Note that FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the state control process at the end of the game.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a game state transition condition establishment check process (S131). In this processing, it is checked whether or not a transition condition for shifting from one game state to another game state is established when the game ends. For example, when shifting to a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state based on the display of a predetermined combination of symbols, it is checked in this process whether or not the predetermined combination of symbols has been displayed. In addition, in the case of a predetermined RT state or a predetermined bonus state, it is checked in this process whether or not conditions for terminating these game states are established. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this processing, for example, it is checked whether or not a combination of 2BB or 3BB symbols is displayed. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, it is checked whether or not the end condition of these game states is established by paying out medals.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a transition condition for transitioning to any game state is established (S132). When the main CPU 101 determines that the transition condition for shifting to any game state is established (YES in S132), it updates the game state flag storage area (S133). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the game state according to the established transition condition. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, when a combination of symbols related to 2BB or 3BB is displayed, "1" is stored in bit 0 or bit 1 of the gaming state flag storage area, and 2BB is displayed. Set state or 3BB state. Further, for example, in the case of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, if the end conditions for these game states are met, bit 0 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area is updated to "0".

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set game state (S134). In this process, it is necessary to set, for example, the game period of the game state, or set the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process, in response to the transition of the game state. In this case, such setting processing is performed as appropriate. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the 2BB state is set, the number of payouts as the end condition is set to "1", and if the 3BB state is set, the number of payouts is set to "1". If so, "176" is set as the number of payouts as the termination condition.

When the main CPU 101 determines in S132 that the transition condition for transitioning to one of the game states is not established (NO in S132), and after the processing in S134, the current game section is a non-advantageous section. It is determined whether or not there is (S135). When the main CPU 101 determines that the current game section is a non-advantageous section (YES in S135), the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section start condition establishment check processing (S136). As described above, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, so this process is the same as the above-described process of S86 (game start state control process).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the conditions for starting the advantageous section are satisfied (S137). When the main CPU 101 determines that the conditions for starting the advantageous interval are not satisfied (NO in S137), the main CPU 101 ends the state control process at the end of the game. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for starting the advantageous interval is satisfied (YES in S137), the main CPU 101 performs setting processing at the start of the advantageous interval (S138). As described above, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, so this process is the same as the above-described process of S88 (game start state control process).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S139). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the advantageous interval that has started. As described above, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, so this process is the same as the above-described process of S89 (game start state control process).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S140). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. Such setting processing is appropriately performed when necessary. As described above, only the process referring to the determined internal winning combination is possible in the non-advantageous section, so this process is the same as the above-described process of S90 (game start state control process).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S135 that the current game section is not a non-advantageous section (that is, it is an advantageous section) (NO in S135), the main CPU 101 performs processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section (S141). The details of the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section will be described later.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs advantageous section end condition satisfaction check processing (S142). In this process, when the game ends, it is checked whether or not a transition condition (advantageous section end condition) for shifting from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section is established. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, if the operating conditions for various limit processes are satisfied based on the number of payouts in the advantageous section (see FIG. 16), or if the current mode is the end mode , it is checked whether 32 games have passed.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (S143). When the main CPU 101 determines that the condition for ending the advantageous section is satisfied (YES in S143), the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process at the end of the advantageous section (S144). That is, the main CPU 101 ends the advantageous section and sets the non-advantageous section. In this process, depending on the end of the advantageous interval, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processing, the mode (game state) during the advantageous interval, and the game period of the mode (the number of ceiling games, etc.) ) etc. (that is, information on the advantageous section) is cleared. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end state control process. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied (NO in S143), the main CPU 101 ends the state control process at the end of the game.

(Processing at the end of the game during the advantageous section)
Next, referring to FIG. 31, the process at the end of the game during the advantageous interval performed at S141 of the above-described state control process at the time of game end will be described. Note that FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the process at the end of the game during the advantageous interval.

First, the main CPU 101 performs various counter updating processes (at the end of the game) (S151). In this process, for example, various counters (see FIG. 16) related to various limit processes based on the number of payouts during the advantageous interval, various counters for managing the game period such as various modes (game states) during the advantageous interval, or other Various counters for managing the degree of advantage are updated according to predetermined update conditions (for example, the number of payouts, the number of times a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed, the mode of stop operation, etc.).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is in the specific mode (AT state) (S152). When the main CPU 101 determines that it is in the specific mode (YES in S152), the main CPU 101 performs AT period management processing (at the end of the game) (S153). In this process, for example, when the game period in the AT state is allowed to be extended (for example, the number of games to be extended or the number of sets to be added) at the end of the game, it is determined whether or not such an extension execution condition is established. or extend the game period based on this determination result (if the game period in the AT state can be shortened, the shortening process is performed). In addition, in this process, the AT state game period may be managed regardless of whether it is extended, or the AT state game period is managed in the process of S151 described above, and only the process related to extension is performed in this process. may be performed. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the above-described 1G consecutive lottery is performed based on the sub-flag for winning the advantageous section, and the process for extending the pseudo bonus is performed according to the lottery result.

When the main CPU 101 determines that it is not in the specific mode (NO in S152), and after S153, it determines whether or not the mode transition condition is satisfied (S154). In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, it is determined whether or not the transition destination mode is determined according to the lottery result of the mode transition lottery described above based on the sub-flag at the time of advantageous zone winning.

When the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is satisfied (YES in S154), the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (S155). That is, the main CPU 101 sets the mode (game state) during the transferred advantageous section. In the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the transition destination mode determined according to the lottery result of the above-described mode transition lottery based on the advantageous zone winning sub-flag is set.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs setting processing according to the set mode (S156). In this process, depending on the set mode, the game period of the mode (including the number of ceiling games, etc.) is set, and the lottery value (lottery table) in various lottery processes other than the internal lottery process is set. Such setting processing is appropriately performed when necessary. In addition, in the case of the first gaming machine, in this process, for example, the same process as the above-described process of S140 is performed. After this process, the main CPU 101 ends the game end process during the advantageous interval. Further, when the main CPU 101 determines that the mode transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S154), the main CPU 101 ends the processing at the end of the game during the advantageous interval.

[6-2. Periodical interrupt processing]
First, with reference to FIG. 32, the periodic interrupt processing executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 100 will be described. Note that FIG. 32 is a flow chart showing an example of the procedure of the periodic interrupt process.

Here, in the present embodiment, the periodic interrupt process cycle (one interrupt time) is set to "1.1172 ms". However, the periodic interrupt processing cycle is not limited to this. For example, the periodic interrupt processing may be executed at a cycle different from this, or even if the same cycle is set as this, some or all of the processing may be interrupted by an actual processing. By setting the number of times of interruption to "2" or more, the periodical interruption process may be executed at a period different from this.

First, the main CPU 101 saves a register (S201). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs input port check processing (S202). In this process, the input states (on state or off state) of various sensors and switches connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are checked. For example, the input state at the time of the previous interrupt is compared with the input state at the time of the current interrupt to check whether or not there has been a change in the input state. The change is stored in the port storage area 0 (not shown), and the input state not related to the change is stored in the input port storage area 1 (not shown) of the main RAM 103 as it is.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs reel control processing (S203). In this processing, the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R are controlled to be driven, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are controlled to rotate and stop. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs communication data transmission processing (S204). In this process, each parameter of each command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 . In this process, if no command data is stored in the communication data storage area, the data stored in the input port storage areas 0 and 1 are sent to the sub control circuit 200 as an input state command.

In the present embodiment, after various command data are once stored in the communication data storage area, they are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 in the periodic interrupt process. Alternatively, the data may be directly stored in a communication circuit (not shown) provided in the main control circuit 100 and transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 without being stored. Further, although detailed description is omitted in this embodiment, various command data are transmitted to the sub control circuit 200 by serial communication. may be configured to be transmitted to

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs 7-segment LED drive processing (S205). In this process, the display contents of, for example, the information display device 14 connected to the main control board 71 (including those connected via the main relay board 73) are controlled. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs timer update processing (S206). In this process, various timers managed by the main control circuit 100 are updated.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs error detection processing (S207). In this process, it is detected whether or not various error states have occurred based on the input state and the like checked in S202 described above. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs door open/close check processing (S208). In this process, for example, based on the input state of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56, the opening/closing state of the lower door mechanism DD is checked. A security signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 55 when various error states occur and when the input state of the door opening/closing monitoring switch 56 is in the open state (off state).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 performs register restoration processing (S209). After this process, the main CPU 101 terminates the periodic interrupt process.

[7. Processing by sub control circuit]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, an overview of the sub-side control processing executed by the sub-CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 using each program will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of an outline of sub-side control processing.

In the pachi-slot machine 1, various restrictions are placed on the main control circuit 100 side (including the main control board 71 and the main control board case) from the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent acts and unauthorized modifications. The 200 side (including the sub-control board 72 and the sub-control board case) is not so restricted. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 (and the sub-control circuit 200) can be used in various ways depending on the type and number of connected production devices, the type of production performed by the production device, and the manufacturing cost. configuration can be used. This is the reason why the term "outline" is used in FIG.

First, when the power is turned on, the sub CPU 201 performs the power-on processing similarly to the main CPU 101 (S301 and S302). In this process, it detects whether or not an abnormality has occurred when the power is turned on, initializes the data stored in the sub RAM 203, and performs various tasks necessary for performing various production execution control processes described later. is executed.

Further, when receiving a command transmitted from the main control circuit 100, the sub CPU 201 performs control processing for effect execution at the time of command reception (S303 and S304). In this processing, for example, when an initialization command is received, the parameter information of the received initialization command is referred to, and if the setting has been changed, the initialization processing is executed as appropriate on the sub side, and the setting has not been changed. If so, the sub-side also performs a process of returning to the state before the power interruption.

Also, for example, when a start command is received, the parameter information of the received start command is referred to, and if the non-AT state, the content of the effect that suggests or notifies the internal winning combination, game state, etc. (as necessary (by lottery), and controls various production devices so that the production of the decided content is executed. In addition, if it is in the AT state, it determines the content of the effect for notifying the advantageous stop operation mode, and controls various effect devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed.

In addition, for example, when a lock command is received, the parameter information of the received lock command is referred to, the content of the effect linked with the content of the lock effect is determined, and various effects are performed so that the effect of the determined content is executed. control the device. Also, for example, when a reel stop command is received, the parameter information of the received reel stop command is referred to, and the stop start position and the planned stop position (or simply what stop operation was performed, etc.). To determine the content of performance and control various performance devices so that the performance of the determined content is executed. Further, for example, when a winning operation command is received, the parameter information of the received winning operation command is referred to, and when a privilege is granted, the content of the effect linked with the privilege to be granted is determined, and the determined content Control various production devices so that the production of is executed.

Further, the sub CPU 201 is connected to the sub-control board 72 (including those connected via the sub-relay board 74), for example, when the production buttons 10a and 10b are operated, the production is executed when the production button is operated. Control processing is performed (S305 and S306). In this process, for example, when an effect button is operated in accordance with the effect during execution of the operation-linked effect, various effect devices are controlled so that the content of the operation-linked effect changes. Further, for example, when a presentation button is operated to call up a user menu, which will be described later, during a non-game, control is performed to display the user menu. Also, when a presentation button is operated for selection/decision operation while the user menu is being displayed, control is performed according to these operations.

In addition, the sub CPU 201 performs other effect execution control processing when a trigger other than the above-described trigger is established (S307). In this process, for example, when the non-operation period during which no game-related operation or user-menu-related operation is performed reaches a predetermined period (for example, about 30 seconds), the content of the effect related to the demonstration state notification is determined and determined. Various production devices are controlled so that the production of the content is executed.

[8. Other functions of the pachislot machine]
As described above, the pachi-slot machine 1 has various functions for controlling games, various functions for controlling effects, and various configurations for realizing these functions. It can also have functions. An example of other functions on the player side and an example of other functions on the amusement arcade side will be described below.

[8-1. Player side]
For example, when a user menu is displayed by a player's performance operation, a desired menu is selected in the user menu, and further selection/decision operations are performed on the selected menu as appropriate, the player can obtain various information. , various settings can be made.

For example, when the "arrangement/payout table" is selected and determined, it is possible to confirm the game information indicating the arrangement of symbols in the pachislot machine 1, the specified combination of symbols, and the payout (details of benefits) at the time of winning. is displayed in the effect display section.

Also, for example, when "volume/light intensity adjustment" is selected/determined, the brightness of various display devices in the pachislot machine 1, the volume of sound output from the speaker group, or the light intensity of the lamp/LED group, etc. are set. A possible setting screen is displayed in the effect display section. In order to enable more detailed settings or to accept operations related to settings more easily at the time of such settings, various operation units for receiving the game operations of the player are can be used as a part of the operation unit that receives the operation related to (that is, the operation unit that receives the effect operation).

Further, for example, when "custom" is selected and determined, the performance mode in the pachislot machine 1 (for example, the type of character used for the performance (the type of the character (display mode) itself, the voice corresponding to the character or the type of costume or item (individual display mode) related to the character), the probability of occurrence of production (including the type of expectation at the time of occurrence of production, etc.), or the mode of suggestion or notification (performance execution timing etc.) is displayed in the effect display section. In order to enable more detailed settings or to accept operations related to settings more easily at the time of such settings, various operation units for receiving the game operations of the player are can be used as a part of the operation unit that receives the operation related to (that is, the operation unit that receives the effect operation).

Also, for example, when "Unimemo" is selected and determined, it is possible to receive information providing services using the player's portable terminal (for example, mobile phone, smart phone, etc.). In such an information providing service, for example, a player performs a login operation to start a game (the game may be started without a login operation), and when the game ends, a logout operation is performed to obtain game history information (for example, , how many games have been played in total, how many times an advantageous game state has occurred, how many cards have been obtained at maximum, etc.).

In addition, for example, the game history information includes information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed during the game and the types of music that can be output according to the result of the game (satisfaction of the release condition). It also includes information about accompanying benefits, such as information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed on the mobile terminal and the types of music that can be output.

It should be noted that various methods can be employed for the login/logout method in such an information providing service. For example, login/logout may be performed by using the player's terminal and having the player read a two-dimensional code displayed on the effect display unit, or the player may enter a password. or store the password (specifically, for example, when logging out at the end of the game, instead of the two-dimensional code, a character string of about 4 to 10 digits can be displayed as the password for the next input, and The password can be obtained by the player taking notes on paper or taking a picture with a mobile terminal, etc., and the password obtained in this way can be entered at the next login before the start of the game). - Logout may be performed. Further, it is also possible to perform login/logout by appropriately combining these methods.

[8-2. Amusement store side]
For example, a hall menu is displayed by a setting confirmation operation (setting change operation or other operation by the amusement hall manager) by the manager of the game parlor, and a desired menu is selected in the hall menu. Furthermore, when the selection/decision operation is appropriately performed for the selected menu, the manager of the game parlor can obtain various information and make various settings.

For example, when "time setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which enables setting of the date and time in the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG. Note that the date and time can be configured to be automatically updated, for example, in the sub-side power-on process (see S302 in FIG. 33).

Further, for example, when "total medal information" is selected/determined, history information indicating the number of inserted and the number of dispensed within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for seven business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed in the effect display section. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu.

Further, for example, when "setting change/confirmation history" is selected/determined, the number of setting change operations and setting confirmation operations within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for seven business days) in the pachislot machine 1 An information screen is displayed in the effect display section, in which history information indicating is recognizable. In addition, for example, when "error information history" is selected and determined, history information indicating the date and time of occurrence of an error in the pachislot machine 1 within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for 7 business days) and the content of the error. is displayed in the effect display section.

Further, for example, when "monitoring history" is selected and determined, the history information indicating the date and time when the door is opened within a predetermined period (for example, each business day for seven business days) in the pachi-slot machine 1 and the period thereof is displayed. An information screen that can be confirmed is displayed in the effect display section. Further, for example, when "warning setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section, which enables setting of various warning notification modes and frequencies in the pachi-slot machine 1 .

Further, for example, when the "power saving mode setting" is selected and determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section to allow setting of whether or not to activate the power saving function of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the like. Note that such a menu can also be configured as a menu in the user menu. In addition, in order to enable more detailed settings at the time of such settings, or to enable reception of operations related to settings more easily, various operating units for receiving game operations of the player are can be used as a part of the operation unit that receives the operation related to (that is, the operation unit that receives the effect operation).

Further, for example, when "stop setting" is selected/determined, a setting screen is displayed on the effect display section to enable setting of whether or not to activate the stop function of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the like. It should be noted that the stop function is a function that, when a predetermined operating condition is met, disables the game until the manager of the game parlor performs a release operation (for example, a reset operation). Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated by executing the limit process described above, or may be established in a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase interval, or an advantageous condition). It may be established when the section (any of the sections (including the effect section)) ends. Further, when the stop function is set to ON state, an automatic settlement function, which will be described later, may be set to ON state in conjunction with this.

Further, for example, when "automatic settlement setting" is selected/determined, a setting screen is displayed in the effect display section to enable setting of whether or not to activate the automatic settlement function in the pachi-slot machine 1, and the like. Note that the automatic settlement function is a function of automatically settlement of credits (that is, all of the credited gaming value is automatically returned) when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied. Further, the predetermined operating condition may be satisfied, for example, when the advantageous interval is forcibly terminated by executing the limit process described above, or may be established in a specific state (for example, a bonus state, an increase interval, or an advantageous condition). It may be established when the section (any of the sections (including the effect section)) ends. Further, when the automatic settlement function is set to ON state, the stop function may also be set to ON state in conjunction with this.

In addition, when setting the stop function and automatic settlement function, in order to enable more detailed settings, or to enable reception of operations related to settings more easily, various operation units that accept game operations of the player can be used as part of the operation unit that receives the operation related to the setting (that is, the operation unit that receives the effect operation). However, in this case, it is not desirable to unnecessarily increase the number of operation units that can be accepted, so only a specific operation unit (for example, a stop button) should be used as part of the operation unit that accepts operations related to the setting. It is good to be able to do it.

[9. Extension example]
So far, the pachislot machine 1 has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can be applied to gaming machines such as so-called "pachinko machines" and "slot machines", and similar effects can be obtained. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines as long as they are capable of performing a game (performing game control) in accordance with a game action (operation) of a player. Also, the configuration and functions of the gaming machine including the pachi-slot machine 1 are not limited to those described above, and various modifications and extensions are possible. Although it is only an example, such an extension example will be described below.

(pachinko machine)
A pachinko machine includes, for example, a game board having a game area where game balls can roll and flow down, a glass door including protective glass that protects the game area while making it visible from the outside, and an effect display device provided in a predetermined area of the game area. (It may be provided outside the game area), a payout unit that pays out game balls, and a board unit including various control boards that perform various controls related to games and effects. (sometimes simply referred to as a “frame” or the like).

In addition, on the front side of the pachinko machine, for example, there are a shooting handle as one of the player's operation means, an upper tray capable of storing game balls to be played, and a lower tray capable of storing paid-out game balls. etc. are provided. It should be noted that many of them are provided with the above-described production buttons and movable production devices. In addition, the game area includes, for example, a starting area through which a game ball can pass (sometimes referred to as a "starting opening"), a specific area (sometimes referred to as a "V winning opening", etc.), A variable winning device (sometimes referred to as a "large winning opening") that can change between a state in which a game ball is easy to win and a state in which it is difficult to win, and identification information (referred to as "symbols" A variable display device that can variably display (including "special design" and "normal design") is provided.

In the pachinko machine, a player operates a shooting handle to shoot game balls into a game area to play a game. For example, when the launched game ball passes through the starting area, the variable display is started. Also, at this time, the current state (for example, whether the probability variation game state is relatively high hit probability) and the probability according to the type of the start region, etc., whether to transition the game state (for example, game It is determined whether or not to shift to a big hit game state or a small hit game state that is advantageous to the player (that is, it is determined by lottery (or determination) whether or not to shift the game state). After that, when a condition for stopping the variable display (for example, the end of the set variable time period) is established, the variable display is stopped in a stop mode according to the determination result. At this time, if the determination result is to shift the game state (hit), the stop mode to be stopped also becomes a display result corresponding to the hit, and when the display result is displayed, it corresponds to the hit. Move to the game state to play. On the other hand, if the determination result does not cause the game state to shift (loss), the stop mode to be stopped will also be a display result corresponding to the loss, and the game state will not shift. In addition, for example, when the launched game ball passes through a specific area (the specific area is usually placed in a state where it is difficult for the game ball to pass through), the game state is displayed regardless of the variable display device. It is decided to migrate.

That is, in the pachislot machine 1, the game is started when the player bets the required medals and the player performs a start operation, whereas in the pachinko machine, the player operates the handle to shoot the required game ball. For example, the game is started when the game ball passes through the starting area, but both are common in that the game is started by the player's game action. In addition, the pachislot machine 1 and the pachinko machine are common in that when the start opportunity is established, the stop mode (in other words, the content of the privilege to be given) that is finally permitted to be displayed is determined. .

In addition, in the pachislot machine 1, the variable display is basically stopped by the player's stop operation, whereas in the pachinko machine, the variable display is stopped when the stop condition is met (irrespective of the player's stop operation). Although they are different in that the variable display is stopped, they are common in that the variable display is stopped according to the result of determination made in advance, and a benefit is given according to the stopped mode. In addition, the pachislot machine 1 and the pachinko machine are common in that they are capable of executing game-related effects. For example, the effect display device functions as the effect display section and the information display section described above. Also, in the pachinko machine, it is of course possible to provide an effect execution means such as the above-mentioned lamp, speaker, or other effect device, and to execute the effect by means of these means.

In many pachinko machines, decorative patterns (which may also be referred to as "identification information" or the like) are variably displayed in the effect display device. As described above, the original game result is displayed on the variable display device, but the variable display device is configured to be small, and the display result is also displayed by the lighting pattern of a plurality of LEDs. Therefore, in many cases, it is difficult for the player to recognize the game result. For this reason, in pachinko machines, it is the mainstream to play a game by variably displaying (and stopping) decorative symbols on the performance display device so as to interlock with the variable display of the variable display device. . In addition, such a variable display of decorative patterns may be performed after a certain period of delay when the start opportunity is met, or may be temporarily stopped before the stop condition is met. However, basically, similar to the above-mentioned variable table device, identification information is displayed variably or stopped according to the progress of the game (for example, in the case of winning, decorative patterns are displayed in a special stop mode (for example, ) is stopped and displayed, and in the case of a failure, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in a non-special stop mode (for example, loose stitches)). It is also possible to apply the invention according to the embodiment.

That is, in the present embodiment, the various matters described as the configuration of the external structure or internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 have characteristics unique to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, medals are essential and cannot be replaced with game balls, etc.). ), it can be applied as the configuration of the external structure or the internal structure of the pachinko machine.

Also, in the pachinko machine, various controls related to the game are performed by a main control circuit as a game control unit mounted on the main control board (part of the control related to payout is (Although it may be performed by the payout control circuit mounted on the payout control board, including this), various controls related to the effect are performed by the sub control circuit as the effect control unit mounted on the sub control board. Various items described as the electrical configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be applied to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine, except for items that are unique to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, items related to the stop operation, etc.).

In the pachi-slot machine 1, as described above, the bonus state, RT state, AT state, It is possible to provide an ART state or the like in which these are combined. For example, in the bonus state, by making the lottery mode of the minor winning combination more advantageous than in the non-bonus state, it is possible to continue the state in which medals are easily awarded (increase) for a certain period of time, and in the RT state, the replay winning combination is made possible. By making the lottery mode more advantageous than the non-RT state, it is possible to continue for a certain period of time a state in which it is difficult to lose (as a result, medals are difficult to decrease), and in the AT state, an advantageous stop operation mode By being notified, it is possible to continue the state in which medals are easily awarded (increase) for a certain period of time.

On the other hand, in a pachinko machine, it is possible to provide various game states having properties similar to these. For example, in a big win game state or a small win game state, the variable winning device is controlled differently than usual, so that the game ball can be changed to a state where it is easy to win, thereby giving the game ball. It is possible to continue the state of easy (increase) for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in a time-saving game state (sometimes referred to as an "electric sapo state"), normal symbols are controlled differently than usual, making it easier for game balls to pass through the starting area. This makes it possible to increase the lottery frequency of the variable display device and to maintain a state in which the number of game balls is difficult to decrease for a certain period of time. Also, for example, in the probability variable gaming state, the special symbol is controlled differently than usual, so that the winning probability by the variable display device is increased (as a result, the number of game balls tends to increase) The state is continued for a certain period of time. is possible.

That is, in the present embodiment, as the game characteristics of the pachi-slot machine 1, the various items described as the configuration of control relating to the transition (or transition) of the game state have characteristics unique to the pachi-slot machine 1 (for example, the It can be applied as a control configuration related to the transition (or transition) of the game state of the pachinko machine, excluding those accompanied by transition. In addition, the same applies to various other matters described as the game characteristics of the pachi-slot machine 1.

In addition, although it is a time-saving game state, even in pachinko machines, it is possible to shift to a time-saving game state when the number of games during a non-time-saving game state (normal game state) reaches a specified number of times. there is That is, even in a pachinko machine, if a disadvantageous state (for example, normal game state) continues for a predetermined period (for example, 900 games (rotation)) without shifting to a ceiling function (advantageous state (for example, jackpot game state)) Since it is possible to install a function that can shift to an advantageous state (for example, a time-saving gaming state) as a remedy for addiction, various items described as the configuration related to the ceiling function of the pachislot machine 1 are the configurations related to the ceiling function of the pachinko machine. can be applied as

In addition, although it is a time-saving game state, even in a pachinko machine, in a non-time-saving game state (normal game state), if the stop mode of the variable display device becomes a display result corresponding to a specific loss, this It is possible to shift to a time-saving game state with this as an opportunity. That is, even in the pachinko machine, it is possible to transition (transition) the game state (not triggered by the transition to the jackpot game state) by displaying a specific display result (combination of specific symbols). , Various items described as the configuration related to the transition (transition) of the RT state by displaying a specific combination of symbols of the pachinko machine 1 are the configurations related to the transition (transition) of the time-saving gaming state by displaying a specific display result of the pachinko machine can be applied.

(Medalless machine)
In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the betting operation of the player (that is, the operation of inserting the medals on hand into the medal insertion slot 5 to bet, or the MAX bet button 6a or the 1 bet button of the credited medals) 6b to bet) is one of the start conditions, and if medals are to be paid out when the game is over, the hopper device 32 is driven to open the medal payout port 11. Although a form in which medals are paid out or credited is explained, the configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not limited to this.

For example, the game player bets the game value necessary for the game, the game is played based on the bet, and a privilege is given (for example, the game value is given) based on the result of the game. The invention according to is applicable. In other words, not only is medals physically thrown in and paid out by the action of the player, but also the gaming value possessed by the player is electromagnetically managed within the pachislot machine 1 ( Alternatively, even if it is not electromagnetic, at least it is managed in a manner that prevents the player from directly contacting the game value), and it can be applied to a game that can be played without medals. Here, such a pachi-slot machine 1 is referred to as a "medalless game machine". Note that the medal-less gaming machine is sometimes referred to as a "managed gaming machine" or an "enclosed gaming machine".

It should be noted that it may be the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71) itself that electromagnetically manages the gaming value held by the player, or it may be attached to the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71). It may be a (connected) game value management device (hereinafter, such a management device may be referred to as a "medal count control board"). An example in which this game value management device is provided will be described below.

The gaming value management device comprises at least ROM and RWM (or RAM), is provided in the pachi-slot machine 1, and is a communication device (hereinafter, when such a communication device is referred to as a "connection terminal board" ) to an external game value providing device (hereinafter, such a game value providing device may be referred to as a “communication dedicated unit”) so as to be capable of two-way communication. The gaming value management device carries out necessary communication with an external gaming value providing device to perform a gaming value lending operation (i.e., to provide the gaming value necessary for the player to bet on the gaming value). action to give the game value), action to give the game value (that is, action to provide the game value to the player in the case of winning the role (the win is established), etc.), and these It is possible to perform an operation of electromagnetically recording the game value provided by the operation of . Note that the game value providing device may be called a "game value (game medium) handling device", a "game value (game medium) lending device", or a "sandwich".

Also, the external game value providing device is connected to an external ball output management device (ball output management server). It is configured to be able to transmit the payout management information via the providing device. Here, the paid ball management information is composed of various kinds of information necessary for enabling an external paid ball management device to manage the paid balls. An example of the paid ball management information will be described later. Also, the external game value providing device and the external ball management device are connected via, for example, an internet line.

Here, the term "balls paid out" directly means the number of game media paid out. (for example, how much the player has become positive (how much the game store has become negative), or how much the player has become negative (how much the game store has become positive) ), the degree of continuation of advantageous states (for example, bonus state, AT state, or a series of advantageous sections, etc.), or the degree of gambling assumed by a combination of these.

Further, for example, a possessed game value number display device (not shown) for displaying the number of possessed game values is provided on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the game value management device controls the number of game values based on the management result of the number of game values. The game value number displayed on the possessed game value number display device of the lever may be managed. That is, the gaming value management device may not only record the total number of gaming values that a player can use for gaming by an electromagnetic method, but may also be configured to be able to control the display of the recording result. . In this case, the gaming value management device has the ability for the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded gaming values to the external gaming value providing device. It has the performance that the recorded game value cannot be reduced except when it is operated directly, and the signal indicating the recorded game value can be transmitted only through a communication device. is desirable.

It should be noted that the gaming value management device not only has the function of electromagnetically managing the gaming value of the player using an external gaming value providing device, but also the number of gaming values betted by the physical actions of the player and the number of gaming values of the pachislot machine 1. It may have a function of managing the number of game values paid out by the physical action of the player. That is, it may also be possible to manage the actual insertion and payout of medals in the conventional pachi-slot machine 1 . In this way, the pachi-slot machine 1 can be controlled by a conventional method, or by a method such as the above-mentioned medalless game machine, so that the pachi-slot machine 1 can be controlled with any specification. Even if there is, it can be set as a common configuration. Further, in this case, the game value management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 31 and the hopper device 32, which are controlled by the main control circuit 100 (main control board 71), It is also possible to adopt a method of indirectly controlling by transmitting the control result.

In addition to the above, the pachi-slot machine 1 may be provided with various operation means necessary for the operation of the medalless game machine, such as a player-operable lending operation means and return (settlement) operation means. In addition, the game value providing device includes various devices such as an insertion slot for valuable values such as bills, an insertion slot for recording media (such as IC cards), and a non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money etc. from a mobile terminal. In addition, various operation means necessary for the operation of the medalless game machine, such as a lending operation means and a return operation means that can be operated by the player, may be provided (none of them are shown). Note that the insertable recording medium includes not only non-member recording media issued on the day at the game parlor, but also member recording media owned by members of the amusement parlor. The game value recorded in the non-member recording medium is valid only on the day (and becomes invalid after the next day), but the game value recorded in the member recording medium is valid from the next day.

An example of the game flow in this case will be described. For example, first, the player deposits valuable value into the game value providing device by any method. The game value providing device subtracts a predetermined number of value values in response to the operation of any of the lending operation means by the player, and provides the pachi-slot machine 1 with the game value corresponding to the value value thus subtracted. Then, the player plays the game, and repeats the above operation when the game value is required. After that, the player operates one of the return operation means when ending the game after acquiring a predetermined number of game values according to the result of the game. The game value management device transmits the number of game values to the game value providing device according to the player's operation of any of the return operation means. The game value providing device ejects the recording medium recording the transmitted game value number. The game value management device clears the game value number stored by itself when the game value number is transmitted. The player can take the ejected recording medium to a prize exchange place or the like to exchange it for a prize, or the ejected recording medium can be sent to a game value providing device corresponding to another pachi-slot machine 1. By inserting it, the board can be moved and the game can be continued. Also, if the ejected recording medium is a member's recording medium, it is valid from the next day onwards, so the game can be stopped here.

In the above example, the game value management device transmits the total number of game values to the game value providing device in response to the player's return operation. Only the number of game values desired by the player may be transmitted. That is, the game value owned by the player may be divided. In addition, although the game value providing device records the transmitted game value number on a recording medium and discharges it, the above-mentioned non-contact communication antenna or the like is used to transfer the same value and value to the player's mobile terminal. For example, cash or cash equivalents may be dispensed as long as it provides something of equal value to the player.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 or the game value providing device is provided with lock operation means that can be operated by the player, and communication between the game value management device and the game value providing device is disabled according to the operation of the lock operation means. It may be possible to control the state (locked state). In this case, in the pachi-slot machine 1 or the gaming value providing device, for example, setting a personal identification number (and inputting the set personal identification number), issuing a one-time password (and inputting the issued one-time password), or biometric authentication and so on, and the locked state is released when the result of the authentication process is normal.

According to the medalless gaming machine described so far, compared to the case where the game medium is physically provided for the game, for example, a part of the external structure such as the medal insertion slot 5 and the medal payout opening 11, or the selector 31, etc. Since it is no longer necessary to provide some internal structures such as the hopper device 32, it is possible not only to reduce the cost and manufacturing cost of the game machine, but also to reduce the power consumption of the game machine. In addition, since it becomes more difficult to access the inside of the gaming machine, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the gaming machine. Furthermore, since the player does not come into direct contact with the game medium, the game environment is improved and noise can be reduced. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

(Configuration example of a medalless game machine)
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a configuration example when the pachi-slot machine 1 is configured as a medalless game machine will be described. FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a medalless gaming machine. In the following, a configuration example in which a medal count control board (game value management device) is provided will be mainly described.

As described above, the medal number control board is connected to the main control board 71 and manages the number of medals (game value number) owned by the player. Also, the medal number control board is connected to a dedicated communication unit (game value providing device) via a connection terminal board (communication device). Further, the medal number control board transmits the paid ball management information to the paid ball management device via the connection terminal board and the dedicated communication unit. A medal count control circuit (not shown) is mounted on the medal count control board. The medal number control circuit includes, for example, a medal number control CPU (not shown), a medal number control ROM (not shown), and a medal number control RWM (not shown).

The ball-out management device is, for example, a server for management of ball-out managed by (the information center of) an association to which the gaming machine maker joins, and the transmitted ball-out management information is accumulated in the ball-out management device. Thus, it is provided for the purpose of making it possible to monitor whether the gambling nature of each gaming machine is appropriate (ball output performance).

Therefore, from such a point of view, the medal count control board and the connection terminal board, like the main control board 71, carry out important functions in the pachi-slot machine 1, so that they are arranged in a manner that can prevent fraudulent acts and illegal modifications. It must be provided inside the pachi-slot machine 1. Configuration example 1 and configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34 show an example of such a mode.

<Configuration example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 34 shows that the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are accommodated in the main control board case, like the main control board 71 . Here, the main control board case is usually subjected to various sealing processes to make it difficult to open (or remove) or to make it possible to recognize the traces of opening (or the number of times it has been opened). (for example, sealing by crimping, affixing a sealing seal, or affixing a crimping seal that describes a record of cutting the crimping, etc.).

Therefore, if the medal number control board and the connection terminal board are accommodated in the main control board case, the same security effect as that of the main control board 71 can be obtained, and fraudulent acts and illegal alterations can be properly prevented.

<Configuration example 2>
In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 34, unlike configuration example 1 described above, the medal count control board and the connection terminal plate are accommodated in a medal count control board case provided separately from the main control board case. indicates that there is The medal count control board case is configured as a transparent (or substantially transparent) resin case similar to the main control board case. The plate shall be housed in a readily visible condition.

Here, in the medal number control board case of configuration example 2, the same sealing process as in the main control board case can be performed, or at least a part of the sealing process can be performed. can also For example, the medal number control board case may be sealed by caulking in the same manner as the main control board case, but no sealing seal is attached. Also, for example, in the main control board case, it is obligatory to use a predetermined crimped seal, but in the medal number control board case, any seal may be used as the crimped seal.

<Example of accumulated data>
The accumulated data example shown in FIG. 34 shows an example of various data accumulated in the paid-out ball management device. That is, it shows an example of the payout ball management information that the medal number control board transmits to the payout ball management device via the connection terminal board and the dedicated communication unit. It should be noted that this is only an example, and it is possible to adopt a configuration in which some of the various types of information shown in FIG. 34 are not transmitted, or a configuration in which information other than the various types of information shown in FIG. 34 is transmitted. can also

Also, the timing for the medal count control board to transmit information to the communication dedicated unit is arbitrary, and the timing for the communication dedicated unit to transmit information to the payout management device is also arbitrary. It may be transmitted at any timing as long as the ball payout management device can monitor the ball payout performance of each gaming machine for at least one unit (for example, one business day of the game parlor). . For example, the timing at which the medal count control board transmits information to the communication-dedicated unit and the timing at which the communication-dedicated unit transmits information to the ball management apparatus may be different timings. Also, for example, the timing at which the medal number control board transmits information to the communication dedicated unit may be different timing depending on the type of information.

The accumulated data “total number of inserted coins” is the accumulated number of inserted coins per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on. For example, the medal number control board sends information on the number of game values betted by the player's betting operation to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), excluding the bets made by the replay operation. The dedicated communication unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the amusement arcade).

The accumulated data "total number of payouts" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the number-of-medals control board sends the information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game), excluding those given by the operation of replaying. The dedicated communication unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the amusement arcade).

Accumulated data "MY" is the maximum number of difference generated in one unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on (in other words, the number of difference obtained during the period when the game value increased most in one unit. (referred to as "MY"). For example, the medal number control board calculates such a maximum number of difference number, and transmits the calculated information to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, when the amusement arcade closes), and the communication dedicated unit receives the information is transmitted to the payout management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the end of business hours of the amusement arcade).

The accumulated data "total payout number of accessories" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit after the power of each gaming machine is turned on, and the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of various accessories. . For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during operation of various roles at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during operation of various roles). unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the pay-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the amusement arcade closes).

Accumulated data "total number of continuous bonuses paid out" is the cumulative number of payouts per unit since the power of each gaming machine was turned on, and continuous bonuses (RB, including RB during BB operation). It is the cumulative number of payouts paid out during the operation of. For example, the medal number control board is dedicated to communication of information on the number of game values given by the payout process of the gaming machine during operation of the continuous role at a predetermined timing (for example, for each unit game during operation of the continuous role). unit, and the communication-dedicated unit transmits the cumulative total of the information to the pay-out management device at a predetermined timing (for example, when the amusement arcade closes).

In addition, the medal number control board transmits various information that can be displayed on the role ratio monitor device 54 to the communication dedicated unit at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of calculation by the role ratio monitor device 54), and the communication dedicated unit The information is transmitted to the ball management device at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transmission from the medal count control board). Note that the accumulated data “Role Product Ratio” corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role product ratio information, the accumulated data “Continuous Role Product Ratio” corresponds to, for example, the above-described continuous role product ratio information, and the accumulated data “Advantageous "Section ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned specific section ratio information, and the accumulated data "Instructed role product ratio" corresponds to, for example, the above-mentioned role product ratio information that is subject to aggregation and calculation even during the AT state. , the accumulated data "ratio of state of accessories, etc." corresponds to the above-mentioned specific section ratio information, which is subject to aggregation and calculation even during operation of various accessories, for example.

The accumulated data “number of times played” is the accumulated number of times played per unit since each gaming machine was powered on. For example, the medal number control board transmits information on the number of games played at a predetermined timing (for example, each unit game) to the communication dedicated unit, and the communication dedicated unit calculates the cumulative total of the information at a predetermined timing ( For example, it is transmitted to the pay-out control device at the end of business hours of the amusement arcade.

The accumulated data "main control chip ID number" is the individual identification number (also called "CPUID", which is called "chip ID number") of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this individual identification number. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted.

The accumulated data "main control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this manufacturer code, and the communication dedicated unit transmits this transmitted information when transmitting various information to the ball management device. Send information including the manufacturer code.

The accumulated data "main control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the main ROM 102 of the main control circuit 100 of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this product code. Send information, including product codes.

The accumulated data “medal number control chip ID number” is the individual identification number of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this individual identification number. Information including this individual identification number is transmitted. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information becomes "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip maker code" is a maker code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this manufacturer code, and the communication dedicated unit transmits this transmitted information when transmitting various information to the ball management device. Send information including the manufacturer code. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information becomes "0".

The accumulated data "medal number control chip product code" is a product code recorded in the management area of the medal number control ROM of the medal number control circuit of each gaming machine. For example, when the medal number control board transmits various information to the communication dedicated unit, it transmits information including this product code. Send information, including product codes. If the main control board 71 is configured to transmit various information to the communication dedicated unit without providing the medal number control board, the information becomes "0".

In this way, the paid-out ball management device can store various information (discharged-ball management information) transmitted from the gaming machine. The ball management information also includes a plurality of pieces of individual identification information (for example, the above-described “main control chip ID number” to “medal number control chip product code”) that can identify individual gaming machines. Therefore, the ball management device can identify the gaming machine that is the transmission source by these pieces of individual identification information. are different, it is possible to recognize the possibility that one of the control boards has been replaced (that is, the possibility of fraud or unauthorized modification).

In addition, the put-out ball management information includes a plurality of pieces of put-out ball information (for example, the above-described “total number of inserted balls” to “number of times played”) that can identify the performance of one unit of put-out balls. Therefore, the paid-out ball management device can recognize whether the gambling nature of the gaming machine of the transmission source is within an appropriate range based on the paid-out ball information. For example, if the "total number of payouts" or "instructed accessory ratio" becomes extremely high from a certain point, there is a possibility that fraudulent acts or unauthorized modifications have been made, or that there is some flaw in the specification design in the first place. It is possible to recognize the possibility that there was

Then, when the above-mentioned possibility is recognized by the paid-out ball management device, it can be expected that the result will be notified to the game parlor or the game machine maker, and appropriate countermeasures will be taken. That is, a plurality of management gaming machines, a game value providing device (communication dedicated unit) that transmits the payout management information transmitted from the management gaming machines to the payout management device, and based on the transmitted payout management information, each By constructing a management system including a payout management device that manages the payout performance of managed gaming machines, it is possible to appropriately manage all managed gaming machines.

<Modification 1>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured so that the number of game values possessed by the player is managed by the medal number control board. Therefore, the medal count control board may be provided with a medal count monitor device (not shown) so that the administrator of the game parlor can grasp such management status or other information.

The medal number monitor device is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and is provided inside the medal number control board case. The medal number monitor device displays various information (for example, part or all of the above-described ball output management information) regarding the number of game values aggregated and calculated by the medal number control CPU (or may be the main CPU 101). Display sequentially. If the display contents of the role ratio monitor device 54 are all displayed by the medal number monitor device, the role ratio monitor device 54 may not be provided. Alternatively, the role ratio monitor device 54 may also be used as the medal count monitor device.

Further, the medal count monitor device may be mounted on the medal count control board, or may be mounted on another board (for example, a connection terminal board) connected to the medal count control board. good too. Moreover, as long as it is inside the cabinet G, it may be provided in another place. For example, it may be provided on the medal count control board case. Also, a management switch may be provided in the cabinet G for starting the display on the medal number monitor device or for switching the content, and various information may be displayed when this switch is operated. Further, on the premise of using such a management switch, for example, the information display device 14 may also be used as a medal number monitor device.

The medal number monitor device may display the type of error state that has occurred when various error states related to itself have occurred. For example, when a communication error occurs with the main control board 71, when a communication error occurs with the connection terminal board, when a communication error occurs with the game value providing device, or when an abnormality occurs in the token number control RWM. In some cases, a numerical value corresponding to this may be displayed. In this case, in order to make it possible for the manager of the game parlor to easily recognize which error state the displayed numerical value corresponds to, the corresponding relationship is displayed in or near the medal number control board case. It is sufficient to provide a descriptive section (affixing a sticker, printing, etc.) to indicate.

<Modification 2>
As described above, in the medalless game machine, the medal number control board can be configured to transmit the ball output management information to the outside via the connection terminal board. Here, in this embodiment, an external collective terminal board 55 is additionally provided for transmitting information to the outside. Therefore, the connection terminal plate and the external collective terminal plate 55 can be configured, for example, as follows.

For example, the connection terminal board and the external collective terminal board 55 are configured as a common terminal board. As a result, not only can the number of parts be reduced, but also the number of wires directed to the outside can be reduced, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

Also, for example, the connection terminal plate and the external collective terminal plate 55 are configured as one unit. Also, for example, the connection terminal plate and the external collective terminal plate 55 are arranged at least in the cabinet G in close proximity. As a result, the work efficiency at the time of connection can be improved. Moreover, the length of the wiring can be made constant, and the wiring locations can be limited, so that the security effect can be enhanced.

<Modification 3>
As described above, the medalless gaming machine can be configured to transmit the paid ball management information to the paid ball management device. In addition, in the payout management device, it is possible to appropriately manage the payout performance of each medalless game machine based on the received payout management information. Therefore, on the premise that ball output performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above-described limiter may not be provided. That is, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of a certain regulation condition.

Alternatively, the medal number control board may be provided with a function to appropriately manage the ball payout performance, and on the premise that the ball payout performance can be appropriately managed in this manner, the above limiter may not be provided. . That is, it may not have the function of forcibly ending the advantageous section based on the establishment of a certain regulation condition.

For example, the medal count control board is configured to include a ball output monitoring RWM (which may be the medal count control RWM described above, or may be another RWM). The ball-out monitoring RWM is initialized, for example, when the setting is changed, but is not initialized at the end of the advantageous section to monitor the ball-out. Then, when the monitored ball output exceeds a certain threshold, for example, the advantage section itself is not forcibly terminated, but the navigation occurrence probability is lowered, the AT state is extended, the probability is lowered, Alternatively, it is assumed that the AT state itself can be terminated to reduce the performance of putting out balls. Even in this way, it is possible to appropriately manage the ball output performance. In this case, it may be possible to transmit such a control result to the paid ball management device as the paid ball management information. That is, both the medal count control board and the ball management device may be configured to manage the ball output performance of each medalless game machine.

(Configuration example of the main control board of a pachislot machine)
Next, a configuration example of the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the main control board 71. As shown in FIG. In the following, a configuration example for reusing the main control board 71 will be mainly described.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1, there are various restrictions on the specifications of the main control board 71, one of which is that the manufacturer's name and board control number must be printed on the main control board 71. It's becoming The manufacturer name is the name of the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactures the pachi-slot machine 1, and the control number is a number for identifying the model of the main control board 71. FIG.

<Configuration example 1>
Configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35 indicates that the manufacturer's name and the board control number are printed in characters on the main control board 71 in the conventional manner. Here, in configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, first, it is assumed that BB Co., Ltd. manufactures the pachi-slot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model A") on which the main control board 71 is mounted. At this time, only the name of the manufacturer "BB Co., Ltd." and the board management number "BB-00-11-22" in the lower row are initially printed. After that, when model A is removed from the amusement arcade, for example, when AA Co., Ltd. reuses the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model B"), the company AA deletes the printed manufacturer name and board control number in the lower row by laser engraving, and inserts the manufacturing number and board control number (for example, the upper manufacturer in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35) in a different space. The name “AA Co., Ltd.” and board control number “AA-00-11-22”) must be newly printed.

After that, model B was withdrawn from the amusement arcade, and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. attempted to reuse the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "model C"). In this case, BB Co., Ltd. has to delete the printed manufacturer name and board control number by laser engraving, and newly print the manufacturing number and board control number related to the company in a different space. However, in the configuration example 1 shown in FIG. 35, since there is no more empty space, the main control board 71 can be reused due to the restrictions described above, although the hardware can still be sufficiently reused. There was a problem that it may not be possible.

This is the same even when a plurality of manufacturer names and board control numbers are printed from the beginning. For example, even if the serial number and board control number for both AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed in advance, the serial number and board control number for AA Co., Ltd. are laser-engraved at the time of manufacturing model A. This is because it will be deleted. Therefore, although there is a possibility that BB Co., Ltd. can reuse it, AA Co., Ltd. cannot reuse it. On the other hand, in Configuration Examples 2 and 3 described below, it can be expected that the problems described above can be resolved. That is, the reusability of a board used for game control, such as the main control board 71, can be enhanced.

<Configuration example 2>
Configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35 indicates that a code including the manufacturer's name and board control number is printed. Note that in configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, a QR code (registered trademark), which is a two-dimensional code, is used as an example of a code containing a manufacturer name and a board management number. code can be used. That is, the code may be of any kind as long as it includes information that enables the confirmer to uniquely identify the manufacturer name and board control number by some means (e.g., mobile terminal, etc.). good too.

In configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that model A is manufactured by BB Corporation, the first code from the right is printed. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of BB Corporation. After that, when model A is withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. intends to manufacture model B, the second code from the right is printed and the first code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of AA Co., Ltd.

After that, when the model B is withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, BB Co., Ltd. tries to manufacture the model C, the third code from the right is printed and the second code from the right is deleted by laser engraving. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of BB Corporation. After that, even when model C was withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. reused the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. was the third from the right. The code of is deleted by laser engraving, the fourth code from the right is printed, and the fourth code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number related to AA Co., Ltd. If so, it becomes possible to reuse the main control board 71 in a new pachi-slot machine 1 .

That is, in the configuration example 2 shown in FIG. 35, by printing the code including the manufacturer name and the board control number, the manufacturer name and the board control number are printed (printed) per one on the surface of the main control board 71. ) Since the space can be saved, it is possible to improve the reusability as compared with the configuration example 1 shown in FIG.

<Configuration example 3>
Configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35 indicates that a code including a manufacturer name and a board control number is printed in the same manner as in configuration example 2 described above. Note that, in configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, a plurality of (for example, four) codes are printed from the beginning. For example, it is assumed that two each of AA Co., Ltd. and BB Co., Ltd. are printed. In addition, on the surface of the main control board 71 (or on the corresponding main control board case), the code is read by crimping a portion corresponding to each code with, for example, a belt-like member. It makes it possible to fix an impossible state. Further, for example, by cutting the belt-like member or the like, it is possible to release the fixation and make the code readable.

In configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, first, assuming that model A is manufactured by BB Co., Ltd., only the first code from the right is readable, and the second to fourth codes from the right are readable. is rendered unreadable. The first code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of BB Corporation. After that, when model A was withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model B, only the second code from the right was made readable, and the first, third and fourth codes from the right were made readable. The second code is rendered unreadable. The second code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of AA Co., Ltd.

After that, when model B was withdrawn from the amusement arcade, for example, when BB Co., Ltd. tried to manufacture model C, only the third code from the right was made readable, and the first, second, and fourth codes from the right were made readable. The second code is rendered unreadable. The third code from the right contains information that can identify the manufacturing number and board control number of BB Corporation. After that, even when model C was withdrawn from the amusement arcade and, for example, AA Co., Ltd. reused the main control board 71 to manufacture a different pachislot machine 1, AA Co., Ltd. was the fourth from the right. can be read, and the first to third codes from the right cannot be read, the main control board 71 can be reused in a new pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, at least one code can be read and other codes cannot be read. can be reused by game machine manufacturers. Also in the configuration example 3 shown in FIG. 35, only caulking holes may be provided, and a code may be printed at a location corresponding to the caulking holes each time the device is reused.

[Second embodiment]
A second embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
As shown in FIGS. 36 to 40, the pachi-slot machine 1 is a so-called pachi-slot machine. The pachi-slot machine 1 is capable of playing games using game media such as cards storing information on game values, which are given or given to players, in addition to coins, medals, game balls, tokens, etc. , and the description below assumes that medals are used.

In the following description, the side (direction) facing the player from the pachi-slot machine 1 is referred to as the front side (forward direction) of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the side opposite to the front side is referred to as the rear side (backward direction, depth direction). The right side and left side of the pachislot machine 1 are referred to as the right side (right direction) and the left side (left direction), respectively, as seen from the player. A direction including the front side and the rear side is referred to as a front-rear direction or a thickness direction, and a direction including the right side and the left side is referred to as a left-right direction or a width direction. A direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction (thickness direction) and the left-right direction (width direction) is referred to as the vertical direction or the height direction.

As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the appearance of the pachi-slot machine 1 is composed of a rectangular box-shaped housing 2. As shown in FIG. The housing 2 includes a metal cabinet G having a rectangular opening on the front side as a game machine main body, an upper door mechanism UD arranged in the upper front part of the cabinet G, and a lower door mechanism UD arranged in the lower front part of the cabinet G. and a door mechanism DD.

In addition, two openings G41 are formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G so as to penetrate vertically at a predetermined interval in the horizontal direction. A wooden plate member G42 is attached to the top wall G4 so as to block the two openings G41.

As shown in FIG. 38, the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are formed so as to correspond to the shape and size of the opening of the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are provided so as to be able to close the upper and lower portions of the opening in the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 in the center. A transparent panel UD11 that transmits light is provided in the upper display window UD1.

The lower door mechanism DD is provided with a main display window DD4 formed as a rectangular opening substantially at the center of the upper portion. A reel unit RU attached from the inside of the cabinet G is mounted on the back side of the main display window DD4. Furthermore, a main control board MS is attached to the rear surface of the reel unit RU.

The reel unit RU is mainly composed of three reels RL (left reel), RC (middle reel), and RR (right reel) each having a plurality of types of patterns drawn on its outer peripheral surface. These reels RL, RC, and RR are arranged in parallel (in a horizontal row) so that they can rotate in the vertical direction at a constant speed. As for the reels RL, RC, RR, the operation of each reel RL, RC, RR and the symbols drawn on each reel RL, RC, RR can be visually recognized through the main display window DD4.

A transparent panel DD41 made of a rectangular acrylic plate or the like is attached and fixed to the surface of the main display window DD4 so that a player or the like cannot touch the reel unit RU. Below the main display window DD4, substantially horizontal first, second and third pedestals DD2a, DD2b and DD2c are formed. A first pedestal DD2a located on the right side of the main display window DD4 is provided with a medal slot DD5 for inserting medals. The medal slot DD5 is an opening into which the player inserts medals. The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot DD5 are credited or bet on the game.

A maximum BET button DD8 (also referred to as a MAXBET button) as a valid line setting means for betting credited medals is provided on the second pedestal portion DD2b located on the left side of the main display window DD4. When the maximum BET button DD8 is pressed, "3" is selected as the number of inserted medals.

A liquid crystal display device DD20 is provided on the third pedestal portion DD2c located on the front side of the main display window DD4. The liquid crystal display device DD20 is a so-called touch panel in which a touch sensor panel as a touch-type position input device is arranged on the panel surface of a liquid crystal display panel (liquid crystal panel). The touch sensor panel may be, for example, a capacitive type that detects contact with a part of the human body (such as a fingertip) or an electrostatic pen and outputs a detection signal, or It may be of a type that detects contact with a hard substance such as a pen tip and outputs a detection signal, or of another type or structure (in-cell structure, etc.).

The liquid crystal display device DD20 functions as an SUI (smart user interface), and on its display screen, game information such as the number of games played is displayed as the game progresses. Alternatively, a message, an input key, or the like for requesting input is displayed.

In the liquid crystal display device DD20, it is also possible to display, on the display screen thereof, contents (effect information) corresponding to game-related effects, for example, as the game progresses. Further, as the liquid crystal display device DD20, for example, an attachment having a function as a production accessory, or a dedicated attachment such as a jog dial or a push button may be attached. Also, the liquid crystal display device DD20 can be omitted by allocating its functions to a display unit A or the like, which will be described later.

On the front side of the maximum bet button DD8, there is provided a start lever DD6 for rotating the reels RL, RC, and RR by the player's operation and for starting the variable display of symbols in the main display window DD4. The start lever DD6 is attached so as to be tiltable within a predetermined angle range.

On the right side of the start lever DD6 and on the front side of the liquid crystal display device DD20, there are three stop buttons DD7L for stopping the rotation of the three reels RL, RC, and RR by the player's pressing operation (stopping operation). , DD7C and DD7R are provided.

A C/P button DD13 is provided on the left side of the maximum BET button DD8. The C/P button DD13 is for switching the credit/payout of the medals the player has won in the game by pressing the button. When payout is selected by switching the C/P button DD13 (non-credit state), medals are dispensed from a medal payout opening DD14 (cancellation chute) provided in the coin guard plate portion on the lower side of the lower door mechanism DD. The paid-out medals are accumulated in the medal receiving part DD15.

Below the start lever DD6 and the stop buttons DD7L, DD7C, and DD7R, a waist panel DD18 (waist light guide plate) is arranged. The waist panel DD18 is configured as a decorative panel using an acrylic plate or the like. The waist panel DD18 is printed with a name representing the model of the pachi-slot machine 1 and various patterns.

A speaker DD25L and a speaker DD25R are provided on the left and right sides of the medal payout port DD14, respectively. The speakers DD25L and DD25R notify the player of various information about the game by voice, music, and other sounds. A first sub-display device DD19L and a second sub-display device DD19R are arranged on the left and right sides of the main display window DD4, respectively. These sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R display, for example, the number of medals to be paid out and the number of credited remaining medals when winning is established. Normally, the maximum number of medals to be credited to the pachi-slot machine 1 is 50, so the number of credits of 50 or less is displayed. When the maximum number of medals of 50 has been credited, the inserted medals are directly paid out from the medal payout opening DD14. Also, the sub-display devices DD19L and DD19R may have a touch panel on the front surface.

As shown in FIG. 39, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1. That is, the intermediate support plate G1 functions as a partition plate that divides the interior of the cabinet G into an upper space and a lower space. The upper space is a space on the rear side of the upper door mechanism UD inside the cabinet G, and accommodates the display unit A and the like. The lower space is a space behind the lower door mechanism DD in the cabinet G, and includes a reel unit RU, a main control board MS that controls the operation of the entire pachislot machine 1, and a sub control device SS (see FIG. 46). etc. are accommodated. The main control board MS constitutes a circuit (main control circuit) that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot machine 1, such as determination of the internal winning combination, rotation and stoppage of the reels RL, RC, and RR, and determination of the presence or absence of winning. do. The sub-control device SS constitutes a circuit (sub-control circuit) that controls execution of effects such as video display.

(Display unit A)
As shown in FIG. 40, the display unit A is replaceably mounted on an intermediate support plate G1 inside the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The display unit A is a so-called projection mapping device having an illumination unit B that emits illumination light for image display and a screen device C that makes an image appear by being illuminated with the illumination light from the illumination unit B.

Here, the projection mapping device is for projecting an image onto the surface of a three-dimensional object such as a structure or a natural object. etc.), and by projecting an image according to the presentation information, which is generated based on the shape, to enable an advanced and powerful presentation.

The display unit A has a housing A1 with an opening formed in front. The housing A1 is composed of a projector cover B1 forming an upper portion of the irradiation unit B and a screen housing C10 of the screen device C. As shown in FIG. The screen housing C10 has a box-like shape having a bottom plate C1, a right side plate C2, a left side plate C3, and a back plate C4. The projector cover B1 is replaceably attached to the upper surface of the screen housing C10.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B)
As shown in FIG. 41, the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light forward, and a screen device that is arranged in front of the projector device B2 and arranged diagonally below and behind the irradiation light from the projector device B2. It has a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects light in the direction of C, and a projector cover B1 that accommodates the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector device B2)
The projector device B2 is mounted on the projector cover B1 while being covered by a case B22, and arranged in the rear part of the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. The projector device B2 is attached to the projector cover B1 via a flat upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221 that are horizontally arranged. The entire upper surface of the case B22 is open. Accordingly, the lens unit B21 and the optical mechanism B24 (see FIG. 47) accommodated in the case B22 are positioned on the lower surface of the lower base B221. The lens unit B21 is arranged so that the irradiation light emitted from the plurality of LED light sources of the optical mechanism B24 and reflected by a DMD (Digital Micromirror Device) is emitted toward the forward mirror mechanism B3 via a lens or the like. there is Details of the projector device B2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 to 52. FIG.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: mirror mechanism B3)
As shown in FIG. 41, a mirror mechanism B3 is arranged in front of the projector device B2 (in the emission direction of the irradiation light). As shown in FIG. 42, the mirror mechanism B3 has a mirror holder B31, an optical mirror B32 housed in the mirror holder B31, and mirror stoppers B33 and B34 for fixing both ends of the optical mirror B32 to the mirror holder B31. is doing. As also shown in FIG. 43, the mirror holder B31 has a plate-like shape with a rectangular front surface. An angle adjustment hole B311 is formed in each corner of the mirror holder B31, and a concave portion B312 is formed on the front surface around the angle adjustment hole B311. Mounting holes B314 and B314 are vertically symmetrically formed between the angle adjustment holes B311 and B311 in the vertical direction.

On the other hand, a mirror holder B313 is formed on the rear surface of the mirror holder B31. The mirror holding portion B313 is formed in the central portion and is formed in a size that does not overlap with the angle adjusting hole B311 and the mounting hole B314. Mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are provided on the left and right sides of the mirror holding portion B313, respectively. The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 have angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 and mounting holes B334 and B344, respectively. The angle adjusting holes B331 and B341 and the mounting holes B334 and B344 in the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are arranged so as to correspond to the angle adjusting holes B311 and B311 and the mounting holes B314 and B314 in the mirror holder B31.

The mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed so as to partially overlap the mirror holder B313. As a result, the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 come into contact with both lateral sides of the optical mirror B32 fitted in the mirror holder B313, and are screwed to the mirror holder B31 through the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. , the optical mirror B32 is held by the mirror holder B31.

As shown in FIG. 44, the mirror mechanism B3 configured as described above is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1. The reflector holding portion B11 is formed at the center of the front surface of the projector cover B1, and is arranged so as to be exposed to the front side when the upper door mechanism UD is opened. The reflector holding portion B11 has an angle adjusting hole B111. The angle adjustment hole B111 is formed at a position corresponding to the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror mechanism B3.

A screw (not shown) is inserted through the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holder B11 from the front side, and this screw penetrates the angle adjustment hole B311 of the mirror holder B31. The angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 of the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are formed as screw holes into which screws can be screwed. It is screwed into the angle adjusting holes B331 and B341.

Then, when the screw is rotated in a direction in which the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341 is loosened, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is increased. On the other hand, when the screw is rotated in a direction to tighten the screw engagement with the angle adjustment holes B331 and B341, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 is reduced.

As described above, the mirror holder B31 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are screwed together via the mounting holes B314, B334 and B344. B32 is sandwiched. In this way, the mirror holder B31, the optical mirror B32, and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34 are integrated as the mirror mechanism B3, and the rotation of the screw changes the distance between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror stoppers B33 and B34. Thereby, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be increased or decreased. Since the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, and B341 are arranged in four directions corresponding to the corner portions of the mirror mechanism B3, the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism are arranged at the arrangement positions of the angle adjustment holes B311, 331, and B341. By increasing or decreasing the distance to B3, it is possible to finely adjust the reflection angle of the optical mirror B32 with respect to the traveling direction of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2.

A spring (not shown) is provided between the reflector holder B11 and the mirror holder B31. The rear end surface of the spring contacts the concave portion B312 of the mirror holder B31, and the front end surface of the spring contacts the inner wall surface (rear wall surface) of the reflector holding portion B11. is sandwiched between A screw inserted through the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 passes through the spring. As a result, even if the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 increases as the screw rotates, the screw head abuts the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 due to the biasing force of the spring. It is possible to prevent the screw head from protruding from the angle adjustment hole B111 and the positional relationship between the reflector holding portion B11 and the screw from collapsing.

(Display unit A: irradiation unit B: projector cover B1)
As shown in FIG. 45, the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 are accommodated in the projector cover B1. The lower surface B2a of the projector device B2 has, at its front portion, an inclined surface B2a1 that inclines upward from the rear to the front. As shown in FIG. 43, the projector cover B1 includes an upper wall portion B12 arranged horizontally, a reflector holding portion B11 arranged in front of the upper wall portion B12, and arranged symmetrically in the left-right direction of the upper wall portion B12. and the side wall portions B13, B13. The front portion of the upper wall portion B12 protrudes forward from the cabinet G (see FIG. 40). A reflector holding portion B11 is formed in the central portion of the front portion of the upper wall portion B12 so as to protrude forward. there is

(Display unit A: screen device C)
The irradiation unit B configured as described above is connected to the upper surface of the screen device C by screwing. For example, screws are screwed into the upper surfaces of the right side plate C2 and the left side plate C3 of the screen device C via screw holes formed in the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 40). As a result, the display unit A can unitize the irradiation unit B and the screen device C and handle them integrally.

Inside the screen housing C10, a plurality of screen mechanisms that make an image appear by irradiating the irradiation light from the irradiation unit B are provided so that the irradiation target can be switched. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1 are provided as a plurality of screen mechanisms. The fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are each formed by applying a screen paint to a base material, and have a projection surface capable of displaying an image.

The projection planes of the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 have different shapes from each other in order to diversify image expression. Specifically, the projection surfaces of the fixed screen mechanism D and the front screen mechanism E1 are flat, whereas the projection surface of the reel screen mechanism F1 has an arc shape in side view. The front screen mechanism E1 and the reel screen mechanism F1 are movable screens whose positions are displaced relative to the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3. (not shown).

(Display Unit A: Irradiation Unit B: Electrical and Optical Configuration of Projector Device B2)
As shown in FIG. 46, the projector device B2 includes a projector control board B23, an optical mechanism B24, and a relay board CK as electrical components. The sub-controller SS described above is connected to the projector device B2 via the relay board CK. The sub-control device SS controls the projector control board B23 according to the performance operation of the screen and the character object, and projects the irradiation light onto the screen and the character object via the optical mechanism B24, thereby producing a visual effect. Display video. In the process of assembling the display unit A and the like, an adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is connected to the relay board CK of the projector device B2. This adjustment PC (personal computer) 1000 is used to adjust the position of the irradiation light projected by the projector device B2 and to perform focus initial setting. In this embodiment, the adjustment PC 1000 is used as the adjustment device for the projector device B2. , or a dedicated terminal device.

The projector control board B23 includes a control LSI 230 , an EEPROM (registered trademark) 231 , a DLP (registered trademark) control circuit 232 and an LED driver 233 . The optical mechanism B24 includes, as components arranged around the lens unit B21, an LED light source emitting light of each color of R (red), G (green), and B (blue), a DMD, and the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21. A focus mechanism or the like for performing focus adjustment is provided (not shown).

The control LSI 230 controls the DLP control circuit 232 to project the irradiation light based on the command from the sub-controller SS. The control LSI 230 controls the focus mechanism to move the projection lens 210 in the optical axis direction based on a command from the sub-controller SS, thereby performing focus adjustment when projecting the irradiation light. The EEPROM 231 stores a control program by the control LSI 230 and data relating to setting and adjustment of the projector apparatus B2.

The DLP system of the projector device B2 is mainly composed of the DLP control circuit 232, the LED driver 233, and the LED light source and DMD of the optical mechanism B24.

Under the control of the DLP control circuit 232, the light reflected by the DMD in a predetermined direction proceeds to the lens unit B21, passes through the projection lens 210, enters the mirror mechanism B3, and is finally reflected by the mirror mechanism B3. is guided to the projection target by As a result, the illumination light is projected onto the screen and the character object to be projected, and an image corresponding to the presentation is formed.

In this embodiment, the projector device B2 is configured as a so-called DLP projector. Further, the projector device B2 increases the projection distance to the projection target by reflecting the irradiation light by the mirror mechanism B3, and shortens the projection distance of the irradiation light as much as possible by setting the contrast ratio to 1000:1, for example. ing. As a result, the display unit A including the projector device B2 can be constructed at a lower cost and in a smaller size, and can be easily installed in the limited space in the cabinet G of the pachi-slot machine 1.

(Display Unit A: Irradiation Unit B: Mechanical Configuration of Projector Device B2)
As shown in FIG. 47, the projector device B2 has a case B22, a lens unit cover B222, an under cover B223, an upper pedestal B220, and a lower pedestal B221 as exterior components. A lens unit cover B222 is attached to the front opening B22k of the case B22. An undercover B223 is arranged to cover the lower surface of the case B22. The undercover B223 is supported by the lower pedestal B221 via a stay B223a, and is also fixed to a suitable portion of the lower surface of the case B22. The projector device B2 is attached to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 43) of the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In this embodiment, an upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12, and a lower pedestal B221 is attached to the upper end so as to cover the upper opening of the case B22. A lower pedestal B221 is connected. A procedure for adjusting the attachment of the projector device B2 will be described later.

In addition, the projector apparatus B2 includes, as internal components, a lens unit B21, an LED board (not shown) mounted with an LED light source, a DMD board (not shown) mounted with a DMD, and a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, and 243B. , 243D, intake fans 244A and 244B, an exhaust fan 245, and a projector control board B23. The case B22 accommodates the lens unit B21 while covering the projection lens 210 of the lens unit B21 with a lens unit cover B222, and also includes an LED board, a DMD board, a plurality of heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, and an intake fan. 244A, 244B and an exhaust fan 245 are accommodated. The projector control board B23 is fixed to the bottom surface of the case B22.

Such a projector device B2 is controlled by the sub-controller SS so that the sub-controller SS transmits image data relating to images such as effects, and projects the image onto a screen or a character object. On the other hand, the sub-control device SS controls the screen drive mechanisms E2 and F2 to move the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 according to the contents of the presentation.

Here, the sub-control device SS controls the projector device B2 according to the movement of the screen mechanisms E1 and F1 due to the effect, and the image is projected onto the projection surfaces of the moved screen mechanisms E1 and F1 and the projection surface of the fixed screen mechanism D. Adjust the focus so that the image is projected clearly.

The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B partially contact the back surface of the LED substrate. A heat sink 243D partially contacts the backside of the DMD substrate. In this embodiment, the heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D have relatively large fin external sizes, while the heat sinks 243B and 243D are relatively small. These heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D dissipate the heat generated in each of the LED substrate and the DMD substrate into the air, thereby effectively preventing the temperature of the optical elements and the substrate from increasing to the extent that the optical characteristics are significantly changed. Dissipates heat well. The heat sinks 243R, 243G, 243B, and 243D, which are heat dissipating members, are made of a highly heat-conductive aluminum material to enhance the heat dissipating effect, and have a plurality of heat dissipating fins to increase the contact area with the air.

The intake fan 244A is arranged so as to be close to the rear surface of the right front portion of the case B22, and is close to the heat sink 243R. The intake fan 244B is arranged close to the rear surface of the left side of the case B22 and is close to the heat sink 243D. The exhaust fan 245 is arranged close to the back surface of the rear part of the case B22 and is close to the heat sink 243G.

An intake port B22A is provided in the right front portion of the case B22 where the intake fan 244A is adjacent, and an exhaust port B22E is provided in the right rear portion of the case B22 where the heat sink 243R is adjacent to the intake port B22A. It is An intake port B22B is provided in a portion of the left side of the case B22 near the intake fan 244B, and the other portion of the left side of the case B22 is provided in the case B22 so as to be aligned with the intake port B22B. An intake port B22C is provided so that air reaches the three heat sinks 243G, 243B, and 243D through the empty space. An exhaust port B22D is provided in the rear portion of the case B22 where the exhaust fan 245 is close.

That is, in the case B22 of the projector device B2, after the air is forcibly taken in by the intake fan 244A through the intake port B22A, a flow of air is formed that takes heat from the heat sink 243R and is exhausted from the exhaust port B22E. . Further, in the case B22, after forcibly sucking air from the air intake port B22B by the air intake fan 244B, heat is forcibly taken from the heat sinks 243D, 243B, and 243G by the air exhaust fan 245 from the air exhaust port B22D. A flow of air is formed which is exhausted to the Further, in the case B22, after being sucked from the intake port B22C, a flow of air is formed that is forcibly exhausted from the exhaust port B22D by the exhaust fan 245 while taking heat mainly from the heat sinks 243G and 243B. .

The projector control board B23 is attached to the lower surface of the case B22 while being covered with an undercover B223. A control LSI 230, an EEPROM 231, a DLP control circuit 232, an LED driver 233, and the like are mounted on the projector control board B23. The projector control board B23 is electrically connected to the LED board and DMD board arranged in the case B22, and also to the focus mechanism.

(Display Unit A: Irradiation Unit B: Adjusting Position and Posture of Projector Device B2)
As shown in FIGS. 48 to 50, the upper pedestal B220 is a sheet metal member fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (see FIG. 43) of the projector cover B1. formed by bending downward and outward, the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b extending to the left and right sides with a step from the main body portion 2200, and the main body portion 2200 partially extending from the rear side to the rear side. It has a rear end 2202 that protrudes. The body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 are provided with three connection holes 2200A for connecting the lower base B221. These three connecting holes 2200A are arranged so as not to be positioned on the same straight line within a plane (within a horizontal plane) along main body portion 2200 . Each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is provided with a plurality of square holes 2201c for fixing to the lower surface of the upper wall portion B12 by screwing. In this embodiment, three square holes 2201c are arranged in each of the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b, and are provided at regular intervals in the front-rear direction. The vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the square hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T (see FIG. 51) inserted and fastened therein.

The lower pedestal B221 is a sheet metal member that generally corresponds to the main body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202 of the upper pedestal B220. Three connecting screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the lower base B221 so as to protrude upward corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A. These three connecting screw portions 2210 are also arranged so as not to be positioned on the same straight line in the plane (inside the horizontal plane) along the lower base B221. The lower pedestal B221 has a coil spring 2211 fitted to each of the connecting screw portions 2210, and the tip of the connecting screw portion 2210 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A, and the coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the body portion 2200 and the rear end portion 2202. In this state, a nut 2213 is fastened from the upper surface side of the upper pedestal B220 to the tip of the connection screw portion 2210 via a washer 2212, thereby connecting the upper pedestal B220 in a suspended state. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 and a plurality of screw holes 2215 for screwing the stay B223a. The lower pedestal B221 is connected to the lower surface of the upper pedestal B220 while supporting the undercover B223 via the case B22 and the stay B223a.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 50, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected at three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 so that the distance therebetween can be adjusted. Each of the connecting portions R1, R2, R3 is composed of the connecting hole 2200A of the upper base B220, the connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower base B221, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213.

By using such an upper pedestal B220 and a lower pedestal B221, the projector device B2 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 so that the positioning and the optical axis can be adjusted.

FIG. 51 shows how the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. The lower diagram of FIG. 51(a) is a diagram showing a state in which the mounting screw T is inserted and tightened into the square hole 2201c of the upper base B220, and the upper diagram of FIG. 2 is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB' shown in the lower figure of FIG. Although FIG. 51 shows the periphery of the square hole 2201c formed in the left end portion 2201a of the upper base B220, the periphery of the remaining square holes 2201c in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b is the same.

As shown in FIG. 51(a), the mounting screw T is inserted into the rectangular hole 2201c from below, and the mounting screw T is arranged substantially in the center of the rectangular hole 2201c. The mounting screw T is screwed to the nut N located on the upper surface side of the upper wall portion B12 via a washer W arranged so as to follow the upper surface of the upper wall portion B12 and the lower surface of the left end portion 2201a. As a result, the left end portion 2201a of the upper base B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by screwing. The right end portion 2201b of the upper base B220 is also attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 by similar screwing.

51(a), the hatched portion indicated by symbol A is the gap formed between the screw shaft of the mounting screw T and the square hole 2201c. In FIG. 51(a), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is arranged and fixed substantially in the center of the rectangular hole 2201c. At this time, the threaded shaft of the mounting screw T can be moved within the shaded range (adjustment range) of symbol A. As shown in FIG. That is, by finely adjusting the relative position of the mounting screw T to the square hole 2201c within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, the left end portion 2201a of the upper pedestal B220 is positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. be able to. Similarly, the right end portion 2201b of the upper pedestal B220 can also be positioned and adjusted with respect to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1.

FIG. 51(b) shows a state in which the left end portion 2201a of the upper base B220 is shifted in the direction of arrow E with respect to FIG. 51(a). The upper diagram of FIG. 51(b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line D-D' shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 51(b). In the state shown in FIG. 51(b), the screw shaft of the mounting screw T is displaced relatively to the left within the opening range of the square hole 2201c, and within the range (adjustment range) of the hatched portion indicated by symbol C. can be moved with

Thus, the upper pedestal B220 is attached to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1 while being positioned and adjusted within a predetermined adjustment range that is the opening range of the square hole 2201c. That is, the projector apparatus B2 has a plurality of square holes 2201c provided in the left end portion 2201a and the right end portion 2201b of the upper base B220, so that the mounting position relative to the upper wall portion B12 is adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. As a result, the direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is easily adjusted so as to be perpendicular to the left-right direction and coincide with the front-rear direction as the reference direction.

FIG. 52 shows the connecting structure of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220. FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the lower pedestal B221 is connected to the upper pedestal B220 by the connecting hole 2200A, the connecting screw portion 2210, the coil spring 2211, the washer 2212, and the nut 2213 at the connecting portion R2. Although FIG. 52 shows one connecting portion R2, the remaining connecting portions R1 and R3 are the same.

The connecting screw portion 2210 of the lower pedestal B221 is inserted into the connecting hole 2200A from the lower surface side of the main body portion 2200 of the upper pedestal B220 and screwed to the nut 2213 via the washer 2212 arranged on the upper surface side of the main body portion 2200. be. A coil spring 2211 is fitted around the connecting screw portion 2210, and this coil spring 2211 is sandwiched between the lower surface of the main body portion 2200 and the upper surface of the lower pedestal B221 at the periphery of the connecting hole 2200A. The coil spring 2211 urges the portion near the connecting portion R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the direction (vertical direction) away from each other. It is possible to prevent loosening at the joined portion.

In such a connecting portion R2, by appropriately turning the nut 2213 in the direction of tightening or loosening, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be changed while being biased by the coil spring 2211. Specifically, when the nut 2213 is turned in the tightening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is narrowed. At this time, the upper pedestal B220 is fixed to the upper wall portion B12 (not shown in FIG. 52). Therefore, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced toward the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately tightening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted higher. On the other hand, when the nut 2213 is turned in the loosening direction, the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in the connecting portion R2 is increased. That is, the portion of the lower pedestal B221 near the connecting portion R2 is displaced away from the upper pedestal B220 by appropriately loosening the nut 2213, and the height position is adjusted lower.

At the other connecting portions R1 and R3 as well, the height position of the lower base B221 near the connecting portions R1 and R3 can be easily adjusted by appropriately adjusting the amount of tightening of the nuts 2213 in the same manner as described above. Such connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are arranged so that they are not positioned on the same straight line in the plane (within the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. are arranged as That is, since the height position of the lower pedestal B221 can be finely adjusted by tightening the nuts 2213 at each of the three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3, the posture of the lower pedestal B221 can be adjusted in the front-rear direction, The degree of inclination in the three-dimensional space can be adjusted in both the left-right direction and the up-down direction.

Such attitude adjustment of the lower pedestal B221 is performed while irradiating the screen or the like with light from the projector device B2 supported by the lower pedestal B221. At that time, an image is projected on a screen or the like by the irradiation light, and the attitude of the lower pedestal B221 is adjusted while checking the image. Thereby, the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 is adjusted so that an image is projected on the surface of a screen or the like in an appropriate display mode. That is, the direction of the optical axis can be adjusted in advance by adjusting the posture of the lower pedestal B221 so that so-called trapezoidal distortion does not occur in the image display mode.

Adjustment of the optical axis direction and the like are performed using an adjustment PC 1000 (see FIG. 46) connected to the projector apparatus B2. The projector device B2 attached to the upper wall portion B12 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 undergoes adjustment of the optical axis direction and a check of the image displayed on the screen or the like during inspection at the factory. , various adjustments necessary for projecting and displaying the image are performed. The adjustment PC 1000 is temporarily connected to the relay board CK of the projector apparatus B2 during adjustment work (see FIG. 46). When the PC 1000 for adjustment is operated, optical parameters relating to the projection position of the irradiation light, focus adjustment, etc. in the projector device B2 are changed according to a predetermined command transmitted from the PC 1000 for adjustment. The projection position and optical parameters appropriately adjusted in this way are stored in the EEPROM 231 of the projector device B2 as horizontal and vertical adjustment value data (see FIG. 46). The horizontal and vertical adjustment value data stored in the EEPROM 231 remain unchanged even when the pachi-slot machine 1 is installed in a game hall without power supply to the projector device B2 due to transport after shipment from the factory. can be used.

As is clear from the above, the projector device B2 is positioned in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction mainly according to the mounting position on the upper wall portion B12 of the upper pedestal B220, and is positioned within the three-dimensional space of the lower pedestal B221. The direction of the optical axis is adjusted according to the attitude of the .

In this embodiment, the connecting portions for connecting the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are provided at three locations. You may make it provide a connection part above. In this embodiment, the upper base B220 is provided with the connecting hole 2200A and the lower base B221 is provided with the connecting screw portion 2210, but these connecting holes and the connecting screw portion may be provided upside down. The connection screw portion is not limited to being integrally formed with the base as in the present embodiment, and may be any one that can be fixed to one of the bases. For example, the connecting screw portion may be a bolt that penetrates through the lower pedestal and is fixed.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention. The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment has the following features.

(1-1) a display unit (display unit A) for displaying images;
a main body (cabinet G) housing the display unit (display unit A) and having an opening on the front;
an openable door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body (cabinet G) so as to be openable,
The display unit (display unit A) is
a projector (projector device B2) capable of projecting an image;
a reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) that reflects light emitted from the projector (projector device B2);
A screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying an image projected by the projector (projector device B2) based on the light reflected by the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) and
The projector (projector device B2), the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3), and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are unitized,
The position of the reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit (display unit A) with the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) opened.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the display unit A includes a projector device B2, a mirror mechanism B3, a fixed screen mechanism D, a front screen mechanism E1, and a reel screen mechanism F1. The position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted from the outside of the display unit A with the upper door mechanism UD opened. Therefore, since the position of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the pachislot machine 1, the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate. Even in this case, the projection position can be adjusted.

(1-2) The gaming machine of (1-1) above,
The projector (projector device B2) and the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) are fixed at predetermined positions in the display unit (display unit A),
The projector (projector device B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1), and can emit light forward,
The reflecting mirror (mirror mechanism B3) is arranged in front of the projector (projector device B2) so as to be able to reflect the light emitted from the projector (projector device B2) obliquely downward and rearward. It is possible to adjust the reflection direction of the light by changing the degree of engagement of the screw exposed toward the opening side of the part (cabinet G).

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the projector device B2, the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1 are fixed at predetermined positions on the display unit A. On the other hand, the mirror mechanism B3 is provided with a screw for adjusting the reflection direction of light, and the screw is exposed toward the opening side of the cabinet G. Therefore, even after the display unit A is installed in the cabinet G of the pachi-slot machine 1, the light reflection direction (angle) can be adjusted by loosening or tightening the screw with the upper door mechanism UD open. can be adjusted. Accordingly, even when the position of the image projected by the projector device B2 is not appropriate, the projection position can be adjusted.

(2-1) a projection device (projector device B2) for projecting an image with irradiated light;
a plurality of projection planes capable of displaying images projected by the projection device;
a drive mechanism (front screen drive mechanism E2, reel screen drive mechanism F2) that displaces at least one of the plurality of projection planes as a movable projection plane;
an upper wall (upper wall portion B12) located above the projection device,
The plurality of projection planes are subjected to surface processing,
The drive mechanism is configured to displace the movable projection surface relative to the projection device,
An upper pedestal (upper pedestal B220) and a lower pedestal (lower pedestal B221) are provided between the projection device and the upper wall,
The upper pedestal is attached to the upper wall so that the in-plane position can be adjusted, and the lower pedestal supports the projection device and is adjustable in three or more positions with respect to the upper pedestal. A game machine characterized by being attached to a.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the projector device B2 appropriately adjusts the in-plane position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the upper wall B12, thereby properly adjusting the upper wall B12 via the upper pedestal B220. By appropriately adjusting the vertical spacing of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 positioned on the upper wall portion B12 with three or more connecting portions R1, R2, and R3, It is mounted so that the posture supported via this lower base B221 is appropriate. Therefore, the in-plane arrangement position and the in-space orientation of the projector device B2 can be easily adjusted using the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and high-quality images with high image visual effects can be projected onto a plurality of projection surfaces. can be projected.

(2-2) The gaming machine of (2-1) above,
The upper pedestal and the lower pedestal are connected to each other at three or more connecting portions (connecting portions R1, R2, R3) that are not on the same straight line,
Each of the plurality of connecting portions includes:
a connection screw portion (connection screw portion 2210) protruding from one of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal and screwed through the other;
and a coil spring (coil spring 2211) that is externally fitted to the connecting screw portion and arranged between the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 have three or more connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 that are not on the same straight line, and the distance between each other is equal to the length of the connecting screw portion 2210. Individual adjustment is possible only by adjusting the amount of screw tightening, and the interval after adjustment is kept constant by the elastic biasing force of the coil spring 2211, so the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, and the up-down direction that are perpendicular to each other in the space. The posture of the projector device B2 can be finely adjusted with respect to the three axial directions, and the projector device B2 can be held in a proper posture in any of the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction, for example.

[Third embodiment]
The second embodiment has been described above. A third embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment is the same as that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment. In the following description, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the parts to which the description of the second embodiment applies also to the third embodiment will be omitted.

<Upper Pedestal B220 and Lower Pedestal B221>
The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the present embodiment have configurations different from those of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 according to the second embodiment.

FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. FIG. 54 is a plan view showing the assembled state of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal. 55 is a diagram of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 as viewed obliquely from the front. 56 is a view of the upper pedestal and the lower pedestal shown in FIG. 54 as seen obliquely from the rear. FIG. 57 is a perspective view of a case housing the internal components of the projector mechanism. FIG. 58 is a perspective view showing a state where the case is attached to the lower pedestal.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the upper pedestal B220 has a shape in which a rectangular opening is provided in a sheet metal member that is rectangular in plan view. As shown in FIG. 54, the opening is formed in a substantially rectangular shape surrounded by sides A, B, C, and D. As shown in FIG.

A square hole 2201c is provided in each of the right and left portions of the upper base B220. The square hole 2201c is a hole for fixing the upper base B220 to the relay plate B300 (see FIG. 61) by screwing.

In the second embodiment, when attaching the projector device B2 to the projector cover B1, the projector device B2 is directly fixed to the projector cover B1 by screwing the upper pedestal B220 to the upper wall portion B12 of the projector cover B1. explained. In contrast, in the present embodiment, a relay plate B300 is interposed between the upper base B220 and the projector cover B1.

The vertical and horizontal inner diameter dimensions of the rectangular hole 2201c are larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T inserted and fastened therein. FIG. 54 also shows a fixing plate B321 used when fixing the upper base B220 to the relay plate B300. In this embodiment, the relay plate B300 and the upper pedestal B220 are fastened using a fixing plate B321 and cap bolts. Although the fixing plate B321 is not shown in the second embodiment, conventionally known members can be appropriately selected and used for fastening the relay plate B300 and the upper base B220.

Further, the upper pedestal B220 is provided with three connecting holes 2200A for connecting the lower pedestal B221. 2200 A of three connection holes are arrange|positioned so that it may not be located on the same straight line in the plane (inside of a horizontal plane) along upper base B220.

The lower pedestal B221 includes a rectangular main body B221a having a rectangular opening in the center, a right side B221b and a left side B221c extending forward with a step from the main body B221a, and a main body B221a. is a sheet metal member provided with a rear end portion B221d extending rearward with a step.

As shown in FIG. 55, the right side portion B221b is formed by bending the right front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. The left side portion B221c is formed by bending the left front end of the main body portion B221a downward and outward. As shown in FIG. 56, the rear end portion B221d is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B221a downward and bending a part of the downwardly bent portion outward. The right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d are formed so as to be positioned on the same plane.

Connection screw portions 2210 are integrally formed on the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d so as to protrude upward corresponding to the three connection holes 2200A of the upper base B220. The three connecting screw portions 2210 are arranged so as not to be positioned on the same straight line within a plane (within a horizontal plane) along the right side portion B221b, the left side portion B221c, and the rear end portion B221d.

As in the second embodiment, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected at each of the three connecting portions corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw portions 2210 so that the mutual spacing can be adjusted. be done. The three connecting portions are each composed of a connecting hole 2200A, a connecting screw portion 2210, a coil spring 2211, a washer 2212, and a nut 2213 (see FIG. 47).

Further, as shown in FIG. 53, the lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22. As the case B22, it is possible to adopt a case having the same configuration as in the second embodiment, but in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. there is

As in the second embodiment, the case B22 accommodates a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 47), an LED board, a DMD board, a heat sink, an intake fan, etc., which are internal components of the projector apparatus B2. A projector control board B23 (see FIG. 47) is fixed to the bottom surface of the case B22.

A lens unit cover B222 (see FIG. 47) is attached to a front opening B22k provided on the front surface of the case B22. The lens unit B21 is accommodated in the case B22 with the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 47) covered by the lens unit cover B222.

In addition, although not shown, the case B22 has two intake fans 244A at a location on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction (near the right end of the left side B221c when attached to the lower pedestal B221 (see FIG. 58)). 244B are arranged in a line in front and back. A heat sink is provided on the left side of the two intake fans 244A and 244B.

An intake port B22A is provided on the right side of the case B22 (see FIG. 57), and an exhaust port B22E is provided on the left side of the case B22 (see FIG. 58). As a result, in the case B22, a flow of air is formed that is forcibly taken in by the intake fans 244A and 244B through the intake port B22A and then exhausted from the exhaust port B22E while removing heat from the heat sink.

As shown in FIG. 58, the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by screw fastening, and the upper end surface (the upper wall portion B22F shown in FIG. 57) is the inner surface of the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221. is in contact with Further, in a state where the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected, the main body portion B221a of the lower pedestal B221 is located above the upper pedestal B220. As a result, the upper wall portion B22F of the case B22 is also positioned above the upper pedestal B220.

In this regard, in the second embodiment, the upper end of the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221, and the upper pedestal B220 is arranged above it. Therefore, the case B22 could not be arranged in the space formed between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. In contrast, in the present embodiment, an opening is formed in the upper pedestal B220, and the upper end of the case B22 is arranged so that the upper end (upper wall portion B22F) of the case B22 is inserted upward through the opening. (Upper wall portion B22F) can be positioned above the upper pedestal B220. This makes it possible to effectively utilize the space for arranging the case B22.

By moving the case B22 (projector apparatus B2) relative to the upper pedestal B220 upward in this way, the front portion provided on the front surface of the case B22 A part of the upper base B220 is arranged in front of the opening B22k (see FIG. 57) (see FIG. 58). That is, part of the upper pedestal B220 is arranged in front of the projection lens 210 (see FIG. 47) installed so as to correspond to the front opening B22k. As a result, it seems that the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is blocked by the upper base B220.

However, the illuminating light is not blocked in this way. That is, in this embodiment, the irradiation light is emitted from the portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210 . In other words, only the lower half of the projection lens 210 (the portion below the horizontal plane passing through the central portion of the projection lens 210 in the vertical direction) is used when the irradiation light is emitted. The light emission position of such a projection lens 210 is different from that of a conventionally known projector (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-058875).

As described above, in this embodiment, the upper half of the projection lens 210 is not used when the irradiation light is emitted, and the irradiation light is emitted from the portion below the optical axis of the projection lens 210, as shown in FIG. The upper pedestal B<b>220 arranged in front of the projection lens 210 is present above the optical axis of the projection lens 210 . Therefore, the course of the light emitted from the projection lens 210 is below the upper pedestal B220, and the irradiation light is not blocked by the upper pedestal B220.

Further, the lower pedestal B221 is bent downward to form a right side B221b, a left side B221c, and a rear end B221d. The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can be connected so that the upper pedestal B220 is arranged. As a result, while the configurations of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are changed from those of the second embodiment, the configuration of the three connecting portions can be the same as that of the second embodiment.

Therefore, the adjustment of the optical axis direction of the light emitted from the projector device B2 can also be performed by the same method as in the second embodiment. Such adjustment of the optical axis direction and the like requires a sophisticated computer program, and development of the program incurs a large amount of cost. In this embodiment, the same program as in the second embodiment can be used to adjust the optical axis direction, etc., so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of new costs.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case B22 is described as having the upper wall portion B22F. good. Also, the method of attaching the case B22 to the lower pedestal B221 is not particularly limited, and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 by using the stay B223a (see FIG. 47) as in the second embodiment. You can do it.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by disposing a portion of the case B22 above the upper pedestal B220, the case B22 can be moved upward compared to the second embodiment. , a new space can be created in the lower region of the case B22. Such an effect is obtained by changing the structure of the upper base B220 from that of the second embodiment, and the same structure as that of the second embodiment can be adopted for the projector cover B1.

However, in this embodiment, considering other effects, a projector cover B1 having a configuration different from that of the second embodiment is adopted. The projector cover B1 according to this embodiment will be described below.

<Projector cover B1>
FIG. 59 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper wall portion of the projector cover is removed. FIG. 60 is a plan view of the projector cover with the top wall removed. FIG. 61 is an exploded view showing a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 60 taken along line LL and a perspective view of a relay plate attached to the projector cover. FIG. 62 is an oblique top view of the projector cover with the top wall removed. FIG. 63 is a front view of the projector cover with the top wall removed. FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional view of the projector cover shown in FIG. 63 taken along line MM.

As shown in FIG. 59, the projector cover B1 has a generally bilaterally symmetrical structure, and has a relay plate mounting portion B301 inside. The relay plate attachment portion B301 is formed so as to protrude inward from the inner surface of each of the left and right side wall portions B13, B13. The relay plate mounting portion B301 is formed so as to have a step, and includes a relay plate mounting surface B301a formed on the front and rear sides, a position adjustment surface B301d formed above the relay plate mounting surface B301a, and a front surface B301b. and a connection portion B301e for connecting the rear relay plate mounting surface B301a and the position adjustment surface B301d.

A mounting hole B301b is formed in the relay plate mounting surface B301a. A position adjustment hole B301c is formed in the position adjustment surface B301d. The attachment hole B301b is a screw hole for attaching the relay plate B300 to the relay plate attachment portion B301 by screwing. The position adjustment hole B301c is formed at a position facing the square hole 2201c (see FIG. 53) of the upper base B220 when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate mounting portion B301.

As shown in FIG. 61, the relay plate B300 includes a main body B300A, a front side B300B extending forward with a step from the main body B300A, and a rearward extending with a step from the main body B300A. It has a rear side B300C. The front side portion B300B is formed by bending the front end of the main body portion B300A downward and forward. The rear side portion B300C is formed by bending the rear end of the main body portion B300A downward and rearward. Thus, the shape of the relay plate B300 corresponds to the step provided in the relay plate mounting portion B301 of the projector cover B1.

A first through hole B300a is formed in the body portion B300A. A second through hole B300b is formed in each of the front side portion B300B and the rear side portion B300C. The first through hole B300a is a hole through which a cap bolt is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the upper base B220. On the other hand, the second through hole B300b is a hole through which a screw is inserted when the relay plate B300 is attached to the relay plate mounting portion B301 by screw fastening.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, openings B400 (a right opening B400a and a left opening B400b) whose upper side is open are provided on both left and right sides in front of the projector cover B1. The right opening B400a has a shape similar to a hexagon formed by sides E to J (see FIG. 60) when viewed from above.

As shown in FIG. 62, with sides E to J as upper ends, wall surfaces (wall surface B401e, wall surface B401f, wall surface B401g, wall surface B401h, wall surface B401i, and wall surface B401j) extending downward from each side are formed. ing. A wall surface B401j (see FIG. 59) formed continuously from the side J is shorter in the vertical direction than the other wall surfaces B401e to B401i. A wall surface B401e formed continuously from the side E continues to the rear inside the projector cover B1 and forms part of the inner surface 403 (see FIG. 64) of the projector cover B1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61, a cavity B402 is formed below the position adjustment surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301.

FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional view taken along a horizontal plane (a plane above the relay plate mounting surface B301a and below the position adjustment surface B301d) passing through the connection portion B301e.

As shown in FIG. 64, an opening B400 (a right opening B400a and a left opening B400b) opened toward the upper side of the projector cover B1 and a cavity 402 formed below the position adjustment surface B301d of the relay plate mounting portion B301. , inside the projector cover B1.

<Space Formation by Projector Cover B1 and Blind B500>
In this embodiment, a blind B500 is employed as a member provided on the lower side of the projector cover B1 in place of the perforated plate B15 (see FIG. 45) in the second embodiment.

Figure 65 is a perspective view of the blind. FIG. 66 is a plan view of the irradiation unit with the upper wall portion of the projector cover removed. 67 is a diagram showing a state in which the fan for the vicinity of the opening and the duct cover are removed in a cross section along the arrow NN of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 66. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 65, the blind B500 has a substantially symmetrical structure, and is formed to have a substantially horizontal first horizontal portion B501 and a slope continuously with the first horizontal portion B501. a second horizontal portion B502b formed substantially horizontally continuously with the first inclined portion B502a; and a second horizontal portion B502b formed so as to have an inclination continuously with the second horizontal portion B502b. A third horizontal portion B502d formed substantially horizontally continuously with the inclined portion B502c, the second inclined portion B502c, and a rear portion of the third horizontal portion B502d so that the width in the horizontal direction is the same as that of the third horizontal portion B502d. It has a rear wall portion B503 erected upward from the end, an outer wall portion B504 forming the outer wall of the blind B500, and an inner wall portion B505 facing the outer wall portion B504.

The outer wall portion B504 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, the third horizontal portion B502d, and the rear wall portion B503. The inner wall portion B505 is continuous with the first inclined portion B502a and the second horizontal portion B502b. In addition, the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d are raised in a certain range near the outer wall portion B504, and are higher than the inner portion of the range. It has a structure that

In addition, the blind B500 has a small room B507 that is rectangular in plan view. The small room B507 is a space surrounded by a front wall portion B507a, an outer wall portion B507b, a rear wall portion B507d, and an inner wall portion B505 which are formed in the vertical direction. The front wall portion B507a is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b and extends in the left-right direction. The outer wall portion B507b is erected from the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d, extends in the front-rear direction, and is continuous with the rear wall portion B503. The rear wall portion B507d is erected so as to form substantially the same plane as the rear wall portion B503.

In this way, the small room B507 is formed so as to straddle the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. The width in the left-right direction is narrower than the width in the left-right direction of the first inclined portion B502a by the length of the width in the left-right direction of the front wall portion B507a. A U-shaped notch 507c with an open top is formed in the outer wall portion B507b. Further, the upper ends of the front wall portion B507a, the outer wall portion B507b, and the rear wall portion B507d are lower than the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505.

The first horizontal portion B501 includes a first wall portion B501a that slightly stands upward at the front end thereof, a second wall portion B501b that continues rearward from the inner portion of the first wall portion B501a, A third wall portion B501c that continues obliquely rearward from the second wall portion B501b, a fourth wall portion B501d that continues rearward from the third wall portion B501c, and a continuous wall portion B501d that continues inward from the fourth wall portion B501d. A fifth wall portion B501e is formed. The fifth wall portion B501e is continuous with the inner wall portion B505.

A screw hole B506 for attaching the blind B500 to the projector cover B1 by screwing is formed in an area surrounded by the third wall portion B501c, the fourth wall portion B501d, and the fifth wall portion B501e.

As shown in FIG. 67, in a state where the blind B500 is attached to the lower side of the projector cover B1, the surface of the first wall portion B501a of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401f of the projector cover B1 and the second wall portion B401f of the blind B500. The surface of the wall portion B501b is continuous with the wall surface B401g of the projector cover B1, the surface of the third wall portion B501c of the blind B500 is continuous with the wall surface B401h of the projector cover B1, and the surface of the fourth wall portion B501d of the blind B500 is continuous. , and the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1.

Although not shown in FIG. 67, the surface of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is substantially flush with the surface B402a (see FIG. 64) existing in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 61) of the projector cover B1. placed above. A certain gap exists between the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a. As will be described later, the gap is filled with a duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) (see FIG. 71). Furthermore, the inner surface of the outer wall portion B504 of the blind B500 is continuous with the inner surface 403 (see FIG. 64) of the projector cover B1.

As described above, a space P (see FIG. 67) is formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. The space P is covered with a projector cover B1 on the top and a blind B500 on the bottom. In addition, on the sides of the space P, the first wall portion B501a to the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500, the inner wall portion B505, the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the wall surfaces B401f to B401i of the projector cover B1, It is surrounded by surfaces B402a and B402b existing in front and rear of the cavity B402, an inner surface 403, and the like.

An upper portion of the space P is connected to the external space of the projector cover B1 through an opening B400 (see FIG. 59), and the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (see FIG. 64) through a cavity B402. ) are connected. The cavity B402 forms part of the space P when the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 are assembled.

As shown in FIGS. 66 and 67, the openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) are provided with punchings B450 (right punching B450a and left punching B450b) having a mesh structure. As a result, it is possible to prevent foreign matter from entering the space P through the opening B400 to some extent.

<Formation of air flow path and liquid storage space>
68 is a perspective view showing a state in which an opening vicinity fan and a duct cover are attached to the blind shown in FIG. 65 and a case is arranged. FIG. 69 is a perspective view showing a state in which the right punching is removed from the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 66. FIG. 70 is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which an opening vicinity fan and a duct cover are attached to the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 67. FIG. 71 is a right side view of the cross section of the irradiation unit shown in FIG. 70 with the opening vicinity fan removed. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 68, a duct cover B600 is arranged substantially horizontally on the upper right side of the blind B500. The duct cover B600 is a plate-like member, and its external shape when viewed from above is the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500, and the front wall portion B507a and the outer wall portion B507b of the small room B507. (Refer to FIG. 65) It has a shape that approximates a figure that includes the respective upper edges. Thereby, the duct cover B600 covers the blind B500 from above.

A duct cover B650 is arranged substantially horizontally on the upper left side of the blind B500. The duct cover B650 is a plate-like member, and has a different outer shape from the top view than the duct cover B600 (see FIG. 75), but like the duct cover B600, covers the blind B500 from above.

As shown in FIG. 70, the space P (see FIG. 67) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500 consists of a space P1 above the duct cover B600 (duct cover B650) and a space below the duct cover B600. and P2. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 70 shows the duct cover B600 with oblique lines.

Further, as shown in FIG. 68, an opening vicinity fan B700 is placed in front of the upper side of the duct cover B600. The near-opening fan B700 is a fan for intake, and is designed to allow the air present in front of the near-opening fan B700 to pass through the air passing portion B710 (see FIG. 72) and move rearward. It has become.

As shown in FIGS. 69 and 70, when the projector cover B1 is attached to the blind B500, the opening vicinity fan B700 is positioned near the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1. For the sake of clarity, in FIGS. 69 and 70, the opening vicinity fan B700 is shaded.

Here, although not shown, in this embodiment, when the display unit A is attached to the cabinet G, the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes forward from the cabinet G, and the portion of the irradiation unit B protruding from the cabinet G is , is accommodated in the upper door mechanism UD (see FIG. 36). Two openings (not shown) formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD are respectively positioned directly above the two openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 70, the air intake B22A (see FIG. 57) of the case B22 is arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (the right cavity B402 of the two cavities B402). Although not shown, the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 58) of the case B22 is similarly arranged so as to be close to the cavity B402 (the left cavity B402 of the two cavities B402).

As a result, in the present embodiment, air enters the upper door mechanism UD from the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the opening (the right opening of the two openings) formed in the upper surface wall of the upper door mechanism UD. is taken in. This air moves downward inside the upper door mechanism UD and is taken into the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1.

The air that has entered the interior of the projector cover B1 is located above the duct cover B600 in the space P (the right space P of the two spaces P, see FIG. 67) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. After moving backward through the space P1 (see FIG. 70), it turns to the inside of the projector cover B1, passes through the cavity B402 (the right cavity B402 of the two cavities B402), and enters the air intake B22A. It enters the inside of the case B22 via.

The air that has entered the case B22 moves leftward while absorbing the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E.

After passing through the cavity B402 (the left cavity B402 of the two cavities B402), the air exiting the case B22 changes course forward and enters the space P (the left space of the two spaces P). P) moves forward in the space P1 above the duct cover B650. The air then exits the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 (left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1.

After moving upward inside the upper door mechanism UD, the air coming out of the projector cover B1 passes through an opening (the left opening of the two openings) formed in the upper surface wall of the upper door mechanism UD. and released to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Among the air flows described above, the air flow paths inside the projector cover B1 are indicated by thick arrows in FIG. Also, the flow of air in the space P1 is indicated by an arrow A in FIG. In this embodiment, heat generated in the projector device B2 can be discharged to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 by forming such an air flow path.

Here, as described above, the openings formed in the top wall of the upper door mechanism UD are located directly above the openings B400 (right opening B400a and left opening B400b) of the projector cover B1. That is, when the opening of the upper door mechanism UD and the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 are viewed from above, at least a portion of them overlap.

Therefore, if foreign matter such as liquid enters the pachi-slot machine 1 through the opening of the upper door mechanism UD, the foreign matter enters the interior of the projector cover B1. However, according to this embodiment, even in such a case, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from entering the case B22. A case where the liquid L is introduced from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD will be described below as an example.

The liquid L introduced from the opening of the upper door mechanism UD passes through the opening B400 (right opening B400a) of the projector cover B1 and falls onto the first horizontal portion B501 (see FIG. 65) of the blind B500.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 67, the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 and the lower end of the surface B402a (see FIG. 64) existing in front of the cavity B402 (see FIG. 61) of the projector cover B1. A certain gap exists between them, and the thickness of the duct cover B600 substantially matches the length of the gap. The duct cover B600 is arranged so as to contact both the upper end of the fifth wall portion B501e and the lower end of the surface B402a to fill the gap. As a result, a gap corresponding to the height of the fifth wall portion B501e of the blind B500 is formed between the first horizontal portion B501 of the blind B500 and the duct cover B600. The liquid L passes through the gap and flows from the first horizontal portion B501 toward the first inclined portion B502a.

Since the first inclined portion B502a and the second inclined portion B502c of the blind B500 have an inclination that descends toward the rear, the liquid L flows through the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, and the second inclined portion B502b. It flows backward through the inclined portion B502c and the third horizontal portion B502d. Thus, the liquid L flows on the surfaces of the first horizontal portion B501, the first inclined portion B502a, the second horizontal portion B502b, the second inclined portion B502c, and the third horizontal portion B502d. Such a flow of liquid L is indicated by arrow L in FIG.

The liquid L flowing backward collides with the rear wall portion B503 and is stored in the area surrounded by the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the outer wall portion B507b (and the inner wall portion B505) (FIG. 71). reference). This area is included in the space P2 (see FIG. 70) below the duct cover B600 in the space P (see FIG. 67) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 71, the stored liquid L is shaded.

Here, the space P1 shown in FIG. 70 and the internal space Q (see FIG. 64) of the projector cover B1 are connected via the opening B510 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 71, the opening B510 has a shape similar to a rectangle formed by sides K to N when viewed from the side.

A side K forming the lower end of the opening B510 corresponds to the upper edge B505a (see FIG. 65) of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500. As shown in FIG. 65, the upper edge B505a (lower end of the opening 510) of the inner wall portion B505 includes a first horizontal portion B501, a first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b, a second inclined portion B502c, and It is located above the third horizontal portion B502d (the path of the liquid L).

Although not shown in the figure, the right end of the duct cover B600 is placed on the upper edge of the outer wall B504 of the blind B500, and the left end is in contact with the outer surface of the inner wall B505 of the blind B500. They are arranged so as to contact each other, so that the main surface B610 (see FIG. 72) forms substantially the same plane as the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505 of the blind B500 (see FIG. 68). As a result, the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 and the storage space (space P2) of the liquid L are separated by the duct cover B600, and the liquid L flows through the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 (the inside of the case B22) through the opening B510. ) is becoming more difficult to invade.

<Mounting structure and mounting position of fan near opening>
FIG. 72 is an exploded perspective view of the duct cover and the fan for the vicinity of the opening. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover and the fan near the opening viewed from the rear and below. FIG. 74 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the projector cover and the opening vicinity fan as viewed from the front and below.

As shown in FIG. 72, the duct cover B600 includes a main surface B610, a fan installation structure B620, a rear side portion B630, wiring openings B640 (B640a and B640b), screw holes B650 (B650a and B650b), It has

The main surface B610 has a shape obtained by notching a left rear corner portion of a rectangular shape in top view. The fan installation structure B620 is a structure for installing the opening vicinity fan B700, and is formed on the front right side of the main surface B610. The rear side portion B630 is formed to extend rearward from the right rear portion of the main surface B610. The wiring opening B640 is a hole for inserting a wiring that connects various functional components (such as the sub-controller SS) arranged outside the projector cover B1 and the projector device B2. The screw hole B650 is a hole for attaching the duct cover B600 to the projector cover B1 by screwing.

The fan installation structure B620 includes a front engaging portion B621 erected at the front end of a principal surface B610, a left rear engaging portion B622 erected from the principal surface B610 behind the front engaging portion B621, and a right rear engaging portion B621. A side engaging portion B623 and a lower engaging portion B624 (a lower left engaging portion B624a, a lower middle engaging portion B624b, and a lower and a right engaging portion B624c).

The lower left engaging portion B624a and the lower middle engaging portion B624b connect the rear surface of the front engaging portion B621 and the front surface of the left rear engaging portion B622. The lower right engaging portion B624c connects the rear surface of the front engaging portion B621 and the front surface of the right rear engaging portion B623.

An upper edge B621a of the front engaging portion B621, an upper edge B622a of the left rear engaging portion B622, and an upper edge B623a of the right rear engaging portion B623 are each formed in a curved shape. The opening vicinity fan B700 has a circular air passage portion B710. The upper edge B621a, the upper edge B622a, and the upper edge B623a are formed in a shape (arc shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passage portion B710. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 72, the upper edge B621a and the upper edge B622a are hatched, and the air passage portion B710 is shaded.

As shown in FIG. 73, a structure (fan installation structure) for installing the opening vicinity fan B700 is formed so as to protrude downward from the ceiling inside the projector cover B1. Specifically, the projector cover B1 includes a front engaging portion B421 formed along the rear end of the opening B400, a rear engaging portion B422 formed rearward of the front engaging portion B421, It has an extending upper engaging portion B423 (an upper left engaging portion B423a, an upper middle engaging portion B423b, and an upper right engaging portion B423c).

The upper engaging portion B423 connects the rear surface of the front engaging portion B421 and the front surface of the rear engaging portion B422. As for the downward projection length from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1, the front side engaging portion B421 and the rear side engaging portion B422 are longer than the upper side engaging portion B423.

A lower edge B421a of the front engaging portion B421 and a lower edge B422a of the rear engaging portion B422 are curved. The lower edge B421a and the lower edge B422a are formed in a shape (arcuate shape) corresponding to the shape of the air passing portion B710 of the fan B700 for the vicinity of the opening. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 73, the lower edge B421a and the lower edge B422a are hatched.

The opening vicinity fan B700 is held between the fan installation structure B620 of the duct cover B600 and the fan installation structure of the projector cover B1 described above.

Specifically, the distance between the front engaging portion B621 and the left rear engaging portion B622 of the duct cover B600, the distance between the front engaging portion B621 and the right rear engaging portion B623, and the front engaging portion of the projector cover B1 The distance between the joining portion B421 and the rear engaging portion B422 is approximately equal to the length of the opening vicinity fan B700 in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the left front surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 contacts the rear surface of the front engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the left rear surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 contacts the left rear engaging portion B622 of the duct cover B600. The opening vicinity fan B700 abuts on the front surface and is sandwiched between the front engaging portion B621 and the left rear engaging portion B622 of the duct cover B600. The right front surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 contacts the rear surface of the front engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600, and the right rear surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 contacts the front surface of the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600. , and the opening vicinity fan B700 is sandwiched between the front engaging portion B621 and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600.

Further, the front surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 contacts the rear surface of the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1, and the rear surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 contacts the front surface of the rear engaging portion B422 of the projector cover B1. , the opening vicinity fan B700 is sandwiched between the front engaging portion B421 and the rear engaging portion B422 of the projector cover B1.

In addition, the three lower engaging portions B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower right engaging portion B624c) of the duct cover B600 extend upward from the main surface B610. are approximately equal to each other. The three upper engaging portions B423 (upper left engaging portion B423a, upper middle engaging portion B423b, and upper right engaging portion B423c) of the projector cover B1 extend downward from the ceiling portion inside the projector cover B1. are approximately equal to each other. The distance between the lower engaging portion B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging portion B423 of the projector cover B1 is substantially equal to the vertical length of the opening vicinity fan B700.

As a result, the lower surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 is connected to the three lower engaging portions B624 (lower left engaging portion B624a, lower middle engaging portion B624b, and lower right engaging portion B624c) of the duct cover B600. ), and the upper surface of the opening vicinity fan B700 engages with the three upper engaging portions B423 (upper left engaging portion B423a, upper middle engaging portion B423b, and upper right engaging portion B423c) of the projector cover B1. ), and the opening vicinity fan B700 is sandwiched between the lower engaging portion B624 of the duct cover B600 and the upper engaging portion B423 of the projector cover B1.

As described above, the opening vicinity fan B700 is fixed by being sandwiched between the duct cover B600 and the projector cover B1 from the front-rear direction and the up-down direction.

In the state where the near-opening fan B700 is fixed, the front edge of the air passing portion B710 is aligned with the upper edge B621a of the front engaging portion B621 of the duct cover B600 and the lower edge B421a of the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1. (see Figures 69 and 74). Also, although not shown, the outer edge on the back side of the air passage portion B710 is the upper edge B622a of the left rear engaging portion B622 and the upper edge B623a of the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the projector cover B1. It is positioned along the lower edge B422a of the rear engaging portion B422.

In other words, the air passing portion B710 includes, in a front view, the front engaging portion B621, the left rear engaging portion B622, and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the front engaging portion of the projector cover B1. It does not overlap with B421 and the rear engaging portion B422. In other words, the air passing portion B710 includes the front engaging portion B621, the left rear engaging portion B622, and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600, and the front engaging portion B421 and B421 of the projector cover B1. It is not covered with the rear side engaging portion B422. As a result, the maximum area of the air passing portion can be ensured.

On the other hand, the peripheral edge of the air passage portion B710, the upper edge of the engaging portion of the duct cover B600 (upper edge B621a, upper edge B622a, and upper edge B623a), and the lower edge of the engaging portion of the projector cover B1 (lower edge) B421a and the lower edge B422a) are aligned to increase the area of the portion where the opening vicinity fan B700 and the duct cover B600 contact and the area of the portion where the opening vicinity fan B700 and the projector cover B1 contact. By doing so, the opening vicinity fan B700 can be stably fixed.

As shown in FIG. 74, the front surface of the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1 is a wall surface B401j (FIG. 59) formed downward from the rear edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the right opening B400a. ) are consistent with As a result, the opening vicinity fan B700 is arranged behind the rear edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the right opening B400a by the thickness of the front engaging portion B421 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the opening vicinity fan B700 is located in a position further back than the right opening B400a, even if liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, the liquid is unlikely to be directly applied to the opening vicinity fan B700. It's like On the other hand, since the opening vicinity fan B700 is arranged close to the right opening B400a, air is easily taken in from the outside of the projector cover B1 through the right opening B400a. As a result, the heat generated in the projector device B2 can be efficiently discharged.

While the left rear engaging portion B622 and the right rear engaging portion B623 of the duct cover B600 are configured separately, the front engaging portion B621 is connected without being separated from the left and right portions. shape. As a result, even if liquid enters from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1, it is difficult for the liquid to enter the rear.

Also, the length of the rear edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the right opening B400a in the projector cover B1, the length in the left-right direction of the front engaging portion B621 in the duct cover B600, and the left rear engagement in the duct cover B600 The length from the left end of the portion B622 to the right end of the right rear engaging portion B623, the left-right length of the front engaging portion B421 on the projector cover B1, and the left-right length of the rear engaging portion B422 on the projector cover B1. In addition, the lengths in the left-right direction of the opening vicinity fan B700 are all substantially equal. As a result, the midway space from the right opening B400a of the projector cover B1 to the space P1 (see FIG. 70) (the cross section when the space P1 is cut along the vertical plane in the left-right direction) is substantially eliminated by the opening vicinity fan B700. It is buried. In this respect as well, the maximum area of the air passing portion is ensured, and the cooling efficiency of the projector device B2 can be enhanced.

<Liquid storage and discharge>
FIG. 75 is a left perspective view of the state in which the blind and the duct cover are attached. FIG. 76 is a rear perspective view of the projector cover, blinds, and duct cover. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the projector cover, blinds and duct cover shown in FIG. 76; FIG. Figure 78 is an exploded perspective view of the blind and duct cover;

FIG. 78 shows the blind B500 viewed from the front and above, and the duct cover B600 viewed from the rear and below.

As described above, of the space P (see FIG. 67) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500, the space P2 (see FIG. 70) below the duct cover B600 is inside the projector cover B1. It is possible to store liquid (see Figure 71).

As described with reference to FIG. 65, the blind B500 includes a first horizontal portion B501, a first inclined portion B502a, a second horizontal portion B502b, a second inclined portion B502c, a third horizontal portion B502d, and a small room B507. is formed. As a result, while increasing the volume of liquid that can be stored, it is possible to secure a space for arranging the screen device C (see FIG. 40) below the blind B500 and maintain the strength of the blind B500. there is

In particular, in the present embodiment, the presence of the small chamber B507 increases the strength of the blind B500 and allows liquid to be stored in the small chamber B507 as well. That is, as described above, the notch 507c is formed in the small chamber B507, and when the amount of liquid stored exceeds a certain amount, the liquid flows into the small chamber B507 through the notch 507c. In this way, by storing the liquid in the small chambers B507 provided as ribs, the space inside the blind B500 is effectively utilized.

As shown in FIG. 75, the duct cover B650 has a shape in which the left front corner portion of the top view rectangular shape is cut away. For the sake of clarity, the duct cover B650 is hatched in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 68, the duct cover B600 is arranged along the front wall portion B507a and the outer wall portion B507b (see FIG. 65) of the small room B507 when viewed from above. On the other hand, the duct cover B650 is shorter in the longitudinal direction than the duct cover B600, and the rear end of the duct cover B650 is positioned forward of the small room B507.

Although not shown, the rear end of the duct cover B650 is positioned from the surface B402b (see FIG. 64) existing behind the cavity B402 (see FIG. 61) of the projector cover B1, that is, from the side N of the opening B510 shown in FIG. are also placed behind. As a result, the duct cover B650, like the duct cover B600, separates the internal space Q of the projector cover B1 from the storage space (space P2) for the liquid L, and the liquid L flows through the opening B510 into the projector cover B1. Intrusion into the internal space Q (inside the case B22) is less likely to occur.

Here, the liquid stored in the blind B500 is discharged using a discharge mechanism having a tube communicating from the blind B500 to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG. The tube is inserted into the blind B500 by passing through the liquid discharge hole S. The liquid discharge hole S will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 76, the liquid discharge hole S is provided on the back side of the irradiation unit B. As shown in FIG. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, the liquid discharge holes S are the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the rear side of the duct cover B600. and a side portion B630 (see FIG. 72).

The wiring opening B411 is formed as a notch with an open bottom in the rear side wall portion B410 forming the rear surface of the projector cover B1.

The wiring opening B510a is formed as a notch with an open top in the first rear side wall portion B510 forming the rear surface of the blind B500. The wiring opening B511a is formed as a notch with an open top in the second rear side wall portion B511 formed in front of the first rear side wall portion B510 of the blind B500. The second rear side wall portion B511 is formed so as to stand from the rear end of a horizontal plane B508 formed continuously rearward from the upper end of the rear wall portion B503. The first rear side wall portion B510 is formed to stand from the rear end of a horizontal plane B509 that is continuously formed rearward from the lower end of the second rear side wall portion B511.

The rear side portion B630 of the duct cover B600 has a back surface B631, and downward protrusions B632a and B632b projecting downward from both left and right edges of the surface B631. The downward projecting portion B632a and the downward projecting portion B632b are opposed to each other so as to be substantially parallel with a certain distance therebetween, and a space is formed between the downward projecting portion B632a and the downward projecting portion B632b. .

When the projector cover B1, the blind B500, and the duct cover B600 are assembled, the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500, and the downward protrusion of the duct cover B600. The space formed between B632a and the downward projecting portion B632b overlaps when viewed from the rear, thereby forming the liquid discharge hole S (the liquid discharge hole S on the left side of the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. 76). A hole S) is formed. Since the duct cover B650 does not have the rear side portion B630 (see FIG. 75), the right liquid discharge hole S of the two liquid discharge holes S shown in FIG. , and the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500.

A tube for discharging the liquid stored in the blind B500 is inserted through the liquid discharge hole S, and various functional parts (sub-control device SS, etc.) other than the irradiation unit B are connected to the projector device B2, etc. Wiring for doing is also inserted. The wires are connected to the projector device B2 and the opening vicinity fan B700 by passing through the wiring openings B640a and B640b (see FIG. 72).

Here, the wiring openings B640a and B640b are formed outside (near the right end) of the duct cover B600. It is positioned away from the opening B510 (see FIG. 71) that opens toward it. This makes it difficult for the liquid stored in the blind B500 to enter the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 via the wiring openings B640a and B640b.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine capable of producing an effect by displaying an image projected by a projection device such as a projector on a screen (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-147828). According to such a game machine, it is possible to display images on the same level as a liquid crystal display device, and at the same time, compared to a liquid crystal display device or the like, it is possible to reduce the cost when the display surface is enlarged. Further, by appropriately changing the shape of the screen, it becomes possible to express images that cannot be achieved with a liquid crystal display device.

However, the projection device tends to generate heat and reach a high temperature more easily than a liquid crystal display device or the like.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of efficiently dissipating heat generated by a projection device capable of projecting images. and

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment has the following features.

(3-1) a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1);
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for allowing an image displayed on the screen to be visible;
a fan (opening vicinity fan B700) arranged inside the cover member;
a partition member (duct cover B600) that partitions the internal space of the cover member,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the outer space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The partition member partitions a space communicating with the first opening inside the cover member into a second space (space P1) and a third space (space P2),
the first space and the second space communicate through the second opening;
The fan is arranged in the second space,
The projector is arranged in the first space,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) includes the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The space communicating from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) is divided into a second space (space P1) and a third space ( It is partitioned into a space P2). The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P1) communicate through a second opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is arranged in the second space (space P1). As a result, air can be moved between the outer space and the inner space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P1). The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of .

On the other hand, since the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is arranged in the second space (space P1), provisionally, through the first opening (right opening B400a), cover members (projector cover B1 and Even if foreign matter enters the interior of the blind B500), the presence of the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) causes the foreign matter to enter the direction (first space (space) where the projector (projector device B2) is arranged. Intrusion into Q) side) can be made less likely. Furthermore, the third space (space P2) is separated from the second space (space P1) (space communicating with the first space (space Q) in which the projector (projector device B2) exists) with a partition member (duct cover B600). ), if a foreign object enters the third space (space P2), the foreign object enters the second space (space P1) from the third space (space P2). You can prevent it from slipping. As a result, the projector (projector device B2) can be protected from foreign matter such as liquid that has entered from the outside of the gaming machine, and the cause of the projector (projector device B2) breaking down can be eliminated. Security can be improved by suppressing unauthorized access through the opening (right opening B400a).

(4-1) a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1);
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for allowing an image displayed on the screen to be visible;
a fan (opening vicinity fan B700) arranged inside the cover member,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the outer space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate through the second opening,
The projector is arranged in the first space,
A fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing the fan is provided in the second space,
The fan is sandwiched between the inner portion of the cover member and the fan installation member in the second space,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) includes the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicated from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are communicated through an opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is arranged in the second space (space P). As a result, air can be moved between the outer space and the inner space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P). The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of . In particular, the second space (space P) is provided with a fan installation member (duct cover B600) for installing a fan (opening vicinity fan B700), and the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is , and is sandwiched between the inner portion of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) and the fan installation member (duct cover B600) in the second space (space P). In this regard, if a structure such as screws and claws is separately provided when installing the fan (opening vicinity fan B700), a new space (in the left-right direction) is required for the structure. On the other hand, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, it is possible to install the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) in a space-saving manner, and the passage of air in the second space (space P) is possible. The maximum possible space can be secured. As a result, it is possible to increase the efficiency of air movement between the outer space and the inner space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500), and the function of the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) can be maximized. At the same time, the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

(4-2) The gaming machine of (4-1) above,
The fan installation member is formed with a fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620) having a shape corresponding to the shape of the air passage portion (air passage portion B710) of the fan.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620) has a shape corresponding to the shape of the air-passable portion (air passage portion B710) of the fan (opening vicinity fan B700). , it is possible to prevent the passage of air from being obstructed by the fan installation portion (fan installation structure B620). As a result, the cooling effect of the projector (projector apparatus B2) can be further improved while maximizing the suction force of the fan (opening vicinity fan B700).

(5-1) a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1);
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for making an image displayed on the screen visible; ,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the outer space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate through the second opening,
The projector is arranged in the first space,
The second space can store liquid by being closed at the bottom,
The cover member further includes wiring openings (the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and the wiring of the blind B500) for inserting the wiring that connects the equipment arranged outside the cover member and the projector. an opening B510a for wiring and an opening B511a for wiring are formed,
the second space and the outer space of the cover member communicate with each other through the wiring opening,
A mechanism (a tube provided in a discharge mechanism) for discharging the liquid stored in the second space to the outside of the cover member can be inserted through the wiring opening.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) includes the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicated from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are communicated through an opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q). As a result, air can be moved between the outer space and the inner space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P). The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of .

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) includes a device and a projector (projector device) arranged outside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). B2) are formed with wiring openings (the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, and the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500) for inserting the wiring connecting the second space. (Space P) and the external space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) are the wiring openings (the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1 and the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500). communicated through The second space (space P) can store the liquid by closing the lower part thereof, while the liquid stored in the second space (space P) is blocked by the wiring opening (projector cover). It is possible to discharge to the outside of the cover member (the projector cover B1 and the blind B500) through the wiring opening B411 of B1 and the wiring openings B510a and B511a of the blind B500. As a result, if a liquid (such as a drink poured by a player) enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the game machine through the first opening (right opening B400a). Even in the case of the second space (space P), the liquid can be retained in the second space (space P), and the liquid is prevented from entering equipment outside the second space (space P). can do. In addition, by properly discharging the stored liquid from the wiring openings (the wiring opening B411 of the projector cover B1, and the wiring opening B510a and the wiring opening B511a of the blind B500), the liquid storage amount can be reduced to a certain limit or less. It is possible to keep As a result, the excess liquid is accumulated in the second space (space P), and the liquid enters the installation space (first space) of the projector (projector device B2). situation can be avoided. In this manner, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, it is possible to prevent the liquid from damaging the projector (projector device B2) and other devices. Since the internal temperature of the pachi-slot machine 1 is relatively high (approximately 60° C.), the stored liquid will naturally evaporate if left undisturbed without being discharged using the mechanism described above. Therefore, it is not essential to provide the ejection mechanism, and the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) has wiring openings (wiring opening B411 of projector cover B1, wiring opening B510a of blind B500 and wiring opening B411). The opening B511a) may not be formed.

(6-1) a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1);
a projector (projector device B2) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for allowing an image displayed on the screen to be visible;
a fan (opening vicinity fan B700) arranged inside the cover member,
The cover member has a first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the outer space of the cover member and a first space (space Q) formed inside the cover member. A second opening (opening B510) is formed, and an opening edge (projector cover A front engaging portion B421) of B1 is formed,
The first space and a second space (space P) communicating from the first opening inside the cover member communicate through the second opening,
The projector is arranged in the first space,
The fan is arranged to contact the opening edge in the second space,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the third embodiment, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) includes the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). A first opening (right opening B400a) opened toward the external space, and a second opening opened toward the internal space (first space (space Q)) of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). An opening (opening B510) is formed. The first space (space Q) and the second space (space P) (the space communicated from the first opening (right opening B400a) inside the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500)) are communicated through an opening (opening B510). The projector (projector device B2) is arranged in the first space (space Q), and the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) is arranged in the second space (space P). As a result, air can be moved between the outer space and the inner space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) via the second space (space P). The heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through the flow of . In particular, the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) has a part of the peripheral edge (side j shown in FIG. 60) of the first opening (right opening B400a) to the inner side of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500). The opening edge (the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1) is formed continuously toward the opening edge (the front engaging portion B421 of the projector cover B1). It is arranged so as to abut against the front engaging portion B421) of B1. As a result, if a foreign substance such as a liquid (for example, a drink poured by a player) enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the first opening (right opening B400a) Even so, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from coming into direct contact with the fan (opening vicinity fan B700). On the other hand, by moving the installation position of the fan (opening vicinity fan B700) as close to the first opening (right opening B400a) as possible, the outer space and the inner space of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) are separated. It is possible to smoothly move the air between and improve the cooling effect of the projector (projector device B2).

In the third embodiment, when the display unit A is attached to the cabinet G, the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes forward from the cabinet G, and the portion of the irradiation unit B protruding from the cabinet G is the upper door mechanism UD (Fig. 36) was explained as being accommodated. In this way, when the front portion of the irradiation unit B protrudes forward of the cabinet G, it is desirable to employ a configuration in which the upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G as shown in FIG.

FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining how to attach the upper door mechanism to the cabinet. According to this configuration, the hook UD120 is a member that protrudes rearward from the upper door mechanism UD, and is attached to the upper door mechanism UD by screwing. On the other hand, the inner surface of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G is provided with an inwardly projecting member G2a (for example, a screw or the like screwed into the inner surface of the side wall G2).

When attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the cabinet G), first, the lower surface of the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD is placed on the upper surface of the front projecting member G120 and hooked. The notch of the portion UD120 is hooked on the inner surface side protruding member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the upper door mechanism UD is pushed backward by the lower door mechanism DD. As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed with respect to the cabinet G. By adopting such a configuration, the internal space of the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G can be effectively utilized.

In the third embodiment, air flows between the inner space and the outer space of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the opening formed in the upper wall of the upper door mechanism UD. Alternatively, the air may flow through an opening G41 (see FIG. 36) formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G. In this case, for example, when the display unit A is attached to the cabinet G, the opening G41 formed in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G should be positioned right above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1.

In addition, in order to minimize the amount of foreign matter entering the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1 from the opening formed above the opening B400 of the projector cover B1 (opening formed in the upper door mechanism UD or the cabinet G), the opening is should be smaller than the opening B400 of the projector cover B1, and the opening should be provided with some measures (for example, installation of a mesh structure similar to the punching B450) to prevent foreign matter from entering. desirable.

Further, in the third embodiment, the intake fans 244A and 244B are provided in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the opening vicinity fan B700 is provided outside the projector device B2 (inside the projector cover B1). is arranged. In the present invention, the arrangement position of the fan is not particularly limited, and the fan is provided only in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22), and the fan is provided outside the projector device B2 (inside the projector cover B1). It may not be arranged. Conversely, the fan may be provided only outside the projector device B2 (inside the projector cover B1), and not provided in the projector device B2 (inside the case B22).

FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the arrangement positions of the intake fan and the exhaust fan. In this modified example, the configurations of the projector cover B1 and the blinds B500 are slightly different from those in the third embodiment. Since the basic configuration is the same, detailed description will be omitted. A sloped portion B502 is formed in place of , and a small room B507 is not formed. In addition, the rear wall portion B503 of the blind B500 is positioned further forward than in the third embodiment, and the front side surface of the rear wall portion B503 is continuous with the surface B402b present behind the cavity B402 of the projector cover B1. .

The intake fan can be arranged at a desired position in the space P (the right space P of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

In FIG. 80, the arrangement positions of the intake fans are shown in an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₁ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), and an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ). and a region surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₄ ).

The region surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₁ ) is located near the right opening B510 (see FIG. 71), and when the intake fan is arranged in this region, the intake fan It is close to the intake port B22A (see FIG. 57) provided on the right side of the B22. Thereby, the air taken in from the outside of the projector cover B1 can be efficiently sent into the inside of the case B22 (projector device B2).

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ) is the area on the right side of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₁ ), and is the part where the wall surface B401i of the projector cover B1 is extended rearward. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), the traveling direction of the air that has moved backward in the space P can be smoothly changed inward.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ) is the front area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), and is the area below the wall surface B401j (see FIG. 59) of the projector cover B1. be. When the intake fan is arranged in the region surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ), the air taken into the interior of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400 can smoothly flow rearward. .

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₄ ) is the front area of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ) and is the area below the opening B400. When the intake fan is arranged in the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(R ₄ ), air can be smoothly taken into the interior of the projector cover B1.

Also, the exhaust fan can be arranged at a desired position in the space P (the left space P of the two spaces P) formed by the projector cover B1 and the blind B500.

FIG. 80 exemplifies an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(L ₁ ) and an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(L ₂ ) as the arrangement positions of the exhaust fans.

An area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(L ₁ ) is located near the left opening B510, and when an exhaust fan is arranged in this area, the exhaust fan is located on the left side of the case B22. It is close to the provided exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 58). As a result, the air warmed by the heat generated by the projector device B2 can be efficiently sent to the outside of the projector device B2.

The area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(L ₂ ) is the area below the wall surface B401j of the projector cover B1. When an exhaust fan is arranged in the region surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(L ₂ ), the traveling direction of the air coming out of the case B22 can be smoothly changed forward.

As for the intake fan and the exhaust fan described above with reference to FIG. 80, both the intake fan and the exhaust fan may be arranged, or only the intake fan may be arranged. Alternatively, only the exhaust fan may be provided.

In addition, the intake fan has an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₁ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₂ ), an area surrounded by a dotted line indicated by F(R ₃ ), and , F(R ₄ ), and may be provided in only one of the regions surrounded by dotted lines, or may be provided in two or more of these regions. good too. The exhaust fan may be arranged only in one of the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(L ₁ ) and the area surrounded by the dotted line indicated by F(L ₂ ), It is good also as arrange|positioning in both area|regions.

It should be noted that in the third embodiment, the description has been given on the assumption that the air flow path indicated by the thick arrow in FIG. 64 is formed inside the projector cover B1. However, the air inside the projector cover B1 does not necessarily have to flow along the path completely.

Air channels that can be formed other than the air channels shown in FIG. 64 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an air flow path that may be formed inside the projector cover.

As indicated by an arrow _X1 in FIG. 81, for example, air warmed by heat generated by the projector device B2 may flow out of the case B22 through the intake port B22A. The air flowing out from the air inlet B22A in this manner may move to the rear of the projector cover B1 as indicated by the arrow _X2 . Further, as indicated by an arrow _X3 , there may be an air flow such that the air exiting from the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E goes rearward.

Since the rear of the projector cover B1 is open, the air that has moved rearward as indicated by arrow _X2 or arrow _X3 is discharged to the outside of the projector cover B1. In order to smoothly discharge the air from behind the projector cover B1, an exhaust fan may be provided in the area behind the projector cover B1.

In the third embodiment, the partition members (duct cover B600 and duct cover B650) are provided to separate the air flow path and the liquid storage space. B600 and duct cover B650) are not essential.

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, the inclined portion B502 has an inclination that descends toward the rear. 510) is longer than the front portion, and the liquid L is stored in such a rear portion of the inclined portion B502 (a region away from the bottom end of the opening 510). Therefore, even if the duct cover B600 and the duct cover B650 are not provided, it is possible to prevent the liquid R from entering the internal space Q (inside the case B22) of the projector cover B1 through the opening B510. can do.

Furthermore, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modification has the following features.

(7-1) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector device B2);
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying images projected by the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be visually recognized, which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable;
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400). An opening B400) of is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (the right space P of the two spaces P) is formed communicating with the first opening, and a second space communicating with the second opening is formed. 2 spaces (space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed,
The first space opens in a direction different from the upward direction (left direction) by a third opening (the right opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upward direction (right direction) by a fourth opening (the left opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. and
The first opening (right opening B400) communicates with the third opening (right opening B510), while the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B400) communicate with each other. B510) is in communication with
The projector is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510),
The cover member (blind B500) includes a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (right space P), and the lower end portion defines the first opening. It has an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) having an inclination that descends as it moves away from the immediate bottom of
At least part of the inclined portion is located below the lower end of the third opening (the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505),
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (right opening B400) opened upward. ) and a second opening (left opening B400). Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (right opening B510) and a fourth opening (left opening B510) that open in a direction (horizontal direction) different from the upward direction are formed. ing. The first opening (right opening B400) communicates with the third opening (right opening B510), thereby forming a first space (right space P), while the second opening The (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) communicate with each other, thereby forming a second space (left space P). A projector (projector device B2) is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510). As a result, the air that has flowed from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) flows into the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening). B510) via the projector (projector device B2), via the fourth opening (left opening B510) and the second space (left space P) to the second opening (left is emitted to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and high-temperature air has a property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left space P) and reaches the second opening ( It will be discharged smoothly from the left opening B400). As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through such air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) can be enhanced.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, the cover member (blind B500) has a lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) that defines the lower end of the first space (right space P). In addition, the lower end portion (horizontal portion B501 and inclined portion B502) is provided with an inclined portion (inclined portion B502) that slopes downward as it separates from directly below the first opening (right opening B400). Therefore, when a liquid (such as a drink poured by a player) enters the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) from the outside of the gaming machine through the first opening (right opening B400). , the liquid flows down the slant portion (slant portion B502) as it moves away from the portion immediately below the first opening (right opening B400). Here, since at least part of the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) is located below the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the liquid is inclined. (inclined portion B502) and reaches below the lower end (upper end edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the liquid flows through the third opening (right Since the lower end (the upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) exists upward, the liquid hardly passes through the third opening (the opening B510 on the right side), and the liquid passes through the projector It is difficult for the user to intrude into the direction where (projector device B2) is arranged. In this manner, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, it is possible to protect the projector (projector device B2) from foreign matter such as liquid that has entered from the outside of the gaming machine.

(7-2) The gaming machine of (7-1) above,
Above the first opening and the second opening, a fifth opening (the right opening G41 of the two openings G41 ) and a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) is provided with the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right opening G41) and a sixth opening (left opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (right opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), and the air is introduced into the inside of the game machine through the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After letting this air flow into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the (right opening B400), the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is transferred to the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged to the upper part of the game machine through the opening (left opening B400) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, the discharge destination of the air heated by passing through the projector (projector device B2) is the upper part of the outside of the gaming machine. If the water is discharged from the back side of the game arcade, the island equipment installed in the game arcade may be filled with heat, which may adversely affect the control of the game machine. In addition, if the air is discharged from the side of the game machine, the heated air will be taken into the adjacent game machine, resulting in a vicious circle of warm air between the adjacent game machines. It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector device B2) cannot be improved. Furthermore, if the air is discharged to the front of the gaming machine, there is a risk that hot air will be blown to the player's face. In this respect, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

On the other hand, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) exists above the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening (left opening B400) formed in the cover member (projector cover B1), so the fifth opening ( When a foreign object enters from the outside of the game machine through the right opening G41) or the sixth opening (left opening G41), the foreign object enters the first opening (right opening B400) or the second opening. It is easy to enter the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) through the opening (left opening B400). Therefore, there is concern that foreign matter that has entered the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) may reach the projector (projector device B2) and adversely affect the projector (projector device B2). For example, when the player pours a drink through the fifth opening (right opening G41), the drink passes through the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening B510). If the virus penetrates into the interior of the projector (projector device B2), the projector (projector device B2) may break down. In this respect, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modification, the cover member (projector cover B1 and the blind B500), the liquid flows along the inclined portion (the inclined portion B502) as described above, so that such a situation does not occur. can be prevented.

(7-3) The gaming machine of (7-1) or (7-2),
A space whose bottom is closed is formed by the inclined portion (the inclined portion B502) and the wall portions (the rear wall portion B503, the outer wall portion B504, and the inner wall portion B505) that are continuous with the inclined portion.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) and the wall portions (rear wall portion B503, outer wall portion B504, and inner wall portion B505) that are continuous with the inclined portion (inclined portion B502) lower the Since the closed space is formed, the liquid flowing down the inclined portion (the inclined portion B502) can be stored in the space. As a result, as long as the liquid surface of the stored liquid is below the lower end (upper edge B505a of the inner wall portion B505) of the third opening (right opening B510), the third opening (right opening B510) It is possible to prevent liquid from entering the installation space of the projector (projector device B2) through the .

(8-1) a projector capable of projecting an image (projector device B2);
a cover member (projector cover B1 and blind B500) arranged to surround the projector;
a screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1) capable of displaying images projected by the projector;
a main body (cabinet G) having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) through which the screen can be visually recognized, which is attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable;
The cover member (projector cover B1) has a first opening (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) and a second opening (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400). An opening B400) of is formed,
Inside the cover member, a first space (the right space P of the two spaces P) is formed communicating with the first opening, and a second space communicating with the second opening is formed. 2 spaces (space P on the left side of the two spaces P) are formed,
The first space opens in a direction different from the upward direction (left direction) by a third opening (the right opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. On the other hand, the second space is opened in a direction different from the upward direction (right direction) by a fourth opening (the left opening B510 of the two openings B510) formed inside the cover member. and
The first opening (right opening B400) communicates with the third opening (right opening B510), while the second opening (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B400) communicate with each other. B510) is in communication with
The projector is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, the cover member (projector cover B1) arranged to surround the projector (projector device B2) has a first opening (right opening B400) opened upward. ) and a second opening (left opening B400). Further, inside the cover member (projector cover B1), a third opening (right opening B510) and a fourth opening (left opening B510) that open in a direction (horizontal direction) different from the upward direction are formed. ing. The first opening (right opening B400) communicates with the third opening (right opening B510), thereby forming a first space (right space P), while the second opening The (left opening B400) and the fourth opening (left opening B510) communicate with each other, thereby forming a second space (left space P). A projector (projector device B2) is arranged between the third opening (right opening B510) and the fourth opening (left opening B510). As a result, the air that has flowed from the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the first opening (right opening B400) flows into the first space (right space P) and the third opening (right opening). B510) via the projector (projector device B2), via the fourth opening (left opening B510) and the second space (left space P) to the second opening (left is emitted to the outside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the opening B400). When the air passes through the projector (projector device B2), it is warmed by absorbing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2), and high-temperature air has a property of going upward. Therefore, the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) rises in the second space (left space P) and reaches the second opening ( It will be discharged smoothly from the left opening B400). As a result, the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) can be efficiently released through such air flow, and the cooling efficiency of the projector (projector device B2) can be improved.

(8-2) The gaming machine of (8-1) above,
The projector includes a first vent (air intake B22A), a second vent (exhaust vent B22E), and a fan (air intake) disposed between the first vent and the second vent. and fans 244A and 244B) for
While the first vent (intake port B22A) and the third opening (right opening B510) face each other, the second vent (exhaust port B22E) and the fourth opening (left opening) B510), the projector is arranged so as to face
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, the projector (projector device B2) is provided with the first ventilation port (intake port B22A) and the second ventilation port (exhaust port B22E). Fans (intake fans 244A and 244B) are provided between the air inlet (air inlet B22A) and the second air outlet (air outlet B22E), and the first air outlet (air inlet B22A) is the first 3 (right opening B510) and the second vent (exhaust port B22E) faces the fourth opening (left opening B510). By forcibly inhaling air using fans (intake fans 244A and 244B), the air flow as described above can be created smoothly.

(8-3) The gaming machine of (8-1) or (8-2),
Above the first opening and the second opening, a fifth opening (the right opening G41 of the two openings G41 ) and a sixth opening (the left opening G41 of the two openings G41) are formed,
wherein the projector is housed in the main body so as to be arranged above the screen;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, the upper surface (upper surface wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G) is provided with the first opening (right opening B400) and the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). A fifth opening (right opening G41) and a sixth opening (left opening G41) are formed above each of the openings (left opening B400). As a result, air is taken into the inside of the game machine from above the outside of the game machine through the fifth opening (right opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G), and the air is introduced into the inside of the game machine through the first opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). After letting this air flow into the inside of the cover member (projector cover B1) through the (right opening B400), the air that has passed through the projector (projector device B2) is transferred to the second opening of the cover member (projector cover B1). It can be discharged to the upper part of the game machine through the opening (left opening B400) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) of the main body (cabinet G). As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, the discharge destination of the air heated by passing through the projector (projector device B2) is the upper part of the outside of the gaming machine. If the water is discharged from the back side of the game arcade, the island equipment installed in the game arcade may be filled with heat, which may adversely affect the control of the game machine. In addition, if the air is discharged from the side of the game machine, the heated air will be taken into the adjacent game machine, resulting in a vicious circle of warm air between the adjacent game machines. It is considered that the cooling efficiency of (projector device B2) cannot be improved. Furthermore, if the air is discharged to the front of the gaming machine, there is a risk that hot air will be blown to the player's face. In this respect, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modified example, it is possible to create an air flow for releasing the heat generated by the projector (projector device B2) without causing such a problem.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the modification, the projector (projector device B2) is arranged above the screen (fixed screen mechanism D, front screen mechanism E1, reel screen mechanism F1). Cabinet G), and the projector (projector device B2) is placed close to the upper surface of the main body (upper surface wall G4 of cabinet G). Therefore, the distance between the fifth opening (right opening G41) and the sixth opening (left opening G41) formed in the top surface of the main body (top wall G4 of cabinet G) and the projector (projector device B2) is also As a result, the number of members and devices existing between the fifth opening (right opening G41) and sixth opening (left opening G41) and the projector (projector apparatus B2) is relatively small. there is Therefore, in designing a flow path such that the air taken in from the fifth opening (right opening G41) is discharged from the sixth opening (left opening G41) via the projector (projector device B2), There is no need to create a complicated detour route to avoid the members and devices existing in the air flow path, and the air flow path can be designed relatively easily.

As described above, in the embodiment described above, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described. Modifications in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine will be described below with reference to FIGS. 82 to 86. FIG.

FIG. 82 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko game machine. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view showing the decoration unit and frame member of the pachinko game machine from the front.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the pachinko game machine 6100 includes a glass door 6111, a wooden frame 6112, a base door 6113, a game board 6114, a plate unit 6115, a shooting device 6122 for shooting game balls, and various control boards. It is composed of a board unit 6123 including a game ball, a ball payout unit that provides a game ball as a game value, and the like.

The glass door 6111 described above is pivotally attached to the base door 6113 so as to be openable and closable. An opening 6116 is formed in the center of the glass door 6111, and the opening 6116 is provided with protective glass 6124 having transparency. A base door 6113 is pivotally attached to the front of the wooden frame 6112 described above.

The dish unit 6115 described above is arranged on the base door 6113 so as to be positioned below the glass door 6111 . The plate unit 6115 is provided with an upper plate 6125 above it and a lower plate 6126 below it. The upper plate 6125 and the lower plate 6126 are formed with payout openings 6131A and 6131B for lending game balls and paying out game balls (prize balls). The balls are discharged, and in particular, game balls to be shot to the game area 6141 are stored in the upper tray 6125 .

The firing device 6122 described above is mounted on the base door 6113 so as to be positioned to the side of the pan unit 6115 . The shooting device 6122 is provided with a shooting handle 6132 that can be operated by the player, and the pachinko game can be played by operating the shooting handle 6132 by the player. When the shooting handle 6132 is gripped by the player and rotated clockwise, power is supplied to the shooting motor according to the rotation angle, and game balls stored in the upper tray 6125 are released. It is fired sequentially on the game board.

The game board 6114 described above is arranged in front of the base door 6113 so as to be positioned behind the protective glass 6124 . The game board 6114 has, on its front surface, a game area 6141 in which the launched game ball can roll. This game area 6141 is an area surrounded by guide rails and the like, in which game balls can roll. In this way, the game ball shot by the shooting device 6122 is guided by the guide rails provided on the game board, moves to the upper part of the game board 6114, and then moves to the upper part of the game board 6114. It will flow down from the top to the bottom of the game board while changing its traveling direction due to collision with.

As shown in FIG. 82, a decoration unit 6258 is provided in the upper area of the front surface of the glass door 6111 . Decoration unit 6258 is arranged to protrude forward of pachinko gaming machine 6100 .

A cavity is formed inside the decoration unit 6258, and the irradiation unit B described in the above embodiment is arranged in the cavity. FIG. 82 shows a state in which the interior of the decoration unit 6258 is seen through from above the decoration unit 6258 .

As shown in FIG. 83, a screen device C (see FIG. 40) is arranged on the back side of the game board 6114 . As a result, the screen of the screen device C (the fixed screen mechanism D, the front screen mechanism E1, and the reel screen mechanism F1) is irradiated with the light emitted from the projector device B2 of the irradiation unit B, as in the above-described embodiment. It is possible to do so.

The decoration unit 6258 is attached to the top of the frame member 6211 (see FIG. 84). Although not shown, the frame member 6211 is fixed to the rear side of the glass door 6111 .

As shown in FIG. 84, irradiation unit B is attached to the top of frame member 6211 . By attaching the decoration unit 6258 to the frame member 6211 while the irradiation unit B is attached to the frame member 6211 , the irradiation unit B is housed in the interior space of the decoration unit 6258 .

In addition, on both the left and right sides of the irradiation unit B, a speaker 6152 and a speaker holder 6152A are integrally attached to the upper portion of the frame member 6211 . On the other hand, the decorative unit 6258 is provided with speaker holes 6151A and 6151B on the right and left sides, respectively. The speaker holes 6151A and 6151B are formed as mesh openings.

In the state where the decoration unit 6258 is attached to the frame member 6211, the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B respectively cover the front of the speaker 6152, and the sound generated from the speaker 6152 is transmitted through the speaker holes 6151A and 6151B. It can be released outside the pachinko game machine 6100 .

Here, the speaker hole 6151A also functions as a vent for taking in air from the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 . As shown in FIG. 84, an intake fan 6244 is arranged on the front right side of the irradiation unit B. As shown in FIG. As a result, air is taken into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 via the speaker hole 6151A.

As in the third embodiment, this air is taken into the interior of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R of the projector cover B1 (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400), and is generated by the projector device B2. It proceeds inside the projector cover B1 while absorbing the heat generated, and exits the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400).

The air coming out of the projector cover B1 passes through the through hole 6245 formed in the frame member 6211, moves backward, and is released from the back side of the pachinko game machine 6100 to the outside.

The air flow described above is indicated by arrows in FIGS. 82 and 84. FIG. In the third embodiment, a case has been described in which air is taken in from above the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 and discharged to above the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 . On the other hand, in this modified example, the air is taken in from the outside front of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 and the air is discharged to the outside rear of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 . As described above, in the present invention, the direction of intake and discharge of air for cooling the projector is not particularly limited, and can be appropriately designed according to the layout position of the projector, the structure around the projector, and the like.

Since pachinko machines have a shorter depth in the longitudinal direction than pachislot machines, when another pachinko machine is installed behind one pachinko machine on the same island facility , there is a relatively large space between these pachinko machines. Therefore, even if the air heated by the projector is discharged from the back side of the pachinko game machine, it is considered that the island facilities of the pachinko game machine do not accumulate as much heat as the island facilities of the pachislot machine.

Hereinafter, as another modified example, the case of taking in air from the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 and discharging the air to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a pachinko game machine.

As shown in FIG. 85, the decoration unit 6258 has an opening 6300R on its right side. As a result, air is taken into the inside of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 from the outside right side of the pachinko gaming machine 6100 via the opening 6300R.

This air is taken into the interior of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400R (the right opening B400 of the two openings B400) of the projector cover B1, and is generated in the projector device B2, as in the modified example described above. It proceeds inside the projector cover B1 while absorbing the heat generated, and exits the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L (the left opening B400 of the two openings B400).

Although not shown in the drawing, an opening (opening 6300L) is also formed on the left side of the decoration unit 6258, similarly to the right side. As a result, the air coming out of the projector cover B1 through the opening B400L is released outside the pachinko game machine 6100 through the opening 6300L.

Such air flow is indicated by arrows in FIG. In this modification, it is conceivable that the heated air may be taken into the adjacent game machine due to the fact that the air discharge direction is set to the side of the game machine. In order to prevent such a situation from occurring, when the direction of air discharge is set to the side of the game machine, for example, the width of the decoration unit 6258 in the left-right direction may be shortened to prevent the occurrence of one pachinko. It is desirable that the exhaust port (opening 6300L) in the game machine and the intake port (opening 6300R) in the pachinko game machine installed next to the pachinko game machine are separated from each other to some extent.

Another modification will be described below with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko game machine.

In the modified example described above, it is assumed that the irradiation unit B is attached to the frame member 6211 . In contrast, in the example shown in FIG. 86, irradiation unit B is attached to base door 6113 . A speaker 6152 is also attached to the base door 6113 . Also in such a modified example, an air flow path similar to that in the example described above can be formed.

Although FIG. 86 shows that the irradiation unit B is attached to the front side of the base door 6113 , the irradiation unit B may be attached to the rear side of the base door 6113 . In the present invention, the irradiation unit B may be installed in front of the game board or may be installed in the rear of the game board. When the irradiation unit B is installed behind the game board, the irradiation unit B can be arranged by forming a space on the back side of the game board and utilizing the space.

For example, an opening is provided in the center of the game board, and the irradiation unit is disposed on the base door, the game board, or other rear member of the pachinko game machine so that the front part of the irradiation unit penetrates through the opening. good too. In that case, the game board of a conventionally existing general pachinko machine (a pachinko machine having an opening in the center of the game board, through which the liquid crystal display device, etc. behind the game board can be seen) can be used as it is. For example, by removing the liquid crystal display device, installing the screen mechanism, and installing the irradiation unit on the rear member of the game board, etc., the irradiation unit and screen mechanism can be installed while maintaining the shape of the game board as before. It is possible to create a new gaming machine with When adopting such a configuration, since a part of the front of the irradiation unit protrudes forward from the game board, it is possible to secure a larger space behind the pachinko game machine. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the temperature rise in the island facility when pachinko game machines with irradiation units are installed in the entire island facility in a small game hall. Furthermore, in front of the irradiation unit visible to the player (for example, around the reflector holding portion B11), a decorative member such as a logo corresponding to the model is arranged, or a small-sized liquid crystal display device for auxiliary decoration. By arranging an illumination board or the like, the irradiation unit can be hidden so that it cannot be seen by the player, and the performance effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, the screen device C may be installed in a state attached to the irradiation unit B, or may be installed in a state separated from the irradiation unit B. FIG.

In the modification described above, the direction of air discharge is the rear or side of the game machine, but the air may be discharged from above the game machine as in the third embodiment. When the direction of air discharge is upward, for example, an opening for discharge may be formed on the upper surface of the decorative unit 6258 (glass door 6111). In this case, when the irradiation unit B is installed behind the game board, an opening may be appropriately formed in the game board in order to secure an air passage.

In the present invention, it is possible to appropriately form openings in the member existing on the air flow path according to the direction of taking in air, the direction of discharging air, and the path through which air flows. A tubular duct may be provided according to the air flow path.

In addition, an intake fan and/or an exhaust fan can be appropriately arranged in order to smoothen the flow of air. For example, an intake fan (for example, the intake fan 6244 in FIG. 84) may be provided between an opening for taking in air (for example, an opening 6300R in FIG. 85) and an opening B400R in the projector cover B1. It is possible to dispose an exhaust fan between the opening for discharging (for example, the opening 6300L in FIG. 85) and the opening B400L of the projector cover B1. However, if the fan provided inside the irradiation unit B can sufficiently perform the intake and exhaust, the fan does not have to be provided outside the irradiation unit B.

In the modified example described above, the projector cover B1 described with reference to FIG. 80 is illustrated, but the configuration of the projector cover is not particularly limited. Also, a projector cover having an opening for discharging the air can be used as appropriate. These openings can be formed in any position such as the front, rear, top, bottom, or sides of the projector cover, and the positions for forming the openings are appropriately determined in consideration of the cooling efficiency of the projector. be able to. Furthermore, the projector may be arranged inside the gaming machine in an exposed state without being covered by the projector cover, and the cooling air taken in from the outside of the gaming machine may be supplied directly to the projector (via the projector cover). It can also be configured to hit the

[Fourth embodiment]
The second embodiment and the third embodiment have been described above. A fourth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second and third embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second and third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of portions to which the descriptions of the second and third embodiments also apply to the fourth embodiment will be omitted.

<Display unit 9000>
FIG. 87 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the display unit. FIG. 88 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the display unit. 89 is a perspective view showing a disassembled state of the projector and the mirror from the display unit shown in FIG. 88. FIG. 90 is a perspective view showing how light is projected from the projector in a state where the projector and mirror are disassembled from the display unit shown in FIG. 87. FIG.

A display unit 9000 shown in FIG. 87 is replaceably mounted on the intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 40) in the cabinet G, like the display unit A described in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 87 to 89, the display unit 9000 includes a unit housing 9010, a projector 9020, a mirror 9030, and a cabinet-side screen 9040. FIG.

The unit housing 9010 includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate 9011, a right side plate 9012 standing on the right end of the bottom plate 9011, a left side plate 9013 standing on the left end of the bottom plate 9011, and a rear end of the bottom plate 9011. and a back plate 9014 erected on the part. A right side plate 9012, a left side plate 9013, and a back plate 9014 are connected to a bottom plate 9011 by screwing to form a box-shaped housing with an open front side and a top side.

A projector installation member 9015 for installing the projector 9020 is attached to the back plate 9014 . The projector 9020 is installed in the unit housing 9010 by being engaged with the front portion of the projector installation member 9015 .

The projector 9020 has the same configuration (for example, a lens having the same configuration as the projection lens 210) as the projector device B2 (see FIG. 47) described in the second embodiment, and projects light including an image. It is possible to The projector 9020 is installed so that the lens faces downward, so that the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward.

A mirror installation portion 9016 for installing a mirror 9030 is formed below the projector installation member 9015 . The mirror installation portion 9016 has inclined sides 9016 a and 9016 b that are inclined from the back plate 9014 to the bottom plate 9011 .

Mirror 9030 has the same configuration as optical mirror B32 (see FIG. 42) described in the second embodiment, and can reflect light projected from projector 9020 . The mirror 9030 is installed along the inclined sides 9016 a and 9016 b of the mirror installation portion 9016 . As a result, the mirror 9030 assumes a tilted posture in which the front side is lower than the rear side.

As a result, light projected from projector 9020 and traveling downward is reflected forward by mirror 9030 (see FIG. 90). In FIG. 90, the light irradiation range is indicated by oblique lines. Note that the relative positional relationship between projector 9020 and mirror 9030 shown in FIG. 90 corresponds to the state shown in FIG. It is the same as the positional relationship. That is, FIG. 90 is an exploded view showing projector 9020 and mirror 9030 in the state shown in FIG. 88 while maintaining the relative positional relationship between them.

A front portion of the bottom plate 9011 is erected by fitting a cabinet-side screen 9040 thereon. As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 and reflected forward by the rear mirror 9030 enters the cabinet-side screen 9040 from the rear (rear side).

The cabinet-side screen 9040 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. The cabinet-side screen 9040 is of a transmissive type that is displayed by projecting a projection image from the rear. and a front-side display surface 9040b on which a projection image is projected by transmitting light incident on the surface 9040a. The cabinet-side screen 9040 is mainly made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and exhibits a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface 9040a of the cabinet-side screen 9040, an image (still image or moving image) related to the game is displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040. be done. A moving image is composed of a large number of still images, and is obtained by continuously changing the large number of still images over time. In this specification, moving images and videos are synonymous.

<Relationship between light irradiation range and cabinet-side screen 9040>
FIG. 91 is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen.

In FIG. 91, the cabinet-side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shaded. The irradiation range of light projected from the projector 9020 is wider than that of the cabinet-side screen 9040 . Specifically, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the entire surface of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (incident surface 9040 a ) (shaded area in FIG. 91 ) and passes through the peripheral area of the cabinet-side screen 9040 . In FIG. 91, the peripheral area of the cabinet-side screen 9040 in the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020 is indicated by oblique lines.

Of the light projected from the projector 9020 , the light that does not enter the cabinet-side screen 9040 and has passed through the shaded area in FIG. Part of the light traveling forward from the cabinet-side screen 9040 enters the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 of the upper door mechanism UD as described below (Fig. 96 (b) and (c)).

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 92 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 94 is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 95 is a front view of the gaming machine.

As described in the second embodiment, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by an intermediate support plate G1 (see FIG. 40). The upper door mechanism UD shown in FIG. 92 is arranged in front of the upper space in the cabinet G, similarly to the upper door mechanism UD according to the second embodiment (see FIG. 39), and closes the upper part of the opening in the cabinet G. is provided so that

As shown in FIG. 93, the upper door mechanism UD has a panel base HH forming the skeleton of the upper door mechanism UD. Panel mechanisms HA, HB, HC, HD, HE, HF, and HG are provided on the front side of the panel base HH. In addition, the upper door mechanism UD has an upper display window UD1 (see FIG. 38) in the central portion (a position overlapping the cabinet-side screen 9040 when viewed from the front), and the upper display window UD1 has a transparent panel UD11. is provided. As a result, when an image is displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040, the image can be viewed by the player.

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, a door-side right screen 9050 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the right side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). A door-side left screen 9060 is provided at a slightly recessed position on the left side of the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1). The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have substantially the same shape.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 have a flat screen curved shape (for example, a semi-cylindrical shape obtained by dividing a cylinder in half), and have the reel screen mechanism described in the second embodiment. Similar to the shape of F1 (see FIG. 45) in side view, the shape in top view (bottom view) is an arc shape. The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface.

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are transmissive screens that are displayed by projecting a projection image from behind, similarly to the cabinet-side screen 9040 . The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are made mainly of translucent glass plates, acrylic plates, or resin films, for example, and exhibit a milky white, translucent, or gray color when not projected.

The door-side right screen 9050 has a rear-side incident surface 9050a on which light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a front-side display surface 9050b on which a projection image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the incident surface 9050a. , has The door-side left screen 9060 has a rear-side entrance surface 9060a on which light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a front-side display surface 9060b on which a projection image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface 9060a. , has

The door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are arranged so that the center of curvature is on the rear side. That is, the entrance surface 9050a and the display surface 9050b of the door-side right screen 9050, and the entrance surface 9060a and the display surface 9060b of the door-side left screen 9060 are convex to the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected from the projector 9020. there is

FIG. 92 shows the positional relationship between the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 and the cabinet-side screen 9040 arranged inside the cabinet G when the upper door mechanism UD is closed. In the drawing, the cabinet-side screen 9040 is indicated by phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 92, the side forming the left end of door-side right screen 9050 (side 9050c shown in FIG. 95) and the side forming the right end of cabinet-side screen 9040 (side 9040c shown in FIG. 87) are close to each other. (or substantially abutting), and the side 9050c of the door-side right screen 9050 is positioned slightly to the right of the side 9040c of the cabinet-side screen 9040 . Further, the side forming the right end of the door-side left screen 9060 (side 9060c shown in FIG. 95) and the side forming the left end of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (side 9040d shown in FIG. ), and the side 9060c of the door-side left screen 9060 is positioned slightly to the left of the side 9040d of the cabinet-side screen 9040. As shown in FIG.

A side 9050c of the door-side right screen 9050, a side 9060c of the door-side left screen 9060, and sides 9040c and 9040d of the cabinet-side screen 9040 are substantially at the same position in the front-rear direction. That is, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door-side right screen 9050 and the rear end (side 9060c) of the door-side left screen 9060 are positioned substantially on the same plane as the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040, respectively. Since the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are curved so as to protrude forward, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are positioned in front of the cabinet-side screen 9040 as a whole. is located.

In addition, the side forming the lower end of the door-side right screen 9050 (side 9050d shown in FIG. 95), the side forming the lower end of the door-side left screen 9060 (side 9060d shown in FIG. 95), and the lower end of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (side 9040e shown in FIG. 87) are substantially the same in the vertical direction (those three sides are positioned substantially on the same plane). In addition, the vertical lengths of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (sides 9050c and 9060c) are longer than the vertical lengths of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (sides 9040c and 9040d). there is As a result, the door-side right screen 9050 , the door-side left screen 9060 , and the cabinet-side screen 9040 are positioned at substantially the same height at their lower ends, and the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are positioned higher than the cabinet-side screen 9040 . has a taller configuration.

<Display of images on cabinet-side screen 9040, door-side right screen 9050, and door-side left screen 9060>
FIG. 96(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the irradiation range of light projected from the projector and the cabinet-side screen. FIG. 96(b) is a diagram showing how light that has not entered the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side right screen. FIG. 96(c) is a diagram showing how light that has not entered the cabinet-side screen enters the door-side left screen. 97 and 98 are diagrams for explaining images displayed on the cabinet-side screen, the door-side right screen, and the door-side left screen.

In FIG. 96(a), the shaded area in FIG. 91 (out of the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector 9020, the edge area of the cabinet-side screen 9040) is divided into three areas (area I, area II, and region III). Area I is an area located on the right side of the cabinet-side screen 9040 . Region II is a region located on the left side of cabinet-side screen 9040 . A region III is a region located above the cabinet-side screen 9040 . In FIG. 96(a), as in FIG. 91, the cabinet-side screen 9040 (display surface 9040b) is shaded.

As described above, part of the light projected from projector 9020 enters incident surface 9040 a of cabinet-side screen 9040 . As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040. FIG.

Further, as shown in FIG. 96(b), of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that did not enter the cabinet-side screen 9040 and passed through the region I in FIG. incident surface 9050a. As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9050b of the door-side right screen 9050. FIG.

Similarly, as shown in FIG. 96(c), of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that did not enter the cabinet-side screen 9040 and passed through the region II in FIG. 9060 is incident on the incident surface 9060a. As a result, an image is displayed on the display surface 9060b of the door-side left screen 9060. FIG.

As described above, images (still images and moving images related to games) are displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060, respectively. In this embodiment, each image displayed on the three screens (the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060) corresponds to one image data, and one image is displayed. The data can be used to display images on each of the three screens.

97 and 98 show such image data. A shaded area (area A) in FIG. 97( a ) contains information indicating an image displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040 . A hatched area (area B) in FIG. 97( a ) contains information indicating an image displayed on the door-side right screen 9050 . A hatched area (area C) in FIG. 97( a ) contains information indicating an image displayed on the door-side left screen 9060 . The remaining area (area D) in FIG. 97(a) contains information with a pixel value of zero. A pixel value corresponds to the light transmittance of a pixel formed on a liquid crystal panel of the projector 9020 . A pixel value of 0 indicates the minimum light transmittance, and the display surface of the screen corresponding to an area with a pixel value of 0 is black.

FIG. 97(b) shows an example of image data. The image data shown in FIG. 97(b) includes information indicating effect image 9100 in area A, information indicating fireworks image 9101 in area B, and information indicating character image 9102 in area C. FIG. The area corresponding to the hatched portion in the drawing contains information with a pixel value of 0. FIG. By using such image data, an effect image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040, a firework image 9101 is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050, and a character image 9102 is displayed on the door-side left screen 9060.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the rear end (side 9050c) of the door-side right screen 9050, the rear end (side 9060c) of the door-side left screen 9060, and the display surface 9040b of the cabinet-side screen 9040 are The positions in the front-rear direction are substantially the same. As a result, the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060 are approximately the same distance from the projector 9020 in the front-rear direction, so that the focal points do not deviate significantly. It has become.

FIG. 98(a) shows another example of image data. The image data shown in FIG. 98(a) includes information indicating effect image 9100 in area A, information indicating decorative image 9110 in area B, and information indicating decorative image 9111 in area C. . The area corresponding to the hatched portion in the drawing contains information with a pixel value of 0. FIG. By using such image data, the effect image 9100 is displayed on the cabinet-side screen 9040, the decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050, and the decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door-side left screen 9060. .

FIG. 98(b) shows yet another example of image data. The image data shown in FIG. 98(b) includes information indicating a decorative image 9110 in region B, and information indicating a decorative image 9111 in region C. The image data shown in FIG. The area corresponding to the hatched portion in the drawing includes information with a pixel value of 0. FIG. By using such image data, a decorative image 9110 is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050 and a decorative image 9111 is displayed on the door-side left screen 9060 .

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

However, in a game machine in which an image is projected onto a screen from such a projector, there is a problem that the presentation is poor due to the flatness of the screen.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of performing a variety of presentations.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment has the following features.

(9-1) screens (cabinet-side screen 9040, door-side right screen 9050, and door-side left screen 9060);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
The screen is arranged so that light projected by the projector is incident from the back side, and an image can be displayed on the front side by the light incident from the back side,
As the screens, a first screen (cabinet-side screen 9040) and a second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060) arranged to the side, above, or below the first screen in front view. is provided,
In the projector, the first screen, and the second screen, part of the light projected by the projector enters the first screen, while part of the light projected by the projector enters the second screen. arranged so that at least part of the light that does not enter the first screen enters the second screen;
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the second screens (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060) are arranged to the side of the first screen (cabinet-side screen 9040) in front view. there is Part of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is made incident on the first screen (cabinet-side screen 9040), while the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is projected onto the first screen (cabinet side screen 9040). At least part of the light that does not enter the side screen 9040) can enter the second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060).

Therefore, it is possible to display images on the first screen (cabinet-side screen 9040) and the second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060), respectively, and these images are viewed by the player. In this case, they are displayed in a positional relationship such that they are lined up on the left and right. This allows the player to visually see through the images displayed on these two screens (first screen (cabinet side screen 9040) and second screen (door side right screen 9050 and door side left screen 9060)). It is possible to entertain, and various production expressions can be performed.

(9-2) The gaming machine of (9-1) above,
a main body (cabinet G) housing the first screen (cabinet-side screen 9040) and having an opening on the front;
an opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) provided with a display area (upper display window UD1) for allowing an image displayed on the first screen to be visible; with
The second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060) is provided on the opening and closing door,
It is characterized by

In general, the opening and closing doors of game machines are decorated (shaped) according to the type of machine. In addition, every time we develop a new model (for each project), if we try to shape the opening and closing doors and change the decoration, the corresponding cost will increase.

In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fourth embodiment, the opening and closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is provided with the second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060). By displaying an image (an image similar to the decoration in appearance) on (the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060), it is necessary to decorate the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) peculiar to the model concerned. You can also get the same visual effect as when you decorate it. Therefore, it is possible to employ a simple opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that does not have decoration, and the cost for decoration can be suppressed. When developing a new model, there is no need to change the decoration of the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) on a large scale. ) should be prepared. As a result, if the images displayed on the second screen (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060) are adapted to the new model, it is possible to obtain the same effect as the decoration change. Cost can be reduced.

In the fourth embodiment, of the light projected from the projector 9020, the light that has passed through area I (the area located on the right side of the cabinet-side screen 9040) in FIG. , out of the light projected from the projector 9020, light passing through the region II (the region located on the left side of the cabinet-side screen 9040) in FIG. It has been described that the right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 are respectively arranged. That is, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (second screen) are arranged on the side of the cabinet-side screen 9040 (first screen) when viewed from the front.

In the present invention, the positional relationship between the first screen (cabinet-side screen) and the second screen is not limited to this example. It may be arranged. For example, while the door-side upper screen is provided above the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), the light projected from the projector 9020 may be projected in area III in FIG. area) is incident on the door-side upper screen. Further, while the door-side lower screen is provided below the transparent panel UD11 (upper display window UD1), the area of the light projected from the projector 9020 located below the cabinet-side screen (for example, FIG. 96A ) facing the area III with the cabinet-side screen 9040 interposed therebetween) may be incident on the door-side lower screen. As the second screen in the present invention, all four screens, that is, the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, the door-side upper screen, and the door-side lower screen, may be provided, or any of the four screens may be provided. There may be one, two, or three screens of . In addition, a screen arranged on the side of such a cabinet side screen (door side right screen or door side left screen) and a screen arranged above or below the cabinet side screen (door side upper screen or door side lower screen) screen) may be configured as one screen. For example, the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, and the door-side upper screen may be configured to be integrated.

In the present invention, the arrangement position of the second screen (door-side right screen, door-side left screen, door-side upper screen, and door-side lower screen) in the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) is not particularly limited. That is, the second screen (door-side right screen, door-side left screen, door-side upper screen, and door-side lower screen) is provided in a region adjacent to the first screen (cabinet-side screen) when viewed from the front. Alternatively, it may be provided in a region separated from the first screen (cabinet-side screen) to some extent. For example, the top panel mechanism HA, the upper left panel mechanism HB, the upper right panel mechanism HC, the left side panel mechanism HD, the right side panel mechanism HE (see FIG. 95), etc. are changed in structure, and the position is changed to the door side. An upper screen, a door-side left screen, a door-side right screen, or the like may be provided. As a result, if the light projected from the projector is incident on the back side of these screens and the image is displayed on the front side, the area corresponding to the arrangement position of these panel mechanisms can be used with a model-specific design or Such design and information can be easily changed by displaying model information and appropriately using image data.

The top panel mechanism HA is arranged at the upper end of the upper door mechanism UD, the left lateral panel mechanism HD is arranged at the left end of the upper door mechanism UD, and the right lateral panel mechanism HE is arranged at the right end of the upper door mechanism UD. When the second screen (door-side upper screen, door-side left screen, door-side right screen, etc.) is provided at these positions (area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD) , it is necessary to widen the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector (see FIG. 91). For example, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the illumination range is maximized and the entire upper door mechanism UD is illuminated (assuming no cabinet-side screen is provided). In order to widen the irradiation range, for example, the arrangement position and inclination of the mirror 9030 may be adjusted. By adjusting the relative positional relationship between the projector 9020 and the mirror 9030, the irradiation range can be changed as appropriate. Arrangement positions of the panel mechanism HD, the right lateral panel mechanism HE, etc. (the area along the outer periphery of the upper door mechanism UD) are reached (so that the light is irradiated over a wide range of the upper door mechanism UD). It is possible to design As described above, in the present invention, only the portion of the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) that is adjacent to the first screen (cabinet-side screen) when viewed from the front is illuminated by the light projected from the projector. Alternatively, the outer peripheral portion of the opening/closing door (upper door mechanism UD) may be illuminated in a wider range.

In the fourth embodiment, as an example of image data, area A, area B, and area C shown in FIG. 9101 and character image 9102). The image data used in the present invention is not limited to this example. image data may be used. By using such image data, a part of one image (for example, effect image 9100) is displayed on each of the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060. By integrating some of the images displayed in , the one image (for example, the effect image 9100) is configured. Thus, in the present invention, different images are provided on the cabinet-side screen and the screens arranged in the peripheral area (the door-side right screen, the door-side left screen, the door-side upper screen, the door-side lower screen, etc.). may be displayed individually, or the images displayed on each screen may be combined to form a single video representation as a whole.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (second screen) are provided in an exposed state on the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1 (door-side right screen 9050 and door-side left screen 9060). No other member is provided on the front side of the screen 9060). As a result, when an image is displayed on the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060, the image can be visually recognized by the player. However, in the present invention, a transparent panel may be provided on the front side of the second screen (door-side right screen and door-side left screen). If it is a transparent panel, it is considered that the image displayed on the second screen is not obstructed from the player's field of vision, and that there is no hindrance to the player's visual recognition of the image. On the other hand, by covering the second screen with the transparent panel, it is possible to secure the rigidity of the game machine and prevent the second screen from being damaged. When the transparent panel is provided, the shape of the transparent panel is not particularly limited, but for example, a transparent panel having unevenness can be adopted. This makes it possible to add a three-dimensional effect to the images displayed on the second screen (door-side right screen and door-side left screen). can be created.

Further, in the fourth embodiment, the shape of the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 has been described as being the shape of a curved flat screen (the shape when viewed from the top is an arc shape). However, the shape of the second screen (door-side right screen, door-side left screen, and door-side upper screen) in the present invention is not particularly limited, and screens having any shape can be appropriately adopted. For example, the second screen may be a flat-shaped screen such as the cabinet-side screen 9040, a screen having unevenness, or a rounded-shaped screen. , it may be an angular shaped screen.

[Fifth embodiment]
The second to fourth embodiments have been described above. The fifth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to fourth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to fourth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of the parts that the descriptions of the second to fourth embodiments are applicable to the fifth embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
Figure 99 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism and cabinet;

In FIG. 99, the irradiation range of light projected from the projector 9020 is indicated using a dashed line. As in the fourth embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 90).

In the fourth embodiment, it has been described that part of the light traveling forward in this manner enters the cabinet-side screen 9040 (see FIG. 88) from behind (back side). In contrast, in the fifth embodiment, the cabinet-side screen 9040 is not provided, and all the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

As will be described later, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen sheet 1046, a screen sheet 1056, and a screen sheet 1057 (see FIGS. 102 and 103). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the screen sheet 1046, the screen sheet 1056, and the screen sheet 1057 from behind (rear side), and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets. will be displayed. Details will be described below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 100 is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as seen from the rear.

As shown in FIGS. 100 and 101, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a screen unit 1040, a decoration unit 1050, and an indirect lighting unit 1060. FIG. Each unit will be described below.

<Screen unit 1040>
FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 104 is a rear perspective view of the transparent plate, the screen sheet, the lower pressing member, the upper pressing member, and the lower frame. FIG. 105 is a perspective view of the lower pressing member and the upper pressing member as seen from the front, while the transparent plate and the screen sheet are seen from the rear. FIG. 106 is a perspective view of the upper pressing member and the upper frame as seen from below. FIG. 107 is a perspective view of the translucent plate, the screen sheet, and the lower frame as seen from the rear.

It should be noted that FIG. 102 shows each component of the upper door mechanism UD as viewed obliquely from the front. FIG. 103 shows the components of the upper door mechanism UD as seen obliquely from behind. FIG. 104 shows the transparent plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower pressing member UD101, and the upper pressing member UD102 assembled together, and the lower frame UD100 existing alone. there is In FIG. 105, the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are shown assembled, and the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper pressing member UD102 are shown independently. FIG. 106 shows how the upper pressing member UD102 and the upper frame UD110 exist independently. FIG. 107 shows the light-transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, and the lower frame UD100 assembled together.

As shown in FIGS. 102 and 103, the screen unit 1040 includes a translucent plate 1045 and a screen sheet 1046. As shown in FIG.

The light-transmitting plate 1045 is mainly made of resin such as a light-transmitting acrylic plate or a glass plate, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. The light-transmitting plate 1045 includes a flat portion 1045a located in the center, curved portions 1045b continuously formed toward the rear from both left and right side edges of the flat portion 1045a, and curved portions 1045b extending rearward from the rear ends of the curved portions 1045b. and a side portion 1045c formed continuously. The planar portion 1045a and the side portion 1045c are formed in a planar shape, and their surfaces are substantially perpendicular to each other. The curved portion 1045b has a flat plate curved shape, like the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 93) in the fourth embodiment.

The screen sheet 1046 is a transmissive screen that is displayed by projecting a projection image from behind, and the screens in the fourth embodiment (the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060 ), the projector 9020 has a rear-side entrance surface on which light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a front-side display surface on which a projection image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface. The screen sheet 1046 is mainly made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. exhibit color.

The screen sheet 1046 has a flat portion 1046a located in the center and curved portions 1046b continuously formed rearward from both left and right side edges of the flat portion 1046a. The planar portion 1046a is formed in a planar shape, and the curved portion 1046b has a shape in which a flat plate is curved. The plane portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 have substantially the same size and shape as the plane portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the light-transmitting plate 1045, respectively.

The screen sheet 1046 is arranged on the back side of the translucent plate 1045 . Specifically, the rear-side surface of the plane portion 1045a of the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the front-side surface of the plane portion 1046a of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other, and the rear-side surface of the curved portion 1045b of the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the front surface of the curved portion 1046b of the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (surface on the back side) of the screen sheet 1046, an image (still image or moving image) is displayed. The light-transmitting plate 1045 is transparent, and there is no structure in front of the light-transmitting plate 1045 that blocks the view of the player. becomes visible from

Further, the screen sheet 1046 has a flat portion 1046a and a curved portion 1046b, and since the flat portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b are positioned differently in the depth direction, images are projected onto both the flat portion 1046a and the curved portion 1046b. By displaying, the entire image displayed on the screen sheet 1046 can be given a three-dimensional effect. Further, the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 have curved portions 1045b and 1046b formed by forming (forming in an open space), respectively. , deformation of the image can be suppressed.

The light-transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 configured as described above are pressed by the lower frame UD100 and the upper frame UD110 in a state in which the lower portion is pressed by the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper portion is pressed by the upper pressing member UD102. Supported.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 104, the lower frame UD100 is formed as a U-shaped member, and includes a horizontally arranged bottom plate UD100a and a front end of the bottom plate UD100a that slightly protrudes upward. a right side portion UD100c extending vertically at the right end of the bottom plate UD100a; and a left side portion UD100d extending vertically at the left end of the bottom plate UD100a. The transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are placed on the bottom plate UD100a with the transparent plate 1045 in contact with the bottom plate UD100a, the right side UD100c, and the left side UD100d. In this state, the front lower portion of the transparent plate 1045 contacts the wall portion UD100b. The wall portion UD 100b has a shape corresponding to the plane portion 1045a, the curved portion 1045b, and the side portion 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045 so that the entire lower front surface of the light-transmitting plate 1045 can come into contact with the wall portion UD100b.

As shown in FIG. 105, the lower pressing member UD101 is formed in a plate shape, and its front side surface (pressing surface UD101a) corresponds to the screen sheet 1046 and has a flat portion and a curved shape. and a formed portion. With the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 placed on the bottom plate UD100a of the lower frame UD100, the lower pressing member UD101 is fixed to the lower frame UD100. It is sandwiched between the wall portion UD100b and the transparent plate 1045 and the pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101, and pressed by the pressing surface UD101a. The lower pressing member UD101 can be attached to the lower frame UD100 by screwing a screw through the screw insertion hole UD101b (see FIG. 104) into the screw hole UD100e of the lower frame UD100.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106, the upper frame UD110 is formed as a member having a substantially rectangular outer shape when viewed from the front. and a projecting wall portion UD110b. With the upper frame UD110 fixed to the lower frame UD100, the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are such that the upper edge of the transparent plate 1045 contacts the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110, and the front surface of the transparent plate 1045 The upper portion is positioned so as to abut on the wall portion UD110b of the upper frame UD110. The wall portion UD110b has a shape corresponding to the light-transmitting plate 1045 so that the front upper portion of the light-transmitting plate 1045 can come into contact with the light-transmitting plate 1045 over a certain range.

The front side surface (pressing surface UD102a, see FIG. 105) of the upper pressing member UD102 has a planar portion and a curved portion corresponding to the screen sheet 1046. As shown in FIG. With its upper surface in contact with the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110, the upper pressing member UD102 inserts a screw through the screw insertion hole UD102b (see FIG. 106) into the screw hole formed in the bottom surface UD110a of the upper frame UD110. It is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing it into the UD110c. As a result, the upper portion of the screen sheet 1046 is sandwiched between the wall portion UD110b of the upper frame UD110, the translucent plate 1045, and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102, and pressed by the pressing surface UD102a.

As described above, the screen sheet 1046 is pressed at its lower portion by the lower pressing member UD101 and at its upper portion by the upper pressing member UD102. The pressing surface UD101a of the lower pressing member UD101 and the pressing surface UD102a of the upper pressing member UD102 each have a curved portion corresponding to the shape of the screen sheet 1046. FIG. As a result, it is possible to bring the screen sheet 1046 into close contact with the transparent plate 1045 while suppressing the formation of a gap between the transparent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 and the occurrence of wrinkles in the screen sheet 1046 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the image visually recognized by the player from being disturbed.

As shown in FIG. 107, when the light-transmitting plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 are in close contact with each other and viewed from the rear, the plane portion 1045a and the curved portion 1045b of the light-transmitting plate 1045 are the same as the plane portion of the screen sheet 1046. 1046a and the curved portion 1046b, the side portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045 is not covered with the screen sheet 1046 and is exposed.

Although not shown, a cabinet G is arranged behind the translucent plate 1045 and the screen sheet 1046 . Therefore, between the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 and the front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2), there is a gap corresponding to at least the length of the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 in the front-rear direction. For clarity, such gaps are shown hatched in FIG.

An image is displayed on the portion of the light-transmitting plate 1045 covered by the screen sheet 1046 (flat portion 1045a and curved portion 1045b), while the portion of the light-transmitting plate 1045 not covered by the screen sheet 1046 is exposed. No image is displayed on (the side portion 1045c, that is, the hatched portion in FIG. 107). As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the image stands out at a position spaced forward from the front end of the cabinet G (the side wall G2), thus realizing a variety of image expressions. be able to.

<Decoration unit 1050>
FIG. 108 is a rear perspective view of the upper frame, first structure, second structure, third structure, fourth structure, and screen sheet.

108, the first structural body 1051, the second structural body 1052, the third structural body 1053, and the fourth structural body 1054 are shown assembled, and the upper frame UD110 and the screen sheet 1056 are shown. , and the screen sheet 1057 are shown to exist independently.

As shown in FIG. 108, the decoration unit 1050 includes a first structure 1051 arranged in the center, a second structure 1052 arranged around the first structure 1051, and adjacent to the second structure 1052. It has a third structure 1053, a fourth structure 1054 adjacent to the third structure 1053, and a screen sheet 1056 and a screen sheet 1057 arranged behind these structures.

The first structure 1051, the second structure 1052, the third structure 1053, and the fourth structure 1054 are attached to the upper frame UD110 by screw fastening. The screen sheet 1056 is arranged behind the first structure 1051 and the second structure 1052 while being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1057 is arranged on the back side of the third structure 1053 while being pressed by the pressing member UD111. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are arranged adjacent to each other and have a shape that allows them to be fitted together at their adjacent portions. The fourth structure 1054 is arranged on the rear side of the speaker housing portion UD110d of the upper frame UD110, and a speaker (not shown) is arranged along with the fourth structure 1054 on the rear side of the speaker housing portion UD110d.

The first structure 1051 is made of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.) and formed into a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, letter shape). The second structure 1052 is made of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.) and formed into a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating flame). The third structural body 1053 is made of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.) and formed into a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a chain). The fourth structural body 1054 is made of a translucent material (for example, acrylic resin, etc.) and formed in a predetermined three-dimensional shape (for example, a shape imitating a chain).

The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are transmissive screens on which a projection image is projected from the rear and displayed. and a display surface on the front side on which a projection image is projected by transmitting light incident on the incident surface. The screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 are mainly made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film, and are formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. It is transparent or has a gray color.

When the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the incident surface (surface on the back side) of the screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057, the display surface (surface on the front side) of the screen sheet 1056 and the screen sheet 1057 is illuminated. , an image (still image or moving image) relating to the game is displayed.

Here, the third structure 1053 has a structure in which a half mirror (magic mirror) is formed on the front side thereof. A half mirror can be formed by attaching a semi-transmissive film sheet to the surface of a substrate or vapor-depositing a metal film by a conventionally known method. It has the property of reflecting and partially transmitting.

By arranging such a half-mirror on the front side of the screen sheet 1057, when no light is projected from the projector 9020, objects existing around the third structure 1053 are reflected. It will present an appearance like a part that has been subjected to As an object existing around the third structure 1053, for example, a structure having a shape imitating a chain as shown in FIG. 100 can be provided. Note that the structure having a chain-like shape may be provided in the vicinity of the third structure 1053, or the third structure 1053 (half mirror) itself may be formed in the shape. On the other hand, when light is projected from the projector 9020, the image displayed on the screen sheet 1057 is reflected on the half mirror. For example, the screen sheet 1057 displays an image in which an object existing around the third structure 1053 or an object having a shape similar to the shape of the third structure 1053 (a chain-like shape) is flowing and moving. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect as if the object, which was stationary when no light was projected from the projector 9020, is moving. Thus, according to the above configuration, it is possible to create an attractive presentation by both the modeled object and the image related to the modeled object.

The screen sheet 1056 also has a diffusion layer for diffusing light and a prism layer in which a plurality of unit prisms having a convex shape on the incident surface side are arranged. As a result, the light projected from the projector 9020 is diffused, and together with the shaped object placed on the front side of the screen sheet 1056, an attractive presentation can be performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 100, when the first structure 1051 is formed in the shape of the character "GOD", by displaying an image corresponding to the character "GOD" on the screen sheet 1056, the character "GOD" is displayed. It is possible to create an appearance in which the characters "" are sparkling. The center of the light projected from the projector 9020 (irradiation light emitted near the optical axis of the projection lens) is incident on the screen sheet 1046, and the screen sheet 1056 is arranged at a position away from the center of the angle of view. However, by providing a prism layer with a high light-condensing effect, it is possible to prevent the brightness of the image displayed on the screen sheet 1056 from lowering. A half mirror may be arranged on the front side of the screen sheet 1056 as well as the screen sheet 1057 .

<Indirect lighting unit 1060>
FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the transparent plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member. FIG. 110 is a front perspective view of the transparent plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, and the light guide member. FIG. 111 is a front perspective view of cross sections of the transparent plate, the screen sheet, the lower frame, the LED substrate, and the light guide member.

Note that FIG. 109 shows the light-transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED substrate 1061, and the light-guiding member 1062 after removing the light-guiding member 1062 from the assembled state. . In FIG. 110, the light-transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, and the light guide member 1062 are shown in the vicinity of the light guide member 1062 when the position of the lower frame UD100 is slightly shifted from the assembled state. is shown enlarged. In FIG. 111, the light-transmitting plate 1045, the screen sheet 1046, the lower frame UD100, the LED substrate 1061, and the light guide member 1062 are cut horizontally, and the vicinity of the light guide member 1062 is enlarged. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 101, the indirect lighting units 1060 are arranged along the right side UD100c and the left side UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and each indirect lighting unit 1060 has a symmetrical configuration. there is

As shown in FIG. 109, the indirect lighting unit 1060 includes an LED board 1061 and a light guide member 1062. As shown in FIG.

The LED board 1061 is arranged substantially parallel to the side portion 1045c on the slightly left side of the right side portion UD100c and the slightly right side of the left side portion UD100d of the lower frame UD100 (slightly inside the side portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045). . A plurality of LEDs 1061a are provided on the LED substrate 1061 at regular intervals in the vertical direction. Specifically, the LED 1061a of the LED board 1061 arranged near the right side UD 100c is installed so as to emit light rightward, and the LED 1061a of the LED board 1061 arranged near the left side UD 100d emits light leftward. installed to emit light to The LED board 1061 is arranged so that a part thereof overlaps the side surface portion 1045c of the light-transmitting plate 1045 in a side view, but the installation position of the LEDs 1061a is behind the rear end of the side surface portion 1045c. Thus, the light emitted from the LED 1061a is not blocked by the side portion 1045c. In addition, the LED board 1061 is arranged slightly apart from the side surface portion 1045c.

The light guide member 1062 is a member having substantially the same height as the right side portion UD100c and the left side portion UD100d of the lower frame UD100, and is formed with a plurality of openings 1062a that open inward in the vertical direction. The light guide member 1062 has screw holes 1062b formed in the upper portion and the lower portion thereof, and the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the LED substrate 1061 by screws inserted through the screw holes 1061b formed in the LED substrate 1061. be done. This allows light emitted from the LED 1061a to enter the light guide member 1062 through the opening 1062a.

Further, the light guide member 1062 is fixed to the lower frame UD100 by a screw inserted through a screw hole 1062c formed in its upper portion and a screw hole UD100f formed in the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. be done.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 110, the light guide member 1062 is formed with a plurality of openings 1062d that open forward in the vertical direction. The opening 1062a shown in FIG. 109 and the opening 1062d shown in FIG. A right side portion UD100c (a left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 is formed with a plurality of openings UD100g that penetrate in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, when the light guide member 1062 is attached to the lower frame UD100, the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062 and the opening UD100g of the lower frame UD100 communicate with each other.

As shown in FIG. 111, the interior of the light guide member 1062 serves as a reflector that changes the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED 1061a. The light emitted from the LED 1061a passes through the opening 1062a of the light guide member 1062 and enters the interior of the light guide member 1062, then changes its traveling direction from sideways to forward and passes through the opening 1062d of the light guide member 1062. , is emitted forward from the opening UD100g of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d). Arrows in FIG. 111 indicate traveling directions of light emitted from the LED 1061a.

Here, as shown in FIG. 111, the right side portion UD100c (left side portion UD100d) of the lower frame UD100 is in contact with the side portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045. As shown in FIG. In addition, the rear end of the right side portion UD 100c (left side portion UD 100d) and the rear end of the side portion 1045c have substantially the same position in the front-rear direction. It is shorter than the longitudinal length of the portion 1045c. Moreover, although not shown, a cabinet G is arranged on the rear side of the right side UD100c (left side UD100d) of the lower frame UD100. The front end of the cabinet G (side wall G2) is close to (substantially abuts) the rear end of the right side UD 100c (left side UD 100d). positioned substantially on the same plane.

The indirect lighting unit 1060 is arranged along the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 so as to have the above positional relationship with the surrounding members. The light emitted from the LED 1061a is emitted forward along the side surface portion 1045c of the transparent plate 1045. As shown in FIG. As described with reference to FIG. 107, the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045 is not covered with the screen sheet 1046, and no image is displayed on this portion (hatched portion in FIG. 107), so the image stands out. Such an impression can be given to the player. In the present embodiment, light from the LED 1061a is emitted from such a portion where no image is displayed (along the side surface portion 1045c of the translucent plate 1045). By emphasizing the boundary with the part that is not exposed, it is possible to give the player the impression that the image stands out more remarkably.

<Attachment of Upper Door Mechanism UD to Cabinet G>
FIG. 112 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook, and the front protruding member. FIG. 113 is a side perspective view of the upper door mechanism, the hook, and the front protruding member. FIG. 114 is a side perspective view of the cabinet, the hook, and the front projecting member. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional right side view of the upper door mechanism, the cabinet, the hook, and the front projecting member. FIG. 116 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as seen from below. FIG. 117 is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism. FIG. 118 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism.

Note that FIG. 112 shows a state in which the hook UD120 and the front-side projecting member G120 are removed from the upper door mechanism UD. FIG. 113 shows the hook UD120 attached to the upper door mechanism UD, and the front-side projecting member G120 removed from the upper door mechanism UD. FIG. 114 shows how the hook UD120 and the front projecting member G120 are attached to the cabinet G. As shown in FIG. FIG. 115 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD, the cabinet G, the hook UD120, and the front-side protruding member G120 are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction when the upper door mechanism UD is closed with respect to the cabinet G. ing. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 115, the hooking portion UD120 and the front-side protruding member G120 are hatched. FIG. 116 shows a state in which each component of the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. FIG. 117 shows the state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are not assembled and viewed from different directions, and the lower door mechanism DD is observed from an angle closer to the side. is doing. 118 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G. FIG.

The upper door mechanism UD is attached to the cabinet G by a hook UD120 and a front projecting member G120.

As shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, the hook UD120 is a member that protrudes rearward from the upper frame UD110, and a notch UD120b that is open downward is formed in the main surface UD120a. A screw hole UD120c is formed in a surface perpendicular to the main surface UD120a of the hook UD120, and the hook UD120 is attached to the upper frame UD110 by screwing. By fixing the hook portion UD120 to the upper frame UD110, the main surface UD120a is arranged along the front-rear direction.

The front-side protruding member G120 has a main surface G120a arranged horizontally, a front-end central portion G120b formed by bending upward the vicinity of the center of the front end of the main surface G120a, and a front-end right side of the main surface G120a by bending upward. The formed front end right side G120c, the front end left side G120d formed by bending the front end left side of the main surface G120a upward, and the front end of the main surface G120a between the front end central portion G120b and the front end right side G120c. and a right mounting portion G120e formed by bending backward, and a left mounting portion G120f formed by bending the front end of the main surface G120a upward and rearward between the front end central portion G120b and the front end left side G120d. and a rear side portion G120g formed by bending downward the rear portions of both the left end and the right end of the main surface G120a.

The right front end portion G120c and the left front end portion G120d are formed behind the central front end portion G120b, and the heights of the central front end portion G120b, the right front end portion G120c, and the left front end portion G120d are substantially the same. Further, the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f are formed behind the front right side portion G120c and the front left side portion G120d, respectively, and the heights of the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f are , are substantially the same, and their heights are higher than the heights of the front end center portion G120b, the front end right side portion G120c, and the front end left side portion G120d. Further, the right placement portion G120e and the left placement portion G120f have surfaces arranged horizontally.

A screw hole G120h is formed in the rear part G120g, and the front-side protruding member G120 is attached to the side wall G2 of the cabinet G from the inside by a screw inserted through the screw hole G120h. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, by fixing the front projecting member G120 to the cabinet G, the front portions of the main surface UD120a (front central portion G120b, front right right portion G120c, front left left portion G120d, right (including the mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f) projects forward from the cabinet G. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, the inner surface of the side wall G2 of the cabinet G is provided with an inwardly projecting member G2a (for example, a screw or the like screwed into the inner surface of the side wall G2). UD120b is hooked on the inner surface side projecting member G2a. Thereby, the hook UD120 is locked to the cabinet G. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 116, the lower frame UD100 has a lower side surface UD100h as a surface facing downward of the bottom plate UD100a (see FIG. 104). A plurality of downward protrusions UD100i that protrude downward are formed on the lower side surface UD100h. The downward projecting portion UD100i has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and extends forward from the rear end of the lower side surface UD100h. A screw hole UD100e (see FIG. 104) is formed at the rear end of the downward projecting portion UD100i.

As shown in FIG. 117, the lower door mechanism DD has an upper plate DD100 horizontally arranged in the left-right direction on its upper portion. As shown in FIG. 118, in a state in which the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are closed with respect to the cabinet G, the rear edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 is aligned with the downward projecting portion UD100i formed on the lower frame UD100. It is close to (almost in contact with) the front end.

Since the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD are configured as described above, when attaching the upper door mechanism UD to the cabinet G (closing the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the cabinet G), first, the upper frame While placing the lower surface of the upper wall of the UD 110 on the upper surfaces of the right mounting portion G120e and the left mounting portion G120f of the front projecting member G120, the notch UD120b of the hooking portion UD120 is hooked to the inner projecting member G2a. By closing the lower door mechanism DD with respect to the cabinet G in this state, the rear edge DD100a of the upper plate DD100 of the lower door mechanism DD hits the downward projecting portion UD100i of the lower frame UD100, and the upper door mechanism UD is pushed backward. be As a result, the upper door mechanism UD is also closed with respect to the cabinet G.

In this embodiment, since the upper door mechanism UD can be closed as described above, the upper door mechanism UD is not provided with a hinge for coupling with the cabinet G. FIG. When a hinge is provided, the range in which an image can be displayed on the side portion of the gaming machine is limited. A wide range in the door mechanism UD can be secured as an image display area. Specifically, the range up to the rear end of the screen sheet 1046 (the rear ends of the curved portions 1045b on both the left and right sides of the transparent plate 1045) is included in the irradiation range in the horizontal direction of the light projected from the projector 9020. becomes possible. As a result, a powerful performance can be performed on a large screen.

Three screens, screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057, are provided. Similar to the fourth embodiment, information indicating an image displayed on each screen is converted into one piece of image data. If included (see FIGS. 97 and 98), images can be displayed on each of the three screens using the one image data.

When the upper door mechanism UD is closed as described above, a slight gap is formed between the upper door mechanism UD and the cabinet G (see FIG. 115), but foreign matter may enter through the gap. Even if the foreign matter comes inside the cabinet G, it is possible to prevent the foreign matter from entering further into the cabinet G due to the presence of the front-side protruding member G120.

[Sixth embodiment]
The second to fifth embodiments have been described above. The sixth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to fifth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the second to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of the portions that the descriptions of the second to fifth embodiments also apply to the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
FIG. 119 is a front perspective view of the gaming machine with the upper door mechanism and the lower door mechanism removed. FIG. 120 is a side perspective view of light projected from the projector device.

As shown in FIG. 119, inside the cabinet G, an irradiation unit B is arranged. As in the second embodiment (see FIG. 41), the irradiation unit B includes a projector device B2 that emits irradiation light, a mirror mechanism B3 that reflects the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2, a projector device B2 and a mirror. and a projector cover B1 that houses the mechanism B3.

The configuration of the projector cover B1 is different from that of the second embodiment, and the reflector holding portion B11 (see FIG. 45) is formed above the projector device B2, not in front of the projector device B2 (see FIG. 123). . As in the second embodiment, a mirror mechanism B3 is provided on the inner surface of the reflector holder B11, and the mirror mechanism B3 is an optical mirror B32 capable of reflecting light projected from the projector device B2. (See FIG. 42).

In the present embodiment, the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) is tilted so that the rear side is lower than the front side, corresponding to the shape and formation position of the reflector holding portion B11. placed above. Note that the configuration of the mirror mechanism B3 itself is the same as that of the second embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The projector device B2 is fixed to the projector cover B1 in a posture having a tilt (a steeper tilt than the optical mirror B32) such that the rear is lower than the front.

As a result, the light projected from the projector device B2 and traveling upward is reflected forward by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) (see FIG. 120). In FIG. 120, the light irradiation range is indicated by oblique lines. As in the fifth embodiment, all light reflected by the mirror mechanism B3 (optical mirror B32) and traveling forward reaches the upper door mechanism UD. The upper door mechanism UD has a configuration similar to that of the fifth embodiment, and the light projected from the projector device B2 is projected onto screen sheets 1046, 1056, and 1057 (see FIGS. 100 to 103). , and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of these screen sheets.

<Adjustment of traveling direction of irradiation light>
FIG. 121 is a side perspective view of the irradiation unit. FIG. 122 is a perspective view of the irradiation unit as seen from the rear.

As described in the second embodiment, the projector device B2 is mounted on the projector cover B1 via the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 while being covered by the case B22 (see FIG. 47).

Specifically, square holes 2201c are provided in the right and left portions of the upper base B220 (see FIG. 48). The upper pedestal B220 is attached to the projector cover B1 with attachment screws T (see FIG. 51) inserted into the square holes 2201c. FIG. 51 shows how the mounting screw T is inserted from below the square hole 2201c. ) is inserted. The upper pedestal B220 may be attached to another member fixed inside the cabinet G instead of the projector cover B1.

The lower pedestal B221 is provided with a plurality of screw holes 2214 for screwing the case B22 (see FIG. 47), and the case B22 is attached to the lower pedestal B221 from below by screwing. be done. The configuration of the case B22 is not particularly limited, but in this embodiment, the case B22 (see FIG. 57) having a rectangular parallelepiped box shape is employed. The case B22 accommodates a lens unit B21 (see FIG. 47), an LED board, a DMD board, a heat sink, an intake fan, etc., which are internal components of the projector device B2. (See FIG. 47) is fixed.

Here, the square hole 2201c formed in the upper pedestal B220 has a longitudinal and lateral inner diameter dimension larger than the screw shaft diameter of the mounting screw T. As shown in FIG. As a result, the mounting position of the projector device B2 with respect to the projector cover B1 can be adjusted in the left-right direction and the front-rear direction. The details of the method for adjusting the mounting position of the projector device B2 are as described with reference to FIG. 51, so description thereof will be omitted here.

The upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are connected at three connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 corresponding to the three connecting holes 2200A and the three connecting screw portions 2210 (see FIGS. 47 and 49). . As a result, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 can adjust the mutual spacing at each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3. The connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are arranged so as not to be positioned on the same straight line in the plane (within the horizontal plane) along the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221. By appropriately changing the distance between the pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, it is possible to adjust the inclination of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220 in the three-dimensional space. The details of the method for adjusting the distance between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 in each of the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 are as described with reference to FIG.

By using such upper pedestal B220 and lower pedestal B221, it is possible to appropriately adjust the in-plane position of the upper pedestal B220 with respect to the projector cover B1, and it is possible to arrange the projector device B2 at an appropriate position. . In addition, it is possible to appropriately adjust the inclination of the lower pedestal B221 with respect to the upper pedestal B220, and the attitude of the case B22 (the lens unit B21, which is an internal component of the projector device B2, etc.) supported by the lower pedestal B221 can be changed. can be made appropriate. In this way, the projector device B2 is configured to be able to change its position and attitude within the cabinet G and adjust the emission position, traveling direction, and irradiation range of the irradiation light.

As shown in FIG. 121, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the projector cover B1. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rears of the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are opened. As a result, the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are exposed rearward. Although not shown, the mounting screw T (see FIG. 51) inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper base B220 is also exposed rearward.

As shown in FIG. 122, above the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged. The projector cover B1 has a shape in which the upper side and the rear side of the reflector holding portion B11 are opened.

An angle adjustment hole B111 (see FIG. 44) is formed in the reflector holding portion B11, and a screw (not shown) is inserted through the angle adjustment hole B111 from above (rear side). As described in the second embodiment, by loosening or tightening the screw, the distance between the reflector holding portion B11 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be changed. As a result, the position (orientation) of the optical mirror B32 held on the inner surface of the reflector holding portion B11 is changed, and the reflection angle of the irradiation light emitted from the projector device B2 (the traveling direction of the irradiation light after reflection) is adjusted. It is possible to

<Operation window G10 and closing lid G100>
FIG. 123 is a vertical cross-sectional view of the cabinet. Figure 124 is an exploded perspective view of the illumination unit, closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; FIG. 125 is a rear view of the gaming machine with the closing lid removed from the rear wall. FIG. 126 is a partially enlarged view around the operation window in the game machine shown in FIG. 125. FIG. Figure 127 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; Figure 128 is an exploded perspective view of the closing lid and back wall of the cabinet; FIG. 129 is a partially enlarged view of the vicinity of the operation window in the game machine with the closing lid attached to the back wall.

As shown in FIG. 123, when the irradiation unit B is arranged inside the cabinet G, the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged behind the cabinet G, and the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are arranged. The connecting portions R1, R2, R3 are positioned so as to face the closing lid G100 attached to the cabinet G (back wall G3). Although not shown, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 is also positioned to face the closing lid G100. A space in which other members do not exist is formed behind the upper pedestal B220.

Further, in the upper rear portion of the cabinet G, a reflector holding portion B11 of the projector cover B1 is arranged. A space in which no other member exists is formed above and behind the reflector holding portion B11, and the space is connected to the rear space of the upper base B220. In FIG. 123, hatched lines indicate the irradiation range of the light projected from the projector device B2.

The irradiation unit B is attached to the rear wall G3 by screw fastening. As shown in FIG. 122, screw holes B100a to B100d for inserting screws are formed in the rear portion of the projector cover B1. When the irradiation unit B is attached to the rear wall G3, the surface B110a having the screw hole B100a, the surface B110b having the screw hole B100b, and the surface B110c having the screw holes B100c and B10d are formed. , respectively abut on the inner surface (surface on the front side) of the rear wall G3. These surfaces B110a to B110c are formed separately from each other, so that the projector cover B1 has a shape in which the rear space of the upper base B220 and the upper and rear spaces of the reflector holding portion B11 are opened. ing.

As shown in FIG. 124, the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G is formed with an operation window G10. The operation window G10 is formed as an opening through which the inside of the cabinet G can be visually recognized from the outside. The operation window G10 can be closed with a closing lid G100.

As shown in FIG. 125, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the rear wall G3, when viewed from the front from the rear, the connecting portions R1 and R2 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 are seen through the operation window G10. , R3 (especially the nut 2213, see FIG. 52) and the head (not shown) of the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper base B220 can be seen through the operation window G10. As a result, the nut 2213 can be operated from the outside of the cabinet G, and the orientation of the projector apparatus B2 can be adjusted by turning the nut 2213 as appropriate. Further, by operating the mounting screws T from the outside of the cabinet G, it is possible to move the positions of the mounting screws T within the opening range of the rectangular holes 2201c formed in the upper base B220. can be adjusted.

Further, as shown in FIG. 126, when the closing lid G100 is removed from the rear wall G3, the angle of the reflector holding portion B11 can be seen through the operation window G10 when the operation window G10 and its vicinity are looked up from the lower rear surface side. The head (not shown) of the screw inserted through the adjustment hole B111 can also be visually recognized. As a result, the screw can be operated from outside the cabinet G, and the attitude of the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted by appropriately turning the screw.

The structures of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 will be described below. FIG. 127 shows the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 128 shows the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 viewed obliquely from the front.

As shown in FIG. 127, the operation window G10 includes an opening G10a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an outer surface (rear side) of the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G at the periphery of the opening G10a. The peripheral edge portion G10b formed to have a square-shaped surface at a position recessed with respect to the surface of the peripheral edge portion G10b, the four screw holes G10c formed in the peripheral edge portion G10b, the outer edge of the peripheral edge portion G10b and the back wall and a connecting portion G10d that connects with the outer surface of G3. As shown in FIG. 128, the peripheral portion G10b cannot be seen from the front, but the screw hole G10c can be seen from the front because it penetrates the rear wall G3. A state in which a screw hole G10c is formed on the side is shown.

In other words, the operation window G10 configured as described above has a shape in which a concave portion is formed with respect to the outer surface of the rear wall G3, and an opening is formed by penetrating most of the concave portion. have. The opening corresponds to the opening G10a, and the portion of the recess in which no opening is formed corresponds to the peripheral edge portion G10b. The peripheral portion G10b is formed as a flat surface (vertical surface) substantially parallel to the outer surface of the rear wall G3, and the connection portion G10d is formed as a horizontal and vertical flat surface.

The closing lid G100 is configured as a plate-like member, and includes a rear surface G100a formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, a front surface G100b formed on the opposite side of the rear surface G100a, and four bosses provided on the front surface G100b. and a peripheral edge portion G100d formed so as to extend forward from the peripheral edge of the rear surface G100a. The rear surface G100a and the front surface G100b are formed as flat surfaces in the vertical direction.

The outer shape of the closing lid G100 (back surface G100a) is substantially the same as the outer shape of the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10 (similar shape slightly smaller than the peripheral edge portion G10b). is also getting bigger. Thus, by fitting the closing lid G100 into the recess (attaching the closing lid G100 to the rear wall G3 so as to fill the recess), the opening G10a of the operation window G10 can be closed. It's becoming

More specifically, when the closing lid G100 is arranged such that the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 is along the connecting portion G10d of the operation window G10, the four screw holes G10c of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G100 are aligned with the connecting portion G10d of the operation window G10. The four boss portions G100c of the lid G100 overlap each other, and each screw hole G10c is positioned in front of each boss portion G100c. In this state, the closing lid G100 is attached to the cabinet G (rear wall G3) by screwing the screw inserted through the screw hole G10c from the front side (inside the cabinet G) into the hole formed in the boss G100c. be done. As a result, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is closed by the closing lid G100. Since the screws for fastening the closing lid G100 to the rear wall G3 are screwed from the inside of the cabinet G (so that the screw head is positioned inside the cabinet G), the inside of the cabinet G is secured. can be ensured.

When adjusting the positions and attitudes of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3, the screws fastening the closing lid G100 and the rear wall G3 are removed with the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD opened. The fastening of the screw can be released by operating from the front side and turning appropriately. As a result, the closing lid G100 can be removed from the rear wall G3, and the operation window G10 (opening G10a) closed by the closing lid G100 can be exposed. In this state, the attachment is inserted from the outside (rear side) of the cabinet G into the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 and the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220 through the opening G10a. By operating the screw T and the screw inserted through the angle adjustment hole B111 of the projector cover B1 (reflector holder B11), the positions and postures of the projector device B2 and the mirror mechanism B3 can be adjusted.

Here, in the closing lid G100, the length from the front surface G100b to the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d (the forward protrusion length of the peripheral edge portion G100d when the front surface G100b is used as a reference) and the tip of the boss portion G100c from the front surface G100b is equal to the length (height of the boss G100c). Therefore, when the closing lid G100 is arranged so that the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 abuts the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10, the tip of the boss portion G100c of the closing lid G100 also serves as an operating window. It comes into contact with the peripheral edge portion G10b of the window G10.

FIG. 129 shows how the closing lid G100 is arranged in such a state. In FIG. 129, the shaded portion indicates the closing lid G100 (the front surface G100b), and the shaded portion indicates the rear wall G3 (periphery of the opening G10a). A space S is formed between the hatched portion (the front surface G100b of the closing lid G100) and the hatched portion (periphery of the opening G10a), and the width of the space S (the length in the front-rear direction) This corresponds to the "forward projection length of the peripheral edge portion G100d" and the "height of the boss portion G100c".

By adopting such a configuration, the closing lid G100 can be stably attached to the rear wall G3, and the closing lid G100 (the front end of the peripheral edge portion G100d) and the rear wall G3 (the operation window G10) can be separated from each other. It is possible to avoid the formation of a gap with the peripheral edge portion G10b) of, and prevent fraudulent activity through the gap.

In addition, the peripheral edge portion G10b of the operation window G10 is formed to have a step with respect to the outer surface of the rear wall G3 by the length of the connection portion G10d in the front-rear direction. The length of the portion G100d in the front-rear direction (the forward projection length of the peripheral portion G100d with respect to the back surface G100a) substantially matches the length in the front-rear direction of the connecting portion G10d of the operation window G10 (the operation window It is slightly shorter than the length in the front-rear direction of the connecting portion G10d of G10). The longitudinal length of the peripheral edge portion G100d of the closing lid G100 and the longitudinal length of the connection portion G10d of the operation window G10 are constant over the entire circumference. As a result, when the closing lid G100 is attached to the rear wall G3, the rear surface G100a of the closing lid G100 forms substantially the same plane as the outer surface of the rear wall G3 (slightly lower than the outer surface of the rear wall G3). ), making it difficult to recognize the existence of the closing lid G100 from the outside.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a gaming machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

However, conventionally, in a gaming machine equipped with such a projector, once the projector is fixed inside the gaming machine, it has been difficult to make fine adjustments to the projector thereafter.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the projector can be adjusted while the projector is installed inside.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment has the following features.

(10-1) screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057);
a projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
Adjustment units for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connection portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism B3 attachment part to the reflector holding part B11, etc.),
an accommodation unit (cabinet G) that accommodates the projector,
The accommodation portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjusting portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) capable of closing the opening is attached. there is
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the housing section (cabinet G) housing the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) includes the projector (internal components of the projector device B2). (lens unit B21, etc.)) for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the controller (connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and connecting the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1 An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at a position where the attachment portion, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside, and the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10 ) is attached (a closing lid G100). Therefore, the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) blocked by the closing member (the closing lid G100) can be made to appear by removing the closing member (the closing lid G100) from the storage section (cabinet G). through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) from the outside of the housing portion (cabinet G), the adjusting portion (connecting portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221 , the attachment portion of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.). As a result, even after the projector (the internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is fixed inside the housing section (cabinet G), the projector (the internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.) etc.)) is attached inside the housing portion (cabinet G), the adjustment portion (connecting portions R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the upper side By operating the mounting portion of the base B220 to the projector cover B1, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.), the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) projects It is possible to adjust the traveling direction of the light.

(10-2) screens (screen sheet 1046, screen sheet 1056, and screen sheet 1057);
a projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
Adjustment units for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (connection portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, attachment portion of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, mirror mechanism B3 attachment part to the reflector holding part B11, etc.),
a main body (cabinet G) housing the projector and having an opening on the front;
an opening and closing door (upper door mechanism UD) attached to the main body so as to be openable and closable and provided with a display area for making an image displayed on the screen visible;
Separately from the front surface, the main body portion is provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) at a position where the adjustment portion can be operated from the outside, and a closing member (closing lid G100) is attached,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the main body (cabinet G) housing the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) includes the projector (internal components of the projector device B2). (lens unit B21, etc.)) for adjusting the traveling direction of the light projected by the controller (connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and connecting the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1 An opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided at a position where the attachment portion, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside, and the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10 ) is attached (a closing lid G100). Therefore, by removing the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) can be revealed. through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). , the attachment portion of the upper base B220 to the projector cover B1, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.). As a result, even after the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) is fixed inside the main body (cabinet G), the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.) etc.)) is attached inside the main body (cabinet G), the adjusting parts (connecting parts R1, R2, R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the upper By operating the mounting portion of the base B220 to the projector cover B1, the mounting portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.), the projector (internal components of the projector device B2 (lens unit B21, etc.)) projects It is possible to adjust the traveling direction of the light.

(10-3) The gaming machine of (10-2),
The closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body by screwing from the inside of the main body.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the sixth embodiment, the closing member (closing lid G100) is attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). Therefore, in order to remove the closing member (closing lid G100) from the main body (cabinet G), it is necessary to unscrew it from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). As a result, it is possible to prevent the closing member (closing lid G100) from being removed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). It is possible to prevent fraudulent actions from outside the main body (cabinet G).

In the present invention, the method of attaching the closing member (closure lid G100) to the main body (cabinet G) is not particularly limited, and the closing member (closure lid G100) is attached from the inside of the main body (cabinet G). It may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing, or may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by screwing from the outside of the main body (cabinet G). Also, the closing member (closing lid G100) may be attached to the main body (cabinet G) by a method other than screwing. For example, a guide member for allowing the closing member (closing lid G100) to slide along the wall surface (inner or outer side surface of the rear wall G3) of the main body (cabinet G) may be provided in the cabinet G ( A rail may be formed inside or outside the rear wall G3), and the closing member (closing lid G100) may be locked on the guide member. A closed state in which the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is closed by the closing member (closing lid G100) sliding on the guide member in the left-right direction (or in the front-rear direction) and the opening (operation window If the opening G10a) of G10 is configured to be switched between the open state and the open state, it is possible to operate the adjustment unit from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) in the open state, similar to the sixth embodiment. Additionally, the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector can be adjusted. In view of such effects, in the present invention, the structure of the closing member (closure lid G100) is not essential, and the body portion (cabinet G) is not attached with the closing member (closure lid G100). The opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) provided in the (cabinet G) may be configured to be open at all times.

In the sixth embodiment, the opening G10a of the operation window G10 is formed in the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G, and the closing lid G10 is attached. In the present invention, an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided in any wall surface (for example, the back wall G3, the side wall G2, the top wall G4, etc.) constituting the main body (cabinet G), and the opening is closed. It is possible to configure so as to attach a member (closing lid G100). For example, instead of the back wall G3 of the cabinet G, the side wall G2 or the top wall G4 may be provided with an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) and attached with a closing member (closure lid G100). In such a configuration, adjustment parts (for example, connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1, the reflector of the mirror mechanism B3, attachment portion to the holding portion B11, etc.) may be arranged in the vicinity of the side wall G2 or the top wall G4. Note that when an opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) is provided in the upper wall G4 and a closing member (closure cover G100) is attached, the opening G41 and the plate member G42 (see FIG. 36) are respectively attached to the operation window G10. Alternatively, a configuration corresponding to the opening G10a of the operation window G10 and the closing lid G10 may be adopted separately without forming the opening G41 and the plate member G42. You can do it.

In addition, openings (openings G10a of the operation window G10) are provided in a plurality of wall surfaces (for example, two or three wall surfaces among the rear wall G3, the side wall G2, and the top wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G). may be provided, and a closing member (closure lid G100) may be attached. For example, adjustment parts for adjusting the position (orientation) of the projector device B2 (for example, connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1 etc.), an opening G10a of an operation window G10 is provided on the back wall G3 of the cabinet G and a closing lid G10 is attached, while adjusting the position (orientation) of the mirror mechanism B3. An opening G10a of an operation window G10 is provided in the top wall G4 of the cabinet G, and a closing lid G10 is attached so that the portion (for example, the attachment portion of the mirror mechanism B3 to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside. You can do it.

In addition, a plurality of openings (opening G10a of the operation window G10) are provided in one wall surface (for example, the back wall G3, the side wall G2, or the top wall G4) of the main body (cabinet G), and each opening is A closing member (closing lid G100) that can be closed may be attached. For example, adjustment parts for adjusting the position (orientation) of the projector device B2 (for example, connecting parts R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, and the attachment part of the upper pedestal B220 to the projector cover B1 etc.), a first opening is provided near the center of the rear wall G3 of the cabinet G and a first closing lid capable of closing the first opening is attached so that the mirror mechanism B3 can be operated from the outside. A second opening is provided above the first opening so that an adjusting portion for adjusting the position (orientation) (for example, the portion where the mirror mechanism B3 is attached to the reflector holding portion B11, etc.) can be operated from the outside. A second closing lid capable of closing the second opening may be attached. When a plurality of openings are provided, the same number of closing members as the number of openings that can individually close each opening may be attached, or only one closing member capable of simultaneously closing a plurality of openings may be attached.

When performing such adjustment from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) from the outside of the main body (cabinet G) is opened from the front in order to facilitate the adjustment operation. When viewed, members to be adjusted (for example, the nuts 2213 at the connecting portions R1, R2, and R3 between the upper pedestal B220 and the lower pedestal B221, the mounting screw T inserted into the square hole 2201c of the upper pedestal B220, It is desirable that the member is arranged so that the screw or the like inserted through the angle adjustment hole B111 of the reflector holding portion B11 can be visually recognized through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) (FIG. 125). reference). When a plurality of members to be adjusted are provided, when the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), all of these members are visible. (For example, the entire upper pedestal B220 is visible). When a plurality of members to be adjusted are provided, for example, the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is made to have a diameter larger than the distance between these members (the distance between the farthest members). should be This facilitates making adjustments to these members. However, when the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the member to be adjusted can be visually recognized through the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10). It is not necessary to become For example, when the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) is viewed from the outside of the main body (cabinet G), the angle adjustment hole B111 of the member to be adjusted (for example, the projector cover B1 (reflector holding portion B11)) Even if the screw inserted through the cabinet) cannot be seen, if the member can be visually recognized when looking into the inside of the main body (cabinet G) from a different angle (see FIG. 126), If a space is formed between the member and the opening (the opening G10a of the operation window G10) in which no other member exists, the member can be operated from the outside. In the present invention, the member to be adjusted (adjustment screw, nut, etc.) and the opening (opening G10a of the operation window G10) may be configured to have such a positional relationship.

In the above-described embodiment, the interior of the cabinet G is partitioned into an upper space and a lower space by the intermediate support plate G1, and the upper space (the space behind the upper door mechanism UD) is the display unit A (illumination Unit B) is accommodated, while the control board (main control board MS, sub-control device SS, etc.) is accommodated in the lower space (the space on the rear side of the lower door mechanism DD) (see FIG. 40). ). However, in the present invention, the interior of the main body (cabinet G) does not need to be divided into an upper space and a lower space. There is no need to distinguish the space in which the controller SS, etc.) is accommodated. For example, the control board (main control board MS or sub-controller SS) may be placed in the space (see FIG. 123) behind the reflector holding portion B11 (mirror mechanism B3) of the projector cover B1. As a result, the space in the main body (cabinet G) can be effectively used, and the phenomenon that the heat generated from the control board (main control board MS or sub-controller SS) stays in the lower space can be alleviated. . The opening/closing door in the present invention may be composed of a plurality of doors (the upper door mechanism UD and the lower door mechanism DD), or may be composed of one door.

[Seventh Embodiment]
The first to sixth embodiments have been described above. The seventh embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the parts that the descriptions of the first to sixth embodiments are applicable to the seventh embodiment will be omitted.

It should be noted that, in the above description, for example, "in the first embodiment, ~" or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ~", it seems to be limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Even if it is a simple description, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment within the scope of the seventh embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, regarding the description limited to the pachi-slot machines 1 according to the second to sixth embodiments, the pachi-slot machines according to the seventh embodiment are not deviated from the spirit of the seventh embodiment. It can also be applied to machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to sixth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the seventh embodiment. can be used or combined.

Further, even if the shape is different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be given to the structures having the same functions for the sake of convenience. Further, even if the shape and processing are the same as those of the pachi-slot machines 1 according to the first to sixth embodiments, different symbols and step numbers may be given for convenience.

<Light irradiation range and screen placement position>
In this embodiment, similarly to the fifth embodiment, the light projected from the projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by the mirror 9030 (see FIG. 99). All the light projected from the projector 9020 reaches the upper door mechanism UD.

The upper door mechanism UD is provided with a central screen 3010 (see FIGS. 132 and 133). The light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the central screen 3010 from the rear (rear side), and an image is displayed on the front side (display surface) of the central screen 3010 . Details will be described below.

<Upper door mechanism UD>
FIG. 130 is a front perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 131 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism. FIG. 132 is a front perspective view of the state in which the central screen unit and the front top unit are removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 133 is a rear perspective view of the state in which the central screen unit and the front top unit are removed from the upper door mechanism.

As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, a central screen unit 3000 is provided in the upper door mechanism UD. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the center screen unit 3000 includes a center screen 3010 and a rear translucent plate 3050. As shown in FIGS.

The central screen 3010 is a transmissive screen displayed by projecting a projection image from behind, and the screens in the fourth embodiment (the cabinet-side screen 9040, the door-side right screen 9050, and the door-side left screen 9060 ), the projector 9020 has a rear-side entrance surface on which light projected from the projector 9020 is incident, and a front-side display surface on which a projection image is projected by transmitting the light incident on the entrance surface. The central screen 3010 is made of, for example, a translucent glass plate, an acrylic plate, or a resin film as a main material, and is formed so as to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. exhibit color. The central screen 3010 is formed by three-dimensional molding so as to be rigid (not flexible).

The central screen 3010 is formed continuously from the flat portion 3011 located in the center and both the left and right side edges of the flat portion 3011 toward the rear, like the screen sheet 1046 (see FIG. 102) in the fourth embodiment. and a curved portion 3012 . The flat portion 3011 is formed in a flat shape, and the curved portion 3012 has a flat plate curved shape like the door-side right screen 9050 and the door-side left screen 9060 (see FIG. 94) in the fourth embodiment. ing.

The rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is mainly made of transparent polycarbonate, and is formed to have a uniform thickness over the entire surface. Like the light-transmitting plate 1045 (see FIG. 102) in the fourth embodiment, the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 has a flat portion 3051 located in the center and continues rearward from both the left and right side edges of the flat portion 3051. and a curved portion 3052 formed as follows. The planar portion 3051 is formed in a planar shape, and the curved portion 3052 has a shape in which a flat plate is curved.

The central screen 3010 is arranged on the frontmost surface (outermost surface) of the upper door mechanism UD (pachi-slot machine 1). As a result, there is no other member between the central screen 3010 and the player. The rear translucent plate 3050 is arranged on the back side of the central screen 3010 and reinforces the central screen 3010 from the back side (cabinet G side). The material of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is not particularly limited as long as it can reinforce the central screen 3010. In addition to polycarbonate, an acrylic plate, a resin such as ABS, a glass plate, or the like is appropriately used. be able to.

Since the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 has translucency, the light projected from the projector 9020 passes through the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 and enters the incident surface (surface on the rear side) of the central screen 3010. do. As a result, an image (still image or moving image) relating to the game is displayed on the display surface (front surface) of the center screen 3010 . Since there is no structure in front of the central screen 3010 that blocks the view of the player, when an image is displayed on the central screen 3010, the image is visible to the player.

A left side decorative unit 3100L and a right side decorative unit 3100R are provided on the left side and right side of the upper door mechanism UD, respectively, and a front top unit 3200 is provided on the upper side of the upper door mechanism UD. It is Each configuration will be described in more detail below.

<Arrangement Relationship Between Center Screen 3010 and Side Decorative Portion 3110>
FIG. 134 is a front perspective view of the central screen. FIG. 135 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the uneven portion on the right side of the central screen. FIG. 136 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the vicinity of the right side decoration unit in the upper door mechanism. 137 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the side decorative portion is removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 136; FIG. FIG. 138 is a front perspective view of the right side decorative portion. FIG. 139 is a rear perspective view of the right side decorative portion. FIG. 140 is a cross-sectional view of the right side decoration. FIG. 141 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and right side ornament.

As shown in FIG. 134, in the rear portion (right portion) of the curved portion 3012 (right curved portion 3012R) of the central screen 3010, right side uneven portions 3020R (upper right side uneven portion 3021R, right middle side uneven portion 3022R, Also, a lower right side uneven portion 3023R) is formed. In addition, in the rear portion (left portion) of the curved portion 3012 (left curved portion 3012L) of the central screen 3010, left side uneven portions 3020L (upper left side uneven portion 3021L, left middle side uneven portion 3022L, and left lower side uneven portion) are provided. A portion 3023L) is formed.

The center screen 3010 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure, and the right side uneven portion 3020R and the left side uneven portion 3020L are also bilaterally symmetrical. Therefore, hereinafter, the right side uneven portion 3020R (upper right side uneven portion 3021R, right middle side uneven portion 3022R, and lower right side uneven portion 3023R) and the left side uneven portion 3020L (upper left side uneven portion 3021L, left middle side uneven portion) are described. 3022L and lower left side uneven portion 3023L), and may be referred to as side uneven portion 3020 (upper side uneven portion 3021, middle side uneven portion 3022, and lower side uneven portion 3023).

As shown in FIG. 135, the upper side concave-convex portion 3021 has a concave portion 3021a that is concave with respect to the surrounding surface, and a protrusion 3021b that protrudes from the concave portion 3021a. The protrusion 3021b is formed so as to be surrounded by the recess 3021a. Similarly, the middle side uneven portion 3022 has a recessed portion 3022a that is recessed with respect to the surrounding surface and a protrusion 3022b that protrudes from the recessed portion 3022a. The protrusion 3022b is formed so as to be surrounded by the recess 3022a. The lower side uneven portion 3023 has a recessed portion 3023a that is recessed from the surrounding surface and a projection 3023b that protrudes from the recessed portion 3023a. The protrusion 3023b is formed so as to be surrounded by the recess 3023a. For clarity, FIG. 135 shows the recesses 3021a, 3022a, and 3023a in black.

The center screen 3010 also has a rear side portion 3013 formed continuously from the rear end of the curved portion 3012 toward the rear. The rear side portion 3013 is formed substantially flat. For clarity, the rear side 3013 is hatched in FIG. 135 .

As shown in FIGS. 136 and 137, on the right side of the right curved portion 3012R of the central screen 3010, a right side decorative portion 3110R is arranged along the right curved portion 3012R. Similarly, on the left side of the left curved portion 3012L of the central screen 3010, a left side decorative portion 3110L is arranged along the left curved portion 3012L. The right side decorative portion 3110R and the left side decorative portion 3110L are constituent elements of the right side decorative unit 3100R and the left side decorative unit 3100L (see FIG. 130), respectively. The right side decorative portion 3110R and the left side decorative portion 3110L have bilaterally symmetrical structures. In this specification, the right side decorative portion 3110R and the left side decorative portion 3110L may be referred to as the side decorative portion 3110 without distinction.

As shown in FIGS. 138 and 139, the side decorative portion 3110 has an outer portion 3111 and an inner portion 3112 . The outer portion 3111 and the inner portion 3112 are each formed in a flat plate shape and arranged substantially parallel to each other. In addition, the side decorative portion 3110 includes swelling portions 3113 (an upper swelling portion 3114, a middle swelling portion 3115, and a lower swelling portion 3113) swelling from the front portion of the inner portion 3112 toward the side opposite to the outer portion 3111. 3116).

FIG. 140 shows a state in which the side decorative portion 3110 is cut along a horizontal plane passing through the middle bulging portion 3115 . As shown in FIG. 140, the middle bulging portion 3115 has a front side portion 3115a arranged on the front side and a bent portion 3115b formed by bending from the side edge of the front side portion 3115a. As a result, a triangular space 3115c surrounded by the inner portion 3112, the front side portion 3115a, and the bent portion 3115b (extended portion) is formed.

FIG. 141 shows a state in which the central screen 3010 and the side decorative portion 3110 are cut along a horizontal plane passing through the middle bulging portion 3115 . For the sake of clarity, FIG. 141 shows the central screen 3010 and the side decorative portion 3110 with the upper door mechanism UD assembled, while maintaining their relative positional relationship and omitting other components. ing. In addition, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 is indicated by oblique lines, and the cut surface of the side decorative portion 3110 is indicated by black.

As shown in FIG. 141, the inner portion 3112 of the side decorative portion 3110 abuts the rear side portion 3013 of the central screen 3010, and the bent portion 3115b of the side decorative portion 3110 contacts the concave portion 3022a of the middle side uneven portion 3022 of the central screen 3010. abutting. As a result, the projections 3022b of the middle side concave-convex portion 3022 of the central screen 3010 are inserted into the spaces 3115c of the side decorative portion 3110. As shown in FIG.

Similarly, although detailed illustration is omitted, the vicinity of the upper bulging portion 3114 of the side decorative portion 3110 has a structure corresponding to the upper side concave and convex portion 3021 of the central screen 3010. The vicinity of the projecting portion 3116 has a structure corresponding to the lower side uneven portion 3023 of the central screen 3010 . As a result, the protrusions 3021b of the upper uneven portion 3021 of the central screen 3010 are inserted into the space formed by the inner portion 3112 and the upper bulging portion 3114 of the side decorative portion 3110 . Also, the protrusions 3023b of the lower side uneven portion 3023 of the central screen 3010 are inserted into the space formed by the inner portion 3112 and the lower bulging portion 3116 of the side decorative portion 3110 .

As described above, the side decorative portion 3110 is arranged along the curved portion 3012 and the rear side portion 3013 of the central screen 3010 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD. As a result, the side decorative portion 3110 is in a state of covering the rear portion of the central screen 3010 . Here, in this embodiment, a predetermined motif image (an image showing the motif of the pachi-slot machine 1) is displayed on the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010. FIG. The motif image is an image (pillar image) corresponding to the pillar, and the size of the pillar image corresponds to the size of the curved portion 3012 . Due to the shape of the curved portion 3012, the columnar image presents a three-dimensional appearance. As a result, it is possible to make it appear to the player that a pillar having a size and curvature equivalent to the size and curvature of the curved portion 3012 actually exists, and the side decorative portion 3110 rides on the pillar. You can make it look like you are. In addition, it is possible to give the player the impression that the decoration of the side decorative portion 3110 (bulging portion 3113, etc.) is directly applied to the pillar. Since there is no other member between the player and the central screen 3010, the player can directly touch the pillar. Furthermore, the image displayed on the rear side of the central screen 3010 may appear distorted to the player, and the side decorative portion 3110 covers this portion, so that the distorted image can be hidden. It is possible, and it is also possible to prevent deterioration of the appearance of the image.

<Side decoration unit 3100>
FIG. 142 is a front view of the upper door mechanism; 143 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142 taken along line AA. FIG. 144 is a perspective view of the side LED board and light guide; FIG. 145 is an exploded perspective view of the side LED board and light guide. FIG. 146 is a perspective view of the side LEDs and light guide; FIG. 147 is a perspective view of a light guide and sidelight lens; FIG. 148 is a rear perspective view of the sidelight lens. FIG. 149 is a cross-sectional view of a sidelight lens. FIG. 150 is a cross-sectional view of a sidelight lens. FIG. 151 is a perspective view of the rear translucent plate, light guide, and side light lens. FIG. 152 is a perspective view of a side decoration; FIG. 153 is a perspective view of a side ornament and a sidelight lens; FIG. 154 is a perspective view of the central screen, the rear translucent plate, and the side shading plates. 155 is a perspective view showing a state in which the side light shielding plate is removed from the state shown in FIG. 154. FIG. 156 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 142 taken along line AA. FIG. 157 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism. 158 is a perspective view showing a state in which the side LED board cover is removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 157; FIG.

As shown in FIG. 142, the right side portion of the center screen 3010 is provided with a right side decoration unit 3100R, and the left side portion of the center screen 3010 is provided with a left side decoration unit 3100L. The right side decorative unit 3100R and the left side decorative unit 3100L have bilaterally symmetrical structures. In this specification, the right side decoration unit 3100R and the left side decoration unit 3100L are sometimes referred to as the side decoration unit 3100 without distinction.

As shown in FIG. 143, the side decoration unit 3100 includes a side decoration part 3110, a side LED board 3120, a light guide 3130, and a side light lens 3140. 143, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 and the cut surface of the rear translucent plate 3050 are shaded, and the cut surface of the side decorative portion 3110 and the cut surface of the side LED substrate 3120 are shown in black. , the cross-section of the light guide 3130 and the cross-section of the side light lens 3140 are hatched.

FIG. 144 shows the side LED board 3120 and the light guide 3130 with the upper door mechanism UD assembled while maintaining their relative positional relationship and omitting other components. As shown in FIGS. 144 and 145 , a plurality of side LEDs 3122 are provided on the surface 3121 of the side LED substrate 3120 . Specifically, two side LEDs 3122a, 3122b, 3122c, 3122d, 3122e, 3122f, and 3122g are provided. The side LED 3122 is installed so as to emit light in the direction normal to the substrate surface (roughly rightward). Also, the side LEDs 3122 are full-color LEDs and can emit multiple colors including red, blue, and green.

The light guide 3130 includes a first light guide portion 3131, a second light guide portion 3132, a third light guide portion 3133, a fourth light guide portion 3134, a fifth light guide portion 3135, a sixth light guide portion 3136, and a third light guide portion 3136. 7 light guiding portions 3137 are provided and have a structure in which these are connected in sequence. Also, the light guide 3130 is made of a material (eg, a transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate) having a high light transmittance (eg, 75% to 95%, preferably about 80% to 90%).

The first light guide section 3131 has a base section 3131a, and an upper branch section 3131b and a lower branch section 3131c branched from the rear end of the base section 3131a. Similarly, the second light guide section 3132 has a base section 3132a and an upper branch section 3132b and a lower branch section 3132c branched from the rear end of the base section 3132a. The third light guide section 3133 has a base section 3133a, and an upper branch section 3133b and a lower branch section 3133c branched from the rear end of the base section 3133a. The fourth light guide section 3134 has a base section 3134a, and an upper branch section 3134b and a lower branch section 3134c branched from the base section 3134a. The fifth light guide section 3135 has a base section 3135a, and an upper branch section 3135b and a lower branch section 3135c branched from the base section 3135a. The sixth light guide section 3136 has a base section 3136a, and an upper branch section 3136b and a lower branch section 3136c branched from the base section 3136a. The seventh light guide section 3137 has a base section 3137a, and an upper branch section 3137b and a lower branch section 3137c branched from the base section 3137a.

As shown in FIG. 144, the upper branch portion 3131b and the lower branch portion 3131c of the first light guide portion 3131 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122a. Similarly, the upper branch portion 3132b and the lower branch portion 3132c in the second light guide portion 3132 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122b. The upper branch portion 3133b and the lower branch portion 3133c of the third light guide portion 3133 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122c. The upper branch portion 3134b and the lower branch portion 3134c of the fourth light guide portion 3134 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122d. The upper branch portion 3135b and the lower branch portion 3135c of the fifth light guide portion 3135 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122e. The upper branch portion 3136b and the lower branch portion 3136c of the sixth light guide portion 3136 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122f. The upper branch portion 3137b and the lower branch portion 3137c of the seventh light guide portion 3137 are arranged so as to be close to the two side LEDs 3122g.

Thereby, the light emitted from the side LED 3122a enters the upper branch portion 3131b and the lower branch portion 3131c. As shown in FIG. 146, the upper branch portion 3131b and the lower branch portion 3131c are bent with respect to the base portion 3131a. As a result, the light incident on the upper branch portion 3131b and the lower branch portion 3131c changes its traveling direction forward inside the first light guide portion 3131 and reaches the front surface 3131d of the base portion 3131a. Similarly, the light emitted from the side LED 3122b reaches the front surface 3132d of the base portion 3132a of the second light guide portion 3132 . The light emitted from the side LED 3122 c reaches the front surface 3133 d of the base portion 3133 a in the third light guide portion 3133 . Light emitted from the side LED 3122 d reaches the front surface 3134 d of the base portion 3134 a in the fourth light guide portion 3134 . Light emitted from the side LED 3122 e reaches the front surface 3135 d of the base portion 3135 a of the fifth light guide portion 3135 . Light emitted from the side LED 3122 f reaches the front surface 3136 d of the base portion 3136 a in the sixth light guide portion 3136 . The light emitted from the side LED 3122 g reaches the front surface 3137 d of the base portion 3137 a in the seventh light guide portion 3137 .

For the sake of clarity, FIG. 146 shows the side LEDs 3122a to 3122g and the light guide 3130 with the upper door mechanism UD assembled while maintaining their relative positional relationship and omitting other components. ing. Also, the front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the base portions 3131a to 3137a are indicated by oblique lines. The front surfaces 3131d to 3137d are formed as substantially flat surfaces in the vertical direction, and the normal direction thereof is the front direction.

FIG. 147 shows the light guide 3130 and the sidelight lens 3140 with the upper door mechanism UD assembled while maintaining their relative positional relationship and omitting other components. As shown in FIGS. 147 and 148, the sidelight lens 3140 includes a first light guide portion 3141, a second light guide portion 3142, a third light guide portion 3143, a fourth light guide portion 3144, and a fifth light guide portion 3145. , a sixth light guide portion 3146, and a seventh light guide portion 3147, which are connected in sequence. The sidelight lens 3140 is made of a translucent material.

FIG. 149 shows how the side light lens 3140 is cut along a horizontal plane passing through the first light guide section 3141 . FIG. 150 shows how the sidelight lens 3140 is cut along a horizontal plane passing through the second light guide section 3142 .

As shown in FIG. 149, the first light guide part 3141 includes a rear protrusion 3141a that is formed in a plate shape and protrudes rearward, and a forward protrusion that is continuous from the rear protrusion 3141a and protrudes forward. and a portion 3141b. Similarly, the fourth light guide part 3144 includes a rear protrusion 3144a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, a front protrusion 3144b continuously protruding forward from the rear protrusion 3144a, have. The seventh light guide part 3147 has a rear protrusion 3147a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, and a forward protrusion 3147b continuously protruding forward from the rear protrusion 3147a. ing.

As shown in FIG. 150, the second light guide part 3142 has a plate-like rear protrusion 3142a that protrudes rearward, and a branch structure formed continuously from the rear protrusion 3142a. It has a right forward protrusion 3142b and a left forward protrusion 3142c that protrude. Similarly, the third light guide part 3143 includes a rear protrusion 3143a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, and a right front protrusion 3143a protruding forward through a branch structure continuously formed from the rear protrusion 3143a. It has a projecting portion 3143b and a left forward projecting portion 3143c. The fifth light guide part 3145 includes a rear protrusion 3145a formed in a plate shape and protruding rearward, and a right forward protrusion 3145b protruding forward through a branch structure continuously formed from the rear protrusion 3145a. and a left forward projecting portion 3145c. The sixth light guide part 3146 includes a rear protrusion 3146a formed in a plate shape and protruding backward, and a right forward protrusion 3146b protruding forward through a branch structure continuously formed from the rear protrusion 3146a. and a left forward projecting portion 3146c.

In FIG. 148, the rear end surfaces 3141d to 3147d of the rear projections 3141a to 3147a in the first light guide portion 3141 to the seventh light guide portion 3147 are indicated by oblique lines. As shown in FIG. 147, the rear end surfaces 3141d to 3147d of the first light guide portion 3141 to the seventh light guide portion 3147 of the sidelight lens 3140 correspond to the first light guide portion 3131 to the seventh light guide portion of the light guide 3130, respectively. It is arranged so as to face the front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the portion 3137 .

In FIG. 151, the rear light-transmitting plate 3050, the light guide 3130, and the side light lens 3140 in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, while maintaining their relative positional relationship, other components are shown removed. As shown in FIG. 151, between the light guide 3130 and the sidelight lens 3140, the rear side portion 3053 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is arranged (see FIG. 143). The front surfaces 3131 d to 3137 d of the first light guide portion 3131 to the seventh light guide portion 3137 of the light guide 3130 are substantially in contact with the rear side surface of the rear side portion 3053 of the rear light transmitting plate 3050 . Rear end surfaces 3141 d to 3147 d of the first light guide portion 3141 to the seventh light guide portion 3147 of the sidelight lens 3140 are substantially in contact with the front side surface of the rear side portion 3053 of the rear light transmitting plate 3050 .

Here, the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is made of a material (for example, a transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate) having a high light transmittance (for example, 75% to 95%, preferably about 80% to 90%). ing. Therefore, the lights emitted from the side LEDs 3122 to 3122g and reaching the front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the light guide 3130 enter the rear end surfaces 3141d to 3147d of the side light lens 3140. FIG. A rear portion 3053 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is formed into a plate shape by bending the rear end of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 .

The light incident on the rear end surface 3141d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the first light guide portion 3141 and reaches the forward projecting portion 3141b. Similarly, the light incident on the rear end surface 3144d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the fourth light guide portion 3144 and reaches the forward projecting portion 3144b. The light incident on the rear end surface 3147d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the seventh light guide portion 3147 and reaches the forward projecting portion 3147b.

Also, the light incident on the rear end surface 3142d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the second light guide portion 3142 and reaches the right forward protrusion 3142b and the left forward protrusion 3142c. Similarly, the light incident on the rear end surface 3143d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the third light guide portion 3143 and reaches the right forward protrusion 3143b and the left forward protrusion 3143c. The light incident on the rear end surface 3145d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the fifth light guide portion 3145 and reaches the right forward protrusion 3145b and the left forward protrusion 3145c. The light incident on the rear end surface 3146d of the sidelight lens 3140 travels inside the sixth light guide portion 3146 and reaches the right forward protrusion 3146b and the left forward protrusion 3146c.

As shown in FIG. 152, the side decorative portion 3110 includes light emission openings 3117 (first light emission opening 3117a, second light emission opening 3117b, third light emission opening 3117c, third light emission opening 3117c, third light emission opening 3117c, and light emission openings 3117) penetrating in the front-rear direction. Four light exit openings 3117d, a fifth light exit opening 3117e, a sixth light exit opening 3117f, and a seventh light exit opening 3117g) are formed. One opening is provided for each of the first light emission opening 3117a, the fourth light emission opening 3117d, and the seventh light emission opening 3117g. Two openings are provided for each of the emission opening 3117c, the fifth light emission opening 3117e, and the sixth light emission opening 3117f.

For the sake of clarity, the light exit openings 3117a to 3117g are hatched in FIG. The side decorative portion 3110 has a structure that protrudes forward from the peripheral edge of the first light emission opening 3117a, the peripheral edge of the fourth light emission opening 3117d, and the peripheral edge of the seventh light emission opening 3117g. , these protruding structures are formed so as to be continuous with the upper bulging portion 3114, the middle bulging portion 3115, and the lower bulging portion 3116, respectively.

The shapes of the first light emission aperture 3117a, the fourth light emission aperture 3117d, and the seventh light emission aperture 3117g are the forward protrusion 3141b, the forward protrusion 3144b, and the forward protrusion of the sidelight lens 3140, respectively. It corresponds to the shape of the portion 3147b. In addition, the two second light emission openings 3117b, the two third light emission openings 3117c, the two fifth light emission openings 3117e, and the two sixth light emission openings 3117f have the shape of the right side. Shapes of the forward projecting portion 3142b and the left forward projecting portion 3142c, the right forward projecting portion 3143b and the left forward projecting portion 3143c, the right forward projecting portion 3145b and the left forward projecting portion 3145c, and the right forward projecting portion 3146b and the left forward projecting portion 3146c corresponds to

The sidelight lens 3140 is arranged between the outer portion 3111 and the inner portion 3112 (see FIG. 139) of the side decorative portion 3110 . As shown in FIG. 153, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the front projection 3141b, the right front projection 3142b, the left front projection 3142c, the right front projection 3143b, and the left front projection of the sidelight lens 3140 3143c, the forward protrusion 3144b, the right front protrusion 3145b and the left front protrusion 3145c, the right front protrusion 3146b and the left front protrusion 3146c, and the front protrusion 3147b are light emission openings of the side decorative portion 3110, respectively. 3117a to 3117g, and these protrusions close the light exit openings 3117a to 3117g. As described above, the light emitted from the side LEDs 3122a to 3122g is emitted from the side light lens 3140 to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the light emission openings 3117a to 3117g. The front end surfaces of these protrusions are textured, so that the light exit openings 3117a to 3117g are illuminated evenly.

As shown in FIG. 154, a side light blocking plate 3150 is arranged between the rear side portion 3013 of the central screen 3010 and the rear side portion 3053 of the rear translucent plate 3050 when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled. is set. As shown in FIG. 155, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the rear end of the central screen 3010 is positioned forward of the rear end of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050, and the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is exposed without being covered by the central screen 3010 . For clarity, FIG. 155 shows the exposed portion (exposed portion 3054) shaded. A side light shielding plate 3150 is arranged to cover the exposed portion 3054 .

The side light-shielding plate 3150 has a light-shielding property and blocks the passage of light. The side light shielding plate 3150 is made of polycarbonate or the like and is colored black. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 156, the cross section of the side light shielding plate 3150 is hatched. By disposing the side light shielding plate 3150 , it is possible to prevent the light projected from the projector 9020 from penetrating through the exposed portion 3054 of the rear light transmitting plate 3050 and entering the side light lens 3140 . It's like

The upper end of the side light-shielding plate 3150 is slightly lower than the upper end of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050, and the upper portion of the exposed portion 3054 is not covered with the side light-shielding plate 3150 and is still exposed. However, the upper end of the sidelight lens 3140 is also lower than the upper end of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 (it is approximately the same height as the side light-shielding plate 3150), and the projector 9020 projects light through the exposed portion. The reflected light does not enter the side light lens 3140.

In FIG. 156, the cut surface of the side LED board cover 3160 is shown in black, and the cut surface of the shielding wall member 3300 is shaded. A side LED board 3120 is installed on the side LED board cover 3160 . As shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the side LED board cover 3160 is arranged to the side of the side LED board 3120 and the light guide 3130, and together with the side decorative portion 3110 and the key receiving member 3320, the upper door mechanism UD (pachislot slot machine). It constitutes the outermost surface of the machine 1). The shielding wall member 3300 will be detailed later.

<Shielding wall member 3300>
FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the shielding wall member. FIG. 160 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the periphery of the left side of the shielding wall member. FIG. 161 is a rear perspective view of the shielding wall member. FIG. 162 is a rear perspective view of the upper door mechanism. 163 is a perspective view showing a state in which the shielding wall member and the speaker harness protector are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 162. FIG. FIG. 164(a) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which light is projected from the projector in this embodiment, viewed from above. FIG. 164(b) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which light is projected from a projector in another embodiment, viewed from above. FIG. 165 is a front view of the shielding wall member. FIG. 166 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the shielding wall member and the light guide;

As shown in FIGS. 159 to 161, the shielding wall member 3300 has a substantially bilaterally symmetrical structure and has a rectangular annular shape with an open center. Specifically, the shielding wall member 3300 includes a lower portion 3302 , a left portion 3303 , a right portion 3304 , and an upper portion 3305 arranged around the light passage opening 3301 .

The lower side 3302 has a lower side 3302a. The lower side surface 3302a constitutes the upper surface of the lower side portion 3302 (the surface facing the light passage opening 3301) and is formed substantially horizontally. Although not shown, the lower surface 3302a is textured to form fine unevenness. Texture processing is processing in which a texture (wrinkle pattern) is formed on the surface, and the processing is performed as light diffusion processing. In this specification, the shape of the unevenness (wrinkle pattern) formed by texturing is not particularly limited. It is possible to appropriately form a pattern or the like in which fine lines are arranged at regular intervals.

As shown in FIG. 160, the left side 3303 has a first left inner wall surface 3303a, a second left inner wall surface 3303b, a third left inner wall surface 3303c, and a fourth left inner wall surface 3303d. A first left inner wall surface 3303a, a second left inner wall surface 3303b, a third left inner wall surface 3303c, and a fourth left inner wall surface 3303d are arranged so that the right surface of the left side portion 3303 (the surface facing the light passage opening 3301) is , and formed in a substantially vertical direction. For the sake of clarity, FIG. 160 shows the left side portion 3303 cut along a horizontal plane.

The first left inner wall surface 3303a is formed continuously from the right end of the front end surface of the left side portion 3303 obliquely rearward. The second left inner wall surface 3303b is continuously formed rearward from the rear end (right end) of the first left inner wall surface 3303a with a steeper inclination than the first left inner wall surface 3303a. The third left inner wall surface 3303c is continuously formed rearward from the rear end of the second left inner wall surface 3303b with a steeper slope than the first left inner wall surface 3303a and a gentler slope than the second left inner wall surface 3303b. It is The fourth left inner wall surface 3303d is continuously formed rearward from the rear end of the third left inner wall surface 3303c with a steeper inclination than the second left inner wall surface 3303b.

The left side portion 3303 has a left rear end portion 3303e formed by slightly bending the rear end to the right. A front surface 3303f of the left rear end portion 3303e is continuously formed rightward from the rear end of the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d. The front surface 3303f and the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d are substantially orthogonal. The length of the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d in the front-rear direction becomes shorter as it goes upward. A front surface 3303f of 3303e is continuous with the third left inner wall surface 3303c.

Similarly, although detailed description is omitted, the right side portion 3304 includes a first right inner wall surface 3304a, a second right inner wall surface 3304b, a third right inner wall surface 3304c, a fourth right inner wall surface 3304d, and a right rear end portion. 3304e. A first right inner wall surface 3304a, a second right inner wall surface 3304b, a third right inner wall surface 3304c, a fourth right inner wall surface 3304d, and a right rear end portion 3304e are formed by a first left inner wall surface 3303a and a second left inner wall surface 3304e, respectively. It is symmetrical with the wall surface 3303b, the third left inner wall surface 3303c, the fourth left inner wall surface 3303d, and the left rear end portion 3303e.

The left rear end portion 3303e and the right rear end portion 3304e are each formed substantially vertically. For clarity, in FIG. 161, the rear surface 3303g of the left rear end 3303e and the rear surface 3304g of the right rear end 3304e are hatched.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163 , the lower part 3302 of the shielding wall member 3300 is arranged above the relay board 3330 and the relay board cover 3331 . As a result, the relay board 3330 and the relay board cover 3331 are substantially completely covered with the lower side portion 3302 (lower side surface 3302a). The longitudinal position of the front edge 3302b of the lower part 3302 of the shielding wall member 3300 substantially coincides with the longitudinal position of the rear edge of the lower part 3055 of the rear translucent plate 3050 . That is, the front edge 3302b of the lower part 3302 substantially coincides with the rear edge of the lower part 3055 in plan view, and the lower parts 3302 and 3055 are arranged without any gap. In addition, the lower part 3055 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is continuously formed rearward from the lower ends of the flat part 3051 and the curved part 3052 and is arranged substantially horizontally.

The right side portion 3304 of the shielding wall member 3300 is arranged on the left side of the right side LED board 3120R and the right key receiving member 3320R. As a result, the right side LED board 3120R and the right key receiving member 3320R are formed into the right side portion 3304 (the first right inner wall surface 3304a, the second right inner wall surface 3304b, the third right inner wall surface 3304c, and the fourth right inner wall surface 3304d). is almost completely covered by

Similarly, although not shown, the left side portion 3303 of the shielding wall member 3300 is arranged on the right side of the left side LED board 3120L and the left side key receiving member 3320L. As a result, the left side LED board 3120L and the left key receiving member 3320L are formed into the left side portion 3303 (first left inner wall surface 3303a, second left inner wall surface 3303b, third left inner wall surface 3303c, and fourth left inner wall surface 3303d). is almost completely covered by

Here, as described above, light projected from projector 9020 (light reflected by mirror 9030) travels forward (the side where central screen 3010 is arranged) (see FIG. 99). In FIG. 164, such a light irradiation range is indicated by oblique lines.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 164( a ), most of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 passes through the light passage opening 3301 of the shielding wall member 3300 and reaches the central screen 3010 . On the other hand, part of the light reflected by the mirror 9030 enters the left side 3303 (the right side of the left rear end 3303e) and the right side 3304 (the left side of the right rear end 3304e) of the shielding wall member 3300. do. Since the shielding wall member 3300 does not transmit light, the light cannot pass through the left side 3303 and the right side 3304, and is reflected by the left side 3303 and the right side 3304. 3010 is not reached.

On the other hand, another embodiment shown in FIG. 164(b) has the same configuration as this embodiment except that the shielding wall member 3300 is not provided. 164(b) is wider than the irradiation range shown in FIG. 164(a). It's becoming Specifically, in FIG. 164(a), the area I and the area II are not in the irradiation range, whereas in FIG. 164(b) the area I and the area II are in the irradiation range. Area I and area II are areas positioned at the periphery of the central screen 3010 in front view.

In region I, a left LED board 3120L and a left key receiving member 3320L are arranged. A right side LED board 3120R and a right key receiving member 3320R are arranged in region II. Therefore, in another embodiment, part of the light projected from the projector 9020 is reflected by the left side LED board 3120L and the left key receiving member 3320L, and the right side LED board 3120R and the right key receiving member 3320R. Circumstances can occur where the reflected light is incident on the central screen 3010 . On the other hand, in this embodiment, since area I and area II are not included in the irradiation range, part of the light projected from projector 9020 is projected onto left side LED substrate 3120L, left key receiving member 3320L, and right side LED substrate 3120L. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the light is reflected by the side LED substrate 3120R and the right key receiving member 3320R (reflected light enters the central screen 3010).

As shown in FIG. 160, the left side portion 3303 has a left front end portion 3303h formed by slightly bending the front end to the left. Similarly, the right side portion 3304 has a right front end portion 3304h formed by bending the front end slightly to the right. As shown in FIG. 165, the left front end portion 3303h and the right front end portion 3304h are provided with light guide openings 3306 (first light guide opening 3306a, second light guide opening 3306b, third light guide opening 3306b) penetrating in the front-rear direction. , a fourth light guide opening 3306d, a fifth light guide opening 3306e, a sixth light guide opening 3306f, and a seventh light guide opening 3306g).

The light guide openings 3306a to 3306g are slightly larger than the base portions 3131a to 3137a of the first light guide portion 3131 to the seventh light guide portion 3137 of the light guide 3130 when viewed from the front. As shown in FIG. 166, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the light guide openings 3306a to 3306g are provided with base portions of the first light guide portion 3131 to the seventh light guide portion 3137 of the light guide 3130, respectively. The front part of 3131a-3137a is inserted. The front surfaces 3131d to 3137d of the base portions 3131a to 3137a are positioned substantially flush with the front surface 3304i (front surface 3303i) of the right front end portion 3304h (left front end portion 3303h). As a result, the light transmitted through the light guide 3130 travels from the light guide 3130 to the side light lens 3140 via the light guide openings 3306a to 3306g.

<Formation of Air Flow Path>
FIG. 167 is a rear perspective view of the shielding wall member. FIG. 168 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top frame base is removed from the upper door mechanism; 169 is a perspective view showing a state in which the upper front and rear frames and the duct seal are removed from the state shown in FIG. 168. FIG. FIG. 170 is a perspective view of the upper front and rear frames as seen from the rear. FIG. 171 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the upper front and rear frames as seen from the front. FIG. 172 is a perspective view of the top frame base as seen from the rear and below. 173 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 172; FIG. FIG. 174 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base and upper front and rear frames as seen from the rear. FIG. 175 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base and upper front and rear frames. FIG. 176 is a perspective view showing a state in which the speaker harness protector is removed from the upper door mechanism.

As shown in FIG. 167, the upper portion 3305 of the shielding wall member 3300 is formed with a right ventilation opening 3307R and a left ventilation opening 3307L. The right ventilation opening 3307R and the left ventilation opening 3307L are formed so that air can pass in the front-rear direction. For clarity, right vent opening 3307R and left vent opening 3307L are hatched in FIG.

The top frame base 3210 also has a top wall 3211 as shown in FIG. The top frame base 3210 is a component of the front top unit 3200 (see FIG. 130), and is a member forming the skeleton of the front top unit 3200 . The top wall 3211 is formed with a plurality of right vent holes 3212R and left vent holes 3212L. The top frame base 3210 is made of polycarbonate or the like and has a symmetrical structure. The top frame base 3210 is colored black by mixing a pigment or dye into the resin material before molding. Thereby, the top frame base 3210 does not transmit light.

An upper front/rear frame 3230 is arranged below the top frame base 3210 . As shown in FIGS. 169 and 170, the upper front/rear frame 3230 has a structure in which a right side portion 3230R and a left side portion 3230L are connected by a central portion 3230C. The right portion 3230R is formed with a right opening 3231R that opens upward and a right opening 3232R that opens rearward. The left side portion 3230L is formed with a left side opening 3231L that opens upward and a left side opening 3232L that opens rearward.

The right side opening 3231R and the right side opening 3232R communicate with each other through a right side cavity 3233R formed inside the right side section 3230R, and the left side opening 3231L and the left side opening 3232L communicate with the left side side formed inside the left side 3230L. It communicates through the cavity 3233L. For clarity, FIG. 170 shows openings 3231 (right opening 3231R and left opening 3231L) and openings 3232 (right opening 3232R and left opening 3232L) hatched.

Duct seals 3240 (a right duct seal 3240R and a left duct seal 3240L) are arranged between the top frame base 3210 and the upper front/rear frame 3230 . The right duct seal 3240R and the left duct seal 3240L each have a rectangular shape with a large central opening, and are arranged along the peripheries of the right opening 3231R and the left opening 3231L in the upper front and rear frame 3230, respectively. As the duct seal 3240, a cushioning member (for example, rubber packing) capable of sealing between the top frame base 3210 and the upper front/rear frame 3230 can be appropriately adopted.

Here, the right vent 3212R and the left vent 3212L of the top frame base 3210 communicate with the right cavity 3233R and the left cavity 3233L via the right opening 3231R and the left opening 3231L of the upper front and rear frame 3230, respectively. The right cavity 3233R and the left cavity 3233L communicate with the right ventilation opening 3307R and the left ventilation opening 3307L of the shielding wall member 3300 via the right opening 3232R and the left opening 3232L, respectively.

As a result, air is taken into the cabinet G from the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 via, for example, the left vent 3212L, the left cavity 3233L, and the left vent opening 3307L. This air enters the inside of the case B22 through the intake port B22A (see FIG. 57). The air that has entered the case B22 moves rightward while absorbing the heat generated in the case B22, and exits the case B22 through the exhaust port B22E (see FIG. 58). The air coming out of the case B22 is released to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the right vent opening 3307R, the right cavity 3233R, and the right vent 3212R.

In this manner, the heat generated in projector 9020 can be discharged to the outside of pachi-slot machine 1 . In the second embodiment, the case B22 has the intake port B22A on the right side and the exhaust port B22E on the left side of the case B22. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the air intake port B22A is provided on the left side of the case B22, while the air outlet port B22E is provided on the right side of the case B22.

Further, as shown in FIG. 170, a central portion 3230C of the upper front-rear frame 3230 is formed with frame base engagement grooves 3234 (frame base engagement grooves 3234R and frame base engagement grooves 3234L). The frame base engagement groove 3234 is formed as a recess recessed from the surrounding surface so as to extend in the front-rear direction. The frame base engaging groove 3234R and the frame base engaging groove 3234L have substantially the same configuration and are provided substantially parallel to each other.

As shown in FIG. 171, the frame base engagement groove 3234 is composed of a groove bottom 3234a, and left and right side walls 3234b and 3234c connecting the groove bottom 3234a and the surrounding surfaces. The frame base engaging groove 3234 is formed from the front end to the rear of the central portion 3230C, but the rear end of the frame base engaging groove 3234 is positioned forward of the rear end of the central portion 3230C. As a result, the left and right sides of the frame base engaging groove 3234 (the groove left side portion 3235 and the groove right side portion 3236) are connected by the rear portion of the frame base engaging groove 3234 (the groove rear side portion 3237).

At the rear end of the frame base engagement groove 3234, a groove rear opening 3234d opened toward the rear is formed. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 171, the left wall surface 3234b of the frame base engagement groove 3234L is shown in black, and the groove rear opening 3234d of the frame base engagement groove 3234R is shown hatched.

As shown in FIG. 172, front and rear frame engaging projections 3213 (front and rear frame engaging projections 3213R and front and rear frame engaging projections 3213L) are formed on the lower surface 3211a of the upper wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210. As shown in FIG. The front and rear frame engaging protrusions 3213 are formed to extend in the front and rear direction as protrusions that protrude from the surrounding surfaces. The front and rear frame engaging projections 3213R and the front and rear frame engaging projections 3213L have substantially the same configuration and are provided substantially parallel to each other.

The distance between the front and rear frame engaging projections 3213R and the front and rear frame engaging projections 3213L is substantially the same as the distance between the frame base engaging grooves 3234R and 3234L in the upper front and rear frame 3230. The front and rear frame engaging projections 3213R and the front and rear frame engaging projections 3213L are slightly smaller in size than the frame base engaging grooves 3234R and frame base engaging grooves 3234L.

As shown in FIG. 173, the front and rear frame engaging protrusions 3213 have front and rear frame engaging claws 3213a. The front/rear frame engaging claw 3213a is formed at the rear end of the front/rear frame engaging projection 3213 by protruding the lower part thereof rearward. For clarity, FIG. 173 shows the side surfaces of the front and rear frame engaging projections 3213 in black.

As shown in FIG. 174, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the front and rear frame engaging claws 3213a of the top frame base 3210 protrude rearward from the groove rear openings 3234d of the upper front and rear frames 3230. As shown in FIG. In addition, of the lower surface of the central portion 3230C of the upper front/rear frame 3230, the portion where the frame base engagement groove 3234 is formed has a downward concave corresponding to the recess of the frame base engagement groove 3234. A structure 3238 protruding in a V shape is formed.

In FIG. 175, the top frame base 3210 and the upper front/rear frame 3230 with the upper door mechanism UD assembled are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (the plane passing through the front/rear frame engagement protrusion 3213R and the frame base engagement groove 3234R). showing the situation. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 175, the cut plane of the top frame base 3210 is indicated by diagonal lines, and the cut plane of the upper front/rear frame 3230 is indicated by black.

As shown in FIG. 175, the front and rear frame engaging projections 3213R and the front and rear frame engaging projections 3213L of the top frame base 3210 are inserted into the frame base engaging grooves 3234R and 3234L of the upper front and rear frames 3230, respectively. ing. In this state, the front and rear frame engaging claws 3213 a of the top frame base 3210 are positioned below the groove rear side portions 3237 in the upper front and rear frames 3230 .

The upper surface wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210 is formed in a flat plate shape and basically does not have a structure that serves as a support, so sufficient strength is not ensured. In this regard, the top frame base 3210 can be easily attached to the upper front and rear frames 3230 by sliding the front and rear frame engagement protrusions 3213 along the frame base engagement grooves 3234. can be prevented from being damaged. After attachment, the top frame base 3210 is supported by the upper front-rear frame 3230, and the top wall 3211 can be prevented from bending.

As shown in FIG. 167, the boundary portion (upper right corner portion 3310R) between the right side portion 3304 and the upper side portion 3305 of the shielding wall member 3300 has a structure that bulges toward the light passage opening 3301 side. A speaker opening 3311 is formed in the upper right corner 3310R. For the sake of clarity, the speaker opening 3311 is hatched in FIG. 167 .

Below the speaker opening 3311, there is provided a speaker inclined portion 3312 that slopes downward toward the rear. Thus, a harness arrangement space 3313 is formed above the speaker inclined portion 3312 . As shown in FIG. 176 , a harness 3314 for connection to the speaker 3410 is arranged in the harness arrangement space 3313 . Harness 3314 is connected to speaker 3410 through speaker opening 3311 . FIG. 176 shows how part of the speaker 3410 is exposed through the speaker opening 3311 .

A speaker harness protector 3315 is arranged on the rear side of the speaker opening 3311 . The speaker harness protector 3315 generally has a structure in which a predetermined level difference is formed by a surface in the front-back direction and a surface in the up-down direction. As a result, the harness arrangement space 3313 is closed by the speaker harness protector 3315 , and the harness 3314 is surrounded by the wall formed by the speaker inclined portion 3312 and the speaker harness protector 3315 .

Similarly, a speaker opening 3311 and a speaker inclined portion 3312 are formed at the boundary portion (upper left corner portion 3310L) between the left side portion 3303 and the upper side portion 3305 of the shielding wall member 3300 . Since the upper left corner portion 3310L has a symmetrical structure with the upper right corner portion 3310R, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In FIG. 176, the speaker harness protector 3315 on the rear side of the upper right corner 3310R is removed, while the speaker harness protector 3315 on the rear side of the upper left corner 3310L is attached.

<Reflection of image on top frame base 3210>
FIG. 177 is a front perspective view of the top frame base. FIG. 178 is a bottom view of the top frame base; FIG. 179 is a perspective view of the upper door mechanism as seen from slightly below. Figure 180 is a cross-sectional view of the center screen and top frame base. FIG. 181 is a schematic diagram of the flat portion of the central screen and the bottom wall of the top frame base.

As shown in FIG. 177, top frame base 3210 includes bottom wall 3214 . The bottom wall 3214 is formed in a flat plate shape and is substantially parallel to the top wall 3211 . The upper surface wall 3211 and the lower surface wall 3214 are arranged substantially horizontally. For clarity, bottom wall 3214 is hatched in FIG. 177 .

As shown in FIG. 178, the bottom surface 3215 of the bottom wall 3214 has an image reflective surface 3216 and a decorative surface 3217 . The image reflection surface 3216 has an arcuate shape (a figure surrounded by an arc and a chord connecting the ends of the arc). The image reflecting surface 3216 is not subjected to texturing or the like except for a pattern 3216a formed as concave grooves, and has a substantially flat and smooth surface as a whole. The decorative surface 3217 is a portion that surrounds the image reflecting surface 3216, and is decorated with unevenness as a whole.

The image reflecting surface 3216 can reflect light by applying a reflecting paint. As is conventionally known, the reflective paint is composed of transparent paint and glass beads, and has strong reflective properties. Any paint (for example, the same resin material as the light-shielding paint described later) can be used as the transparent paint. The coating method is not particularly limited, and for example, spray coating can be used. The reflective paint contains a black pigment (eg, carbon black), giving the image reflecting surface 3216 a black appearance. The color of the image reflecting surface 3216 is not particularly limited, and can be painted in any color.

As shown in FIG. 179, when the upper door mechanism UD is looked up from below (from the player's eye level), the image reflection surface 3216 comes into view. FIG. 180 shows a state in which the central screen 3010 and the top frame base 3210 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through approximately the central portion of the image reflecting surface 3216 in the left-right direction). ing. For clarity, in FIG. 180, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 (flat portion 3011) is shown in black, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 (lower surface wall 3214) is shown in oblique lines.

As shown in FIG. 180, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the rear edge 3214a (the portion corresponding to the chord in the arc) of the lower surface wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 is aligned with the front surface of the plane portion 3011 of the central screen 3010. It is substantially in contact with the side surface (display surface 3011a). The display surface 3011a of the central screen 3010 and the image reflection surface 3216 of the top frame base 3210 are arranged so as to be substantially orthogonal. As a result, the image reflection surface 3216 is a surface that continues forward from the upper portion (slightly below the upper end) of the display surface 3011a.

FIG. 181 schematically shows the plane portion 3011 of the central screen 3010 and the lower surface wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 when the upper door mechanism UD is viewed from below. This schematic diagram also shows a state in which a semicircular image (semicircular image 3011 b ) is displayed on the plane portion 3011 of the central screen 3010 . A semicircular image 3011 b is an image projected by the projector 9020 .

Here, a reflected image 3216a is displayed on the image reflecting surface 3216 because the image reflecting surface 3216 can reflect light as described above. The reflected image 3216a has a line-symmetrical figure shape (semicircular shape) about the portion of the central screen 3010 that contacts the image reflecting surface 3216 (the lower end of the rear edge 3214a of the lower surface wall 3214) as the axis of symmetry. . Therefore, by showing the semicircular image 3011b and the reflected image 3216a to the player, the player can perceive as if a circle were displayed. Note that in FIG. 181, the semicircular image 3011b and the reflected image 3216a are indicated by oblique lines.

<Layout Relationship Between Center Screen 3010 and Top Frame Base 3210>
FIG. 182 is a perspective view of the central screen viewed from the front and below. FIG. 183 is a rear perspective view of the central screen from below. FIG. 184 is a rear perspective view of the central screen from above. FIG. 185 is a perspective view of the top frame base as seen from the rear and below. 186 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base shown in FIG. 185; FIG. Figures 187-189 are cross-sectional views of the center screen and top frame base.

As shown in FIG. 182, the central screen 3010 has a front upper end portion 3015 that protrudes forward from the upper end of the front surface 3014 . The front surface 3014 is composed of a front-side surface (display surface 3011 a ) of the planar portion 3011 and a front-side surface 3012 a of the curved portion 3012 . The front upper end 3015 is formed substantially perpendicular to the front surface 3014 .

Specifically, the front upper end 3015 has a central portion 3015a, a first left side 3015b, a second left side 3015c, a first right side 3015d and a second right side 3015e. The central portion 3015a is formed substantially horizontally in the center of the central screen 3010. As shown in FIG. The first left side portion 3015b is formed continuously from the left end of the central portion 3015 toward the lower left. The second left side 3015c is continuously formed leftward from the left end of the first left side 3015b. The first right side portion 3015d is formed continuously from the right end of the central portion 3015a toward the lower right. The second right side portion 3015e is continuously formed rightward from the right end of the first right side portion 3015d. For clarity, FIG. 182 shows the lower surface 3015f of the front upper end 3015 in black.

A through hole 3016L is formed near the first left side portion 3015b, and a through hole 3016R is formed near the first right side portion 3015d. The through holes 3016 (through holes 3016L and 3016R) are formed to penetrate the center screen 3010 in the front-rear direction. Further, the central screen 3010 has a front lower end portion 3017 that protrudes forward from the vicinity of the lower end of the front surface 3014 . The front lower end 3017 is formed substantially perpendicular to the front surface 3014 as is the front upper end 3015 .

As shown in FIG. 183, the central screen 3010 has a rear upper end portion 3019 that protrudes rearward from the upper end of the rear surface 3018 . The back surface 3018 is composed of the back surface of the flat portion 3011 and the back surface of the curved portion 3012 . A rear upper end 3019 is formed substantially perpendicular to the rear surface 3018 . Specifically, the rear upper end 3019 has a left side 3019a and a right side 3019b. For clarity, FIG. 183 shows the lower surface 3019c of the rear upper end 3019 in black.

As shown in FIG. 184, the upper surface 3019d of the left side 3019a is continuous with the upper surface of the first left side 3015b and the upper surface of the second left side 3015c, and these surfaces are integrated. Similarly, the upper surface 3019e of the right side portion 3019b is continuous with the upper surface of the first right side portion 3015d and the upper surface of the second right side portion 3015e, and these surfaces are integrated. The central screen 3010 also has a rear lower end portion 3020 formed to protrude rearward from the lower end of the rear surface 3018 . Like the rear upper end 3019 , the rear lower end 3020 is formed substantially perpendicular to the rear surface 3018 .

As shown in FIGS. 185 and 186, the top frame base 3210 is formed with sound emitting openings 3218 (a sound emitting opening 3218L and a sound emitting opening 3218R). A screen contact portion 3219 is formed on the top frame base 3210 . For clarity, FIG. 185 shows the sound emission opening 3218L and the sound emission opening 3218R with diagonal lines. Also, in FIG. 186, the screen contact portion 3219 is shown in black.

A portion of the screen contact portion 3219 is a rear edge 3214a of the lower surface wall 3214, and the screen contact portion 3219 extends from the rear edge 3214a (screen contact portion 3219C) and the left end of the rear edge 3214a. A portion formed continuously toward the left (screen contact portion 3219L) and a portion formed continuously toward the right from the right end of the rear edge 3214a (screen contact portion 3219R) Configured.

A boss portion 3220L is formed in the lower right portion of the periphery of the sound emitting opening 3218L so as to protrude further rearward than the screen contact portion 3219L. Similarly, a boss portion 3220R is formed in the lower left portion of the periphery of the sound emitting opening 3218R so as to protrude further rearward than the screen contact portion 3219R. In the vicinity of the boss portion 3220 (boss portion 3220L and boss portion 3220R), a screw hole 3221 (screw hole 3221L and screw hole 3221R) penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed.

In FIG. 187, the center screen 3010 and the top frame base 3210 with the upper door mechanism UD assembled are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane that passes through approximately the central portion of the plane portion 3011 of the center screen 3010 in the left-right direction). showing the situation. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 187, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 (flat portion 3011) is indicated in black, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 (lower surface wall 3214) is indicated by oblique lines.

As shown in FIG. 187, the screen contact portion 3219C (rear edge 3214a) of the top frame base 3210 is substantially in contact with the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010. As shown in FIG. In this state, the screen contact portion 3219C is positioned slightly below the front upper end portion 3015 (central portion 3015a) of the central screen 3010. As shown in FIG.

FIG. 188 shows a state in which the central screen 3010 and the top frame base 3210 with the upper door mechanism UD assembled are cut along a longitudinal vertical plane (a plane passing through the right curved portion 3012R of the central screen 3010). For clarity, in FIG. 188, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 (right curved portion 3012R) is indicated in black, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is indicated by oblique lines.

As shown in FIG. 188, the screen contact portion 3219R of the top frame base 3210 is substantially in contact with the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010. As shown in FIG. In this state, the screen contact portion 3219R is positioned slightly below the front upper end portion 3015 (second right side portion 3015e) of the central screen 3010. As shown in FIG. Similarly, although not shown, the screen contact portion 3219L of the top frame base 3210 is substantially in contact with the front surface 3014 of the center screen 3010. As shown in FIG. In this state, the screen contact portion 3219L is positioned slightly below the front upper end portion 3015 (second left side portion 3015c) of the central screen 3010. As shown in FIG.

In this way, the screen contact portions 3219 (screen contact portion 3219L, screen contact portion 3219C, and screen contact portion 3219R) of the top frame base 3210 are generally in contact with the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010. in contact with Above the screen contact portion 3219, the front upper end portion 3015 of the central screen 3010 (central portion 3015a, first left side portion 3015b, second left side portion 3015c, first right side portion 3015d, and second right side portion 3015e) ) are provided. As a result, if there is a slight gap between the screen abutting portion 3219 of the top frame base 3210 and the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010, even if a wire-shaped device is attempted to enter through the gap, , the front upper end portion 3015 becomes an obstacle to prevent the intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act from being carried out through the gap.

In FIG. 189, the central screen 3010 and the top frame base 3210 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are viewed in the longitudinal vertical plane (the plane passing through the through hole 3016L of the central screen 3010 and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210). It shows how it is cut. For clarity, in FIG. 189, the cut plane of the central screen 3010 is hatched, the cut plane of the top frame base 3210 is shown in black, and the rear top edge 3019 (left side 3019a) and front top edge 3015 of the center screen 3010 are shown. The upper surface of (the second left side portion 3015c) is shaded.

As shown in FIG. 189, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the through hole 3016L of the central screen 3010 and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210 overlap. As a result, the boss portion 3220L is inserted into the through hole 3016L, and the rear portion of the boss portion 3220L slightly protrudes rearward from the rear surface 3018 of the central screen 3010. As shown in FIG. The diameter of the through hole 3016L is slightly larger than the diameter of the boss portion 3220L.

Similarly, although not shown, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the through hole 3016R of the central screen 3010 and the boss portion 3220R of the top frame base 3210 overlap. As a result, the boss portion 3220R is inserted into the through hole 3016R, and the rear portion of the boss portion 3220R protrudes slightly rearward from the back surface 3018 of the central screen 3010. As shown in FIG. The diameter of the through hole 3016R is slightly larger than the diameter of the boss portion 3220R.

Through holes 3016 (through holes 3016L and 3016R) and bosses 3220 (bosses 3220L and 3220R) are used to attach rear light-transmitting plate 3050 to top frame base 3210 by screwing. It is something that can be done. This will be detailed later.

<Arrangement Relationship Between Center Screen 3010 and Rear Translucent Plate 3050>
FIG. 190 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and rear translucent plate. FIG. 191(a) is a schematic diagram showing how the light projected from the projector is incident on the rear light-transmitting plate in this embodiment, viewed from above. FIG. 191(b) is a schematic diagram showing from above how light projected from a projector is incident on a rear translucent plate in another embodiment. FIG. 192 is a cross-sectional view of the central screen and the rear translucent plate. FIG. 193 is a perspective view of the rear translucent plate as seen from the rear. FIG. 194 is a rear perspective view of the central screen and the rear transparent plate.

FIG. 190 shows a state in which the center screen 3010 and the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 are assembled and cut horizontally. FIG. 191 schematically shows cut surfaces of the central screen 3010 and the rear translucent plate 3050 shown in FIG. In FIG. 192, the central screen 3010 and the rear translucent plate 3050 shown in FIG. 190 are partially enlarged.

As shown in FIG. 190, the rear-side surface of the flat portion 3011 of the central screen 3010 and the front-side surface of the flat portion 3051 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 are in close contact (or close to each other (approximately in contact)). ), a gap is formed between the rear-side surface of the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010 and the front-side surface of the curved portion 3052 of the rear translucent plate 3050 . For the sake of clarity, FIG. 190 shows cut surfaces of the central screen 3010 and the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 in black.

As described above, the light projected from projector 9020 travels downward and is then reflected forward by mirror 9030 (see FIG. 99). Thereby, the light projected from the projector 9020 is incident on the rear translucent plate 3050 . FIG. 191( a ) shows how the light reflected by the mirror 9030 and traveling in the direction along the straight line L is incident on the point X on the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 . Here, for the sake of convenience, it is assumed that part of the curved portion 3052 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is substantially flat (curvature is 0).

At this time, the direction of the tangent (L ₁ (X)) to the curved portion 3052 at the point X substantially coincides with the formation direction of the curved portion 3052 . The straight line L and the straight line L ₁ (X) are substantially orthogonal, and the angle α formed by the straight line L and the straight line L ₁ (X) is substantially 90°. That is, the incident angle (90°-α) of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L with respect to the curved portion 3052 is approximately 0°.

On the other hand, in another embodiment shown in FIG. 191(b), the plane portion 3051 and the curved portion 3052 of the rear translucent plate 3050 are substantially the same as the plane portion 3011 and the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010. It has size and shape. As a result, the rear side surface of the flat portion 3011 of the central screen 3010 and the front side surface of the flat portion 3051 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 are brought into close contact with each other, and the rear side surface of the curved portion 3012 of the central screen 3010 and the rear side surface of the flat portion 3051 are in close contact with each other. The curved portion 3052 of the side light-transmitting plate 3050 is in close contact with the front surface.

The curvature of the curved portion 3052 of the rear translucent plate 3050 according to another embodiment shown in FIG. FIG. 191(b) shows how the light reflected by the mirror 9030 and traveling in the direction along the straight line L is incident on the point Y on the rear transparent plate 3050 . A point Y is a point on the curved portion 3052 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 according to another embodiment, and is a point on the straight line L downstream of the point X in the traveling direction of light. The angle β formed by the straight line (L ₂ (Y)) perpendicular to the tangent (L ₁ (Y)) to the curved portion 3052 at the point Y and the straight line L, that is, the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L The incident angle with respect to the curved portion 3052 is larger than the incident angle (90°-α) in this embodiment.

Since the incident angle with respect to the curved portion 3052 of the light traveling in the direction along the straight line L is as described above, in another embodiment, the light reflected at the point Y is directed toward the flat portion 3011 side of the central screen 3010. It's easier to progress. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, such reflection can be suppressed to prevent the reflected light from entering the central screen 3010 .

As shown in FIG. 192, in the vicinity of the left end of the back surface of the curved portion 3052L of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050, texturing is applied over a predetermined range to form fine unevenness. there is In FIG. 192, the grained area (textured area 3052X) is shown in black. As described above, texturing is processing in which texturing (wrinkle pattern) is formed on the surface, and the processing is performed as light diffusion processing.

The rear light-transmitting plate 3050 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure, and although not shown, the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 has a curved portion 3052R near the right end of the rear surface, and the same texturing is applied. It is This effectively prevents the light projected from the projector 9020 from entering the central screen 3010 due to reflection.

In addition, the surface of the curved portion 3012 or the rear side portion 3013 of the central screen 3010 on the back side (inside of the pachi-slot machine 1) (near the texturing region 3052X of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050) is also subjected to the same texturing. may be Either or both of the texturing of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 and the texturing of the central screen 3010 may not be performed.

As shown in FIG. 193, the upper portion of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is formed with a screw hole 3056L and a screw hole 3056R. As shown in FIG. 194, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the through holes 3016L and 3016R of the central screen 3010 overlap the screw holes 3056L and 3056R of the rear translucent plate 3050, respectively. do. For clarity, in FIG. 194, the front upper end portion 3015 (the first left side portion 3015b, the second left side portion 3015c, the first right side portion 3015d, and the second right side portion 3015e) of the central screen 3010 is shown in black. ing.

<Fixation of central screen 3010>
FIG. 195 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism; FIG. 196 is a perspective view showing a state in which the underframe is removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 197 is a cross-sectional view of the upper door mechanism;

In FIG. 195, the upper door mechanism UD is cut along the front-rear vertical plane (the plane passing through the through-hole 3016L of the central screen 3010, the screw hole 3056L of the rear translucent plate 3050, and the boss 3220L of the top frame base 3210). It shows how it was done. 195, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 and the cut surface of the screw 3090 are shaded, the cut surface of the rear translucent plate 3050 is shaded, and the cut surface of the top frame base 3210 is black. is shown.

As shown in FIG. 195, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3056L of the rear translucent plate 3050 and the boss portion 3220L of the top frame base 3210 overlap. Similarly, although not shown, the screw hole 3056R of the rear translucent plate 3050 and the boss portion 3220R of the top frame base 3210 overlap. By screwing the screw 3090 inserted through the screw hole 3056 (the screw hole 3056L and the screw hole 3056R) into the hole formed in the boss portion 3220 (the boss portion 3220L and the boss portion 3220R), the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is mounted on the top. Attached to frame base 3210 . Also, as described above, the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010 substantially contacts the screen contact portions 3219 (the screen contact portion 3219L, the screen contact portion 3219C, and the screen contact portion 3219R) of the top frame base 3210. ing. As a result, the central screen 3010 is sandwiched between the rear translucent plate 3050 and the top frame base 3210 .

As shown in FIG. 196, an underframe 3070 is arranged below the upper door mechanism UD. Specifically, the underframe 3070 is arranged to cover the lower surface 3020 a of the rear lower end portion 3020 of the central screen 3010 and the lower surface 3055 a of the lower side portion 3055 of the rear translucent plate 3050 .

FIG. 197 shows a state in which the upper door mechanism UD is cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through approximately the central portion of the upper door mechanism UD in the left-right direction). 197, the cut surface of the central screen 3010 is indicated by diagonal lines, the cut surface of the rear translucent plate 3050 is indicated by hatching, and the cut surface of the underframe 3070 is indicated by black.

As shown in FIG. 197, the underframe 3070 has an upper portion 3071 formed by bending the front end upward. The upper portion 3071 has a structure bent rearward, and the rear edge 3071 a is substantially in contact with the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010 . In this state, the trailing edge 3071a is positioned slightly above the front lower edge 3017 of the central screen 3010. As shown in FIG. As a result, if there is a slight gap between the underframe 3070 and the front surface 3014 of the central screen 3010, even if a wire-shaped device is to be inserted through the gap, the front lower end 3017 will interfere. , so that the intrusion can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act from being carried out through the gap.

Note that the front lower end portion 3017 is formed slightly above the lower end of the front surface 3014 . Also, the lower side portion 3055 of the rear light-transmitting plate 3050 is configured to have a step, and the front portion thereof is arranged to be placed on the rear lower end portion 3020 of the central screen 3010 .

<Speaker unit 3400>
FIG. 198 is a front view showing the top side panel removed from the upper door mechanism. FIG. 199 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top side panel and speaker grill are removed from the upper door mechanism. Figure 200 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing the top frame ornament removed from the upper door mechanism;

As shown in FIGS. 198 and 199, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with a left speaker unit 3400L and a right speaker unit 3400R. Since the left speaker unit 3400L and the right speaker unit 3400R have symmetrical structures, only the left speaker unit 3400L will be described below. Also, the left speaker unit 3400L and the right speaker unit 3400R are referred to as speaker unit 3400 without distinction.

The speaker unit 3400 includes a speaker 3410 , a speaker grille 3420 , a top side panel 3430 , a plurality of speaker unit LEDs 3440 , speaker side lenses 3450 and a top frame decoration 3460 . Note that in FIG. 198, the top side panel 3430 of the left speaker unit 3400L is removed, while the top side panel 3430 of the right speaker unit 3400R is attached.

A speaker grille 3420 and a top side panel 3430 are positioned in front of the speaker 3410 . The speaker grille 3420 has a mesh structure (mesh-like structure) with a plurality of holes 3421 formed therein. A sound emitting opening 3431 is formed in the center of the top side panel 3430 . The sound output from the speaker 3410 is emitted forward through these holes 3421 and sound emission openings 3431 .

As the speaker unit LED 3440, a speaker unit LED 3440a arranged on the center side of the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the speaker 3410 and a speaker unit LED 3440b arranged on the outer side of the upper door mechanism UD with respect to the speaker 3410 are provided. is provided. The speaker unit LED 3440 is installed so as to emit light forward. Also, the speaker unit LED 3440 is a full-color LED, and can emit a plurality of colors including red, blue, and green.

The top side panel 3430 is made of a translucent material and arranged in front of the speaker unit LED 3440 . The light emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440a passes through the inner portion 3432 of the top side panel 3430 and is emitted to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG. Further, the light emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440b passes through the outer portion 3433 of the top side panel 3430 and is emitted to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG.

An inner portion 3432 of the top side panel 3430 is formed with a light exit opening 3434 . The light exit opening 3434 has a shape corresponding to the speaker side lens 3450 , and the speaker side lens 3450 fits into the light exit opening 3434 , thereby closing the light exit opening 3434 . The speaker side lens 3450 is made of a translucent material. Although not shown, on the rear side of the speaker side lens 3450, a speaker unit LED 3440c is arranged. The light emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440c passes through the speaker side lens 3450 and is emitted to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. FIG.

A screw hole 3435 is also formed in the top side panel 3430 . A top frame ornament 3460 is located on the front side of the screw hole 3435 . As shown in FIG. 200, a rear surface 3461 of the top frame ornament 3460 is formed with a boss portion 3462 protruding rearward. In FIG. 200, the top frame ornament 3460 is shown as viewed from the rear, while the other configurations are shown as viewed from the front.

When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3221 (see FIG. 185) of the top frame base 3210, the screw hole 3435 of the top side panel 3430 and the boss portion 3462 of the top frame decoration 3460 overlap. The top frame base 3210 is attached to the top frame ornament 3460 by screwing the screws inserted through the screw holes 3221 and 3435 into the holes formed in the boss portion 3462 . Since the screw is arranged on the back side of the top frame decoration 3460 and is invisible to the player, a good appearance can be realized.

<Front top unit 3200>
FIG. 201 is a front view showing a state in which the top center panel and top lens are removed from the upper door mechanism. 202 is a partially enlarged front view of the upper door mechanism in the state shown in FIG. 201; FIG. 203 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top reflector and the arrow eye reflector are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 201; FIG. 204 is a partially enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the top frame base and the top inner cover are removed from the upper door mechanism shown in FIG. 203; FIG. FIG. 205 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, top center LED board, and center LED board base.

As described above, the upper door mechanism UD is provided with the front top unit 3200 (see FIG. 130). As shown in FIGS. 201-204, the front top unit 3200 includes a top center LED board 3250, a top reflector 3260, an arrow eye reflector 3270 (a left arrow eye reflector 3270L and a right arrow eye reflector 3270R), and a top lens 3280. and a top center panel 3290 .

A plurality of center LEDs 3252 are provided on the surface 3251 of the top center LED substrate 3250 . The center LED 3252 is installed so as to emit light in the normal direction (forward direction) of the substrate surface. The center LED 3252 is a full-color LED, capable of emitting multiple colors including red, blue, and green. As the center LED 3252, a center LED 3252a, a center LED 3252b, a center LED 3252c, a center LED 3252d, a center LED 3252e, a center LED 3252f, and a center LED 3252g are provided.

Center LED 3252 a is provided in the center of top center LED board 3250 . The center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252c are provided on the left side of the center LED 3252a, and the placement location of the center LED 3252c is an area surrounded by the placement location of the center LED 3252b. The center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252e are provided on the right side of the center LED 3252a, and the placement location of the center LED 3252e is an area surrounded by the placement location of the center LED 3252d. Center LED 3252f is provided on the left side of center LED 3252b, and center LED 3252g is provided on the right side of center LED 3252d.

The top frame base 3210 includes connection portions 3222 (first connection portion 3222a, second connection portion 3222b, third connection portion 3222c, fourth connection portion 3222d, fifth connection portion 3222e) that connect the upper surface wall 3211 and the lower surface wall 3214. , and a sixth connection portion 3222f). Thereby, a central area 3223a, a first left area 3223b, a first right area 3223c, a second left area 3223d, and a second right area 3223e are partitioned.

The central region 3223a is a region surrounded by the upper surface wall 3211, the lower surface wall 3214, the first connection portion 3222a, and the second connection portion 3222b in front view. The first left side area 3223b is an area surrounded by the upper surface wall 3211, the lower surface wall 3214, the first connection portion 3222a, and the third connection portion 3222c in front view. The first right side area 3223c is an area surrounded by the upper surface wall 3211, the lower surface wall 3214, the second connection portion 3222b, and the fourth connection portion 3222d in front view.

The second left area 3223d is an area surrounded by the upper surface wall 3211, the lower surface wall 3214, the third connection portion 3222c, and the fifth connection portion 3222e in front view. The second right area 3223e is an area surrounded by the upper surface wall 3211, the lower surface wall 3214, the fourth connection portion 3222d, and the sixth connection portion 3222f in front view. The fifth connection portion 3222e and the sixth connection portion 3222f constitute part of the peripheral edge of the sound emission opening 3218L and the sound emission opening 3218R, respectively.

The central region 3223a, the first left region 3223b, the first right region 3223c, the second left region 3223d, and the second right region 3223e are hollow portions penetrating in the front-rear direction. In front view, the center LED 3252a is positioned in the central region 3223a, the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252c are positioned in the first left region 3223b, the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252e are positioned in the first right region 3223c, The center LED 3252f is positioned in the second left area 3223d, and the center LED 3252g is positioned in the second right area 3223e.

A left top inner cover 3255L is provided on the front side of the left portion of the top center LED board 3250 . The left top inner cover 3255L roughly matches the outer shape of the second left side area 3223d, and is arranged so as to overlap the second left side area 3223d in a front view. Similarly, a right top inner cover 3255R is provided on the front side of the right portion of the top center LED board 3250 . The right top inner cover 3255R roughly matches the outer shape of the second right side region 3223e, and is arranged so as to overlap the second right side region 3223e in front view.

In FIG. 205, the top frame base 3210, the top center LED board 3250, and the center LED board base 3256 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are cut along the front-rear vertical plane (the plane passing through the second right side region 3223e). It shows how it was done. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 205, the cut plane of the top frame base 3210 is indicated by hatching, and the cut planes of the top center LED board 3250 and the center LED board base 3256 are shown in black.

A center LED board base 3256 is attached to the top frame base 3210 as shown in FIG. The center LED board base 3256 has an upper portion approximately in contact with the upper surface wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210 and a lower portion approximately in contact with the lower surface wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 . Top center LED board 3250 is mounted on center LED board base 3256 . As a result, the top center LED board 3250 is arranged vertically between the top wall 3211 and the bottom wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 (so that the normal direction of the board surface faces forward). Therefore, the center LED 3252 can emit light forward.

<Top reflector 3260>
FIG. 206 is a front perspective view of the top reflector. Figure 207 is a rear view of the top reflector. Figure 208 is a front view of the top reflector and top center LED substrate. 209 and 210 are partial enlarged perspective views of the top reflector and top center LED substrate. FIG. 211 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top reflector, top center LED board, and top frame base.

As shown in FIGS. 206 and 207, the top reflector 3260 includes a top wall 3261, a bottom wall 3262, a center partition 3263, a first left partition 3264, a first right partition 3265, and a second left partition. A partition portion 3266 and a second right partition portion 3267 are provided.

The center partition 3263 is formed so as to connect the top wall 3261 and the bottom wall 3262 at the center of the top reflector 3260 in the left-right direction. The first left partition portion 3264 is formed on the left side of the central partition portion 3263 so as to connect the rear end of the upper surface wall 3261 and the rear end of the lower surface wall 3262 . The first right partition portion 3265 is formed to connect the rear end of the upper surface wall 3261 and the rear end of the lower surface wall 3262 on the right side of the central partition portion 3263 . The second left partition portion 3266 is continuously formed leftward from the left end of the first left partition portion 3264 . The second right partition portion 3267 is continuously formed rightward from the right end of the first right partition portion 3265 .

A light emission opening 3268a is formed on the rear side of the central partition 3263, and a light emission opening 3268b and a light emission opening 3268c are formed on the rear side of the first left partition 3264. The first right partition portion 3265 has a light emission opening 3268d and a light emission opening 3268e formed on the rear side, and the second left partition portion 3266 has a light emission opening 3268f formed on the rear side. A light exit opening 3268g is formed on the rear side of the second right partition portion 3267 .

For clarity, FIG. 207 shows the light exit openings 3268a to 3268g with diagonal lines. The light exit opening 3268a penetrates the central partition 3263 toward the front side. The light exit opening 3268b and the light exit opening 3268c penetrate the first left partition 3264 toward the front side. The light exit opening 3268d and the light exit opening 3268e penetrate the first right partition 3265 toward the front side. The light exit opening 3268f penetrates the second left partition 3266 toward the front side. The light exit opening 3268g penetrates the second right partition 3267 toward the front side.

Spaces (light passage spaces 3269a to 3269g) having a predetermined extent are thereby formed corresponding to the respective light exit openings 3268a to 3268g. In addition, peripheral edge portions of the respective light emitting openings 3268a to 3268g are in close proximity (approximately in contact) with the surface 3251 of the top center LED substrate 3250. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 208, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LEDs 3252a-3252g are positioned so as to overlap the light exit openings 3268a-3268g, respectively. As a result, the lights emitted from the center LEDs 3252a-3252g pass through the light passage spaces 3269a-3269g, respectively. Here, one light passage space 3269 and another light passage space 3269 are separated by a wall provided in the top reflector 3260 . This will be explained below.

As shown in FIGS. 209 and 210, the central partition portion 3263 has a triangular prism-shaped base portion 3263a and a projecting portion 3263b projecting forward from the base portion 3263a. A cavity 3263c is formed that communicates with. The cavity 3263c is a space surrounded by a left inner wall portion 3263d, a right inner wall portion 3263e, and an upper inner wall portion 3263f. For clarity, in FIG. 209, the front edge of the left inner wall portion 3263d, the front edge of the right inner wall portion 3263e, and the front edge of the upper inner wall portion 3263f are shown in black. These rear edges form the periphery of the light exit opening 3268a, and the left inner wall 3263d and the right inner wall 3263e are connected at their rear edges.

The light passage space 3269a is configured as a cavity 3263c. Thus, the light passage space 3269a is separated from the light passage space 3269b by the left portion of the base portion 3263a, and is separated from the light passage space 3269d by the right portion of the base portion 3263a.

Also, the light passage space 3269b is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3264a of the first left partition portion 3264 . A range of one light passage space 3269b is defined by the inclined wall portion 3264a, and the one light passage space 3269b is separated from the other light passage spaces 3269b. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 209, the side surface of the inclined wall portion 3264a that defines one light passage space 3269b is indicated by oblique lines. The inclined wall portion 3264a has an inclination that widens forward so that the area surrounded by the front edge is larger than the area of the portion surrounded by the rear edge (light emission opening 3268b). It is formed by

Also, the light passing space 3269c is a space surrounded by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b of the first left partition portion 3264 . The light passage space 3269c is separated from the light passage space 3269b by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b. The area defined by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b is partitioned into two by the arrow eye central wall portion 3264c. Thereby, one light passage space 3269c is separated from other light passage spaces 3269c.

For clarity, in FIG. 209, the front edge 3264d of the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b is shown in black, the front surface 3264e continuous from the peripheral edge of the light exit opening 3268c is shown in oblique lines, and the arrow eye central wall portion 3264c is shown in oblique lines. The front face 3264f is shaded. The arrow eye central wall portion 3264c is formed to protrude further forward than the front surface 3264e. In addition, the arrow eye central wall portion 3264c has a shorter length in the front-rear direction than the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b, and the front surface 3264f of the arrow eye central wall portion 3264c has the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b. It is positioned behind the front edge 3264d of the wall 3264b. A threaded hole 3264g that penetrates the first left partition portion 3264 in the front-rear direction is formed in the arrow eye center wall portion 3264c.

Also, the light passage space 3269f is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3266a of the second left partition portion 3266. As shown in FIG. A range of one light passage space 3269f is defined by the inclined wall portion 3266a, and the one light passage space 3269f is separated from the other light passage spaces 3269f. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 209, the side surface of the inclined wall portion 3266a that defines one light passing space 3269f is indicated by oblique lines. The inclined wall portion 3266a has an inclination that widens toward the front so that the area surrounded by the front edge is larger than the area of the portion surrounded by the rear edge (light emission opening 3268f). It is formed by

The top reflector 3260 has a symmetrical structure, and similarly, the light passage space 3269d is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3265a of the first right partition portion 3265. , one light passage space 3269d is separated from another light passage space 3269d. In addition, the light passage space 3269e is a space surrounded by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3265b of the first right partition portion 3265. 3269d. The area defined by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3265b is partitioned into two by the arrow eye central wall portion 3265c. Thereby, one light passage space 3269e is separated from other light passage spaces 3269e. In addition, the light passage space 3269g is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3267a of the second right partition portion 3267. The inclined wall portion 3267a separates the one light passage space 3269g from the other light passage space 3269g. separated.

As shown in FIG. 211, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the upper surface of the upper wall 3261 of the top reflector 3260 substantially abuts the lower surface of the upper wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210. The bottom surface of the bottom wall 3262 substantially contacts the top surface of the bottom wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 .

As a result, the front of the light passage space 3269d and the light passage space 3269e is partitioned by the top wall 3261 and the bottom wall 3262 of the top reflector 3260, the right side wall 3263g of the center partition 3263, and the fourth connection portion 3222d of the top frame base 3210. It is a space that has been made. For clarity, in FIG. 211, the lower surface of the upper surface wall 3261 of the top reflector 3260 is hatched, the upper surface of the lower surface wall 3262 is shown in black, and the right wall surface 3263g is shaded. Similarly, although not shown, in front of the light passing space 3269b and the light passing space 3269c are the top wall 3261 and the bottom wall 3262 of the top reflector 3260, the left side wall 3263h of the central partition 3263, and the third connecting portion of the top frame base 3210. 3222c.

<Arrow eye reflector 3270>
FIG. 212 is a front and right perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 213 is a rear view of a left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 214 is a rear perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 215 is a cross-sectional view of a left arrow eye reflector. 216 and 217 are perspective views of the center LED, top reflector and left arrow eye reflector. FIG. 218 is a cross-sectional view of the center LED, top reflector, and left arrow eye reflector.

Since the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R have bilaterally symmetrical structures, they are hereinafter referred to as the arrow eye reflector 3270 without distinguishing between them. As shown in FIGS. 212 to 214, the arrow eye reflector 3270 has a hollow three-dimensional shape with open front and rear sides.

Specifically, the arrow eye reflector 3270 includes a base portion 3271 , a front side portion 3272 and a rear side portion 3273 . The base portion 3271 has a structure that occupies most of the arrow eye reflector 3270 . The front side portion 3272 is formed to protrude forward from the front end portion of the base portion 3271 . The rear side portion 3273 is formed to protrude rearward from the rear end portion of the base portion 3271 .

For clarity, the front edge 3271a of the base portion 3271 and the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 are shown in black in FIG. An outer wall surface 3271b of the base portion 3271 and an outer wall surface 3272b of the front side portion 3272 are formed so as to have a step at the front edge 3271a of the base portion 3271 . An outer wall surface 3272b of the front side portion 3272 is formed so as to connect a front edge 3271a of the base portion 3271 and a front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 .

The figure defined by the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 and the figure defined by the front edge 3271a of the base portion 3271 have substantially similar shapes, and the figure defined by the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 is smaller than the figure defined by the front edge 3271 a of the base portion 3271 . Further, the front side portion 3272 is formed with a front side opening 3272c that opens forward. The peripheral edge of the front opening 3272c matches the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272. As shown in FIG.

An outer wall surface 3271b of the base portion 3271 and an outer wall surface 3273a of the rear side portion 3273 are formed to have a step at the rear end portion 3271c of the base portion 3271 . In addition, the rear side portion 3273 is formed with a first rear side opening 3273b and a second rear side opening 3273c that open toward the rear. A cavity is formed inside the arrow eye reflector 3270, and the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c communicate with the front opening 3272c.

In addition, the rear part 3273 has a rear partition part 3273d between the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c. The rear partition portion 3273d is formed in a flat plate shape so as to connect the upper portion and the lower portion of the rear portion 3273 . A screw hole 3273e is formed in the rear partition portion 3273d. For clarity, in FIG. 213, the rear end portion 3271c of the base portion 3271 is shown in black, the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c are shown in hatched lines, and the rear surface 3273f of the rear partition portion 3273d is shown in black. It is indicated by hanging.

A first rear opening peripheral edge portion 3273g is formed in a part of the peripheral edge of the first rear opening 3273b so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface 3273f of the rear partition portion 3273d. A second rear opening peripheral edge portion 3273h is formed at a portion of the peripheral edge of the second rear opening 3273c so as to protrude rearward from the rear surface 3273f of the rear partition portion 3273d. The side surface of the first rear opening peripheral edge portion 3273 g and the side surface of the second rear opening peripheral edge portion 3273 h match the outer wall surface 3273 a of the rear side portion 3273 . For clarity, in FIG. 214, the rear end surface 3273i of the first rear opening peripheral edge portion 3273g and the rear end surface 3273j of the second rear opening peripheral edge portion 3273h are hatched, and the rear edge portion 3271c of the base portion 3271 is black. showing.

FIG. 215 shows a state in which the arrow eye reflector 3270 is cut along a horizontal vertical plane (a plane passing through the base portion 3271). As shown in FIG. 215, the inner wall surface 3270a of the arrow eye reflector 3270 is formed with an inclination that widens toward the front. As a result, when the arrow eye reflector 3270 is cut along a horizontal vertical plane (a vertical plane where the distance between the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c in the front-rear direction is X), The area of the corresponding aperture (cross-sectional aperture 3270X) increases as the value of X increases.

For clarity, FIG. 215 shows the cross-section of the arrow-eye reflector 3270 hatched. A cross-sectional opening 3270X is a portion surrounded by the oblique lines. As described above, the outer wall surfaces (the outer wall surface 3271b, the outer wall surface 3272b, and the outer wall surface 3273a) of the arrow eye reflector 3270 are provided between the base portion 3271 and the front side portion 3272 and between the base portion 3271 and the rear side portion 3273. Although a step is formed between them, the inner wall surface 3270a is formed continuously between the base portion 3271, the front side portion 3272 and the rear side portion 3273 without such a step. . Therefore, the thickness of the front side portion 3272 (the distance between the outer wall surface 3272b and the inner wall surface 3270a) is smaller than the thickness of the base portion 3271 (the distance between the outer wall surface 3271b and the inner wall surface 3270a). In FIG. 215, the thickness of the base portion 3271 is indicated by d. The base portion 3271 and the front side portion 3272 are each formed to have a substantially uniform thickness.

Although details will be described later, the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 is close to the rear surface side of the top lens 3280 (see FIG. 224). Here, since the arrow-eye reflector 3270 itself does not transmit light, when the center LED 3252 around the arrow-eye reflector 3270 is caused to emit light and the front top unit 3200 performs light emission effect, the shadow of the arrow-eye reflector 3270 (particularly, the arrow-eye The shadow of the front end of the reflector 3270) can be seen by the player through the top lens 3280 and the top center panel 3290, and there is concern that this will lead to a deterioration in the appearance of the gaming machine. However, as in the present embodiment, by providing a step on the front end side of the arrow eye reflector 3270 and making the front side portion 3272 thinner than the base portion 3271, the area of the front end portion of the arrow eye reflector 3270 is reduced. As a result, the shadow of the front end of the arrow-eye reflector 3270 can be reduced during the lighting effect, and the appearance of the game machine can be improved.

Further, the arrow eye reflector 3270 is formed with a boss portion 3270b projecting forward from a rear partition portion 3273d of the rear side portion 3273. As shown in FIG. The boss portion 3270b has a columnar shape, and a screw hole 3273e is formed to extend through a part of the boss portion 3270b through the rear partition portion 3273d. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 215, the front surface 3273k of the rear partition portion 3273d is shown in black, and the front surface of the boss portion 3270b is shaded.

As shown in the figure, the letter "L" is formed on the front surface of the boss portion 3270b of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L. On the other hand, the letter "R" is formed on the front surface of the boss portion 3270b of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R. This makes it possible to easily distinguish between the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R.

In FIG. 216, the top reflector 3260 and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L are disassembled, and the top reflector 3260 is viewed from the front (approximately the front), while the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown from the rear (approximately the rear). ) is shown. FIG. 217 shows how the top reflector 3260 and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L are assembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 218 shows a cross section of the top reflector 3260 and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L assembled together as viewed from the left. 216 to 218, while maintaining the relative positional relationship between the center LED 3252 and the top reflector 3260, the components other than the center LED 3252, the top reflector 3260, and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L are omitted. ing.

As shown in FIG. 216, a threaded hole 3264g is formed in the arrow eye center wall portion 3264c of the top reflector 3260. As shown in FIG. As described above, the screw hole 3264g is formed to pass through the first left partition portion 3264 in the front-rear direction. Similarly, although not shown, a screw hole 3265g is formed in the arrow eye center wall portion 3265c of the top reflector 3260 . The screw hole 3265g is formed to pass through the first right partition 3265 in the front-rear direction.

When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3264g of the top reflector 3260 and the screw hole 3273e of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L overlap. The left arrow eye reflector 3270L is attached to the top reflector 3260 by screwing the screw inserted through the screw hole 3264g into the screw hole 3273e. Similarly, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the screw hole 3265g of the top reflector 3260 and the screw hole 3273e of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R overlap. The right arrow eye reflector 3270R is attached to the top reflector 3260 by screwing the screw inserted through the screw hole 3265g into the screw hole 3273e.

Thereby, the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R are arranged on the front side of the top reflector 3260, respectively. At this time, the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L overlap with the two light exit openings 3268c of the top reflector 3260, respectively. The first rear opening 3273b communicates with the light exit opening 3268c, and the second rear opening 3273c communicates with the light exit opening 3268c. Similarly, the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R overlap the two light exit openings 3268e of the top reflector 3260, respectively. The first rear opening 3273b communicates with the light exit opening 3268e, and the second rear opening 3273c communicates with the light exit opening 3268e.

In FIG. 218, the center LED 3252, top reflector 3260, and left arrow eye reflector 3270L in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are arranged in a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the second rear opening 3273c of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L). ) is shown. For clarity, in FIG. 218, the cut plane of the top reflector 3260 is hatched, the cut plane of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is hatched, and the side and front faces 3273k of the rear partition 3273d of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L are shown. are hatched and black, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 218, the rear end surface 3273j of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is substantially in contact with the front surface 3264e of the periphery of the light emission opening 3268c of the top reflector 3260, and the left arrow eye reflector The back surface 3273f of the rear partition portion 3273d of the 3270L is substantially in contact with the front surface 3264f of the arrow-eye center wall portion 3264c of the top reflector 3260, and the rear end portion 3271c of the base portion 3271 of the left arrow-eye reflector 3270L is the arrow-eye center wall portion 3264c of the top reflector 3260. It substantially contacts the front edge 3264d of the eye peripheral wall 3264b. Similarly, right arrow eye reflector 3270 R is also substantially abutting top reflector 3260 .

<Emission of light from center LED 3252>
As described above, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252a overlaps the light exit opening 3268a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252a passes through the light passage space 3269a (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and advances to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269a is a cavity 3263c (a space surrounded by a left inner wall portion 3263d, a right inner wall portion 3263e, and an upper inner wall portion 3263f) in the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

Further, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252b overlaps the light exit opening 3268b of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252b passes through the light passage space 3269b (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and advances to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269b is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3264a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252c overlaps the light emission opening 3268c of the top reflector 3260 and the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L ( 208 and 217). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252c passes through the light passing space 3269c (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and the internal space of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L (first rear opening 3273b, second rear opening 3273c and front side opening 3273c). 3272c) to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269c is a space surrounded by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3264b and the arrow eye central wall portion 3264c of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

Further, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252d overlaps the light exit opening 3268d of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252d passes through the light passage space 3269d (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and advances to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269d is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3265a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 210).

In addition, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252e overlaps the light emission opening 3268e of the top reflector 3260 and the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R ( 208 and 217). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252e passes through the light passing space 3269e (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and the internal space of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R (first rear opening 3273b, second rear opening 3273c and front side opening 3273c). 3272c) to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269e is a space surrounded by the arrow eye peripheral wall portion 3265b and the arrow eye central wall portion 3265c of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 210).

Further, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252f overlaps the light exit opening 3268f of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252f passes through the light passage space 3269f (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and advances to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passing space 3269f is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3266a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209).

Further, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the center LED 3252g overlaps the light exit opening 3268g of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 208). As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252g passes through the light passage space 3269g (see FIG. 206) of the top reflector 3260 and advances to the front portion of the upper door mechanism UD. The light passage space 3269g is a space surrounded by the inclined wall portion 3267a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 210).

The light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g travels as described above. portion 3264a, inclined wall portion 3265a, inclined wall portion 3266a, inclined wall portion 3267a, right wall surface 3263g, left wall surface 3263h, etc.), and wall surfaces of arrow eye reflector 3270 (inner wall surface 3270a, outer wall surface 3271b, outer wall surface 3272b, etc.) is a reflector that reflects light. As a result, the light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g travels forward while being reflected by these wall surfaces.

A left top inner cover 3255L is provided on the front side of the second left partition portion 3266 in the top reflector 3260, and a right top inner cover 3255R is provided on the front side of the second right partition portion 3267 in the top reflector 3260. is provided (see FIG. 203). The left top inner cover 3255L is formed in a flat plate shape, and is arranged so that its rear surface is substantially in contact with the front surface of the second left partition portion 3266 (periphery of the inclined wall portion 3266a). The right top inner cover 3255R is formed in a flat plate shape, and is arranged such that its rear surface is substantially in contact with the front surface of the second right partition portion 3267 (periphery of the inclined wall portion 3267a).

As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252f enters the rear surface of the left top inner cover 3255L. The left top inner cover 3255L is made of a translucent material, and the light passes through the left top inner cover 3255L and travels forward of the left top inner cover 3255L. Similarly, the light emitted from the center LED 3252g enters the rear surface of the right top inner cover 3255R. The right top inner cover 3255R is made of a translucent material, and the light passes through the right top inner cover 3255R and travels forward of the right top inner cover 3255R.

<Top lens 3280>
FIG. 219 is a perspective view of the top frame base and top lens; 220 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top lens is removed from the state shown in FIG. 219. FIG. FIG. 221 is a perspective view of the top lens as viewed from behind and above. FIG. 222 is a perspective view of the top center LED board, top reflector, left arrow eye reflector, right arrow eye reflector and top lens. 223 and 224 are cross-sectional views of the top center LED substrate, top reflector, left arrow eye reflector, right arrow eye reflector, and top lens. FIG. 225 is a partial enlarged perspective view of the left arrow eye reflector and top lens; FIG. 226 is a cross-sectional view of the left arrow eye reflector and top lens.

As shown in FIGS. 219 and 220, the top lens 3280 is surrounded by the front edge 3211b of the top wall 3211, the front edge 3214b of the bottom wall 3214, the fifth connection portion 3222e, and the sixth connection portion 3222f of the top frame base 3210. It roughly matches the external shape of the figure shown. The top lens 3280 is arranged along these front edge 3211b, front edge 3214b, fifth connection portion 3222e, and sixth connection portion 3222f.

Thus, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the top frame base 3210 has a central region 3223a, a first left region 3223b, a first right region 3223c, a second left region 3223d, and a second right region 3223e (Fig. 204) is covered from the front by a top lens 3280 .

Specifically, the top lens 3280 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure and includes a central portion 3281 , a left portion 3282 and a right portion 3283 . The central portion 3281 is formed with a triangular shape. The left side portion 3282 is formed so as to continue leftward from the left end of the central portion 3281 . The left side portion 3282 has an inclination toward the rear as it goes leftward. The right side portion 3283 is formed so as to continue rightward from the right end of the central portion 3281 . The right side portion 3283 has an inclination toward the rear side toward the right side.

A central front convex portion 3281a is formed on the front side of the central portion 3281 . The center front projection 3281a extends vertically at the center in the left-right direction as a projection that slightly bulges forward with respect to the surrounding surface. Further, through holes 3281b and 3281c are formed in the central portion 3281 . The first connection portion 3222a and the second connection portion 3222b of the top frame base 3210 are formed with screw holes 3224a and 3224b at locations overlapping the through holes 3281b and 3281c, respectively.

The left side portion 3282 has an upper left side portion 3282a and a lower left side portion 3282b bent rearward from the lower end of the upper left side portion 3282a. The upper left portion 3282a and the lower left portion 3282b are formed to have substantially uniform thicknesses. Three front left protrusions 3284 (first front left protrusion 3284a, second front left protrusion 3284b, and third front left protrusion 3284c) are formed on the front side of the upper left portion 3282a. The first left front protrusion 3284a, the second left front protrusion 3284b, and the third left front protrusion 3284c are protrusions that slightly bulge with respect to the surrounding surface (front main surface 3282c), It has the shape of an inverted Chinese character.

Similarly, the right side portion 3283 has an upper right side portion 3283a and a lower right side portion 3283b bent rearward from the lower end of the upper right side portion 3283a. The upper right side portion 3283a and the lower right side portion 3283b are each formed to have a substantially uniform thickness. Three front right protrusions 3285 (first front right protrusion 3285a, second front right protrusion 3285b, and third front right protrusion 3285c) are formed on the front side of the upper right side portion 3283a. The first right front convex portion 3285a, the second right front convex portion 3285b, and the third right front convex portion 3285c are convex portions that slightly bulge with respect to the surrounding surface (front main surface 3283c), It has a dogleg shape.

In addition, a left lower protrusion 3282d that protrudes downward is formed on the left lower side 3282b. The left lower projection 3282d is formed with a left lower front projection 3282e that slightly bulges with respect to the surrounding surface. In addition, a lower right protruding portion 3283d protruding downward is formed on the lower right side portion 3283b. The lower right protrusion 3283d is formed with a lower right front protrusion 3283e that slightly bulges with respect to the surrounding surface. When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the lower left protrusion 3282d and the lower right protrusion 3283d project downward from the lower wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210, respectively. mated to.

As shown in FIG. 221, on the rear side of the central portion 3281, a central rear concave portion 3281d is formed. The center rear recess 3281d extends vertically at the center in the left-right direction as a recess slightly recessed with respect to the surrounding surface (peripheral edge 3281e). The formation location of the central rear concave portion 3281d overlaps the formation location of the central front convex portion 3281a. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edge of the central rear concave portion 3281d substantially coincides with the outer edge of the central front convex portion 3281a. For clarity, FIG. 221 shows the central rear recess 3281d with diagonal lines.

In addition, three left rear recesses 3286 (first left rear recess 3286a, second left rear recess 3286b, and third left rear recess 3286c) are formed on the back side of the left side 3282. . The first left rear recessed portion 3286a, the second left rear recessed portion 3286b, and the third left rear recessed portion 3286c are each recessed slightly with respect to the surrounding surface (rear main surface 3282f). It has a letter shape. These left rear recesses 3286 are basically formed in the upper left side 3282a, but a small portion below the first left rear recess 3286a is formed in the left lower side 3282b.

The first left rear recessed portion 3286a, the second left rear recessed portion 3286b, and the third left rear recessed portion 3286c are formed at the first left front protrusion 3284a, the second left front protrusion 3284b, and the third left rear recess 3286c, respectively. It overlaps with the formation location of the third left front projection 3284c. As a result, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edges of the first left rear concave portion 3286a, the second left rear concave portion 3286b, and the third left rear concave portion 3286c each have a first left front convex portion 3284a. , the second left front protrusion 3284b and the third left front protrusion 3284c.

Two protrusions (first left rear protrusion 3288a and second left rear protrusion 3288b) are formed between the first left rear recess 3286a and the second left rear recess 3286b. Two protrusions (a third left rear protrusion 3288c and a fourth left rear protrusion 3288d) are formed between the second left rear recess 3286b and the third left rear recess 3286c. there is The first left rear protrusion 3288a, the second left rear protrusion 3288b, the third left rear protrusion 3288c, and the fourth left rear protrusion 3288d each have a surrounding surface (rear main surface 3282f). ) is formed so as to connect adjacent left rear recesses 3286 .

Similarly, on the rear side of the right side portion 3283, three right rear recesses 3287 (first right rear recess 3287a, second right rear recess 3287b, and third right rear recess 3287c) are formed. there is The first right rear recess 3287a, the second right rear recess 3287b, and the third right rear recess 3287c are recesses that are slightly recessed with respect to the surrounding surface (rear main surface 3283f). It has the shape of a reversed character. These right rear recesses 3287 are basically formed in the upper right side 3283a, but a small portion below the first right rear recess 3287a is formed in the lower right side 3283b. .

The formation locations of the first right rear recess 3287a, the second right rear recess 3287b, and the third right rear recess 3287c are respectively the first right front protrusion 3285a, the second right front protrusion 3285b, and the It overlaps with the location where the third right front projection 3285c is formed. Accordingly, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edges of the first right rear concave portion 3287a, the second right rear concave portion 3287b, and the third right rear concave portion 3287c are each formed by the first right front convex portion 3285a. , the second right front convex portion 3285b, and the third right front convex portion 3285c.

Two protrusions (first right rear protrusion 3289a and second right rear protrusion 3289b) are formed between the first right rear recess 3287a and the second right rear recess 3287b. Two protrusions (third right rear protrusion 3289c and fourth right rear protrusion 3289d) are formed between the second right rear recess 3287b and the third right rear recess 3287c. there is The first right rear convex portion 3289a, the second right rear convex portion 3289b, the third right rear convex portion 3289c, and the fourth right rear convex portion 3289d each have a surrounding surface (rear main surface 3283f). ) is formed so as to connect adjacent right rear recesses 3287 .

A lower left rear recess 3282g that is slightly recessed with respect to the surrounding surface is formed on the rear side of the lower left protrusion 3282d. In addition, a lower right rear recess 3283g that is slightly depressed with respect to the surrounding surface is formed on the rear side of the lower right protrusion 3283d. The positions where the lower left rear concave portion 3282g and the lower right rear concave portion 3283g are formed overlap with the positions where the lower left front convex portion 3282e and the lower right front convex portion 3283e are formed, respectively. Accordingly, when the top lens 3280 is viewed from the front, the outer edges of the lower left rear concave portion 3282g and the lower right rear concave portion 3283g substantially match the outer edges of the lower left front convex portion 3282e and the lower right front convex portion 3283e, respectively. .

As shown in FIGS. 222-224, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the top lens 3280 is arranged in front of the top reflector 3260, the left arrow eye reflector 3270L, and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R. there is At this time, the front edge of the left inner wall portion 3263d, the front edge of the right inner wall portion 3263e, and the front edge of the upper inner wall portion 3263f of the top reflector 3260 (see FIG. 209), and the peripheral edge portion 3281e of the central portion 3281 of the top lens 3280 are substantially parallel to each other, and these surfaces are substantially in contact with each other.

In addition, the front edge 3272a (see FIG. 212) of the front side portion 3272 of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the rear main surface 3282f of the left side portion 3282 of the top lens 3280 are substantially parallel surfaces, and these surfaces are substantially aligned. touch. Similarly, the front edge 3272a (see FIG. 212) of the front side portion 3272 of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R and the rear main surface 3283f of the right side portion 3283 of the top lens 3280 are substantially parallel surfaces, and these surfaces are substantially parallel to each other. abut.

In FIG. 223, the top center LED board 3250, top reflector 3260, left arrow eye reflector 3270R, right arrow eye reflector 3270R, and top lens 3280 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are placed on the horizontal plane (the boss of the arrow eye reflector 3270). 3270b) is shown. For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 223, the cut plane of the central partition 3263 in the top reflector 3260 is indicated by diagonal lines, and the cut plane of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is indicated by black.

In FIG. 224, the top center LED board 3250, the top reflector 3260, the left arrow eye reflector 3270L, the right arrow eye reflector 3270R, and the top lens 3280 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are arranged in the vertical plane in the front-rear direction (top lens 3280 is cut along a plane passing through the first left rear convex portion 3288a and the second left rear convex portion 3288b). For the sake of clarity, in FIG. 224, the cut plane of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shaded, and the cut plane of the top lens 3280 is hatched.

In FIG. 225, the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the top lens 3280 are disassembled, and while the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown from the front, the top lens 3280 is shown from the rear. there is FIG. 226 shows a state in which the left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the top lens 3280 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are cut along a horizontal vertical plane (a plane passing through the base portion 3271 of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L). there is In FIG. 226, the cut surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shaded, and the first left rear concave portion 3286a, the second left rear concave portion 3286b, and the third left rear concave portion 3286c of the top lens 3280 are indicated by shading. It is indicated by diagonal lines.

As shown in FIGS. 225 and 226, the external shape of the front edge 3272a of the front side portion 3272 of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is approximately the shape of a virtual figure 3286X defined by the three left rear concave portions 3286 of the top lens 3280. match. A virtual figure 3286X is a figure surrounded by P, Q, R, and S in FIG. In FIG. 225, the leading edge 3272a of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is shown in black.

Specifically, the front edge 3272a of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is composed of a top front edge 3272p, a bottom front edge 3272q, a left front edge 3272r, and a right front edge 3272s. The upper front edge 3272p and the lower front edge 3272q are each formed linearly. The left front edge 3272r and the right front edge 3272s are each formed in an inverted dogleg shape.

On the other hand, the three left rear concave portions 3286 in the top lens 3280 each have outer edges composed of a linear upper edge 3286p and a lower edge 3286q, and a dogleg-shaped left edge 3286r and right edge 3286s. there is The virtual figure 3286X includes a line segment (P) connecting the upper edges 3286p of the three left rear recesses 3286, a line segment (Q) connecting the lower edges 3286q of the three left rear recesses 3286, and a third left rear It is a figure surrounded by the left edge 3286r (R) of the recess 3286c and the right edge 3286s (S) of the first left rear recess 3286a.

The upper edge 3286p of the first left rear recess 3286a, the upper edge 3286p of the second left rear recess 3286b, and the upper edge 3286p of the third left rear recess 3286c are positioned on the same straight line. A lower edge 3286q of the first left rear recess 3286a, a lower edge 3286q of the second left rear recess 3286b, and a lower edge 3286q of the third left rear recess 3286c are positioned on the same straight line.

In the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the upper front edge 3272p of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L substantially overlaps the upper edge 3286p of the three left rear concave portions 3286 in the top lens 3280, and the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is under the left arrow eye reflector 3270L. The front edge 3272q substantially overlaps the lower edge 3286q of the three left rear recesses 3286 of the top lens 3280, and the left front edge 3272r of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is the left edge 3286r of the third left rear recess 3286c of the top lens 3280. , and the right front edge 3272 s of the left arrow eye reflector 3270 L substantially overlaps the right edge 3286 s of the first left rear concave portion 3286 a in the top lens 3280 . A front edge 3272a of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L is arranged along the periphery of the virtual figure 3286X in the top lens 3280 and substantially contacts the rear main surface 3282f.

From the above, the light (light emitted from the center LED 3252c) that has passed through the internal space of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L (the cavity that communicates the first rear opening 3273b and the second rear opening 3273c with the front opening 3272c) is The light enters the first left rear recess 3286a, the second left rear recess 3286b, and the third left rear recess 3286c of the top lens 3280 (see FIG. 217).

Similarly, although not shown, the light (emitted from the center LED 3252e) that has passed through the internal space of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R (the cavity that communicates the first rear opening 3273b, the second rear opening 3273c, and the front opening 3272c) light) enters the first right rear recess 3287 a , the second right rear recess 3287 b , and the third right rear recess 3287 c of the top lens 3280 .

Also, the light (light emitted from the center LED 3252a) that has passed through the cavity 3263c (see FIG. 209) of the central partitioning portion 3263 of the top reflector 3260 enters the central rear concave portion 3281d of the top lens 3280 (see FIG. 216). . In addition, the light emitted from the center LED 3252b, the center LED 3252d, the center LED 3252f, and the center LED 3252g is the formation region of the center rear recess 3281d, the left rear recess 3286, and the right rear recess in the top lens 3280. It is incident on a region other than the 3287 formation region.

The passage of light emitted from the center LED 3252 a is separated from the passage of light emitted from the other center LEDs 3252 by the wall surface of the top reflector 3260 . This prevents light emitted from the center LED 3252 other than the center LED 3252 a from entering the central rear concave portion 3281 d of the top lens 3280 .

The passage of light emitted from the center LED 3252c is separated from the passage of light emitted from the other center LEDs 3252 by the wall surface of the left arrow eye reflector 3270L. This prevents light emitted from the center LEDs 3252 other than the center LED 3252 c from entering the left rear concave portion 3286 of the top lens 3280 .

Similarly, the passage of light emitted from the center LED 3252e is separated from the passage of light emitted from the other center LEDs 3252 by the wall surface of the right arrow eye reflector 3270R. This prevents light emitted from the center LED 3252 other than the center LED 3252 e from entering the right rear concave portion 3287 of the top lens 3280 .

The top lens 3280 is made of a translucent material, and light incident on the top lens 3280 passes through the top lens 3280 . Then, the light transmitted through the top lens 3280 is incident on the top center panel 3290 arranged on the front side of the top lens 3280 (or, as will be described later, the light passes through an opening formed in the top center panel 3290). is released to the outside of the machine 1).

<Top center panel 3290>
FIG. 227 is a front perspective view of the top center panel; FIG. 228 is a partially enlarged front view of the top center panel; FIG. 229 is a rear perspective view of the top center panel; FIG. FIG. 230 is a rear view of the top center panel and top lens. FIG. 231 is a cross-sectional view of the top center panel and top lens. FIG. 232 is a front view of the top center panel and top lens.

As shown in FIGS. 227 and 228, the top center panel 3290 has a bilaterally symmetrical structure, and its external shape in front view corresponds to that of the top lens 3280 (the top center panel 3290 is the top lens). slightly larger than the 3280). Specifically, top center panel 3290 includes a central portion 3291 , a left portion 3292 and a right portion 3293 .

The central portion 3291 is formed with a triangular shape. A central opening 3291a is formed in the central portion 3291 . The central opening 3291a is formed so as to extend vertically at the center in the left-right direction as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The shape of the central opening 3291 a corresponds to the central front convex portion 3281 a of the top lens 3280 . For clarity, FIG. 228 shows the central opening 3291a shaded.

The left side portion 3292 is formed so as to continue leftward from the left end of the central portion 3291 . The left side portion 3292 has an inclination toward the rear as it goes to the left. The left side portion 3292 includes an upper left side portion 3292a, a left bent portion 3292b bent backward from the lower end of the upper left side portion 3292a, and a left lower side portion continuously formed downward from the lower end of the left bent portion 3292b. 3292c and . Three left openings 3294 (a first left opening 3294a, a second left opening 3294b, and a third left opening 3294c) are formed in the left upper portion 3292a.

The first left side opening 3294a, the second left side opening 3294b, and the third left side opening 3294c each have an inverted dogleg shape as a through hole that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The shapes of the first left opening 3294a, the second left opening 3294b, and the third left opening 3294c are the first left front convex portion 3284a, the second left front convex portion 3284b, and the third left front convex portion 3284b of the top lens 3280, respectively. It has a shape corresponding to the side protrusion 3284c. For clarity, FIG. 228 shows the first left opening 3294a, the second left opening 3294b, and the third left opening 3294c hatched.

The right side portion 3293 is formed so as to continue rightward from the right end of the central portion 3291 . The right side portion 3293 is inclined toward the rear as it goes to the right. The right side portion 3293 includes an upper right side portion 3293a, a right bent portion 3293b bent rearward from the lower end of the upper right side portion 3293a, and a lower right side continuously formed downward from the lower end of the right bent portion 3293b. and a portion 3293c. Three right openings 3295 (a first right opening 3295a, a second right opening 3295b, and a third right opening 3295c) are formed in the upper right side portion 3293a.

The first right side opening 3295a, the second right side opening 3295b, and the third right side opening 3295c each have a doglegged shape as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. The shapes of the first right opening 3295a, the second right opening 3295b, and the third right opening 3295c are the first right front convex portion 3285a, the second right front convex portion 3285b, and the third right front convex portion 3285b of the top lens 3280, respectively. It has a shape corresponding to the side protrusion 3285c.

The top center panel 3290 also includes a lower left protruding portion 3292d formed to protrude downward from the lower left side portion 3292c and a lower right protruding portion 3292d formed to protrude downward from the lower right side portion 3293c. It has a protrusion 3293d. The lower left projecting portion 3292d has a lower left opening 3292e as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the lower right projecting portion 3293d has a lower right opening 3293e as a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction. there is For clarity, FIG. 228 shows the lower left opening 3292e shaded. The lower left opening 3292e and the lower right opening 3293e have shapes corresponding to the lower left front convex portion 3282e and the lower right front convex portion 3283e of the top lens 3280, respectively.

A plurality of grooves 3296 are formed in the top center panel 3290 . Each groove 3296 is recessed from the surrounding surface, similar to the frame base engaging groove 3234 (see FIG. 171) of the upper front and rear frame 3230 . The left side 3292 and the right side 3293 are each provided with three grooves 3296, and these grooves 3296 extend over a predetermined length on the front surface 3290a (front surface) of the top center panel 3290. is formed to For clarity, FIG. 227 shows groove 3296 in black.

As shown in FIG. 229, the top center panel 3290 has a top protrusion 3297 . The upper end protrusion 3297 is formed at the upper end of the top center panel 3290 so as to protrude rearward. For clarity, in FIG. 229, the upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297 is hatched.

A boss portion 3291b and a boss portion 3291c are formed on the rear side of the central portion 3291. As shown in FIG. When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the boss portions 3291b and 3291c are inserted into the through holes 3281b and 3281c of the top lens 3280, respectively. As described above, the through holes 3281b and 3281c of the top lens 3280 respectively overlap the screw holes 3224a and 3224b of the top frame base 3210 (see FIG. 220).

The screw inserted through the screw hole 3224 a of the top frame base 3210 is screwed into the hole formed in the boss portion 3291 b of the top center panel 3290 , and the screw inserted through the screw hole 3224 b of the top frame base 3210 is screwed into the top center panel 3290 . Top frame base 3210, top lens 3280, and top center panel 3290 are connected by screwing them into holes formed in boss portion 3291c.

As shown in FIGS. 230 to 232, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the top lens 3280 is arranged so as to be fitted to the rear side of the top center panel 3290 . As a result, a central front convex portion 3281a, three front left convex portions 3284 (a first front left convex portion 3284a, a second front left convex portion 3284b, and a third front left convex portion 3284c) and three front left convex portions 3284c in the top lens 3280 are formed. The right front convex portion 3285 (the first right front convex portion 3285a, the second right front convex portion 3285b, and the third right front convex portion 3285c), the left lower front convex portion 3282e, and the lower right front convex portion 3283e are each , a central opening 3291a in the top center panel 3290, three left openings 3294 (first left opening 3294a, second left opening 3294b, and third left opening 3294c), three right openings 3295 (first right opening 3295a, third left opening 3294c). 2 right opening 3295b and third right opening 3295c), the lower left opening 3292e, and the lower right opening 3293e, and these openings in the top center panel 3290 are closed by the projections of the top lens 3280. be.

The front side surface of the top lens 3280 (parts other than the convex portions such as the central front convex portion 3281a, the left front convex portion 3284, the right front convex portion 3285, the left lower front convex portion 3282e, and the lower right front convex portion 3283e) , the rear side surface of the top center panel 3290 (parts excluding the openings such as the central opening 3291a, the left opening 3294, the right opening 3295, the lower left opening 3292e, and the lower right opening 3293e). The surfaces will substantially abut as a whole.

For clarity, FIG. 230 shows the outer edge of the top lens 3280 in bold. FIG. 231 shows a state in which the top lens 3280 and the top center panel 3290 with the upper door mechanism UD assembled are cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction (a plane passing through the first left front convex portion 3284a of the top lens 3280). ing. In FIG. 231, the cut surface of the top center panel 3290 is shaded, and the cut surface of the top lens 3280 is shaded. Also, in FIG. 232, a central front convex portion 3281a and three front left convex portions 3284 (a first front left convex portion 3284a, a second front left convex portion 3284b, and a third front left convex portion 3284c) of the top lens 3280 are shown. , three right front protrusions 3285 (a first right front protrusion 3285a, a second right front protrusion 3285b, and a third right front protrusion 3285c), a left lower front protrusion 3282e, and a lower right front protrusion 3283e. are indicated by diagonal lines.

<Luminous effects in the front top unit 3200>
As described above, the light incident on the central rear concave portion 3281d of the top lens 3280 (the light emitted from the center LED 3252a) passes through the central opening 3291a of the top center panel 3290 and passes through the central front convex portion 3281a of the top lens 3280. It is discharged to the outside of the machine 1.

In addition, light incident on the three left rear recesses 3286 (first left rear recess 3286a, second left rear recess 3286b, and third left rear recess 3286c) in the top lens 3280 (emitted from the center LED 3252c light) passes through three left openings 3294 (a first left opening 3294a, a second left opening 3294b, and a third left opening 3294c) in the top center panel 3290, and passes through three left front convex portions in the top lens 3280. 3284 (the first left front protrusion 3284a, the second left front protrusion 3284b, and the third left front protrusion 3284c) are discharged to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

In addition, the light incident on the three right rear recesses 3287 (the first right rear recess 3287a, the second right rear recess 3287b, and the third right rear recess 3287c) in the top lens 3280 (the light emitted from the center LED 3252e light) passes through the three right openings 3295 (the first right opening 3295a, the second right opening 3295b, and the third right opening 3295c) in the top center panel 3290, and passes through the three right front convex portions of the top lens 3280. 3285 (the first right front protrusion 3285a, the second right front protrusion 3285b, and the third right front protrusion 3285c) are discharged to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

In addition, the light incident on the top lens 3280 other than the formation region of the central rear recess 3281d, the formation region of the left rear recess 3286, and the formation region of the right rear recess 3287 (center LED 3252b, center LED 3252d, center LED 3252f , and light emitted from the center LED 3252g) is emitted to the formation region of the central opening 3291a in the top center panel 3290, the three left openings 3294 (first left opening 3294a, second left opening 3294b, and third left opening 3294c). ) and three right openings 3295 (first right opening 3295a, second right opening 3295b, and third right opening 3295c).

The top center panel 3290 is made of a translucent material, and appears silver when the center LED 3252 does not emit light. A metal film is vapor-deposited on the entire front surface 3290a (see FIG. 227) of the top center panel 3290, and tin and indium, for example, are used as metals to be vapor-deposited. As a result, the light transmittance of the top center panel 3290 is approximately 20%. It should be noted that, in groove portion 3296 (a portion corresponding to groove bottom portion 3234a shown in FIG. 171), the vapor-deposited metal film is thinner than other portions in front surface 3290a. Thereby, the light transmittance of the groove portion 3296 is relatively high.

When the center LED 3252 is emitting light, light incident on the top center panel 3290 (light emitted from the center LED 3252b, center LED 3252d, center LED 3252f, and center LED 3252g) passes through the top center panel 3290, and the light is emitted from the front surface 3290a of the top center panel 3290 to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1. As a result, the color of the top center panel 3290 changes from silver according to the emission colors of the center LED 3252b, the center LED 3252d, the center LED 3252f, and the center LED 3252g.

Here, as described above, the passage of the light emitted from the center LED 3252a, the passage of the light emitted from the center LED 3252c, and the passage of the light emitted from the center LED 3252e are respectively formed by the top reflector 3260, The left arrow eye reflector 3270L and the right arrow eye reflector 3270R are separated from the passage paths of the light emitted from the other center LEDs 3252 . A top reflector 3260 separates the passage of light emitted from the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f and the passage of light emitted from the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g.

As described above, the front top unit 3200 is divided into the following areas when viewed from the front.
(i) formation region of the central front convex portion 3281a in the top lens 3280 (ii) formation region of the three left front convex portions 3284 in the top lens 3280 (iii) formation region of the three right front convex portions 3285 in the top lens 3280 ( iv) The area to the left of (i), excluding (ii) (v) The area to the right of (i), excluding (iii)

The region (i) above is illuminated by light emitted from the center LED 3252a. The region (ii) above is illuminated by light emitted from the center LED 3252c. The region (iii) is illuminated by light emitted from the center LED 3252e. The area (iv) is illuminated by light emitted from the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f. The area (v) is illuminated by light emitted from the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g.

Therefore, it is possible to vary the appearance of colors in the regions (i) to (v) according to the colors of light emitted from the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g. For example, by changing the emission colors of the center LEDs 3252a to 3252g according to the game situation, it is possible to change how the colors appear in the areas (i) to (v).

For example, in the first state (for example, normal state), the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f is set to the first color (for example, orange), and the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g is set to the second color ( For example, white), and in the second state (for example, the first CZ state), the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f, and the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g are all the first color ( For example, orange), and in a third state (for example, a second CZ state different from the first CZ state), the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f, and the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g , can all be configured to be a second color (eg, white).

As a result, in the first state (for example, normal state), the region (iv) appears to be based on the first color (for example, orange), while the region (v) is A second color (for example, white) appears to be the base color, and in the second state (for example, the first CZ state), both the above regions (iv) and (v) are changed to the first color. A color (for example, orange) appears to be the base color, and in the third state (for example, the second CZ state), both the regions (iv) and (v) are changed to the second color ( For example, it is possible to make it look like a color based on white).

At this time, the emission color of the center LED 3252c may be the same as or different from the emission colors of the center LEDs 3252b and 3252f. For example, depending on the situation of the game, when the center LED3252b and the center LED3252f emitted light of the same color (for example, orange) is emitted from the center LED3252c, the center LED3252b and the center LED3252f different color from the emitted light (for example , blue) may be switched between the case where the light is emitted from the center LED 3252c.

Similarly, the emission color of the center LED 3252e may be the same as or different from the emission colors of the center LEDs 3252d and 3252g. For example, depending on the situation of the game, when the center LED3252d and the center LED3252g emitted light of the same color (e.g., white) is emitted from the center LED3252e, the center LED3252d and the center LED3252g and a different color (e.g., It is also possible to switch between the case where the light of blue) is emitted from the center LED 3252e.

Further, the emission color of the center LED 3252a may be the same color as the emission color of the other center LEDs 3252, or may be a different color. For example, the light emission color of the center LED 3252a may be configured to be always different from the light emission colors of the other center LEDs 3252 (for example, green).

As described above, the inclined wall portion 3264a, the inclined wall portion 3265a, the inclined wall portion 3266a, and the inclined wall portion 3267a of the top reflector 3260 (see FIGS. 209 and 210) and the inner wall surface of the arrow eye reflector 3270 3270a (see FIG. 215) is formed with an inclination that widens toward the front. As a result, the light emitted from the center LED 3252 advances while being diffused from the light source, so that the top lens 3280 to the top center panel 3290 can be illuminated evenly.

Further, part of the light emitted from the center LED 3252b is guided to the lower left front convex portion 3282e of the top lens 3280, passes through the lower left opening 3292e of the top center panel 3290, and is emitted from the lower left front convex portion 3282e to the pachislot machine 1. released to the outside of the Similarly, part of the light emitted from the center LED 3252d is guided to the lower right front convex portion 3283e of the top lens 3280, passes through the lower right opening 3293e of the top center panel 3290, and passes through the lower right front convex portion 3283e. is discharged to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 from. As a result, together with the semicircular image 3011b displayed on the central screen 3010 to the reflected image 3216a (see FIG. 181) displayed on the image reflecting surface 3216 of the top frame base 3210, the semicircular images 3011b to 3216a are displayed. is the outline of the character's face, and the light emitted from the lower left front convex portion 3282e and the lower right front convex portion 3283e can be seen by the player as if they were the character's eyes.

In addition, light of the same color (for example, orange) as the emission color of the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252f is emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440a (see FIG. 199) in the left speaker unit 3400L, and is the same as the emission color of the center LED 3252d and the center LED 3252g. Colored (for example, white) light may be emitted from the speaker unit LED 3440a in the right speaker unit 3400R. As a result, the light emission effect in the front top unit 3200 and the light emission effect in the speaker unit 3400 can be cooperated. In order to enhance the sense of unity in these light emitting performances, the inner portion 3432 (see FIG. 199) of the speaker unit 3400 may be vapor-deposited with a metal film similar to that of the top center panel 3290 .

<Measures against light leakage in the front top unit 3200>
FIG. 233 is an exploded perspective view of the top frame base and top center panel viewed slightly from above. FIG. 234 is a perspective view showing a state in which the top center panel is attached to the top frame base as seen from slightly above. FIG. 235 is a perspective view of the top center panel from the rear and slightly below; FIG. 236 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top frame base as seen from the front. FIG. 237 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the top center panel viewed from the rear and slightly above. FIG. 238 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, top lens, and top center panel; FIG. 239 is a perspective view of the top lens viewed from below. FIG. 240 is a cross-sectional view of the top lens. FIG. 241 is a schematic diagram of the top center LED board, top frame base, top lens, and top center panel. FIG. 242 is a cross-sectional view of the top frame base, top lens, and top center panel;

As shown in FIGS. 233 and 234, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the top center panel 3290 includes the front edge 3211b of the upper wall 3211, the front edge 3214b of the lower wall 3214, and the fifth It roughly matches the external shape of the figure surrounded by the connecting portion 3222e and the sixth connecting portion 3222f. The top center panel 3290 is arranged along these front edge 3211b, front edge 3214b, fifth connection portion 3222e, and sixth connection portion 3222f.

Thus, in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD, the top frame base 3210 has a central region 3223a, a first left region 3223b, a first right region 3223c, a second left region 3223d, and a second right region 3223e (Fig. 204) is covered from the front by a top center panel 3290 .

The top wall 3211 of the top frame base 3210 has a top wall front side 3226 . The shape of the upper wall front side surface 3226 substantially matches the shape of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 . When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 is arranged above the upper wall front side surface 3226 of the top frame base 3210, and the upper wall front side surface 3226 is the upper end protrusion. It is covered by part 3297 . At this time, the lower surface 3297b (see FIG. 235) of the upper end projecting portion 3297 is substantially in contact with the front side surface 3226 of the upper wall.

The top frame base 3210 also has a lower contact surface 3227 that protrudes downward from the front portion of the lower surface wall 3214 . On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 235, the top center panel 3290 has a lower abutment surface 3298 near the lower end on the back side. When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the lower contact surface 3227 of the top frame base 3210 and the lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other.

233 shows the upper wall front side surface 3226 of the top frame base 3210 with hatching, FIG. A lower surface 3297b and a lower contact surface 3298 of the upper end protrusion 3297 in the center panel 3290 are shown in black. The positional relationship between top frame base 3210 and top center panel 3290 will be described in more detail below.

As shown in FIGS. 236 and 237, the top frame base 3210 has an upper abutment surface 3228 slightly raised from the rear end of the front side surface 3226 of the upper wall. For clarity, FIG. 236 shows the upper abutment surface 3228 in black. The upper end of the upper contact surface 3228 is continuous with the upper wall main surface 3211c. Thus, the upper wall main surface 3211c and the upper wall front side surface 3226 are connected by the upper contact surface 3228, and the upper contact surface 3228 has a step.

The upper wall main surface 3211 c and the upper wall front side surface 3226 constitute the upper surface of the upper surface wall 3211 . A rear edge 3297 c of the upper end protrusion 3297 in the top center panel 3290 has a shape corresponding to the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210 . In addition, the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 is formed to have a thickness that is approximately the same (slightly smaller) than the vertical length of the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210 .

As a result, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the rear edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 substantially contacts the upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210 over the entire left-right direction. ing. The upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 and the main surface 3211c of the upper wall of the top frame base 3210 are positioned to form substantially the same plane.

Also, the lower contact surface 3227 of the top frame base 3210 has a first lower contact surface 3227a and a second lower contact surface 3227b. The first lower contact surface 3227a is formed to extend in the left-right direction as a slightly curved curved surface on the left side of the left lower protrusion 3225a and the right side of the right lower protrusion 3225b (see FIG. 220). . The second lower contact surface 3227b is formed from the lower left projecting portion 3225a to the lower right projecting portion 3225b. Although FIG. 236 only shows the left portion of top frame base 3210, the right portion of top frame base 3210 has a similar structure.

A front edge 3214b of the lower surface wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 is formed to protrude forward from the upper end of the first lower contact surface 3227a. For clarity, FIG. 236 shows the first lower abutment surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 in hatching, and the front edge 3214b and the second lower abutment surface 3227b of the bottom wall 3214 in black.

The lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 has a shape corresponding to the lower contact surface 3227 of the top frame base 3210, and the lower contact surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 and the top frame base 3210 are aligned. The lower contact surface 3227 can be brought into contact with the entire lateral direction.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 237, the lower abutment surface 3298 of the top center panel 3290 has a first lower abutment surface 3298a and a second lower abutment surface 3298b. The first lower contact surface 3298a is formed to extend in the left-right direction as a slightly curved curved surface on the left side of the left bottom protrusion 3292d and the right side of the right bottom protrusion 3293d. The second lower abutment surface 3298b is formed from the lower left projecting portion 3292d to the lower right projecting portion 3293d. Although FIG. 237 only shows the left side portion of top center panel 3290, the right side portion of top center panel 3290 has a similar structure.

The vicinity of the lower end portions on the back side of the lower left side portion 3292c and the lower right side portion 3293c (see FIG. 227) has a structure that bulges slightly toward the rear. It is a side contact surface 3298a. For clarity, FIG. 237 shows the first lower abutment surface 3298a in hatching and the second lower abutment surface 3298b in black. When the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 substantially contacts the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210. The second lower abutment surface 3298b substantially abuts the second lower abutment surface 3227b of the top frame base 3210. As shown in FIG.

In FIG. 238, the top frame base 3210, the top lens 3280, and the top center panel 3290 in the state in which the upper door mechanism UD is assembled are placed on the front-rear vertical plane (the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290). It shows a state of cutting along a plane passing through the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290. FIG. For clarity, in FIG. 238, the cut plane of the top frame base 3210 is hatched, the cut plane of the top lens 3280 is black, and the cut plane of the top center panel 3290 is shaded.

As shown in FIG. 238, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 and the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other. ing. In FIG. 238, a substantially abutting portion (boundary portion) between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 at the bottom thereof is shown as a boundary portion A. As shown in FIG. A lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 is positioned near the boundary A. As shown in FIG. A gap X is formed.

As shown in FIG. 239, the bottom edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 is coated with black light shielding paint. As a result, the lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 has a light shielding property and can block the passage of light. The coating method is not particularly limited, and for example, spray coating using a masking jig can be employed. In FIG. 239, the lower edge 3280a (the portion coated with light shielding paint) of the top lens 3280 is shown in black.

As shown in FIG. 240, the front-side surface (front-side main surface 3282c and front-side main surface 3283c) and the back-side surface (rear-side main surface 3282f and rear-side main surface 3282f) of the top lens 3280 are substantially parallel to each other. is formed to be A lower edge 3280a is formed as a portion connecting these surfaces (the portion indicated by the thick line in the drawing). Note that FIG. 240 shows a state in which the top lens 3280 is cut along a vertical plane in the front-rear direction. For clarity, FIG. 240 shows the cross section of the top lens 3280 with hatching.

FIG. 241 schematically shows how the top center LED board 3250, the top lens 3280, and the top center panel 3290 in the assembled state of the upper door mechanism UD are cut along the front-rear vertical plane. 241, the cross section of the top frame base 3210 is hatched, the cross section of the top center panel 3290 is hatched, and the top reflector 3260 and the arrow eye reflector 3270 are omitted. .

As shown in FIG. 241, part of the light emitted from center LED 3252 and incident on top lens 3280 is guided inside top lens 3280 and reaches lower edge 3280a. However, the light cannot pass through the lower edge 3280a because the lower edge 3280a has light shielding properties. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light from passing through the lower edge 3280a and leaking out of the pachi-slot machine 1 through the very small gap formed in the gap X and the boundary portion A.

Note that, as shown in FIG. 238, above the boundary portion A, a front edge 3214b of the lower surface wall 3214 of the top frame base 3210 is arranged. As a result, if there is a slight gap in the boundary portion A, even if a wire-shaped device is to enter through the gap, the front edge 3214b will be a hindrance and the entry will be blocked. It is possible. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act from being carried out through the gap.

As described above, the lower edge 3280a of the top lens 3280 is coated with black light-shielding paint (painted black) so as to have a light-shielding property, but the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 is coated with the black light-shielding paint. There is no black paint like this. This point will be described below.

As shown in FIG. 238, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the upper wall front side surface 3226 of the top frame base 3210 and the lower surface 3297b of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other. The upper contact surface 3228 of 3210 and the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end projecting portion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other. In FIG. 238, a substantially abutting portion (boundary portion) between the upper portions of the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 is shown as a boundary portion B. As shown in FIG. In addition, between the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 and the boundary portion B, the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 are not in contact, and between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290, A gap Y is formed.

Here, the boundary portion A is only a portion (vertical portion) where the first lower contact surface 3227a of the top frame base 3210 and the first lower contact surface 3298a of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other. , and the structure of the boundary between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 is simple (straight in cross section). On the other hand, the boundary portion B consists of a portion (front-rear direction portion) where the upper wall front side surface 3226 of the top frame base 3210 and the lower surface 3297b of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other, and the top frame base 3210. The upper contact surface 3228 of the base 3210 and the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other (vertical portion). The structure of the boundary with the center panel 3290 is complicated and intricate (a bent structure in a cross-sectional view).

Therefore, in the boundary portion B, it is more difficult for light to pass through than in the boundary portion A, and even if the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 does not have a light-shielding property, the light passing through the upper edge 3280b is transmitted through the gap Y and the boundary portion. Leakage to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1 through a very small gap formed in B is less likely to occur. On the other hand, the light passing through the gap Y is incident on the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290, thereby making it possible to illuminate the upper end protrusion 3297. FIG.

If the structure of the boundary between the top frame base 3210 and the top center panel 3290 is intricate, the lower edge of the lower left projecting portion 3282d of the top lens 3280 is less likely to leak light from the boundary. And the lower edge of the lower right projecting portion 3283d (see FIG. 239) may not be painted black as described above.

In FIG. 242, the top frame base 3210, the top lens 3280, and the top center panel 3290 in the state where the upper door mechanism UD is assembled are placed in the vertical plane in the front-rear direction (the lower left front projection 3282e of the top lens 3280 and the top center panel 3290). 3292e) is cut along the plane passing through the lower left opening 3292e. For clarity, in FIG. 242, the cut plane of the top frame base 3210 is hatched, the cut plane of the top lens 3280 is black, and the cut plane of the top center panel 3290 is shaded.

As shown in FIG. 242, when the upper door mechanism UD is assembled, the second lower contact surface 3227b of the top frame base 3210 and the second lower contact surface 3298b of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other. ing. Above the second lower contact surface 3298b of the top center panel 3290, a lower rear protrusion 3299 is formed to protrude rearward beyond the second lower contact surface 3298b. On the other hand, on the upper side of the second lower contact surface 3227b in the top frame base 3210, a concave portion 3229 is formed which is recessed with respect to the second lower contact surface 3227b. A lower rear projection 3299 of the top center panel 3290 is accommodated in the recess 3229 of the top frame base 3210 .

In this way, the boundary between the lower left protrusion 3225a of the top frame base 3210 and the lower left protrusion 3292d of the top center panel 3290 has a complicated structure, and light is less likely to leak from the boundary. It's becoming The same applies to the boundary between the lower right protrusion 3225b of the top frame base 3210 and the lower right protrusion 3293d of the top center panel 3290. FIG. Therefore, the lower edge of the top lens 3280 (the lower edge of the lower left protruding portion 3282d and the lower edge of the lower right protruding portion 3283d) arranged near these boundaries should not be painted black as described above. Of course, black coating may be applied. Also, the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 may be painted black.

The method for imparting a light-shielding property to the lower edge 3280a and the upper edge 3280b of the top lens 3280 is not limited to painting. A separate member (for example, a member such as the side light shielding plate 3150 shown in FIG. 154) may be arranged from below the lower edge 3280a to above the upper edge 3280b.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix A>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine in which a light-collecting member having a light-reflecting portion is used to make a light-emitting decorative portion emit strong light, thereby enhancing the decorative effect (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018631).

In the process of earnestly studying a gaming machine equipped with such light-emitting means, the inventor of the present invention thought that the appearance of the gaming machine could be improved by devising the structure of the light guide member. I came up with an idea.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and an object of the present invention is to improve the appearance of a gaming machine provided with light emitting means.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(A-1) a light emitting means (center LED 3252) capable of emitting light;
a light guide member (top lens 3280) capable of guiding light emitted from the light emitting means;
a first member (top center panel 3290) disposed on the downstream side of the light guide member in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means;
The light guide member includes a light suppressing portion (black painted portion) that suppresses the progress of light emitted from the light emitting means.
A gaming machine characterized by:

In developing the gaming machine according to the present invention, the present inventor placed the first member (top center It was assumed that when the panel 3290) was arranged, the light might leak from an unintended location. Then, the inventor of the present invention came up with the idea that the appearance of the gaming machine could be improved by taking a measure capable of preventing such light leakage. In this regard, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the light guide member (top lens 3280) has a light suppressing portion (black painted portion) that suppresses the progress of light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252). ) is provided. By configuring in this way, it is possible to achieve light emission in a desired manner in the vicinity of the first member (top center panel 3290), thereby improving the appearance of the gaming machine. succeeded in.

A predetermined gap exists on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) with respect to the light suppressing portion (black painted portion). If not provided, there is a concern that the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) may leak out of the gaming machine through the gap. According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to prevent such light leakage due to the presence of the light suppressing portion (black painted portion). The predetermined gap is not particularly limited as long as it has a space through which light can pass. A gap, a hole (for example, a screw hole) provided in the first member (top center panel 3290), and the like can be mentioned. Measures that can prevent light leakage are not limited to black paint (application of light-shielding paint), but may be affixed with a light-shielding seal (sheet) or a separate member with light-shielding properties. It may be arranged.

(A-2) The gaming machine of (A-1),
A second member (top frame base 3210) arranged to substantially contact the first member,
The light suppressing portion is provided at a first position (lower edge 3280a) in the light guide member,
The first position is a boundary portion between the first member and the second member rather than the second position (the front main surface 3282c and the front main surface 3283c) through which the light emitted from the light emitting means can pass. close to
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the second member (top frame base 3210) is arranged so as to be substantially in contact with the first member (top center panel 3290), and the light suppressing portion (black painted part) is provided at a first position (lower edge 3280a) in the light guide member (top lens 3280), and the first position (lower edge 3280a) is provided for light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252). is closer to the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) than the second position (front main surface 3282c and front main surface 3283c) through which the light can pass. . As a result, light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) and reaching the first position (lower edge 3280a) in the light guide member (top lens 3280) passes through the first position (lower edge 3280a). Therefore, even if there is a slight gap at the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210), the outside of the gaming machine can be seen through the gap. It is possible to prevent light from leaking into the

In particular, since the second member (top frame base 3210) has a black appearance, light leaks from the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210). If it is put away, there is a concern that the light leakage will be conspicuous due to the contrast with the black second member (top frame base 3210), and the appearance of the gaming machine will be greatly spoiled. In this respect, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to prevent such light leakage and appropriately maintain the appearance of the gaming machine.

The position (first position) where the measure capable of preventing light leakage is applied is not particularly limited. It is possible. At this time, the edge (edge) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) is positioned near the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) (boundary It is possible to dispose the light guide member (top lens 3280) such that the light guide member (top lens 3280) Alternatively, the light guide member (top lens 3280) is arranged so that the edge (edge) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) faces the boundary between the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210). (top lens 3280) may be provided.

In the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are substantially in contact with each other at boundary A and boundary B, respectively, and boundary B and boundary A. It was explained as having a complicated structure in comparison. Specifically, the boundary portion B is defined as a portion (referred to as a first portion) where the upper wall front side surface 3226 of the top frame base 3210 and the lower surface 3297b of the upper end protrusion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are substantially in contact with each other; The upper contact surface 3228 of the top frame base 3210 and the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end projecting portion 3297 of the top center panel 3290 are configured by a portion (referred to as a second portion) where the rear end edge 3297c is in substantial contact. Assuming that the first portion and the second portion are flat, the angle between the normal to the first portion and the normal to the second portion is approximately 90°.

The above matters are expressed more generally as follows. When the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are substantially in contact at the first boundary (boundary A) and the second boundary (boundary B), respectively. , of the normals at any point on the first boundary (boundary A), the angle formed by the normal closest to a predetermined direction (for example, the vertical direction) and the farthest normal (of each normal The maximum value of the angle formed) is θ ₁ , and among the normals at an arbitrary point on the second boundary (boundary B), the closest normal and the farthest normal to a predetermined direction (for example, the vertical direction) Let _θ2 be the angle with the line (maximum angle between normals). For example, when the first boundary portion (boundary portion A) is formed by flat surfaces substantially in contact with each other, θ ₁ =0. Further, the second boundary portion (boundary portion B) extends in the second direction (eg, the vertical direction) and the portion where the flat surfaces extending in the first direction (eg, the front-rear direction) substantially abut each other. When the existing flat surfaces are composed of portions that substantially abut against each other, _θ2 is the angle (e.g., , 90°).

In the present invention, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are substantially aligned at the first boundary (boundary A) and the second boundary (boundary B), respectively. When the light guide member (top lens 3280) is in contact with the edge (edge) of the light guide member (top lens 3280), the edge (edge) near the first boundary (boundary A) is the light suppressing portion (black painted portion). ), on the other hand, it is possible to configure so that the edge (edge) near the second boundary (boundary B) is not used as the light suppressing portion (black painted portion). Such a configuration may be adopted when _θ2 is a larger value than _θ1 . Further, when θ ₁ is α or less (for example, 30° or less, 15° or less, 5° or less, etc.), the edge (end portion) near the first boundary portion (boundary portion A) is replaced by the light suppressing portion ( black painted portion). Further, when _θ2 is β or more (for example, 45° or more, 60° or more, 75° or more, etc.), the edge (edge) near the second boundary (boundary B) is the light suppressing portion ( black painted portion) may be omitted.

In addition, the first member (top center panel 3290) has the first member side contact surface X (eg, the first lower side contact surface 3298a) and the first member side contact surface Y (eg, the lower surface of the upper end protrusion 3297). 3297b), and a first member side contact surface Z (for example, the rear end edge 3297c of the upper end protrusion 3297), and the second member (top frame base 3210) has a second member side contact surface X (for example, , first lower contact surface 3227a), a second member side contact surface Y (for example, the upper wall front surface 3226), and a second member side contact surface Z (for example, the upper contact surface 3228). The first member side contact surface X, the first member side contact surface Y, and the first member side contact surface Z are the second member side contact surface X and the second member side contact surface, respectively. Y and the contact surface Z on the second member side, the contact portion between the contact surface X on the first member side and the contact surface X on the second member side is defined as a first boundary. A substantially contact portion (first portion) between the first member side contact surface Y and the second member side contact surface Y and the first member side contact surface Z and the first member side contact surface Z. A substantially contact portion (second portion) with the two-member side contact surface Z may be configured as a second boundary portion (boundary portion B). When these contact surfaces are all substantially flat, the angle between the normal to the first member side contact surface Y and the normal to the first member side contact surface Z (at the second member side contact surface Y The angle between the normal and the normal to the contact surface Z on the second member side) is _θ2 above. In addition, the normal direction to the second member side contact surface Y (the normal direction to the first member side contact surface Y) and the edge (for example, the upper edge 3280b) near the second boundary portion (boundary portion B) γ or less (e.g., 45° or less, 30° or less, 15° or less, etc.) or 0° (i.e., these normal directions are (substantially parallel).

In this specification, the term “substantially abutting” is a concept that includes not only a state in which two members are in complete contact, but also a state in which two members are close to each other. "Proximity" refers to a state in which the distance (gap) between two members is sufficiently small relative to the size of these members. For example, the distance between the two members is 1/20 or less (or 1/50 or less, 1/100 or less, etc.) of the size (e.g., the length in the horizontal direction) of one member (e.g., the smaller member) ), then the members are said to be close to each other. Alternatively, two members may be said to be in close proximity if the distance between them is 5 mm or less (or 2 mm or less, 1 mm or less, 0.5 mm or less, etc.).

(A-3) The gaming machine of (A-1) or (A-2),
A second member (top frame base 3210) arranged to substantially contact the first member,
The first member and the second member overlap vertically in the vicinity of the edge (upper edge 3280b) in the vertical direction of the light guide member,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the second member (top frame base 3210) is arranged to substantially contact the first member (top center panel 3290), and the light guide member (top lens 3280), the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap vertically in the vicinity of the edge (upper edge 3280b) in the vertical direction. Here, when the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) reaches the edge (upper edge 3280b) of the light guide member (top lens 3280), the emission direction of the light at the edge (upper edge 3280b) is upward or downward. On the other hand, if there is a slight gap in the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap vertically, the direction in which the gap extends is , the front-rear direction or the left-right direction (a direction different from the up-down direction). Therefore, even if the light emitted from the edge (upper edge 3280b) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) enters the gap, the light travels in the gap because the direction in which the light travels differs from the direction in which the gap is formed. Passing through gaps is difficult. As a result, it is possible to prevent light from leaking out of the game machine through the gap.

In the seventh embodiment, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap vertically is the upper edge (upper edge 3280b) of the light guide member (top lens 3280). ) was explained as being arranged in the vicinity. This makes it possible to prevent upward light leakage. In this regard, upward light leakage is difficult to see from the player sitting in front of the table, but may be seen from other customers. A good appearance can be realized also for other customers.

However, in the present invention, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap vertically is the lower edge (lower edge) of the light guide member (top lens 3280). 3280a) may be located nearby. Further, in the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) is arranged above the second member (top frame base 3210). In the present invention, the second member (top frame base 3210) may be arranged above the first member (top center panel 3290).

In the present invention, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap vertically constitutes the second boundary portion (boundary portion B). good. In addition, in the present invention, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are provided in the vicinity of the edge (left edge or right edge) in the horizontal direction of the light guide member (top lens 3280). may overlap on the left and right. In this case, the portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) overlap horizontally may constitute the second boundary portion (boundary portion B). . In the second boundary (boundary B), the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are substantially aligned compared to the first boundary (boundary A). It may be configured such that the area of the contacting portion is increased.

In the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are arranged at the first boundary (boundary A) and the second boundary (boundary B), respectively. It is explained that they are almost in contact with each other. In the present invention, the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) are the first boundary (boundary A) and the second boundary (boundary B). , may be substantially abutted only at one boundary. At this time, the one boundary portion where the first member (top center panel 3290) and the second member (top frame base 3210) substantially abut may be the first boundary portion (boundary portion A), It may be a second boundary (boundary B).

(A-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-3) above,
The first member has translucency,
A plurality of colors are provided as colors of the light emitted from the light emitting means,
Appearance of the first member when light of a first color (orange) is emitted from the light emitting means and light of a second color (white) is emitted from the light emitting means different colors,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, when the light of the first color (orange) is emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252), and when the light of the second color (orange) is emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) The external color of the first member (top center panel 3290) is different when white light is emitted. Thus, by switching the color of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) according to the game situation, an attractive light emitting effect can be realized.

As the light emitting means in the present invention, it is desirable to use full-color LEDs, but it is also possible to use monochromatic LEDs.

(A-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-4) above,
The first member has a first opening (first left opening 3294a) and a second opening (second left opening 3294b),
The first region (first left front projection 3284a) of the light guide member is visible through the first opening,
The second region (second left front convex portion 3284b) of the light guide member is visible through the second opening,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) has a first opening (first left opening 3294a) and a second opening (second left opening 3294b). The first region (first left front projection 3284a) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) is visible through the first opening (first left opening 3294a), and the second opening (first left opening 3294a) is visible. The second region (second left front projection 3284b) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) can be seen through the second left opening 3294b). As a result, the first region (first left front convex portion 3284a) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) is opened through the first opening (first left opening 3294a) and the second opening (second left opening 3294b). And it is possible to show the lighting mode in the second region (the second left front convex portion 3284b) to the player, and it is possible to realize a novel light emitting effect. In addition, the first region (first left front convex portion 3284a) and the second region (second left front convex portion 3284b) are each configured as part of one light guide member (top lens 3280). However, it is not necessary to fit a light guide member (lens) in each of the first opening (first left opening 3294a) and the second opening (second left opening 3294b). is not required, and it is sufficient to dispose one light guide member (top lens 3280) as a whole), so the burden on the manufacturing process can be reduced. In addition, when a light guide member (lens) is fitted in each of the first opening (first left opening 3294a) and the second opening (second left opening 3294b), the number of parts increases, and accordingly management becomes difficult. It is conceivable that the burden on the surface will also increase, but according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, such a burden can be reduced.

As the first opening and the second opening in the present invention, a plurality of openings (a central opening 3291a, a first left opening 3294a, a second left opening 3294b, a third Any two of left opening 3294c, first right opening 3295a, second right opening 3295b, third right opening 3295c, lower left opening 3292e, and lower right opening 3293e) can be employed. Further, as the first region and the second region in the present invention, a plurality of convex portions (central front convex portion 3281a, first left front convex portion 3284a, second left front convex portion 3284a, and second front left convex portion 3284a) formed in the light guide member (top lens 3280) are included. A convex portion 3284b, a third front left convex portion 3284c, a first front right convex portion 3285a, a second front right convex portion 3285b, a third front right convex portion 3285c, a lower left front convex portion 3282e, and a lower right front convex portion 3283e. ), it is possible to employ two protrusions corresponding to the two openings in the first member (top center panel 3290).

(A-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-5) above,
The first member has openings (left opening 3294 and right opening 3295),
specific regions of the light guide member (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285) are visible through the opening;
As the light emitting means, a first light emitting means (a center LED 3252c and a center LED 3252e) capable of emitting light to the specific region, and a light guide member to emit light to regions other than the specific region. A possible second light emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d) is provided,
A partition member (a left arrow eye reflector 3270L and a right arrow eye reflector 3270R) that partitions the passage of light emitted from the first light emitting means and the passage of light emitted from the second light emitting means,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) has openings (left opening 3294 and right opening 3295), openings (left opening 3294 and right opening 3295), the specific regions (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) can be visually recognized. In addition, as a light emitting means (center LED 3252), a first light emitting means (center LED 3252c and center LED 3252e) capable of emitting light to a specific region (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285), and light guide A second light emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d) capable of emitting light to a region other than the specific region (left front convex portion 3284 and right front convex portion 3285) of the member (top lens 3280) is provided. The passage path of light emitted from the first light emitting means (center LED 3252c and center LED 3252e) and the passage path of light emitted from the second light emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d) are separated by the partition member (left arrow eye separated by reflector 3270L and right arrow eye reflector 3270R). As a result, using the first light emitting means (center LED 3252c and center LED 3252e) and the second light emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d), the specific region (left front convex portion 3284 and right front side) in the light guide member (top lens 3280) Since it is possible to irradiate the convex portion 3285) and other areas individually, the first light emitting means (center LED 3252c and center LED 3252e) and the second light emitting means (center LED 3252b and center LED 3252d) can be illuminated according to the game situation. ), it is possible to achieve a wide variety of lighting effects.

A central opening 3291a can also be employed as the opening in the present invention. In this case, the central front projection 3281a is used as the specific region, the center LED 3252a is used as the first light emitting means, the center LED 3252b and the center LED 3252d are used as the second light emitting means, and the top reflector 3260 is used as the partition member. can be adopted.

(A-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-6) above,
A partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) that partitions an area through which light emitted from the light emitting means can pass,
The tip portion (front side portion 3272) of the partition member is formed to be thinner than other portions of the partition member.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the area through which the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) can pass is partitioned by the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270), and the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270 ) (front side portion 3272) is formed thinner than other portions of the partition member. As a result, shadows due to the presence of the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) are less likely to occur, making it possible to achieve an attractive lighting effect.

Above all, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the tip portion (front side portion 3272) of the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) is substantially in contact with the light guide member (top lens 3280), and the partition member ( The placement relationship is such that a shadow due to the presence of the arrow eye reflector 3270) is likely to occur. If the tip portion (front side portion 3272) had approximately the same thickness as the other portion (base portion 3271), the possibility of such a shadow would increase. In this respect, in the seventh embodiment, the thickness of the tip portion (front side portion 3272) is made smaller than the thickness of the other portion (base portion 3271) (has a tapered shape), so that the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270 ) and the light guide member (top lens 3280) are reduced in area. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of such shadows.

In the seventh embodiment, a stepped portion is provided between these portions in order to make the thickness of the tip portion (front side portion 3272) smaller than the thickness of the other portion (base portion 3271). In the present invention, other shapes can be adopted as long as the thickness of the tip portion (front side portion 3272) is smaller than the thickness of the other portion (base portion 3271). 3270) may have a tapered shape.

(A-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-7) above,
A partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) that partitions an area through which light emitted from the light emitting means can pass,
The region partitioned by the partition member (the region surrounded by the peripheral wall of the cross-sectional opening 3270X) emits more light from the light-emitting means than the third position (the position closer to the light source). The fourth position downstream in the direction of travel of the light (farther from the light source) is larger,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the area through which the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) can pass is partitioned by the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270), and the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270 ) (the area surrounded by the peripheral wall portion of the cross-sectional opening 3270X) is closer to the light source than the third position (closer to the light source) than the third position (closer to the light source). The fourth position (position far from the light source) on the downstream side in the traveling direction of the light emitted from (the center LED 3252) is larger. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) can be advanced while being diffused, and a wide range of the light guide member (top lens 3280) can be illuminated, and the partition member (arrow eye reflector 3270) can also be made less likely to occur.

In this way, the arrow eye reflector 3270 has an inclination that widens toward the downstream side (forward) in the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means (the center LED 3252). When the reflector 3270 and the top reflector 3260 are integrally molded, the inclination is opposite to the inclination of the tapered surface of the mold (inclination for extracting the resin part from the mold). Therefore, the arrow eye reflector 3270 is preferably molded as a separate part from the top reflector 3260 .

When an LED is used as the light emitting means in the present invention, the type of the LED is not particularly limited, and a so-called surface-mounted LED or a so-called cannonball-type LED may be employed. As the surface-mounted LED, one formed by placing a light-emitting element in a recessed housing and filling the light-emitting element with resin can be used. As the bullet-shaped LED, it is possible to use one in which the shape of the resin constituting the outer surface is formed in the shape of a bullet. Since bullet-shaped LEDs are provided with a bullet-shaped encapsulating resin, they generally have directivity and a narrower irradiation range than surface-mounted LEDs.

As described above, it is preferable to use surface-mounted LEDs from the viewpoint of advancing the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) while diffusing it. Thereby, a wide range from the light guide member (top lens 3280) to the first member (top center panel 3290) can be illuminated. Also, since the amount of light included per unit solid angle is reduced, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the position of the light source. In this regard, if the position of the light source (the grain of the LED) is completely exposed to the player, it is feared that the appearance will deteriorate. It is difficult, and good design can be secured.

In addition, even if the light guide member (top lens 3280) is not provided, the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) can be directly incident on the first member (top center panel 3290) to achieve the seventh Although it is possible to perform the same light emission effects as in the embodiment, by arranging the light guide member (top lens 3280), the grains of the LED can be made less conspicuous. From the viewpoint of making the grains of the LED inconspicuous, the light guide member (top lens 3280) can be given a predetermined color ( For example, it may be colored milky white. Similarly, coloring the first member (top center panel 3290) in a predetermined color (for example, milky white) by mixing a pigment or dye into the resin material before molding the first member (top center panel 3290). good too. As a result, the entire light guide member (top lens 3280) to the first member (top center panel 3290) can be illuminated evenly and vaguely.

(A-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-8),
The first member has translucency, and a metal surface is formed on the outer surface.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) is translucent and has a metal surface on its outer surface. As a result, the first member (top center panel 3290) has a metallic luster even in a situation where light is not emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252). can. In addition, in a situation where light is emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252), it is possible to change the appearance color of the first member (top center panel 3290). A member (top center panel 3290) can be shown to the player.

Thus, the first member (top center panel 3290) can be configured as a half mirror with a metal surface. The half mirror is not limited to one having a light transmittance of 50%, and a half mirror having an arbitrary transmittance can be used as appropriate. The transmittance may be, for example, about 5% to 30% (eg, 20%) or about 30% to 60%. Such a half mirror can be manufactured by appropriately adjusting the amount of tin, indium, silver, aluminum, or the like to be vapor-deposited. The thicker the metal surface, the lower the transmittance and the stronger the metallic luster. The method of forming the metal surface is not particularly limited, and the metal surface may be coated by, for example, plating instead of metal vapor deposition. The color of the metal surface is not particularly limited, and any color can be adopted according to the type of metal used.

The position where the metal surface is formed on the first member (top center panel 3290) is not particularly limited, and the metal surface is formed at any position on the outer surface (surface visible from the outside) of the first member (top center panel 3290). It is possible to form For example, in addition to the front surface 3290a of the top center panel 3290, the upper surface 3297a of the upper end protrusion 3297 may be formed with a metal surface. Of course, no metal surface may be formed on the outer surface of the first member (top center panel 3290).

(A-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-9) above,
The first member has translucency, and has a first region (front surface 3290a) and a second region (groove 3296) having a higher light transmittance than the first region.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the first member (top center panel 3290) has translucency, and the second region (groove portion 3296) is positioned from the first region (front surface 3290a). also has a high light transmittance. As a result, the second region (groove portion 3296) allows the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) to pass more easily than the first region (front surface 3290a), and makes the region shine relatively strongly. can. In this way, by providing a contrast in light intensity between the first region (front surface 3290a) and the second region (groove 3296), an attractive light emission effect can be realized.

In the seventh embodiment, the second region (groove portion 3296) is formed as a recess, and compared to the first region (front surface 3290a), the first member (top center panel 3290) has a smaller thickness in the front-rear direction. It's becoming As a result, the second region (groove 3296) relatively easily allows the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) to pass therethrough. In addition, the second region (groove 3296) has a small amount of metal deposited and a relatively thin metal film due to its shape (groove). This further increases the difference in light transmittance between the first region (front surface 3290a) and the second region (groove 3296). The second region (groove portion 3296) may be configured so that no metal film is formed at all. The method for creating a difference in light transmittance between the first region (front surface 3290a) and the second region (groove 3296) is not particularly limited, and other than the above, for example, the second region (groove 3296) The color of the first region (front surface 3290a) may be a color that allows light to pass through more easily than the color of the first region (front surface 3290a).

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the second region (groove portion 3296) is formed to extend (linearly) over a predetermined length. As a result, even in a situation where light is not emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252), the second region (groove portion 3296) can be seen as a line formed for design purposes, thereby avoiding discomfort. There is no From this point of view, it is desirable that the second region (groove portion 3296) is formed in a predetermined pattern. The shape of the pattern is not particularly limited, and may be formed in the shape of a line (straight line or curve), may be a geometric pattern, or may be composed of letters, figures, symbols, or combinations thereof. may have been

Thus, the first member (top center panel 3290) can be configured as a decorative member (decorative member). The second member (top frame base 3210) can also be configured as a decorative member.

(A-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (A-1) to (A-10),
The light suppressing portion is a painted portion of the light guide member,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the light suppressing portion (black painted portion) is a painted portion of the light guide member (top lens 3280). As a result, even if the portion to suppress the progress of the light emitted from the light emitting means (center LED 3252) has a complicated or minute structure, the portion can be easily and inexpensively coated by coating. , measures can be taken to prevent light leakage.

In the seventh embodiment, the description has been given assuming that the light suppressing portion (black painted portion) is formed by applying black light shielding paint. As the light-shielding paint, conventionally known paints having light-absorbing properties can be appropriately employed. For example, the light-shielding paint can include a resin material and a colorant, and any paint (acrylic resin paint, water-based acrylic resin paint, urethane-based paint, etc.) can be used as the resin material. is. Any pigment (eg, carbon black) or dye can be used as the colorant. The color of the light suppressing portion is not limited to black, and may be gray, for example. By changing the kind and ratio of the pigment or dye contained in the light-shielding paint, it is possible to configure the light suppressing portion in an arbitrary color. The colorant may contain multiple types of pigments or dyes (black, white, red, yellow, blue, etc.).

In order to make the light leakage less conspicuous, the edge of the first member (top center panel 3290) (the edge located near the light suppressing portion (black painted portion) of the light guide member (top lens 3280) ) may also be coated with a light-shielding paint. However, if a metal surface is formed on the first member (top center panel 3290), the metal film may peel off during the painting operation. ) should not be painted.

<Appendix B>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine capable of producing effects by using a projector (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 6-035066 and Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-240459). According to such a game machine, a game image is projected from a projector onto a projection surface such as a screen, so that the image is displayed on the screen instead of the liquid crystal display device.

In the process of earnestly examining a game machine equipped with such a projector, the inventor of the present invention thought that it might be possible to increase the power of image expression by devising a layout structure around the screen. I came up with an idea.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the power of video representation.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment has the following features.

(B-1) a screen (central screen 3010);
a projector (projector 9020) that projects light for displaying an image on the screen;
and a predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050),
The projector and the screen are arranged so that the light projected by the projector is incident on the back side of the screen,
The predetermined member is arranged on the upstream side in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector with respect to the screen.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the projector (projector 9020) and the screen (central screen 3010) are configured so that the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is incident on the back side of the screen (central screen 3010). A predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050) is arranged on the upstream side of the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) on the screen (central screen 3010). By configuring in this way, the inventors have found that it is possible to enhance the impact of video representation using the screen (central screen 3010). In this respect, by arranging the predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050), the screen (central screen 3010) is reinforced compared to the case where the screen (central screen 3010) is provided alone, and the player can It is possible to protect the screen (central screen 3010) even if an external force is applied. Regarding such a predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050), it has also been considered to arrange it downstream in the traveling direction of the light projected by the projector (projector 9020). However, in this case, since the predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050) exists on the front side of the screen (central screen 3010), the player can see the image through the predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050). become. Therefore, there is a concern that the player will be given the impression that the image exists in the back, and the player's sense of immersion in the image will be reduced. On the other hand, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, it is possible to dispel such an impression, enhance the power of the image expression, and enhance the player's sense of immersion in the image. .

(B-2) The gaming machine of (B-1) above,
The predetermined member protects the screen from the back side of the screen,
The screen constitutes the outermost surface of the gaming machine,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050) protects the screen (central screen 3010) from the back side of the screen (central screen 3010), and protects the screen (central screen 3010). The screen 3010) constitutes the outermost surface of the gaming machine (pachi-slot machine 1). As a result, it is possible to strengthen the screen (central screen 3010), and since there is no member between the player and the screen (central screen 3010), the screen (central screen 3010) displayed The image can be put directly into the player's eyes, and the power and realism of the image expression can be further enhanced.

Further, for example, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the translucent plate 1045 is arranged on the front side of the screen sheet 1046, but if such an aspect is adopted, the light inside the amusement center (the pachi-slot machine 1 There is also a concern that the appearance of the image deteriorates due to reflected light from the transparent plate 1045 . On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, since the predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050) exists on the back side of the screen (central screen 3010), it is possible to prevent such glare. , and the appearance of the image can be improved. In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, especially when the pachi-slot machine 1 is viewed from the side, the presence of the translucent plate 1045 is conspicuous. There is a concern that the appearance of the product will also be deteriorated. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, since there are no other members outside the screen (central screen 3010), it is possible to realize a sophisticated appearance.

(B-3) The gaming machine of (B-1) or (B-2),
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) near at least one end,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (central screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) near at least one end portion. By displaying an image on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the displayed image, and to realize a highly realistic image expression.

In the seventh embodiment, the screen (central screen 3010) is provided with curved portions (left curved portion 3012L and right curved portion 3012R) near the left end and right end. In the present invention, the position and number of curved surface portions (curved portion 3012) are not particularly limited. For example, a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) may be provided near one of the left and right ends of the screen (central screen 3010), and the other end may be formed flat. . Further, a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) may be provided at a portion of the screen (central screen 3010) near the center in the left-right direction. Further, the entire screen (central screen 3010) may be configured as a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012).

(B-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-3) above,
By controlling the projector, an effect execution means (sub control circuit 200) capable of executing an effect is provided,
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a predetermined curvature,
The effect executing means is capable of displaying an image corresponding to the curved surface on the curved surface portion in a visually recognizable manner such that the curved surface corresponding to the predetermined curvature exists on the curved surface portion.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (central screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) having a predetermined curvature, and the curved surface corresponding to the predetermined curvature is a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). 3012), it is possible to display an image corresponding to the curved surface on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). This makes it possible to realize a highly realistic video representation as if an object having a curved surface actually exists on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) of the screen (central screen 3010).

Curvature is a quantity that represents the degree of curvature of a curve or curved surface, and the degree of local curvature can be approximated to a circle, and the radius of the approximated circle is called the radius of curvature. For example, the curvature of a circumference of radius r is 1/r and the radius of curvature is r. The steeper the curve, the greater the curvature and the smaller the radius of curvature. If the curve is an arc, the radius of curvature can be represented by the radius of the arc. On the other hand, if the curve is different from the arc, the radius of curvature can be represented by a predetermined function representing the degree of curvature of the curve. can be done.

(B-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-4) above,
Equipped with a three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110),
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012),
The three-dimensional decoration part is arranged so that at least a part of the three-dimensional decoration part overlaps with the curved surface part in a front view,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (central screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). ), the three-dimensional decoration (side decoration 3110) is arranged. As a result, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), and the three-dimensional effect and the three-dimensional shape of the three-dimensional decoration portion (side decoration portion 3110) are combined. , a three-dimensional sense of unity can be created between the image and the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110).

Here, assuming that a translucent member (a member like the translucent plate 1045 in the fifth embodiment) is arranged on the front side of the screen (central screen 3010), the screen (central screen 3010) and the three-dimensional decoration Since the light-transmitting member is interposed between the curved portion (side decorative portion 3110) and the curved portion (curved portion 3012), the image (pillar image) displayed on the curved portion (curved portion 3012) and the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) have a sense of unity. It is feared that this will cause the user to feel a sense of incompatibility. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, there is no other member between the screen (central screen 3010) and the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110). It is possible to do so, and the sense of unity can be enhanced. Furthermore, it is possible to enhance the sense of unity between these and the left speaker unit 3400L and the right speaker unit 3400R, and the overall appearance of the pachi-slot machine 1 can be refined.

In the seventh embodiment, the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) is arranged so as to cover the rear portion of the screen (central screen 3010), and is part of the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) in front view. overlaps with a part of the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). In the present invention, the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) can be appropriately arranged in the vicinity of the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), and the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) can 3012) may not be covered at all. For example, the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) is arranged adjacent to the curved portion (curved portion 3012), and the surface of the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) and the surface of the curved portion (curved portion 3012) are aligned. It may constitute a substantially continuous surface.

(B-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-5) above,
Equipped with a three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110),
The screen has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), and has a facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) facing the three-dimensional decoration portion corresponding to the shape of the three-dimensional decoration portion,
The three-dimensional decoration part is arranged along the curved surface part,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (central screen 3010) has a curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), and the three-dimensional decorative portion extends along the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012). (Side decorative portion 3110) is arranged. As a result, it is possible to give a three-dimensional effect to the image displayed on the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012), and the three-dimensional effect and the three-dimensional shape of the three-dimensional decoration portion (side decoration portion 3110) are combined. , a three-dimensional sense of unity can be created between the image and the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110). In addition, the screen (central screen 3010) has a facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) facing the three-dimensional decoration (side decoration 3110) corresponding to the shape of the three-dimensional decoration (side decoration 3110). Therefore, the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) can be arranged so as to be fitted to the facing portion (side uneven portion 3020). As a result, the relative positional relationship between the three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) and the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) can be made appropriate, and the sense of unity can be reliably achieved.

In the seventh embodiment, the screen (central screen 3010) has a curved portion (curved portion 3012) and a facing portion (side concave/convex portion 3020). In the present invention, the formation position of the facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) is not particularly limited. 3020) may be formed. Also, a facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) may be formed so as to straddle the curved surface portion (curved portion 3012) and the relevant portion (for example, the rear side portion 3013). The three-dimensional decorative portion (side decorative portion 3110) may be arranged along the relevant portion (for example, the rear side portion 3013). In addition, in the seventh embodiment, the opposing portion (side uneven portion 3020) is composed of both recesses (recesses 3021a, 3022a, and 3023a) and protrusions (projections 3021b, 3022b, and 3023b). explained as a The facing portion (side uneven portion 3020) in the present invention may be composed only of concave portions, or may be composed only of convex portions. The number of facing portions (side uneven portions 3020) is of course not limited, and any number of facing portions (side uneven portions 3020) can be formed as appropriate.

(B-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-6) above,
A light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) arranged to suppress leakage of the light projected by the projector through the predetermined member,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the light-shielding member (side light-shielding plate 3150) is arranged so that the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is directed to the predetermined member (rear light-transmitting plate 3050). It is possible to suppress leakage through permeation of If the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) leaks from a portion other than the screen (central screen 3010), the portion will shine unnaturally and look unattractive. ) can prevent such a situation from occurring.

(B-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-7) above,
light emitting means (side LEDs 3122a to 3122g) capable of emitting light;
a light guide member (side light lens 3140) that guides the light emitted from the light emitting means;
a light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) arranged to suppress the light projected by the projector from reaching the light guide member;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, by disposing the light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150), the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) is directed to the light guide member (side light lens 3140). It is possible to prevent it from reaching. If the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) enters the light guide member (side light lens 3140), the light emitted from the light emitting means (side LEDs 3122a to 3122g) and the light projected by the projector (projector 9020) As a result of mixing with the light, it is feared that the intended light emission effect cannot be performed. can be done.

In the seventh embodiment, the light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) is arranged so as to cover the portion (gap) of the predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050) that is not covered by the screen (central screen 3010). explained. The arrangement position of the light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) is not particularly limited as long as it is possible to block light from passing through the gap and proceeding forward. Specifically, the light shielding member (side light shielding plate 3150) may be arranged on the outer side of the pachi-slot machine 1 than the predetermined member (rear light transmitting plate 3050), or the predetermined member (rear light transmitting plate 3050) on the inner side of the pachi-slot machine 1.

(B-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-8) above,
A light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) disposed near the screen is provided, and the light reflecting portion is capable of reflecting at least part of an image displayed on the screen.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) is arranged near the screen (central screen 3010), and the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) is located near the screen. At least part of the image displayed on (central screen 3010) can be reflected. As a result, the image displayed on the screen (central screen 3010) and the image reflected on the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) by reflecting the image on the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) are combined. Therefore, it is possible to realize a novel image expression that cannot be perceived by the player only on the screen (central screen 3010).

Here, assuming that a translucent member (a member like the translucent plate 1045 in the fifth embodiment) is arranged on the front side of the screen (central screen 3010), the display surface of the screen (central screen 3010) and the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216). Therefore, due to the presence of the translucent member, the appearance of the image reflected on the reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) deteriorates (particularly, the display surface of the screen (central screen 3010) and the light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) deteriorate. 3216), and there is a concern that the sense of unity of the image may be lost due to streaks entering the boundary portion with the surface 3216). On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, since there is no other member between the display surface of the screen (central screen 3010) and the light reflecting section (image reflecting surface 3216), the reflecting section ( The image reflected on the image reflection surface 3216) can be made clear, and the image displayed on the screen (central screen 3010) and the image reflected on the light reflection part (image reflection surface 3216) can be seen integrally.

Further, in the seventh embodiment, the description has been given on the assumption that the light reflecting portion (the image reflecting surface 3216) is formed by applying the reflecting paint. The light reflecting portion (image reflecting surface 3216) in the present invention is not limited to this example, and may be configured as a mirror, may be configured by vapor-depositing a metal film, or may reflect light. It may be configured by attaching a sheet, or may be configured by mirror-finishing (reducing surface roughness by polishing or cutting). Further, in the seventh embodiment, the image reflecting surface 3216 is formed as the light reflecting portion, but in addition to the image reflecting surface 3216, the decorative surface 3217 may also be configured as the light reflecting portion. Further, as the light reflecting portion, it is possible to appropriately employ a configuration that bulges forward from the vicinity of the periphery (upper end, lower end, left end, right end, etc.) of the screen (central screen 3010). Note that if the second member (top frame base 3210) as a whole has a reflective performance, the second member (top frame base 3210) after molding can be used without special treatment for forming the light reflecting portion. ) (for example, the lower surface 3215 of the lower surface wall 3214) may be used as the light reflecting portion.

(B-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-9) above,
Projecting portions (front upper end portion 3015 and front lower end portion 3017) projecting from the surface of the screen are formed along at least part of the peripheral edge of the screen.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, projections (front upper end 3015 and front A lower end portion 3017) is formed. As a result, when there is a gap between the surface of the screen (central screen 3010) and another member, even if a wire-shaped device is attempted to enter through the gap, the projecting portion (front upper end) 3015 and front lower edge 3017) can be an obstacle to prevent such intrusion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act from being carried out through the gap. In addition, due to the existence of the projections (front upper end 3015 and front lower end 3017), the rigidity of the screen (central screen 3010) can be increased. Distortion of the central screen 3010) can be suppressed.

In the seventh embodiment, a front upper end portion 3015, a front lower end portion 3017, a rear upper end portion 3019, and a rear lower end portion 3020 are provided as projecting portions of the screen (central screen 3010). It has been described that the presence of the upper end portion 3015 and the front lower end portion 3017 can prevent swindling. Similarly, the rear upper end portion 3019 and the rear lower end portion 3020 may be configured to have a function of preventing a wire-shaped instrument from entering, thereby preventing swindling. .

(B-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (B-1) to (B-10),
Through holes (through holes 3016L and 3016R) are formed in the screen,
The predetermined member is fixed by screw fastening using the through hole,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, through holes (through holes 3016L and 3016R) are formed in the screen (central screen 3010), and the predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050) is , are fixed by screw fastening using the through holes (through holes 3016L and 3016R). Accordingly, the screen (central screen 3010) can be arranged at an appropriate position through fixing of the predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050).

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the fifth embodiment, the screen sheet 1046 is pressed by the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper pressing member UD102. On the other hand, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the seventh embodiment, the screen (central screen) is screwed through a predetermined member (rear translucent plate 3050) or the top frame base 3210 without such pressing. 3010) is fixed. This eliminates the need for components such as the lower pressing member UD101 and the upper pressing member UD102, thereby reducing costs. It should be noted that the screen sheet 1046 in the fifth embodiment is a thin sheet-like screen having flexibility, but it is likely to expand and contract due to changes in humidity. Therefore, if it is fixed so as to be in close contact with other members by screwing, there is a concern that it may be damaged due to expansion and contraction, and it is desirable to perform the pressing as described above. On the other hand, the screen (central screen 3010) in the seventh embodiment has a certain thickness (for example, 2 mm) and rigidity, and does not expand or contract so much even when the humidity changes. Therefore, even if screw fastening is performed, damage is unlikely to occur, so it has become possible to employ the above configuration. The thickness of the screen (central screen 3010) is not particularly limited, but is preferably about 1 mm to 5 mm (or about 1.5 mm to 3 mm, or about 1.8 mm to 2.5 mm). Thinning the screen (central screen 3010) increases the resolution of the image, but increases the likelihood of breakage during removal from the mold. The thickness of the screen (central screen 3010) can be appropriately determined in consideration of this point.

[Eighth Embodiment]
The first to seventh embodiments have been described above. The eighth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of the parts that the descriptions of the first to seventh embodiments apply to the eighth embodiment will be omitted.

It should be noted that, in the above description, for example, "in the first embodiment, ~" or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ~", it seems to be limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Even if it is a simple description, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment within the scope of the eighth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, regarding the description limited to the pachi-slot machines 1 according to the second to seventh embodiments, the pachi-slot machines according to the eighth embodiment are not deviated from the spirit of the eighth embodiment. It can also be applied to machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to seventh embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the eighth embodiment. can be used or combined.

Further, even if the shape is different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments, the same reference numerals may be given to the structures having the same functions for the sake of convenience. Further, even if the shape and processing are the same as those of the pachi-slot machines 1 according to the first to seventh embodiments, different symbols and step numbers may be given for convenience.

<Rock production>
FIG. 243 is a diagram showing an example of lock effect. FIG. 244 is a diagram showing a concrete aspect of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1". FIG. 245 is a diagram showing a concrete aspect of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "2". FIG. 246 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3". FIG. 247 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "4". FIG. 248 is a diagram showing a concrete aspect of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5". FIG. 249 is a diagram showing a specific aspect of the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6".

As described in the first embodiment, the lock effect is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period (disables the game operation of the player for a predetermined period). In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, it is possible to execute a reel effect or a pseudo game during execution of a lock effect.

As described in the first embodiment, the reel effect rotates or stops the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R regardless of the player's game operation during the period in which the player's game operation is disabled. (temporary stop) to produce an effect. In addition, the pseudo game accepts the game operation of the player in a pseudo manner during the period in which the game operation of the player is invalidated, thereby rotating or stopping (temporarily stopping) the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. It is a thing that directs by doing.

In the lock effect (reel effect or pseudo-game), the combination of symbols may be stopped and displayed. do not have. For example, even if the combination of symbols stopped and displayed in the reel production or pseudo-game matches the combination of symbols defined in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 11 to 14), the combination of symbols No medals will be paid out.

Also, for example, in the present embodiment, when a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol match) is stopped and displayed in a reel effect or pseudo-game, there is a case where the AT state is entered. In a state where it has already been decided to shift to the AT state, it is notified (suggested) that it has been decided to shift to the AT state through a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" pattern matching). However, it is not determined to shift to the AT state in response to the stop display of a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol combination).

In this embodiment, lock effects (lock effects corresponding to lock effect numbers “1” to “6”) shown in FIG. 243 are provided as such lock effects. The lock effects corresponding to the lock effect numbers "1" to "6" are respectively one of the following lock effects (i) to (iv), or two of these lock effects. It consists of a combination of performances.

(i) "Red 7" symbols are aligned in the reel performance (ii) "Red 7" symbols are not aligned in the reel performance (iii) "Red 7" symbols are aligned in the pseudo-game (iv) "Red 7" in the pseudo-game Patterns do not match

In the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1", the above effect (i) is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "2", the above effect (ii) is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3", the above effect (iii) is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "4", the above effect (iv) is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5", the effect (i) is performed after the effect (iv) is performed. In the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6", the effect (iii) is performed after the effect (ii) is performed.

In this embodiment, the same symbol arrangement table (see FIG. 9) as in the first embodiment is used, and "red 7" is arranged at symbol position "0". Figures 244 to 249 also show numbers indicating symbol positions corresponding to the symbols to be stopped and displayed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 244, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number “1”, after the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start rotating (see FIG. 244(a)), the player The rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped (automatically) without a stop operation, and "red 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 244(b)). Subsequently, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and "red 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 244(c)). ). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and "red 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 244(d)). .

As shown in FIG. 245, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "2", after the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start rotating (see FIG. 245(a)), the player's stop operation Then (automatically) the rotation of the right reel 3R stops, and "RED 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 245(b)). Subsequently, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and "red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 245(c)). ). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L stops (automatically) regardless of the player's stop operation, and a symbol other than "red 7" ("white blank 1" in this example) is displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L. ) is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 245(d)).

As shown in FIG. 246, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3", after the reels 3L, 3C and 3R start rotating (see FIG. 246(a)), the right reel 3R is stopped. Accordingly, the rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped, and "red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 246(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Subsequently, rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped in response to a stop operation on the middle reel 3C, and "red 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 246(c)). In this state, the middle reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R also continues swinging. Then, according to the stop operation on the left reel 3L, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped, and "red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L (see FIG. 246(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L is swinging at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C are also swinging.

As shown in FIG. 247, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "4", after the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start rotating (see FIG. 247(a)), the right reel 3R is stopped. Accordingly, the rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped, and "red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 247(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Subsequently, rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped in response to a stop operation on the middle reel 3C, and "red 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 247(c)). In this state, the middle reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R also continues swinging. Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped in response to the stop operation on the left reel 3L, and symbols other than "red 7" (in this example, "white blank 1") are stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L. (See FIG. 247(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L is swinging at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C are also swinging.

As shown in FIG. 248, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5", after the reels 3L, 3C, 3R start rotating (see FIG. 248(a)), the right reel 3R is stopped. Accordingly, the rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped, and "red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 248(b)). In this state, the right reel 3R swings at a predetermined timing. Subsequently, rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped in response to a stop operation on the middle reel 3C, and "red 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 248(c)). In this state, the middle reel 3C swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R also continues swinging. Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped in response to the stop operation on the left reel 3L, and symbols other than "red 7" (in this example, "white blank 1") are stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L. (See FIG. 248(d)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C also continue swinging. After that, the left reel 3L rotates again (see FIG. 248(e)), the rotation of the left reel 3L stops (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and " Red 7” is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 248(f)). In this state, the left reel 3L swings at a predetermined timing, and the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C also continue swinging.

As shown in FIG. 249, in the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6", after the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start rotating (see FIG. 249(a)), the player's stop operation Then (automatically) the rotation of the right reel 3R stops, and "RED 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (see FIG. 249(b)). Subsequently, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped (automatically) without the player's stop operation, and "red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C (see FIG. 249(c)). ). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L stops (automatically) regardless of the player's stop operation, and a symbol other than "red 7" (in this example, "white blank 1") is displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L. ) is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 249(d)). After that, the left reel 3L rotates again (see FIG. 249(e)), the rotation of the left reel 3L stops in response to the stop operation on the left reel 3L, and "red 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L. (See FIG. 249(f)). In this state, the left reel 3L is swinging at a predetermined timing, while the right reel 3R and middle reel 3C are not swinging. After "RED 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C may be swung at a predetermined timing in the same manner as the left reel 3L.

<Lock effect determination processing>
FIG. 250 is a flow chart showing lock effect determination processing performed in the main control circuit.

The lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 250 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S6 (game start state control process) of FIG. 23 (main process) is executed.

In the lock effect determination process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section (step S1001). As described in the first embodiment, the advantageous section is a game period that can be controlled to a game state (AT state) in which the information of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified. An advantageous section/normal game) and an increased section (advantageous section/pseudo bonus) are provided (see FIG. 5). The effect section is a game state (non-AT state) in which information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, and is similar to the non-advantageous section in that it is a game state that is disadvantageous to the player. It is different from the non-advantageous section in that it is performed. The increase interval is AT state (game state advantageous to the player).

When determining that the current game section is not the advantageous section, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the current game section is an advantageous section, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a pseudo-bonus is in progress (step S1002). As described in the first embodiment, the pseudo-bonus is a game state (AT state) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified. The main CPU 101 can determine whether or not the pseudo-bonus is in progress by referring to the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103 .

When it is determined that the pseudo bonus is in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current game is the one that shifted to the pseudo bonus (step S1003). As described in the first embodiment, when the internal winning combination is determined by the internal lottery process (see step S5 in FIG. 23), the advantageous section winning time as secondary information (subflag) corresponding to the internal winning combination is displayed. A sub-flag (see FIG. 7(a)) is determined. Then, in the effect section (advantageous section/normal game), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table (see FIG. 7(c)) is referred to, and a lottery (pseudo-bonus transition lottery) based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the random value and the advantageous section is performed. "Winning" or "Non-winning" is determined as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery. As the "winning", "winning (current game)" and "winning (next game)" are provided.

When "winning (current game)" is determined, for example, in the current game (the game in which the pseudo-bonus transition lottery was performed), in the advantageous interval game start time process (see FIG. 28), in step S106, A bit corresponding to "pseudo bonus" in the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is set to "1". As a result, when "win (current game)" is determined, the current game is shifted to a pseudo bonus. Similarly, when "winning (next game)" is determined, for example, in the next game (the next game after the game in which the pseudo-bonus shift lottery was performed), processing at the start of the game during the advantageous interval (Fig. 28 ), the bit corresponding to the "pseudo bonus" in the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) is set to "1". As a result, when "winning (next game)" is determined, the next game is shifted to a pseudo bonus.

If the main CPU 101 determines that the transition to the pseudo bonus is not the game this time, it determines whether or not the 1G consecutive lottery has been won (step S1004). As described in the first embodiment, in the pseudo-bonus, the 1G consecutive lottery table (see FIG. 7(d)) is referred to, and a lottery (1G consecutive lottery) is performed based on the random number value and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. As a result, "win" or "non-win" is determined as a result of the 1G consecutive lottery. As the "winning", "winning (1G series + 1)" is provided.

When "winning (1G run + 1)" is determined, for example, in step S103 of the processing at the start of the game during the advantageous section (see FIG. 28), one right to generate 1G run (1G run stock) is granted. (the 1G ream stock counter is incremented by 1). When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G-run stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G-run stock), one 1G-run stock is consumed (1G-run stock counter is 1 is subtracted), and the pseudo bonus is started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus is finished.

If it is determined in step S1003 that the current game is the one that shifted to the pseudo bonus, or if it is determined that the 1G consecutive lottery is won in step S1004, the main CPU 101 outputs the lock effect numbers "1" and "6" ( 243) is selected by lottery (step S1005). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1006), and ends this subroutine. As a result, the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6" is performed. The lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6" is an effect corresponding to the "red 7 matching" effect described in the first embodiment. In addition, if you win the 1G consecutive lottery, a lock effect (for example, a special bonus mid-effect described in the first embodiment) that is different from the lock effect (“red 7 matching” effect) that is performed when moving to the pseudo bonus ) may be configured to be performed.

If it is determined in step S1002 that the pseudo bonus is not in progress, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the condition for generating the special lock effect is met (step S1007). As described in the first embodiment, in the special lock effect, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined as "fixed combination" (see FIG. 7(a)), and the mode transition lottery (see FIG. 8(f)) is determined. This is an effect that can be executed with a predetermined probability when it is determined to shift to heaven C mode (see FIG. 6) by . That is, the conditions for generating the special lock effect are that the sub-flag at the time of the winning of the advantageous section is determined to be a "fixed hand", the transition to heaven C mode is determined by the mode transition lottery, and the special lock effect is possible to win with a predetermined probability. It is to win the occurrence lottery.

In addition, when "fixed combination" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of advantageous section winning, "winning (next game)" is always determined as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (see FIG. 7(c)), and the pseudo-bonus. The transition to is confirmed. Heaven C mode is a mode in which a series of pseudo bonuses can be expected. When the pseudo-bonus starts, the ceiling reduction lottery table (see FIG. 8(e)) is referred to, and a lottery (ceiling reduction lottery) based on random values is performed, so that the result of the ceiling reduction lottery is "winning" or " "Non-winning" is determined. When "winning" is determined, "0 games" is set as the number of ceiling games when the pseudo-bonus ends. As a result, the pseudo bonus is started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus is finished. The heaven C mode is a mode (heaven mode) in which a lottery with reduced ceiling can be won, and a mode in which the heaven mode is easily maintained (a mode advantageous to the player).

If it is determined in step S1004 that the 1G consecutive lottery has not been won, or if it is determined in step S1007 that the condition for generating the special lock effect is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 executes a lock effect lottery (step S1008). . In this process, the main CPU 101 determines "won" or "non-won" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. Subsequently, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect lottery is won (step S1009). When determining that the lock effect lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the lock effect lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers “2” and “4” (see FIG. 243) (step S1010). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1011), and ends this subroutine. As a result, a lock effect (so-called fake effect) corresponding to the lock effect number "2" or "4" is performed.

If it is determined in step S1007 that the special lock effect generation condition is met, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "3" and "5" (see FIG. 243) (step S1012). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1013), and ends this subroutine. As a result, the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" is performed.

The lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" is an effect corresponding to the special lock effect described in the first embodiment. As in the first embodiment, it is possible to configure so that the special lock effect is not executed when the degree of progress of the game (game history) during the advantageous interval satisfies a predetermined condition. As such game history, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, etc. (the value referred to in the limit process). can be adopted. An upper limit (limiter) is provided for the duration of the advantageous interval, and the limit processing is processing for ending the advantageous interval when the limiter is reached (see FIG. 16).

In the lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 250, when the pseudo-bonus shift lottery to the 1G consecutive lottery are won, a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "6" is performed (lock effect number "3"). and the lock effect corresponding to "5" is not performed). However, in the present embodiment, a lock effect (special lock effect) corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" may be performed when the pseudo-bonus shift lottery or the 1G consecutive lottery is won. As described in the first embodiment, when semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (payout number) is activated, the 1G continuous lottery is not executed (see FIG. 16). Further, when the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may not be executed. When the pseudo-bonus transition lottery and the 1G consecutive lottery are no longer executed, the determination results in steps S1003, S1004 and S1007 of FIG. 250 all become "NO", and the lock effect is no longer executed. In the present embodiment, for example, variables in the advantageous interval (advantage interval game counter value, control game counter value, advantageous interval payout counter value, control payout counter value, or When the value calculated based on these values and the value of the 1G consecutive stock counter) exceeds a predetermined value, the lock performance (pseudo game as special lock performance) is not executed. It is possible.

<Lock effect execution processing>
FIG. 251 is a flow chart showing lock effect execution processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 252 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device in the pseudo-game.

The lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 251 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S8 (game start main side effect control process) of FIG. 23 (main process).

In the lock effect execution process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect start flag (see steps S1006, S1011, and S1013 in FIG. 250) is set to ON (step S1021). When determining that the lock effect start flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the lock effect start flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes lock command generation and storage processing (step S1022). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates lock command data and stores the generated lock command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103 . The lock command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the locking of the reels has started, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

Specifically, in response to reception of the lock command data, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to various lock effects. As a result, for example, when the lock effect corresponding to one of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250), "7" shown in FIG. The effect image 1100 is displayed on the main display device 210 . The "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 is stopped in the order of "right reel 3R→middle reel 3C→left reel 3L" and at the timing at which the "red 7" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. is an image suggesting that By displaying the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100, it is possible for the player to operate the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R in the suggested order, thereby allowing the player to participate in the pseudo game. can be done.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1023). Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes lock effect acceleration processing (step S1024). In this process, the main CPU 3031 requests the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. When the reels 3L, 3C and 3R are requested to start rotating, the stepping motors are controlled by the reel control process (see step S203 in FIG. 32) to start rotating the reels 3L, 3C and 3R. The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are accelerated until their rotation reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so that the constant speed is maintained. The rotation mode of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R until reaching the constant speed is not limited to normal rotation (forward rotation), and reel actions such as slow rotation, high-speed rotation, reverse rotation, and combinations thereof are possible. may contain. Alternatively, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be decelerated immediately after reaching a predetermined speed without maintaining the rotating state at the constant speed.

In the reel control process (see step S203 in FIG. 32), the main CPU 101 switches the excitation pattern of the excitation phase over time so that the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R rotate in the manners shown in FIGS. The stepping motors 51L, 51C and 51R are controlled so as to stop. When accelerating the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs pulse signals so that the excitation phases are excited based on the excitation pattern for acceleration. When rotating the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R at a constant speed, the main CPU 101 outputs pulse signals so that the excitation phases are excited based on the excitation pattern for constant speed. When decelerating the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs pulse signals so that the excitation phases are excited based on the excitation pattern for deceleration. When the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are kept stopped, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for stopping. When swinging the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the main CPU 101 outputs a pulse signal so that the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for swinging. Each excitation pattern is held for a predetermined period of time. The time is managed by the timer update process (see step S206 in FIG. 32). The excitation method is not particularly limited, and two-phase excitation, 1-2-phase excitation, or the like can be appropriately adopted. The stepping motors 51L, 51C, and 51R may be PM type stepping motors or HB type stepping motors. The driving method may be a bipolar method or a unipolar method.

After executing the process of step S1024, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo-game flag is set to ON (step S1025). The pseudo-game flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo-game is being executed. Although not shown, when a lock effect corresponding to one of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-game flag to ON in the process of step S1024. Processing is performed together. Further, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6" is selected, the main CPU 101 starts the control to keep the left reel 3L stopped in the reel effect (see FIG. 249(d)). When (when a predetermined time has passed since the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R started), the pseudo-game flag is set to ON.

When determining that the pseudo-game flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo-game processing (step S1026). Processing during pseudo-game will be described later with reference to FIG.

When it is determined in step S1025 that the pseudo-game flag is not set to ON, or after executing the process of step S1026, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect end flag is set to ON. (Step S1027). The lock effect end flag is a flag indicating that the lock effect has ended. Although not shown, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1" or "2" is selected, the main CPU 101 controls to maintain the left reel 3L in a stopped state (FIG. 244(d) and FIG. 245 (d)) is started (when a predetermined time has passed since the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R started to rotate), the lock effect end flag is set to ON. Further, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "4" is selected, the main CPU 101 controls to swing the left reel 3L (see Figs. 246(d) and 247(d)). When starting (when all stop operations for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R in the pseudo-game are completed), the lock effect end flag is set to ON (see step S1073 in FIG. 254). Further, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5" is selected, the main CPU 101 starts the control (see FIG. 248(f)) to swing the left reel 3L that has stopped after re-rotation ( When a predetermined time has passed since the left reel 3L started to rotate again), the lock effect end flag is set to ON (see step S1084 in FIG. 255). Further, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6" is selected, the main CPU 101 starts the control (see FIG. 249(f)) to swing the left reel 3L that has stopped after re-rotation ( When the stop operation for the left reel 3L in the pseudo-game after re-rotation is completed), the lock effect end flag is set to ON (see step S1112 in FIG. 256).

When determining that the lock effect end flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1025. On the other hand, when determining that the lock effect end flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the random delay flag to ON (step S1028) and ends this subroutine. The random delay flag is a flag used to perform random delay processing. As described in the first embodiment, the random delay process is a process for randomly generating a delay period for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R after the lock effect, and then starting rotation. This is done to prevent the player from becoming more likely to "hit eyes" as a result of the effect. Details of the random delay processing will be described later using FIG.

<Pseudo-game process>
FIG. 253 is a flow chart showing processing during pseudo-game performed in the main control circuit.

The process during pseudo-game shown in FIG. 253 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 at step S1026 of FIG. 251 (lock effect execution process).

In the pseudo-game processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is the lock effect number "6" (step S1041).

When determining that the selected lock effect number is not the lock effect number "6", the main CPU 101 executes normal pseudo-game processing (step S1042). The normal pseudo-game processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S1042, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the selected lock effect number is the lock effect number "6", the main CPU 101 executes the post-reel effect pseudo-game processing (step S1043). The post-reel effect pseudo-game process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S1043, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Normal pseudo-game processing>
FIG. 254 is a flow chart showing normal pseudo-game processing performed in the main control circuit.

The normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 254 is processing performed in the main control circuit 100 at step S1042 of FIG.

In the normal pseudo-game process, first, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1061 to S1068. These processes are basically the processes of steps S111 to S120 of FIG. It is a similar process.

Here, in the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 254, the processing corresponding to steps S116 and S117 in FIG. 29 is not performed. That is, the number of sliding symbols (see step S117) is not determined, and in the process of step S1066, the main CPU 101 determines the position where the symbol finally stops regardless of the stop start position (see step S116). The position is determined and stored as the planned stop position. As a result, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped in the modes shown in FIGS. 246(b) to (d), FIGS. 247(b) to (d), and FIGS. do. In the pseudo-game, in this way, predetermined symbols may be stopped and displayed regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols, and the reel stop control process (in the main game) shown in FIG. Similarly, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be controlled to stop based on the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols. In this case, for example, even if the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" is selected, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "red 7" symbols are not aligned. It will be. In addition, when each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped based on the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols, the maximum number of sliding symbols in the pseudo game may be the same as the maximum number of sliding symbols in the main game, It may be larger than the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game, or it may be smaller than the maximum number of sliding pieces in the main game.

Further, in step S111 of FIG. 29, 80 rotations/minute has been described as an example of the speed (constant rotational speed) when the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating at a constant speed. The constant rotation speed in the pseudo game may be the same as the constant rotation speed in the main game (eg, 80 rpm / 1 minute), or faster than the constant rotation speed in the main game (eg, 90 to 180 rpm/1 minute, or 120-160 rpm/1 minute), or slower than the constant rotation speed in the main game (for example, 10-60 rpm/1 minute, or 30-45 rpm/minute). 1 minute). In addition, in the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 254, in the pseudo-game, as in the main game, each stop button 8L waits until the rotation speed of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R reaches the constant rotation speed. , 8C and 8R are validated (see step S1062). However, in the pseudo game, each stop button 8L, 8C, 8R may be activated before the rotation speed of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R reaches the constant rotation speed.

After executing the process of step S1068, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled (see step S1065) has stopped (step S1069). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the control for decelerating the rotation of the reel to be controlled has ended. When the holding time of the excitation pattern for deceleration expires (when the time required to stop the rotation of the reel to be controlled has elapsed), the main CPU 101 ends the control to decelerate the rotation of the reel to be controlled (control It can be recognized that the target reel has stopped).

When determining that the reel to be controlled has not stopped, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1069 again. On the other hand, when determining that the reel to be controlled has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the reel to be controlled (step S1070). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets data corresponding to the swinging excitation pattern for swinging the reel to be controlled. As a result, the stepping motor 51 corresponding to the reel to be controlled is driven and controlled, and the reel to be controlled swings in a predetermined manner. Although the excitation pattern for oscillation is not particularly limited, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which two-phase excitation is performed so as to repeat excitation pattern I and excitation pattern II as described below.

Although not shown, in each of the stepping motors 51L, 51C, 51R, four excitation phases (A phase, B phase, C phase, and D phase) are sequentially arranged clockwise, and 1-2 phase excitation is performed. Eight excitation patterns (A phase-B phase, B phase, B phase-C phase, C phase, C phase-D phase, D phase, D phase-A phase, and A phase) are provided as patterns. there is For example, as the excitation pattern I, an excitation pattern in which the offset value from the reference excitation pattern is 2 (for example, B phase-C phase) is held for a time T ₁ (for example, 3 interrupt times), As excitation pattern II, a configuration is adopted in which an excitation pattern in which the offset value from the reference excitation pattern is 0 (eg, phase A-phase B) is held for time T ₂ (eg, 300 interrupt times). It is possible to T ₂ is preferably less than 500 ms, and the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ is preferably less than 500 ms. For example, T ₁ is about 1 to 20 ms (or 2 to 10 ms). , T ₂ can be about 100 to 490 ms (or 200 to 450 ms). Further, the current used by the stepping motor 51 when the excitation control based on the excitation pattern for oscillation is performed is made larger than the current used by the stepping motor 51 when the excitation control based on the excitation pattern for stopping is performed. It may be set to the same level as the current used by the stepping motor 51 when the excitation control based on the constant-speed excitation pattern is performed. For example, the current used in the stepping motor 51 when excitation control based on the excitation pattern for oscillation is performed is the current used in the stepping motor 51 when excitation control based on the excitation pattern for acceleration or the excitation pattern for deceleration is performed. may be about 60% (for example, about 40-80%, or about 50-70%).

By driving and controlling the stepping motor 51 as described above, the reel 3 can be swung up and down (FIGS. 246(b) to (d), FIGS. 247(b) to (d), and FIG. 248 (b) to (d)). The rocking mode of the reels 3 is not particularly limited as long as the reels 3 move to a degree that the player can recognize. However, since the "oscillation" is a minute vibration and can also be called a "temporary stop", the width of the vibration is 1 symbol (or 1/2 symbol, 1/4 symbol, 1 /8 symbols or 1/16 symbols) should not be exceeded. It should be noted that "swinging" is a concept that includes not only the case where the reels 3 operate with a constant cycle, but also the case where the reels 3 operate aperiodically. In addition, a period in which the reel 3 is almost completely stopped is also included in the "oscillation", but the period must be less than 500 ms (eg, 100 to 490 ms, or 200 to 450 ms). is desirable. In other words, if the reel 3 makes some movement in the range of less than 500ms, it can be called "rocking".

After executing the process of step S1070, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R (step S1071). This process is similar to the process of step S121 in FIG. 29 (reel stop control process). The main CPU 101 can recognize the operation status of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

When determining that there are valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, the main CPU 101 shifts the process to step S1063. On the other hand, when determining that there are no effective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is the lock effect number "5". (step S1072).

When determining that the selected lock effect number is not the lock effect number "5", the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1073), and ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the selected lock effect number is the lock effect number "5", the main CPU 101 executes post-pseudo-game reel effect processing (step S1074). The post-pseudo-game reel effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S1074, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Reel effect processing after pseudo-game>
FIG. 255 is a flow chart showing post-pseudo-game reel effect processing performed in the main control circuit.

The post-pseudo-game reel effect processing shown in FIG. 255 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S1074 of FIG. 254 (normal pseudo-game processing).

In the post-pseudo-game reel effect processing, first, the main CPU 101 executes re-acceleration processing (step S1081). This process is similar to the process of step S1024 in FIG. 251 (lock effect execution process). In the processing of step S1024, the main CPU 3031 requests the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, but in the processing of step S1081, the main CPU 3031 requests only the start of rotation of the left reel 3L. Other points are as described in step S1024. By executing the process of step S1081, the drive of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the rotation of the left reel 3L is started (see FIG. 248(e)).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the left reel 3L has stopped (step S1082). This process is the same process as the process of step S1069 in FIG. 254 (process during normal pseudo-game). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the left reel 3L has stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed since the left reel 3L started to rotate again.

When determining that the left reel 3L is not stopped, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1082 again. On the other hand, when determining that the left reel 3L has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes control for swinging the left reel 3L (step S1083). This process is the same process as the process of step S1070 in FIG. 254 (process during normal pseudo-game). As a result, the drive of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the left reel 3L can be swung up and down (see FIG. 248(f)).

After that, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1084), and ends this subroutine.

<Processing during pseudo-game after reel effect>
FIG. 256 is a flow chart showing processing during pseudo-game after reel effect performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo-game process after reel effect shown in FIG. 256 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 at step S1043 of FIG. 253 (pseudo-game process). As described above, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6" is selected, a predetermined time has elapsed since the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R started rotating (see step S1024 in FIG. 251). Sometimes, the pseudo-game flag is set on. As a result, the determination result of step S1025 in FIG. 251 becomes "YES", and the process during pseudo-game after reel effect shown in FIG. 256 is started.

In the post-reel effect pseudo-game processing, first, the main CPU 101 executes post-reel effect pseudo-game start command generation and storage processing (step S1101). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates post-reel effect pseudo-game start command data, and stores the generated post-reel effect pseudo-game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103 . The post-reel effect pseudo-game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, in the sub-control circuit 200, it becomes possible to recognize that the above (ii) reel effect is completed and the above (iii) pseudo-game is started (see FIG. 243). can be determined. Concretely, in the secondary control circuit 200, with the reception of the pseudo-game start command data after the reel presentation, the presentation data corresponding to the end of the reel presentation and the start of the pseudo-game is set. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image (“hit the lever” image) with the content “hit the lever” is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the start lever 7. be able to.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1102). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 7S is turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). When determining that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1102 again. On the other hand, when determining that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 executes re-acceleration processing (step S1103). This process is the same process as the process of step S1081 in FIG. 255 (post-pseudo-game reel effect process). As a result, the stepping motor 51L is controlled to start rotating the left reel 3L (see FIG. 249(e)). Thus, in the post-reel effect pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 256, it is explained that the left reel 3L is rotated again under the condition that the start lever 7 is operated after the end of the reel effect. However, the re-rotation of the left reel 3L may be performed automatically after the end of the reel effect (when a predetermined time elapses after all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop rotating in the reel effect). good.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speed of the left reel 3L has reached the constant rotation speed (step S1104). As described above, the constant rotation speed in the pseudo game may be different from the constant rotation speed (80 rpm/1 minute) in the main game (see step S1061 in FIG. 254). When determining that the rotation speed of the left reel 3L has not reached the constant rotation speed, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1104 again. On the other hand, when determining that the rotation speed of the left reel 3L has reached the constant rotation speed, the main CPU 101 permits the stop of the left reel 3L (step S1105). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 4 of the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 21). This activates the left stop button 8L. As described above, the left stop button 8L may be activated before the rotation speed of the left reel 3L reaches the constant rotation speed (see step S1062 in FIG. 254).

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1106 to S1111, which are basically the same as the processes of steps S1063 to S1070 in FIG. In the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 254, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R corresponding to the operated stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R are determined as the reels to be controlled. In the processing, the left reel 3L is the reel to be controlled. By executing the process of step S1111, the driving of the stepping motor 51L is controlled, and the left reel 3L can be swung up and down (see FIG. 249(f)). After that, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1112), and ends this subroutine.

<Reel rotation start processing>
FIG. 257 is a flow chart showing reel rotation start processing performed in the main control circuit.

The reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 257 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S10 of FIG. 23 (main process).

In the reel rotation start process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the random delay flag (see step S1028 in FIG. 251) is set to ON (step S1121).

When determining that the random delay flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the random delay flag was set to ON (after the lock effect ends) ( step S1122). When determining that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1122 again. On the other hand, when determining that the predetermined time has passed, the main CPU 101 executes random delay processing (step S1123). As described above, the random delay process is a process for starting rotation after randomly generating a delay period for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R after the lock effect. Details of the random delay processing will be described later using FIG. After executing the process of step S1123, the main CPU 101 sets the random delay flag to OFF (step S1124), and terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining in step S1121 that the random delay flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes normal acceleration processing (step S1125). This process is the same process as described in step S10 of FIG. 23 (main process). In the process of step S1125, unlike the random delay process, the main CPU 101 simultaneously requests the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to start rotating. As a result, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start rotating and accelerate at the same time, and reach a constant speed at the same time. After executing the process of step S1125, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In the reel rotation start process shown in FIG. 257, the random delay process is automatically executed without the player's operation when the lock effect ends. However, the random delay process may be executed on condition that the player performs an operation (for example, the start lever 7 operation) after the lock effect ends. In this case, for example, when the determination result in step S1122 is "YES", the above-described "strike the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 256) may be displayed on the main display device 210. FIG. After that, when the start lever 7 is operated, it is possible to configure so that the random delay processing (the processing of step S1123) is started at the timing when the start lever 7 is operated. On the other hand, if the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined period of time after the "strike the lever" image is displayed, the random delay process may be started after the predetermined period of time has elapsed.

<Random delay processing>
FIG. 258 is a flow chart showing random delay processing performed in the main control circuit.

The random delay processing shown in FIG. 258 is processing performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S1123 of FIG. 257 (reel rotation start processing).

In the random delay process, first, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value for the left reel, a random number value for the middle reel, and a random number value for the right reel (step S1141). The random number value for the left reel, the random number value for the middle reel, and the random number value for the right reel are random values for randomly determining the rotation start timings of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, respectively. In the processing of step S1141, the main CPU 101 obtains a numerical value from 0 to 20 as a left reel random number value, obtains a numerical value from 0 to 20 as a middle reel random number value, and acquires a numerical value from 0 to 20 as a middle reel random value. Obtain a number from 0 to 20 as a random number.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets values corresponding to the left reel random number value, the middle reel random number value, and the right reel random number value to the left reel acceleration timer, the middle reel acceleration timer, and the right reel acceleration timer, respectively. An acceleration timer is set (step S1142). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the left reel acceleration timer to a value obtained by multiplying the left reel random number by a predetermined number (for example, 32), and sets the middle reel random number to a predetermined number (for example, 32). A value obtained by multiplying is set in the middle reel acceleration timer, and a value obtained by multiplying the right reel random number by a predetermined number (for example, 32) is set in the right reel acceleration timer. For example, if the left reel random number is 5, the left reel acceleration timer is set to "160", and if the middle reel random number is 10, the left reel acceleration timer is set to "320", If the right reel random number is 15, the right reel acceleration timer is set to "480". The left reel acceleration timer, middle reel acceleration timer, and right reel acceleration timer are each updated by the timer update process (see step S206 in FIG. 32). That is, the left reel acceleration timer, the middle reel acceleration timer, and the right reel acceleration timer are decremented by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the left reel 3L has been accelerated (step S1143). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the left reel 3L has been accelerated when the left reel accelerated flag (see step S1146) is set to ON. When determining that the left reel 3L has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the left reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1144). When determining that the left reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes left reel acceleration processing (step S1145). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs control so that the excitation phase is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used when accelerating the left reel 3L in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in FIG. 257). conduct. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the left reel accelerated flag to ON (step S1146).

When it is determined in step S1143 that the left reel 3L has already been accelerated, when it is determined in step S1144 that the left reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the process of step S1146, the main CPU 101 controls the middle reel It is determined whether or not 3C has been accelerated (step S1147). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the middle reel 3C has been accelerated when the middle reel accelerated flag (see step S1150) is set to ON. When determining that the middle reel 3C has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the middle reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1148). When determining that the middle reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes middle reel acceleration processing (step S1149). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs control so that the excitation phase is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used when accelerating the middle reel 3C in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in FIG. 257). conduct. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the middle reel accelerated flag to ON (step S1150).

When it is determined in step S1147 that the middle reel 3C has already been accelerated, when it is determined in step S1148 that the middle reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the process of step S1150, the main CPU 101 controls the right reel It is determined whether or not 3R has been accelerated (step S1151). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the right reel 3R has been accelerated when the right reel accelerated flag (see step S1154) is set to ON. When determining that the right reel 3R has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the right reel acceleration timer is 0 (step S1152). When determining that the right reel acceleration timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes right reel acceleration processing (step S1153). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs control so that the excitation phase is excited based on the same excitation pattern as the excitation pattern used when accelerating the right reel 3R in the normal acceleration process (see step S1124 in FIG. 257). conduct. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the right reel accelerated flag to ON (step S1154).

When it is determined in step S1151 that the right reel 3R has already been accelerated, when it is determined in step S1152 that the right reel acceleration timer is not 0, or after executing the process of step S1154, the main CPU 101 It is determined whether or not the reels 3L, 3C and 3R have been accelerated (step S1155). The main CPU 101 recognizes that all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have been accelerated when the left reel accelerated flag, middle reel accelerated flag, and right reel accelerated flag are all set to ON. can do. When determining that at least one reel 3 has not been accelerated, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1143. On the other hand, when determining that all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R have been accelerated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

As described above, the rotation start timing of each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is determined at random. This is different from time acceleration processing (acceleration processing of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R when no lock effect is performed). However, the behavior of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R after rotation (the time from the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R to reaching a constant speed) is different between when the lock effect is performed and when the lock effect is performed. It is the same as if it had not been done.

<Reel control state in pseudo-game>
259 to 261 are diagrams showing an example of temporal changes in the reel control state when a pseudo-game is played.

259 and 260 show the relationship between the player's operation and the reel control state when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" (see FIG. 243) is performed. FIG. 261 shows the relationship between the player's operation and the reel control state when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6" (see FIG. 243) is performed. In the figure, "acceleration" indicates that the reel control state is the acceleration control state, "constant speed" indicates that the reel control state is the constant speed control state, and "deceleration" indicates that the reel control state is "Stop" indicates that the reel control state is the stop control state, and "Swing" indicates that the reel control state is the swing control state.

The acceleration control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for acceleration, the constant speed control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for constant speed, and deceleration control. The state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for deceleration. The stop control state is a state in which the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for stopping. In this state, the excitation phase is excited based on the oscillation excitation pattern. Information indicating the reel control state (reel control state flag) is stored in a reel control state flag storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 . The main CPU 101 refers to the reel control state flag storage area to recognize the current reel control state, and in reel control processing (see step S203 in FIG. 32), based on the excitation pattern corresponding to the reel control state. Each stepping motor 51L, 51C, 51R is controlled so that the excitation phase is excited.

In the example shown in FIG. 259, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time elapses, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. is in a constant speed control state. Thereafter, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as the first stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (first stop reel) targeted for the stop operation becomes the deceleration control state, and the first stop reel is changed to the deceleration control state. stops rotating, the reel control state of the first stop reel becomes the rocking control state. Similarly, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as the second stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (second stop reel) targeted for the stop operation becomes the deceleration control state, and the second stop operation is performed. When the rotation of the reel stops, the reel control state of the second stop reel becomes the rocking control state. Similarly, when any stop button 8 is operated as a third stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (third stop reel) targeted for the stop operation becomes the deceleration control state, and the third stop operation is performed. When the rotation of the reel stops, the reel control state of the third stop reel becomes the rocking control state. After the reel control states for all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R become the swing control state, random delay processing is performed, and the reel control states for the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are accelerated at random timing. After that, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the constant speed control state.

In the example shown in FIG. 260, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time elapses, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. is in a constant speed control state. Thereafter, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as the first stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (first stop reel) targeted for the stop operation becomes the deceleration control state, and the first stop reel is changed to the deceleration control state. stops rotating, the reel control state of the first stop reel becomes the rocking control state. Similarly, when one of the stop buttons 8 is operated as the second stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (second stop reel) targeted for the stop operation becomes the deceleration control state, and the second stop operation is performed. When the rotation of the reel stops, the reel control state of the second stop reel becomes the rocking control state. Similarly, when any stop button 8 is operated as a third stop operation, the reel control state for the reel 3 (third stop reel) targeted for the stop operation becomes the deceleration control state, and the third stop operation is performed. When the rotation of the reel stops, the reel control state of the third stop reel becomes the rocking control state. Then, when a predetermined time has passed since the reel control state for all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R changed to the rocking control state, the reel control state for each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R changes to the stop control state. Thereafter, when random delay processing is performed, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the acceleration control state at random timing. state.

As described above, when random delay processing is performed, in the example shown in FIG. 259, the rocking control state is directly shifted to the acceleration control state. , the control state is changed to the stop control state, and then the stop control state is changed to the acceleration control state. In this embodiment, the stop control state may or may not be interposed between the rocking control state and the acceleration control state. When intervening the stop control state, the timing of transition from the rocking control state to the stop control state is not particularly limited. For example, when the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. 257 is "YES", the reel control state for all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R may be changed from the swing control state to the stop control state. Also, when shifting from the pseudo-game to the main game (for example, when the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. 257 becomes "YES"), the above-mentioned "hit the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 256) is displayed on the main display device 210, and when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R may be changed from the swing control state to the stop control state. In these cases, the swinging of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R ends simultaneously at the timing of transition to the stop control state. The timing may be before the random delay processing (see step S1123 in FIG. 257) is started, or after the random delay processing is started. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the swing may end at different timings (in the order in which the stop operation was performed) for each reel 3 . For example, for each reel 3, when a predetermined time elapses after the reel control state shifts to the swing control state (after the rotation is stopped), the swing control state is changed to the stop control state. good too.

In the example shown in FIG. 261, when the start lever 7 is operated, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the acceleration control state, and after a predetermined time elapses, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. is in a constant speed control state. After that, when a predetermined time has passed, the reel control state for the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) goes through the deceleration control state and then the stop control state without depending on the player's stop operation (automatically). . Similarly, regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically), the reel control state for the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) changes to the stop control state through the deceleration control state. Similarly, regardless of the player's stop operation (automatically), the reel control state for the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) changes to the stop control state through the deceleration control state. After that, the above-described "strike the lever" image (see step S1101 in FIG. 256) is displayed on the main display device 210, and when the start lever 7 is operated, reel control is performed on the third stop reel (eg, the left reel 3L). After passing through the acceleration control state, the state changes to the constant speed control state. When the stop button 8 (for example, the left stop button 8L) corresponding to the third stop reel is operated, the reel control state for the reel 3 (third stop reel) targeted for the stop operation is changed to the deceleration control state. When the rotation of the third stop reel stops, the reel control state of the third stop reel becomes the rocking control state. Thereafter, when random delay processing is performed, the reel control state for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes the acceleration control state at random timing. state.

As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 261, the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) are automatically stopped. , the reel control state does not change to the rocking control state after the stop. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to configure such that the reel 3 is not swung when one reel 3 is stopped without the player's stop operation. For example, after the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) are automatically stopped, the third stop reel (for example, , left reel 3L) are stopped, the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) are not swung when these reels 3 are stopped, The reel 3 may be swung when the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is stopped. In this case, as in the example shown in FIG. 261, the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is automatically stopped once, and the third stop reel is stopped again according to the stop operation performed after re-rotation. Alternatively, the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) may be stopped automatically (from the beginning without going through re-rotation) in response to the stop operation (for example, the left reel 3L). The reel 3L) may be stopped. Similarly, after the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) is automatically stopped, the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) and the third stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) and the third stop reel ( For example, when the rotation of the left reel 3L) is stopped, the reel 3 is not swung when the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) is stopped, while the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) and These reels 3 may be swung when the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is stopped. In the above description, the reel 3 that is stopped first is automatically stopped, and the reel 3 that is stopped later is stopped according to the player's stop operation. The reels 3 may be stopped in response to the player's stop operation, and the reels 3 to be stopped later may be automatically stopped.

In this embodiment, even if one reel 3 is stopped without the player's stop operation, the reel 3 can be configured to swing. For example, when the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) to the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is automatically stopped in the manner shown in FIG. , right reel 3R) is stopped, the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) is swung, and when the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) is stopped, the second stop reel (for example, the middle The reel 3C) may be rocked, and when the third stop reel (eg, the left reel 3L) is stopped, the third stop reel (eg, the left reel 3L) may be rocked.

259 to 261, the player operates one stop button 8, and the stop button 8 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state (the stop switch 8S changes from the on state to the off state, that is, the off edge ), the reel control state for the reel 3 corresponding to the stop button 8 becomes the rocking control state. In the present embodiment, when the stop button 8 changes from the operated state to the non-operated state (turns off edge), the reel 3 corresponding to the stop button 8 may start swinging. The swinging of the reel 3 corresponding to the stop button 8 may be started when the non-operating state changes to the operating state (the stop switch 8S changes from the off state to the on state, that is, becomes the on edge). . For example, when the first stop operation is on edge (the first stop reel does not swing) → when the first stop operation is off edge (the first stop reel starts swinging) → when the second stop operation is on edge (the second stop reel No swinging) → When the second stop operation is off edge (the second stop reel starts swinging) → When the third stop operation is on edge (the third stop reel does not swing) → When the third stop operation is off edge ( The third stop reel may start swinging).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the rotation of the first stop reel (eg, right reel 3R) to third stop reel (eg, left reel 3L) is stopped according to the player's stop operation (FIGS. 259 and 260), when the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) are stopped, these reels 3 are not swung, and the third stop reel (for example, the left reel) is stopped. 3L) is stopped, all the reels 3 may be swung. For example, when the off edge of the stop switch 8S corresponding to the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is detected, all the reels 3 may be swung. Alternatively, at this time, the first stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) and the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) are not oscillated, and only the third stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is oscillated. You can do it. For example, when the first stop operation is on edge (no swing of the first stop reel) → when the first stop operation is off edge (no swing of the first stop reel) → when the second stop operation is on edge (second stop reel No swinging) → When the second stop operation is off-edge (the second stop reel does not swing) → When the third stop operation is on-edge (the third stop reel does not swing) → When the third stop operation is off-edge ( All reels may start swinging).

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix C>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine provided with a main reel for notifying the result of a winning combination lottery and a sub-reel for effect (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-214050). The sub-reels are formed to be larger than the main reels, are arranged in conspicuous positions, and are arranged in an arrangement in which symbols that are easy for the player to identify are easy to identify. This makes the sub-reel appear to the player as if it were the central reel.

In a gaming machine equipped with such sub-reels, when a player performs a stop operation, the sub-reels are rotated in a manner (for example, reverse rotation, frame feed, etc.) that is difficult to execute with the main reel, and then stopped. A reel effect may be executed.

On the other hand, even in a gaming machine equipped with only the main reel, there is an effect using such a reel (the reel stops when the player performs a stop operation, but a game medium (medals) according to the display mode of the stopped reel etc.) is desired to be executed). However, when such an effect (pseudo game) is performed on the main reels, there is a risk that the player may misunderstand that it is the main game.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from erroneously recognizing a main game even when a pseudo-game is played on the main reel. intended to provide

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment has the following features.

(C-1) a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of symbols are applied and which can be rotationally driven;
stop operation detection means (stop switch 8S) capable of detecting a stop operation by a player;
A reel control means for controlling the reel (main CPU 101 for executing the processing of step S203 in FIG. 32, etc.),
When the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means, the reel control means is capable of executing stop control after the stop operation to stop the reel during rotation,
a main game in which a game medium (medal) or game medium data corresponding to the pattern mode of the plurality of reels is awarded when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation; a pseudo-game in which game media or game media data corresponding to the symbol modes of the plurality of reels are not provided when the reels are stopped,
The reel control means (the main CPU 101 executing the processing of step S1070 in FIG. 254, the processing of step S1083 in FIG. 255, the processing of step S1111 in FIG. 256, etc.) controls the reels stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is possible to execute post-stop motion control (rocking control) to operate, and the post-stop motion control is executed when a predetermined condition (elapse of the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ ) is satisfied in the pseudo game ,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, the game media (medals) or the game media corresponding to the pattern mode of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are displayed. A main game to which medium (medal) data can be given, and a game medium (medal) or a game according to the pattern mode of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by stop control after the stop operation. A pseudo-game that does not give medium (medal) data can be executed. Then, it is possible to execute post-stop operation control (swing control) to operate the reel stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, and a predetermined condition (elapse of the total time of T ₁ and T ₂ ) in the pseudo game It is configured to execute post-stop operation control (oscillation control) when the condition is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game currently being played is a pseudo game through the post-stop operation control (swing control), and the player may misidentify the game as the main game. You can prevent it from slipping.

In the eighth embodiment, it has been explained that a pseudo-game can be executed when the pseudo-bonus shift lottery (AT lottery) or the 1G consecutive lottery (AT additional lottery) is won. The conditions for generating a pseudo-game are not limited to winning a pseudo-bonus shift lottery (AT lottery) or a 1G consecutive lottery (AT additional lottery), but a privilege for the player (for example, an advantageous When it is decided to grant a game state (a right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state), it is possible to appropriately generate a pseudo-game. For example, a pseudo-game may be generated when a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, or a pseudo-game may be generated when a specific symbol combination is stop-displayed. As the specific combination, for example, it is possible to adopt a combination that confirms the transition to an advantageous state or a combination (rare combination) in which the transition to the advantageous state can be won with a high probability. As the specific symbol combination, for example, a symbol combination that confirms the transition to an advantageous state or a symbol combination that can win the transition to the advantageous state with a high probability can be adopted. As the advantageous state, the game state described in the first embodiment can be appropriately adopted, and besides the pseudo-bonus (AT state), for example, a bonus state can be mentioned. In addition, when the advantageous section is adopted as an advantageous state and it is decided to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section (when the advantageous section transition lottery is won), a pseudo-game may be executed.

Also, when it is decided to grant the right in one unit game (period from the start to the end of one main process (see FIG. 23)) (for example, when the AT lottery is won) , The pseudo-game may be executed in the unit game (winning game), or may be executed in the unit game after a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) after the unit game (winning game). For example, if it is determined to generate a pseudo-game based on the result of the internal lottery triggered by the operation of the start lever 7, the pseudo-game may be executed immediately after the decision, or the decision is made. A pseudo game may be executed with the operation of the start lever 7 in the unit game after a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the winning unit game (winning game). In addition, when it is decided to generate a pseudo-game based on the stop display of a specific symbol combination, the start lever 7 operation in the unit game next to the unit game (winning game) in which the determination is made is performed. A pseudo-game may be executed as a trigger, or a pseudo-game triggered by the operation of the start lever 7 in the unit game after a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after the unit game (winning game) in which the determination is made. It may be executed. In these cases, the pseudo game may be executed even if the start lever 7 is not operated. If the pseudo-game is not executed in the winning game and the pseudo-game is executed in the unit game after the winning game, the premonitory effect suggesting the transition to an advantageous state after the winning game until the pseudo-game is executed. (For example, the AT precursor effect described in the first embodiment) may be executed. As a result, for example, in a situation where it is decided to generate a pseudo-game based on the stop display of a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment), if the pseudo-game is performed immediately, When the pseudo-game is performed after one game, when the pseudo-game is performed after two games, when the pseudo-game is performed after three games, etc., it is possible to give variation to the start timing of the pseudo-game, and the pseudo-game is performed. The player can have a sense of anticipation as to when it will take place.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, the pseudo game is executed when the start lever 7 is operated (before the first stop operation is performed). The timing of executing the pseudo-game is not particularly limited, and may be when the start lever 7 is operated (before the first stop operation is performed), or when the first stop operation is performed (the second before the stop operation is performed), when the second stop operation is performed (before the third stop operation is performed), or when the third stop operation is performed ( It may be before the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game). Also, after the start lever 7 is operated, on the condition that the stop button 8 is operated before the rotation speed of all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches the constant rotation speed, it is possible to shift to a pseudo game. good. That is, when the stop button 8 is operated before the rotation speed of all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R reaches the constant rotation speed, the operation of the stop button 8 is treated as the first stop operation for pseudo-game. , when the stop button 8 is operated after the rotational speeds of all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R have reached the constant rotational speed, the operation of the stop button 8 is treated as the first stop operation for the main game. good too.

In the above description, it is explained that a pseudo-game is generated when it is decided to grant the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state, but a lottery (pseudo-game A game generation lottery) may be performed, and when the pseudo-game generation lottery is won, a pseudo-game may be generated and the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state may be granted. In this case, for example, instead of the above-described pseudo-bonus transition lottery (AT lottery), a pseudo-game generation lottery may be performed. For example, it is possible to configure such that the result of the pseudo-game occurrence lottery (winning or non-winning) is determined based on the above-described advantageous section winning sub-flags to advantageous section winning sub-flags.

Further, in the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the post-stop operation control (swing control) is executed when the predetermined condition (elapse of the total time of _T1 and _T2 ) is satisfied in the pseudo-game. As the post-stop operation control (oscillation control), it is possible to employ excitation control based on the excitation pattern I described above. The post-stop motion control (rocking control) is not particularly limited as long as it is a control that causes the reel 3 to perform some motion within a range of less than 500 ms, and any condition can be appropriately adopted as the predetermined condition. be. That is, whenever the excitation phase is excited based on the oscillation excitation pattern, switch to another excitation pattern before the retention time of one excitation pattern reaches 500 ms (the retention time of one excitation pattern is less than 500 ms). ) is desirable. The switching of the excitation pattern (change of the phase signal) is control for physically changing the speed of the rotating drum. Even if the excitation pattern is switched, if the switching is not used to physically change the speed of the drum, or if the switching causes the physical speed change of the drum If it is found to be artificially hindered, it should be treated as if the switching has not been performed. When the excitation phase is excited based on the excitation pattern for swinging, the reel 3 moves slightly. can be expressed.

When a game is played using physical medals in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main game is performed according to the pattern mode of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by stop control after the stop operation. The pseudo-game is a game in which game media (medals) can be awarded, and the pseudo-game is a game medium according to the pattern mode of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by stop control after the stop operation. It is a game that does not give (medals). On the other hand, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is the medalless gaming machine described in the first embodiment, the main game is the pattern of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is a game that can provide game medium (medal) data according to the mode, and the pseudo game is a game in which the pattern mode of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is changed when the reels are stopped by stop control after the stop operation. This is a game in which corresponding game medium (medal) data is not provided. The game medium (medal) data is data corresponding to the game value possessed by the player, and is electromagnetically (or in a manner in which the player cannot directly contact the game value) as described in the first embodiment. It is managed.

(C-2) The gaming machine of (C-1) above,
It is possible to execute a reel effect (reel effect) in which the reel is stopped without depending on the stop control after the stop operation,
The reel control means does not execute the post-stop operation control in the reel performance, but can execute the post-stop operation control in the pseudo game.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, the reel performance (reel performance) in which the reels are stopped without depending on the stop control after the stop operation (even if the stop operation by the player is not detected) is performed. It is possible to execute it, and it is configured not to execute post-stop motion control (swing control) in the reel performance (reel performance). In the reel performance (reel performance), the reels are stopped even if the player does not perform a stop operation. relatively low. By not executing the post-stop motion control (swing control) in such a reel performance (reel performance), it is possible to emphasize the post-stop motion control (swing control) in the pseudo-game. , As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the pseudo game as the main game.

In the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the reel effect (reel effect) is such that the reels are stopped even if the player does not perform a stop operation. As a trigger for stopping the reels in the reel performance (reel performance), a trigger other than the stop operation by the player can be appropriately employed. For example, the reels may be (automatically) stopped when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reels started rotating, or the operation unit used for the stop operation in the main game (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R ) (for example, the start lever 7 or the bet button) may be used to stop the reels. The effect of stopping the reels in such a manner (without using the stop button 8) can be called a spinning reel effect (reel effect). In the spinning reel performance (reel performance), it is desirable not to execute post-stop motion control (swing control), but post-stop motion control (swing control) may be executed.

(C-3) The gaming machine of (C-1) or (C-2),
The reel control means is capable of executing, as the post-stop operation control, swing control for swinging the reel stopped by the post-stop operation stop control at a predetermined cycle.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, as the post-stop operation control (swing control), the swing control for swinging the reels stopped by the post-stop operation stop control at a predetermined cycle can be executed. is configured to Through such rocking control, it is possible to realize a novel production that draws the player's attention to the cycle of rocking, and to effectively prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the pseudo-game as the main game. can do.

The oscillation period is not particularly limited, and for example, a configuration may be adopted in which oscillation control is executed such that a predetermined oscillation pattern is repeated with the total time of _T1 and _T2 described above being one period. It is possible. However, the post-stop operation control (rocking control) is not limited to the control of periodically operating the reels, and may be the control of non-periodically operating the reels. For example, when a first period of time elapses after the first post-stop motion control (swing control) is performed, the second post-stop motion control (swing control) is performed, and the second post-stop motion control is performed. When the third post-stop operation control (swing control) is performed when the second time has passed since the (swing control) was performed, the first time and the second time are set to be different. good too. For example, excitation pattern I is held for time T ₁ (eg, 3 interrupt times), excitation pattern II is held for time T ₂ (eg, 300 interrupt times), and then excitation pattern I ( Alternatively, it is possible to adopt a configuration in which the excitation pattern III) different from the excitation pattern I and the excitation pattern II) is held for the time T ₃ (for example, 5 interrupt times). After time T ₃ (for example, 5 interrupt times) has elapsed, excitation pattern II may be maintained for time T ₂ (for example, 300 interrupt times), or excitation pattern II (or excitation pattern I, excitation pattern II, and excitation pattern IV), which is different from excitation pattern III), may be maintained for time T ₄ (eg, 200 interrupt times).

(C-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-3) above,
By executing the post-stop operation control, the reel control means can repeatedly generate a state in which the reel stopped by the post-stop operation stop control operates and a state in which the operation is interrupted. ,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, by executing the post-stop motion control (swing control), the state in which the reel stopped by the post-stop stop control is operated and the state in which the motion is interrupted. is configured to be able to generate repeatedly. As a result, through the operation of the reel, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the pseudo-game as the main game, and by providing a period during which the operation is interrupted, the reel stops (temporary stop) It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the reel has stopped (temporarily stopped), thereby avoiding the confusion of the player due to not knowing whether the reel has stopped (temporarily stopped).

A condition in which the operation of the reel is interrupted can be generated by maintaining one excitation pattern for a predetermined period of time. The predetermined period can be, for example, approximately 100 to 490 ms (or 200 to 450 ms). However, the post-stop operation control (swing control) is not limited to generating a state in which the reel operation is interrupted, and may continue the reel operation (for example, microvibration).

(C-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-4) above,
The reel control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 258, etc.)
After the plurality of reels are stopped in the pseudo-game, one of the plurality of reels is started to rotate for the main game, and the rotation start timing of the one reel It is possible to start rotating the other reels at a later timing,
After starting rotation of the one reel, it is possible to continue the post-stop operation control for the other reel until rotation of the other reel is started.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, after the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped in the pseudo game, the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for the main game It is possible to start the rotation of one of the reels and to start the rotation of the other reels at a timing later than the rotation start timing of the one reel. After the rotation of the one reel is started, the post-stop operation control (swing control) for the other reel can be continued until the rotation of the other reel is started. ing. As a result, even after starting the rotation of the one reel, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pseudo-game has been played, and it is possible for the player to misunderstand the pseudo-game as the main game. can be effectively prevented.

However, as described in the eighth embodiment, after the rotation of one reel is started and before the rotation of the other reel is started, the post-stop operation control (swing control) for the other reel is performed. You may decide not to do it. For example, among a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), at the timing when one of the reels starts rotating by random delay processing (when the first reel starts rotating), all reels The post-stop motion control (swing control) for the reel may be ended. In the random delay process, the order in which the rotation of each reel is started is not particularly limited, and may be determined randomly or in a predetermined order (for example, left reel 3L→middle reel 3C→right reel 3R) may start the rotation. When starting the rotation of each reel in a predetermined order, for example, first, a left reel acceleration timer is set, and when the left reel acceleration timer reaches 0, the rotation of the left reel 3L is started. After that, the middle reel acceleration timer is set, and when the middle reel acceleration timer reaches 0, the rotation of the middle reel 3C is started. After that, the right reel acceleration timer is set, and the right reel acceleration timer is set. The rotation of the right reel 3R may be started when the value becomes 0.

(C-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-5) above,
The reel control means is
It is possible to stop one of the plurality of reels without using the stop control after the stop operation, and stop the other reel among the plurality of reels by the stop control after the stop operation. and
The post-stop operation control is not executed for the one reel, while the post-stop operation control is executed for the other reel.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, one of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is stopped without the stop control after the stop operation, while the plurality of reels (reel 3L , 3C, 3R) can be stopped by stop control after the stop operation. Then, the post-stop operation control (swing control) is not executed for the one reel, while the post-stop operation control (swing control) is executed for the other reel. It is configured. If the reel is stopped without the stop control after the stop operation, the stop operation is not performed when the reel is stopped. relatively low. In such a case, the post-stop motion control (swing control) is not executed, thereby emphasizing the post-stop motion control (swing control) when the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. is possible, and as a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the pseudo game as the main game.

The timing at which the one reel is stopped and the timing at which the other reel is stopped may come first. That is, after one reel of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is stopped without the stop control after the stop operation, the other reels of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped. The reels may be stopped by stop control after the stop operation, or one of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) may be stopped by stop control after the stop operation, and then the plurality of reels (reel 3L, 3C, 3R) may be stopped without the stop control after the stop operation. Further, the number of reels to be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation and the number of reels to be stopped without the stop control after the stop operation are not particularly limited. For example, the number of reels to be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation may be 1, and the number of reels to be stopped without the stop control after the stop operation may be 2, or the reels to be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. may be set to two, and the number of reels to be stopped without the stop control after the stop operation may be set to one.

For example, after the rotation of the first stop reel (eg, the left reel 3L) and the second stop reel (eg, the middle reel 3C) are automatically stopped, the third stop reel (eg, , right reel 3R) are stopped, the first stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) and the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) are not swung when they stop, The reel 3 may be swung when the third stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) is stopped. Further, after the rotation of the first stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is stopped according to the player's stop operation, the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) and the third stop reel (for example, the right reel) 3R) is automatically stopped, the reel 3 is swung when the first stop reel (for example, the left reel 3L) stops, while the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) and the second stop reel (for example, the middle reel 3C) are rotated. When the 3 stop reel (for example, the right reel 3R) stops, these reels 3 may not swing.

When the reels are stopped without the stop control after the stop operation, as a trigger for stopping the reels, it is possible to appropriately adopt a trigger other than the stop operation by the player. For example, the reels may be (automatically) stopped when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the reels started spinning, or the operation unit used for the stop operation in the main game (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R ) other than the reels (for example, the start lever 7 or the bet button) may be used to stop the reels. When the reel is stopped in such a manner (without using the stop button 8), it is desirable not to execute post-stop operation control (swing control), but post-stop operation control (swing control) is executed. It is also possible to

(C-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-6) above,
Pseudo-game determination means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 250) capable of determining that the pseudo-game is to be executed;
Predetermined variables (advantage interval game counter value, control game counter value, advantageous interval payout counter value, control a predetermined period termination means capable of terminating the predetermined period when the payout number counter value) satisfies a specific condition (limiter operating condition);
The pseudo-game determining means can determine that the pseudo-game is to be executed in the predetermined period, while the predetermined variable is a specific period before satisfying the specific condition (quasi-limit processing (number of games)). ) or the period after the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated), it is not decided to execute the pseudo-game,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, predetermined variables (the value of the advantageous interval game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, etc.) that can be updated according to the progress of the main game during the predetermined period (advantageous interval) A predetermined period (advantageous interval) can be terminated when a specific condition (limiter activation condition) is met. Then, while it is possible to determine that a pseudo-game is to be executed in a predetermined period (advantageous section), predetermined variables (advantageous section game number counter value, control game number counter value, advantageous section payout number counter value, control payout number counter value) satisfies specific conditions (period after quasi-limit processing (number of games) or quasi-limit processing (payout number) is activated). It is configured so that it does not decide to do so. When a pseudo-game is executed, it is thought that players will have expectations, but in a specific period (period after semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (payout number) is activated) By not executing a pseudo-game, it is possible to suppress excessively fueling the expectation.

The specific period is not limited to the period after the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (payout number) is activated, and the pseudo-game is executed during any period before the end of the specified period (advantageous section) It is possible to configure so as not to decide to do so. Specific periods include, for example, a period during which the value of the advantageous zone game number counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (eg, 1200), a period during which the value of the advantageous zone payout counter is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (eg, 1920), etc. may be adopted. As a result, when the number of remaining games until the end of the predetermined period (advantageous section) is less than the predetermined number, or when the number of remaining payouts until the end of the predetermined period (advantageous section) is less than the predetermined number , it is possible to prevent pseudo-games from being executed. Alternatively, when MY described in the first embodiment is equal to or greater than a predetermined number, the pseudo-game may not be executed. Note that the predetermined period is not limited to the advantageous section, and may be the non-advantageous section. Further, when the predetermined period is an advantageous interval, the advantageous interval may be a performance interval (advantageous interval/normal game) or an increased interval (advantageous interval/pseudo bonus). Also, any mode in the performance section (advantageous section/normal game) may be adopted as the predetermined period.

(C-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-7) above,
predetermined operation detection means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) by the player;
Display means (main display device 210) capable of displaying an image (“hit the lever” image) for prompting the player to perform the predetermined operation,
When the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detection means, it is possible to start the pseudo-game,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, it is possible to display an image ("hit the lever" image) for prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation). It is configured so that a pseudo-game can be started when an operation (start lever 7 operation) is detected. As a result, the player can participate in the pseudo-game at his or her own will, and the player's interest in the pseudo-game can be enhanced.

In the eighth embodiment, in the effect (lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6") in which the pseudo game is performed after the reel effect is performed, a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is performed after the end of the reel effect. It was explained as moving to a pseudo-game (rotation for pseudo-game is started) with the fact that it was broken. In this way, the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) can be employed as an opportunity to shift from the reel effect to the pseudo game. However, the scene of shifting to a pseudo-game by a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is not limited to this example. For example, when the pseudo-game is performed again after the pseudo-game is performed (the pseudo-game is repeated multiple times), when the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is performed, the next pseudo-game It may be transferred.

As a case where the pseudo-game is repeated multiple times, for example, a case where an effect related to the extension (addition) of the AT state is performed can be cited. For example, in a situation where it has been decided that the AT state will be added to 200 games, an image showing that the "red 7" symbols are aligned in the first pseudo-game and the AT state has been added to 100 games is displayed. In the third pseudo-game, the "red 7" pattern is aligned and the AT state is displayed with an image showing that 100 games (200 games in total) have been added, and the "red 7" pattern is not aligned in the third pseudo-game. It is possible to employ an effect such as displaying an image indicating that no more state additions have occurred (the number of added games has ended at 200 games). In the effect, when a specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed in one pseudo-game (for example, "Red 7" symbols are aligned), the AT state is added for a predetermined number of games (or 1G consecutive stock is While notifying (suggesting) that a predetermined number has been granted) and making it possible to move to the next pseudo-game, a specific symbol combination was not stopped and displayed in one pseudo-game (for example, "Red 7" symbol is If not aligned), it informs (suggests) that the AT state has not been added any more (or the 1G consecutive stock has not been given any more), and does not move to the next pseudo-game. It can be configured to (end the production). As a result, it is possible to notify (suggest) the number of acquired additional games (or the number of 1G consecutive stocks) to the player through the pseudo-game. In the above description, the pseudo-game is repeated multiple times, but instead of at least one of the pseudo-games of the plurality of pseudo-games, a reel production (reel production) may be performed. .

Further, in the eighth embodiment, when a lock effect corresponding to one of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, normal start lever 7 operation (see step S50 in FIG. 25) is A pseudo-game is automatically started without requiring a separate predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) (by executing the lock effect acceleration process (see step S1024 in FIG. 251), the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotation is started). However, as described in the ninth embodiment, even in this case, the fact that the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is performed is adopted as a condition for starting the pseudo-game, and the predetermined operation (start lever 7 It is also possible to start a pseudo-game triggered by the fact that the operation) is performed. It is also possible to adopt such a scene as the scene of transitioning to a pseudo-game by the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation).

It should be noted that, if the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) for shifting to the pseudo-game is not performed, it may be shifted to the pseudo-game triggered by the passage of a predetermined waiting time, or the pseudo-game in the first place It is also possible not to shift to a game. Further, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and any operation of any operation unit (for example, start lever 7, MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, checkout button 9, etc.) can be appropriately employed.

(C-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-8) above,
It is possible to execute a reel effect (reel effect) in which the reel is stopped without depending on the stop control after the stop operation,
The reel control means is
reel control means for reel effect capable of stopping the plurality of reels as the reel effect without depending on stop control after the stop operation;
As the pseudo-game, after starting the rotation of at least one of the plurality of reels stopped by the reel effect reel control means, the at least one reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation A pseudo-game reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 256) that can be stopped,
While the post-stop operation control is not executed for the plurality of reels stopped by the reel control means for reel effect, for the at least one reel stopped by the reel control means for pseudo-game It is possible to execute the post-stop operation control,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, as a reel performance (reel performance), a plurality of reels ( It is possible to stop the reels 3L, 3C, 3R), and as a pseudo-game, at least one of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) stopped in the reel performance (reel performance) After starting rotation of the reels, the at least one reel can be stopped by stop control after stop operation. Then, while the operation control (swing control) after stopping is not executed for the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) stopped in the reel performance (reel performance), at least one stopped in the pseudo game post-stop operation control (swing control) can be executed for the reels. In the reel performance (reel performance), the reels are stopped even if the player does not perform a stop operation. relatively low. By not executing the post-stop motion control (swing control) in such a reel performance (reel performance), it is possible to emphasize the post-stop motion control (swing control) in the pseudo-game. , As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the pseudo game as the main game.

In the eighth embodiment, in the effect (lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "6") in which the pseudo game is performed after the reel effect is performed, in the pseudo game, a plurality of of the reels (reels 3L, 3C, and 3R), one reel is started to rotate, and then the one reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. The number of reels to rotate and stop in the pseudo-game is not particularly limited, and may be one, two, or three (all reels). In this specification, "pseudo game" is not limited to a lock effect in which all reels can be stopped by stop control after a stop operation, but for a lock effect in which there is at least one reel that can be stopped by stop control after a stop operation is widely called "pseudo-game". In the pseudo-game, the number of spinning reels and the number of reels that can be stopped by the stop control after the stop operation may be the same or different. For example, a lock effect in which only one reel rotates and the one reel can be stopped by stop control after a stop operation can be called a pseudo-game, and all reels rotate and at least one reel A lock effect that can be stopped by stop control after a stop operation can also be called a pseudo game. In the pseudo-game, the rotation of the reel may be less than one rotation (one lap), or may be rotation for several symbols (for example, frame feed). In this way, when a pseudo-game is performed after the reel performance (reel performance) is performed, it is desirable not to execute post-stop operation control (swing control) in the reel performance (reel performance). Post-stop motion control (swing control) may be executed. In addition, when the pseudo-game is performed after the reel performance is performed, the reel performance may include the reel performance, or may not include the reel performance (simple freeze). .

(C-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-9) above,
It is possible to execute a reel effect (reel effect) in which the reel is stopped without depending on the stop control after the stop operation,
The reel control means is
As the pseudo-game, a pseudo-game reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 254) capable of stopping the plurality of reels by the stop control after the stop operation,
As the reel effect, after starting the rotation of at least one of the plurality of reels stopped by the pseudo-game reel control means, the at least one reel is set to stop control after the stop operation A spinning reel effect reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 255) that can be stopped without depending,
The post-stop operation control is executed for the plurality of reels stopped by the pseudo-game reel control means, and the stop is also performed for the at least one reel stopped by the reel effect reel control means. It is possible to perform post-operation control,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, as a pseudo-game, it is possible to stop a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) by stop control after the stop operation, and a reel performance (reel As an effect), after starting the rotation of at least one of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that are stopped in the pseudo-game, the at least one reel is stopped after the stop operation Regardless of the stop control It is possible to stop immediately (even if the stop operation by the player is not detected). Then, post-stop operation control (swing control) is executed for a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) stopped in the pseudo game, and at least one reel stopped in the reel performance (reel performance). It is configured to be able to execute post-stop operation control (oscillation control) also for In the reel performance (reel performance), the reels are stopped even if the player does not perform a stop operation. Although it can be considered to be relatively low, if the reel performance (reel performance) is performed following the pseudo-game, the reel performance (reel performance) is integrated with the pseudo-game, and the player can play the main game. It can be said that there is a possibility of misidentifying that. By executing post-stop operation control (swing control) in such a reel performance (reel performance), it is possible to effectively prevent the player from mistaking the reel performance (reel performance) as a main game. can be prevented.

In the eighth embodiment, in the effect (lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "5") in which the reel effect is performed after the pseudo game is performed, in the reel effect (reel effect), a plurality of of the reels (reels 3L, 3C, and 3R), after starting rotation of one reel, the one reel is stopped without the stop control after the stop operation. The number of reels to be rotated and stopped in the reel performance (reel performance) is not particularly limited, and may be one, two, or three (all reels). good too. In this specification, the "reel effect" is not limited to a lock effect in which all reels can be stopped without stop control after a stop operation, and at least one reel can be stopped without stop control after a stop operation. The existing rock production is widely called "reel production". In the reel performance, the number of spinning reels is the same as the number of reels that can be stopped without stop control after the stop operation. That is, a lock effect in which all spinning reels can be stopped after a stop operation without using stop control can be called a reel effect. On the other hand, a lock effect in which at least one of the rotating reels can be stopped by stop control after the stop operation can be called a pseudo-game. In the reel effect, the rotation of the reel may be less than one rotation (one round), or may be rotation corresponding to several symbols (for example, frame feed). In this way, when the reel performance (reel performance) is performed after the pseudo game is performed, it is desirable to execute the operation control (swing control) after stopping in the reel performance (reel performance). The post-stop motion control (swing control) may not be executed.

(C-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-10),
An image (“Aim for 7” effect image 1100 for prompting the player to perform the stop operation so that a specific symbol combination (“red 7” symbol set) can be stopped and displayed as the symbol mode of the plurality of reels. ) is provided with display means (main display device 210) capable of displaying
In the specific symbol combination, the symbol on one of the plurality of reels is a specific symbol (“red 7” symbol);
The reel control means executes the post-stop operation control so that the specific symbol can be displayed on the one reel when the one reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation in the pseudo game. Is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, a stop operation is performed so that a specific combination of symbols ("Red 7" symbol combination) can be stopped and displayed as the symbol mode of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R). It is possible to display an image (“Aim for 7” effect image 1100) for prompting the player to perform the action, and a specific symbol combination (“Red 7” symbol combination) can be displayed on a plurality of reels (reel 3L, reel 3L, 3C, 3R), the symbol on one reel is a specific symbol (“Red 7” symbol). Then, in the pseudo game, when the one reel is stopped by stop control after the stop operation, post-stop operation control (swing control) so that a specific symbol ("red 7" symbol) can be displayed on the one reel ) is configured to be able to execute As a result, through the post-stop operation control (swing control), while preventing the player from mistaking the pseudo game for the main game, the specific symbol ("red 7" symbol) (specific symbol combination ("red 7" symbol) It is possible to show the player the symbols constituting the "7" symbol matching), and it is possible to make the player feel a sense of expectation through the specific symbol ("Red 7" symbol).

As described in the eighth embodiment, by executing post-stop operation control (swing control), one reel can be swung (vibrated) or stopped substantially completely. As a result, the symbol existing at a predetermined position (on the effective line) in a state where the reel is located at the center of vibration or a state where the reel is substantially completely stopped is displayed by the stop control after the reel is stopped. The same symbol (eg, "Red 7" symbol) that exists at a predetermined position (on the activated line) when the game is stopped (eg, see step S1069 in FIG. 254) (eg, see FIG. 246(d)). It is possible. While the post-stop motion control (swing control) is being executed, the time when the symbol (for example, the "red 7" symbol) exists at a predetermined position (on the effective line), other symbols are at a predetermined position (effective line). on the line). In the eighth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, only one effective line is the "center line". It should be noted that, as the specific pattern combination, it is possible to appropriately adopt any desired pattern combination. good. Also, the specific symbol combination is not limited to a combination of the same symbols, and may include different symbols. Also, as the specific pattern, in addition to the "red 7" pattern, any pattern such as a "BAR" pattern can be appropriately adopted.

Also, as described in the first embodiment, for example, pseudo BB (big bonus) and pseudo RB (regular bonus) can be employed as the AT state. Then, when it is decided to shift to pseudo BB, the first symbol combination (for example, "red 7" pattern matching) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, and when it is decided to transfer to pseudo RB. , the second symbol combination (for example, "BAR" symbol matching) may be stop-displayed in a pseudo-game. At that time, when it is decided to shift to pseudo BB, the above-described "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 is displayed, and when it is decided to shift to pseudo RB, in the ninth embodiment The effect image "Aim for the BAR" to be described may be displayed.

Furthermore, when the "red 7" pattern set is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, a pseudo BB effect is performed, and when the "BAR" pattern set is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, a pseudo RB effect is performed. may In the pseudo BB effect, a pseudo BB suggestive image (an image suggesting that the transition to pseudo BB has been decided) is displayed on the main display device 210, and in the pseudo RB effect, a pseudo RB suggestive image (a An image suggesting that it has been determined) is displayed on the main display device 210 . By transmitting information (stop position information) indicating symbols stopped and displayed in the pseudo-game from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, the sub-control circuit 200 performs pseudo BB effects and pseudo RB effects. can be done.

Also, as described in the eighth embodiment, in the pseudo game, as in the main game, control may be performed to stop each reel 3L, 3C, 3R based on the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols. . In this case, for example, even if the lock performance corresponding to the lock performance number "3" is selected, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "red 7" symbols will not be aligned. If, on at least one reel, the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate and the “red 7” symbol is not stopped and displayed, then by performing a spinning effect (reel effect) on the reel, “red 7” symbols may be stop-displayed so that the “red 7” symbols are aligned on a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R).

In addition, the stop control after the stop operation in the case where the "red 7" symbol is not stopped and displayed in the pseudo game may be the same stop control after the stop operation as the stop control after the stop operation in the main game, or the stop operation in the main game Stop control after stop operation, which is different from post-stop control, may be employed. For example, a red 7 hand (for example, red 7 replay) is provided as an internal winning hand, and a combination of symbols corresponding to the red 7 hand is "red 7-red 7-red 7". Then, when the Red 7 combination is determined as an internal winning combination, in the main game, the symbol "Red 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, and "Red 7" is displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C. The symbols are stop-displayed, and stop control is performed after the stop operation so that the "red 7" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle region of the right reel 3R. In the main game, "Replay" symbols are stop-displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, "Replay" symbols are stop-displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and "Red 7" symbols are stop-displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R. It is assumed that it is possible to perform stop control after the stop operation so that the display is stopped. The stop control after the stop operation, which is the same as the stop control after the stop operation in the main game, may also be performed in the pseudo game. As a result, for example, an image (“Aim for 7” effect image 1100) is displayed for prompting the player to perform a stop operation so that a specific symbol combination (“Red 7” symbol combination) can be stopped and displayed. ("Aim for Red 7" effect), when the player performs a stop operation aiming at the "Red 7" symbol in the order of the right reel 3R → middle reel 3C → left reel 3L, the middle stage of the right reel 3R. "Red 7" symbols are stop-displayed in the area, "Replay" symbols are stop-displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and "Replay" symbols are stop-displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L. It is good also as controlling.

Also, as described in the eighth embodiment, the maximum number of sliding symbols in the pseudo game may be greater than the maximum number of sliding symbols (eg, "4") in the main game. For example, in a pseudo-game, 20-frame control may be performed (after the stop operation is performed, the reels are rotated by a maximum of 20 symbols and then stopped). In this case, the symbols stop-displayed when the "red 7" symbol is not stop-displayed in the pseudo game may be the same symbols stop-displayed when the small winning combination is missed in the main game. For example, as described in the first embodiment, a specific combination (for example, watermelon) can be determined as an internal winning combination, and the specific combination may be the player's stop operation mode (stop operation timing). However, the number of medals to be awarded varies depending on the pressing order or a combination thereof (for example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer), 8 medals payout, if inappropriate (wrong answer), payout 1 or no payout). Then, when the watermelon is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer) in the main game, the "watermelon" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, and the middle reel. A "watermelon" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle area of 3C, and a "watermelon" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R. In this case, the "watermelon" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, the "watermelon" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the "replay" symbol is stop-displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R. It is assumed that If the "Red 7" pattern is not stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, the same pattern combination as the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed when a small win is missed in such a main game (small winning combination) is stopped. It may be displayed. There is no particular limitation on such a small winning combination, and it is possible to appropriately adopt a combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed when a small winning combination such as a watermelon or a bell is missed.

Further, as described above, in the present invention, a lottery (pseudo-game occurrence lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to generate (continue) a pseudo-game, and when the pseudo-game occurrence lottery is won, a pseudo-game A game may be generated (continued) and the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state may be granted. In addition, when the pseudo-game is performed again after the pseudo-game is performed (the pseudo-game is repeated multiple times), when the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is performed, the next pseudo-game It may be transferred, and the case where the pseudo-game is repeated a plurality of times may be, for example, the case where an effect related to the extension (addition) of the AT state is performed. It is also possible to combine these configurations as follows.

For example, when a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation) is used as a trigger to shift to a pseudo-game, and a specific symbol combination ("Red 7" symbol alignment) is displayed stopped in the pseudo-game, the extension (addition) of the AT state is After that, an image ("hit the lever" image) for prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation (operation of the start lever 7) is displayed, and the predetermined operation ( Start lever 7 operation) is used as a trigger to shift to a pseudo-game. It is possible to configure the pseudo-game to be repeated in such a manner. Here, when a specific combination of symbols ("Red 7" pattern matching) is stopped and displayed in one pseudo-game, it is possible to move to the next pseudo-game (as a result of the one pseudo-game, AT state is extended (added)) On the other hand, if a specific pattern combination ("Red 7" pattern matching) is not stopped and displayed in one pseudo-game, the pseudo-game ends (the one pseudo-game As a result of the game, the extension (addition) of the AT state is not performed), and whether or not the next pseudo-game is performed after one pseudo-game is performed (specific symbol combination ("Red 7" symbol A lottery (pseudo-game occurrence lottery) is performed to determine whether or not the matching) is stopped and displayed, and when the pseudo-game occurrence lottery is won, a specific symbol combination ("Red 7 "Pattern matching)" may be stopped and displayed, and a transition to the next pseudo-game may be possible. As a result, as long as the pseudo-game generation lottery (pseudo-game continuation lottery) is won, the pseudo-game is repeated and the AT state is extended (added). As described above, the AT state game period is managed by game number management, set number management, payout number management, difference number management, navigation number management, and the like. ), the number of games, the number of sets, the number of payouts, the management of the difference number, or the number of times of navigation, etc. are added.

The condition for extending (adding) the AT state is not limited to the stop display of a specific symbol combination ("Red 7" pattern matching) in the pseudo-game, and any condition is established in the pseudo-game. It is possible to configure such that the AT state is extended (added) in some cases. For example, one set of pseudo-games is performed, and in each pseudo-game, the correct pushing order is set as the order of stop operations for the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. As with the pseudo-game progression stop buttons described in the ninth embodiment, the order of pressing the correct answers can be determined by lottery in each pseudo-game. When one set of pseudo-games is started, the player performs five pseudo-games with the aim of performing a stop operation in the correct order of pressing. While the pseudo-game is performed five times, the AT state is extended (added) each time the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the correct answer (up to five times). After the pseudo-game is played five times, the pseudo-game is terminated and the main game is started. Such a configuration can be adopted.

Also, if the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the correct answer at least once in one set of pseudo-games (five times of pseudo-games), the next set of pseudo-games (five times of pseudo-games). is possible (as a result of the one set of pseudo-games, the AT state is extended (added)), while one set of pseudo-games (five times of pseudo-games) is the correct pushing order If the stop operation is not performed, the set of pseudo-games (five times of pseudo-games) ends (as a result of the one set of pseudo-games, the AT state is not extended (added) ). Alternatively, while the five pseudo-games constituting one set are performed, if the stop operation is performed in the correct order of pressing in one of the five pseudo-games, the next pseudo-game It is possible to shift to the game (as a result of the one pseudo-game, the AT state is extended (added)), while the stop operation is not performed in the correct order of pressing in one pseudo-game (Even if all five pseudo-games have not been digested at that time) ends with the pseudo-game (as a result of the one pseudo-game, the AT state is not extended (added)) can be In addition, when the AT state is extended (added) by performing the stop operation in the order of pressing the correct answer, basically a predetermined number of games are added, while two pseudo-games are performed consecutively. When the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the correct answer, the number of games larger than the predetermined number of games may be added. Further, the number of additional games may be increased step by step as the number of successive pseudo-games in which the stop operation is performed in the order of pressing the correct answer (the number of consecutive successes) increases.

When adopting a mode (push order guessing) in which the AT state is extended (added) by performing a stop operation in the correct pushing order as described above, such pushing order guessing is performed in the main game. Then, it is necessary to create new data for a combination of symbols for correct pressing order, a combination of symbols for incorrect pressing order, a combination of symbols for incorrect pressing, and the like, and a reel arrangement for these symbol combinations. It is necessary to create new data for reel stop control, etc., and the amount of data increases. In this respect, when performing such pushing order guessing in a pseudo-game, it is possible to freely stop any symbol combination without being limited to symbol combinations corresponding to the internal winning combination as in the main game. Since it is possible, it is possible to realize the pressing order without increasing the amount of data. In addition, by using the saved data capacity, it is possible to create a room for adding new game features and increasing interest.

The extension (addition) of the AT state as described above can be performed when a pseudo-game is performed in the AT state. A specific example of such an AT state will be described below.

In this example, the state in which a player plays a game is roughly divided into an AT game, which is an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player, and a normal game, which is a normal game state that is relatively more disadvantageous than the AT game. The transition from the normal game to the AT game is the number of games played after the end of the AT game has reached the ceiling game number (completed ceiling game number), winning the fixed role (fixed role winning), specific in the main CZ state This is triggered when the reel action is determined (CZ success).

A "fixed combination" means a combination that an AT game is to be started, and here, "cherry lips", "strong cherry lips" and "strong bells" are indicated. When shifting from the normal game to the AT game due to the winning of the fixed role, first, based on the winning of the fixed role, the basic number of continuations of the AT game is given (150 is added to the difference number counter for AT management). . After that, a reel action (special reel action) is determined from a plurality of types of reel actions according to the type of the fixed combination, and the number of additional AT game continuations corresponding to the determined reel action is given (AT management difference 300, 400 or 500 is added to the number counter. The reel action is the reel effect (reel effect) described above.

Also, in the normal game, "strong chance slip" (rare role) is determined as an internal winning role, and when either "special slip A1 to 6" or "special slip B" wins (strong chance slip is established), the main Under the control of the CPU 101, the effect game state shifts from the "normal game state" to the "main CZ state 1", and remains in the main CZ state for 8 games. Then, when the effect game state is "main CZ state 1" or "main CZ state 2" to which it shifts after that, when a specific reel action is determined and executed, it becomes CZ success, and the game is changed from the normal game to the AT game. It is to be transferred.

When shifting to the AT game, until the value of the AT management difference number counter becomes 0 or less (the number of ATs is consumed), the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified, and the game is stopped according to the notification. By performing the operation, the player can increase the number of medals. Specifically, in the AT, when "middle left and right bells", "middle right left bells", "right left middle bells" and "right middle left bells" which are "push order small hands" are determined as internal winning combinations, The stop operation order in which seven medals are to be paid out is notified.

Here, as the state during the AT game, there is provided a pseudo probability variable state in which the number of ATs (the value of the difference number counter for AT management) can be added. Specifically, in the AT game, one of the "bell lips 1 to 4" is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the transition lottery of the pseudo probability change state is won, a specific reel action is executed, and the pseudo probability change is performed by the control of the main CPU 101 transition to state. In this pseudo-variable state, the number of pseudo-games is determined when the game start lock is executed once, and the determined number of pseudo-games can be performed. In addition, when determining the number of times of pseudo-games, it is possible to determine the number of times of pseudo-games.

Here, the pseudo-game is the operation of the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1-bet button 6b) locked at the start of the game (pseudo input operation), the operation of the start lever (start lever 7) (pseudo start operation). , determination of a pseudo internal winning combination, and operation (pseudo stop operation) of the stop buttons (stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R) are performed to control the progress of the game, as if it were a normal game (main game). Similarly, it is possible to impress the player as if the game is progressing. It should be noted that the determination of the pseudo internal winning combination is performed based on the pseudo start operation, similarly to the determination of the internal winning combination in the normal game.

In the pseudo-probability-variable state, the number of ATs (the value of the AT management difference number counter) is added to the lottery based on the determined internal winning combination, and the number of ATs ( A lottery for adding the value of the difference number counter for AT management is performed. The determination of the pseudo internal winning combination is not limited to the aspect performed based on the pseudo start operation, but may be performed based on, for example, a pseudo input operation or a pseudo stop operation (especially a pseudo stop operation related to the first stop operation). may be Along with this, the timing at which the AT number of additional lottery is performed is not limited to the timing at which the pseudo start operation is performed, and the pseudo input operation or the pseudo stop operation (especially the pseudo stop operation related to the first stop operation) is performed. It may be the timing that was decided. Also, at the timing when all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are stopped (pseudo-stop) in the pseudo-game (timing when the symbol combination corresponding to the pseudo-internal winning combination is stopped and displayed), a lottery with the number of ATs added can be performed. good. In this case, a lottery with the number of ATs added may be performed based on the symbol combination (pseudo symbol combination) displayed by the pseudo stop. When the additional lottery is performed, the lottery result (the number of ATs) is added to the value of the difference number counter for AT management.

In addition, in the pseudo probability variation state, "pseudo probability variation state 1" (first mode) and "pseudo There is a probability variable state 2 ” (second mode), and based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition (for example, winning a high probability transition lottery), from `` pseudo probability variable state 1 '' (first mode) to `` It will shift to the pseudo probability variable state 2” (second mode). In this "pseudo probability variable state 2" (second mode), when a pseudo game is executed, the number of pseudo games is always determined to be two or more times, so the number of ATs based on the pseudo internal winning combination It is possible to allow the player to enjoy the opportunity of the additional lottery multiple times, and to diversify the additional lottery state that is advantageous to the player, that is, the pseudo probability variable state.

In addition, the transition from "pseudo probability variable state 2" (second mode) to "pseudo probability variable state 1" (first mode) is based on the number of times the pseudo game was actually performed (the number of high securing obstacle games) Since it is performed, it is possible to surely enjoy the opportunity of the lottery with the AT number added based on the pseudo game in the "pseudo probability variable state 2" (second mode). In addition, the transition to the pseudo probability changing state may be performed not only during the AT game but also during the normal game. In this case, a lottery for transition to the AT game or the main CZ state is performed based on the determined internal winning combination, and a lottery for transition to the AT game or the main CZ state is performed based on the determined pseudo internal winning combination. should be performed.

As described above, the pseudo probability variable state is a state in which a plurality of pseudo games can be executed in one unit game. A plurality of pseudo-games can be performed, for example, in step S8 (main-side effect control process at game start) of FIG. 23 (main process). And, since the extension (addition) of the AT state is performed based on the result of the pseudo-game, the pseudo-probability-changing state plays the role of the special zone for addition in the AT state. Here, the "pseudo game result" related to the extension (addition) of the AT state may be a pseudo internal winning combination or a pseudo symbol combination, as described above.

When adopting a pseudo internal winning combination as a "pseudo game result" related to the extension (addition) of the AT state, the following examples can be given. In this example, it is possible to stay in the pseudo probability variable state not only during AT game but also during normal game. In addition, the pseudo-game is performed with 4 times as one set, and if the pseudo-game continuation lottery (winning probability: 50%) is won, after one set is performed, it is possible to move to the next set It has become. As the pseudo probability variation state, three types of modes are provided: pseudo probability variation state A (mode A), pseudo probability variation state B (mode B), and pseudo probability variation state C (mode C). The probability that a specific combination (rare combination) is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination is in the order of pseudo-variable state A (1/4) → pseudo-variable state B (1/2) → pseudo-variable state C (1/1). get higher When a specific combination is determined as a pseudo internal winning combination, the AT state is extended (added). The pseudo internal winning combination may be the same as the normal internal winning combination, or an internal winning combination dedicated to the pseudo game may be provided. Also, when a specific symbol combination is displayed, one pseudo probability variation state is promoted to a pseudo probability variation state that is more advantageous than the pseudo probability variation state. Promotion of such a pseudo probability change state may be one stage (pseudo probability change state A → pseudo probability change state B, or pseudo probability change state B → pseudo probability change state C) according to the type of a specific symbol combination. However, it may be two stages (pseudo probability change state A → pseudo probability change state C).

When adopting a pseudo symbol combination as a "pseudo game result" related to the extension (addition) of the AT state, the following examples can be given. In this example, the pseudo game is played with 5 times as one set. Then, when a specific pattern combination ("Red 7" pattern match) is displayed at least once as a pseudo pattern combination in one set of pseudo games (five times of pseudo games), the next set of pseudo games ( 5 times of pseudo-games) can be transitioned (as a result of the one set of pseudo-games, the AT state is extended (added)), while one set of pseudo-games (5 times of pseudo-games ), if a specific symbol combination ("Red 7" pattern matching) is not displayed even once as a pseudo symbol combination, the pseudo game of the set (five times pseudo game) ends (the one set As a result of the pseudo-game, the AT state is not extended (added).

When the post-stop operation control (rocking control) is executed to rock the reel, the rocking mode (pattern) may be always constant, or a plurality of rocking patterns may be provided. may be The plurality of rocking patterns differ from each other in reel motion patterns in a state where post-stop motion control (rocking control) is being executed. For example, swing pattern A, swing pattern B, and swing pattern C are provided as a plurality of swing patterns with mutually different micro-vibration cycles and/or amplitudes. In the rocking control in step S1083, it is possible to rock the reels in one rocking pattern selected from these rocking patterns. The timing of selecting the swing pattern is not particularly limited, and for example, one swing pattern may be selected by lottery each time the swing control is performed. Alternatively, one swing pattern may be selected in a non-advantageous section, and the reels may be always swung in the one swing pattern in an advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section. Then, when the advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section, one swing pattern may be selected again. Alternatively, when swing control is performed, one swing pattern may be selected based on a predetermined variable (value), and the value may be updated in the non-advantageous section. For example, each swing pattern is associated with a predetermined numerical range (for example, swing pattern A: 1 to 100, swing pattern B: 101 to 200, swing pattern C: 201 to 300), A swing pattern corresponding to a value (any value from 1 to 300) updated by lottery during the non-advantageous section may be selected. Further, the variable may be the value of the advantageous interval game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the advantageous interval payout number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, or the like. Thus, as the number of unit games played in the advantageous section increases, the swing pattern can be changed in the order of swing pattern A→swing pattern B→swing pattern C. Information indicating the variable or the selected swing pattern can be stored in the RWM (or RAM) for managing the motion of the reels in the pseudo-game. The RWM does not affect the pointing function at all.

When a plurality of swing patterns are provided, the reels may be swung in a swing pattern corresponding to the type of privilege given to the player. For example, when the privilege is a transition to an advantageous section (for example, when winning the advantageous section transition lottery), the reel is shaken with the swing pattern A, and the privilege is a pseudo bonus (AT state). If it is a transition (for example, if you win a pseudo-bonus transition lottery), swing the reels in the swing pattern B, and if the benefit is an extension of the pseudo-bonus (extend the number of games or add the number of sets) ( For example, when a 1G consecutive lottery is won), it is possible to configure such that the reels are rocked in the rocking pattern C. Only the third stop reel is rocked in the rocking pattern corresponding to the type of privilege, and the first stop reel and the second stop reel are rocked in the rocking pattern common to various privileges. You can do it.

The pseudo-games described above may be performed on reel-shaped physical structures (sub-reels) provided separately from the main reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), or the main effect display section 21 or liquid crystal This may be done by displaying a reel-like image (video reel) on the display device. A pseudo-game performed in such a manner can be employed as an effect controlled by the sub-control circuit 200. FIG. However, it is desirable to clearly indicate the main reels controlled by the main control circuit 100 on the pachi-slot machine 1 so that the player does not misunderstand the effect as the main game. For example, in the vicinity of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, it is possible to configure such that the characters "rotating drum" are always displayed on a panel or a liquid crystal display device. This display is only displayed when a game is being played, and is displayed when no game is being played (a demo screen is displayed) (playing standby), when an error has occurred, or when a setting change operation has been performed. It may not be displayed in the state in which it is being performed.

In addition, when a power failure occurs while the pseudo-game is being performed, the pseudo-game may be restarted when the power failure is restored. Although not shown, in this embodiment, the main control circuit 100 includes a power management circuit. The power management circuit manages fluctuations in the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board. For example, when the power supply is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the starting voltage value (10V) from 0V), the power management circuit operates as follows: , and when a power failure occurs (when the power supply voltage drops below the power failure voltage value (10.5 V) from 12 V), a power failure detection signal is output to the microcomputer. When the power management circuit outputs a power failure detection signal, the main CPU 101 stores information (pseudo-game information) corresponding to the pseudo-game flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 103 as backup data. The pseudo-game flag is a flag indicating that the pseudo-game is being executed (see step S1025 in FIG. 251), and is set to ON when the pseudo-game starts, and when the pseudo-game ends ( For example, it is set to OFF when the lock effect end flag (see step S1073 in FIG. 254 and step S1084 in FIG. 255) is set to ON). When recovering from the power outage, the main CPU 101 can recognize, based on the backup data, that the pseudo-game was being played at the time of the power outage, and can resume the pseudo-game (see FIG. 24). See step S29). In addition, at the time of recovery from the power failure, the pseudo game may be resumed from the beginning, or the pseudo game situation at the time of the power failure may be resumed (from the middle of the pseudo game). For example, if power failure occurs while all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R restart from where they start rotating (see step S1024 in FIG. 251). Alternatively, if power failure occurs while at least one reel is stopped, the reel that was rotating at the time of power failure is stopped while the reel is stopped at the symbol position at the time of power failure. It may be restarted from the place where the operation is received (see step S1063 in FIG. 254).

In addition, in the event that a power outage occurs while a pseudo-game is being played, if the setting value is changed when recovering from the power failure, the pseudo-game will not be restarted in the game after the setting value is changed. may be In this case, for example, the main CPU 101 may initialize the pseudo-game information stored in the predetermined area of the main RAM 103 when the set value is changed (see step S23 in FIG. 24). ). As a result, when a power failure occurs while a pseudo-game is being performed, if the setting value is not changed when recovering from the power failure, the pseudo-game is restarted, while the setting value is changed. It is possible to configure so that the pseudo-game is not restarted when Alternatively, if a power failure occurs while a pseudo-game is being played, the pseudo-game may not be restarted regardless of whether or not the set value has been changed when recovering from the power failure. good.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, even if the notification target combination is determined as an internal winning combination in one unit game in the AT state, if a pseudo game is performed in the unit game, the During the pseudo-game, it is desirable to configure so that the stop operation information is not notified on the instruction monitor. In this case, in the pseudo game, the symbol combination corresponding to the notification target combination may be stopped and displayed, or the symbol combination irrelevant to the notification target combination may be stopped and displayed. Also, in the unit game (main game), in the case of displaying the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor, when the random delay process is started (for example, the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. ) or at the timing when the first reel starts rotating by random delay processing. Also, during the pseudo-game, on the instruction monitor, it is possible to perform a display that uniquely corresponds to the fact that the game is a pseudo-game (display for notifying that it is a pseudo-game).

(C-12) The gaming machine according to any one of (C-1) to (C-11),
a start operation detection means (start switch 7S) capable of detecting a start operation by a player;
a combination determination means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S5 in FIG. 23) capable of determining a winning combination when the start operation is detected by the start operation detection means;
Giving means (main CPU 101 for executing the process of step S14 in FIG. 23) capable of giving game media or game media data according to the pattern mode of the plurality of reels in the main game;
an informing means (instruction monitor) capable of informing the player of information advantageous to the player;
The giving means is
In the main game, when a predetermined symbol pattern (combination of symbols related to a minor combination) is derived as the symbol pattern of the plurality of reels by stopping the plurality of reels, according to the predetermined pattern pattern. game media or game media data can be given,
The reel control means is
After the plurality of reels are stopped in the pseudo-game, one of the plurality of reels is started to rotate for the main game, and the rotation start timing of the one reel Post-pseudo-game reel rotation start control means (main CPU 101 for executing the processing of FIG. 258, etc.) capable of starting the rotation of the other reels at a late timing,
When a predetermined combination (reported combination) is determined as a winning combination by the combination determination means, after the rotation of the reels is started by the post-pseudo-game reel rotation start control means, a predetermined stop is performed as the stop operation. It is possible to execute the stop control after the stop operation so that the predetermined symbol mode is derived as the symbol mode of the plurality of reels when the operation (correct pressing order) is detected,
The notification means is
When the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination by the combination determination means, the information regarding the predetermined stop operation is not notified as the advantageous information in the pseudo game, and the reel rotation start control means after the pseudo game It is possible to notify information about the predetermined stop operation after starting the rotation of the reel.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eighth embodiment, after the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped in the pseudo game, the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) for the main game It is possible to start the rotation of one of the reels and to start the rotation of the other reels at a timing later than the rotation start timing of the one reel. In addition, when a predetermined combination (reported combination) is determined as a winning combination, after starting the rotation of the reels after the pseudo-game, when a predetermined stop operation (correct pressing order) is detected as a stop operation , it is possible to execute the stop control after the stop operation so that a predetermined symbol pattern (combination of symbols related to a minor win) is derived, and in the main game, a predetermined symbol pattern (combination of symbols related to a minor win) ) is derived, it is possible to provide game media or game media data corresponding to the predetermined symbol pattern (combination of symbols related to minor wins). Then, when a predetermined combination (reported combination) is determined as a winning combination, information regarding a predetermined stop operation (correct pressing order) is not reported in the pseudo-game, and the reels are started to rotate after the pseudo-game. It is configured to be able to notify information about the predetermined stop operation (correct order of pressing). As a result, it is possible to avoid misunderstanding that the player should perform a predetermined stop operation (correct order of pressing) in the pseudo-game, and combined with post-stop operation control (rocking control) , It is possible to effectively prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the pseudo game as the main game.

As the predetermined combination (reported combination), similar to the specific combination described above, a combination in which the number of medals to be awarded varies according to the player's stop operation mode (pressing order) (for example, the stop operation mode is appropriate ( If the answer is correct, 8 coins will be paid out, and if the answer is incorrect (incorrect answer), 1 coin will be paid out or no coin will be paid out). Notification of information on the predetermined stop operation (correct order of pressing) (display of information on the stop operation on the instruction monitor) is performed after starting the rotation of the reel after the pseudo game, for example, the third stop operation in the main game (or It may be configured to continue until the first stop operation or the second stop operation is completed.

[Ninth Embodiment]
The first to eighth embodiments have been described above. The ninth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, descriptions of the portions that the descriptions of the first to eighth embodiments apply to the ninth embodiment will be omitted.

In the above description, for example, "in the first embodiment, ~" or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ~", it seems to be limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Even if it is a simple description, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment within the scope of the ninth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, regarding the description limited to the pachi-slot machines 1 according to the second to eighth embodiments, the pachi-slot machines according to the ninth embodiment are not deviated from the spirit of the ninth embodiment. It can also be applied to machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to eighth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the ninth embodiment. can be used or combined.

Further, even if the shape is different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments, there are cases where the same reference numerals are assigned to the structures having the same functions for convenience. Further, even if the shape and processing are the same as those of the pachi-slot machines 1 according to the first to eighth embodiments, different symbols and step numbers may be given for convenience.

<Lock effect execution processing>
FIG. 262 is a flow chart showing lock effect execution processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing pseudo-game start processing performed in the main control circuit.

The lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 262 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S8 (game start main side effect control process) of FIG. 23 (main process). In the eighth embodiment, it has been described that the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 251 is performed as the process performed in step S8 (main effect control process at game start) of FIG. 23 (main process). In this embodiment, as the processing performed in step S8 (main effect control processing at game start) in FIG. 23 (main processing), lock effect execution processing shown in FIG. The lock effect execution process shown may be performed.

In the lock effect execution process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect start flag (see steps S1006, S1011 and S1013 in FIG. 250) is set to ON (step S1201). When determining that the lock effect start flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the lock effect start flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo game start processing (step S1202). Here, with reference to FIG. 263, the pseudo-game start processing will be described.

In the pseudo-game start process, first, the main CPU 101 determines that the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is any of the lock effect numbers "3", "4", and "5". It is determined whether or not (step S1221). When determining that the selected lock effect number is none of the lock effect numbers "3", "4" and "5", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the selected lock effect number is any one of the lock effect numbers "3", "4", and "5", the main CPU 101 A corresponding value is set in the pseudo-game start lock timer (step S1222). The pseudo-game start lock timer is updated by the timer update process (see step S206 in FIG. 32). That is, the lock timer at the start of the pseudo-game is decremented by 1 each time the periodic interrupt process (see FIG. 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo game start lock timer is 0 (step S1223). When determining that the pseudo-game start lock timer is not 0, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1223 again. As a result, the pseudo-game start lock is performed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 5 seconds). The lock at the start of the pseudo-game may be a lock effect (freeze) that does not involve reel effects and pseudo-games, or a lock effect that accompanies reel effects (reel actions such as slow rotation, high-speed rotation, and reverse rotation). good too. The reels 3L, 3C, 3R are maintained in a stopped state while the pseudo game start lock is being performed, and even if the player performs some operation, the operation is invalidated.

On the other hand, when determining that the pseudo-game start lock timer is 0, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo-game start command generation and storage processing (step S1224). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo-game start command data and stores the generated pseudo-game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103 . The pseudo-game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). Thereby, in the sub-control circuit 200, it becomes possible to recognize that it is the timing to start the pseudo-game, and it is possible to determine the timing etc. to execute various effects.

Specifically, when the pseudo-game start command data is received, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the start of the pseudo-game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image (“hit the lever” image) with the content “hit the lever” is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the start lever 7. be able to.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1225). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 7S is turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). When determining that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether a predetermined time has elapsed after executing the pseudo-game start command generating and storing process (after the "hit the lever" image is displayed). It is determined whether or not (step S1226). When determining that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1225. On the other hand, when determining that the predetermined time has passed, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-game cancel flag to ON (step S1227). The pseudo-game cancel flag is a flag used to cancel the pseudo-game. After that, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1228), and ends this subroutine.

As above, the processing for starting the pseudo-game performed in step S1202 of FIG. 262 has been described with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 262 .

After executing the process of step S1202, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo-game cancel flag is set to ON (step S1203). When determining that the pseudo-game cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the pseudo-game cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the processing of steps S1204 to S1210, but these processing are the processing of steps S1022 to S1028 in FIG. Since it is the same processing, the description here is omitted. After that, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

As described above, when the lock effect corresponding to any of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250), the pseudo-game start lock is performed. After that, when the start lever 7 is operated, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is started for the pseudo-game, and the pseudo-game is performed (see step S1206 and step S1208 in FIG. 262), and random delay processing ( After step S1123 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, when the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "hit the lever" image is displayed, the pseudo-game (rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R for pseudo-game) is not performed, After normal acceleration processing (see step S1125 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C and 3R becomes constant speed rotation for the main game.

Thus, in the lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 262, it has been described that the pseudo game is started under the condition that the start lever 7 is operated. However, as described in the eighth embodiment, the condition for starting a pseudo-game is not limited to the operation of the start lever 7, and any operation unit (for example, the start lever 7, MAX bet buttons 6a, 1 Operation of the bet button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.) can be employed as appropriate. In addition, the condition for the pseudo-game to be canceled (the pseudo-game cancellation flag is set to ON) is not limited to the passage of a predetermined time, and any operation unit (eg, start lever 7, MAX bet button 6a, The operation of the 1 bet button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.) can be appropriately employed.

<Normal pseudo-game processing>
FIG. 264 is a flow chart showing normal pseudo-game processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 265 is a flowchart showing stop button operation acceptance processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 266 is a flow chart showing swing control processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 267 is a flow chart showing pseudo-game end processing performed in the main control circuit.

The normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 264 is processing performed in the main control circuit 100 at step S1042 of FIG. 253 (simulated-game processing). In the eighth embodiment, as the process performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (process during pseudo-game), the normal process during pseudo-game shown in FIG. 254 is performed. In this embodiment, as the processing performed in step S1042 of FIG. 253 (processing during pseudo-game), the processing during normal pseudo-game shown in FIG. 254 may be performed, or the processing during normal pseudo-game shown in FIG. It may be done.

In the normal pseudo-game processing, first, the main CPU 101 executes the processing of steps S1241 and S1242. is omitted.

After executing the process of step S1242, the main CPU 101 executes a stop button operation acceptance process (step S1243). Here, the stop button operation reception processing will be described with reference to FIG. 265 .

In the stop button operation acceptance process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON (step S1261). The stop button operation cancel flag is a flag that is set when the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the pseudo game (see step S1264). When determining that the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the stop button operation cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R have been operated (step S1262). This process is similar to the process of step S1063 in FIG. The main CPU 101 can recognize valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

When determining that the effective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R have been operated, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the effective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R have not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the MAX bet button 6a has been operated (step S1263). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet switch 6S is turned on.

When determining that the MAX bet button 6a has been operated, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation cancel flag to ON (step S1264). The stop button operation cancel flag is a flag indicating that all remaining stop button operations are to be omitted. After executing the process of step S1264, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the MAX bet button 6a has not been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the start of the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 265 (step S1265). When determining that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1262. On the other hand, when determining that the predetermined time has elapsed, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation omission flag to ON (step S1266). The stop button operation omission flag is a flag indicating that the current stop button operation is to be omitted. After executing the process of step S1266, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

The stop button operation reception processing performed in step S1243 of FIG. 264 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 264 .

After executing the process of step S1243, the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area and the pressing order storage area (step S1244), and determines the reel to be controlled (step S1245). In these processes, when neither the stop button operation cancel flag nor the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 performs the same processes as those of steps S1064 and S1065 in FIG. On the other hand, when the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines that the leftmost stop button 8 among the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R has been operated. , the operation stop button storage area is updated, and the reel to be controlled is determined.

For example, when all the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area in the same way as when the left stop button 8L is operated, The bit 4 is updated to "0" and the left reel 3L is determined as the reel to be controlled. When the middle stop button 8C and the right stop button 8R are enabled, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 1 of the operation stop button storage area in the same way as when the middle stop button 8C is operated. The bit 5 is updated to "0", and the middle reel 3C is determined as the reel to be controlled. Also, when the left stop button 8L and the middle stop button 8C are valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area in the same way as when the left stop button 8L is operated, The bit 4 is updated to "0" and the left reel 3L is determined as the reel to be controlled. When only the right stop button 8R is valid, the main CPU 101 stores "1" in bit 2 of the operation stop button storage area and sets bit 6 to "1" in the same way as when the right stop button 8R is operated. 0”, and determines the right reel 3R as the reel to be controlled.

Subsequently, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1246 to S1249, which are basically the same as the processes of steps S1066 to S1069 in FIG. In the process of step S1246, as in the process of step S1066, the main CPU 101 determines a predetermined stop position as the final stop position regardless of the stop start position (see step S116). and store it. 246(b) to (d), FIGS. 247(b) to (d), and FIG. The respective reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped in the manner shown in 248(b)-(d).

Here, when the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag are set to ON, the control is performed as compared with the case where the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is not set to ON. It is also possible to vary the manner of rotation until the target reel stops. For example, if the stop button operation cancel flag is set to on (when the MAX bet button 6a is operated), neither the stop button operation cancel flag nor the stop button operation omission flag is set to on. (When the stop button 8 is operated), the time from the operation of the button to the stop of the reel to be controlled may be longer (for example, the reel to be controlled may be played one extra time. It may be stopped after being rotated). However, even if there is a difference in the rotation mode, the pattern finally stopped and displayed will be the same pattern regardless of whether the stop button operation cancel flag or the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON. there is

When determining in step S1249 that the reel to be controlled has stopped, the main CPU 101 executes rocking control processing (step S1250). Here, the rocking control process will be described with reference to FIG.

In the swing control process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON (step S1281). When determining that the stop button operation cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop button operation omitting flag is set to ON (step S1282). When determining that the stop button operation omission flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the stop button operation omission flag to OFF (step S1283).

When determining that the stop button operation cancel flag is set to ON in step S1281, or after executing the process of step S1283, the main CPU 101 executes control to stop the reel to be controlled (step S1284). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets data corresponding to the stopping excitation pattern for stopping the reel to be controlled. As a result, the reel to be controlled is kept stopped in the manner shown in FIGS. 246(b) to (d), FIGS. 247(b) to (d), and FIGS. (Unlike the illustration, no rocking occurs).

When determining in step S1282 that the stop button operation omission flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes control to swing the reel to be controlled (step S1285). This process is similar to the process of step S1070 in FIG. 246(b)-(d), FIGS. 247(b)-(d), and FIGS. 248(b)-(d).

After executing the process of step S1284 or step S1285, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

The rocking control process performed in step S1250 in FIG. 264 has been described above with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 264 .

After executing the process of step S1250, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there are valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R (step S1251). This process is similar to the process of step S1071 in FIG. When determining that the effective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R do not exist, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo-game end processing (step S1252). Here, with reference to FIG. 267, the pseudo-game end processing will be described.

In the pseudo-game ending process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is the lock effect number "3" (step S1301). When determining that the selected lock effect number is the lock effect number "3", the main CPU 101 outputs an AT equivalent signal via the external centralized terminal board 55 (step S1302). As described in the first embodiment, the external centralized terminal board 55 is connected to the data display device and the hall computer outside the pachi-slot machine 1, and these devices can also be used to monitor the state of token insertion and game play in the pachi-slot machine 1. State transitions are recognizable.

The AT-equivalent signal is an external signal that is turned on when the AT state is started and turned off when the AT state ends. In the process of step S1302, the main CPU 101 turns on the external signal. Similarly, although not shown, the main CPU 101 turns on the external signal after executing the process of step S1083 in FIG. As a result, the data display and the hall computer recognize that the AT state has started.

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "3" or "5" ends (when the "red 7" pattern is stopped and displayed), the AT equivalent signal is turned on. It is configured as follows. Also, as described in the first embodiment, a plurality of AT states (predetermined AT state and specific AT state) may be provided, and each AT state may have different advantages for the player. As such an AT state, for example, pseudo BB (big bonus) and pseudo RB (regular bonus) described in the first embodiment can be adopted. Then, when it is decided to shift to pseudo BB and when it is decided to transfer to pseudo RB, the same symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol alignment) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game. You may do so. Furthermore, when it is decided to shift to pseudo BB, when a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" pattern matching) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game, and when it is decided to switch to pseudo RB The same AT-equivalent signal may be turned on when a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol combination) is stopped and displayed in a pseudo-game. As a result, when a specific symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbol combination) is stopped and displayed in a pseudo-game, it is possible to determine to which pseudo-bonus, pseudo-BB or pseudo-RB, the shift has been made. It is possible to obscure it, and to make the player feel a sense of expectation. The timing at which the pseudo BB to pseudo RB actually start is not particularly limited, but after a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" pattern matching) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo game (when the pseudo game is performed) unit game, or a unit game that is performed a predetermined number of times after the unit game). For example, when the "red 7" pattern set is stopped and displayed along the active line in the main game, the pseudo BB is started, and the "BAR" pattern set is stopped and displayed along the active line in the main game. may be used as a trigger to start the pseudo RB.

In the above, when a specific symbol combination (for example, "red 7" symbol matching) is stopped and displayed in the pseudo-game (before the random delay process is started), the AT equivalent signal is turned on. Similarly, when a specific symbol combination (for example, "Red 7" symbol combination) is stopped and displayed in the reel effect (before the random delay process is started), the AT equivalent signal may be turned on. . Also, the AT-equivalent signal may be turned on at the timing when the pseudo bonus actually starts (for example, step S106 in FIG. 28). The timing for turning off the AT equivalent signal is also not particularly limited, but it is possible to turn off the AT equivalent signal at the timing when the pseudo bonus actually ends (for example, step S155 in FIG. 31). As described in the first embodiment, the external signal 1 (the AT-equivalent signal) is turned on based on the start of the AT state of the first set, and from the second set onward, the set is turned on. The external signal 2 may be turned on each time it is started. From this point of view, the pseudo-game may be performed only when it is decided to shift to the AT state of the first set (for example, it is not performed when the 1G consecutive lottery is won). Further, when the AT-equivalent signal is turned on, the section lamp described in the first embodiment is lit.

When it is determined in step S1301 that the lock effect number is not the lock effect number "3", the main CPU 101 determines whether the lock effect number selected in the lock effect determination process (see FIG. 250) is the lock effect number "5". It is determined whether or not (step S1303). After executing the process of step S1302, or when it is determined that the lock effect number is not the lock effect number "5" (that is, it is the lock effect number "4") in step S1303, the main CPU 101 is connected to the external concentration terminal. A medal insertion signal is output via the plate 55 (step S1304).

As described in the first embodiment, the medal insertion signal is a signal output from the external collective terminal board 55 when medals are inserted (see steps S42 and S46 in FIG. 25). That is, the medal insertion signal is output each time the main game is played, and the number of games played on the pachi-slot machine 1 can be recognized via the medal insertion signal on the data display machine or the hall computer. It has become. In this embodiment, by outputting the medal insertion signal also in the pseudo game, the number of times of the game is the number of times including the pseudo game (the total number of times of the main game and the number of pseudo games). As a result, even when a pseudo-game is played, the number of games is counted up. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 outputs a medal insertion signal even after executing the process of step S1083 in FIG.

The medal insertion signal can be output at the timing when the pseudo game starts or the timing when the pseudo game ends. The timing at which the pseudo-game starts is, for example, when the start lever 7 is operated (for example, when the determination result of step S1225 in FIG. 263 becomes "YES"), or when the pseudo-game reels 3L, 3C, The time when 3R rotation starts (for example, the time when the process of step S1206 in FIG. 262 is performed) can be mentioned. The timing at which the pseudo-game ends is, for example, when the rotation of the pseudo-game reels 3L, 3C, 3R stops (for example, the timing at which the processing of FIG. 267 is performed), or when the main game reels 3L, 3C, The time when the rotation of 3R starts (for example, when the determination result in step S1122 in FIG. 257 becomes "YES" or when the first reel starts rotating by random delay processing) can be mentioned. It should be noted that when the medal insertion signal is output in the pseudo game, the medal insertion signal may not be output when the medal is inserted in the unit game in which the pseudo game is performed.

After executing the processing of step S1304, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect end flag to ON (step S1305), and ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1303 that the lock effect number is the lock effect number "5", the main CPU 101 executes post-pseudo-game reel effect processing (step S1306). Since the post-pseudo-game reel effect processing has been described with reference to FIG. 255, description thereof will be omitted here. After executing the process of step S1306, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

As above, the pseudo-game end processing performed in step S1252 of FIG. 264 has been described with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 264 . After executing the process of step S1252, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Pseudo-game challenge operation reception processing>
Figure 268 is a flow chart showing a pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process performed in the main control circuit.

The pseudo-game challenge operation receiving process shown in FIG. 268 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S1243 of FIG. 264 (normal pseudo-game process). In the above description, the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 265 is performed as the process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 264 (normal pseudo-game processing). In this embodiment, as the process performed in step S1243 of FIG. 264 (process during normal pseudo-game), the pseudo-game challenge operation reception process shown in FIG. 268 may be performed.

Specifically, when all the stop buttons 8 are valid (when none of the stop buttons 8 have been operated yet), that is, when the current stop operation is the first stop operation, as shown in FIG. Pseudo-game challenge operation reception processing is performed, and if there is an invalid stop button 8 (if at least one stop button 8 has been operated), that is, this stop operation is the second stop operation or the third If it is a stop operation, the stop button operation acceptance process shown in FIG. 265 may be performed. The main CPU 101 can recognize valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R and invalid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 21).

In the pseudo-game challenge operation reception process, first, the main CPU 101 determines a pseudo-game progress stop button (step S1321). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery based on a random number value to select one stop button 8 out of the left stop button 8L, the middle stop button 8C, and the right stop button 8R as a pseudo-game progress stop button. decide.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes pseudo-game start command generation and storage processing (step S1322). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates pseudo-game start command data and stores the generated pseudo-game start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103 . The pseudo game start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). Thereby, in the sub-control circuit 200, it becomes possible to recognize that it is the timing to start the pseudo-game, and it is possible to determine the timing etc. to execute various effects.

Specifically, when the pseudo-game start command data is received, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the start of the pseudo-game. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image with a content such as "Pseudo-game starts when the stop button is three-choice correct answer" is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the stop button 8. can be done.

Next, main CPU 101 determines whether valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R have been operated (step S1323). This process is similar to the process of step S1063 in FIG. When determining that the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R have been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the operated stop button 8 matches the pseudo-game progress stop button determined in step S1321 (step S1324).

When determining that the operated stop button 8 coincides with the pseudo-game progress stop button, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine and shifts the processing to step S1244 in FIG. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operated stop button 8 does not match the pseudo-game progress stop button, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-game cancel flag to ON (step S1325), and ends this subroutine.

Although not shown, when the pseudo-game cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates the pseudo-game challenge operation acceptance process shown in FIG. , terminates the normal pseudo-game processing shown in FIG. 264, and ends the lock effect execution processing shown in FIG. 262 without performing the processing of steps S1209 and S1210 of FIG.

If it is determined in step S1323 that the valid stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R have not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the processing of steps S1326 to S1329. Since the process is the same as the process of S1266, the description here is omitted. After that, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

From the above, when the pseudo-game progress stop button (for example, the left stop button 8L) is operated as the first stop operation (if the stop button 3 choices are correct), the pseudo-game continues, random delay processing (See step S1123 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes constant speed rotation for the main game. On the other hand, when the stop button 8 (for example, the middle stop button 8C or the right stop button 8R) other than the pseudo-game progress stop button is operated as the first stop operation (when the three stop buttons fail), At that point, the pseudo-game ends, and after normal acceleration processing (see step S1125 in FIG. 257), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes constant-speed rotation for the main game.

Thus, in the present embodiment, after the rotation of the pseudo-game reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, the pseudo-game progresses under the condition that the appropriate stop button 8 is operated. is possible. On the other hand, such an appropriate operation of the stop button 8 may be employed as a condition for starting a pseudo-game. For example, in FIG. 263, it was explained that the pseudo-game is started under the condition that the start lever 7 is operated, but instead of operating the start lever 7, an appropriate stop button 8 (for example, the left stop button 8L ) is operated, the pseudo-game (rotation of reels 3L, 3C, 3R for pseudo-game) may be started. Then, when an inappropriate stop button 8 (for example, the middle stop button 8C or the right stop button 8R) is operated, the pseudo-game is canceled (in the first place, the rotation of the pseudo-game reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is not performed).

<Determination of freeze type>
FIG. 269 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device.

FIG. 269 shows how the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210 . In this embodiment, a plurality of types of freezes (Freeze A, Freeze B, and Freeze C) are provided. Freeze A is a lock effect without reel effects and pseudo-games. Freeze B is a lock effect accompanied by a reel effect of forward rotation. Freeze C is a lock effect accompanied by a reel effect of reverse rotation. The freeze type determination screen is a screen for determining one freeze from freeze A, freeze B, and freeze C. FIG. The determined freeze is, for example, executed as a pseudo-game start lock (see step S1223 in FIG. 263).

Specifically, FIG. 269 shows that a freeze A image 1201, a freeze B image 1202, a freeze C image 1203, and an arrow image 1204 are displayed as the freeze type determination screen. An arrow image 1204 is an image for indicating which of the freeze A image 1201, freeze B image 1202, and freeze C image 1203 is selected. In the example shown in FIG. 269, an arrow image 1204 is displayed adjacent to the Freeze A image 1201, indicating that the Freeze A image 1201 is selected.

Thus, in the state where the freeze A image 1201 is selected (freeze A selected state), the arrow image 1204 is displayed beside the freeze A image 1201 . Similarly, when the freeze B image 1202 is selected (freeze B selected state), an arrow image 1204 is displayed beside the freeze B image 1202 . When the freeze C image 1203 is selected (freeze C selected state), an arrow image 1204 is displayed beside the freeze C image 1203 .

The position of the arrow image 1204 can be switched by one of the following methods (a) to (c). For example, in the hall menu, one of these methods is set.
(a) Operation of stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R (b) Operation of MAX bet button 6a (c) Timer management

When the above (a) is set, when the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210, the player operates the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R to move the position of the arrow image 1204. can be switched, and the type of freeze can be determined by operating the MAX bet button 6a. Specifically, when the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the Freeze A selection state, Freeze A is determined, and when the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the Freeze B selection state, Freeze B is determined, Freeze C Freeze C is determined when the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the selected state.

When the above (b) is set, the player can switch the position of the arrow image 1204 by operating the MAX bet button 6a when the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210. , and the type of freeze can be determined by operating the start lever 7 . Specifically, when the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze A selection state, freeze A is determined, and when the start lever 7 is operated in the freeze B selection state, freeze B is determined, and freeze C is selected. Freeze C is determined when the start lever 7 is operated at .

When the above (c) is set, when the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210, one of the freeze A selection state, freeze B selection state, and freeze C selection state to another state (for example, freeze A selection state→freeze B selection state→freeze C selection state→freeze A selection state . . . ) at predetermined time intervals. At this time, the player can determine the type of freeze by operating the MAX bet button 6a. Specifically, when the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the Freeze A selection state, Freeze A is determined, and when the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the Freeze B selection state, Freeze B is determined, Freeze C Freeze C is determined when the MAX bet button 6a is operated in the selected state. In addition, when the MAX bet button 6a is not operated within a predetermined time, a type of freeze is determined according to the state when the time has elapsed. Alternatively, the type of freeze selected by lottery may be determined.

The timing at which the freeze type determination screen is displayed on the main display device 210 is not particularly limited. It can be configured to display the screen. For example, when BB wins in one unit game and the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game, the freeze type determination screen may be displayed. Alternatively, when BB wins in one unit game, the freeze type determination screen may be displayed until the start lever 7 is operated in the next unit game.

In the above, the case where the type of freeze is determined has been described, but by the same method, it is also possible to determine the type of lock effect that is performed when the pseudo-bonus transition lottery is won or when the 1G consecutive lottery is won. good. For example, on the screen similar to that of FIG. lock effect) and lock effect C (for example, lock effect with pseudo-game) may be determined. In steps S1005, S1010, and S1012 of FIG. 250, the lock effect thus determined may be selected. Further, the type of swing pattern (for example, one of swing pattern A, swing pattern B, and swing pattern C described in the eighth embodiment) is determined by a similar method. It may be configured to allow The effect determined in this way is not limited to the effect controlled by the main control circuit 100, and may be the effect controlled by the sub-control circuit 200.

<Bonus Winning Process>
FIG. 270 is a flow chart showing bonus winning process performed in the main control circuit.

The bonus winning process shown in FIG. 270 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S70 in FIG. 26 (internal lottery process) is executed. That is, in the bonus winning process, the non-bonus state (neither the bonus state nor the carryover state) is shifted to the carryover state (between flags) by the bonus winning game (the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination). unit game), this processing is performed before the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to rotate.

In the bonus winning process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not BB is determined as an internal winning combination (whether or not the current unit game is a BB winning game) (step S1341). When determining that BB is not determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the main CPU 101 selects any of the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5" and "6" (see FIG. 243). or is selected by lottery (step S1342). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1343), and ends this subroutine. As a result, the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1", "3", "5" or "6" is performed.

In the eighth embodiment, when the lock effect number corresponding to the pseudo-game is selected, the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 (see FIG. 252) is displayed on the main display device 210 (see step S1022 in FIG. 251). explained as a thing. As a result, during the pseudo-game, the player can be urged to perform the stop operation at the timing when the "red 7" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the present embodiment, similarly, the "Aim for 7" effect image 1100 may be displayed on the main display device 210, but here, the "Aim for the BAR" effect image (not shown) is the main display. It is assumed to be displayed on device 210 . As a result, during the pseudo-game, the player can be urged to perform the stop operation at the timing when the "BAR" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

Further, here, after BB is determined as the internal winning combination, the BB state is displayed when the "red 7" symbol alignment is stop-displayed along the active line in the main game ("red 7" symbol alignment is established). is started, and after MB is determined as an internal winning combination, the MB state is started when the "BAR" pattern alignment is stop-displayed along the active line in the main game ("BAR" symbol alignment is established). It is assumed that In this case, in the BB winning game (main game), it can be said that the player should aim at the "Red 7" symbol when operating the respective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R.

However, as described above, when the "Aim for the BAR" effect image is displayed in the pseudo-game, even after the pseudo-game ends and the main game is started, the "Aim for the BAR" effect image is continuously displayed. If so, the player will be forced to aim at a symbol (“BAR” symbol) different from the symbol (“RED 7” symbol) that should be aimed at. In that case, there is a high possibility that the "Red 7" symbol combination will not be stopped and displayed along the active line (BB will not win).

In particular, when the "RED 7" symbol and the "BAR" symbol are arranged apart from each other on each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the probability is extremely high. For example, as shown in FIG. 9, on at least one reel 3 (middle reel 3C), the symbol position (“0”) corresponding to the “RED 7” symbol corresponds to the symbol position (“9”) corresponding to the “BAR” symbol. ) is not within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols (4 symbols), the reel 3 (middle reel 3C) is stopped at the timing when the “BAR” symbol is displayed on the effective line. If so, it will be impossible for BB to win. In this sense, the "Aim for BAR" effect image is a suggestion to prevent BB from winning a prize.

In any case, the effect image "Aim for the BAR" displayed in the pseudo game is displayed at a predetermined timing so as to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the pattern (internal winning combination) that the player should aim for. It is desirable to terminate the display. The timing may be before the random delay processing (see step S1123 in FIG. 257) is started, or after the random delay processing is started. Specifically, as the timing, for example, after the second stop reel stops in the pseudo game until the third stop reel stops (for example, the judgment result of step S1262 in FIG. 265 becomes “YES” and the stop When the operation of the button 8 is the third stop operation, or when the determination result in step S1265 in FIG. 265 is "YES" and the third stop operation is omitted), when all the remaining stop button operations are omitted (For example, when the determination result in step S1263 in FIG. 265 is "YES"), the period after the third stop reel stops until the third stop reel starts swinging (for example, in step S1263 in FIG. 264) When the determination result of S1249 is "YES" and the reel to be controlled is the third stop reel), the timing when all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped in the pseudo game (for example, the determination result of step S1251 in FIG. 264 is After "YES" and before the process of step S1252 is performed), when the rotation of the main game reels 3L, 3C, 3R starts (for example, when the determination result of step S1122 in FIG. or when the first reel starts spinning by random delay processing), all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start spinning after each reel 3L, 3C, and 3R starts spinning for the main game. For example, the period until reaching a constant speed can be mentioned.

In addition, when the display of the "Aim for the BAR" effect image ends, if another pseudo-game effect (for example, swing control) is being performed, the effect may also end. Furthermore, at this timing, an effect (BB suggesting effect) corresponding to the fact that BB has been determined as an internal winning combination is started (an image suggesting that BB has been determined as an internal winning combination (e.g., "Aim for 7"). "Displaying effect image 1100). As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the symbol (internal winning combination) that the player should aim for, and to give the suggestion that the player should aim for the "Red 7" symbol.

In addition, as described in the eighth embodiment, in the pseudo-game, it is possible to configure such that predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding symbols. Therefore, in the pseudo game, even if the player aims at the "BAR" symbol when operating the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R (the timing at which the "BAR" symbol can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (Even if the stop operation is performed at ), the "Red 7" pattern alignment may be established. As a result, it can be suggested that BB has been determined as an internal winning combination through the combination of "Red 7" symbols. When the "red 7" pattern match is established in the pseudo game, the BB suggestive effect may not be performed in the main game.

Alternatively, in the pseudo-game, the "BAR" pattern alignment is established in response to the stop operation being performed at the timing at which the "BAR" pattern can be stopped and displayed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (stop operation at appropriate timing is not performed, the "BAR" pattern alignment is not established). Also, in the pseudo-game, the "BAR" pattern matching may be established regardless of the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces. Alternatively, in the pseudo-game, although the "BAR" symbols are tenpai, the "BAR" symbol alignment may not be established (the remaining one "BAR" symbol may not be stop-displayed). When the "Red 7" pattern matching is not established in the pseudo game, it is desirable to perform the BB suggestive effect in the main game.

In this way, each time the symbols "RED 7" to "BAR" are stopped and displayed on the reels 3L, 3C and 3R, the reels 3L, 3C and 3R are controlled to swing (see step S1285 in FIG. 266). ) is performed. As described in the eighth embodiment, the rocking control is performed from the state in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are positioned at the center of vibration to the state in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are substantially completely stopped. , the symbols "RED 7" to "BAR" are positioned on the active line.

As described above, when the bonus winning process shown in FIG. 270 is performed, the lock effect determination process shown in FIG. 250 may not be performed. The lock effect determination process shown may also be performed. Also, although not shown, when BB is not determined as an internal winning combination, a lock effect (so-called fake effect) corresponding to the lock effect number "2" or "4" may be performed.

<Lock effect determination process at the end of the game>
FIG. 271 is a flow chart showing a lock effect determination process at the end of a game performed in the main control circuit.

The lock effect determination process at the end of the game shown in FIG. 271 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 after the process of step S156 in FIG.

In the game end lock effect determination processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current game section is an advantageous section (step S1361). This process is similar to the process of step S1001 in FIG. When determining that the current game section is not the advantageous section, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the current game section is an advantageous section, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo-bonus transition lottery has been won (step S1362). As described in the first embodiment, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the main game stops, the advantage zone winning time sub-flag (Fig. 7(a)) is determined. Then, in the effect section (advantageous section/normal game), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table (see FIG. 7(c)) is referred to, and a lottery (pseudo-bonus transition lottery) is performed based on the random value and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantage section. "Winning" or "Non-winning" is determined as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery. As the "winning", "winning (current game)" and "winning (next game)" are provided, but they are not distinguished here.

When determining that the pseudo-bonus transition lottery is not won, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the pseudo-bonus transition lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 randomly selects one of the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5" and "6" (see FIG. 243). (step S1363). Then, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to ON (step S1364), and ends this subroutine. As a result, the lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1", "3", "5" or "6" is performed.

Although not shown, even when the 1G consecutive lottery (see FIG. 7D) is won, any of the lock effect numbers "1", "3", "5", and "6" It may be selected (a lock effect corresponding to the lock effect number "1", "3", "5" or "6" may be performed). Also, when the pseudo-bonus shift lottery (and 1G consecutive lottery) is not won, either lock effect number "2" or "4" is selected (lock effect number "2" or "4"). A lock effect corresponding to is performed).

<Lock effect execution processing at the time of game end>
FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing a lock effect execution process at the time of game end performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 273 is a flow chart showing processing for starting a lock effect at the end of a game, which is performed in the main control circuit.

The lock effect execution process at the time of game end shown in FIG. 272 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S16 (main side effect control process at the time of game end) of FIG.

In the game end lock effect execution process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect start flag (see step S1364 in FIG. 271) is set to ON (step S1381). When determining that the lock effect start flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the lock effect start flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a lock effect start process at the end of the game (step S1382). Here, with reference to FIG. 273, the processing for starting the lock effect at the end of the game will be described.

In the processing for starting the lock effect at the end of the game, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the replay wins (step S1401). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the symbol combination stopped and displayed along the activated line is the symbol combination related to the replay combination (see FIGS. 11 to 14).

When determining that the replay has won a prize, the main CPU 101 executes lock effect start command generation and storage processing at the time of replay winning (step S1402). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates lock effect start command data for replay winning and stores the generated lock effect start command data for replay winning in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103 . The replay winning lock effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub control circuit 200 can recognize that it is time for the replay to win and the lock effect to start, and can determine the timing for executing various effects.

Concretely, in response to reception of lock performance start command data at the time of replay winning, the sub-control circuit 200 sets performance data corresponding to the replay winning and the start of the lock performance. As a result, although not shown, for example, a character image (bet request image) with a content such as "Please place a bet" is displayed on the main display device 210, and a bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button) is displayed on the main display device 210 for the player. 6b) can be prompted. When the replay wins, the operation of the bet button should not be necessary, but the bet request image can make the player feel unexpected.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) has been operated (step S1403). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet switch 6S is turned on. When determining that either the MAX bet button 6a or the 1 bet button 6b has been operated, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that neither the MAX bet button 6a nor the 1 bet button 6b has been operated, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1404). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 7S is turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). When determining that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the replay win lock effect start command generation and storage processing (after the bet request image is displayed) for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). has elapsed (step S1405).

When determining that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1403. When determining that the start lever 7 has been operated in step S1404, or when determining that the predetermined time has passed in step S1405, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect cancel flag to ON (step S1406). The lock effect cancel flag is a flag used for canceling the lock effect. After that, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1407), and ends this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1401 that the replay has not won a prize, the main CPU 101 executes lock effect start command generation and storage processing at the time of winning other than replay (step S1408). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates lock effect start command data for winning other than replay, and stores the generated lock effect start command data for winning other than replay in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103 . The non-replay winning lock effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is the timing at which a combination other than the replay is won and the lock effect is started, and the timing for executing various effects can be determined. can.

Specifically, in response to reception of lock effect start command data for wins other than replay, the sub-control circuit 200 sets effect data corresponding to the start of the lock effect by winning a winning combination other than replay. be. As a result, for example, although not shown, a character image (“hit the lever” image) with the content “hit the lever” is displayed on the main display device 210, prompting the player to operate the start lever 7. be able to. When a winning combination other than replay is won, the operation of the bet button is supposed to be necessary before operating the start lever 7, but the player can be made to feel unexpected through the ``hit the lever'' image.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever 7 has been operated (step S1409). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 7S is turned on (see step S50 in FIG. 25). When determining that the start lever 7 has been operated, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the start lever 7 has not been operated, the main CPU 101 executes the win lock effect start command generation and storage processing other than the replay (after the "hit the lever" image is displayed) for a predetermined time. It is determined whether or not (for example, 30 seconds) has passed (step S1410). When determining that the predetermined time has not elapsed, the main CPU 101 returns the process to step S1409. On the other hand, when determining that the predetermined time has passed, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect cancel flag to ON (step S1411). The lock effect cancel flag is a flag used for canceling the lock effect. After that, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag to OFF (step S1412), and ends this subroutine.

As above, the processing for starting the lock effect at the end of the game performed in step S1382 of FIG. 272 has been described with reference to FIG. Returning to FIG. 272 .

After executing the process of step S1382, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock effect cancel flag is set to ON (step S1383). When determining that the lock effect cancel flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the lock effect cancel flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the processes of steps S1384 to S1390, which are the same as the processes of steps S1022 to S1028 of FIG. Since it is the same processing, the description here is omitted. After that, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

As described above, when it is determined that the lock effect is to be performed in the unit game in which the replay wins, by operating the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b), the reels 3L and 3L for the lock effect are activated. Rotation of 3C and 3R is started and lock effect is performed (see step S1386 and step S1388 in FIG. 272), and in the next unit game, through random delay processing (see step S1123 in FIG. 257), reels 3L and 3C. , and 3R are constant-speed rotations for the main game. On the other hand, it is determined that a lock effect is to be performed in the unit game in which the replay wins, but the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is not operated within a predetermined time after the bet request image is displayed. , or when the start lever 7 is operated, the lock effect (rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R for the lock effect) is not performed, and normal acceleration processing (Fig. 257) is performed in the next unit game. After step S1125), the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R becomes constant speed rotation for the main game.

273, when the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is not operated and the start lever 7 is operated, the next unit game is started. We are going to proceed with In this case, the operation of the start lever 7 in the next unit game may be omitted. That is, when the determination result of step S1404 of FIG. 273 is "YES", the determination result of step S50 of FIG. ” may be configured as follows. However, unlike the processing for starting the lock effect at the end of the game shown in FIG. 273, the next unit game may not proceed unless the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is operated. . Also, even if the bet button (MAX bet button 6a or 1 bet button 6b) is not operated, even if the next unit game proceeds, the bet button (MAX The next unit game may be started only when the bet button 6a or the 1-bet button 6b) is not operated.

Further, when it is determined that a lock effect is to be performed in a unit game in which a winning combination other than replay is won, the reels 3L, 3C and 3R are started to rotate for the lock effect by operating the start lever 7. lock effect is performed (see step S1386 and step S1388 in FIG. 272), and in the next unit game, through random delay processing (see step S1123 in FIG. constant speed rotation. On the other hand, if it is determined that a lock effect will be performed in a unit game in which a winning combination other than replay is won, but the start lever 7 is not operated within a predetermined time after the "strike the lever" image is displayed, Without the lock effect (rotation of reels 3L, 3C, 3R for lock effect), the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated in the next unit game through normal acceleration processing (see step S1125 in FIG. 257). is a constant speed rotation for the main game. In addition, it may be configured so that the next unit game does not proceed unless the start lever 7 is operated, or the next unit game may be played only when the start lever 7 is not operated for a considerably long time (for example, 1 minute). You may comprise so that it may progress to a game.

<Stop button emission control processing during pseudo-game>
Although not shown, in the main control circuit 100, a pseudo-game stop button emission control process is performed during the pseudo-game. Specifically, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S1243 in FIG. 264, and then executes the pseudo-game stop button emission control process. As a result, for example, the lighting modes of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R change. A detailed description will be given below.

Each of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R has the same configuration, and includes a stop button cover having a pressing portion that can be touched by the player, and a stop button provided at a location recessed from the stop button cover. and a button LED. The stop button LED is a full-color LED and can emit a plurality of colors including red, blue, and green. The stop button cover is made of a translucent material, and the light emitted from the stop button LED passes through the stop button cover and is emitted to the outside of the pachislot machine 1 to be visually recognized by the player. It is possible.

In this embodiment, in the pseudo-game, the stop button LEDs of the effective stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R are configured to emit light. Specifically, at step S1242 in FIG. 264, the main CPU 101 controls the stop button LEDs of all the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R to light up. In step S1244 in FIG. 264, the main CPU 101 causes the stop button LED of the stop button 8 operated this time (or the stop button 8 assumed to have been operated by omitting the stop button operation) to go out. to control. Alternatively, when it is determined that the reel to be controlled has stopped in step S1249 instead of step S1244, the stop button 8 operated this time (or the stop button operation is omitted and the stop button 8 assumed to have been operated) may be controlled so that the LED for the stop button of is extinguished.

Further, when the stop button LEDs of the effective stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R are turned on, the main CPU 101 may perform control so that the emission color of the stop button LEDs becomes a specific color (for example, red). good. In addition, the main CPU 101 causes the stop button LED of the stop button 8 that has been operated this time (or the stop button 8 assumed to have been operated by omitting the stop button operation) to emit light in a specific color (for example, red). may be controlled to

At this time, when it is decided to give a privilege to the player (for example, when the pseudo-bonus shift lottery (AT lottery) is won), it is not decided to give the privilege The stop button LED may be controlled to emit light in a specific color (e.g., red) with a high probability compared to the case (e.g., when the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is not won). . In addition, when it is decided to give a privilege to the player (for example, when the pseudo-bonus shift lottery (AT lottery) is won), the emission color of the LED for the stop button is a predetermined color. Control may be performed so that the probability that the emission color of the stop button LED is a specific color (eg, red) is higher than the probability that it is (eg, blue).

As a result, the degree of expectation of the pseudo-game can be suggested to the player through the light emission color of the stop button LED. Such control can be performed individually for the three stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R. For example, if all three stop buttons 8 are lit in a specific color (for example, red), the player will have high expectations, and if only one stop button 8 is lit in a specific color (for example, red) can also be said to relatively lower the player's expectations.

In the above description, the effects in which the lighting modes of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, and 8R change are described. . For example, the start lever 7 and the MAX bet button 6a and the 1 bet button 6b are each provided with a translucent cover and an LED similarly to the stop button 8. FIG. The cover of the start lever 7 can be a spherical portion that can be held by the player. For example, the LED of the start lever 7 may be turned on when the above-described "hit the lever" image is displayed on the main display device 210, or when the above-described bet request image is displayed on the main display device 210. Alternatively, the LEDs of the MAX bet button 6a to 1 bet button 6b may be lit.

Also, at this time, the degree of expectation of the pseudo-game may be suggested to the player through the emission color of the LED on the start lever 7 or the bet button. For example, when it is decided to give a privilege to the player (for example, when the player wins a pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (AT lottery)), but it is not decided to give the privilege (For example, when the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is not won), the LED of the start lever 7 to the bet button is controlled to emit light in a specific color (for example, red) with a high probability. may In addition, when it is decided to give a privilege to the player (for example, when the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is won), the light emission color of the LED on the start lever 7 or the bet button may be controlled so that the probability that the LEDs of the start lever 7 to the bet button emit light of a specific color (eg, red) is higher than the probability that the color of the light is a predetermined color (eg, blue).

The LEDs provided on the stop button 8, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, and the 1 bet button 6b may be controlled by the main control circuit 100, or may be controlled by the sub control circuit 200. good too. When the LED is configured to be controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, the main CPU 101, when changing the lighting mode of the LED, generates command data corresponding to the change in the lighting mode, and outputs the generated command Data may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 . It should be noted that, in the main game as well, in the same way as in the pseudo game, an effect of changing the lighting mode of the LED may be performed.

<Backlight effect>
As described in the first embodiment, inside each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, a light source (reel lamp) is provided at least at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized from at least the main display window 4, and at least each of the reels 3L, 3C. , and 3R during rotation, they are illuminated from the inside with a constant brightness to ensure the visibility of the pattern.

In this embodiment, an effect (backlight effect) using such a reel lamp (reel backlight) is performed. Although not shown, each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is provided with a plurality of LEDs (reel illumination LEDs) as reel backlights. These reel illumination LEDs are arranged inside the reel bodies of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R so that the nine symbols stopped and displayed within the frame of the main display window 4 can be individually illuminated one by one. are placed in

Hereinafter, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the upper area of the left reel 3L is referred to as the upper left reel illumination LED, and the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the middle area of the left reel 3L is referred to as the left middle reel illumination LED. A reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the lower area of the left reel 3L is called a lower left reel illumination LED, a reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the upper area of the middle reel 3C is called a middle upper reel illumination LED, and the middle reel 3C. The reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the middle area is called a middle/middle reel illumination LED, the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the lower area of the middle reel 3C is called a middle/lower reel illumination LED, and the upper stage of the right reel 3R. The reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the area is called the upper right reel illumination LED, and the reel illumination LED capable of illuminating the middle area of the right reel 3R is called the right middle reel illumination LED, and illuminates the lower area of the right reel 3R. A possible reel illumination LED is called a lower right reel illumination LED.

Upper left reel illumination LED, left middle reel illumination LED, left lower reel illumination LED, middle upper reel illumination LED, middle middle reel illumination LED, middle and lower reel illumination LED, upper right reel illumination LED, right middle reel illumination A plurality of LEDs are provided as the LED for lighting and the LED for lighting the lower right reel, respectively, so that a backlight effect having a complicated lighting pattern can be realized for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. It's becoming

The backlight effect is performed in a pseudo-game by turning off the lighting LEDs for reel lighting as the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R stop. Specifically, when the main CPU 101 starts the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in a pseudo-game (see step S1206 in FIG. 262 and step S1386 in FIG. LED, lower left reel illumination LED, upper middle reel illumination LED, middle middle reel illumination LED, middle and lower reel illumination LED, upper right reel illumination LED, right middle reel illumination LED, and lower right reel illumination LED are all lit up.

Then, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reel to be controlled has stopped in step S1249 of FIG. Of the illumination LEDs and the reel illumination LEDs that can illuminate the lower area of the reel to be controlled, the reel illumination LEDs that can illuminate areas that are not located on the effective line are controlled to be extinguished. For example, assume that the effective line is the center line and the reel to be controlled is the left reel 3L. In this case, the main CPU 101 performs control so that the upper left reel illumination LED and the lower left reel illumination LED are turned off, while the left middle reel illumination LED is kept on. When turning off the reel lighting LEDs capable of illuminating areas not located on the effective line, all of the plurality of LEDs provided as the reel lighting LEDs may be turned off, or one of the plurality of LEDs may be turned off. It is also possible to turn off the LED of the part.

As a result, the visibility of the symbols stop-displayed in the area not positioned on the effective line is reduced, but the visibility of the symbols stopped-displayed in the area positioned on the effective line is ensured. For example, in the lock effect (see FIG. 243) corresponding to the lock effect number "3", in the state shown in FIG. The visibility of "red 7" is ensured. In the state shown in FIG. 246(c), the right reel 3R is the same as the state shown in FIG. 246(b). The visibility of "red 7" is ensured. The state shown in FIG. 246(d) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 246(c) for the right reel 3R and the middle reel 3C, and the visibility of "white blank 1" and "watermelon" for the left reel 3L. is reduced, while the visibility of "red 7" is ensured. Therefore, even if some of the reel illumination LEDs are extinguished, the player can be made to clearly recognize that the "red 7" symbols are aligned.

In addition, when turning off the reel illumination LED that can illuminate the area not located on the effective line, the visibility of the pattern in the area located on the effective line is not lowered by turning off the reel illumination LED. It is desirable to configure For example, a partition plate or the like may be provided between adjacent areas so that the visibility of the pattern in each area is not interfered with by the lighting mode of the reel illumination LEDs in other areas.

Further, after turning off the LED for reel lighting that can illuminate the area not located on the effective line, the LED may be turned on again or turned off. At that time, the degree of expectation of the pseudo-game may be suggested to the player through the lighting pattern of the LED. For example, when it is decided to give a privilege to the player (for example, when the player wins a pseudo-bonus transfer lottery (AT lottery)), but it is not decided to give the privilege (For example, when the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is not won), the LED may be controlled to light up in a specific pattern with a high probability. In addition, when it is decided to give a privilege to the player (for example, when the pseudo bonus transition lottery (AT lottery) is won), the probability that the LED will light up in a predetermined pattern Also, control may be performed so that the probability that the LED is lit up in a specific pattern is increased.

The reel illumination LEDs may be controlled by the main control circuit 100 or may be controlled by the sub control circuit 200 . When the reel illumination LEDs are configured to be controlled by the sub-control circuit 200, the main CPU 101, when changing the lighting mode of the reel illumination LEDs, generates command data corresponding to the change in the lighting mode. , the generated command data may be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 . Incidentally, in the main game, as in the pseudo game, an effect of changing the lighting mode of the reel illumination LED may be performed.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, the internal configuration of the main ROM 102 and main RAM 103 included in the main control circuit 100 (hereinafter referred to as "memory map") will be described with reference to FIGS. 274A to 274C. 274A shows a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 274B shows a memory map of main ROM 102, and FIG. 274C shows a memory map of main RAM 103. FIG.

In the memory map of the entire memory provided in the main control circuit 100, as shown in FIG. 274A, the memory area of the main ROM 102, the memory area of the main RAM 103, the built-in register area, and the XCS decode area are arranged from the beginning of the address (0000H). They are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order with an unused area interposed therebetween.

In the memory map of the main ROM 102, as shown in FIG. 274B, the program area, data area, non-regulation area, trademark recording area, program management area, and security setting area are arranged from the beginning (0000H) side of the main ROM 102 address. They are arranged at predetermined addresses in order.

The program area stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the game playability of the game performed by the player. In the data area, various data used by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the game playability of the game played by the player (for example, a data table such as an internal lottery table, various Data for transmitting control instructions (commands, etc.) are stored. That is, in a game ROM area (game storage area) consisting of a program area and a data area, necessary for control processing (processing related to game characteristics) related to the game characteristics of games actually performed by players at game parlors. Various programs and various data are stored.

In addition, the non-regulation area stores control programs and data for various processes (processes that do not affect the game playability) that do not directly relate to the game playability of the game played by the player. For example, programs and data used in the Pachislot 1 certification test (trial test), control programs and data used in checksum generation processing when power is cut off, sum check processing when power is restored, etc., and anti-fraud programs. and data necessary for it are stored in the non-regulation area.

The memory map of the main RAM 103, as shown in FIG. storage areas) are arranged at respective predetermined addresses in this order.

The game RAM area is provided with a work area and a stack area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of a control program relating to the playability of the game played by the player. . Each of the various data is stored in a work area at a predetermined address in the game RAM area.

In addition, the non-standard RAM area is provided with a non-standard work area, which is a work area for various processes that are not directly related to the game playability of the game played by the player, and a non-standard stack. In this embodiment, the non-regular RAM area is used to execute various processes that are not directly related to the gameplay performed by the player, such as sum check processing.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main ROM 102 stores various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes that are not directly related to the gameplay performed by the player. stored in a non-standard ROM area (non-standard storage area) located at a different address from the non-standard ROM area. In addition, various types of processing that are not directly related to the gameplay performed by the player are performed using a non-standard RAM area arranged at an address different from that of the game RAM area in the main RAM 103. .

In such a configuration of the main ROM 102, programs and data that are unnecessary for the actual game played by the player are arranged in the ROM area (unregulated ROM area) in which the arrangement of programs, etc., was prohibited under the conventional rules. can do. Therefore, in this embodiment, pressure on the capacity of the game ROM area can be avoided.

<Trial test signal control processing (non-regulation)>
Although not shown, in the main control circuit 100, a trial firing test signal control process (out of specification) is performed in the periodical interrupt process (see FIG. 32). After executing the process of step S208 in FIG. 32, the main CPU 101 executes the test-firing test signal control process (out of scope). In this processing, the main CPU 101 performs control processing when various test signals are output to the testing machine via the first testing machine interface board 301 and the second testing machine interface board 302 (see FIG. 3).

Specifically, the main CPU 101 saves the address of the stack area of the main RAM 103, sets the address of the non-specified stack area in the stack pointer (SP), and saves the data of all the registers. Then, the main CPU 101 performs processing related to signals output to the testing machine via the first testing machine interface board 301 to the second testing machine interface board 302, and processes a rotation control signal (driving signal) for each reel, a bonus ( Processing for outputting an ON/OFF signal (test signal) for the grand prize), a control signal corresponding to the state of the condition device signal control flag, etc. is performed. Then, the main CPU 101 restores the data of all the saved registers, and sets the address of the saved stack area to the stack pointer (SP).

Such trial-firing test signal control processing (non-regular) is executed using the non-regular work area (see FIG. 274C) of the main RAM 103 . Note that the trial shooting test signal control processing (out of scope) is also performed at times other than the time of the trial shooting test (after the pachi-slot machine 1 is installed in the amusement arcade). Since they are not connected to the testing machine through the first interface board 301 to the second testing machine interface board 302, various test signals are not output even if they are generated.

Here, as described in the first embodiment, during the pseudo-game, a test signal (pseudo-game signal) is output so that the testing machine can recognize that the pseudo-game is in progress. It is possible. The control process when outputting the pseudo-game signal may be performed in the test-fire test signal control process (outside the rules). In this case, the control processing when outputting the pseudo-game signal is executed using the non-specified work area of the main RAM 103 (see FIG. 274C).

Further, as described in the first embodiment, when the first interface board 301 for testing machines receives a pseudo-game signal, it outputs a signal for pseudo-game progress control to the main control board 71, so that the main control A pseudo-game may proceed on the board 71 side (that is, the first interface board 301 for testing machine may have a pseudo-game progress function). In this case, the pseudo game signal is input from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 302 for the testing machine, and the pseudo game signal is input from the second interface board 302 for the testing machine to the first interface board 301 for the testing machine. may be configured. On top of that, by transmitting a signal (stop signal) for pseudo game progress control from the first interface board 301 for the testing machine to the main control board 71, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R stops (pseudo stop ). As a result, the trial firing test can proceed smoothly.

In addition, when the replay wins and a pseudo-game is performed (see FIG. 273), a test signal (cancel signal) is output so that the test machine can recognize that the replay win has been canceled. It is possible to configure In this case, the main control board 71 outputs a cancel signal (a signal prompting the operation of the bet button) to the testing machine via the testing machine first interface board 301 (testing machine second interface board 302). Alternatively, after inputting a signal indicating that a replay is won and a pseudo game is performed from the main control board 71 to the first interface board 301 for the testing machine (second interface board 302 for the testing machine), A cancel signal may be output to the tester from the first interface board 301 for the tester (the second interface board 302 for the tester). After that, by outputting a signal (bet signal) corresponding to the fact that a bet has been made to the testing machine, it is possible to start the next game, and the test firing test can proceed smoothly. . The control processing for outputting such a signal can also be configured to be performed in the test firing test signal control processing (outside the rules). When a replay is won and a pseudo-game is performed, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R outside the active line is "Bell" - "Bell" - "Bell". However, it is possible to adopt a case where the winning combination is a replay.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix D>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine provided with a main reel for notifying the result of a winning combination lottery and a sub-reel for effect (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-214050). The sub-reels are formed to be larger than the main reels, are arranged in conspicuous positions, and are arranged in an arrangement in which symbols that are easy for the player to identify are easy to identify. This makes the sub-reel appear to the player as if it were the central reel.

In a gaming machine equipped with such sub-reels, when a player performs a stop operation, the sub-reels are rotated in a manner (for example, reverse rotation, frame feed, etc.) that is difficult to execute on the main reel, and then stopped. A reel effect may be executed.

On the other hand, even in a gaming machine equipped with only the main reel, there is an effect using such a reel (the reel stops when the player performs a stop operation, but a game medium (medals) according to the display mode of the stopped reel etc.), but when such an effect (pseudo game) is performed on the main reel, the player himself can decide about the operation related to the pseudo game. It is desired to increase the degree of freedom of operation.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and aims to provide a gaming machine that allows the player to decide the operation related to the pseudo-game and increases the degree of freedom of the operation. aim.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment has the following features.

(D-1) a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) on which a plurality of patterns are applied and which can be rotationally driven;
stop operation detection means (stop switch 8S) capable of detecting a stop operation by a player;
A reel control means for controlling the reel (main CPU 101 for executing the processing of step S203 in FIG. 32, etc.),
When the stop operation is detected by the stop operation detection means, the reel control means is capable of executing stop control after the stop operation to stop the reel during rotation,
a main game in which a game medium (medal) or game medium data corresponding to the pattern mode of the plurality of reels is awarded when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation; a pseudo-game in which game media or game media data corresponding to the symbol modes of the plurality of reels are not provided when the reels are stopped,
The operation for progressing the pseudo-game can be omitted,
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, a game medium (medals) or a game according to the pattern mode of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is displayed. A main game to which medium (medal) data can be provided, and a game medium (medal) or game according to the pattern mode of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by stop control after the stop operation. A pseudo-game that does not give medium (medal) data can be executed, and the operation for progressing the pseudo-game can be omitted. As a result, since the operation for proceeding with the pseudo-game can be canceled at the player's will, the player himself/herself can determine the operation, and the degree of freedom of the operation can be increased. In addition, it is possible to meet the needs of the player who desires to omit the operation, and it is possible to reduce the operation burden.

The operation for advancing the pseudo-game includes operations for advancing the pseudo-game when the pseudo-game is being performed (eg, first stop operation, second stop operation, and third stop operation) In addition, operations for starting pseudo-games are also included. The operation for starting the pseudo-game is the predetermined operation when the pseudo-game is configured to be able to start when the predetermined operation is detected. As described in the eighth embodiment, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and any operation unit (for example, the start lever 7, the MAX bet button 6a, the 1 bet button 6b, the checkout button 9, etc.) can be operated as appropriate. It is possible to adopt.

As described in the eighth embodiment, when a game is played using physical medals in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main game is a plurality of reels (reels 3L) when the reels are stopped by stop control after the stop operation. , 3C, 3R), and the pseudo-game is a game in which a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) This is a game in which game media (medals) are not provided according to the pattern mode of 3R). On the other hand, when the pachi-slot machine 1 is the medalless gaming machine described in the first embodiment, the main game is the pattern of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the reels are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation. It is a game that can provide game medium (medal) data according to the mode, and the pseudo game is a game in which the pattern mode of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is changed when the reels are stopped by stop control after the stop operation. This is a game in which corresponding game medium (medal) data is not provided. The game medium (medal) data is data corresponding to the game value possessed by the player, and is electromagnetically (or in a manner in which the player cannot directly contact the game value) as described in the first embodiment. It is managed.

(D-2) The gaming machine of (D-1),
The reel control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 264, etc.), when the operation for advancing the pseudo-game is omitted in the pseudo-game, the plurality of It is possible to stop the plurality of reels so that the pattern mode is the same as the pattern mode of the plurality of reels when the reels are stopped.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when the operation for advancing the pseudo-game is omitted in the pseudo-game, the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) is stopped, the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) can be stopped so that the pattern mode is the same as that of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R). is configured as As a result, even if the operation for advancing the pseudo-game is omitted, the same pattern mode as when the operation is not omitted is derived as a result of the pseudo-game, so the intention to omit the operation It is possible to have the player make the decision with peace of mind.

However, the pattern mode of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the operation for progressing the pseudo game is omitted in the pseudo game and the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped And the pattern mode of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) when the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped by the stop control after the stop operation in the pseudo game. There may be. For example, when a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are stopped by stop control after a stop operation in a pseudo game, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, a predetermined pattern (for example, "red 7" symbol) is stop-displayed, but if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, a predetermined symbol (for example, "red 7" symbol) is not stop-displayed, while the pseudo-game is progressed in the pseudo-game. When a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, and 3R) are stopped by omitting the operation for drawing, predetermined symbols (for example, "red 7" symbols) are always stopped and displayed. may

(D-3) The gaming machine of (D-1) or (D-2),
Predetermined operation detection means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) different from the stop operation,
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 264, etc.) stops after a predetermined operation to stop the spinning reels when the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detection means in the pseudo-game. being able to control
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) different from the stop operation is detected in the pseudo-game, stop control after the predetermined operation to stop the spinning reels is performed. configured to run. As a result, as an operation for progressing the pseudo-game, it is possible to perform a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) instead of the stop operation (omitting the stop operation) at the player's will. It is possible to meet the needs of the player who desires to perform an operation other than the stop operation in the game, and to further increase the degree of freedom of operation in the pseudo-game.

In the ninth embodiment, when the predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed in the pseudo-game, all remaining stop button operations are omitted. The stop button operation that is omitted when the predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed is not limited to this example, and only the current stop button operation may be omitted. Further, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited, and any operation of any operation unit (for example, start lever 7, MAX bet button 6a, 1 bet button 6b, checkout button 9, etc.) can be appropriately adopted. For example, when one operation unit (for example, MAX bet button 6a) is operated, all remaining stop button operations are omitted, while another operation unit (for example, 1 bet button 6b) is operated. In this case, only the current stop button operation may be omitted.

Note that the post-predetermined operation stop control may be the same control as the post-stop operation stop control, or may be a different control from the post-stop operation stop control. When the stop control after the predetermined operation is the same control as the stop control after the stop operation, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (excitation corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51) The same control (excitation data ). On the other hand, if the post-predetermined operation stop control is different from the post-stop stop control, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the post-stop stop control (corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51) and the drive control of the stepping motor 51 (excitation data corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51) as stop control after a predetermined operation. data).

(D-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-3) above,
It is possible to execute a reel effect (reel effect) in which the reel is stopped without depending on the stop control after the stop operation,
The pseudo-game can be executed after the spinning performance is completed,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, after the reel performance (reel performance) in which the reels are stopped without depending on the stop control after the stop operation is completed, the pseudo game can be executed. there is As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in two stages of the reel effect (reel effect) and the pseudo-game, and the player is informed that the pseudo-game will occur subsequently at the stage when the reel effect (reel effect) occurs. can be expected.

As the reel performance (reel performance), a lock at the start of a pseudo-game (see step S1223 in FIG. 263) may be adopted, or it is performed in the lock performance corresponding to the lock performance number "6" (see FIG. 243). A reel performance may be employed.

(D-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-4),
A lock execution means (main CPU 101 for executing the processing of step S1223 in FIG. 263) capable of executing a predetermined lock (lock at the time of pseudo game start) in which the operation by the player is invalidated for a predetermined time,
After the predetermined lock executed by the lock execution means is completed, the pseudo-game can be executed,
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 266) can execute post-stop operation control (swing control) for operating the reels that have been stopped by the post-stop operation stop control in the pseudo game. On the other hand, the post-stop operation control is not executed while the predetermined lock is being executed by the lock execution means.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, the pseudo-game can be executed after the predetermined lock (lock at the time of pseudo-game start) in which the operation by the player is invalidated for a predetermined time is completed, and in the pseudo-game While it is possible to execute the post-stop operation control (swing control) that operates the reel stopped by the stop control after the stop operation, the post-stop operation control ( rocking control) is not executed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect in two stages, a predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo-game) and a pseudo-game, and at the stage where the predetermined lock (lock at the start of a pseudo-game) occurs, a pseudo-game occurs subsequently. Players can expect that. In addition, in the pseudo-game, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game currently being played is a pseudo-game through post-stop operation control (swing control), and the player can play the game as the main game. It is possible to prevent misidentification as On the other hand, in the predetermined lock (lock at the start of pseudo-game), the operation by the player is invalidated, and the possibility that the player misidentifies the predetermined lock (lock at the start of pseudo-game) as the main game is relatively relatively low. By not executing post-stop motion control (swing control) in such a predetermined lock (lock at the start of pseudo-game), post-stop motion control (swing control) in pseudo-games can be emphasized. As a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the pseudo-game as the main game.

As described in the ninth embodiment, even if the player performs some operation while the predetermined lock (lock at pseudo game start) is being executed, the operation becomes invalid and the predetermined lock (lock at pseudo game start) is executed. ) is completed, operations for pseudo-games can be accepted (see step S1225 in FIG. 263 and steps S1262 and S1263 in FIG. 265). Further, as described in the ninth embodiment, the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo-game) may be a lock effect without reel effect, or a lock effect with reel effect. If the predetermined lock (lock at the start of the pseudo-game) is accompanied by a reel effect, when the reel stops in the reel effect, after-stop operation control (swing control) may be performed, or after-stop operation control (swing control) may not be performed.

(D-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-5),
Predetermined operation detection means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) different from the stop operation,
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 264, etc.)
When the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detection means in the pseudo game, it is possible to execute stop control after a predetermined operation to stop the reel during rotation,
When the stop control after the stop operation is executed, the reel is stopped at a predetermined timing after the stop operation is detected, and when the stop control after the predetermined operation is executed, the predetermined operation It is possible to stop the reel at a timing later than the predetermined timing after is detected,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) different from a stop operation is detected in a pseudo-game, stop control after a predetermined operation to stop the spinning reels is performed. It is viable. Then, when the stop control after the stop operation is executed, the reel is stopped at a predetermined timing after the stop operation is detected, and when the stop control is executed after the predetermined operation, the predetermined operation (MAX bet The reels can be stopped at a timing later than a predetermined timing after the button 6a operation) is detected. As a result, as an operation for progressing the pseudo-game, it is possible to perform a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) instead of the stop operation (omitting the stop operation) at the player's will. It is possible to meet the needs of the player who desires to perform an operation other than the stop operation in the game, and to further increase the degree of freedom of operation in the pseudo game. In addition, by delaying the stop timing of the reels when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed, it is possible to provide the player with a novel reel action. Even if the stop operation is omitted, the player can enjoy the pseudo-game.

The reel action when the predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed is not particularly limited, and the reel may be stopped after being rotated more than when the stop operation is performed, Compared to the case where the stop operation is performed, the reel may be stopped after changing (slowing down) the rotation speed (for example, frame-by-frame), or changing the direction of rotation (rotating in the opposite direction). The reel may be stopped above. Such a reel action is realized by performing drive control of the stepping motor 51 when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed, based on an excitation pattern different from that when a stop operation is performed. be able to.

It should be noted that such reel action (extra rotation, rotation speed change, rotation direction change, etc.) may be executed even when a stop operation (stop button 8 operation) is performed in a pseudo game. For example, for at least one of the plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R), even after the stop operation is performed on the reel, it is not stopped immediately, but after making one or more laps (the It may be automatically stopped when a predetermined time has passed since the stop button 8 corresponding to the reel was operated. The one reel may be the first stop reel (the reel targeted by the first stop operation) or the second stop reel (the reel targeted by the second stop operation). However, it may be the third stop reel (reel targeted for the third stop operation). When the one reel is the first stop reel, the first stop reel may stop after the second stop reel to the third stop reel stop. In the case of the second stop reel, the second stop reel may stop after the third stop reel has stopped. Also, such a reel action may be performed for all reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R). Even if the reel action is performed, there is no change in the point that the reel is stopped by performing the stop operation. It is desirable that post-operation control (swing control) is executed.

(D-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-6),
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the process of FIG. 266) provides post-stop operation control ( Swing control) can be executed, but when the operation for advancing the pseudo-game is omitted in the pseudo-game and the reel is stopped, the post-stop operation control is not performed.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation in the pseudo game, it is possible to execute the post-stop operation control (swing control) to operate the stopped reel. On the other hand, when the operation for advancing the pseudo-game is omitted in the pseudo-game and the reel is stopped, it is configured not to execute the operation control (swing control) after stopping. If the operation to proceed with the pseudo-game is omitted and the reels are stopped, there is a high possibility that the player himself has made a decision to omit the operation. is relatively less likely to be misidentified as the main game. In such a case, the post-stop motion control (swing control) is not executed, so that the post-stop motion control (swing control) when the reel is stopped by the stop control after the stop operation is emphasized. is possible, and as a result, it is possible to effectively prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the pseudo game as the main game.

However, even when the operation for advancing the pseudo-game is omitted in the pseudo-game and the reels are stopped, the after-stop operation control (swing control) may be executed. Also, if all the remaining stop button operations are omitted, the post-stop motion control (swing control) is not executed, while if only this stop button operation is omitted, the post-stop motion control ( swing control) may be executed. For example, when the reels are stopped by performing a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation), the post-stop operation control (swing control) is not executed, and a predetermined time elapses without the stop button 8 being operated. When the reel stops as a result of the movement, post-stop operation control (swing control) may be executed.

(D-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-7),
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 264, etc.) controls the rotating reel when a predetermined time has passed without the stop operation detection means detecting the stop operation in the pseudo-game. It is possible to execute automatic stop control to stop
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined time has elapsed without detecting a stop operation in the pseudo-game, it is configured to be able to execute automatic stop control to stop the spinning reels. there is As a result, it is possible to omit the stop operation by waiting for a predetermined time at the player's will without performing the stop operation as an operation for progressing the pseudo-game, and the stop operation can be omitted. It is possible to meet the needs of the player who desires, and to further increase the degree of freedom of operation in the pseudo game.

In the ninth embodiment, when the predetermined time has passed without the stop button 8 being operated in the pseudo-game, only this stop button operation is omitted. The stop button operation that is omitted when a predetermined time has elapsed without the stop button 8 being operated is not limited to this example, and all remaining stop button operations may be omitted.

Note that the automatic stop control may be the same control as the stop control after the stop operation, or may be a different control from the stop control after the stop operation. When the automatic stop control is the same control as the stop control after the stop operation, drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (excitation data corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51 ) and drive control of the stepping motor 51 as automatic stop control (excitation data corresponding to the deceleration excitation pattern used for excitation control of the stepping motor 51) are the same control (excitation data). On the other hand, when the automatic stop control is different from the stop control after the stop operation, the drive control of the stepping motor 51 as the stop control after the stop operation (excitation corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for the excitation control of the stepping motor 51) data) and drive control of the stepping motor 51 as automatic stop control (excitation data corresponding to the excitation pattern for deceleration used for excitation control of the stepping motor 51) are different controls (excitation data). .

(D-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-8),
When a predetermined condition (passage of a predetermined time) is established in the pseudo-game, the operation for progressing the pseudo-game can be omitted,
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 264, etc.), when two or more reels out of the plurality of reels are rotating in the pseudo-game, when the predetermined condition is established, It is possible to stop one reel of the two or more reels without using stop control after the stop operation,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (passage of a predetermined time) is established in the pseudo-game, the operation for proceeding with the pseudo-game can be omitted, and a plurality of When a predetermined condition (passage of a predetermined time) is satisfied while two or more of the reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are rotating, one of the two or more reels It is configured such that the reel can be stopped after the stop operation without depending on the stop control. Thereby, it is possible to omit the stop operation for one reel by establishing a predetermined condition (elapse of the predetermined time), and it is possible to meet the needs of the player who desires to omit the stop operation. In addition, it is possible to further increase the degree of freedom of operation in the pseudo-game.

In the ninth embodiment, an example in which the passage of a predetermined time is adopted as the predetermined condition has been described, but the predetermined condition is not limited to this example, and any operation unit (eg, start lever 7, MAX bet button 6a, 1-bet button 6b, settlement button 9, etc.) can be employed as appropriate. For example, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined operation (MAX bet button 6a operation) is performed in a pseudo-game, all remaining stop button operations are omitted. In this case, only the current stop button operation may be omitted.

(D-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-9),
When a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation) is established in the pseudo-game, the operation for progressing the pseudo-game can be omitted,
The reel control means (main CPU 101 that executes the processing of FIG. 264, etc.), when two or more reels out of the plurality of reels are spinning in the pseudo-game, when the predetermined condition is established, It is possible to stop all of the two or more reels without using stop control after the stop operation,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation) is established in the pseudo-game, it is possible to omit the operation for proceeding with the pseudo-game, and in the pseudo-game When two or more reels out of a plurality of reels (reels 3L, 3C, 3R) are spinning and a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation) is satisfied, all of the two or more reels are stopped. It is configured such that it can be stopped without depending on post-operation stop control. Thus, by establishing a predetermined condition (MAX bet button 6a operation), it is possible to omit the stop operation for all spinning reels. In addition to being able to respond, the operation load can be further reduced.

In the ninth embodiment, an example in which the operation of the MAX bet button 6a is used as the predetermined condition has been described. Operation of the bet button 6a, the 1-bet button 6b, the settlement button 9, etc.) can be employed as appropriate. Also, the elapse of a predetermined period of time may be employed as the predetermined condition. For example, as described above, in the ninth embodiment, when a predetermined time has elapsed without the stop button 8 being operated in the pseudo game, only the stop button operation this time is omitted, but in this case , all remaining stop button operations may be omitted.

(D-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-10),
Pseudo-game determination means (main CPU 101 that executes the processes of FIGS. 250 and 271) capable of determining that the pseudo-game is to be executed;
Predetermined variables (advantage interval game counter value, control game counter value, advantageous interval payout counter value, control a predetermined period termination means capable of terminating the predetermined period when the payout number counter value) satisfies a specific condition (limiter operating condition);
The pseudo-game determining means can determine that the pseudo-game is to be executed in the predetermined period, while the predetermined variable is a specific period before satisfying the specific condition (quasi-limit processing (number of games)). ) or the period after the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated), it is not decided to execute the pseudo-game,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, predetermined variables (the value of the advantageous interval game number counter, the value of the control game number counter, etc.) that can be updated according to the progress of the main game during the predetermined period (advantageous interval) value, advantageous interval payout counter value, control payout counter value) satisfy a specific condition (limiter activation condition), it is possible to terminate a predetermined period (advantageous interval). Then, while it is possible to determine that a pseudo-game is to be executed in a predetermined period (advantageous section), predetermined variables (advantageous section game number counter value, control game number counter value, advantageous section payout number counter value, control payout number counter value) satisfies specific conditions (period after quasi-limit processing (number of games) or quasi-limit processing (payout number) is activated). It is configured so that it does not decide to do so. When a pseudo-game is executed, it is thought that players will have expectations, but in a specific period (period after semi-limit processing (number of games) or semi-limit processing (payout number) is activated) By not executing a pseudo-game, it is possible to suppress the expectation from being excessively fueled.

As described in the eighth embodiment, when the semi-limit process (number of games) or the semi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may not be executed. The pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be a lottery based on the sub-flags (internal winning combination) at the time of winning the advantageous section, or may be based on the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section (combination of symbols displayed stopped). In addition, as described in the eighth embodiment, the specific period is not limited to the period after the quasi-limit process (number of games) or quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is activated, but a predetermined period (advantageous interval) It is possible to configure not to decide to run a pseudo-game in any period before the end.

(D-12) The gaming machine according to any one of (D-1) to (D-11),
Predetermined operation detection means capable of detecting a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) by a player;
Display means (main display device 210) capable of displaying an image (“hit the lever” image or bet request image) for prompting the player to perform the predetermined operation,
When the predetermined operation is detected by the predetermined operation detection means, it is possible to start the pseudo-game,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the ninth embodiment, an image ("hit the lever" image or a bet request image) is displayed to prompt the player to perform a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation). It is possible to start a pseudo-game when a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) is detected. As a result, it is possible for the player to participate in the pseudo-game at his/her own will, and it is possible to provide the player with an opportunity to flexibly decide whether to play the pseudo-game according to the situation of the game. can.

In the ninth embodiment, when the lock effect corresponding to one of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected, after the pseudo-game start lock is performed, a predetermined operation (start lever 7 It was explained as shifting to a pseudo-game (rotation for pseudo-game is started) triggered by the fact that the operation) was performed. Further, when a lock effect corresponding to one of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected in the unit game in which the replay is won, a predetermined operation (bet button operation) is performed. It was explained as moving to a pseudo-game (rotation for pseudo-game is started). Further, when a lock effect corresponding to one of the lock effect numbers "3" to "5" is selected in a unit game in which a winning combination other than replay is won, a predetermined operation (start lever 7) is performed. It was explained as moving to a pseudo-game with that as an opportunity (rotation for pseudo-game is started). Thus, the fact that a predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) is performed is adopted as a condition for starting a pseudo-game, and the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) is performed. Taking this as an opportunity, a pseudo-game may be started.

It should be noted that if the predetermined operation (start lever 7 operation or bet button operation) for starting the pseudo-game is not performed, it may be possible to shift to the pseudo-game triggered by the passage of a predetermined waiting time. However, when a predetermined waiting time elapses, it may not be shifted to the pseudo-game (the pseudo-game is canceled). The pseudo-game start lock may be a lock performed over the predetermined waiting time. In this case, in the lock at the start of the pseudo-game, only a predetermined operation may be accepted, and even if another game operation is performed, the operation may be invalidated. As described in the eighth embodiment, the predetermined operation is not particularly limited. It is possible to adopt.

[Tenth embodiment]
The first to ninth embodiments have been described above. The tenth embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the description of the portions that the descriptions of the first to ninth embodiments apply to the tenth embodiment will be omitted.

In the above description, for example, "in the first embodiment, ~" or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ~", it seems to be limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Even if it is a simple description, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment within the scope of the tenth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, regarding the description limited to the pachi-slot machines 1 according to the second to ninth embodiments, the pachi-slot machines according to the tenth embodiment are not deviated from the spirit of the tenth embodiment. It can also be applied to machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to ninth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the tenth embodiment. can be used or combined.

Further, even if the shape is different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments, the same reference numerals may be given to the structures having the same functions for the sake of convenience. Further, even if the shape and processing are the same as those of the pachi-slot machines 1 according to the first to ninth embodiments, different symbols and step numbers may be given for convenience.

<Setting Suggestion Effect Execution Processing>
FIG. 275 is a flow chart showing setting suggestion effect execution processing performed in the sub control circuit.

The setting-suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 275 is a process for executing the setting-suggestion effect. The setting suggesting effect is a effect that can suggest the set value set for the pachi-slot machine 1. - 特許庁As described in the first embodiment, the setting value indicates the degree of advantage of the player in relation to the game (six levels of settings 1 to 6), and the lower the setting value (the closer to setting 1, the ) The degree of advantage to the player is relatively low, and the higher the set value (closer to setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage to the player.

As the setting suggesting effects, setting suggesting effect I, setting suggesting effect II, setting suggesting effect III, setting suggesting effect IV, and setting suggesting effect V are provided. The setting suggesting effect I is an effect that can occur only when the setting value is one of settings 2 to 6 (it cannot occur when the setting value is setting 1). The setting suggestion effect II is a effect that can occur only when the setting value is one of settings 3 to 6 (it cannot occur when the setting value is either setting 1 or 2).

The setting suggestion effect III is a effect that can occur only when the setting value is one of settings 4 to 6 (it cannot occur when the setting value is any of settings 1 to 3). The setting suggestion effect IV is a effect that can occur only when the setting value is one of settings 5 and 6 (it cannot occur when the setting value is any of settings 1 to 4). The setting suggestion effect V is a effect that can occur only when the setting value is setting 6 (it cannot occur when the setting value is any of setting 1 to 5).

That is, when setting suggestion effect I occurs, it is determined that the set value is set 2 or more, and when setting suggestion effect II occurs, it is determined that the set value is set 3 or more, When the setting suggestion effect III occurs, it is determined that the set value is 4 or more, and when the setting suggestion effect IV occurs, it is determined that the set value is 5 or more, and the setting suggestion is made. When the effect V is generated, it is determined that the set value is set 6. - 特許庁In this manner, the set values can be suggested using the setting suggestion effects IV.

In each setting suggestion effect, an image (character image) for suggesting a setting value is displayed on the main display device 210 . In the setting suggestion effect I, a character image I (predetermined character image) is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby suggesting that the set value is set 2 or more. Also, in the setting suggestion effect II, a character image II (a character image different from the character image I) is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby suggesting that the setting value is 3 or more.

In addition, in setting suggestion effect III, character image III (a character image different from character image I and character image II) is displayed on main display device 210, thereby suggesting that the setting value is 4 or more. be. In setting suggestion effect IV, character image IV (a character image different from character image I, character image II, and character image III) is displayed on main display device 210, whereby the setting value is set to 5 or more. is suggested.

In setting suggestion effect V, character images V (character images different from character image I, character image II, character image III, and character image IV) are displayed on main display device 210, thereby setting the setting value. 6 is suggested. Image data corresponding to character image I, character image II, character image III, character image IV, and character image V are stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 202 (see FIG. 3).

Also, the setting suggestion effect execution process shown in FIG. 275 is a process performed in the sub control circuit 200 when the AT state ends. Although not shown, when the AT state end condition is satisfied, the main CPU 101 generates AT state end command data and transmits the generated AT state end command data to the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub control circuit 200 can recognize that the AT state has ended.

As described in the first embodiment, the AT state game period is managed by game number management, set number management, payout number management, difference number management, navigation number management, and the like. The main CPU 101 updates these variables (counters) in step S151 of FIG. Then, when the updated counter value reaches a predetermined value, the main CPU 101 transmits AT state end command data to the sub control circuit 200 .

Even if the updated counter value reaches the predetermined value, if the AT state starts again from the next game (for example, if you have 1G stock or if you win the ceiling reduction lottery) ), the main CPU 101 may not transmit the AT state end command data to the sub control circuit 200 . That is, when the predetermined AT state game period ends and the AT state is not extended, the AT state end command data is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200. may

In the setting suggestion effect execution process, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not formal login has been performed (step S1501). As will be described later, the official login is performed by the player who has registered as a member and then enters a password. When an operation for formal login is performed, the sub CPU 201 sets the formal login flag to ON. In the processing of step S1501, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the official login flag is set to ON. If the sub CPU 201 determines that formal login has not been performed, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when judging that formal login has been performed, the sub CPU 201 judges whether or not the setting suggestion effect setting is valid (step S1502). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not "valid" is set as the setting suggestion effect setting on the setting suggestion effect setting screen (see FIG. 281). When determining that the setting suggestion effect setting is not valid, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the setting-suggestion effect setting is valid, the sub CPU 201 identifies a setting-suggestion effect period (step S1503). "Period A", "Period B", "Period C", "Period D", "Period E", "Period F", "Period G", "Period H", "Period I” and “Period J” are provided.

“Period A” is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 1 or more and 1000 or less. “Period B” is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 1001 or more and 2000 or less. “Period C” is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 2001 or more and 3000 or less. “Period D” is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 3001 or more and 4000 or less. “Period E” is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 4001 or more and 5000 or less. “Period F” is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 5001 or more and 6000 or less. “Period G” is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 6001 or more and 7000 or less. “Period H” is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 7001 or more and 8000 or less. “Period I” is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 8001 or more and 9000 or less. “Period J” is a period in which the number of games played after power-on is 9001 or more.

As will be described later, on the setting suggestion effect setting screen (see FIG. 281), "Period A", "Period B", "Period C", "Period D", "Period E", "Period F", "Period G , 'Period H', 'Period I', and 'Period J', the setting suggestion effect type can be set. "Type A", "Type B", and "Type C" are provided as setting suggestion effect types. In this embodiment, the type of setting suggestion effect that occurs may differ depending on which setting suggestion effect type is set among "type A", "type B", and "type C". It's becoming

The number of games played after power-on is the number of unit games played in the pachi-slot machine 1 after the power was turned on, and is managed by the number-of-games counter after power-on. Although not shown, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the number-of-games counter after power-on after executing the process of step S14 of FIG. Information indicating the value of the game counter after power-on is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, whereby the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize the number of games after power-on.

In the process of step S1503, the sub CPU 201 selects ten setting suggestion effect periods (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “ One of the period G', 'period H', 'period I', and 'period J') to which the current number of games after power-on belongs is specified. For example, if the current number of games played after power-on is 100, the sub CPU 201 specifies "period A" as one setting suggestion effect period, and if the current number of games played after power-on is 7777, “Period H” is specified as one setting suggestion effect period.

Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not it is the first time that the AT state has ended during the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503 (step S1504). In this process, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the AT state end command data is received from the main control circuit 100 for the first time in the setting suggestion effect period. If the sub CPU 201 determines that it is not the first time that the AT state has ended during the setting suggestion effect period, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the AT state has ended for the first time in the setting suggestion effect period specified in step S1503, the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is " It is determined whether it is type A" (step S1505). When determining that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is "type A", the sub CPU 201 executes setting suggestion effect execution processing for type A (step S1506). The setting suggestion effect execution processing for type A will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S1506, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1505 that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period identified in step S1503 is not "type A", the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect period. It is determined whether or not the given setting suggestion effect type is "type B" (step S1507). When determining that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is "type B", the sub CPU 201 executes setting suggestion effect execution processing for type B (step S1508). The setting suggestion effect execution processing for type B will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S1508, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S1507 that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period identified in step S1503 is not "type B", the sub CPU 201 sets the setting suggestion effect period. It is determined whether or not the given setting suggestion effect type is "type C" (step S1509). When determining that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is "type C", the sub CPU 201 executes setting suggestion effect execution processing for type C (step S1510). The setting suggestion effect execution processing for type C will be described later with reference to FIG. When it is determined in step S1509 that the setting suggestion effect type set for the setting suggestion effect period is not "type C", or after executing the process of step S1510, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine. do.

<Setting Suggestion Effect Execution Processing for Type A>
FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing setting suggestion effect execution processing for type A performed in the sub control circuit.

The setting suggestion effect execution process for type A shown in FIG. 276 is a process performed in the sub control circuit 200 at step S1506 of FIG. 275 (setting suggestion effect execution process).

In the type A setting suggestion effect execution processing, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 1 out of 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1521). ).

When it is determined that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 1 (it is one of setting 2 to setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 performs setting suggestion effect I (step S1522). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image I. FIG. Thereby, the character image I is displayed on the main display device 210 .

When it is determined in step S1521 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), or after executing the process of step S1522, the sub CPU 201 executes this subroutine. exit.

<Setting Suggestion Effect Execution Processing for Type B>
FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing setting suggestion effect execution processing for type B performed in the sub control circuit.

The setting suggestion effect execution process for type B shown in FIG. 277 is a process performed in the sub control circuit 200 in step S1508 of FIG. 275 (setting suggestion effect execution process).

In the setting suggestion effect execution processing for type B, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1541). ). When determining that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 1 out of the 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 1 (it is any of setting 2 to setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether or not the setting value of 1 is the setting 2 out of the 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1542). When determining that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 2 out of the 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect I (step S1543). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image I. FIG. Thereby, the character image I is displayed on the main display device 210 . After executing the process of step S1543, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1542 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 2 (any of the setting 3 to setting 6) among the six setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether or not the setting value of machine 1 is setting 3 out of 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1544). When determining that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 3 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 draws a lottery for setting suggesting effect I or setting suggesting effect II. (step S1545). The probability of setting suggestion effect I being selected and the probability of setting suggestion effect II being selected can be arbitrarily designed. do.

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1545 (step S1546). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets the image data corresponding to the character image I or the image data corresponding to the character image II according to the type of setting suggestion effect selected in step S1545. As a result, one of character image I and character image II is displayed on main display device 210 . After executing the process of step S1546, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1544 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 3 (it is one of setting 4 to setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether or not the setting value of the machine 1 is setting 4 out of 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1547). When determining that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 4 out of the 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 performs a setting suggesting effect I, a setting suggesting effect II, and a setting suggesting effect III. One of them is selected by lottery (step S1548). The probability of setting suggestion effect I being selected, the probability of setting suggestion effect II being selected, and the probability of setting suggestion effect III being selected can be arbitrarily designed. are the same (1/3 each).

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1548 (step S1549). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates image data corresponding to the character image I, image data corresponding to the character image II, or image data corresponding to the character image III in accordance with the type of setting suggestion effect selected in step S1548. to set. As a result, one of character image I, character image II, and character image III is displayed on main display device 210 . After executing the process of step S1549, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1547 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 4 (it is either setting 5 or setting 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether or not the setting value of machine 1 is setting 5 out of 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1550). When determining that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 5 out of 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 performs setting suggestion effect I, setting suggestion effect II, setting suggestion effect III, and , setting suggestion effect IV is selected by lottery (step S1551). The probability that setting suggestion effect I is selected, the probability that setting suggestion effect II is selected, the probability that setting suggestion effect III is selected, and the probability that setting suggestion effect IV is selected are each arbitrarily designed. , but here we assume that these probabilities are the same (1/4 each).

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1551 (step S1552). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates image data corresponding to character image I, image data corresponding to character image II, image data corresponding to character image III, or , set the image data corresponding to the character image IV. As a result, any one of the character image I, character image II, character image III, and character image IV is displayed on the main display device 210 . After executing the process of step S1552, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1550 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 5 (it is the setting 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 performs setting suggestion effect I, setting suggestion One of the effect II, the setting suggesting effect III, the setting suggesting effect IV, and the setting suggesting effect V is selected by lottery (step S1553). Probability of setting suggestion effect I being selected, probability of setting suggestion effect II being selected, probability of setting suggestion effect III being selected, probability of setting suggestion effect IV being selected, and setting suggestion effect V being selected. The probabilities can be arbitrarily designed, but here we assume that these probabilities are the same (1/5 each).

Then, the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect selected in step S1553 (step S1554). In this process, the sub CPU 201 generates the image data corresponding to the character image I, the image data corresponding to the character image II, the image data corresponding to the character image III, the character Image data corresponding to image IV or image data corresponding to character image V is set. As a result, any one of the character image I, character image II, character image III, character image IV, and character image V is displayed on the main display device 210 . After executing the process of step S1554, the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

<Setting Suggestion Effect Execution Processing for Type C>
FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing setting suggestion effect execution processing for type C performed in the sub control circuit. FIG. 279 is a diagram showing an example of an image displayed on the main display device when the AT state ends.

The setting suggestion effect execution process for type C shown in FIG. 278 is a process performed in the sub control circuit 200 at step S1510 of FIG. 275 (setting suggestion effect execution process).

In the type-C setting suggestion effect execution processing, first, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is setting 1 out of six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6) (step S1561). ). When determining that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 1 out of the 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 201 determines that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 1 (it is any of setting 2 to setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether or not the setting value of 1 is the setting 2 out of the 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1562). When determining that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 2 out of the 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggestion effect I (step S1563). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image I. FIG. Thereby, the character image I is displayed on the main display device 210 . After executing the process of step S1563, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1562 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 2 (it is one of setting 3 to setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether or not the setting value of the machine 1 is setting 3 out of 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1564). When determining that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 3 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggesting effect II (step S1565). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image II. Thereby, the character image II is displayed on the main display device 210 . After executing the process of step S1565, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1564 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 3 (it is one of setting 4 to setting 6) among the six types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether or not the setting value of machine 1 is setting 4 out of 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1566). When determining that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 4 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggesting effect III (step S1567). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to character image III. Thereby, the character image III is displayed on the main display device 210 . After executing the process of step S1567, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1566 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 4 (it is either setting 5 or setting 6) among the six types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 It is determined whether or not the setting value of machine 1 is setting 5 out of 6 types of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6) (step S1568). When determining that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is the setting 5 out of the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 executes setting suggesting effect IV (step S1569). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image IV. Thereby, the character image IV is displayed on the main display device 210 . After executing the process of step S1569, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S1568 that the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 is not the setting 5 (it is the setting 6) among the 6 types of setting values (settings 1 to 6), the sub CPU 201 executes the setting suggesting effect V. (Step S1570). In this process, the sub CPU 201 sets image data corresponding to the character image V. FIG. Thereby, the character image V is displayed on the main display device 210 . After executing the process of step S1570, the sub CPU 201 terminates this subroutine.

FIG. 279 shows how the AT end screen is displayed on the main display device 210 . The AT end screen is a screen displayed on the main display device 210 when the AT state ends. The AT end screen has an AT end display area 1251 substantially in the center of the screen, an AT state game result display area 1252 in the upper part of the screen, and a setting suggestion image display area 1253 in the lower right part of the screen. An image indicating that the AT state has ended is displayed in the AT end display area 1251 . In the AT state game result display area 1252, an image showing the game result (for example, the number of payouts of medals) performed in the AT state is displayed. In the setting suggesting image display area 1253, one of the character images IV is displayed as the setting suggesting image. In the example shown in FIG. 279, a character image V is displayed, indicating that the setting value is set to 6. In the example shown in FIG.

<Hall menu screen>
FIG. 280 is a diagram showing an example of a hall menu screen displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state.

As described in the first embodiment, the hall menu (hall menu screen) is displayed when the manager of the amusement arcade is performing a setting confirmation operation or a setting change operation. The setting confirmation operation is an operation for confirming the setting values of the pachi-slot machine 1 . The setting change operation is an operation for changing the setting values of the pachi-slot machine 1 .

The setting confirmation operation and the setting change operation are each performed using the setting key-type switch 52 . The setting key-shaped switch 52 is turned on when, for example, the manager of the amusement arcade inserts a setting key (not shown) into the keyhole and turns it to the left from the initial position, and returns it to the initial position after turning it to the left. and turn off. When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned off, turning on the setting key-type switch 52 and then turning on the power turns on the setting changeable state (setting change state), and the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on. When the setting key-type switch 52 is turned on while the setting is still on, the setting can be confirmed (setting confirmation state).

When the setting confirmation state is entered in this way, the hall menu screen shown in FIG. A similar hall menu screen is displayed on the main display device 210 when the setting change state is entered. When the setting confirmation state is entered, command data (setting confirmation start command data) indicating this state is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 . In addition, when the setting change state is entered, command data (setting change start command data) indicating this state is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is in the setting confirmation state or the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 280, the hole menu screen has a hole menu item display area 1300 on the left side of the screen, a button display area 1310 on the lower right side of the screen in the center in the horizontal direction, and a preview display area 1320 on the right side of the screen. .

A plurality of hole menu items are displayed in the hole menu item display area 1300 . Hall menu items include time setting, total medal information, setting change/confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning setting, power saving mode setting, stop setting, automatic settlement setting, and setting suggestion effect setting. ing. Time setting, total medal information, setting change/confirmation history, error information history, monitoring history, warning setting, power saving mode setting, stop setting, and automatic settlement setting are as described in the first embodiment. The setting suggestion rendering setting will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the button display area 1310, an image corresponding to the effect button group (see FIG. 3) is displayed. The effect button group has a decision button arranged in the center and selection buttons (an upper selection button, a lower selection button, a left selection button, and a right selection button) arranged around the decision button. By operating each selection button, the manager on the gaming parlor side can select any one of a plurality of hall menu items. In FIG. 280, the currently selected hole menu item is shown surrounded by a solid line, and the unselected hole menu item is shown surrounded by a dotted line. By operating the decision button while one hole menu item is selected, the manager on the gaming parlor side can decide on the hole menu item. The initial screen of the hall menu screen is the screen in which "time setting" is selected as the hall menu item.

Preview display area 1320 displays a preview screen for one selected hole menu item from among a plurality of hole menu items. FIG. 280 shows a preview display of the time setting screen in a state where "time setting" is selected as a hall menu item. When a new setting (for example, time setting) is to be performed for one hole menu item, the manager on the gaming parlor side operates the enter button while the hole menu item is selected. As a result, when the hall menu item is determined, a screen for performing the new setting (for example, the time setting screen) is displayed, and by operating the select button and the enter button on the screen, the new Settings can be made.

In addition, in the bottom right small area of the hall menu screen, the text "setting is being checked" is displayed in the setting confirmation state, and the text "setting is being changed" is displayed in the setting change state. As a result, the manager of the game parlor can grasp whether it is in the setting confirmation state or the setting change state. The hall menu screen displayed in the setting confirmation state and the hall menu screen displayed in the setting change state are different only in terms of characters. are the same.

It should be noted that the display of the hall menu screen may be terminated when the setting confirmation state or the setting change state is terminated. When the setting key-type switch 52 is turned off in the setting confirmation state or the setting change state, command data indicating this is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 . As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the setting confirmation state or setting change state has ended.

Alternatively, if a setting change is made in the setting change state, the hall menu screen may be displayed even after the setting change state ends. On the hole menu screen displayed at this time, in addition to the hole menu items shown in FIG. 280, "end of hole menu" may be displayed. When the setting change state ends, the game can be executed, and the manager of the gaming parlor can select and confirm "end of hall menu" by operating the select button and the enter button. Thus, the display of the hole menu screen can be ended and the game screen can be displayed. On the other hand, since the game cannot be played in the setting confirmation state or the setting change state, the display of the hole menu screen cannot be ended by operating the select button and the enter button.

As described in the first embodiment, the setting can be changed by operating the reset switch 53 in the setting change state. When the setting is changed, the initialization command data (see step S27 in FIG. 24) is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub-control circuit 200, and the initialization command data does not contain the setting change. Contains information indicating what has been done. Thereby, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the setting has been changed.

<Setting suggestion effect setting screen>
281 to 283 are diagrams showing examples of setting suggestion effect setting screens displayed on the main display device in the setting confirmation state.

The setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. 281 is a screen displayed on the main display device 210 when "setting suggestion effect setting" is selected/determined as a hole menu item on the hole menu screen. The manager of the game parlor can set the setting suggestion effect type for each setting suggestion effect period by operating the selection button and the enter button on the setting suggestion effect setting screen.

The setting suggestion effect setting screen includes an operation item display area 1330 at the top of the screen, a valid/invalid setting area 1340 arranged below the operation item display area 1330, and a setting suggestion arranged below the valid/invalid setting area 1340. A production type setting area 1350 is provided.

In the operation item display area 1330, "return", "determine", "setting history", "password", and "initialize" are displayed as items that can be operated by the administrator of the gaming arcade. The manager of the amusement arcade selects and selects one of "return", "determine", "setting history", "password", and "initialize" by operating the selection button and the determination button. can decide. In the valid/invalid setting area 1340, "invalid" and "valid" are displayed as selection items for invalidating or validating the setting suggestion rendering setting. The manager of the game parlor can select/determine either "invalid" or "valid" by operating the select button and the enter button.

In the setting suggestion effect type setting area 1350, 10 types of setting suggestion effect periods (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “ Period G", "Period H", "Period I", and "Period J") are displayed, and next to each setting suggestion effect period, "None" and "Type A" are displayed as setting suggestion effect types. ”, “Type B”, and “Type C” are displayed. By operating the select button and the enter button, the manager on the gaming parlor side selects "none", "type A", "type B", and "type C" for each of the 10 types of setting suggestion rendering periods. ” can be selected and determined.

As described with reference to FIGS. 275 to 278, "type A" is a setting suggesting effect type for controlling to make character image I appear without fail among displayable character images (setting suggesting images). . "Type B" is a setting suggesting rendering type for controlling the displayable character images (setting suggesting images) to appear evenly. "Type C" is a setting suggestion effect type for controlling to make the best character image (capable of making the most advantageous suggestion) among displayable character images (setting suggestion images) appear. "None" is a setting suggestion rendering type for controlling the character image not to appear. The character image that can be displayed is character image I when the setting value is setting 2, character image I and character image II when the setting value is setting 3, and character image II when the setting value is setting 4. character image I, character image II, and character image III in some cases, and character image I, character image II, character image III, and character image IV when the setting value is 5; When the setting value is 6, character image I, character image II, character image III, character image IV, and character image V are displayed.

The manager of the game parlor can set the setting-suggestion effect type according to the procedures (i) to (iv) below.
(i) In the valid/invalid setting area 1340, the select button and the enter button are operated to select and confirm "valid".
(ii) In setting suggestion type setting area 1350, by operating the select button and enter button, the setting suggestion type for "period A" is set to "none", "type A", "type B", and Select and decide one of "Type C".
(iii) "Period B", "Period C", "Period D", "Period E", "Period F", "Period G", "Period H", "Period I" and "Period J" , respectively, the same operation as in (ii) above is repeated.
(iv) In the operation item display area 1330, the select button and the enter button are operated to select and confirm "determine".

As a result, the setting suggestion effect type is set for each of the 10 setting suggestion effect periods, and according to the currently set setting value and the contents selected and determined in the above (ii) and (iii) Then, when the AT state ends, the setting suggestion effect described above is performed (see FIGS. 275 to 278).

Here, although not shown, when the above operation (iv) is performed, a message "Do you want to register this setting suggestion effect setting?" is displayed. On the other hand, when "YES" is selected and determined by operating the select button and the enter button, the contents selected and determined in the above (ii) and (iii) are registered. The registered content is called a preset for setting suggestion effect setting. The setting-suggestion effect setting preset indicates the correspondence relationship between each setting-suggestion effect period and the setting-suggestion effect type selected and determined for the setting-suggestion effect period. When registering a setting suggestion effect setting preset, a name (for example, "event day custom", "collection day custom", etc.) can be given to the setting suggestion effect setting preset by performing a predetermined operation. can be attached. The name (setting suggestion effect setting name) is saved together with the setting suggestion effect setting preset. That is, the sub CPU 201 associates the setting suggestion effect setting preset with the setting suggestion effect setting name and stores them in the sub RAM 203 .

Also, when the above operation (iv) is performed, the password is displayed (issued). This password is called a setting suggestion effect setting password. The setting suggestion effect setting password is the contents selected/determined in (ii) and (iii) above (each setting suggestion effect period and the setting suggestion effect type selected/determined for the setting suggestion effect period and ) is encrypted. The sub CPU 201 generates a setting suggestion effect setting password by converting the information indicating the corresponding relationship into a symbol string composed of a plurality of symbols (including letters and numbers). The generated setting suggestion effect setting password is displayed on the main display device 210 . The pachi-slot machine 1 has a structure such as a table for converting the information indicating the corresponding relationship into a symbol string, and is capable of determining a setting suggestion effect setting password. Since the technology related to password generation is conventionally well-known technology in the gaming machine field (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-139519), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If the above setting suggestion effect setting preset is registered, instead of the above steps (i) to (iv), the manager of the gaming arcade may follow the steps (v) to (viii) below to suggest settings. You can also set the performance type.
(v) In the operation item display area 1330, the select button and the enter button are operated to select and confirm "setting history".
(vi) The screen is switched by the above (v), and a list of registered setting suggestion effect setting presets (setting suggestion effect setting name) is displayed.
(vii) By operating the select button and the enter button, one of the names for setting suggestion effect setting displayed in (vi) above is selected and determined.
(viii) Returning to the setting suggestion effect setting screen according to the above (vii), and operating the select button and the enter button in the operation item display area 1330 to select and decide "determine".

In the setting suggestion effect setting screen (viii) above, in the same correspondence relationship as the setting suggestion effect setting preset corresponding to the setting suggestion effect setting name selected/determined in (vii) above, for each setting suggestion effect period The setting suggestion production type is selected and determined. Thereby, it is possible to set the setting suggestion effect type with the same content as the setting suggestion effect setting preset.

In addition, instead of the above procedures (i) to (iv), the manager of the amusement arcade can set the setting-suggestion effect type according to the following procedures (ix) to (xii).
(ix) In the operation item display area 1330, the select button and the enter button are operated to select and confirm "password".
(x) The screen is switched by the above (ix), and a password input screen (a screen in which a plurality of symbols are arranged) is displayed.
(xi) On the password input screen, the select button and the enter button are operated to input a preliminarily grasped symbol string (setting suggestion effect setting password).
(xii) Returning to the setting suggestion effect setting screen according to (xi) above, and operating the select button and the enter button in the operation item display area 1330 to select and enter "determine".

On the setting suggestion effect setting screen of (xii) above, the same correspondence as the contents corresponding to the setting suggestion effect setting password entered in (xi) above (correspondence relationship between each setting suggestion effect period and setting suggestion effect type) In this connection, the setting suggestion effect type is selected and determined for each setting suggestion effect period. The sub CPU 201 decodes the information encrypted by the setting suggestion effect setting password input in (xi) above, and reflects the decoded contents on the setting suggestion effect setting screen (xii) above. The pachi-slot machine 1 has a configuration such as a table for specifying the encrypted information, and can decode the information. Techniques for decoding passwords are conventionally known techniques in the field of gaming machines (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-081521), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As a result, the setting suggestion effect setting password issued in the past is recorded, and by entering the setting suggestion effect setting password, the setting suggestion with the same content as the content corresponding to the setting suggestion effect setting password is entered. It is possible to set the production type. Also, in a game machine other than the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to set the setting-suggestion effect type with the same content as the pachi-slot machine 1 by inputting the setting-suggestion effect setting password.

In the operation item display area 1330, by operating the select button and the enter button to select and confirm "initialize", the currently set setting suggestion effect setting is cancelled. As a result, "none" is set as the setting suggestion effect type for all the setting suggestion effect periods. That is, the setting suggestion effect setting is initialized. Such initialization is performed only when "initialization" is selected/determined on the setting suggestion effect setting screen, and even if the set value is changed, the setting suggestion effect setting is not initialized. Also, in the operation item display area 1330, by operating the select button and the enter button to select and confirm "return", the screen is switched from the setting suggestion effect setting screen to the hole menu screen.

As described above, in the setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. , “period G”, “period H”, “period I”, and “period J”).

On the other hand, in the setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. 19 times", "AT ends 20 times", "AT ends 21 to 29 times", "AT ends 30 times", and "AT ends 31 times~"). We are doing what we can. As described above, the setting suggestion effect is performed when the AT state ends.

"AT end once" refers to a setting suggesting effect performed when the first AT state after the power is turned on ends. "AT ends 2nd to 9th times" refers to the setting suggesting effect that is performed when any of the 2nd to 9th AT states after the power is turned on ends. "AT end 10 times" refers to the setting suggesting effect performed when the AT state for the tenth time after power-on ends. "AT end 11th to 19th time" refers to a setting suggesting effect performed when any of the 11th to 19th AT states after power-on ends. "AT end 20 times" refers to the setting suggesting effect performed when the AT state for the 20th time after the power is turned on ends. "AT end 21st to 29th time" refers to a setting suggesting effect performed when any of the 21st to 29th AT states after power-on ends. "AT end 30 times" refers to a setting suggesting effect performed when the AT state for the 30th time after power-on ends. "AT end 31st time~" refers to a setting suggesting effect performed when the AT state after the 31st time after the power is turned on ends.

By the same procedure as the procedure described with reference to FIG. 281, the setting suggestion effect type can be set for such AT end times. As a result, when the AT state ends, one of the setting suggestion effects I to V is set according to the currently set value and how many times the AT state is the AT state after the power is turned on. Suggestion production can be performed. For example, when setting 6 is set as the setting value and "type C" is set for "AT end once", when the AT state ends for the first time after the power is turned on, the displayable The best character image (that is, character image V) can be made to appear among the character images.

In addition, on the setting suggestion effect setting screen shown in FIG. , ``16:00 to 18:00'', ``18:00 to 20:00'', ``20:00 to 22:00'', and ``22:00 to 23:00''). and A setting suggestion effect type can be set for such a time range by a procedure similar to that described with reference to FIG. 281 . Thus, when the AT state ends, any one of the setting suggesting performances I to V can be performed according to the currently set set value and the time when the AT state ends. For example, if setting 6 is set as the setting value and "Type C" is set for "10:00 to 11:00", when the AT state ends at 10:50, the displayable The best character image (that is, character image V) can be made to appear among the character images.

<Login>
FIG. 284A is a diagram showing an outline of a menu screen displayed on the main display device. FIG. 284B is a diagram showing a configuration example of a menu screen. FIG. 285 shows a character customization screen for customizing a character. FIG. 286 is a diagram showing an example of a game history screen. FIG. 287 is a diagram showing a game system.

The sub-control circuit 200 calls up the menu screen shown in FIG. As described above, the effect button group includes the cross key (up select button, down select button, left select button, and right select button) and the enter button, and when the player operates the cross key, the selection cursor changes to When the player moves in the operated direction and operates the enter button, the item pointed by the selection cursor is selected (determined).

As shown in FIG. 284(B), the menu screen is provided with "custom game", "volume adjustment", "game data", "dividend/arrangement", and "dedicated site" as the main menu. A more detailed submenu is provided. For example, the main menu "custom game" is provided with submenus "character selection", "simple start", "input password", "view intermediate record", "record and finish", and "member registration". The sub-menu “character selection” is a menu for customizing a character to be used in an effect performed on the main display device 210 .

The sub-menus 'easy start' to 'member registration' are menus used for registered games of the player. In a recent pachislot machine, by registering a player who plays a game, there is a case where a privilege that does not affect the ball output compared to a player who is not registered is given. Specifically, when the player is registered, the sub-control circuit 200 stores the history of the game after the registration (for example, the game history such as the number of bonuses and the winning probability of the minor combination, and the executed (including production history of production), and gives a certain privilege based on this history. This game history can include not only the current game, but also the previous game. Specifically, the game history of each player is managed on the server, and when a game is played, the server notifies the gaming machine of the game history via a mobile phone, etc. You can take over the history and play the game.

The sub-menu "Easy Start" is a menu that is operated to simply accumulate the history of the current game without taking over the history of the previous game, that is, to perform a simple login. Further, the sub-menu "enter password" is a menu operated to carry over the history of the previous game while further accumulating the history of the current game, that is, to perform a formal login. Here, simple login is completed simply by operating the submenu "Easy Start", while official login is performed by entering a password into the pachislot machine 1 after registering as a member. will be Therefore, when comparing the simple login and the formal login, it can be said that the simple login is a simpler registration procedure than the formal login. It can be said that it is a procedure.

The sub-menu "View Interim Record" is a menu that is operated when logging in (simple or formal) to check the interim record of the game history accumulated up to that point. The sub-menu "record and end" is a menu that is operated when logging in (simple or formal) and recording the game history accumulated up to that point on the server. When these sub-menus "view intermediate record" and "record and end" are operated, the accumulated game history is read from the pachi-slot machine 1 onto the player's mobile phone or server. A sub-menu "membership registration" is a menu operated to perform initial registration of a player on the server.

The character customization screen shown in FIG. 285 is provided with a "character" selection field, a "costume" selection field, a "pose" selection field, and an "accessory" selection field, and a plurality of selectable icons are provided in each of the selection fields. be provided. In the pachi-slot machine 1, the character is customized based on the contents of the icon selected in each selection field at the timing when the enter icon is operated.

The "character" selection field is used to select a character, and the sub control circuit 200 determines one character selected in the "character" selection field from among a plurality of types of characters. Further, the "costume" selection field is used to select the character's costume, the "pose" selection field is used to select the character's pose, and the "accessory" selection field is used to select the character's accessories. used to The “Costume” selection column to the “Accessory” selection column are used to customize the character display mode (costume, pose, accessories). The sub-control circuit 200 determines one display mode selected in the corresponding selection field from among a plurality of display modes corresponding to the corresponding selection field.

On this character customization screen, the player can customize the character by performing button operations using the effect button group. When the character is customized, the sub control circuit 200 selects the character selected in the "character" selection field wearing the costume selected in the "costume" selection field and the accessory selected in the "accessory" selection field, The pose selected in the “pose” selection field is displayed on the main display device 210 .

In the custom game, an effect using a character according to the content of customization is performed. A custom game is started by operating a determination icon (performing a custom start operation), and is terminated by operating an end icon (not shown) (performing a custom end operation).

FIG. 286A shows the first page of the game history called from the submenu "game history 1", and FIG. 286B shows the second page of the game history called from the submenu "game history 2". be. As shown in FIG. 286(A), the first page of the game history displays the total number of games, the number of current games, the number of bonuses, the number of CZs, the number of ARTs, the number of addition zones 1 and 2, and the number of addition zones 3. be done. Thus, on the first page of the game history, in addition to the total number of games and the current number of games, the number of times advantageous game states such as bonuses and ARTs have been played are displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 286(A), a "next page" icon is displayed on the first page of the game history. When this "next page" icon is selected, the second page of the game history is called. Although the first page of the game history can be displayed by all players, the second page of the game history can be displayed only by players who have officially logged in, and can be displayed by non-login players and players. A simple login player cannot display it. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 200 hides or disables selection of the "next page" icon when login is not performed or only simple login is performed.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 286(B), on the second page of the game history, the number of times the watermelon (“F_watermelon”) was determined as an internal winning combination (the number of winning times) and the chance eye A (“F_watermelon”) are displayed. chance role 1") wins, chance wins B ("F_chance role 2") wins, weak cherry ("F_weak cherry") wins, strong cherry ("F_strong cherry") wins, and the number of wins of the fixed cherry ("F_fixed cherry") are displayed. That is, on the second page of the game history, the number of wins of the so-called rare combination is displayed.

In this way, by displaying the number of winnings of rare roles only for players who have officially logged in, the pachi-slot machine 1 can directly access the game for players who have gone through the formal steps to register. It is possible to give a privilege (display of the number of wins of a rare role) that does not affect it. As a result, the player who desires to see the number of wins of the rare combination can be urged to use formal registration, and as a result, the player can become attached to the gaming machine and increase the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, since the pachi-slot machine 1 does not display the second page of the game history, which displays the number of times a rare role has been won, for a player who has logged in using a simple procedure, the simple login procedure is used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the act of only logging in with the other person and spying on the result of the game of another person after the other person has played the game.

The formal login will be described in more detail below with reference to FIG. The gaming system 1500 includes a pachislot machine 1, a management server 1510, and a mobile terminal 1520. FIG. The mobile terminal 1520 and the management server 1510 can exchange data with each other through communication via the Internet.

Prior to starting a game, the player receives a password issued by the management server 1510 while a predetermined application is activated on the portable terminal 1520 owned by the player. The password is an encrypted history of games played up to the previous time. The management server 1510 stores game history information indicating the history of games played up to the last time. Convert to columns. A password is a symbol string corresponding to such a game history. The player can display the password on the mobile terminal 1520 by performing a predetermined operation.

After that, when starting a game, the player operates the effect button group on the pachi-slot machine 1 to display the menu screen (see FIG. 284(A)) on the main display device 210, and the main menu is displayed on the menu screen. Select "Custom Game". As a result, one of the following submenu screens can be selected: "Select character", "Easy start", "Enter password", "View intermediate record", "Record and end", and "Member registration". A screen for selection (see FIG. 284(B)) is displayed on the main display device 210 .

Then, the player selects the sub-menu "enter password" on the sub-menu screen. As a result, a screen (password input screen) for inputting a password is displayed on the main display device 210 . The player can perform formal login by performing button operations using the effect button group on the password input screen and inputting the password issued by the management server 1510 . As a result, the history of the game played this time is accumulated while taking over the history of the game played up to the previous time.

The game history (game history) includes the total number of games played, the number of occurrences of a game state (specific game state) advantageous to the player (for example, the number of bonuses, the number of ARTs, etc.), the number of wins and the winning probability of each combination, the game In addition to the number of inserted media and the number of paid out media, the history of executed effects (effect history) is included. The effect history includes the number of occurrences of various effects as well as a history related to custom games (character customization). Examples of the history relating to the custom game include the number of times various characters have been selected and the game history for each type of custom game (type of character selected). The game history for each type of selected character includes the number of games played with various characters customized (for example, the number of games played with character A selected, and the number of games played with character A selected). The number of games played with B selected) or the number of times a specific game state (for example, bonus, ART, etc.) occurred with various characters customized (for example, the number of times that character A was selected) The number of times the specific game state occurred in the state, and the number of times the specific game state occurred with the character B selected).

The management server 1510 manages such a game history in association with a member ID assigned to each player who has registered as a member. For example, in the management server 1510, the number of games played with character A selected by one player and the number of games played with character B selected are stored. The number of games played with character A selected and the number of games played with character B selected are also stored. Thereby, the management server 1510 can compare the game history of each player. The password also includes encrypted results of comparison of game histories of each player (ranking determined by a predetermined method).

To end the game, the player selects the sub-menu "record and end" on the sub-menu screen. Thereby, the two-dimensional code is displayed on the main display device 210 . The two-dimensional code is obtained by encoding the address information of the management server 1510 and the gaming history information accumulated in the pachi-slot machine 1 . The player can take an image of the two-dimensional code with a camera provided in the mobile terminal device 1520 . The mobile terminal 1520 recognizes the two-dimensional code from image data obtained when the camera captures the two-dimensional code, and generates address information of the management server 1510 from the recognized two-dimensional code. As a result, it becomes possible to access the management server 1510 . Also, game history information is transmitted from the mobile terminal 1520 to the management server 1510 . As a result, the game history is managed by the management server 1510. FIG.

To log in for the first time, it is necessary to register as a member. To register as a member, the player selects the sub-menu "member registration" on the sub-menu screen. Thereby, the two-dimensional code is displayed on the main display device 210 . The two-dimensional code is obtained by encoding the address information of the management server 1510 and information related to member registration. The player can take an image of the two-dimensional code with a camera provided in the mobile terminal device 1520 . The mobile terminal 1520 recognizes the two-dimensional code from image data obtained when the camera captures the two-dimensional code, and generates address information of the management server 1510 from the recognized two-dimensional code. As a result, it becomes possible to access the management server 1510 . Also, information related to member registration is transmitted from the mobile terminal 1520 to the management server 1510 . As a result, the management server 1510 sets the ID for the player.

Here, in FIG. 275, it has been described that the setting suggesting effect is performed when formal login is performed (that is, the setting suggesting effect is not performed unless member registration is performed). As a result, the player can be encouraged to perform formal login (member registration). However, the conditions for performing the setting suggestion effect are not limited to this example. For example, setting suggestion rendering may be performed not only when formal login is performed, but also when simple login is performed. Also, even if formal login has not been performed and simple login has not been performed (regardless of whether login has been performed or not), setting suggestion rendering may be performed. . Alternatively, if the setting suggestion effect setting screen is configured so that it is possible to set whether or not to link the setting suggestion effect and login ("valid" or "invalid"), and "valid" is set , on the condition that you are logged in (similar to the above, you may need a formal login, or a simple login may be sufficient), and a setting suggestion effect will be performed. If "disabled" is set, the setting suggestion rendering may be performed regardless of the presence or absence of login.

284 to 286 are displayed on the main display device 210, these screens are displayed on a dedicated touch panel liquid crystal provided separately from the main display device 210. You can do it. As a result, the player can perform operations on the menu screen even during a game (when an effect is being performed on the main display device 210).

Further, character customization may be performed by operating the mobile terminal 1520 owned by the player. For example, a player who has registered as a member causes the mobile terminal 1520 to display a character customization screen (similar to FIG. , the character may be customized by performing a touch operation or a button operation on the mobile terminal 1520 . In this case, the contents of the customization may be configured to be transmitted to the pachislot machine 1 via the management server 1510, or may be sent from the mobile terminal 1520 via non-contact short-range communication (NFC communication) or the like. It may be configured so that it can be directly transmitted to the pachi-slot machine 1 .

<Variation of setting suggestion production>
288 to 298 are diagrams showing an example of the setting suggesting effect.

Although the setting suggestion effect has been described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform a setting suggestion effect different from the setting suggestion effect described above. The setting suggesting effect described below may be performed instead of the setting suggesting effect described above, or may be performed separately from the setting suggesting effect described above (in one pachislot machine 1, the above setting suggesting effect and the setting suggesting effect described below may be performed separately from the setting suggesting effect described above). (both setting suggestion effects can be performed). Any one of the character images IV described above may be used as the character image displayed in the setting suggestion effect described below.

As an example of setting suggestion effect, in FIG. 288(a), a character image of "Ending" is displayed on the main display device 210 when the remaining number of games played until the end of the AT state becomes equal to or less than a predetermined number of times (100 times). and the ending period of the AT state has started. In FIG. 288(b), after the state shown in FIG. 288(a), since the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the lower cherry wins and the character image "Congratulations!" is displayed on the main display device 210. , and indicates through the character image that a relatively high set value (setting 5) or more has been established. FIG. 288(c) shows a state in which the character image "The end" is displayed on the main display device 210 after the state shown in FIG. Then, in FIG. 288(d), the screen is switched after the state shown in FIG. It shows how it is suggested that something has been confirmed. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 288, when a rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the ending period of the AT state, the setting suggestion effect is performed.

As another example of the setting suggesting effect, FIG. 289(a) shows a character image of "Start Rush" displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state has started. In FIG. 289(b), after the state shown in FIG. 289(a), the main image is an image showing that the gauge is rising due to the fact that a rare combination is determined as an internal winning combination (cherry in the lower row wins). It shows how it is displayed on the display device 210 . FIG. 289(c) shows a state in which a character image "Rush is finished" is displayed on the main display device 210 after the state shown in FIG. In FIG. 289(d), after the state shown in FIG. 289(c), the screen is switched, all the characters are gathered and displayed on the main display device 210, and the highest setting value (setting 6) is displayed. It is shown that it is suggested that the Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 289, the gauge rises (the meter accumulates) each time a rare hand is determined as an internal winning hand during the AT state (which may be limited to the ending period of the AT state). controlled by And, the more the meter is accumulated, the higher the probability that the setting suggestion effect will be performed.

As another example of the setting suggesting effect, in FIG. 290(a), a text image of "First Rush Start" is displayed on the main display device 210, and the first set of AT A predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 along with showing how the state is started, thereby suggesting through the character image that one set value (setting 2) or more has been established. It shows how it is. In FIG. 290B, after the state shown in FIG. 6 shows that the AT state of the sixth set has started as a result of the fact that the character image is not displayed on the main display device 210 . In FIG. 290(c), after the state shown in FIG. 290(b), the AT state is continued (extended) by displaying a character image "Rush 8th time" on the main display device 210. 290(a), and the number of character images displayed on the main display device 210 increases from the state shown in FIG. 290(a). , indicating that it has been determined that the value is equal to or greater than one set value (setting 3) through the character image. In FIG. 290(d), after the state shown in FIG. 290(c), the AT state is continued (extended) by displaying a character image "Rush 10th time" on the main display device 210. At the same time, all the characters are displayed together on the main display device 210, thereby indicating that the highest set value (setting 6) is set. It shows how it is suggested that it has been confirmed. In the example shown in FIG. 290, when the AT state is started, there is a case where the setting suggestion effect is performed. getting higher.

As another example of the setting suggesting effect, FIG. 291(a) shows a character image of "Start Rush" displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state has started. In FIG. 291(b), after the state shown in FIG. 291(a), a predetermined character image is displayed as "V" symbols are stopped and displayed in the upper area, the middle area and the lower area of the left reel 3L. It is displayed on the main display device 210 and shows a state in which it is indicated through the character image that one setting value (setting 4) or more has been confirmed. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 291, a specific position of the reel 3 (for example, a place where the same type of symbols are arranged continuously) is aimed by eye pressing (although not shown, as a premise, it is assumed that A specific effect that suggests is generated), and a setting suggesting effect is performed when the eye pressing is successful.

As another example of setting suggesting effect, in FIG. 292(a), a text image "BONUS confirmed" (bonus confirmation screen: an image that can be displayed only when the bonus combination is determined as an internal winning combination) is displayed on the main display device. 210 notifies that the bonus combination has been determined as the internal winning combination, and by displaying a predetermined character image on the main display device 210, one set value ( It shows how it is suggested that the setting 4) or above is confirmed. In FIG. 292(b), after the state shown in FIG. 292(a), a character image (bonus end screen) of "BONUS END" is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby showing the end of the bonus state. At the same time, a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby indicating that the highest set value (setting 6) has been determined. On the other hand, in FIG. 292(c), after the state shown in FIG. 292(a), the character image (bonus end screen) of "BONUS end" is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby ending the bonus state. On the other hand, it shows a state in which a predetermined character image is not displayed on the main display device 210 . Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 292, when a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 on both the bonus confirmation screen and the bonus end screen, the highest setting value (setting 6) is obtained. On the other hand, when a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 only on either one of the bonus confirmation screen and the bonus end screen, it is confirmed that the value is equal to or greater than one set value (setting 4). It is designed to

As another example of setting suggesting effect, in FIG. 293(a), a character image of "Rush times 3" is displayed on the main display device 210 to show that the AT state of the third set is completed. , a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby indicating through the character image that one set value (setting 4) or more has been confirmed. In FIG. 293(b), after the state shown in FIG. 293(a), a character image of "4 times of Rush" is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby showing that the AT state of the fourth set is completed. In addition, a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby indicating that it is confirmed that the value is equal to or greater than one setting value (setting 5). In FIG. 293(c), after the state shown in FIG. 293(b), the character image "Rush times 5 times" is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby showing the end of the AT state for the fifth set. In addition, a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby indicating that the highest set value (setting 6) has been determined. Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 293, when a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 in the AT end screen displayed when one AT state ends, one setting value (setting 4) When the above is confirmed, and a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 in the AT end screen displayed when the AT state of the next set of the AT state is completed (predetermined character When the image is displayed twice consecutively), it is determined that the set value (setting 5) is more advantageous than the one set value, and when the AT state of the next set of the set is completed When a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 in the displayed AT end screen (when the predetermined character image is displayed three times in succession), the highest setting value (setting 6) is obtained. Determine.

As another example of the setting suggesting effect, FIG. 294(a) shows a character image of "Rush times 3" displayed on the main display device 210, thereby showing how the AT state of the third set ends. , a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby indicating through the character image that one set value (setting 4) or more has been confirmed. In FIG. 294(b), after the state shown in FIG. 294(a), the continuous residence in the AT state is finished with 3 sets, and the transition to the performance section (advantageous section/normal game) is shown. In FIG. 294(c), after the state shown in FIG. 294(b), the character image "Start Rush" is displayed on the main display device 210 and the AT state is restarted. In FIG. 294(d), after the state shown in FIG. 294(c), a character image of "Rush times 2" is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby showing the end of the second set of AT states. In addition, a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby indicating through the character image that one setting value (setting 5) or more has been confirmed. . In FIG. 294(e), after the state shown in FIG. 294(d), a series of AT states ends with two sets, and shows a transition to an effect section (advantageous section/normal game). In FIG. 294(f), after the state shown in FIG. 294(e), a character image of "Rush times 5 times" is displayed on the main display device 210, thereby ending the fifth set of AT state (premise , and a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210, suggesting that the highest setting value (setting 6) has been determined. It shows how it is. In addition, after the state shown in FIG. 294(f), the AT state continuous residence ends with 5 sets, and shifts to the production section (advantageous section/normal game). Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 294, similarly to the example shown in FIG. Although it is confirmed, the AT end screen is displayed only when the AT state is not extended (continued) (when the AT state falls to the normal game).

As another example of setting suggesting effects, FIG. 295(a) shows a character image "Rush times 7" displayed on the main display device 210 to show that the AT state of the 7th set is finished. , a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210. FIG. In FIG. 295(b), after the state shown in FIG. 295(a), the main display device 210 displays a character image (resurrection effect) saying "Still!", thereby determining that the AT state continues. It shows how it looks. On the other hand, in FIG. 295(c), after the state shown in FIG. 295(a), the AT state consecutive residence ends with 7 sets, and shows the transition to the production section (advantageous section/normal game). 295(a) indicates that the maximum set value (setting 6) has been determined through the predetermined character image displayed in the state shown in FIG. 295(a). As described above, in the example shown in FIG. 295, when a predetermined character image is displayed on the main display device 210 in the AT end screen, the predetermined character image may indicate the set value. However, if the AT state continues after that, it means that the predetermined character image did not play the role of suggesting the setting value, and the predetermined character image becomes invalid (the setting suggesting effect is It turns out after the fact that it was an irrelevant production (it was not confirmed that it was a relatively high set value or more)). On the other hand, when falling from the AT state to the normal game, the predetermined character image has played a role of suggesting the setting value, and the predetermined character image becomes effective (not a setting suggesting effect). (It was confirmed after the fact that it was above a relatively high set value).

As another example of the setting suggesting effect, FIG. 296(a) shows a character image of "Start Rush" displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state has started. In FIG. 296(b), after the state shown in FIG. 296(a), the effect image "Aim for the BAR" described in the ninth embodiment is displayed as the main display as the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is displayed on the device 210 and shows how the "BAR" symbol set is stopped and displayed on the reel 3. FIG. In FIG. 296(c), after the state shown in FIG. 296(b), the "PUSH" button image (the image prompting the operation of the production button) is displayed on the main display device as the "BAR" pattern is stopped and displayed. 210 is shown. In FIG. 296(d), after the state shown in FIG. 296(c), all the characters are gathered together and displayed on the main display device 210 as the effect button is operated. It shows how it is suggested that setting 6) is confirmed. Thus, in the example shown in FIG. 296, a specific pattern (for example, "BAR" pattern) is aimed by pressing, and when the pressing is successful, an operation instruction for the production button appears, and the production button can be operated. By setting suggestion production is performed.

As another example of setting suggesting effect, FIG. 297(a) shows a character image of "Start Rush" displayed on the main display device 210, indicating that the AT state has started. In FIG. 297(b), after the state shown in FIG. 297(a), the effect image "Aim for the BAR" described in the ninth embodiment is displayed as the main display as the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. It is displayed on the device 210 and shows how the "BAR" symbol set is stopped and displayed on the reel 3. FIG. In FIG. 297(c), after the state shown in FIG. 297(b), the "PUSH" button image (the image prompting the operation of the production button) is displayed on the main display device as the "BAR" pattern is stopped and displayed. 210 is shown. In FIG. 297(d), following the operation of the production button after the state shown in FIG. It shows how it is suggested that it is determined to be any of 4 to 6. In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 297, it is determined that the setting value is any one of 4 to 6 through the display of the image including the number corresponding to "456". Such images include an image corresponding to the number of additional games in the AT state ("+456"), an image notifying the number of medals acquired in the AT state ("OVER 456"), an enemy defeat effect (for example, resurrection It is possible to adopt an image ("I defeated 456 enemies") displayed in the production).

As another example of setting suggestion effect, FIG. 298(a) shows a character image of "BIG BONUS" displayed on the main display device 210 and a BB state (pseudo BB) being started. In FIG. 298(b), after the state shown in FIG. 298(a), a screen for selecting one of the "one shot announcement mode", "final announcement mode", and "chance announcement mode" is displayed. It shows how it is displayed on the main display device 210 . "One-shot notification mode", "final notification mode", and "chance notification mode" are each one type of production mode, for example, a method of notifying whether the AT state continues (resurrection production content) are different from each other. A player can select one performance mode by operating a performance button. Then, the rate at which each setting suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion effect IV) appears differs according to the selected effect mode. For example, when the "chance notification mode" is selected, the set value is relatively low compared to when the "one-shot notification mode" to the "final notification mode" are selected. A setting suggestion effect that is determined (for example, setting suggestion effect I) is likely to occur, but a setting suggestion effect that confirms that the value is equal to or higher than a relatively high set value (for example, setting suggestion effect IV or setting suggestion effect V) occurs. It may be configured to make it difficult to In addition, when the "one-shot notification mode" is selected, as the setting suggestion effect, a setting suggestion effect that confirms that it is equal to or higher than a relatively high set value (for example, setting suggestion effect III or setting suggestion effect IV and setting suggestion effect V) only occurs (setting suggestion effect I and setting suggestion effect II do not occur), but in the first place, compared to the case where "final announcement mode" or "chance announcement mode" is selected, It may be configured such that the occurrence probability of the setting suggestion effect is low.

As another example of the setting suggesting effect, although not shown, a setting suggesting effect that is performed when the advantageous section starts may be provided. The content of the setting suggestion effect may vary depending on the type of mode in the effect section (normal game). For example, if the mode when the advantageous section starts is a specific mode, a setting suggestion effect that is determined to be higher than a relatively high set value (for example, setting suggestion effect III, setting suggestion effect IV, or A setting suggestion effect V) may be performed. Alternatively, the fact that a specific mode is started itself is synonymous with confirming that it is a relatively high setting value (for example, setting 4) or higher (a screen dedicated to a specific mode may be displayed). (corresponding to a setting suggestion effect). When a specific mode is started, it is confirmed that it is a relatively high set value (for example, set 4) or more, and it is confirmed that the pseudo-bonus transition lottery will be won within a predetermined number of games (predetermined The pseudo-bonus shift lottery may always be won within the number of games). Moreover, it is also possible to provide a setting suggestion effect exclusively for the non-advantageous section.

In addition, when a setting suggestion effect that can occur in a specific situation (for example, when the AT state ends) is provided, the setting suggestion effect is performed when a predetermined operation (for example, operation of a production button or touch panel) is performed. On the other hand, it may not be generated if a predetermined operation (for example, operation of the effect button or touch panel) is not performed. As gaming states (advantageous states) advantageous to the player, a first advantageous state (for example, pseudo BB (big bonus)) and a second advantageous state (for example, Pseudo RB (regular bonus)) is provided, the setting suggesting effect is performed during the second advantageous state (the setting suggesting effect is not performed during the first advantageous state, or the setting suggesting effect is not performed during the first advantageous state, or During the state, the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect is lower than during the second advantageous state).

In addition, when the number of occurrences of a specific situation (for example, when the AT state ends) after the power is turned on (or after the setting value is changed) is a specific number of times (for example, the first time or In the 10th specific situation), the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect may be higher than in the case where the number of occurrences is other than the specific number of times. For example, if the setting is set so that the probability of occurrence of the setting suggestion effect in the first specific situation (for example, when the AT state ends) is high, it is possible to try to attract customers in the early hours after the store opens in the morning. becomes.

Also, a setting suggestion effect may be provided in which suggestions including past set values can be made. For example, setting 6 has been set for at least one of the last several days (any one of today's setting value, the previous day's setting value, and the setting value of the day before the previous day is setting 6). It is also possible to provide a setting suggestion effect that confirms. Also, a setting suggestion effect may be provided that confirms that a higher setting value (for example, setting 5 or setting 6) is set today than the previous day. As a result, the player who has confirmed the information about the past set values on the data display device, the data site, or the like can be entertained with the speculation of the setting through the setting suggesting effect.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, for example, a specific combination (for example, watermelon) can be determined as an internal winning combination, and the specific combination is determined by the player's stop operation mode (stop operation timing). may be the order of pressing, or a combination thereof), the number of medals to be awarded will vary (for example, if the stop operation mode is appropriate (correct answer) 8 payouts, 1 payout if inappropriate (wrong answer) or no payout). Then, if the specific combination is won in a specific game state, if 8 coins are paid out, whether or not to shift to the AT state in the current game (extend the game period of the AT state in the AT state) The same applies hereinafter) to determine whether or not to change the degree of advantage (whether to directly shift to the AT state, or whether to directly extend the game period of the AT state) hereinafter referred to as "advantageous decision") is not performed, and if 8 coins are not paid out, the advantageous decision can be made in the current game.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R in the main game is stopped, an advantage zone winning time sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the combination of the stopped symbols is displayed. (see FIG. 7(a)) is determined. Then, in the effect section (advantageous section/normal game), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table (see FIG. 7(c)) is referred to, and a lottery (pseudo-bonus transition lottery) is performed based on the random value and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantage section. will be The pseudo-bonus transition lottery is basically performed in each unit game, but the unit in which the player plays the game in a specific game method (for example, a game method in which 8 medals are paid out as described above). In the game, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery as an advantage determination may not be performed. Alternatively, in a unit game in which the player has played a game in a specific game method, the winning probability of a pseudo-bonus shift lottery as an advantageous decision compared to a unit game in which the player has not played a game in a specific game method. may be relatively reduced. In such a case, it is also possible to provide a setting suggesting effect that can occur when the number of times the pseudo-bonus transition lottery has been performed reaches a predetermined number of times. As a result, the player can enjoy the setting-suggestion performance at an earlier timing if he/she does not play the game with the specific game method.

As a specific game method, for example, in a unit game in which a specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a predetermined reel (for example, the left reel 3L) is stopped by a symbol belonging to a predetermined range (for example, a symbol position " 10" to "18") are displayed in the middle area, and the order of stop operations for the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is a specific order. A game method such as In this way, in a specific game, only when a specific stop order is more advantageous than other stop orders, when the game is played in the specific stop order, the specific game is more advantageous. It can be configured not to make a decision (or to reduce the probability that a favorable decision will be made to change the degree of advantage to an advantage). It should be noted that, as described in the first embodiment, such restrictions are preferably limited to the unit game.

In addition, instead of not making an advantageous decision (or reducing the probability that it will be decided to change the advantageous degree to an advantageous one in the advantageous decision), stop counting the number of games up to the ceiling (or It is also possible to extend the number of games up to the ceiling). For example, as described in the first embodiment, in the performance section (normal game), as a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus, the number of ceiling games is updated. (Additional method or subtraction method may be used.) When the number of ceiling games corresponds to the current mode (or is determined in advance at the time of transition to an advantageous section, etc.), when the number of ceiling games is reached, the transition to a pseudo-bonus is made. It is decided to let In this regard, the number of ceiling games may not be updated (or the number of ceiling games may be increased) in a unit game in which the player has played a specific game method.

<Lock>
299 and 300 are diagrams showing an example of the first stop lock. FIGS. 301 and 302 are diagrams showing an example of the lock during intermediate stop.

As described in the first embodiment, the lock effect (lock) is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period (disables the game operation of the player for a predetermined period). In this embodiment, it is possible to configure such that the first stop lock is executed when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination. Alternatively, it may be configured such that the middle stop lock is executed when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination.

As the predetermined combination, it is possible to adopt a combination in which the number of medals awarded varies according to the mode of the stop operation (timing of the stop operation) by the player (for example, the specific combination described above). That is, when a predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, a predetermined number of medals (for example, 8) are paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. On the other hand, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, a drop occurs, and the number of medals to be paid out becomes smaller than when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (or no medals are paid out).

Here, some players who play a game on the pachi-slot machine 1 prefer to slide their fingers in the order of the left stop button 8L→the middle stop button 8C→the right stop button 8R when performing the stop operation for each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. It is conceivable that there are players who play the game with a smooth hitting method (hereinafter referred to as a sliding hitting method). When a predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, there is a high possibility that the predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) will be missed if a game is played with such a sliding hitting method.

In this respect, when a predetermined combination (for example, watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, the first stop lock to middle stop lock are executed to play the game by the sliding stroke method. However, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of such a dropout. 299 and 300, the first stop lock will be described, and the middle stop lock will be described with reference to FIGS. 301 and 302. FIG.

FIG. 299(a) shows how the reels 3L, 3C and 3R start rotating in one unit game and all the reels 3L, 3C and 3R are rotating. After that, the behavior of the reels 3 differs depending on whether or not the predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning combination. FIG. 299(b) and FIGS. 300(a) to (d) show a case where a predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, and FIG. 299(c) shows that the predetermined combination is A case where a different combination (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is shown.

Specifically, in FIG. 299(b), when a predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning combination, after the state shown in FIG. 299(a), the left stop button 8L is pressed as the first stop operation. As a result of the operation, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped, and "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the upper area of the left reel 3L. At this time, the first stop lock is generated by performing the first stop operation. The first stop lock is a lock that occurs after the first stop operation is performed and before the second stop operation is performed. When the first stop lock occurs, the player's operation (for example, operation of the stop button 8) after the first stop operation is performed is invalidated. The first stop lock continues until the middle stop button 8C is operated. That is, the first stop lock is released when the middle stop button 8C is operated. The arrows in the drawing indicate to what position the player has slid his finger in the sliding stroke.

In FIG. 300(a), after the state shown in FIG. 299(b), the finger is slid to the middle stop button 8C (the middle stop button 8C is operated) in the sliding hitting method. At this time, as the middle stop button 8C is operated, the first stop lock ends. The operation of the middle stop button 8C is effective as an operation for releasing the first stop lock, but is ineffective as an operation for stopping the middle reel 3C.

In FIG. 300(b), after the state shown in FIG. 300(a), the finger is slid up to the right stop button 8R (the right stop button 8R is operated) in the sliding hitting method. Since the first stop lock has already been completed, the operation of the right stop button 8R is effective as an operation for stopping the right reel 3R. As a result, in FIG. 300(b), the rotation of the right reel 3R is stopped, and "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the lower area of the right reel 3R, and "Watermelon" is displayed along the effective line (here, the crossdown line). is in a ready-to-win state (a state in which "watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the left reel 3L and the right reel 3R, and only the middle reel 3C is rotating). When a predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, "watermelon" is stopped on the left reel 3L and the right reel 3R regardless of the operation timing of the left stop button 8L or the right stop button 8R. It is now displayed.

FIG. 300(c) shows how the effect image "Aim for the BAR" explained in the ninth embodiment is displayed on the main display device 210 after the state shown in FIG. 300(b). Here, on the middle reel 3C, the symbol position corresponding to "watermelon" is close to the symbol position corresponding to "BAR" (within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (4 symbols)). . As a result, when the predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning combination, if the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is appropriate (for example, when "BAR" is displayed in the middle area, the middle stop button 8C is When the stop button 8C is operated), the "watermelon" is stop-displayed on the middle reel 3C, and the "watermelon" aligns along the crossdown line (wins). On the other hand, if the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is not appropriate, the "watermelon" is not stop-displayed on the middle reel 3C, and the "watermelon" is not aligned along the crossdown line (missed).

In FIG. 300(d), after the state shown in FIG. 300(c), the middle stop button 8C is operated at an appropriate timing, so that "watermelon" is stopped on the middle reel 3C and displayed on the crossdown line. It shows how "watermelons" are aligned along the line. As a result, a predetermined number of medals (for example, 8 medals) are paid out. In the above description, the "Aim for the BAR" effect image (the image suggesting the timing of the stop operation) is displayed on the main display device 210, but such an image may not be displayed. Further, when the "watermelon" is aligned, the above-described setting suggesting effect may be performed.

In the above example, when the predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning combination, the first stop lock occurs, whereas the predetermined combination (watermelon) is not determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, the lock at the first stop does not occur. FIG. 299(c) shows how the replay wins after the state shown in FIG. 299(a) when a combination (replay) different from the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, since the first stop lock does not occur, the operations of the left stop button 8L, the middle stop button 8C, and the right stop button 8R by the sliding stroke are the first stop operation and the second stop operation, respectively. It becomes effective as an operation and a third stop operation.

As a different mode from the above, FIG. 301(a) shows a state in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R start to rotate and all the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are rotating in one unit game. there is After that, the behavior of the reels 3 differs depending on whether or not the predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning combination. FIG. 301(b) and FIGS. 302(a)-(b) show a case where a predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, and FIG. 301(c) shows that the predetermined combination is A case where a different combination (replay) is determined as an internal winning combination is shown.

Specifically, in FIG. 301(b), when a predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning combination, after the state shown in FIG. 301(a), the left stop button 8L is pressed as the first stop operation. As a result of the operation, the rotation of the left reel 3L is stopped, and "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed in the upper area of the left reel 3L. Here, FIG. 301(b) shows a state in which the finger is slid up to the middle stop button 8C (the middle stop button 8C is operated) in the sliding hitting method, but the rotation of the middle reel 3C is stopped. not In this example, the middle stop lock is generated by operating the middle stop button 8C. The middle stop lock is a lock that occurs after the middle stop button 8C is operated. When the middle stop lock occurs, the player's operation (for example, the operation of the stop button 8) is disabled until a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed after the middle stop button 8C was operated.

The operation of the middle stop button 8C in the sliding stroke is effective as an operation for generating a middle stop lock, but is ineffective as an operation for stopping the middle reel 3C. In addition, in the sliding hitting method, the right stop button 8R is normally operated within a predetermined time (the time during which the player's operation is invalidated by the middle stop lock) after the middle stop button 8C is operated. , the operation of the right stop button 8R in the sliding hitting method is also invalid as an operation for stopping the right reel 3R.

FIG. 302(a) shows how the effect image "Aim for the BAR" described in the ninth embodiment is displayed on the main display device 210 after the state shown in FIG. 301(b). Here, similarly to the above, on the middle reel 3C, the symbol position corresponding to "watermelon" is close to the symbol position corresponding to "BAR" (within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols (4 symbols). I decided to. As a result, when the predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning combination, if the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is appropriate (for example, when "BAR" is displayed in the middle area, the middle stop button 8C is When the stop button 8C is operated), "watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the middle reel 3C. On the other hand, when the operation timing of the middle stop button 8C is not appropriate, the "watermelon" is not stop-displayed on the middle reel 3C. In the same manner as described above, when a predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as an internal winning combination, the left reel 3L and the right reel 3R operate regardless of the operation timing of the left stop button 8L to the right stop button 8R. "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed.

In FIG. 302(b), after the state shown in FIG. 302(a), the middle stop button 8C is operated at an appropriate timing (the right stop button 8R is operated at an arbitrary timing). "Watermelon" is stopped and displayed on the reel 3C and the right reel 3R, and the "watermelon" is aligned along the crossdown line. As a result, a predetermined number of medals (for example, 8 medals) are paid out. In the above description, the "Aim for the BAR" effect image (the image suggesting the timing of the stop operation) is displayed on the main display device 210, but such an image may not be displayed. Further, when the "watermelon" is aligned, the setting suggesting effect described above may be performed.

In the above example, when the predetermined combination (watermelon) is determined as the internal winning combination, the lock occurs at the time of intermediate stop, whereas when the predetermined combination (watermelon) is not determined as the internal winning combination. , no lock occurs during medium stop. FIG. 301(c) shows how the replay wins after the state shown in FIG. 301(a) when a combination (replay) different from the predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination. In this case, since no lock occurs during middle stop, the operations of the left stop button 8L, the middle stop button 8C, and the right stop button 8R by the sliding stroke are the first stop operation and the second stop operation, respectively. , and are effective as the third stop operation.

The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has been described above as one embodiment of the present invention.

<Appendix E>
Conventionally, there has been known a game machine capable of performing a setting suggesting effect capable of suggesting a set value at the end of the BB game state (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-245403).

In such a conventional gaming machine, the setting-suggestion effect is generated according to the appearance rate or the like set by the maker side, like other effects. On the other hand, if the pachinko parlor side can suggest the set value (the degree of advantage for the player) in an intended manner, it is considered useful in formulating a sales strategy for acquiring customers.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suggesting a degree of advantage according to the intention of the store.

In this respect, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment has the following features.

(E-1) Advantage setting means for enabling an administrator to set one of a plurality of types of advantages (set values) provided as advantages for a player;
Suggestion control means (sub CPU 201 that executes the processes of FIGS. 275 to 278) capable of executing suggestion control that can suggest the advantage set by the advantage setting means;
suggestion information setting means capable of setting suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for executing the suggestion control by the manager;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the administrator can set one of a plurality of types of advantages (set values) provided as the advantage for the player, and the set advantage can be set. Suggestive control that can suggest about (setpoint) can be executed. The administrator can set suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for executing the suggestion control. As a result, it is possible to set suggestive information (setting suggestion production type) according to the intention of the store after considering the sales strategy, etc., and suggest the advantage (set value) according to the intention It can be carried out.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been explained that it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set value when the setting suggestion effects I to V are generated. The setting suggesting effect may be an effect that occurs only when the value is equal to or greater than a predetermined set value (it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the predetermined set value), or the effect is likely to be equal to or greater than the predetermined set value. It may be a production that suggests. For example, the setting suggestion effect V is a effect that suggests with a predetermined probability (for example, 80%) that the setting value is setting 6 (when the effect appears, the probability that the setting value is setting 6 is 80%). In addition, the setting suggestion effect I is a effect that suggests with a predetermined probability (for example, 80%) that the setting value is 2 or more (when the effect appears, the setting value is 2 or more probability is 80%). In addition, as a setting suggesting effect, the setting value is determined to be an odd number (1, 3, or 5) (or suggests that the possibility is high), and the setting value is an even number (2, 4, Alternatively, an effect that confirms (or suggests that the possibility is high) that 6) may be adopted.

Also, in the tenth embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine. Pachinko machines also have a plurality of set values (six levels from "1" to "6") that are different from each other for various data related to the pachinko game. And it is possible to configure so that an operation (setting confirmation) for confirming the set value can be performed. For example, in a state where the power is not turned on, the setting change state may be entered by turning ON the setting key, pressing the backup clear switch, and turning ON the power switch. By pressing the setting switch in the setting change state, the setting value can be changed. Also, for example, in a state where the power is not turned on, the setting confirmation state may be entered by turning on the setting key and turning on the power switch without pressing the backup clear clear switch. . In the setting confirmation state, for example, information indicating the setting value is displayed on the performance display monitor, and the setting value can be confirmed. The setting change state and setting confirmation state are ended by turning off the setting key.

Suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set when the setting suggestion effect setting screen is displayed. The setting suggestion effect setting screen may be displayed when the setting confirmation operation is performed, or may be displayed when the setting change operation is performed. In order to perform setting confirmation operation or setting change operation, it is necessary to operate a power switch or setting key type switch (backup clear clear switch), and these switches are provided inside the cabinet G. Therefore, it can be said that the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set by opening the front door (upper door mechanism UD or lower door mechanism DD). Alternatively, in a pachinko game machine, a setting change switch may be provided on the back side (rear side) of the main body. Basically, people cannot enter the island, so in order to operate the back of the main unit (the setting change switch housed in the board case etc. arranged on the back), use the key to turn the frame. There is a need. Therefore, the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) may be set when the frame is rotated. In other words, the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be configured so that it can be set after the rotating opening/closing portion is opened. The rotating opening/closing part may be the front door of the pachislot machine, or the body frame (the part that can rotate with respect to the outer frame) of the pachinko game machine. In any case, it can be said that the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set when an operation unit that cannot be operated by the player is operated.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been described that the situation in which the menu screen is displayed may be a situation in which no game is being played or a situation in which a game is being played. “Situation in which a game is being played” refers to a state in which no game processing is being performed on the main control circuit side (that is, one game is finished and waiting for BET operation or start lever operation). . The game process is, for example, a process related to a game that is performed after a BET operation (start lever operation) is performed and before medals are paid out. "Situation in which a game is being played" may refer to a situation in which no demo screen is displayed on the display device. The demo screen is a screen that is shifted to when it is determined that a game is not being played (a customer is waiting). Conventionally known conditions can be appropriately adopted as conditions for transition to the demo screen. For example, in a pachislot machine, a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) has passed without betting after medals have been paid out, or a predetermined time has passed without the start lever being operated after automatic insertion due to replaying. elapses, the C/P button is operated and all the credited medals are paid out, and the power is turned on (until the BET is placed). can be mentioned. In the pachinko game machine, a predetermined period of time elapses without detection of a steering wheel operation after the pattern variation has stopped, and a predetermined period of time elapses with no prize winning at the starting port after the pattern variation has stopped. The conditions for transitioning to the demo screen can include conditions such as that there is no suspension and that the state in which the pattern is not changed continues for a predetermined period of time. It can also be said that the setting suggestion effect setting screen is a screen that is displayed when the game is not being played.

(E-2) The gaming machine of (E-1),
The suggestive information setting means can set the suggestive information for each of a plurality of periods (periods for set suggestion effect).
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, it is configured such that suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set for each of a plurality of periods (setting suggestion effect periods). As a result, it is possible to vary the mode of suggestion regarding the degree of advantage (set value) for each period (set suggestion production period), and plan a sales strategy etc. according to each period (set suggestion production period) It is possible to meet the needs of stores that

However, it is not essential to provide multiple periods (setting suggestion production period), and it is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) (one for all periods) regardless of such a period. can be configured to

(E-3) The gaming machine of (E-1) or (E-2),
The suggestive information setting means sets predetermined periods (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “period G”, “period H”, The suggestive information can be set for "period I" or "period J"),
The suggestion control means performs the suggestion control according to the suggestion information set for the predetermined period by the suggestion information setting means when a predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is satisfied during the predetermined period. is executable to
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, predetermined periods (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “period G” , “Period H”, “Period I”, or “Period J”) can be set with suggested information (set suggestion effect type), and predetermined periods (“Period A”, “Period B”, “Period C”, “Period D”, “Period E”, “Period F”, “Period G”, “Period H”, “Period I”, or “Period J”) under a predetermined condition (AT state end condition ) is satisfied, the predetermined period (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “period G”, “period H” , “Period I”, or “Period J”) is configured to be able to execute suggestion control according to suggestion information (set suggestion effect type) set. As a result, predetermined periods (“period A”, “period B”, “period C”, “period D”, “period E”, “period F”, “period G”, “period H”, “period I” , or "Period J"), when a predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is satisfied, the predetermined period ("Period A", "Period B", "Period C", "Period D", " It is possible to suggest the advantage (set value) in a manner corresponding to the period E", "period F", "period G", "period H", "period I", or "period J"). Yes, the predetermined period ("period A", "period B", "period C", "period D", "period E", "period F", "period G", "period H", "period I" , or "Period J") can meet the needs of stores trying to formulate sales strategies and the like.

In the tenth embodiment, an example in which the AT state termination condition is adopted as the predetermined condition has been described. The predetermined condition is not limited to this example, and any condition can be adopted as appropriate. Such conditions include, for example, a condition that a predetermined game state ends, a condition that a predetermined game state starts, a condition that a privilege is given to the player, and a predetermined winning combination. A condition that a winning combination is determined, a condition that a predetermined symbol combination is stop-displayed, and the like can be mentioned. As the predetermined game state, for example, it is possible to adopt a game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player. ART state), a jackpot game state in a pachinko game machine, a variable probability game state, a game state such as a reduced working hours game state, and the like. These conditions may be employed alone, or may be used in combination. When a plurality of conditions are used together, it may be configured such that suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set for each condition.

Further, when a plurality of types of predetermined game states are provided, the setting suggesting performance is performed when the condition regarding the first predetermined game state is satisfied, while the setting suggestion effect is performed when the condition regarding the second predetermined game state is satisfied. It may be configured so that the suggestive effect is not performed. If the setting suggestion effect is performed too frequently, the player will easily perceive the set value, but by adopting such a configuration, the frequency can be adjusted. The first predetermined game state and the second predetermined game state can be configured so that the degree of advantage for the player is different from each other. As the predetermined game state, the pseudo BB (big bonus) and pseudo RB (regular bonus) explained in the first embodiment can be employed respectively. The first predetermined game state may be more advantageous than the second predetermined game state, or conversely, the second predetermined game state may be more advantageous than the first predetermined game state. It may be advantageous.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, when a predetermined condition (end condition of AT state) is satisfied in one period (setting suggestion effect period), a predetermined condition (AT state It has been explained that the setting suggestion effect is performed only when the end condition of ) is satisfied for the first time. However, when a predetermined condition (end condition of AT state) is satisfied in one period (set suggestion effect period), a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied in that period (set suggestion effect period) Even if it is the second time or later, the setting suggestion effect may be performed. When a predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is satisfied a plurality of times, the probability of occurrence of each setting suggesting effect is made different depending on how many times the predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) is satisfied. may be In this case, the number of times that the predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is established may be counted for each period (period for set suggestive effect), or counted independently of the period (period for set suggestive effect). It may be assumed that

In addition, when a predetermined condition (end condition of the AT state) is established, a lottery (setting suggestion effect generation lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to generate a setting suggestion effect, and the setting suggestion effect generation lottery If the game is won, a setting suggesting effect may be performed. Further, when a predetermined condition (condition for ending the AT state) is satisfied, a lottery (specific image appearance lottery) for determining whether or not to display a specific character image (specific image) is performed, and the specific image is displayed. If the appearance lottery is won, the character image may be displayed. In this case, when the predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is established, the setting suggestion effect may not be performed. On the other hand, if a specific character image is displayed when a predetermined condition (condition for ending the AT state) is satisfied, the next time the predetermined condition (condition for ending the AT state) is satisfied, the character image is always set. A suggestion performance may be performed. The setting-suggestion effect may be performed based on set suggestion information (setting-suggestion effect type), or a predetermined setting-suggestion effect may be performed. Thus, when a specific character image is displayed, it is possible to give the player motivation to continue playing the game, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine. The display timing of the specific character image is not limited to when a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is satisfied, and the specific character image can be displayed at any timing. For example, the character image displayed in the setting suggesting effect described with reference to FIGS. 288 to 298 may be adopted as the specific character image, and the execution timing of the setting suggesting effect may be adopted as the display timing of the specific character image. good. In any case, when a specific character image is displayed, it is possible to configure such that the setting suggesting effect is always performed the next time a predetermined condition (condition for ending the AT state) is satisfied.

Note that the setting suggesting effect (display of the character images I to V) is performed only for a very short period of time (for example, within 3 seconds). The effect can be configured to be completed by the end of the unit game (the state in which the character images IV are displayed is immediately terminated and is not carried over to the next unit game). . Alternatively, the setting suggesting effect may end when the start lever is operated to start the next unit game.

(E-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-3),
A plurality of types of suggested information ("type A", "type B", and "type C") are provided as the suggested information,
The suggested information setting means can set one of the suggested information selected from among the plurality of types of suggested information.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, a plurality of types of suggestive information ("type A", "type B", and "type C") are provided as suggestive information (setting suggestive effect type). , one suggested information (set suggested effect type) selected from a plurality of types of suggested information ("type A", "type B", and "type C") can be set. . As a result, by selecting one suggestive information (setting suggestive effect type) from a plurality of types of suggestive information (“type A”, “type B”, and “type C”) provided in advance, suggestive information (setting suggestive effect type) can be set, and the operation for setting the suggestive information (setting suggestive effect type) by the administrator can be simplified.

(E-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-4),
Provided with a notification means (main display device 210) that can notify information,
The suggestion control means comprises notification control means capable of controlling notification of information by the notification means,
When the advantage set by the advantage setting means is the first advantage (setting 2) or an advantage that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage, as information that can be notified by the notification means. There is provided first information (character image I) that can be notified only to
When the suggested information set by the suggested information setting means is the first suggested information ("type A"), the notification control means sets the advantage set by the advantage setting means to the first suggested information. If the advantage or the advantage is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage, the notification of the first information by the notification means is controlled regardless of the advantage set by the advantage setting means. is possible,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, as information that can be notified by the notification means (main display device 210), the first advantage (setting 2) or the first advantage (setting 2) First information (character image I) that can be reported only when an advantage (set value) that is advantageous to the player is set is provided. Then, when the first suggestion information ("type A") is set as the suggestion information (set suggestion effect type), the first advantage (setting 2) or the first advantage (setting 2) When an advantage (set value) that is advantageous to the player is set, the notification of the first information (character image I) can be controlled regardless of the set advantage (set value). It is As a result, the first advantage (setting 2) or an advantage (set value) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set through the first information (character image I). Therefore, it is possible to meet the needs of stores that want to suggest the degree of advantage (set value) in this manner.

(E-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-5),
Provided with a notification means (main display device 210) that can notify information,
The suggestion control means comprises notification control means capable of controlling notification of information by the notification means,
As the plurality of types of advantages, at least a first advantage (setting 2) and a second advantage (setting 3) more advantageous to the player than the first advantage are provided,
As information that can be notified by the notification means, first information that cannot be notified when the advantage set by the advantage setting means is an advantage that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage. (character image I), and second information (character image I) that cannot be notified when the advantage set by the advantage setting means is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage. Multiple types of information are provided, including image II),
When the suggestive information set by the suggestive information setting means is second suggestive information ("type B"), the notification control means may set the advantage set by the advantage setting means to the first suggestive information. Advantage or, if the advantage is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage, one information selected from the plurality of types of information according to the advantage set by the advantage setting means. is controllable to be notified by the notification means,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is information that can be notified by the notification means (main display device 210). is set, the first information (character image I) that cannot be notified when is set, and the advantage (set value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage (setting 3) are set. A plurality of types of information are provided, including second information (character image II) that cannot be notified when the character is present. Then, when the second suggestion information ("type B") is set as the suggestion information (set suggestion effect type), the first advantage (setting 2) or the first advantage (setting 2) When an advantage (set value) that is advantageous to the player is set, one information selected from a plurality of types of information according to the set advantage (set value) is sent to the notification means (main display It is configured to be controllable so as to be notified by the device 210). As a result, for example, the first advantage (setting 2) or an advantage (set value) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set through the first information (character image I). Alternatively, the second advantage (setting 3) through the second information (character image II) or an advantage (setting It is possible to suggest that the value) is set, and it is possible to meet the needs of stores that want to suggest the degree of advantage (set value) in this manner.

(E-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-6),
Provided with a notification means (main display device 210) that can notify information,
The suggestion control means comprises notification control means capable of controlling notification of information by the notification means,
As the plurality of types of advantages, at least a first advantage (setting 2) and a second advantage (setting 3) more advantageous to the player than the first advantage are provided,
As information that can be notified by the notification means, first information that cannot be notified when the advantage set by the advantage setting means is an advantage that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage. (character image I), and second information (character image I) that cannot be notified when the advantage set by the advantage setting means is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage. Image II) is provided,
When the suggestive information set by the suggestive information setting means is third suggestive information ("type C"), the notification control means sets the advantage set by the advantage setting means to the first In the case of the advantage, it is possible to control the notification of the first information by the informing means, and in the case that the advantage set by the advantage setting means is the second advantage, the informing means capable of controlling reporting of the second information by
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the advantage (setting value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is information that can be notified by the notification means (main display device 210). is set, the first information (character image I) that cannot be reported, and the advantage (set value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second advantage (setting 3) are set. A second information (character image II) is provided which cannot be notified when the character is present. Then, in the case where the third suggestion information ("type C") is set as the suggestion information (set suggestion effect type), when the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first information (character image I) can be controlled, and when the second advantage (setting 3) is set, the notification of the second information (character image II) can be controlled. there is As a result, for example, when the second advantage (setting 3) is set, the suggestion is made through the second information (character image II) instead of the suggestion through the first information (character image I). It is possible to make (suggestion that is more advantageous to the player than the suggestion through the first information (character image I)), and the store that wants to suggest the advantage (set value) in such a manner can meet your needs.

In the above description, the setting 2 corresponds to the first advantage, but the first advantage may be any one of the settings 3 to 5. FIG. Also, in the above description, setting 3 corresponds to the second advantage level, but the second advantage level may be any one of settings 4 to 6. FIG. As long as the second advantage is an advantage (set value) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantage, the first advantage can be any advantage (set value) from settings 2 to 5 value) can be adopted, and any advantage (set value) among settings 3 to 6 can be adopted as the second advantage.

In the tenth embodiment, even when an advantage (set value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first suggestion is used as the suggestion information (set suggestion effect type). It has been described that any one of information (“type A”), second suggested information (“type B”), and third suggested information (“type C”) can be set. However, when an advantage (set value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first suggested information (“type A”) and the second suggested information (“type B”) and the third suggested information (“type C”) may not be set. For example, when an advantage (set value) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first advantage (setting 2) is set, the first suggested information (“Type A”) and the second suggested information (“ Type B") and the third suggested information ("Type C") may be configured so that they cannot be selected by the selection button.

In addition, in the tenth embodiment, as the suggestion information (setting suggestion rendering type), the first suggestion information (“type A”), the second suggestion information (“type B”), and the third suggestion information (“type C ”) is provided. Suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) is not limited to these examples, for example, suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for generating setting suggestion effect with high probability or setting suggestion effect Suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) or the like may be provided. On top of that, when the suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) for generating the setting suggestion production with a high probability is set, and the suggestion information for generating the setting suggestion production with a low probability (setting suggestion production type) is set, the winning probability of the above-described setting suggestion effect generation lottery can be configured to be different. In addition, when the suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) for generating the setting suggestion production with a high probability is set, the setting suggestion production is generated with a high probability, while the setting suggestion production is more than a relatively low setting value. A setting suggesting effect (for example, setting suggesting effect I) that confirms that is likely to occur, but a setting suggesting effect that confirms that the value is higher than a relatively high set value (for example, setting suggesting effect IV or setting suggesting effect V). may be configured so that it is difficult for In addition, when the suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) for generating the setting suggestion production with a low probability is set, the setting suggestion production is generated with a low probability, while the setting suggestion production is relatively high. Only the setting suggestion effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect III, the setting suggestion effect IV, or the setting suggestion effect V) that confirms that the value is equal to or greater than the set value is generated (the setting suggestion effect I and the setting suggestion effect II are not generated). may be configured.

Note that the notification by the notification means is not limited to the display of an image, and may be an output of sound, an output of light, or any combination thereof. That is, the notification means may be image display means (display device), sound output means (speaker), or light emission means.

(E-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-7),
The suggestive information setting means sets the suggestive information in a state in which one advantage is set by the advantage setting means, and then sets an advantage different from the one advantage by the advantage setting means. If it is possible to maintain the suggestive information,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, after setting the suggestive information (setting suggestion effect type) in a state in which one advantage (set value) is set, the one advantage (set value) is set. When a different advantage (set value) is set, the suggestion information (set suggestion effect type) can be maintained. As a result, even when the setting of the degree of advantage (set value) is changed, it is not necessary to set the suggestive information (setting suggestive effect type) again, and convenience for the administrator can be achieved.

(E-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-8),
The suggestive information setting means
A predetermined operation (operation of selecting a setting suggestion effect type) is repeatedly performed for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect period), whereby the suggestion information can be set for each setting target. 1 suggestion information setting means;
By performing a specific operation (an operation of inputting a password for setting suggestion effect setting or an operation of selecting from presets for setting suggestion effect setting), the suggestion information can be set for each of the plurality of setting targets. suggestive information setting means;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, a predetermined operation (operation of selecting a setting suggestion effect type) is repeatedly performed for each of a plurality of setting objects (setting suggestion effect period), thereby setting each setting. Suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set for the target (setting suggestion effect period), while specific operations (input operation for setting suggestion effect setting password and operation to select from preset for setting suggestion effect setting ) is performed, the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) can be set for each of a plurality of setting objects (setting suggestion effect period). As a result, it is possible to vary the mode of suggestion related to the degree of advantage (set value) for each setting target (setting suggestion production period), and the sales strategy etc. according to each setting target (setting suggestion production period) You can meet the needs of the store you are planning to plan. In addition, when setting suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect period), specific operations (setting suggestion effect setting password input operation and setting suggestion effect setting By performing the operation of selecting from the presets), it is possible to save the trouble of repeatedly performing the predetermined operation (operation of selecting the setting suggestion effect type), and convenience for the administrator can be achieved.

(E-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-9),
The suggestive information setting means
A predetermined operation (operation of selecting a setting suggestion effect type) is repeatedly performed for each of a plurality of setting targets (setting suggestion effect period), whereby the suggestion information can be set for each setting target. 1 suggestion information setting means;
When the suggestive information is set for each setting object by the first suggestive information setting means, suggestive information for each setting object indicating a correspondence relationship between each setting object and the suggestive information set for the setting object. setting target-by-setting suggestion information registration means capable of registering (preset for setting suggestion effect setting);
By performing an operation to select the suggested information for each setting object registered by the suggestive information for each setting object registered by the suggestive information for each setting object, for each of the plurality of setting objects, corresponding to the suggestive information for each setting object. a second suggested information setting means capable of setting the suggested information;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, by repeatedly performing a predetermined operation (operation of selecting a setting suggestion effect type) for each of a plurality of setting objects (setting suggestion effect period), each Suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) can be set for setting targets (setting suggestion production period), and in this way, suggestion information (setting suggestion production type) can be set for each setting target (setting suggestion production period) ) is set, the setting object that indicates the correspondence relationship between each setting object (setting suggestion effect period) and the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) set for the setting object (setting suggestion effect period) It is possible to register each suggestion information (preset for setting suggestion effect setting). Then, by performing an operation to select the setting target suggestion information registered in this way (setting suggestion effect setting preset), the setting target suggestion information is displayed for each of the plurality of setting targets. Suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) corresponding to (preset for setting suggestion effect setting) can be set. As a result, it is possible to vary the manner of suggesting the degree of advantage (set value) for each set target, and meet the needs of the store that is trying to formulate a sales strategy or the like according to each set target. In addition, once suggestive information (setting suggestion effect type) is set for each setting object, the setting object indicating the correspondence relationship between each setting object and the suggestive information (setting suggestion effect type) set for the setting object It is possible to register each suggestion information (preset for setting suggestion effect setting), and when setting suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for each setting object with the same correspondence next time, the registered setting It is only necessary to perform an operation to select the suggestion information for each object (preset for setting suggestion effect setting), which is convenient for the administrator.

(E-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (E-1) to (E-10),
Input encrypted information (setting suggestion effect setting password) obtained by encrypting suggestion information for each setting object indicating the correspondence between each of a plurality of setting objects (setting suggestion effect period) and the suggestion information for each setting object with possible input means,
The suggestive information setting means, when the encrypted information is input by the input means, for each of the plurality of setting objects, according to the per-setting-object suggestive information specified from the encrypted information. Suggestion information can be set,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, the correspondence relationship between each of the plurality of setting objects (setting suggestion effect period) and the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for each setting object (setting suggestion effect period) It is possible to enter encrypted information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) in which suggestion information for each setting object is encrypted, and when the encrypted information (password for setting suggestion effect setting) is entered, multiple settings Suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) corresponding to each setting target suggestion information specified from the encrypted information (setting suggestion effect setting password) can be set for each target (setting suggestion effect setting period). is configured as As a result, it is possible to vary the mode of suggestion related to the degree of advantage (set value) for each setting target (setting suggestion production period), and the sales strategy etc. according to each setting target (setting suggestion production period) You can meet the needs of the store you are planning to plan. In addition, it is possible to set suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) for each of multiple setting targets (setting suggestion effect period) just by entering encrypted information (setting suggestion effect setting password). Therefore, convenience for the administrator can be achieved.

In the tenth embodiment, it has been described that the encrypted information (setting suggestion effect setting password) can be input by operating the select button and the enter button. The method of inputting the encrypted information into the gaming machine is not limited to the method of inputting the password using operation means such as buttons and touch panels. For example, a camera may be provided in the gaming machine, and the two-dimensional code displayed on the mobile terminal as the encrypted information may be read by the camera. Alternatively, the management server may be configured to be able to transmit encrypted information to the game machine, or the mobile terminal can be configured to transmit encrypted information to the game machine through non-contact short-range communication (NFC communication) or the like. It may be configured as

Further, in the tenth embodiment, suggestion information for each setting object (preset for setting suggestion effect setting) indicating the correspondence relationship between each setting object (setting suggestion effect period) and suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) is encrypted. It has been explained that the encrypted information (setting suggestion effect setting password) can be output. The method of outputting the encrypted information is not limited to the method of displaying the password on the display device. For example, a two-dimensional code may be displayed on the display device as the encrypted information. In this case, as described above, it is desirable to provide the game machine with a camera and to allow the camera to read the two-dimensional code displayed on the mobile terminal as the encrypted information. As a result, when a two-dimensional code is displayed as encrypted information on one gaming machine, the two-dimensional code is imaged by the camera provided in the mobile terminal, and the two-dimensional code is sent to the mobile terminal. After being displayed, by reading the two-dimensional code with a camera provided in another gaming machine, the same suggestive information (setting suggestion effect type) can also be set in the other game machine.

In the above description, the setting suggestion effect period corresponds to the setting target, but the setting target is not limited to this example. It is possible to appropriately adopt the range to which the belongs. The variable may be the number of unit games played (for example, the number of games played after the power is turned on), or the number of times a predetermined condition (AT state end condition) is met (for example, the number of times AT ends). , it may be the number of unit games in which a predetermined condition is established, or it may be time. As a result, when a predetermined condition (end condition of the AT state) is established, a setting suggestion effect is performed according to the suggestion information (setting suggestion effect type) set for the range to which the variable belongs at that time. is possible. As described above, the predetermined conditions include, for example, a condition that a predetermined game state ends, a condition that a predetermined game state starts, a condition that a privilege is granted to the player, a predetermined It is possible to adopt a condition that a combination of ' is determined as an internal winning combination, a condition that a predetermined symbol combination is stopped and displayed, and the like. As the predetermined game state, for example, it is possible to adopt a game state (advantageous state) that is advantageous to the player. ART state), a jackpot game state in a pachinko game machine, a variable probability game state, a game state such as a reduced working hours game state, and the like.

When the above setting targets are adopted, for example, setting targets corresponding to early hours after opening in the morning (for example, "Period A" shown in FIG. 281, "AT end 1 time" shown in FIG. By setting "type C" for "10:00 to 11:00" shown in the table, it is possible to attract customers at the time. In the tenth embodiment, the number of unit games played or the number of times a predetermined condition (at end condition) is established as the variable is the number of unit games played after the power is turned on or the power is turned on. It has been explained that it is the number of times that a predetermined condition (AT state termination condition) has been met since then. However, as the above variables, the number of unit games played after the change in the advantage (set value) or the predetermined condition (AT state end condition) established after the change in the advantage (set value) You can use the number of times.

<Appendix F>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine provided with a main reel for notifying the result of a winning combination lottery and a sub-reel for effect (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-214050).

In such a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination is stop-displayed according to the mode of the player's stop operation, In some cases, the combination of symbols is not stopped and displayed.

In this regard, there are some players who perform a suitable stop operation without thinking about anything in particular. Otherwise, there is a possibility of missing the role. Therefore, it is desired that such a combination should not be missed even when the player performs an appropriate stop operation.

The present invention has been made in view of the above points, and even if the player performs an appropriate stop operation, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination that is likely to be missed is stopped and displayed. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can provide an opportunity to play.

In this respect, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the tenth embodiment, when a winning combination (watermelon) that may be missed is determined as an internal winning combination, the first stop lock to middle stop lock are executed. is configured as As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from missing the winning combination (watermelon) by an appropriate stop operation. It is possible to provide an opportunity to hit the spot.

[Eleventh embodiment]
The first to tenth embodiments have been described above. The eleventh embodiment will be described below. The basic configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment is the same as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments. In the following description, the same components as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the descriptions of the portions that the descriptions of the first to tenth embodiments are applicable to the eleventh embodiment will be omitted.

It should be noted that, in the above description, for example, "in the first embodiment, ~" or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ~", it seems to be limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Even if it is a simple description, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment within the scope of the eleventh embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, regarding the description limited to the pachi-slot machines 1 according to the second to tenth embodiments, the pachi-slot machines according to the eleventh embodiment are not deviated from the spirit of the eleventh embodiment. It can also be applied to machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to tenth embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the eleventh embodiment. can be used or combined.

Further, even if the shape is different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments, there are cases where the same reference numerals are given to the structures having the same functions for convenience. Further, even if the shape and processing are the same as those of the pachi-slot machines 1 according to the first to tenth embodiments, different symbols and step numbers may be given for convenience.

<Transition flow of game state>
FIG. 303(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the game state according to one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 303(b) is a table summarizing game state transition conditions according to one embodiment of the present invention.

As described in the first embodiment, in the pachislot machine 1, various game states can be provided as states in which the game is played in order to vary the degree of advantage of the player or to achieve the intended game characteristics. It's becoming In this embodiment, the game state as shown in FIG. 303(a) is managed by the main control circuit 100. FIG. As such game states, a bonus non-winning state, an inter-flag state, and a bonus state are provided.

The bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not won and the bonus is not activated (winning). The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, a state in which the bonus combination is won and the bonus is not activated. The bonus state is a state in which the bonus is activated. As described in the first embodiment, inter-flag states are sometimes referred to as carry-over states, (bonus) inter-flag states, (bonus) inter-flag states, and the like. When a bonus combination is won and a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed on the active line, it is possible to shift to the bonus state (activate the bonus state).

In this embodiment, a 2BB game state and a 3BB game state are provided as bonus states. "F_2BB" is provided as a bonus combination corresponding to the 2BB gaming state, and "F_3BB" is provided as a bonus combination corresponding to the 3BB gaming state (see FIGS. 306A to 306D). Further, as inter-flag states, an inter-2BB flag state and an inter-3BB flag state are provided.

The state between 2BB flags is configured as an RT state (RT1 gaming state). As described in the first embodiment, the RT state is a state in which the lottery mode of the replay combination can be varied with respect to the state in which the RT state is not activated (non-RT state). The bonus non-winning state and the state between 3BB flags are each configured as a non-RT state (RT0 gaming state).

Specifically, referring to FIGS. 303(a) and 303(b), when "F_3BB" is determined as an internal winning combination in a bonus non-winning state (internal winning), the main control circuit 100 , the game state is shifted from the bonus non-winning state to the state between 3BB flags (see transition condition (1)). In this case, the RT0 gaming state is maintained. On the other hand, when "F_2BB" is determined as an internal winning combination in the bonus non-winning state (internal winning), the main control circuit 100 changes from the bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state) to the state between 2BB flags (RT1 gaming state). ) (see transition condition (2)).

"F_2BB" (2BB) and "F_3BB" (3BB) are carryover hands (see FIG. 18). When 2BB is internally won, the state in which 2BB is internally won is carried over until the combination of symbols corresponding to 2BB ("C_2BB" shown in FIG. 306B) is stopped and displayed along the activated line (until 2BB wins). . The state between 2BB flags is a state in which the state in which 2BB is internally won is carried over. Similarly, when 3BB is internally won, 3BB is internally won until the combination of symbols corresponding to 3BB ("C_3BB" shown in FIG. 306B) is stopped along the active line (until 3BB wins). is carried over. The state between 3BB flags is a state in which the state in which 3BB is internally won is carried over.

In the state between 3BB flags, when the combination of symbols related to "C_3BB" is stop-displayed along the activated line (when 3BB wins), the main control circuit 100 changes from the state between 3BB flags to the 3BB game state. (Refer to transition condition (3)). Further, in the state between 2BB flags, when the combination of symbols related to "C_2BB" is stopped along the activated line (when 2BB wins), the main control circuit 100 changes from the state between 2BB flags to the 2BB game state. Transition the game state (see transition condition (4)).

When medals exceeding the specified number (21) are paid out in the 3BB game state, the main control circuit 100 shifts the game state from the 3BB game state to the bonus non-winning state (see transition condition (5)). Also, when the number of medals exceeding the prescribed number (one) is paid out in the 2BB game state, the main control circuit 100 shifts the game state from the 2BB game state to the bonus non-winning state (see transition condition (6)).

<Pattern arrangement table>
FIG. 304(a) is a diagram showing a symbol arrangement table.

The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 304(a) represents the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines correspondence relationships between the 20 symbol positions "0" to "19" and the symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

Symbol positions "0" to "19" indicate the positions of symbols arranged along the rotation direction on each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, and right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to symbol positions "0" to "19" can be identified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter. The types of patterns include "White 7", "Purple 7", "BAR", "Rip", "Bell A", "Bell B", "Watermelon", "Cherry", "Blank A", and " blank B' is included.

<Design code table>
FIG. 304(b) shows a symbol code table.

As shown in FIG. 304(b), each symbol placed on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is identified by a symbol code table, and in this embodiment, distinguished by 1-byte (8-bit) data. . The symbol code table shown in FIG. 304(b) represents symbol codes as data for specifying symbols arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C and 3R.

For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 304(a) has been described as representing the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table stored in the main ROM 102 represents the arrangement of symbol codes specifying the symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, middle reel 3C and right reel 3R.

In this embodiment, the symbols used in the pachi-slot machine 1 are, as described above, "white 7", "purple 7", "BAR", "lip", "bell A", "bell B", "watermelon", There are 10 types of "Cherry", "Blank A", and "Blank B". In the symbol code table, "white 7", "purple 7", "BAR", "lip", "bell A", "bell B", "watermelon", "cherry", "blank A", and "blank "1" to "10" are assigned as the symbol codes for each symbol of "B".

<Design combination table>
Figures 305A and 305B are diagrams showing symbol combination tables.

The symbol combination table defines the correspondence relationship between symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line and the number of medals to be paid out when the relevant symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the active line (the number of medals to be paid out). ing. As for symbol combinations, the symbols on the left reel 3L, the symbols on the middle reel 3C, and the symbols on the right reel 3R are shown in order from the left. The name assigned to each combination is also shown.

Regarding the number of medals to be paid out, the number of medals to be paid out in the case where a two-coin game is played (payout at the time of two-coin game) and the number of payouts in the case of a three-coin game (payout at three-coin game) are shown respectively. In this specification, a unit game performed by inserting one medal is called a single bet game, and a unit game performed by inserting two medals is called a double bet game. A unit game that is played by inserting one medal may be called a three-bet game. In this embodiment, the number of medals that can be inserted in each game state is set to two or three.

As the effective line, a pseudo line (middle-middle-upper) connecting the middle area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R is set. As described in the first embodiment, the activated line is activated when the required number of medals for the current game (the number of medals for which the game can be started) is betted.

The symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 305A and 305B includes symbol combinations ("combinations") identified by the storage area identification data represented by 13 bytes, and combinations on the effective line at the time of double or triple stake. Each payout number of medals in the case of being displayed is associated.

Some of the drawings collectively show a plurality of combinations. For example, "C_TB Lip B_01-02" is composed of two combinations of "C_TB Lip B_01" and "C_TB Lip B_02". The combination called "C_TB Lip B_01" corresponds to the symbol combination "Rip-Watermelon-Bell A", and the combination called "C_TB Lip B_02" corresponds to the symbol combination "Rip-Blank A-Bell A". Yes. When these combinations are displayed along the activated line, no medals are paid out, but replay is activated.

Similarly, "C_CB Lip A_01 to 08" is composed of eight combinations of "C_CB Lip A_01" to "C_TB Lip B_08". In the figure, for "C_CB Lip A_01 to 08", two types of symbols ("Bell A" and "Bell B") are defined as symbols on the left reel 3L, and one type of symbol is defined as a symbol on the middle reel 3C. (“bell B”) is defined, and four types of symbols (“white 7”, “purple 7”, “blank B”, and “cherry”) are defined as symbols on the right reel 3R. As a result, "C_CB Lip A_01-08" includes 2×1×4=8 combinations.

Further, when a combination of ``Rep-Bell B-Bell B'' called ``C_CD Bell A'' is displayed along the activated line, 11 medals are paid out in the two-bet game, and 3 medals are paid out. Eleven medals are paid out in the betting game as well. Also, when a combination of 'white 7-blank A-BAR' called 'C_2BB' is displayed along the activated line, the game state shifts to the 2BB game state, although no medals are paid out.

In the figure, "REP" indicates a combination that activates replay (replay) when a prize is won, "FRU" indicates a combination in which medals are paid out when a prize is won, and "BB" indicates a BB game state ( 2BB game state or 3BB game state) (see FIGS. 11 to 14), and "HZR" indicates other combinations (combinations in which medals are not paid out even if a prize is won).

<Combination table by flag>
306A to 306D are diagrams showing combination tables by flag.

The flag-by-flag combination table defines the correspondence relationship between various internal winning combinations and symbol combinations that can be stopped and displayed on the active line. Thus, when the internal winning combination is determined, the type of symbol combination that can be stopped and displayed on the active line (the type of winnable display combination) is uniquely determined.

Specifically, the flag-by-flag combination tables shown in FIGS. 306A to 306D show combinations permitted to be displayed on the active line corresponding to internal winning combinations. The internal winning combinations in this embodiment include "lost", "F_replay", "F_common B replay", "F_chance A", "F_chance B", "F_special combination A", and "F_special combination B". ”, “F_Special Role C”, “F_Special Role D”, “F_Watermelon”, “F_Weak Cherry”, “F_Strong Cherry”, “F_123 Bell A”, “F_123 Bell B”, “F_132 Bell A” , "F_132 Bell B", "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_312 Bell A1", "F_312 Bell A2", "F_312 Bell B1", " F_312 Bell B2", "F_321 Bell A1", "F_321 Bell A2", "F_321 Bell B1", "F_321 Bell B2", "F_JACA", "F_JACB", "F_3BB", and "F_2BB".

For example, when the internal winning combination is "F_3BB", it is permitted to display "C_3BB" on the activated line. Also, when the internal winning combination is "F_2BB", it is permitted to display "C_2BB" on the activated line. That is, when the internal winning combination is "F_2BB" or "F_3BB", it means that BB (2BB or 3BB) is internally winning.

Further, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay", "C_T Lip", "C_C Lip", "C_CU Lip_01-02", "C_CD Lip_01-12", and "C_B Lip_01-32" ” is allowed to be displayed on the active line. Further, when the internal winning combination is "F_123 Bell B", "T_Spill 1", "T_Spill 4_01-02", "T_Spill 5_01-02", "C_CD Bell A", "C_Medium Control 2_01" .

<Internal lottery table>
As the internal lottery table according to the present embodiment, the internal lottery table (see FIG. 307(a)) is referred to in a unit game performed by inserting two medals during a bonus non-winning state (RT0 gaming state). ), an internal lottery table (see FIG. 307(b)) referenced in a unit game performed by inserting three medals during a bonus non-winning state (RT0 game state), and a state between 3BB flags ( The internal lottery table (see FIG. 308(a)) referred to in the unit game performed by inserting two medals during the RT0 gaming state), and three medals during the 3BB flag interval state (RT0 gaming state). By inserting two medals during the internal lottery table (see FIG. 308 (b)) that is referenced in the unit game performed by inserting medals in the state between 2BB flags (RT1 game state) An internal lottery table (see FIG. 309(a)) that is referenced in the unit game that is performed, and is referenced in the unit game that is performed by inserting three medals during the state between 2BB flags (RT1 game state). An internal lottery table (see FIG. 309(b)) and an internal lottery table (see FIG. 309(c)) referenced in the BB game state (2BB game state and 3BB game state) are provided.

FIG. 307(a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a non-bonus winning state (double bet game). FIG. 307(b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for a bonus non-winning state (three bet game). FIG. 308(a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the state between 3BB flags (double bet game). FIG. 308(b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the state between 3BB flags (three bet game). FIG. 309(a) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the state between 2BB flags (double bet game). FIG. 309(b) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for the state between 2BB flags (three bet game). FIG. 309(c) is a diagram showing an internal lottery table for BB gaming state.

A plurality of internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 307 to 309 are stored in the main ROM 102 corresponding to each game state and each number of inserted numbers, and show the winning probability of each flag with the denominator set to 65536 for each setting 1 to 6. there is For example, in FIG. 307(a), "F_2BB" is specified as a winning combination, but "F_3BB" is not specified, and the lottery value "12000" is specified for "F_2BB". As a result, the probability that "F_2BB" is internally won is "12000/65536". In FIG. 307(b), "F_3BB" is specified as a winning combination, but "F_2BB" is not specified, and the lottery value "13877" is specified for setting 1 for "F_3BB". there is Thus, in the case of setting 1, the probability that "F_3BB" is internally won is "13877/65536".

In FIGS. 308(a) and (b), a lottery value is defined for a combination that overlaps with the internal winning "F_3BB". A duplicate winning combination is indicated in the table in the form of "F_3BB+ (duplicate winning combination)". In the state between the 3BB flags (two bet game and three bet game), the lottery value "0" is defined for "losing" because only "losing" is not won. Instead, "F_3BB" is defined as a combination when there is no double winning (when substantially "lost").

In FIGS. 309(a) and (b), a lottery value is defined for a combination that overlaps with "F_2BB" already won internally. A duplicate winning combination is indicated in the table in the form of "F_2BB+ (duplicate winning combination)". In the state between 2BB flags (double bet game), only "lose" is never won, so the lottery value "0" is defined for "lose". Furthermore, a lottery value of "0" is defined for a winning combination ("F_2BB") when a player actually "lost", and the winning combination is not won. In addition, in the state between 2BB flags (three bet game), only "lose" is not won, so the lottery value "0" is defined for "lose". Instead, "F_2BB" is defined as a combination when there is no double winning (substantially "lost").

<Correspondence between internal winning combination, stop operation mode, and number of medals to be paid out>
FIG. 310A is a diagram showing an example of a correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination, a stop operation mode, and the number of medals to be paid out in a bonus non-winning state and between 2BB flag states (three-bet game). FIG. 310B is a diagram showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals to be paid out in the state between 3BB flags (three-bet game).

In the first embodiment, when each internal winning combination is won, any combination of symbols (can also be referred to as display combination, winning combination, stop display mode, display result, etc.) is displayed according to the stop operation mode. (See FIG. 15). In this embodiment, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals to be paid out is configured as shown in FIGS. 310A and 310B.

FIG. 310A shows the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals to be paid out in a unit game performed by inserting three medals during the bonus non-winning state to the between-2BB flag state. FIG. 310B shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals to be paid out in a unit game performed by inserting three medals during the 3BB flag interval state.

In the drawing, "1→2→3" means that the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation. 3 shows a case (batting order 1) performed as a stop operation. In "1→3→2", the stop operation on the left reel 3L is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation on the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation on the middle reel 3C is the third stop operation. The case (batting order 2) is shown.

In "2→1→3", the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the right reel 3R is the third stop operation. The case (batting order 3) is shown. In "2→3→1", the stop operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the first stop operation, the stop operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the second stop operation, and the stop operation for the left reel 3L is the third stop operation. (batting order 4).

In "3→1→2", the stopping operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stopping operation, the stopping operation for the left reel 3L is performed as the second stopping operation, and the stopping operation for the middle reel 3C is the third stopping operation. (batting order 5). In "3→2→1", the stopping operation for the right reel 3R is performed as the first stopping operation, the stopping operation for the middle reel 3C is performed as the second stopping operation, and the stopping operation for the left reel 3L is the third stopping operation. (batting order 6).

For example, when "F_123 Bell B" is determined as an internal winning combination in a unit game played by inserting three medals during the state between 2BB flags, when the stop operation is performed with the batting order of 1, 11 If 1 medal is dispensed and the stop operation is performed in the batting order of 2, then 1 medal will be dispensed with a probability of 1/2, and if the stop operation is performed in the batting order of 3, 1 medal will be dispensed with a probability of 1/4. When medals are paid out and a stop operation is performed in the batting order of 4, one medal is paid out with a probability of 1/4, and when a stop operation is performed in the batting order of 5, one medal is paid out with a probability of 1/4. When the payout is performed and the stopping operation is performed in the batting order of 6, one medal is paid out with a probability of 1/4.

On the other hand, when "F_123 Bell B" is determined as an internal winning combination in a unit game played by inserting three medals during the 3BB flag state, a stop operation is performed with the batting order of 1. 11 medals are paid out, and if the stopping operation is performed in the batting order of 2, 11 medals are paid out, and if the stopping operation is performed in the batting order of 3, 1 medal is paid out with a probability of 1/4. When the stopping operation is performed in the 4th batting order, 1 medal is paid out with a probability of 1/4, and when the stopping operation is performed in the 5th batting order, 1 medal is paid out with a 1/4 probability, When the stop operation is performed in the batting order 6, one medal is paid out with a probability of 1/4.

"F_123 Bell A", "F_123 Bell B", "F_132 Bell A", "F_132 Bell B", "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B", "F_312" Bell A1", "F_312 Bell A2", "F_312 Bell B1", "F_312 Bell B2", "F_321 Bell A1", "F_321 Bell A2", "F_321 Bell B1", and "F_321 Bell B2" Depending on the order of stop operations (push order) for the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, different combinations of symbols stopped and displayed along the activated line are internal winning combinations (push order bells). When the pushing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination, if the pushing order is correct, 11 medals will be paid out.

In FIG. 310A, "same" means the three-coupling game during the bonus non-winning state to the state between the 2BB flags and the three-coupling game during the state between the 3BB flags. It shows that the corresponding relationship with the number of payouts is the same, and "change" means a three-coin game during the state between the bonus non-winning state and the state between the 2BB flags and a three-coin game during the state between the 3BB flags. , indicates that the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode, and the number of medals to be paid out is at least partially different.

For example, as described above, when "F_123 Bell B" is determined as an internal winning combination, a three-coupling game during the bonus non-winning state or the state between 2BB flags and a three-coupling game during the state between 3BB flags , the number of medals paid out when the stop operation is performed according to the batting order 2 is different. Therefore, in FIG. 310A, "F_123 Bell B" is displayed as "Change". "Change" is also displayed for the push order bells other than "F_123 Bell B". In the present embodiment, the pressing order of the correct answers in the pressing order bell is more in the state between 3BB flags than in the state between the bonus non-winning state and the state between 2BB flags.

<subflag>
FIG. 311(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence between internal winning combinations and sub-flag numbers. FIG. 311(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between subflag numbers and subflag names.

As described in the first embodiment, the sub-flag has a similar role (whether or not the winning combination is a lottery target, and the winning probability etc.) are grouped and the same information is assigned to them so that the group can be identified.

As shown in FIGS. 311(a) and (b), a sub-flag number "0" ("lost") is set for the internal winning combinations "lost", "F_JACA", and "F_JACB". . A sub-flag number “1” (“Rep”) is set for the internal winning combination “F_Replay”. A sub-flag number “2” (“common bell”) is set for the internal winning combination “F_Common B Lip”. A sub-flag number “3” (“chance A”) is set for the internal winning combination “F_chance A”. A sub-flag number “4” (“chance B”) is set for the internal winning combination “F_chance B”.

A sub-flag number "5" ("special role") is set for the internal winning combinations "F_special role A", "F_special role B", "F_special role C", and "F_special role D". It is A sub-flag number “6” (“Watermelon”) is set for the internal winning combination “F_Watermelon”. A sub-flag number “7” (“weak cherry”) is set for the internal winning combination “F_weak cherry”. A sub-flag number “8” (“strong cherry”) is set for the internal winning combination “F_strong cherry”.

Internal winning roles "F_123 Bell A", "F_123 Bell B", "F_132 Bell A", "F_132 Bell B", "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B" , "F_312 Bell A1", "F_312 Bell A2", "F_312 Bell B1", "F_312 Bell B2", "F_321 Bell A1", "F_321 Bell A2", "F_321 Bell B1", and "F_321 Bell B2" , a sub-flag number "9" ("push order bell") is set.

Thereby, when the internal winning combination is any one of "lost", "F_JACA", and "F_JACB", the sub-flag "lost" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_Replay", the sub-flag "Rep" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_Common B Lip", the sub-flag "Common Bell" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_Chance A", the sub-flag "Chance A" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_Chance B", the sub-flag "Chance B" is determined.

When the internal winning combination is any one of "F_special combination A", "F_special combination B", "F_special combination C", and "F_special combination D", the sub-flag "special combination" is It is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_Watermelon", the sub-flag number "Watermelon" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_weak cherry", the sub-flag "weak cherry" is determined. When the internal winning combination is "F_high cherry", the sub-flag "high cherry" is determined.

The internal winning roles are "F_123 Bell A", "F_123 Bell B", "F_132 Bell A", "F_132 Bell B", "F_213 Bell A", "F_213 Bell B", "F_231 Bell A", "F_231 Bell B" , "F_312 Bell A1", "F_312 Bell A2", "F_312 Bell B1", "F_312 Bell B2", "F_321 Bell A1", "F_321 Bell A2", "F_321 Bell B1", and "F_321 Bell B2 , the sub-flag "push order bell" is determined.

<Playability>
FIG. 312 is a diagram showing an example of a game state transition flow in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section according to one embodiment of the present invention.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, the main control circuit 100 manages the game state (ball output state) shown in FIG. 312 separately from the game state shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 312, the ball output state is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section.

As described in the first embodiment, the advantageous section is a game period in which the game state (AT state) in which the information of the stop operation that is advantageous for the player can be notified (see FIG. 5). As the advantageous section, a production section (advantageous section/normal game) and an increase section (advantageous section/AT state) are provided. The effect section is basically a game state (non-AT state) in which information about a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a non-advantageous game state that is disadvantageous to the player compared to the AT state. This is the same as the section, but differs from the non-advantageous section in that mode transitions are performed. The increase interval is AT state (game state advantageous to the player).

In the performance section, it is possible to control any one of normal mode, chance A mode, chance B mode, pseudo-bonus A mode, pseudo-bonus B mode, and pseudo-bonus C mode. The features of each mode are detailed below.

In this specification, the state of the advantageous section and normal mode is referred to as the advantageous section (normal mode), and the state of the advantageous section and the chance A mode is referred to as the advantageous section (chance A mode). A state of chance B mode is referred to as an advantageous section (chance B mode), and a state of advantageous section and pseudo bonus A mode is referred to as advantageous section (pseudo bonus A mode), which is an advantageous section and pseudo bonus B mode. The state may be referred to as an advantageous section (pseudo bonus B mode), and the state of the advantageous section and the pseudo bonus C mode may be referred to as an advantageous section (pseudo bonus C mode).

<Processing when starting a game for a non-advantageous section>
FIG. 313 is a flow chart showing the non-advantageous section game start time processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 314 is a diagram showing an initial bonus winning rate lottery table. FIG. 315 is a diagram showing an advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag set lottery table. FIG. 316 is a diagram showing a chance B continuation rate lottery table.

The non-advantageous interval game start time processing shown in FIG. 313 is the processing (game start time) of step S6 of FIG. 27 (for example, when the determination result of step S85 in FIG. 27 is "YES"). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current game interval is a non-advantageous interval by referring to the game interval flag storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 .

In the non-advantageous interval game start time processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is a predetermined combination (“lost” or “F_replay”) (step S2001). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination process (see step S64 in FIG. 26) is either "miss" or "F_replay" (see FIGS. 307 to 309). Determine whether or not When determining that the internal winning combination is neither "lost" nor "F_replay", the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the internal winning combination is either "lost" or "F_replay", the main CPU 101 executes advantageous section transition processing (step S2002). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets an advantageous section as a game section by updating a game section flag storage area (not shown) (see step S88 in FIG. 27). Also, the main CPU 101 sets the number of ceiling games to "851 games". As in the first embodiment, when the number of unit games played in the normal mode of the advantageous section (ceiling counter value) reaches the number of ceiling games, a pseudo-bonus (pseudo-bonus A mode, pseudo-bonus B mode , and pseudo-bonus C mode).

Next, the main CPU 101 executes an initial bonus winning rate lottery process (step S2003). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the initial bonus winning rate lottery table (see FIG. 314), performs a lottery based on the sub-flags (see FIG. 311) and random numbers, and sets the bonus winning rate to "low", Either "medium" or "high" is determined.

In the initial bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIGS. 314(a) to (f), sub-flags (“loss”, “rep”, “common bell”, “chance A”, “chance B”, “special role , "watermelon", "weak cherry", "strong cherry" and "push order bell"), the lottery value corresponding to the bonus winning rate ("low", "medium" and "high") is stipulated. In the figure, "low bonus winning rate" indicates that the bonus winning rate is "low", "medium bonus winning rate" indicates that the bonus winning rate is "medium", and "high bonus winning rate" indicates that the bonus winning rate is "medium". ” indicates that the bonus winning rate is “high”. The probability of each bonus winning rate being determined can be represented by the "lottery value specified for the bonus winning rate/the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". .

An initial bonus winning rate lottery table is provided for each of the settings 1-6. When the setting value is setting 1, the initial bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. 314(a) is referenced, and when the setting value is setting 2, the initial bonus winning rate shown in FIG. The lottery table is referred to, and when the setting value is setting 3, the initial bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. 314(c) is referred, and when the setting value is setting 4, FIG. 314(e) is referenced, and if the setting value is 5, the initial bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. , the initial bonus winning rate lottery table shown in FIG. 314(f) is referred to.

For example, if the set value is set to 1 and the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is “rep”, then the bonus winning rate is “low” with a probability of 102/256. ' is determined, 'Medium' is determined with a probability of 102/256, and 'High' is determined with a probability of 52/256.

After executing the process of step S2003, the main CPU 101 executes the number-of-games-elapsed-games determination flag set lottery process for the advantageous interval (step S2004). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the advantageous interval elapsed game number determination flag set lottery table (see FIG. 315) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine “win” or “no win”.

In the advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag set lottery table shown in FIG. ”), a lottery value corresponding to the result of the advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag set lottery (“non-winning” and “winning”) is defined. Advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag set The probability that each result of the lottery will be decided is "lottery value specified for the result / number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256) can be represented by For example, when the set value is set to 1, there is a probability of 183/256 that the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag set lottery is won. Advantageous Section Elapsed Game Number Determination Flag Set If the lottery is won, the main CPU 101 sets the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag to ON. The number-of-games-in-advantage-interval determination flag is set to OFF when the number of unit games played in the advantage interval reaches 100 times.

After executing the process of step S2004, the main CPU 101 executes the chance B continuation rate lottery process (step S2005). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance B continuation rate lottery table (see FIG. 316) and performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine the chance B continuation rate as "40%", "50%", One of "60%", "70%", "80%", "90%" and "100%" is determined.

In the chance B continuation rate lottery table shown in FIGS. For each "setting 6"), the chance B continuation rate ("40%", "50%", "60%", "70%", "80%", "90%", and "100%") A lottery value corresponding to is specified. The probability that each Chance B continuation rate is determined shall be represented by "the lottery value specified for the Chance B continuation rate/the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can be done.

The chance B continuation rate lottery table is provided for each bonus winning rate (“low”, “middle”, and “high”). When the bonus winning rate is "low", the chance B continuation rate lottery table shown in FIG. 316(a) is referred to, and when the bonus winning rate is "medium", the table shown in FIG. The chance B continuation rate lottery table is referenced, and when the bonus winning rate is "high", the chance B continuation rate lottery table shown in FIG. 316(c) is referenced.

For example, when the bonus winning rate determined by the initial bonus winning rate lottery process (see step S2003) is "low" and the set value is 1, the chance B continuation rate is 80/256. "50%" determined, "60%" determined with a probability of 73/256, "70%" determined with a probability of 70/256, "80%" determined with a probability of 32/256, "90%" is determined with a probability of 1/256.

After executing the process of step S2005, the main CPU 101 executes various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode) (step S2006). Various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S2005, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Process at start of game for advantageous section (normal mode)>
FIG. 317 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section (normal mode) game start processing performed in the main control circuit.

The advantageous section (normal mode) game start time processing shown in FIG. 317 is executed by the main control circuit 100 as shown in FIG. ) in step S6 (game start state control process). The main CPU 101 refers to the game interval flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103 to determine that the current game interval and mode are the advantageous interval and the normal mode, respectively. can recognize.

In the advantageous section (normal mode) game start processing, first, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the ceiling counter (step S2021). The ceiling counter value indicates the number of unit games played in the advantageous section (normal mode), and is stored in the main RAM 103 . The value of the ceiling counter is incremented only in the advantageous section (normal mode), and is cleared when the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is the number of ceiling games (851) (step S2022). When determining that the value of the ceiling counter is the number of ceiling games (851), the main CPU 101 executes ceiling reaching processing (step S2023). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds "2" to the value of the bonus winning information. The value of bonus winning information corresponds to the type of pseudo bonus and is stored in the main RAM 103 . Specifically, the bonus winning information "1" corresponds to the pseudo-bonus A mode, the bonus winning information "2" corresponds to the pseudo-bonus B mode, and the bonus winning information "3" corresponds to the pseudo-bonus mode. Compatible with C mode.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the bonus book precursor game number counter to "2". The value of the bonus book precursor game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games in which the bonus book precursor effect is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103 . The main bonus premonition effect is a effect suggesting a transition to a pseudo bonus, and is an effect performed when the pseudo bonus is won (when the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more). When the bonus sign effect ends (when the value of the bonus sign game number counter becomes "0"), a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode).

Even when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the number of ceiling games (851), if the precursor effect (bonus main precursor effect, bonus fake precursor effect, or chance A precursor effect) is being executed (bonus When the value of the main precursor game number counter, the bonus fake precursor game number counter, or the chance A precursor game number counter is greater than 0), when the precursor effect is completed (when the value of the counter becomes 0) ), the ceiling reaching process may be executed. The portent effect will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S2022 that the value of the ceiling counter is not the number of ceiling games (851), or after executing the process of step S2023, the main CPU 101 executes various lottery processes for the advantageous section (normal mode) ( step S2024). Various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S2024, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Character-related lottery processing>
FIG. 318 is a flow chart showing character-related lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 319 is a diagram showing a character determination lottery table. FIG. 320 shows a character high-probability game number lottery table.

Character-related lottery processing shown in FIG. 26 (internal lottery processing) in the main control circuit 100 (sub-flag etc. setting processing). processing. The main CPU 101 can recognize the current game interval and mode by referring to the game interval flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103 .

In the character-related lottery process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the character high-probability game number counter (see step S2049) is greater than 0 (step S2041). The value of the character high-probability game number counter indicates the number of remaining unit games played with a character (one of character A, character B, character C, and character D) being set, and is stored in the main RAM 103. remembered.

The pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a decoration unit A, a decoration unit B, a decoration unit C, and a decoration unit D (not shown). These decoration units are provided with a lens member having translucency. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 is provided with a decoration unit A irradiation LED, a decoration unit B irradiation LED, a decoration unit C irradiation LED, and a decoration unit D irradiation LED. Decoration unit A illumination LED, decoration unit B illumination LED, decoration unit C illumination LED, and decoration unit D illumination LED are decoration unit A, decoration unit B, decoration unit C, and decoration unit D, respectively. are arranged so that they can irradiate Thus, it is possible to light the decorative unit A, the decorative unit B, the decorative unit C, and the decorative unit D individually.

Specifically, when the character A is set, the sub-control circuit 200 causes the illumination LED for the decoration unit A to emit light, and the decoration unit A lights up. In the state where the character B is set, the sub-control circuit 200 causes the illumination LED for the decoration unit B to emit light, and the decoration unit B lights up. In the state where the character C is set, the sub-control circuit 200 causes the illumination LED for the decoration unit C to emit light, and the decoration unit C lights up. When the character D is set, the sub-control circuit 200 causes the illumination LED for the decoration unit D to emit light, and the decoration unit D lights up.

When determining that the value of the character high-probability game number counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the character high-probability game number counter (step S2042). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the character high-probability game number counter is 0 (step S2043). When determining that the value of the character high-probability game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 clears the set character (step S2044).

If it is determined in step S2041 that the value of the character high-probability game number counter is 0, if it is determined that the value of the character high-probability game number counter is not 0 in step S2043, or after executing the processing of step S2044 , the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a character is set (step S2045). When determining that the character has been set, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that no character has been set, the main CPU 101 determines whether the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "special role" (see FIG. 311). It judges (step S2046). When determining that the sub-flag is not the "special combination", the main CPU 101 terminates this sub-routine.

On the other hand, when determining that the sub-flag is "special role", the main CPU 101 executes a character determination lottery (step S2047). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the character determination lottery table (see FIG. 319) and performs a lottery based on a random number value. One of character B", "character C", and "character D" is determined.

In the character determination lottery table shown in FIG. 319, character Lottery values corresponding to the determined lottery results (“non-winning”, “character A”, “character B”, “character C”, and “character D”) are defined. The probability that each result of the character determination lottery will be determined can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". .

The character determination lottery includes a non-advantageous section, an advantageous section (normal mode), an advantageous section (chance A mode), an advantageous section (chance B mode), an advantageous section (pseudo bonus A mode), and an advantageous section (pseudo bonus B mode). ). When the advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag (see step S2004 in FIG. 313) is set to ON, the character determination lottery table shown in FIG. 319(a) is referred to in the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section (normal mode), and the advantageous section (chance A mode), and the advantageous section (chance B mode), advantageous section (pseudo-bonus A mode), and advantageous section (pseudo-bonus B mode) refer to the character determination lottery table shown in FIG. 319(c).

For example, when the set value is set to 1, in the advantageous section (normal mode) in which the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is not set to ON, as a result of the character determination lottery, there is a probability of 169/256 "non-winning ” is determined, “Character A” is determined with a probability of 36/256, “Character B” is determined with a probability of 32/256, “Character C” is determined with a probability of 18/256, and “Character C” is determined with a probability of 1/256. "Character D" is determined with a probability of

Although not shown, the character determination lottery was won in the character-related lottery process executed in one unit game (the results of the character determination lottery are "Character A", "Character B", "Character C", and "Character A", "Character B", "Character C", and " character D"), the character corresponding to the result is set in the character-related lottery process executed in the next unit game (before the process of step S2041 is performed). As a result, any one of the decoration unit A, the decoration unit B, the decoration unit C, and the decoration unit D will light up in the next unit game.

After executing the process of step S2047, the main CPU 101 wins the character determination lottery (the result of the character determination lottery is one of "Character A", "Character B", "Character C", and "Character D"). It is judged whether it is either) (step S2048). When determining that the character selection lottery has not been won (the result of the character selection lottery is "non-winning"), the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the character determination lottery has been won (the result of the character determination lottery is any of "character A", "character B", "character C", and "character D"), the main The CPU 101 executes character high probability game number lottery (step S2049). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the character high-probability game number lottery table (see FIG. 320), performs a lottery based on random numbers, and selects "3", "5", One of "10", "15" and "20" is determined.

In the character high-probability game number lottery table shown in FIG. , advantageous section (pseudo-bonus A mode), and advantageous section (pseudo-bonus B mode)", the number of character high-precision games ("3", "5", "10", "15", and "20 ”), and the probability of determining the number of high-probability games for each character is defined as “the lottery value specified for the number of high-probability games for that character / all possible extractions number of random numbers (random number denominator: 256)".

For example, in the advantageous section (normal mode), as the number of character high-probability games, "5" is determined with a probability of 153/256, "10" is determined with a probability of 85/256, and "10" is determined with a probability of 16/256. "15" is determined, and "20" is determined with a probability of 2/256. The main CPU 101 sets the character high-probability game number thus determined in the character high-probability game number counter. After executing the process of step S2049, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode)>
FIG. 321 is a flow chart showing various lottery processes for advantageous sections (normal mode) performed in the main control circuit.

Various lottery processes for the advantageous section (normal mode) shown in FIG. This is the process performed in step S2024 of the game start process).

In various lottery processes for the advantageous section (normal mode), first, the main CPU 101 executes bonus lottery process (step S2061). The bonus lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of step S2061, the main CPU 101 executes the bonus promotion lottery process (step S2062). The bonus promotion lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of step S2062, the main CPU 101 executes the chance A lottery process (step S2063). The chance A lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of step S2063, the main CPU 101 executes a precursor game number lottery process (step S2064). The predictive game number lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of step S2064, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Bonus lottery process>
FIG. 322 is a flow chart showing bonus lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 323 shows a bonus lottery table. FIG. 324(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between sub-flags and ball-out flag group (normal) numbers for each character. FIG. 324(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the payout flag group (normal) number and the payout flag group (normal).

The bonus lottery process shown in FIG. 322 is the process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S2061 of FIG.

In the bonus lottery process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling counter (see step S2021 in FIG. 317) is smaller than the number of ceiling games (851) (step S2081). When determining that the value of the ceiling counter is not smaller than the number of ceiling games (851), the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the value of the ceiling counter is smaller than the number of ceiling games (851), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2023 in FIG. 317) is "0". (Step S2082). When determining that the value of the bonus winning information is not "0", the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the value of the bonus lottery information is "0", the main CPU 101 executes a bonus lottery (step S2083). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the bonus lottery table (see FIG. 323) and conducts a lottery based on the ball output flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and a random number value. Any one of "non-winning", "bonus winning information +1", "bonus winning information +2", "bonus winning information +3", and "bonus fake" is determined.

In the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 323, the ball output flag group (normal) (“other than right”, “rare LV1”, “rare LV2”, “rare LV3”, “rare LV4”, “rare LV5”, and Lottery corresponding to bonus lottery results (“non-winning”, “bonus winning information +1”, “bonus winning information +2”, “bonus winning information +3”, and “bonus fake”) for each “rare LV6”) A value is specified. The probability that each result of the bonus lottery will be determined can be represented by "the lottery value defined for the result/the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)".

The bonus lottery table contains bonus winning percentages (“low”, “medium”, and “high”) (see step S2003 in FIG. 313) and an advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag (see step S2004 in FIG. 313). It is provided for each of the presence and absence. When the advantageous interval elapsed game number determination flag is set to ON, the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. When the winning rate is "low", the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 323(a) is referenced, and when the bonus winning rate is "medium", the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 323(b) is referred to. When the bonus lottery rate is "high", the bonus lottery table shown in FIG. 323(c) is referenced.

In FIG. 324, sub-flags (see step S2047 in FIG. 318) are set for each presence/absence and type of characters (“none”, “character A”, “character B”, “character C”, and “character D”) (see step S2047 in FIG. 318). 311) is defined. "None" indicates that no character is set, "Character A" indicates that character A is set, "Character B" indicates that character B is set, and " "Character C" indicates that Character C is set, and "Character D" indicates that Character D is set. The main CPU 101 converts the sub-flags into the ball-out flag group (normal) based on the presence/absence and type of characters and the correspondence relationship shown in FIG.

For example, in a state where character A is set, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "rep", the ball output flag group (normal) is "rare LV3 ” is determined. At this time, if the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is not set to ON and the bonus winning rate is "high", the result of the bonus lottery is "non-winning" with a probability of 240/256. "Bonus winning information +1" is determined with a probability of 8/256, "Bonus winning information +2" is determined with a probability of 7/256, and "Bonus winning information +3" is determined with a probability of 1/256. .

Further, for example, in a state where character D is set, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "special role", the ball output flag group (normal) "Rare LV5" is determined. At this time, if the advantageous section elapsed game count determination flag is not set to ON and the bonus winning rate is "low", "bonus winning information +1" is given at a probability of 37/256 as a result of the bonus lottery. is determined, "bonus winning information +2" is determined with a probability of 36/256, "bonus winning information +3" is determined with a probability of 1/256, and "bonus fake" is determined with a probability of 182/256. .

As a result of the bonus lottery, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information when "bonus winning information +1" is determined, and when "bonus winning information +2" is determined, the bonus winning information When "bonus winning information + 3" is determined, "3" is added to the value of the bonus winning information. Here, since the upper limit of the value of the bonus winning information is "3", the main CPU 101 adds "3" to the value of the bonus winning information when the value of the bonus winning information after addition exceeds "3". set. When the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more, it indicates that the pseudo bonus has been won, and in this case, as described above, the actual bonus premonition effect is performed.

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the bonus fake flag to ON when "bonus fake" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery. The bonus fake flag is a flag indicating that a "bonus fake" has been determined (a bonus fake has been won) as a result of the bonus lottery. When the bonus fake is won, a bonus fake precursor effect is performed. The bonus fake foreshadowing effect is an effect suggesting transition to a pseudo bonus, and is an effect (so-called false effect) performed when the pseudo bonus is not won. Even if the bonus fake portent effect ends, the pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode) is not entered.

After executing the process of step S2083, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Bonus promotion lottery process>
FIG. 325 is a flow chart showing bonus promotion lottery processing performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 326 shows a bonus promotion lottery table.

The bonus promotion lottery process shown in FIG. 325 is the process performed in the main control circuit 100 at step S2062 of FIG. Incidentally, when the bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is performed in one unit game and the value of the bonus lottery information becomes 1 or more, the bonus promotion lottery process is not performed in the unit game, The bonus promotion lottery process may be performed from the next unit game.

In the bonus promotion lottery process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is greater than "0" (step S2101). When determining that the value of the bonus winning information is "0", the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the value of the bonus winning information is greater than "0" (is equal to or greater than 1), the main CPU 101 executes a bonus promotion lottery (step S2102). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the bonus promotion lottery table (see FIG. 326) and conducts a lottery based on the ball output flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and a random number value to obtain the bonus promotion lottery result. , any one of "non-winning", "bonus winning information +1", and "bonus winning information +2" is determined.

In the bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIG. , “rare LV6”), a lottery value corresponding to the bonus promotion lottery results (“non-winning”, “bonus winning information +1”, and “bonus winning information +2”) is defined. The probability that each result of the bonus promotion lottery will be determined can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". .

The bonus promotion lottery table is provided for each of the cases where the current bonus winning information is "1" and the current bonus winning information is "2" or more. When the current bonus winning information is "1", the bonus promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 326(a) is referred to. ) is referenced.

For example, if the current bonus winning information is “1” and the ball output flag group (normal) is “rare LV5”, as a result of the bonus promotion lottery, “non-winning” is selected with a probability of 171/256. "Bonus winning information +1" is determined with a probability of 84/256, and "Bonus winning information +2" is determined with a probability of 1/256.

As a result of the bonus lottery, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information when "bonus winning information +1" is determined, and when "bonus winning information +2" is determined, the bonus winning information Add "2" to the value of As described above, the upper limit value of the value of the bonus winning information is "3". ” is set.

After executing the process of step S2102, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Chance A lottery process>
FIG. 327 is a flow chart showing a chance A lottery process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 328 shows a setting-specific chance A lottery table. FIG. 329 is a diagram showing a chance A lottery table.

Chance A lottery processing shown in FIG. 327 is processing performed in main control circuit 100 in step S2063 of FIG.

In the chance A lottery process, first, the main CPU 101 executes the setting-specific chance A lottery (step S2121). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the setting-specific chance A lottery table (see FIG. 328) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine "winning" or "non-winning".

In the setting-specific chance A lottery table shown in FIG. , the lottery values corresponding to the results of the setting-specific chance A lottery (“non-winning” and “winning”) are defined. The probability that each result of Chance A lottery by setting will be determined is expressed by "lottery value specified for the result / number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can be done.

The setting-specific chance A lottery table is provided for each presence or absence of the advantageous interval elapsed game number determination flag (see step S2004 in FIG. 313). If the advantageous interval elapsed game number determination flag is not set to ON, the setting-specific chance A lottery table shown in FIG. , the setting-specific chance A lottery table shown in FIG. 328(b) is referred to. For example, if the setting value is set to 1 when the advantageous interval elapsed game number determination flag is not set to ON, the setting-specific chance A lottery is won with a probability of 194/256.

After executing the process of step S2121, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting-specific chance A lottery is won (step S2122). When determining that the setting-specific chance A lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the setting-specific chance A lottery is won, the main CPU 101 executes the chance A lottery (step S2123). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance A lottery table (see FIG. 329) and performs a lottery based on the ball output flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and the random number value to obtain the result of the chance A lottery. , any one of "non-winning", "chance A winning information +1", and "chance A winning information +2" is determined.

In the Chance A lottery table shown in FIG. , “rare LV6”), the lottery values corresponding to the results of the chance A lottery (“non-winning”, “chance A winning information +1”, and “chance A winning information +2”) are defined. The probability that each result of the Chance A lottery will be determined can be represented by "the lottery value specified for the result/the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". .

The chance A lottery table is provided for each of the cases where the current chance A winning information is "0" and the current chance A winning information is "1" or more. When the current chance A winning information is "0", the chance A lottery table shown in FIG. 328(a) is referred to. A chance A lottery table shown in (b) is referred to.

For example, when the chance A winning information is "0" and the ball output flag group (normal) is "rare LV3", "non-winning" is determined with a probability of 89/256 as a result of the chance A lottery. Then, "chance A winning information +1" is determined with a probability of 163/256, and "chance A winning information +2" is determined with a probability of 4/256.

When "chance A winning information +1" is determined as a result of the chance A lottery, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the chance A winning information, and when "chance A winning information +2" is determined. , "2" is added to the value of the bonus winning information. Here, since the upper limit of the value of chance A winning information is "2", the main CPU 101 sets the value of chance A winning information to "2" when the value of chance A winning information after addition exceeds "2". 2” is set. If the value of the chance A winning information is 1 or more, it indicates that the chance A has been won, and in this case, the chance A precursor effect is performed. The chance A precursor effect is a effect suggesting a transition to the chance A mode. When the chance A portent effect is completed, the mode is shifted to the chance A mode.

After executing the process of step S2123, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Lottery processing for the number of omen games>
FIG. 330 is a flow chart showing the number-of-prediction-games lottery process performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 331 is a diagram showing a precursor game number lottery table.

The predictive game number lottery process shown in FIG. 330 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S2064 of FIG.

In the portent game number lottery process, first, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the portent game number counter (bonus main portent game number counter, bonus fake portent game number counter, and chance A portental game number counter) (see step S2145) to 0. (step S2141). When it is determined that at least one of the values of the bonus precursor game number counter, the bonus fake precursor game number counter, and the chance A precursor game number counter is not 0, that is, the precursor effect (bonus precursor effect, bonus If the fake portent effect or the chance A portent effect) is being performed, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the values of the bonus main precursor game number counter, the bonus fake precursor game number counter, and the chance A precursor game number counter are all 0, that is, the precursor effect (bonus main precursor effect, bonus fake precursor effect) is determined. If the effect and the chance A precursor effect) are not being performed, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is 1 or more (step S2142).

When determining that the value of the bonus winning information is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bonus fake flag (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is set to ON (step S2143). When determining that the bonus fake flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the chance A winning information (see step S2123 in FIG. 327) is 1 or more (step S2144). When determining that the value of the chance A winning information is less than 1 (0), the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined that the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more in step S2142, if it is determined that the bonus fake flag is set to ON in step S2143, or if the value of the chance A winning information is 1 or more in step S2144 If it is determined that this is the case, that is, if the pseudo bonus, bonus fake, or chance A is won in the current unit game, the main CPU 101 executes the number-of-prediction-game lottery (step S2145).

In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the precursor game number lottery table (see FIG. 331), performs a lottery based on a random number value, and obtains "3," "4," and "12" as the number of precursor basic games. , "15", "26", "29" and "32". Then, the main CPU 101 separately performs a lottery based on a random number value to determine any value from 0 to 2 as the number of games to be added. Then, the main CPU 101 determines the sum of the number of precursory basic games and the number of addition games as the number of precursory games.

In the number-of-prediction-games lottery table shown in FIG. A lottery value corresponding to the number of precursor basic games (“3”, “4”, “12”, “15”, “26”, “29”, and “32”) is defined for each winning time”). ing. The probability of each number of basic precursor games being determined shall be expressed by "the lottery value specified for the number of basic precursor games / the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can be done.

In the figure, "Bonus Fake" indicates that the precursor game number lottery is performed based on the fact that the bonus fake flag is set on (the bonus fake is won), and in this case, the number of precursor games determined is set in the bonus fake precursor game number counter. The value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games in which the bonus fake precursor effect is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103 .

"Bonus winning information 1" indicates that the number of precursor games lottery is performed based on the value of the bonus winning information being 1, and "Bonus winning information 2" indicates that the value of the bonus winning information is 2. "Bonus winning information 3" indicates that the number of precursory game lottery is performed based on the value of 3 in the bonus winning information. In these cases, the determined number of precursor games is set in the number of bonus precursor games counter. As described above, the value of the bonus book precursor game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games in which the bonus book precursor effect is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103 .

Further, "when chance A wins" indicates that the lottery for the number of predictive games is performed based on the fact that chance A has been won (the value of the chance A winning information is 1 or more). The number of games is set in the chance A precursor game number counter. The value of the number-of-chance-A-prediction-game counter indicates the number of remaining unit games in which the chance-A prognostic effect is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103 .

As the portent game number lottery table, the portent game number lottery table shown in FIG. 331(a) and the portent game number lottery table shown in FIG. 331(b) are provided. The precursor effect is not performed (the values of the bonus main precursor game number counter, the bonus fake precursor game number counter, and the chance A precursor game number counter are all 0), and the ball output flag group (normal) is "rare LV1", "rare LV2", "rare LV3", or "rare LV6", bonus fake, pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or pseudo bonus C mode) Alternatively, when chance A is won, the precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. 331(b) is referred to, and in other cases, the precursor game number lottery table shown in FIG. be.

For example, when the omen effect is not performed and the payout flag group (normal) is "rare LV1", if the value of the bonus winning information is 1, the number of omen basic games is 163. "3" is determined with a probability of /256, "4" is determined with a probability of 8/256, "12" is determined with a probability of 69/256, and "15" is determined with a probability of 16/256. be. The main CPU 101 sets the sum of the determined number of precursor basic games and the number of additional games (any one of 0 to 2) in the number of precursor games counter.

After executing the process of step S2145, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

Although not shown, when the number of precursor games is set in the bonus precursor game counter in step S2145, main CPU 101 generates bonus precursor effect start command data, and stores the generated bonus precursor effect start command data in main RAM 103. stored in the communication data storage area. The bonus main prediction effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub control circuit 200 can recognize that it is time to start the bonus sign effect, and the display of the image, the sound output, the light output, etc. for the bonus sign effect can be performed. Processing to start is performed. As a result, the bonus main sign effect is performed over the unit games for the number of sign games.

Further, when the number of precursor games is set in the bonus fake precursor game number counter in step S2145, the main CPU 101 generates bonus fake precursor effect start command data, and transmits the generated bonus fake precursor effect start command data to the main RAM 103. Store in the data storage area. The bonus fake precursor effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is time to start the bonus fake precursor effect, and the image display, sound output, light output, etc. for the bonus fake precursor effect can be performed. Processing to start is performed. As a result, the bonus fake precursor effect is performed over the unit games for the number of precursor games. The bonus fake precursor effect is basically the same effect as the bonus main precursor effect.

If the number of precursor games is set in the chance A precursor game number counter in step S 2145 , main CPU 101 generates chance A precursor effect start command data, and transmits the generated chance A precursor effect start command data to main RAM 103 . Store in the data storage area. The chance A precursor effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is time to start the chance A omen effect, and display images, output sound, output light, etc. for the chance A omen effect. Processing to start is performed. As a result, the chance A precursor effect is performed over the unit games for the number of precursor games. The chance A portent effect may be the same effect as the bonus main portent effect or the bonus fake portent effect, or may be a different effect. In addition, when the pseudo bonus, bonus fake, and chance A are won at that time, the bonus main precursor effect is performed with the highest priority, the bonus fake precursor effect is performed with the next priority, and the chance A precursor effect is performed. takes precedence next.

In addition, bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is also performed while the bonus fake precursor effect is being performed (the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter is greater than 0). bonus), the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter is cleared ("0" is set to the counter). Then, the number of precursor games determined by the number of precursor games lottery (see step S2145) is set in the number of bonus precursor games counter. As a result, the bonus fake precursor effect is terminated, and the bonus main precursor effect is started.

Also, while the Chance A precursor effect is being performed (the value of the Chance A precursor game number counter is greater than 0), a bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) is performed, thereby providing a pseudo bonus or bonus. When the fake is won, the chance A precursor effect is continuously performed until the value of the chance A precursor game number counter becomes 0 (bonus main precursor effect or bonus fake precursor effect is stocked). Then, after transitioning from the advantageous section (normal mode) to the advantageous section (chance A mode) with the end of the chance A omen effect, when transitioning from the advantageous section (chance A mode) to the advantageous section (normal mode) A precursor game number lottery (see step S2145) is performed. The number of precursor games thus determined is set in the bonus precursor game number counter or the bonus fake precursor game number counter, and the bonus precursor effect or the bonus fake precursor effect is started (the stocked bonus precursor effect or A bonus fake precursor effect is released).

In addition, in the state in which the bonus fake precursor effect is stocked in this way, when a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode or pseudo bonus B mode) is won by the bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322), the pseudo bonus When the A mode ends, or when the chance B mode transferred from the pseudo bonus B mode ends, the information indicating that the bonus fake precursor effect is stocked is cleared.

Further, when the bonus fake is won again by the bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322) while the bonus fake precursor effect is being performed (the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter is greater than 0), The original bonus fake precursor effect is continuously performed until the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter reaches zero. On the other hand, the information indicating that the bonus fake has been won again is discarded.

Also, when the chance A is won by the chance A lottery (see step S2123 in FIG. The bonus fake precursor effect is continuously performed until the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter becomes 0 (the chance A precursor effect is stocked). Then, when the bonus fake portent effect is completed, a portent game number lottery (see step S2145) is performed, the number of portent games determined thereby is set in the chance A portent game number counter, and the chance A portent effect is started. (The stocked Chance A portent effect is released).

As described above, bonus lottery (see step S2083 in FIG. 322), bonus promotion lottery (see step S2102 in FIG. 325), chance A lottery (see step S2123 in FIG. 327), and predictive game number lottery (see step S2145 in FIG. 330) ) is performed in the process (game start state control process) of step S6 of FIG. 23 (main process), but these processes are performed in the process of step S15 (game end) of FIG. time state control process). For example, when the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is other than "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), the process (game On the other hand, when the sub-flag is "press order bell", these processes are performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process). may be performed.

When these processes are performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) of FIG. 23 (main process), the payout flag group ( normal) may be different. For example, when the sub-flag is "push order bell", if 11 medals are paid out, the payout flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) corresponding to the character is determined, while 11 If no medals are paid out, "0" may be determined as the payout flag group (normal) number regardless of the character. It should be noted that in the unit game in which the advantageous section transition process (see step S2002 in FIG. 313) is performed, even if the sub-flag is "push order bell", the process of step S6 in FIG. These processes may be performed in the state control process).

<Management processing of precursor game number counter>
FIG. 332 is a flowchart showing a precursor game number counter management process performed in the main control circuit.

The number-of-prediction-games counter management process shown in FIG. 332 is executed by the main control circuit 100 in FIG. This is a process performed in step S15 (game end state control process) of the main process). The main CPU 101 can recognize the current game interval and mode by referring to the game interval flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103 .

In the portent game number counter management processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the bonus port portent game number counter (see step S2145 in FIG. 330) is greater than 0 (step S2161). When determining that the value of the bonus precursor game number counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the bonus precursor game number counter (step S2162). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the bonus book precursor game number counter is 0 (step S2163). When the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the bonus book precursor game number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the value of the bonus book precursor game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the bonus book precursor effect (step S2164). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates bonus main precursor effect end command data, and stores the generated bonus main precursor effect end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103 . The bonus main precursor effect end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is time to end the bonus sign effect, and the image display, the sound output, and the light output for the bonus sign effect are performed. Processing for terminating output and the like is performed.

After that, the main CPU 101 sets the pseudo-bonus transition flag to ON (step S2165), and terminates this subroutine. The pseudo-bonus transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start a pseudo-bonus (pseudo-bonus A mode, pseudo-bonus B mode, or pseudo-bonus C mode). The main CPU 101 performs the mode flag storage area according to the value of the bonus winning information in the state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) at the start of the game in the unit game next to the unit game in which the pseudo-bonus shift flag is set to ON. (see FIG. 20). Thereby, when the value of the bonus winning information is 1, the mode is shifted to the pseudo-bonus A mode, when the value of the bonus winning information is 2, the mode is shifted to the pseudo-bonus B mode, and the value of the bonus winning information is 3. If , the mode shifts to the pseudo bonus C mode.

When determining in step S2161 that the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter is greater than 0 (step S2166). When determining that the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter (step S2167). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter is 0 (step S2168). When determining that the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the bonus fake precursor effect (step S2169). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates bonus fake precursor effect end command data and stores the generated bonus fake precursor effect end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103 . The bonus fake precursor effect end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is time to end the bonus fake precursor effect, and the image display, sound output, and light output for the bonus fake precursor effect are activated. Processing for terminating output and the like is performed. After executing the process of step S2169, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

When determining in step S2166 that the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the chance A precursor game number counter is greater than 0 (step S2170). When determining that the value of the chance A precursor game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the chance A precursor game number counter is greater than 0, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance A precursor game number counter (step S2171). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the chance A precursor game number counter is 0 (step S2172). When determining that the value of the number-of-chance-A-prediction-games counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the value of the chance A precursor game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 ends the chance A precursor effect (step S2173). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates chance A portent effect end command data, and stores the generated chance A portent effect end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103 . The chance A precursor effect end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is time to end the chance A portent effect, and display images, output sounds, and emit light for the chance A portent effect. Processing for terminating output and the like is performed.

After that, the main CPU 101 sets the chance A transition flag to ON (step S2174), and terminates this subroutine. The chance A transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the chance A mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the chance A shift flag is set to ON. . As a result, the mode is shifted to the chance A mode. Further, when the chance A mode starts, the main CPU 101 sets the chance A game number counter to "3". The value of the chance A game number counter indicates the number of remaining unit games played in the chance A mode, and is stored in the main RAM 103 .

<Processing when starting a game for an advantageous section (chance A mode)>
FIG. 333 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of an advantageous section (chance A mode) game performed in the main control circuit. 334A and 334B are diagrams showing a reward lottery table during chance A. FIG. FIG. 335(a) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the sub-flag and the ball-out flag group (chance A) number for each character. FIG. 335(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the ball-out flag group (chance A) number and the ball-out flag group (chance A). FIG. 336 is a diagram showing an addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery table.

The advantageous interval (chance A mode) game start time processing shown in FIG. 333 is executed by the main control circuit 100 in FIG. This is a process performed in the process (game start state control process) of step S6 of the main process). The main CPU 101 refers to the game interval flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103 to confirm that the current game interval and mode are the advantageous interval and the chance A mode, respectively. can be recognized.

In the advantageous interval (chance A mode) game start processing, first, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance A game number counter (step S2181). Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the chance A game number counter is 0 (step S2182). When determining that the value of the chance A game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 sets the normal transition flag to ON (step S2183). The normal shift flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the normal mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the normal transition flag is set to ON. As a result, it shifts to the normal mode.

If it is determined in step S2182 that the value of the chance A game number counter is not 0, or after executing the process of step S2183, the main CPU 101 executes a reward lottery during chance A (step S2184). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance A middle reward lottery table (see FIGS. 334A and 334B), and performs lottery based on the ball output flag group (chance A) (see FIG. 335) and a random value. , As a result of the reward lottery during Chance A, "non-winning", "weak continuation rate UP", "medium continuation rate UP", "strong continuation rate UP", "damage stock + 1", "damage stock + 2", "direct hit Any one of "pseudo bonus A", "direct hit pseudo bonus B", and "direct hit pseudo bonus C" is determined.

In the chance A middle reward lottery table shown in FIGS. 334A and 334B, the ball output flag group (chance A) (“other than right”, “rare LV1”, “rare LV2”, “rare LV3”, “rare LV4”, For each “rare LV5” and “rare LV6”), the result of the reward lottery during chance A (“non-winning”, “weak continuation rate UP”, “in continuation rate UP”, “continuation rate Lottery values corresponding to "damage stock +1", "damage stock +2", "direct hit pseudo-bonus A", "direct hit pseudo-bonus B", and "direct hit pseudo-bonus C") are defined. The probability that each result of the reward lottery during Chance A will be determined is expressed by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can be done.

The Chance A medium reward lottery table includes Chance A winning information (“1” and “2”) (see step S2123 in FIG. 327), and the remaining number of unit games played in the Chance A mode (Chance A game number counter). Values: '0', '1' and '2'). When the chance A winning information is "1" and the value of the chance A game number counter is "0", the chance A middle reward lottery table shown in FIG. If it is "1" and the value of the chance A game number counter is "1", then the chance A middle reward lottery table shown in FIG. , if the value of the chance A game number counter is "2", the chance A middle reward lottery table shown in FIG. When the value of the counter is "0", the Chance A middle reward lottery table shown in FIG. 1", the chance A mid-reward lottery table shown in FIG. , the mid-chance A reward lottery table shown in FIG. 334B(c) is referred to.

In FIG. 335, sub-flags (Fig. 311) is stipulated. "None" indicates that no character is set, "Character A" indicates that character A is set, "Character B" indicates that character B is set, and " "Character C" indicates that Character C is set, and "Character D" indicates that Character D is set. The main CPU 101 converts the sub-flag into a ball-out flag group (chance A) based on the presence/absence and type of character and the correspondence relationship shown in FIG.

For example, in a state where character A is set, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell", the ball output flag group (chance A) "Rare LV1" is determined. At this time, if the chance A winning information is "2" and the value of the chance A game number counter is "2", as a result of the reward lottery during chance A, "continuation rate UP" with a probability of 176/256 Medium" is determined, 16/256 probability is ``continuation rate UP strong'' is determined, 62/256 probability is ``damage stock +1'', and 2/256 probability is ``damage stock +2'' is determined. be done.

Further, for example, in a state where character B is set, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "special role", the ball output flag group (chance A) "Rare LV3" is determined as. At this time, if the chance A winning information is "1" and the value of the chance A game number counter is "0", as a result of the reward lottery during chance A, "direct hit pseudo bonus B" is determined, and "direct hit pseudo bonus C" is determined with a probability of 16/256.

After executing the process of step S2184, the main CPU 101 determines whether character D (see step S2047 in FIG. 318) is set (step S2185). When determining that character D has not been set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the reward lottery during chance A is "non-winning" (step S2186). When determining that the result of the mid-chance A reward lottery is "non-winning", the main CPU 101 executes processing for non-winning mid-chance A reward lottery (step S2187). The processing at the time of non-winning of the reward lottery during chance A will be described later with reference to FIG. 337 . After executing the process of step S2187, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2186 that the result of the reward lottery during Chance A is not "non-winning", the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the reward lottery during Chance A has increased continuation rate ("weak continuation rate", "medium continuation rate"). ', or 'continuation rate UP strong') (step S2188). When determining that the result of the reward lottery for chance A is any one of "weak continuation rate UP", "medium continuation rate UP", and "strong continuation rate UP", the main CPU 101 selects addition chance B A continuation rate UP lottery is executed (step S2189). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery table (see FIG. 336) and performs a lottery based on a random number value. Any one of "non-winning", "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5%" and "10%" is determined.

In the addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery table shown in FIG. And, for each “continuation rate UP strong”), the result of the addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery (“non-winning”, “1%”, “2%”, “3%”, “4%”, “5 %” and “10%”) are defined. The probability that each result of the addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery will be determined is "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" can be represented by

For example, if the result of the reward lottery for Chance A is "continuation rate UP", the result of the addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery is "2%" with a probability of 128/256, and 64/ With a probability of 256, "3%" is determined, and with a probability of 64/256, "4%" is determined. The main CPU 101 adds the percentage determined as the result of the addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery to the value of the addition chance B continuation rate information. The value of the addition chance B continuation rate information is stored in the main RAM 103 . The addition chance B continuation rate information will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S2189, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2188 that the result of the reward lottery for Chance A is neither "weak continuation rate UP", "medium continuation rate UP", or "strong continuation rate UP", the main CPU 101 It is determined whether or not the result of the medium reward lottery is the damage stock (“damage stock +1” or “damage stock +2”) (step S2190). When determining that the result of the reward lottery during chance A is either "damage stock +1" or "damage stock +2", the main CPU 101 updates the value of the damage stock counter (step S2191).

In this process, when the result of the reward lottery during chance A is "damage stock +1", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the damage stock counter, and the result of the reward lottery during chance A is "damage stock +2". , add "2" to the value of the damage stock counter. The damage stock counter value is stored in the main RAM 103 . The damage stock counter will be detailed later. After executing the process of step S2191, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

In step S2190, the result of the reward lottery during chance A is neither "damage stock +1" nor "damage stock +2" ("direct hit pseudo bonus A", "direct hit pseudo bonus B", and "direct hit pseudo bonus C )), the main CPU 101 executes processing for transitioning to a pseudo bonus (step S2192). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds a value corresponding to the result of the mid-chance A reward lottery to the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2083 in FIG. 322). Specifically, when the result of the reward lottery during Chance A is “pseudo direct hit bonus A”, the main CPU 101 adds “1” to the value of the bonus winning information, and the result of the reward lottery during Chance A is “pseudo hit bonus A”. If it is "bonus B", add "2" to the value of the bonus winning information, and if the result of the reward lottery during chance A is "direct hit pseudo bonus C", add "3" to the value of the bonus winning information. .

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the bonus book precursor game number counter to "1". As a result, the pseudo-bonus (pseudo-bonus A mode, pseudo-bonus B mode, or pseudo-bonus C mode) is started from the next unit game (see step S2165 in FIG. 332). That is, the game directly shifts from the chance A mode to the pseudo bonus without shifting from the chance A mode to the normal mode. In addition, the main CPU 101 sets "0" to the number-of-chance-A-games counter. It should be noted that main CPU 101 clears the normal shift flag when the normal shift flag (see step S2183) is set to ON. After executing the process of step S2192, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

When determining in step S2185 that character D is set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the reward lottery during chance A is "direct hit pseudo bonus C" (step S2193). When determining that the result of the chance A reward lottery is "direct hit pseudo bonus C", the main CPU 101 executes processing for shifting to the pseudo bonus C mode (step S2194). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds "3" to the value of the bonus winning information, sets "1" to the bonus book precursor game number counter, and sets "0" to the chance A game number counter. As a result, the pseudo bonus C mode is started from the next unit game (see step S2165 in FIG. 332). That is, the chance A mode is directly shifted to the pseudo bonus C mode without shifting from the chance A mode to the normal mode. It should be noted that main CPU 101 clears the normal shift flag when the normal shift flag (see step S2183) is set to ON. After executing the process of step S2194, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2193 that the result of the reward lottery during chance A is not "direct hit pseudo bonus C", the main CPU 101 executes processing for shifting to the pseudo bonus B mode or the like (step S2195). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds "2" to the value of the bonus winning information, sets "1" to the bonus book precursor game number counter, and sets "0" to the chance A game number counter. As a result, the pseudo-bonus B mode (pseudo-bonus C mode if the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more at the time of shifting to the chance A mode) is started from the next unit game (Fig. 332). (see step S2165 of ). That is, the chance A mode is directly shifted to the pseudo-bonus B mode or the like without shifting from the chance A mode to the normal mode. It should be noted that main CPU 101 clears the normal shift flag when the normal shift flag (see step S2183) is set to ON. After executing the process of step S2195, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

As described above, the reward lottery during chance A (see step S2184) is performed in the process (game start state control process) of step S6 in FIG. 23 (main process). process) in step S15 (game end state control process). For example, when the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is other than "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), the process (game On the other hand, if the sub-flag is "press order bell", this process is performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process). You can do it.

When this process is performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) of FIG. 23 (main process), the payout flag group (chance A) may be different. For example, when the sub-flag is "push order bell", when 11 medals are paid out, a payout flag group (chance A) (see FIG. 335) corresponding to the character is determined. If 11 medals are not paid out, "0" may be determined as the payout ball flag group (chance A) number regardless of the character.

<Process when reward lottery is not won during Chance A>
FIG. 337 is a flow chart showing a process performed in the main control circuit when the reward lottery during chance A is not won. 338 is a diagram showing a lottery table for forced cancellation during chance A. FIG. FIG. 339 is a diagram showing a bonus lottery table when reaching the prescribed chance A points. FIG. 340 is a diagram showing a lottery table for the number of premonitory games during chance A. FIG.

337 (Processing at start of game for advantageous section (chance A mode)) performed in main control circuit 100 at step S2187.

In the mid-chance A reward lottery non-winning process, first, the main CPU 101 executes the mid-chance A forced cancellation lottery (step S2201). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chance A forced cancellation lottery table (see FIG. 338) and conducts a lottery based on a random number value. , ``direct hit pseudo bonus A'', ``direct hit pseudo bonus B'', and ``direct hit pseudo bonus C''.

In the forced cancellation lottery table during chance A shown in FIG. , the lottery values corresponding to the results of the forced cancellation lottery during Chance A (“Chance A points +1”, “Pseudo direct hit bonus A”, “Pseudo direct hit bonus B”, and “Pseudo direct hit bonus C”) are defined. there is The probability that each result of the forced cancellation lottery during chance A will be determined is expressed by "the lottery value specified for the relevant result / the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" be able to. For example, if the set value is set to 1, as a result of the lottery for forced release during chance A, "chance A point + 1" is determined with a probability of 255/256, and "direct hit pseudo bonus B ” is determined.

After executing the process of step S2201, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the lottery for forced cancellation during chance A is "chance A points +1" (step S2202). When determining that the result of the random chance A forced cancellation lottery is "chance A points + 1", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the chance A points (step S2203). The chance A point value is stored in the main RAM 103 . Then, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of chance A points is 3 or more (step S2204).

When determining that the value of the chance A point is 3 or more, the main CPU 101 executes a bonus lottery when the specified chance A point is reached (step S2205). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the bonus lottery table for reaching the prescribed chance A points (see FIG. 339) and performs a lottery based on a random number value. "Bonus Fake", "Bonus Winning Information +1", "Bonus Winning Information +2", and "Bonus Winning Information +3" are determined.

In the bonus lottery table when reaching the specified chance A point shown in FIG. ), the lottery values corresponding to the bonus lottery results ("Bonus Fake", "Bonus Winning Information +1", "Bonus Winning Information +2", and "Bonus Winning Information +3") when reaching the specified chance A point are specified. It is The probability that each result of the bonus lottery will be determined when the specified chance A point is reached is "the specified lottery value for the relevant result / the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" can be represented by For example, if the set value is set to 1, as a result of the bonus lottery when the specified chance A point is reached, "bonus fake" is determined with a probability of 138/256, and "bonus winning information + 1" is determined with a probability of 53/256. ” is determined, “bonus winning information+2” is determined with a probability of 64/256, and “bonus winning information+3” is determined with a probability of 1/256.

When "bonus winning information +1" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery when the specified chance A point is reached, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information, and "bonus winning information +2" is determined. When "bonus winning information +3" is determined, "3" is added to the value of the bonus winning information. As described above, the upper limit value of the value of the bonus winning information is "3". ” is set. Further, when the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more, it indicates that the pseudo bonus has been won, and in this case, the actual bonus premonition effect is performed.

In addition, when "bonus fake" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery when the specified chance A point is reached, and the value of the bonus winning information is 0, the main CPU 101 sets the bonus fake flag to ON. do. As described above, the bonus fake flag is a flag indicating that the bonus fake has been won, and thus the bonus fake precursor effect is performed. In addition, if the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more at the time of shifting to the chance A mode, even if "bonus fake" is determined as a result of the bonus lottery at the time of reaching the specified chance A point, the bonus The fake flag is not set on. In this case, the value of the bonus winning information is referred to in the lottery for number of precursor games during chance A (see step S2207), and the main bonus precursor effect is performed.

After executing the process of step S2205, the main CPU 101 subtracts "3" from the chance A point value (step S2206). Then, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for the number of precursor games during chance A (step S2207). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery based on a random number value with reference to the Chance A Omen Game Number Lottery Table (see FIG. 340). 15", "19", "20", "21", and "22".

In the lottery table for the number of precursory games during chance A shown in FIG. A lottery value corresponding to the number of precursor games (“4”, “14”, “15”, “19”, “20”, “21”, and “22”) is defined for each. The probability of each predictive game number being determined can be represented by "lottery value specified for the predictive game number/the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". .

In the figure, "bonus fake" indicates that the lottery for the number of omen games in chance A is performed based on the fact that the bonus fake flag is set on (the bonus fake is won). The number of precursor games is set in the counter for the number of bonus fake precursor games. As described above, the value of the bonus fake precursor game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games in which the bonus fake precursor effect is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103 (see step S2145 in FIG. 330).

"Bonus winning information 1" indicates that the lottery for the number of precursor games during chance A is performed based on the value of the bonus winning information being 1, and "Bonus winning information 2" indicates the value of the bonus winning information. is 2, and "bonus winning information 3" indicates that a lottery for the number of predictive games during chance A is performed based on the value of the bonus winning information being 3. indicates that the In these cases, the determined number of precursor games is set in the number of bonus precursor games counter. As described above, the value of the bonus book precursor game number counter indicates the remaining number of unit games in which the bonus book precursor effect is executed, and is stored in the main RAM 103 (see step S2145 in FIG. 330).

For example, when the value of the bonus winning information is 1, the number of precursor games is determined to be "14" with a probability of 32/256, "15" is determined with a probability of 32/256, and "15" is determined with a probability of 60/256. "19" is determined with probability, "20" is determined with probability of 58/256, "21" is determined with probability of 58/256, and "22" is determined with probability of 16/256. The main CPU 101 sets the determined number of precursor games to the number of precursor games counter.

As in step S2145 in FIG. 330, when the number of precursor games is set in the bonus book precursor game number counter in step S2207 in FIG. The portent effect start command data is stored in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. - 特許庁The bonus main prediction effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is time to start the bonus prognostic effect, and the display of the image, the output of the sound, the output of the light, etc. for the bonus prognostic effect can be performed. Processing to start is performed. As a result, the bonus main sign effect is performed over the unit games for the number of sign games.

If the number of precursory games is set in the counter for the number of bonus fake precursory games in step S2207, the main CPU 101 generates bonus fake precursory effect start command data, and transmits the generated bonus fake precursory effect start command data to the main RAM 103. Store in the data storage area. The bonus fake precursor effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that it is time to start the bonus fake precursor effect, and the image display, sound output, light output, etc. for the bonus fake precursor effect can be performed. Processing to start is performed. As a result, the bonus fake precursor effect is performed over the unit games for the number of precursor games.

If it is determined in step S2204 that the chance A point value is less than 3, or after executing the process of step S2207, the main CPU 101 sets the normal transition flag to ON (step S2208). As described above, the normal shift flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the normal mode (see step S2183 in FIG. 333). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the normal transition flag is set to ON. As a result, it shifts to the normal mode.

It should be noted that at the time of shifting to the chance A mode, the value of the bonus winning information is 1 or more, and when the specified chance A point is reached, the bonus lottery (see step S2205) is not performed, and the chance A mode is changed to the normal mode. If so, the number of precursor games is determined in step S2145 of FIG. 330 instead of step S2207, and the precursor effect is performed.

In step S2202, the result of the lottery for forced cancellation during chance A is not "chance A point + 1" ("direct hit pseudo bonus A", "direct hit pseudo bonus B", and "direct hit pseudo bonus C") Yes), the main CPU 101 executes processing for shifting to a pseudo bonus (step S2209). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds a value corresponding to the result of the mid-chance A forced cancellation lottery to the value of the bonus winning information (see step S2083 in FIG. 322). Specifically, when the result of the forced cancellation lottery during Chance A is "direct hit pseudo bonus A", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the bonus winning information, and the result of the forced cancellation lottery during Chance A is " If it is "direct hit pseudo bonus B", "2" is added to the value of the bonus winning information, and if the result of the forced cancellation lottery during chance A is "direct hit pseudo bonus C", the value of the bonus winning information is "3". Add

Further, the main CPU 101 sets the bonus book precursor game number counter to "1". As a result, the pseudo-bonus (pseudo-bonus A mode, pseudo-bonus B mode, or pseudo-bonus C mode) is started from the next unit game (see step S2165 in FIG. 332). That is, the game directly shifts from the chance A mode to the pseudo bonus without shifting from the chance A mode to the normal mode. It should be noted that main CPU 101 clears the normal shift flag when the normal shift flag (see step S2183 in FIG. 333) is set to ON.

After executing the process of step S2208 or step S2209, the main CPU 101 sets the chance A game number counter to "0" (step S2210). After that, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Transition to pseudo-bonus and pseudo-game>
FIG. 341 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol that is stopped and displayed in a pseudo-game. Figure 342 is a diagram showing a pseudo-game stop position initial setting lottery table. Figure 343 is a diagram showing a pseudo-game stop position determination table.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a pseudo game can be executed during execution of the lock effect. As described in the first embodiment, the lock effect is an effect that stops the progress of the game for a predetermined period (disables the game operation of the player for a predetermined period). In the pseudo-game, the player's game operation is pseudo-received during the period in which the player's game operation is invalidated, thereby rotating or stopping (temporarily stopping) the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. This is what the performance is like.

In this embodiment, five types of pseudo-games (pseudo-games 1 to 5) are provided, and different symbols are stop-displayed in each pseudo-game. FIG. 341(a) shows the symbols stopped and displayed in the pseudo-game 1, FIG. 341(b) shows the symbols stopped and displayed in the pseudo-game 2, and FIG. The symbols stopped and displayed in the game 3 are shown, the symbols stopped and displayed in the pseudo-game 4 are shown in FIG. 341(d), and the symbols stopped and displayed in the pseudo-game 5 are shown in FIG. 341(e) is shown.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 341(a), in pseudo game 1, "Purple 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, and "Purple 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C. , "Bell A" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the right reel 3R (7 tenpai lost). As shown in FIG. 341(b), in pseudo game 2, "Purple 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, "Purple 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. "BAR" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of (7, 7, BAR aligned).

As shown in FIG. 341(c), in pseudo game 3, "Purple 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, "Purple 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of . As shown in FIG. 341(d), in pseudo game 4, "Purple 7" is stop-displayed in the upper region of the left reel 3L, "Purple 7" is stop-displayed in the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. "Purple 7" is stopped and displayed in the lower area of . As shown in FIG. 341(e), in pseudo game 5, "white 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the left reel 3L, "white 7" is stop-displayed in the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. "White 7" is stopped and displayed in the middle area of (white 7 aligned).

In this way, in the pseudo-game, the combination of symbols is statically displayed, but the player is not given a privilege based on the static display of the combination of symbols. For example, even if the combination of symbols stopped and displayed in the pseudo-game matches the combination of symbols defined in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 305A and 305B), medals are paid out according to the combination of symbols. is not performed.

The pseudo-game is a unit game in which the bonus main precursor effect to the bonus fake precursor effect are completed (see steps S2164 and S2169 in FIG. 332), and the main control circuit 100 performs step S16 (main processing at the end of the game) of FIG. 23 (main processing). side effect control processing). The type of pseudo-game to be executed is determined based on the pseudo-game stop position initial setting lottery table (see FIG. 342) and the pseudo-game stop position determination table (see FIG. 343).

When the main bonus precursor effect or the bonus fake precursor effect is started (for example, after executing the process of step S2023 in FIG. 317, after executing the process of step S2145 in FIG. 330, the main CPU 101 , Step S2194, or after executing the process of step S2195, after executing the process of step S2207 or step S2209 in FIG. 337), execute the pseudo-game stop position initial setting lottery. In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo-game stop position initial setting lottery table (see FIG. 342), performs lottery based on random numbers, and selects "pseudo-game 1", "pseudo-game 1", "pseudo-game Game 2", "Pseudo-game 3", "Pseudo-game 4", and "Pseudo-game 5" are determined.

In the pseudo-game stop position initial setting lottery table shown in FIG. ”) is defined. The probability that each pseudo-game is determined can be represented by "lottery value defined for the pseudo-game/the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". That is, "pseudo-game 3" is determined with a probability of 86/256, "pseudo-game 4" is determined with a probability of 42/256, and "pseudo-game 5" is determined with a probability of 128/256.

After that, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo-game stop position determination process when the main bonus precursor effect or the bonus fake precursor effect ends (for example, after executing the process of step S2164 or step S2169 in FIG. 332). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo-game stop position determination table (see FIG. 343) to determine the pseudo-game types as "pseudo-game 1", "pseudo-game 2", "pseudo-game 3", and " Either "pseudo game 4" or "pseudo game 5" is determined.

In the pseudo-game stop position determination table shown in FIG. 343, the results of the pseudo-game stop position initial setting lottery ("pseudo-game 1", "pseudo-game 2", "pseudo-game 3", "pseudo-game 4", and " Pseudo-game 5 ”), the value of the bonus winning information (“0”, “1”, “2”, and “3”) for the pseudo-game type (“pseudo-game 1”, “pseudo-game 2”, "Pseudo-game 3", "pseudo-game 4", and "pseudo-game 5") are defined.

As a result, in the pseudo-game stop position determination process, if the value of the bonus winning information is "0", regardless of the pseudo-game type determined by the pseudo-game stop position initial setting lottery, "pseudo-game 1" is It is determined. Also, when the value of the bonus winning information is "1", regardless of the type of pseudo-game determined by the pseudo-game stop position initial setting lottery, "pseudo-game 2" is determined. Also, when the value of the bonus winning information is "2", "pseudo game 3" or "pseudo game 4" is determined according to the type of pseudo game determined by the pseudo game stop position initial setting lottery. . Also, if the value of the bonus winning information is "3", depending on the type of pseudo-game determined by the pseudo-game stop position initial setting lottery, "pseudo-game 3", "pseudo-game 4", or " Pseudo-game 5" is determined.

Then, the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo-game determined by the pseudo-game stop position determination process as the main side effect control process (see step S16 in FIG. 23) at the end of the game in the unit game in which the pseudo-game stop position determination process is executed. Run. As a result, when the value of the bonus winning information is 1 when the bonus main prognostic effect is completed, the pseudo game 2 is performed and the mode is shifted to the pseudo bonus A mode, and when the value of the bonus winning information is 2. , Pseudo-game 3 or Pseudo-game 4 is performed and it shifts to Pseudo-bonus B mode, and when the value of the bonus winning information is 3, Pseudo-game 3, Pseudo-game 4, or Pseudo-game 5 is performed Then, the mode shifts to the pseudo bonus C mode (see step S2165 in FIG. 332). On the other hand, when the bonus fake precursor effect ends (when the value of the bonus winning information is 0), a pseudo game 1 is performed, and in this case, a pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode, pseudo bonus B mode, or It does not shift to the pseudo bonus C mode).

<Processing when starting a game for an advantageous section (pseudo-bonus A mode)>
FIG. 344 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of an advantageous section (pseudo bonus A mode) game performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 345 is a diagram showing a pseudo bonus A middle chance B & AT lottery table. FIG. 346 is a diagram showing a lottery table for chance B continuation rate UP at the end of pseudo bonus A. FIG.

The advantageous section (pseudo-bonus A mode) game start time processing shown in FIG. 23 (main process), the process of step S6 (game start state control process). The main CPU 101 refers to the game interval flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103 to determine that the current game interval and mode are the advantageous interval and the pseudo bonus A mode, respectively. can recognize that

In the advantageous section (pseudo bonus A mode) game start processing, first, the main CPU 101 executes the pseudo bonus A chance B & AT lottery (step S2221). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo-bonus A middle chance B & AT lottery table (see FIG. 345) and performs a lottery based on the ball output flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and the random number value. As a result of the chance B & AT lottery in the bonus A, one of "non-winning", "chance B", and "AT" is determined.

In the pseudo bonus A middle chance B & AT lottery table shown in FIG. Lottery values corresponding to pseudo-bonus A medium chance B & AT lottery results (“non-winning”, “chance B”, and “AT”) are defined for each of “LV5” and “rare LV6”). "Chance B" indicates that Chance B was won, and "AT" indicates that AT was won. The probability that each result of the pseudo-bonus A chance B & AT lottery is determined is "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all random values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" can be represented.

The pseudo bonus A medium chance B & AT lottery table is provided for each of whether or not there is an advantageous interval elapsed game count determination flag (see step S2004 in FIG. 313) and whether or not chance B is won. If chance B has not yet been won in the pseudo-bonus A mode, and if the advantageous interval elapsed game number determination flag is not set to ON, the pseudo-bonus A medium chance B & AT lottery table shown in FIG. 345(a). is referred to, and if the advantageous section elapsing game number determination flag is set to ON, the pseudo-bonus A-in-chance B & AT lottery table shown in FIG. If the lottery has already been won, the pseudo bonus A medium chance B & AT lottery table shown in FIG. 345(c) is referred to.

For example, when chance B has not yet been won in the pseudo-bonus A mode, and the advantageous interval elapsed game number determination flag is set to ON, and the ball output flag group (normal) is "rare LV3" , as a result of the pseudo-bonus A and chance B & AT lottery, "non-winning" is determined with a probability of 192/256, and "chance B" is determined with a probability of 64/256. The main CPU 101 sets a chance B winning flag when "chance B" is determined as a result of the chance B & AT lottery in the pseudo bonus A. The chance B winning flag is a flag indicating that the chance B has already been won in the pseudo bonus A mode.

After executing the process of step S2221, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the pseudo bonus A middle chance B & AT lottery is "AT" (step S2222). When determining that the result of the pseudo bonus A middle chance B & AT lottery is "AT", the main CPU 101 executes AT transition processing (step S2223). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20), thereby shifting to the AT state. It should be noted that the main CPU 101 clears the chance B winning flag when the chance B winning flag is set to ON. After executing the process of step S2223, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2222 that the result of the pseudo-bonus A medium chance B & AT lottery is not "AT", the main CPU 101 determines that the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell". (see FIG. 311) (step S2224). When determining that the sub-flag is not "press order bell", the main CPU 101 terminates this sub-routine.

On the other hand, when determining that the sub-flag is "push order bell", the main CPU 101 executes navigation setting processing (step S2225). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor and information corresponding to the stop operation information to be included in the start command data (see step S104 in FIG. 28). As a result, as in the first embodiment, the instruction monitor and the main effect display section 21 (see FIG. 1) notify the correct pressing order (FIGS. 310A and 310B) of the pressing order bell.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the Bell Navi number counter (step S2226). The value of the bernavi counter indicates the remaining number of bernavi performed in the pseudo-bonus A mode, and is stored in the main RAM 103 . Although not shown, when the pseudo-bonus A mode starts, that is, the main CPU 101 performs state control at the start of the game in the next unit game after the unit game in which the pseudo-bonus transition flag (see step S2165 in FIG. 332) is set to ON. In the processing (see step S6 in FIG. 23), "6" is set in the Bernavi number counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the Bell Navi number counter is 0 (step S2227). When determining that the value of the Bell Navi number counter is not 0, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the Bell Navi frequency counter is 0, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery to increase the continuation rate of chance B at the end of pseudo bonus A (step S2228). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for increasing the chance B continuation rate at the end of the pseudo bonus A (see FIG. 346), and conducts a lottery based on random numbers to increase the continuation rate of the chance B at the end of the pseudo bonus A. As a result of the lottery, "non-winning", "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5%", "10%", "20%", and "30% ”.

In the lottery table for increasing chance B continuation rate at the end of pseudo bonus A shown in FIG. 61 to 70%”, “71 to 80%”, “81 to 90%”, and “91 to 100%”), the chance B continuation rate at the end of the pseudo bonus A UP lottery result (“non-winning” , “1%”, “2%”, “3%”, “4%”, “5%”, “10%”, “20%”, and “30%”). It is The probability that each result of the pseudo bonus A end chance B continuation rate UP lottery will be determined is "lottery value specified for the result / number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)”.

The lottery table for increasing the chance B continuation rate at the end of the pseudo bonus A is provided for each of whether or not the chance B is won. If the chance B has not yet been won in the pseudo-bonus A mode, the lottery table for increasing the chance B continuation rate at the end of the pseudo-bonus A shown in FIG. If the winning has already been won, the lottery table for increasing chance B continuation rate at the end of pseudo bonus A shown in FIG. 346(b) is referred to.

For example, when chance B has not yet been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, the chance B continuation rate determined by the chance B continuation rate lottery process (see step S2005 in FIG. 313) is 60% (51% to 60%). ), "3%" is determined with a probability of 128/256, "5%" is determined with a probability of 95/256, "10%" is determined with a probability of 32/256, and "20%" is determined with a probability of 1/256. The main CPU 101 adds the percentage determined as the result of the chance B continuation rate UP lottery at the end of the pseudo bonus A to the value of the chance B continuation rate information for addition (see step S2189 in FIG. 333).

After executing the process of step S2228, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the chance B has been won in the pseudo bonus A mode (step S2229). When the chance B winning flag (see step S2221) is set to ON, the main CPU 101 can recognize that the chance B has been won in the pseudo bonus A mode.

When determining that the chance B has been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B transition flag to ON (step S2230), and ends this subroutine. The chance B shift flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the chance B mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start time state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the chance B shift flag is set to ON. . As a result, the mode is shifted to the chance B mode.

On the other hand, when determining that the chance B has not been won in the pseudo bonus A mode, the main CPU 101 sets the normal transition flag to ON (step S2231), and terminates this subroutine. As described above, the normal shift flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the normal mode (see step S2183 in FIG. 333). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the normal transition flag is set to ON. As a result, it shifts to the normal mode.

<Process at Start of Advantageous Section (Pseudo Bonus B Mode) Game>
FIG. 347 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of an advantageous section (pseudo bonus B mode) game performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 348 is a diagram showing a pseudo bonus B middle reward lottery table. FIG. 349 is a diagram showing a chance B continuation rate UP lottery table for medium addition of pseudo bonus B. FIG.

The advantageous section (pseudo-bonus B mode) game start time processing shown in FIG. 23 (main process), the process of step S6 (game start state control process). The main CPU 101 refers to the game interval flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103 to determine that the current game interval and mode are the advantageous interval and the pseudo bonus B mode, respectively. can recognize that

In the advantageous section (pseudo-bonus B mode) game start processing, first, the main CPU 101 executes a pseudo-bonus B middle reward lottery (step S2241). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo-bonus B middle reward lottery table (see FIG. 348) and performs a lottery based on the ball output flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and a random value to obtain a pseudo-bonus. As a result of the B middle reward lottery, one of "non-winning", "continuation rate UP", "damage stock +1", "damage stock +2", and "damage stock +5" is determined.

In the pseudo bonus B middle reward lottery table shown in FIG. ”, and “Rare LV6”), the results of the pseudo-bonus B middle reward lottery (“non-winning”, “continuation rate UP”, “damage stock + 1”, “damage stock + 2”, and “damage stock + 5 ”) is defined. The probability that each result of the pseudo-bonus B medium reward lottery will be determined is represented by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" be able to.

The pseudo-bonus-B intermediate reward lottery table is provided for each of the presence or absence of the advantageous interval elapsed game number determination flag (see step S2004 in FIG. 313). When the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is not set to ON, the pseudo bonus B middle reward lottery table shown in FIG. 348(a) is referred to, and the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is set to ON. In this case, the pseudo-bonus-B middle-reward lottery table shown in FIG. 348(b) is referred to. For example, when the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is not set to ON and the ball output flag group (normal) is "rare LV3", 192/256 "continuation rate UP" is determined with a probability of , and "damage stock +1" is determined with a probability of 64/256.

After executing the process of step S2241, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the reward lottery for the medium-pseudo bonus B is "continuation rate UP" (step S2242). When determining that the result of the pseudo bonus B medium reward lottery is "continuation rate UP", main CPU 101 executes a pseudo bonus B medium addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery (step S2243). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the pseudo bonus B middle addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery table (see FIG. 349), and performs a lottery based on the ball output flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and a random value. By doing so, as a result of the lottery, the pseudo bonus B middle addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery, "non-winning", "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5%", and one of "10%" is determined.

In the pseudo bonus B middle addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery table shown in FIG. LV4”, “rare LV5”, and “rare LV6”), the result of the lottery (“non-winning”, “1%”, “2%”, “3 %”, “4%”, “5%”, and “10%”). The probability that each result of the pseudo bonus B medium addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery is determined is "lottery value specified for the result / number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator : 256)”.

For example, when the ball output flag group (normal) is "rare LV3", "3%" is determined with a probability of 128/256 as a result of the pseudo bonus B middle addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery, There is a probability of 92/256 that "4%" will be determined, a probability of 32/256 that will determine "5%", and a probability of 4/256 that will determine "10%". Main CPU 101 adds the percentage determined as the result of the pseudo bonus B middle addition chance B continuation rate UP lottery to the value of addition chance B continuation rate information (see step S2189 in FIG. 333).

If it is determined in step S2242 that the result of the pseudo-bonus-B middle reward lottery is not "increased continuation rate", the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the pseudo-bonus-B medium-term reward lottery is damage stock ("damage stock +1", "damage stock +2 ', or 'damage stock +5') (step S2244). When determining that the result of the reward lottery for pseudo-bonus B is any of "damage stock +1", "damage stock +2", and "damage stock +5", the main CPU 101 sets the damage stock counter (Fig. 333 (see step S2191 of )) is updated (step S2245).

In this process, if the result of the pseudo-bonus B medium reward lottery is "damage stock + 1", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the damage stock counter, and the result of the pseudo bonus B medium reward lottery is "damage stock". If it is "stock +2", add "2" to the value of the damage stock counter, and if the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B is "damage stock +5", add "5" to the value of the damage stock counter. .

After executing the process of step S2243 or step S2245, or in step S2244, the result of the reward lottery during pseudo bonus B is any of "damage stock +1", "damage stock +2", and "damage stock +5" If it is determined that there is no ("non-winning"), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the counter for the number of pseudo-bonus B games (step S2246). The value of the pseudo-bonus B game number counter indicates the number of remaining unit games played in the pseudo-bonus B mode, and is stored in the main RAM 103 . Although not shown, when the pseudo-bonus B mode starts, that is, the main CPU 101 performs state control at the time of game start in the unit game next to the unit game in which the pseudo-bonus shift flag (see step S2165 in FIG. 332) is set to ON. In the process (see step S6 in FIG. 23), "25" is set in the counter for the number of pseudo-bonus B games.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the pseudo bonus B game number counter is 0 (step S2247). When determining that the value of the pseudo bonus B game number counter is 0, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B transition flag to ON (step S2248). As described above, the chance B transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the chance B mode (see step S2230 in FIG. 344). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start time state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the chance B shift flag is set to ON. . As a result, the mode is shifted to the chance B mode.

When determining in step S2247 that the value of the pseudo bonus B game number counter is not 0, or after executing the process of step S2248, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

<Transition to Chance B Mode>
FIG. 350 is a diagram showing a transition route to the chance B mode.

As the advantageous section (chance B mode) (see FIG. 312), chance B mode (basic) and chance B mode (special) are provided. In FIG. 350, route (I), route (II), and route (III) are shown as transition routes to the chance B mode (basic).

Route (I) is a route for transitioning from an advantageous section (pseudo-bonus A mode) to a chance B mode (basic). Specifically, when the chance B is won in the chance B & AT lottery in the pseudo bonus A performed during the pseudo bonus A mode (see step S2221 in FIG. 344), the pseudo bonus A mode is changed to the chance B mode (basic). Move (see step S2230 in FIG. 344).

Route (II) is a route that shifts from the advantageous section (pseudo bonus B mode) to the chance B mode (basic). Specifically, when the unit game is played a specified number of times (25 times) in the pseudo bonus B mode, the pseudo bonus B mode is shifted to the chance B mode (basic) (see step S2248 in FIG. 347).

Route (III) is a route that transitions from the advantageous section (AT state) to the chance B mode (basic). Specifically, in the AT state, "push order bell" (see FIG. 311) was determined as a sub-flag, but the stop operation was not performed due to the correct push order (FIGS. 310A and 310B) (11 If no medals are paid out), the AT state is shifted to the chance B mode (basic).

Here, a plurality of modes are provided as the AT state, and an AT danger mode is provided as one of the plurality of modes. In the AT state, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), in modes other than the AT danger mode, the instruction monitor and main effect display In the section 21 (see FIG. 1), the correct pressing order (FIGS. 310A and 310B) in the pressing order bell is always notified (bell navigation always occurs).

On the other hand, in the AT danger mode, if the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), it is determined whether or not to generate the bell navigator. A lottery (bel-navi-generated lottery) is held to determine the correct answer, and only when the bernavi-generated lottery is won, the pressing order of the correct answer is notified. When the Bell-navi generation lottery is not won, the correct pressing order is not reported, and only the fact that the pressing order bell is determined as the internal winning combination is reported in the main effect display section 21.例文帳に追加

Therefore, when the pressing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination in the AT danger mode, there is a possibility that the stop operation cannot be performed according to the correct pressing order, and the stop operation cannot be performed according to the correct pressing order. If not, the AT state ends and the mode shifts to the chance B mode (basic).

Note that the AT state is basically shifted from the pseudo-bonus C mode. Specifically, when the unit game is played a prescribed number of times (40 times) in the pseudo-bonus C mode, the pseudo-bonus C mode is shifted to the AT state (AT basic mode). The AT basic mode is a mode different from the AT danger mode, and when "pressing order bell" (see FIG. 311) is determined as a sub-flag, the correct pressing order in the pressing order bell (FIGS. 310A and 310B) is always notified. Also, when the AT is won in the pseudo bonus A medium chance B & AT lottery performed during the pseudo bonus A mode (see step S2221 in FIG. 344), the game shifts to the AT basic mode (see step S2223 in FIG. 344).

In the chance B mode, a maximum of 5 sets are performed with 8 unit games as 1 set. In each set, an effect (battle effect) in which an ally character and an enemy character fight is performed, and when the ally character wins over the enemy character in the battle effect, the game is shifted to the AT state. The battle effect is performed only in the chance B mode. In this embodiment, different effects are performed in each mode in the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section, and the advantageous section. Note that the chance B mode (basic) and the chance B mode (special) are hereinafter also referred to as the chance B basic mode and the chance B special mode, respectively.

<Processing when moving to chance B>
FIG. 351 is a flow chart showing processing at the time of transition to chance B performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 352 is a diagram showing a lottery table for converting extra chance A points when entering chance B. FIG.

351 is performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S15 of FIG. 23 (main processing) (game end state control processing) when the current game section is the advantageous section. processing. The main CPU 101 can recognize the current game interval by referring to the game interval flag storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103 .

In the chance B transition process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current mode is the AT danger mode (step S2261). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the current mode is the AT danger mode by referring to the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103 .

When determining that the current mode is not the AT danger mode, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the chance B transition flag (see step S2230 in FIG. 344 and step S2248 in FIG. 347) is set to ON (step S2262). When determining that the chance B shift flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the chance B shift flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the chance A points (see step S2203 in FIG. 337) is 1 or more (step S2263). . When determining that the value of the chance A points is 1 or more, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for converting the remaining chance A points at the time of entering the chance B (step S2264). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the conversion lottery table for conversion of surplus chance A points when entering chance B (see FIG. 352), and conducts a lottery based on random numbers to determine the conversion lottery for converting remaining chance A points when entering chance B. As a result, one of "non-winning", "1%", "2%", "3%", "4%", "5%" and "10%" is determined.

In the lottery table for converting the remaining chance A points when entering the chance B shown in FIG. 352, the values of the chance A points Lottery values corresponding to conversion lottery results (“non-winning”, “1%”, “2%”, “3%”, “4%”, “5%”, and “10%”) are defined. In the figure, “1 chance A point left” indicates that the value of the chance A point is 1, and “2 extra chance A points” indicates that the value of the chance A point is 2. The probability that each result of the lottery that converts the remaining chance A points when entering the chance B is determined is "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all random values that can be extracted (random number denominator: 256 )”.

For example, if the value of the chance A point is 1, as a result of the chance A point conversion lottery at the time of entering the chance B, "1%" is determined with a probability of 219/256, and "1%" is determined with a probability of 32/256. 3%" is determined, 4/256 probability determines 5%, and 1/256 probability determines 10%. The main CPU 101 adds the percentage determined as the result of the lottery for converting the remaining chance A points when entering the chance B to the value of the chance B continuation rate information for addition (see step S2189 in FIG. 333). Then, the main CPU 101 clears (sets to "0") the value of the chance A points (step S2265).

In the above, the example in which the value of the remaining chance A points is converted into the value of the additional chance B continuation rate information has been described, but the value of the chance A points is converted into the value of the damage stock counter. You may do so. For example, if the value of the chance A point is 1, a lottery will determine "non-winning" or "damage stock + 1", and if the value of the chance A point is 2, a lottery will determine "damage stock + 1 ' or 'damage stock +2' may be determined (see step S2191 in FIG. 333). Further, when the value of the chance A point is 2, a fixed “damage stock +1” may be awarded without performing a lottery.

When determining in step S2263 that the chance A point value is less than 1 (0), or after executing the process of step S2265, the main CPU 101 executes the chance B continuation rate determination process (step S2266). In this process, the main CPU 101 calculates the chance B continuation rate determined by the chance B continuation rate lottery process (see step S2005 in FIG. 313) and the chance B continuation rate information for addition (step S2189 in FIG. 333, step S2228 in FIG. 344). , step S2243 in FIG. 347, and step S2264 in FIG. 351) are determined as the new chance B continuation rate. Then, the main CPU 101 clears (sets to "0") the value of the addition chance B continuation rate information, and terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2261 that the current mode is the AT danger mode, the main CPU 101 determines that the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell" (see FIG. 311). It is determined whether or not there is (step S2267). When determining that the sub-flag is not "press order bell", the main CPU 101 terminates this sub-routine.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the sub-flag is "push order bell", the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop operation has been performed in the correct press order (Figs. 310A and 310B) in the push order bell (step S2268). ). The main CPU 101 can recognize the order of stop operations for the respective reels 3L, 3C, and 3R by referring to the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 22) of the main RAM 103 . If the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation has been performed in the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the stopping operation is not performed in the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell, the main CPU 101 executes the AT danger end chance B continuation rate lottery (step S2269). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery based on a random number value to obtain “40%”, “50%”, “60%”, “70%”, “80%”, “ Either "90%" or "100%" is determined.

Then, main CPU 101 sets the chance B transition flag to ON (step S2270). As described above, the chance B transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the chance B mode (see step S2230 in FIG. 344). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start time state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the chance B shift flag is set to ON. . As a result, the mode is shifted to the chance B mode.

After executing the process of step S2270, the main CPU 101 executes a chance B continuation rate determination process (step S2271). In this process, the main CPU 101 calculates the chance B continuation rate determined by the AT danger end chance B continuation rate lottery (see step S2269) and the addition chance B continuation rate information (step S2189 in FIG. 333 and step S2228 in FIG. 344). , step S2243 in FIG. 347, and step S2264 in FIG. 351) are determined as the new chance B continuation rate. Then, the main CPU 101 clears (sets to "0") the value of the addition chance B continuation rate information, and terminates this subroutine.

<Process at start of game for advantageous section (chance B basic mode)>
FIG. 353 is a flow chart showing processing at the time of game start for advantageous section (chance B basic mode) performed in the main control circuit.

The advantageous section (chance B basic mode) game start time processing shown in FIG. 23 (main process), the process of step S6 (game start state control process). The main CPU 101 refers to the game interval flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103 to determine that the current game interval and mode are the advantageous interval and chance B basic mode, respectively. can recognize that

In the advantageous section (chance B basic mode) game start processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current unit game is the first game of the initial set (step S2281). As described above, in the chance B mode (chance B basic mode), the chance B transition flag (see step S2230 in FIG. 344, step S2248 in FIG. 347, and step S2270 in FIG. 351) is set to ON. It shifts in the game start time state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the next unit game of the game. In the state control process at the start of the game in the unit game that shifts to the chance B basic mode, after shifting to the chance B mode by updating the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20), the advantageous section shown in FIG. 353 continues. (Chance B basic mode) game start processing is performed.

Also, as described above, in the Chance B basic mode, a maximum of 5 sets are performed with 8 unit games as 1 set. In the process of step S2281, the main CPU 101 determines that the current unit game is one game of the first set (the first set out of a maximum of five sets) when the current unit game shifts to the chance B basic mode. It is determined that it is the second (the first unit game of the eight unit games that make up the set). When determining that the current unit game is the first game of the initial set, the main CPU 101 executes the process of the first game of the initial set during chance B (basic) (step S2282). The processing of the first game in the first set during chance B (basic) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S2282, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

When it is determined in step S2281 that the current unit game is not the first game of the first set, the main CPU 101 determines that the current unit game is the second set or later (the second to fifth sets of the maximum five sets). It is determined whether or not it is the first game (the first unit game out of the eight unit games constituting the set) (step S2283). When the chance B basic mode next set transition flag (see step S2409 in FIG. 365 and step S2428 in FIG. 366) is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines that the current unit game is the first game after the second set. can recognize something.

When determining that the current unit game is the first game after the second set, the main CPU 101 executes the process of the first game in chance B (basic) (step S2284). The processing of the first game during chance B (basic) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S2284, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2283 that the current unit game is not the first game after the second set (it is any of the second to eighth unit games among the eight unit games that make up the set), The main CPU 101 executes processing for the second and subsequent games during chance B (basic) (step S2285). The process for the second and subsequent games during chance B (basic) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S2285, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Chance B (basic) first set 1st game processing>
FIG. 354 is a flow chart showing processing for the first game in the first set during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit.

354. The processing of the first game in the first set during the chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 354 is the processing performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S2282 of FIG. .

In the process of the first game in Chance B (basic) first set, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not Chance B points have been inherited (step S2301). The main CPU 101 can recognize that the chance B points are inherited when the chance B inheritance points (see step S2445 in FIG. 368) are set.

When determining that the chance B points have not been inherited, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the chance B points to "5" (step S2302). The value of the chance B point corresponds to the remaining amount of hit points of the enemy character in the battle presentation performed during the chance B mode. When the value of the chance B point becomes 0, the ally character wins over the enemy character in the battle presentation, and shifts to the AT state. The value of the chance B points is stored in the main RAM 103, and an image (for example, a meter or the like) that allows the player to visually recognize the value (remaining amount) is displayed in the main effect display section .

On the other hand, when determining that the chance B points have been inherited, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the chance B inheritance points (see step S2445 in FIG. 368) as the value of the chance B points (step S2303). The value of the chance B handover point indicates the value of the chance B point handed over from the previous chance B mode, and is stored in the main RAM 103 . In addition, an image (a meter or the like) indicating the value of the chance B point taken over is displayed on the main effect display section 21 . Even if the chance B points are inherited, at the time when the process of step S2303 is performed, an image showing the initial value "5" is displayed as the value of the chance B points. (for example, when the damage amount is subtracted for the first time (see step S2342 in FIG. 359)), the display of the image may be updated on the premise of the inherited chance B point value. For example, if the value of the inherited chance B point is "3" and the damage amount to be subtracted for the first time is "1", the image showing "5" is changed to the image showing "2". good. After executing the process of step S2303, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the chance B handover points.

After executing the process of step S2302 or step S2303, the main CPU 101 executes the process of the first game in chance B (basic) (step S2304). The processing of the first game during chance B (basic) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S2304, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Processing of the 1st game during chance B (basic)>
FIG. 355 is a flow chart showing first game processing during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 356 is a diagram showing a chance B one-shot win lottery table. FIG. 357 is a diagram showing a chance B continuation lottery table. FIG. 358 is a diagram showing a lottery table for moving to Heaven after an AT is confirmed.

In the main control circuit 100, the first game process in chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 355 includes step S2284 in FIG. This is the process performed in step S2304 of (basic) middle first set first game process).

In the process of the first game in chance B (basic), first, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B (basic) game number counter to "8" (step S2321). The value of the chance B (basic) game number counter indicates the remaining number of executable unit games in the set, and is stored in the main RAM 103 .

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a chance B one-shot win lottery (step S2322). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the Chance B one-shot win lottery table (see FIG. 356) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine “win” or “non-win”.

In the Chance B one-shot win lottery table shown in FIG. Corresponds to the result of chance B one-shot victory lottery (“no winning” and “winning”) for each flag = “0” and “ball output mode 2 or number of games elapsed in advantageous section judgment flag = “1”” A lottery value is specified.

The payout mode is a parameter set in the AT basic mode and can take any value between 0 and 2. AT basic mode can be executed over 16 sets with 18 unit games as one set, and when each set starts, any value from 0 to 2 It is set as a payout mode. Specifically, when any one of the 1st, 2nd and 13th to 16th set starts, the ball payout mode is set to "0", and the 3rd and 4th When any set of the 12th time and the 12th time starts, "1" is set as the ball payout mode, and when any set of the 5th to 11th times starts. "2" is set as the ball mode. The payout mode is cleared when the advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section.

When it is decided to shift to the AT danger mode in the mode transition lottery held during the AT basic mode, the AT danger mode is started. Then, as described above, in the AT danger mode, "push order bell" (see FIG. 311) was determined as a sub-flag, but the stop operation was not performed (11 If no medals are paid out), the game shifts to the chance B mode (basic). Therefore, when the current chance B mode transition source mode is the AT danger mode (when transitioned to the chance B mode by route (III) shown in FIG. 350), the value of the payout mode is changed from the AT basic mode to the AT This is the value when transitioning to the danger mode (value corresponding to the number of sets performed in the AT basic mode until the transition). On the other hand, if the current chance B mode transition source mode is the pseudo-bonus A mode or the pseudo-bonus B mode (if the mode is shifted to the chance B mode by route (I) or (II) shown in FIG. 350), the ball is dispensed. The value of mode is "0".

In the figure, "ball-out mode 0 or 1 and advantageous interval elapsed game number determination flag = "0"" means that the value of the ball-out mode is "0" or "1" and the advantageous interval elapsed game number determination flag is is not set to ON, and the "ball-out mode 2 or advantageous interval-elapsed game number determination flag = "1"" indicates that the value of the ball-out mode is "2" or the advantageous interval-elapsed game Indicates that the number judgment flag is set to ON. The probability that each result of the Chance B one-shot winning lottery will be determined is represented by the "lottery value specified for the result / the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". be able to.

That is, when the value of the ball-out mode is "0" or "1" and the number-of-elapsed-games determination flag for the advantageous section is not set to ON, the chance B one-shot win is given with a probability of 2/256. Win a lottery. Also, when the value of the payout mode is "2", or when the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is set to ON, the chance B one-shot victory lottery is won with a probability of 1/256. do.

After executing the process of step S2322, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the chance B one-shot win lottery is won (step S2323). When determining that the chance B one-shot win lottery has been won, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the chance B points (see steps S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 354) to "0" (step S2324). Also, although not shown, the main CPU 101 adds the value of chance B points before executing the process of step S2324 to the value of the damage stock counter (see step S2191 in FIG. 333 and step S2245 in FIG. 347).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B one shot win flag to ON (step S2325). The chance B one-shot win flag is a flag indicating that the chance B one-shot win lottery has been won. Then, the main CPU 101 sets the AT confirmation state flag to ON (step S2326). The AT confirmed state flag is a flag indicating that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed.

If it is determined in step S2323 that the chance B one-shot win lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 checks whether the value of the damage stock counter (see step S2191 in FIG. 333 and step S2245 in FIG. 347) is "1" or more. It is determined whether or not (step S2327). When determining that the value of the damage stock counter is less than "1" (0), the main CPU 101 executes a chance B continuation lottery (step S2328). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the Chance B continuation lottery table (see FIG. 357) and performs a lottery based on a random value to determine "won" or "non-won".

In the chance B continuation lottery table shown in FIG. /256 quotient)” and “256−{(2×integer part of continuation rate)+((144×integer part of continuation rate)/quotient of 256)}”. The “continuation rate” is the chance B continuation rate (see steps S2266 and S2271) determined by the chance B transition process (see FIG. 351). For example, when the chance B continuation rate is 60%, the lottery value corresponding to the "winning" is (2×60)+(quotient of (144×60)/256)=120+33=153. Therefore, in this case, the Chance B continuation lottery is won with a probability of 153/256≈60%. After executing the process of step S2328, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the chance B continuation lottery is won (step S2329).

When determining in step S2327 that the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the damage stock counter (step S2330). Then, when determining that the chance B continuation lottery is won in step S2329, or after executing the process of step S2330, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B continuation flag to ON (step S2331). The chance B continuation flag is a flag indicating that it is possible to shift to the next set in the chance B basic mode. Therefore, when the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or more, it is possible to shift to the next set in the chance B basic mode without performing the chance B continuation lottery.

After executing the processing of step S2331, the main CPU 101 executes processing dedicated to the first game in chance B (basic) (step S2332). The dedicated processing for the first game in chance B (basic) will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the processing of step S2332, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the AT confirmation state flag (see step S2350 in FIG. 359) is set to ON (step S2333). When determining that the AT fixed state flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B continuation flag to OFF (step S2334).

After executing the process of step S2326 or step S2334, the main CPU 101 executes a lottery for moving to heaven after AT is confirmed (step S2335). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery based on the put-out ball flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and a random value with reference to the lottery table (see FIG. 358) for moving to heaven after the AT has been determined. "Winning" or "Non-winning" is determined as a result of the heaven transfer lottery after the definite state.

In the lottery table for moving to heaven after the AT confirmed state shown in FIG. LV5" and "Rare LV6"), the lottery values corresponding to the lottery results ("non-winning" and "winning") of the heaven transfer lottery after the AT confirmed state are defined. The probability that each result of the heaven transfer lottery after the AT fixed state is determined is determined by the "lottery value specified for the result / the number of all random numbers that can be extracted (random number denominator: 256)" can be represented. For example, when the output ball flag group (normal) is "rare LV3", the lottery for moving to heaven after the AT fixed state is won with a probability of 2/256. When a lottery for moving to heaven is won after the AT has been determined, the main CPU 101 sets the lottery winning flag for moving to heaven to ON. The paradigm shift lottery winning flag is a flag indicating that the paradigm shift lottery after the AT fixed state has been won.

If it is determined in step S2329 that the chance B continuation lottery has not been won, or if it is determined in step S2333 that the AT confirmed state flag has not been set to ON, the main CPU 101 performs common processing during chance B (basic). is executed (step S2336). Common processing during chance B (basic) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of step S2335 or step S2336, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the chance B (basic) game number counter (see step S2321) (step S2337). Then, the main CPU 101 executes the processing for Bell Navi during the chance B (step S2338). The Bell Navi processing during chance B will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S2338, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Dedicated processing for the first game during chance B (basic)>
FIG. 359 is a flow chart showing processing dedicated to the first game in chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 360 is a diagram showing a set start damage amount lottery table. FIG. 361 is a diagram showing a follow-up number determination lottery table.

359. The dedicated process for the first game in chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 359 is the process performed in main control circuit 100 in step S2332 of FIG.

In the processing dedicated to the first game during chance B (basic), first, the main CPU 101 executes a set start damage amount lottery (step S2341). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the damage amount lottery table at the start of set (see FIG. 360) and performs a lottery based on random numbers. , "damage amount 2", "damage amount 3", "damage amount 4", and "damage amount 5".

In the set start damage amount lottery table shown in FIG. 360, the set start damage amount lottery result (“damage amount 1 , ``damage amount 2'', ``damage amount 3'', ``damage amount 4'', and ``damage amount 5''). In the figure, "ball-out mode 0, 1" indicates that the ball-out mode value is "0" or "1", and "ball-out mode 2" indicates that the ball-out mode value is "2". indicates that there is The payout mode is as described above (see FIG. 356).

The probability that each result of the damage amount lottery at the start of the set will be determined is expressed by the "lottery value specified for the result / number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". be able to. For example, when the ball output mode value is "0", as a result of the damage amount lottery at the start of the set, "damage amount 1" is determined with a probability of 172/256, and "damage amount 1" is determined with a probability of 79/256. Amount 2” is determined, a “damage amount 3” is determined with a probability of 4/256, and a “damage amount 5” is determined with a probability of 1/256.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts the damage amount from the value of chance B points (see steps S2302 and S2303 in FIG. 354) (step S2342). In this process, if the result of the damage amount lottery at the start of set is "damage amount 1", the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the value of chance B points, and the result of the damage amount lottery at the start of set is "damage amount If the amount is 2", subtract 2 from the chance B point value, and if the result of the damage amount lottery at the start of the set is 3 damage amount, subtract 3 from the chance B point value. , If the result of the damage amount lottery at the start of the set is "damage amount 4", "4" is subtracted from the value of the chance B point, and if the result of the damage amount lottery at the start of the set is "damage amount 5", "5" is subtracted from the value of chance B points. Since the lower limit of the chance B point value is "0", the main CPU 101 sets the chance B point value to "0" when the chance B point value after the subtraction is negative.

Then, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of chance B points after subtraction is "0" (step S2343). When determining that the value of the chance B point after subtraction is not "0", the main CPU 101 executes a follow-up attack number determination lottery (step S2344). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the follow-up number determination lottery table (see FIG. 361) and performs a lottery based on random numbers. , ``Pursuit number 2'', ``Pursuit number 3'', and ``Pursuit number 4''.

In the chase number determination lottery table shown in FIG. 361, a chase number determination lottery is performed for each presence or absence of damage stock (see step S2191 in FIG. 333 and step S2245 in FIG. 347) (“no damage stock” and “with damage stock”). ("non-winning", "follow-up number 1", "follow-up number 2", "follow-up number 3", and "follow-up number 4"). In the figure, "no damage stock" indicates that the value of the damage stock counter is "0", and "with damage stock" indicates that the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or more.

The probability that each result of the follow-up number determination lottery will be determined can be expressed by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can. For example, when the value of the damage stock counter is "0", as a result of the follow-up number determination lottery, "non-winning" is determined with a probability of 219/256, and "follow-up number 1" is determined with a probability of 35/256. is determined, and "follow-up number 2" is determined with a probability of 2/256. If the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or more, the follow-up number determination lottery will always be won, and a higher follow-up number will be determined compared to the case where the value of the damage stock counter is "0". It is easier to be

Next, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the damage stock counter is greater than or equal to "1" (step S2345). When determining that the value of the damage stock counter is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the damage stock counter (step S2346). When it is determined in step S2345 that the value of the damage stock counter is less than "1" (0), or after executing the process of step S2346, the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the follow-up number determination lottery is a winner ("follow-up number 1”, “follow-up number 2”, “follow-up number 3”, or “follow-up number 4”) (step S2347).

When determining that the result of the follow-up number determination lottery is none of "follow-up number 1," "follow-up number 2," "follow-up number 3," and "follow-up number 4," the main CPU 101 executes this subroutine. finish. On the other hand, when determining that the result of the follow-up number determination lottery is any of "follow-up number 1," "follow-up number 2," "follow-up number 3," and "follow-up number 4," the main CPU 101 A chase number is set (step S2348).

In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the follow-up number to "1" when the result of the follow-up number determination lottery is "follow-up number 1", and the result of the follow-up number determination lottery is "follow-up number 2". , set the follow-up number value to "2", and if the result of the follow-up number determination lottery is "follow-up number 3", set the follow-up number value to "3", and the result of the follow-up number determination lottery is " If the follow-up number is 4", set the value of the follow-up number to "4". If the result of the follow-up number determination lottery is "non-winning", the value of the follow-up number is "0". The follow-up number value is stored in the main RAM 103 and used in the chance B special mode (see FIG. 373).

Next, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of chance B points is less than or equal to the follow-up number (step S2349). When determining that the chance B point value is greater than the follow-up number value, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2343 that the value of the chance B point after subtraction is "0", or if it is determined in step S2349 that the value of the chance B point is equal to or less than the value of the follow-up attack number, the main CPU 101 The AT fixed state flag is set to ON (step S2350). As described above, the AT confirmed state flag is a flag indicating that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed (see step S2326 in FIG. 355). After executing the process of step S2350, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Common processing during chance B (basic)>
FIG. 362 is a flowchart showing common processing during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit. 363 is a diagram showing a rewrite lottery table during chance B. FIG.

The common processing during chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 362 is processing performed in main control circuit 100 in step S2336 of FIG.

In the common process during chance B (basic), first, the main CPU 101 executes a rewrite lottery during chance B (step S2361). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the mid-chance B rewrite lottery table (see FIG. 363), and performs a lottery based on the ball output flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and the random number value. As a result of the rewriting lottery, among "non-winning", "continuation", "continuation & pursuit number + 1", "continuation & pursuit number + 2", "continuation & pursuit number + 3", and "continuation & pursuit number + 4" to determine which of

In the rewrite lottery table during chance B shown in FIG. , and "rare LV6"), the result of the rewrite lottery during chance B ("non-winning", "continuation", "continuation & pursuit number + 1", "continuation & pursuit number + 2", "continuation & pursuit number + 3 ”, and “continuation & follow-up number +4”). The probability that each result of the rewrite lottery during chance B will be determined is expressed by "the lottery value specified for the relevant result/the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can be done.

The mid-chance B rewrite lottery table is provided for each presence or absence of the chance B continuation flag (see step S2331 in FIG. 355). If the chance B continuation flag is not set on, the rewrite lottery table during chance B shown in FIG. The rewrite lottery table during chance B shown in b) is referred to. For example, when the chance B continuation flag is not set to ON, if the ball output flag group (normal) is "rare LV3", as a result of the rewrite lottery during chance B, with a probability of 128/256 " "Non-winning" is determined, "continuation" is determined with a probability of 116/256, and "continuation & follow-up number + 1" is determined with a probability of 12/256.

After executing the process of step S2361, the main CPU 101 determines whether the result of the rewrite lottery during chance B includes a follow-up number (“Continuation & follow-up number +1”, “Continue & follow-up number +2”, “Continue & follow-up number +3”). , or "continuation & follow-up number +4") (step S2362). During chance B, it is determined that the result of the rewrite lottery is one of "Continuation & follow-up number + 1", "Continue & follow-up number + 2", "Continue & follow-up number + 3", and "Continue & follow-up number + 4" If so, the main CPU 101 updates the value of the follow-up attack number (see step S2348 in FIG. 359) (step S2363).

In this process, if the result of the rewrite lottery during Chance B is "Continue & follow-up number +1", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the follow-up number, and if the result of the Rewrite lottery during Chance B is "Continue & If it is "follow-up number +2", add "2" to the follow-up number value, and if the result of the rewrite lottery during chance B is "continue & follow-up number +3", add "3" to the follow-up number value. , If the result of the rewriting lottery during chance B is "continuation & follow-up number + 4", add "4" to the value of the follow-up number.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of chance B points is equal to or less than the value of the follow-up attack number (step S2364). In step S2362, the result of the rewriting lottery during chance B is none of "continuation & follow-up number +1", "continuation & follow-up number +2", "continuation & follow-up number +3", and "continuation & follow-up number +4". or if it is determined in step S2364 that the value of the chance B points is greater than the value of the follow-up attack number, the main CPU 101 turns on the chance B continuation flag (see step S2331 in FIG. 355). It is determined whether or not there is (step S2365).

When determining that the chance B continuation flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, if the main CPU 101 determines that the chance B continuation flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the chance B rewriting lottery includes continuation (“continuation”, “continuation & follow-up number +1”, “continuation & (Step S2366).

The result of the rewriting lottery during chance B is one of "Continue", "Continue & follow-up number + 1", "Continue & follow-up number + 2", "Continue & follow-up number + 3", and "Continue & follow-up number + 4" If the main CPU 101 determines that it is not, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine. On the other hand, the result of the rewriting lottery during chance B is "continuation", "continuation & pursuit number + 1", "continuation & pursuit number + 2", "continuation & pursuit number + 3", and "continuation & pursuit number + 4" If it is determined to be either, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B continuation flag to ON (step S2367).

The main CPU 101 then executes the processes of steps S2368 to S2370, which are the same as the processes of steps S2341 to S2343 in FIG. When determining in step S2370 that the value of chance B points after subtraction is not "0", main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2364 that the value of the chance B point is equal to or less than the follow-up number, or if it is determined in step S2370 that the value of the chance B point after subtraction is "0", the main CPU 101 performs AT A fixed state flag is set to ON (step S2371). As described above, the AT confirmed state flag is a flag indicating that the transition to the AT state has been confirmed (see step S2326 in FIG. 355 and step S2350 in FIG. 359). After executing the process of step S2371, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B continuation flag to OFF (step S2372), and terminates this subroutine.

Here, as described above, when the AT fixed state flag is set to ON in step S2326 of FIG. 355 to step S2350 of FIG. is performed (see step S2335 in FIG. 355). On the other hand, when the AT confirmed state flag is set to ON in step S2371 of FIG. 362 in one unit game, the lottery for moving to heaven after the AT confirmed state is performed from the next unit game (step S2384 of FIG. 364). reference).

It should be noted that the heaven transfer lottery after the AT is determined and the rewrite lottery during chance B (see step S2361 in FIG. 362) are described as being performed in the process (game start state control process) of step S6 in FIG. 23 (main process). However, these processes may be performed in the process (game end state control process) of step S15 in FIG. 23 (main process). For example, when the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is other than "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), the process (game On the other hand, when the sub-flag is "press order bell", these processes are performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process). may be performed.

When these processes are performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) of FIG. 23 (main process), the payout flag group ( normal) may be different. For example, when the sub-flag is "push order bell", if 11 medals are paid out, the payout flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) corresponding to the character is determined, while 11 If no medals are paid out, "0" may be determined as the payout flag group (normal) number regardless of the character.

<Processing after the 2nd game during chance B (basic)>
FIG. 364 is a flow chart showing processing after the second game during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit.

364 is the process performed by the main control circuit 100 in step S2285 of FIG.

In the process for the second and subsequent games during chance B (basic), first, the main CPU 101 executes the process for winning in one chance B (step S2381). The chance B one-shot winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of step S2381, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the AT confirmation state flag (see step S2326 in FIG. 355, step S2350 in FIG. 359, and step S2371 in FIG. 362) is set to ON. (step S2382). When determining that the AT definite state flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the heaven transition lottery winning flag (see step S2335 in FIG. 355) is set to ON (step S2383). If the main CPU 101 determines that the heaven transition lottery winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the heaven transition lottery after the AT has been determined (step S2384). Since this process is the same as the process of step S2335 in FIG. 355, the description is omitted here.

When determining in step S2382 that the AT definite state flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes common processing during chance B (basic) (step S2385). Since the common processing during chance B (basic) is as described with reference to FIG. 362, description thereof will be omitted here.

If it is determined in step S2383 that the heaven transfer lottery winning flag is set to ON, or after executing the processing in step S2384 or step S2385, the main CPU 101 executes the final game ( It is determined whether or not it is the eighth unit game out of the eight unit games constituting the set (step S2386). The main CPU 101 can recognize how many unit games the current unit game is by referring to the value of the chance B (basic) game number counter (see step S2321 in FIG. 355).

When determining that the current unit game is the final game in one set, the main CPU 101 executes final game processing during chance B (basic) (step S2387). The final game processing during chance B (basic) will be described later with reference to FIG.

When it is determined in step S2386 that the current unit game is not the final game in one set, or after executing the processing of step S2387, the main CPU 101 executes the processing of steps S2388 and S2389. Since the processing is the same as the processing in steps S2337 and S2338 in FIG. 355, description thereof is omitted here. After executing the process of step S2389, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Last game processing during chance B (basic)>
FIG. 365 is a flow chart showing final game processing during chance B (basic) performed in the main control circuit.

The final game processing during chance B (basic) shown in FIG. 365 is processing performed in main control circuit 100 in step S2387 of FIG.

In the final game processing during chance B (basic), first, the main CPU 101 determines whether the AT fixed state flag (see step S2326 in FIG. 355, step S2350 in FIG. 359, and step S2371 in FIG. 362) is set to ON. It is determined whether or not (step S2401). When determining that the AT confirmation state flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the follow-up attack number is greater than or equal to "1" (step S2402). If the result of the follow-up number determination lottery (see step S2344 in FIG. 359) is winning (“follow-up number 1,” “follow-up number 2,” “follow-up number 3,” or “follow-up number 4”), or a chance The result of the rewrite lottery (see step S2361 in FIG. Follow-up number 4"), the value of the follow-up number is "1" or more.

When determining that the value of the follow-up number is less than "1" (0), the main CPU 101 determines whether the heaven transfer lottery winning flag (see step S2335 in FIG. 355 and step S2384 in FIG. 364) is set to ON. (step S2403). When determining that the heaven transition lottery winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the AT basic mode transition flag to ON (step S2404). The AT basic mode transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the AT basic mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the AT basic mode shift flag is set to ON. do. As a result, the AT basic mode is entered. After executing the process of step S2404, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

When determining in step S2403 that the lottery winning flag for transition to heaven is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the AT heaven mode transition flag to ON (step S2405). The AT heaven mode transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the AT heaven mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the AT heaven mode shift flag is set to ON. do. As a result, it shifts to the AT heaven mode. The AT heaven mode is one of the controllable modes in the AT state, and is more advantageous to the player than the AT basic mode. After executing the process of step S2405, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

As described above, in the AT danger mode, when the sub-flag is "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), a lottery (bel-navi generation lottery) is performed to determine whether or not to generate the bernavi. When the occurrence lottery is won, the order of pressing the correct answer is reported (see FIG. 350). Here, in the AT basic mode and the AT heaven mode, a lottery (avoidance rate lottery) is performed to increase the probability (avoidance rate) of winning the Bell Navi generation lottery performed during the AT danger mode. In addition, in the AT heaven mode, the avoidance rate lottery is performed with a higher probability (or the probability of winning the avoidance rate lottery is higher) than in the AT basic mode, making it easier to increase the avoidance rate. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, in the AT danger mode, even if the sub-flag is "push order bell" (see FIG. 311) and the stop operation could not be performed due to the correct push order, the predetermined character is stocked (if the number of stocks is "1" or more), the end of the AT state can be avoided. A predetermined character can be cumulatively stocked, and can perform the avoidance the number of times corresponding to the number of stocks (for example, three times if the number of stocks is "3"). Here, in the AT basic mode and the AT heaven mode, a lottery (character stock lottery) for adding the stock number is performed. In addition, in the AT heaven mode, the character stock lottery is performed with a higher probability (or the probability of winning the character stock lottery is higher) than in the AT basic mode, making it easier to increase the stock number. there is

When determining in step S2402 that the value of the follow-up attack number is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B special mode transition flag to ON (step S2406). The chance B special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the chance B special mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the chance B special mode is set to ON. . As a result, the game shifts to the chance B special mode. After executing the process of step S2406, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

From the above, when the AT determination state flag (see step S2326 in FIG. 355, step S2350 in FIG. 359, and step S2371 in FIG. 362) is set to ON in one set in the chance B basic mode, the When the set ends, it shifts to the AT state (AT basic mode or AT heaven mode), or after shifting to the chance B special mode, when the chance B special mode ends, the AT state (AT basic mode or AT heaven mode) (see steps S2529 and S2530 in FIG. 373).

When determining in step S2401 that the AT definite state flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the chance B continuation flag (see step S2331 in FIG. 355 and step S2367 in FIG. 362) is set to ON. is determined (step S2407). When determining that the chance B continuation flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the follow-up attack number is greater than or equal to "1" (step S2408).

When determining that the follow-up number is less than "1" (0), the main CPU 101 sets the chance B basic mode next set transition flag to ON (step S2409). The chance B basic mode next set transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the next set in the chance B basic mode. The main CPU 101, in the state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) at the start of the game in the unit game next to the unit game in which the chance B basic mode next set transition flag is set to ON, performs the next set in the chance B basic mode. (see step S2284 in FIG. 353). After executing the process of step S2409, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

When determining in step S2408 that the value of the follow-up attack number is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B special mode transition flag to ON (step S2410). The chance B special mode transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the chance B special mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the chance B special mode is set to ON. . As a result, the game shifts to the chance B special mode. After executing the process of step S2410, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

When determining in step S2407 that the chance B continuation flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the final game process when chance B is not continued (step S2411). The final game processing when chance B is not continued will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S2411, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Processing during final game when chance B is discontinued>
FIG. 366 is a flow chart showing the final game process when chance B is not continued, which is performed in the main control circuit. 367 is a diagram showing a time retrospective lottery table at the end of chance B. FIG.

The final game processing when chance B is not continued shown in FIG. 366 is processing performed in main control circuit 100 in step S2411 of FIG. 365 (final game processing during chance B (basic)).

In the last game processing when chance B is discontinued, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the sub-flag set by the sub-flag etc. setting processing (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "special winning" (see FIG. 311). It judges (step S2421). When determining that the sub-flag is "special combination", the main CPU 101 executes ending transition lottery (step S2422). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines "won" or "non-won" by performing a lottery based on random numbers. As a result, the ending transition lottery is won with a probability of 6/256.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the ending transition lottery is won (step S2423). When determining that the ending transition lottery is won, the main CPU 101 sets the AT ending mode transition flag to ON (step S2424). The AT ending mode transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the AT ending mode. The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start time state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the AT ending mode transition flag is set to ON. do. This causes the transition to the AT ending mode. After executing the process of step S2424, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

The AT ending mode is one of the controllable modes in the AT state, and is a mode that continues until the transition to the non-advantageous section (see FIG. 312). As described in the first embodiment, when the limit process (see FIG. 16) is executed in the advantageous interval (that is, a predetermined value updated as the game progresses in the advantageous interval (for example, the number of games in the advantageous interval When the value of the counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) reaches a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 coins), the advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section. This also terminates the AT ending mode.

If it is determined in step S2421 that the sub-flag is not "special role", or if it is determined in step S2423 that the ending transition lottery has not been won, the main CPU 101 determines the chance B point value (steps S2302 and (see step S2303) is "5" (step S2425). When the chance B continuation flag is set to ON in one set in the chance B basic mode, the value of the chance B points in the set is always subtracted by 1 or more (step S2342 in FIG. 359 and step S2342 in FIG. 362). S2369 reference). Therefore, the fact that the chance B point value is "5" means that the current set is the first set (the first set out of a maximum of five sets).

When determining in step S2425 that the value of the chance B points is "5", the main CPU 101 executes a time retrospective lottery at the end of the chance B (step S2426). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the time retrospective lottery table at the end of Chance B (see FIG. 367) and performs a lottery based on random numbers to determine "win" or "non-win".

In the time retrospective lottery table at the end of chance B shown in FIG. For each determination flag = "0" and "determination flag for the number of games played in ball mode 2 or the number of games that have passed the advantageous section = "1"", the result of the retrograde lottery at the end of the chance B ("non-winning" and "winning") A lottery value corresponding to is specified.

In the figure, "ball output mode 0, 1 and advantageous interval elapsed game number determination flag = "0"" means that the value of the ball output mode is "0" or "1" and the advantageous interval elapsed game number determination flag is is not set to ON, and the "ball-out mode 2 or advantageous interval-elapsed game number determination flag = "1"" indicates that the value of the ball-out mode is "2" or the advantageous interval-elapsed game Indicates that the number judgment flag is set to ON. The payout mode is as described above (see FIG. 356). The probability that each result of the retrospective lottery at the end of chance B will be determined is determined by the "lottery value specified for the result/the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can be represented.

That is, when the value of the ball-out mode is "0" or "1" and the number-of-games-elapsed-advantage-section determination flag is not set to ON, there is a probability of 32/256 that the chance B end time Win the retro lottery. Also, if the value of the payout mode is "2" and if the flag for judging the number of games after the advantageous interval is set to ON, there is a probability of 1/256 that the retrograde lottery will be performed at the end of Chance B. Win.

After executing the process of step S2426, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the retrospective time lottery at the end of chance B is won (step S2427). When determining that the time retrospective lottery at the end of chance B has been won, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B basic mode next set transition flag to ON (step S2428). The chance B basic mode next set shift flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the next set in the chance B basic mode (see step S2409 in FIG. 365). The main CPU 101, in the state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) at the start of the game in the unit game next to the unit game in which the chance B basic mode next set transition flag is set to ON, performs the next set in the chance B basic mode. (see step S2284 in FIG. 353).

After executing the process of step S2428, the main CPU 101 sets the time retrospective lottery win Bell Navi permission flag to ON (step S2429). The time retrospective lottery winning Bell Navi permission flag is a flag used for performing Bell Navi in the chance B mode. When the time retrograde lottery is won at the end of the chance B, the correct order of pushing is notified when the pushing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination from the first unit game in the next set to the end of the chance B mode. (See Figure 372). After executing the process of step S2429, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2425 that the value of chance B points is not "5", or if it is determined in step S2427 that the retrograde lottery at the end of chance B has not been won, the main CPU 101 performs processing at the end of chance B. (step S2430). The process at the end of chance B will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S2430, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Processing at the end of chance B>
FIG. 368 is a flow chart showing processing at the end of chance B performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 369 is a diagram showing a lottery table for inheriting chance B points at the end of chance B. FIG.

368. The process at the end of chance B shown in FIG. 368 is the process performed in main control circuit 100 in step S2430 of FIG.

In the chance B end processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the end of the advantageous section is confirmed (step S2441). As described above, three routes are provided as transition routes to the chance B mode (see FIG. 350). 3), when the current chance B mode ends, the advantageous section ends and the mode shifts to the non-advantageous section. Also, when the value of the ceiling counter reaches the number of ceiling games (851) (reaching the ceiling), the game shifts to a pseudo bonus (see step S2023 in FIG. 317). Also, when the current chance B mode ends, the advantageous section also ends, and shifts to the non-advantageous section.

In the process of step S2441, the main CPU 101 determines that the advantageous section ends when the current chance B mode transition source mode is the AT danger mode, or when the chance B mode is transitioned via reaching the ceiling. determine that it is fixed. Information indicating that the current chance B mode transition source mode is the AT danger mode and information indicating that the current chance B mode has transitioned to the chance B mode via reaching the ceiling are stored in the main RAM 103 and are stored in the main CPU 101. can recognize the transition route to the chance B mode.

When determining in step S2441 that the end of the advantageous section has not been confirmed, main CPU 101 executes a lottery to take over chance B points at the end of chance B (step S2442). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the lottery table for taking over chance B points at the end of chance B (see FIG. 369) and performs a lottery based on a random number value. , “non-winning + end of advantageous section”, “non-winning + continuation of advantageous section”, and “winning + continuation of advantageous section”.

In the lottery table for taking over chance B points at the end of chance B shown in FIG. , For each "advantage section elapsed game number determination flag is '1'", chance B point handover lottery results at the end of chance B ("non-winning + advantageous section end", "non-winning + advantageous section continued", A lottery value corresponding to "winning + continuation of advantageous section") is defined.

In the figure, "advantage interval elapsed game number determination flag is '0'" means that when the current chance B mode transitions to the pseudo-bonus (pseudo-bonus A mode or pseudo-bonus B mode), the advantageous interval elapse game Indicates that the number determination flag is not set to ON, and "advantageous interval elapsed game number determination flag is '1'" means that the current chance B mode transition source pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode or pseudo bonus B mode ), the flag for determining the number of games after the advantageous section has been set to ON. Chance B point inheritance at the end of chance B The probability that each result of the lottery will be determined is "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256) ” can be represented by

For example, when the current chance B mode transitions to the pseudo bonus (pseudo bonus A mode or pseudo bonus B mode) from which the current chance B mode is shifted, if the advantageous section elapsed game number determination flag is not set to ON, the chance B As a result of the lottery for taking over chance B points at the end, "non-winning + end of advantageous section" is determined with a probability of 192/256, "non-winning + continuation of advantageous section" is determined with a probability of 32/256, and 32/256 “Winning + continuation of advantageous section” is determined with a probability of .

After executing the process of step S2442, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the lottery for taking over chance B points at the end of chance B is the continuation of the advantageous section (“non-winning + continuation of the advantageous section” or “winning + continuation of the advantageous section”). (step S2443). Chance B Points Takeover at the End of Chance B When determining that the result of the lottery is either "non-winning + continuation of the advantageous section" or "winning + continuation of the advantageous section", the main CPU 101 transfers the chance B at the end of the chance B. It is determined whether or not the result of the point takeover lottery is "winning + continuation of advantageous section" (step S2444).

Chance B points taken over at the end of chance B When it is determined that the result of the lottery is “winning + continuation of advantageous section”, the value of chance B points (step S2342 in FIG. 359, step S2342 in FIG. S2369 and step S2526 in FIG. 373) is set (step S2445). As a result, the value of the chance B point is carried over to the next chance B mode (see step S2303 in FIG. 354).

If it is determined in step S2444 that the lottery result of taking over chance B points at the end of chance B is not “winning + continuation of advantageous section”, or after executing the process of step S2445, main CPU 101 turns on the normal transition flag. set (step S2446). As described above, the normal shift flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the normal mode (see step S2183 in FIG. 333). The main CPU 101 updates the mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the normal transition flag is set to ON. Thereby, it shifts to an advantageous section (normal mode).

If it is determined in step S2441 that the advantageous section ends, or in step S2443, the chance B points are taken over at the end of chance B. If the main CPU 101 determines that it is neither "continuation" (it is "non-winning + end of advantageous section"), the main CPU 101 sets the non-advantageous section transition flag to ON (step S2447). The non-advantageous section transition flag is a flag indicating that it is time to start the non-advantageous section. The main CPU 101 stores a game interval flag storage area (not shown) in the game start state control process (see step S6 in FIG. 23) in the unit game next to the unit game in which the non-advantageous interval transition flag is set to ON. Update. As a result, it shifts to a non-advantageous section.

After executing the process of step S2446 or step S2447, the main CPU 101 clears (sets to "0") the value of chance B points (step S2448). After that, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Chance B one-shot victory process>
FIG. 370 is a flow chart showing a chance B one-shot winning process performed in the main control circuit.

The Chance B one shot win process shown in FIG. 370 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 at step S2381 of FIG.

In the chance B one-shot winning process, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current unit game is the second game in one set (the second unit game out of the eight unit games constituting the set). (step S2461). The main CPU 101 can recognize how many unit games the current unit game is by referring to the value of the chance B (basic) game number counter (see step S2321 in FIG. 355).

When determining that the current unit game is not the second game in one set, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. On the other hand, when determining that the current unit game is the second game in one set, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the Chance B one shot win flag (see step S2325 in FIG. 355) is set to ON. (step S2462). If the main CPU 101 determines that the chance B one shot win flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the Chance B one-shot victory flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets the Chance B one-shot victory music output flag to ON (step S2463). The chance B one-shot victory music output flag is a flag indicating that it is time to output the chance B one-shot victory music. The chance B one-shot win processing shown in FIG. 370 is performed in the advantageous section (chance B basic mode) game start processing (see FIG. 353), and the advantageous section (chance B basic mode) game start processing is performed. Upon completion, start command generation and storage processing (see step S7 in FIG. 23) is performed.

In the start command generation and storage process, the main CPU 101 generates start command data and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103 . The start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). When the music output flag for chance B one-shot victory is set to ON, information indicating the music output flag for chance B one-shot victory is included in the start command data. As a result, in the sub-control circuit 200, the music output flag for chance B one-shot victory is set to ON, that is, the chance B one-shot victory lottery (see step S2323 in FIG. 355) was won in the previous unit game. can recognize what you have done.

Then, with the reception of the start command data as a trigger, the sub CPU 201 of the sub-control circuit 200 sets production data corresponding to the Chance B one-shot victory music (audio data for chance B one-shot victory music). . Chance B one-shot winning music audio data is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 202 (see FIG. 3). By setting the audio data, the music for chance B one-shot victory is output from the speakers 35a and 35b (see FIG. 2). The music for chance B one-shot victory is BGM that is reproduced only when the chance B one-shot victory lottery is won.

If you win the chance B one-shot win lottery in the first game of one set in the chance B basic mode (the first unit game out of the eight unit games that make up the set), chance B one-shot win The time music is immediately after the start command generation and storage processing in the second game of the set (the second unit game out of the eight unit games that make up the set) (for example, when the start lever 7 is operated). It is continuously output from within 500 ms (or 250 ms or 100 ms) after the end of the set. Then, when the set is finished, the mode shifts to the AT state (AT basic mode or AT heaven mode) (see steps S2404 and S2405 in FIG. 365).

After executing the process of step S2463, the main CPU 101 sets the lock effect start flag for one chance B win to ON (step S2464). The chance B one-shot win lock effect start flag is a flag indicating that it is time to execute the chance B one-shot win lock effect. The lock effect at chance B one-shot victory will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S2464, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B one shot win flag to OFF (step S2465), and terminates this subroutine.

<Chance B one-shot win lock effect execution processing>
FIG. 371 is a flow chart showing lock effect execution processing at chance B one-shot victory performed in the main control circuit.

The chance B one-hit win lock effect execution process shown in FIG. 371 is a process performed in the main control circuit 100 in step S8 (game start main effect control process) of FIG. 23 (main process).

In the chance B one-shot win lock effect execution processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the chance B one-shot win lock effect start flag (see step S2464 in FIG. 370) is set to ON (step S2481). If the main CPU 101 determines that the lock effect start flag at chance B one-shot victory is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine.

On the other hand, when determining that the lock effect start flag for chance B one-shot win is set to ON, the main CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms) to the lock timer (step S2482). The lock timer is updated by timer update processing (see step S206 in FIG. 32). That is, the lock timer is decremented by 1 each time the periodic interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes a lock effect start command generation/storage process at chance B one-shot win (step S2483). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates lock effect start command data for chance B one-shot win, and stores the generated command data for lock effect start for chance B one-shot win in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103 . Chance B first win lock effect start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the chance B one-hit win lock effect has started, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Next, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lock timer is 0 (step S2484). When determining that the lock timer is not 0, the main CPU 101 executes the process of step S2484 again. As a result, the chance B one-shot victory lock effect is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 2000 ms). The lock effect at the time of chance B one-shot victory may be a lock effect (freeze) that does not involve reel effects and pseudo-games, or reel effects (reel actions such as slow rotation, high-speed rotation, reverse rotation, etc.) to pseudo-games ( For example, it may be a lock effect accompanied by the pseudo game described in the present embodiment and the above-described embodiment. The reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are maintained in a stopped state while the chance B one-hit-win lock performance is being performed, and even if the player performs any operation, the operation is invalid.

On the other hand, when determining that the lock timer is 0, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "press order bell" (see FIG. 311). is determined (step S2485). When determining that the sub-flag is "push order bell", the main CPU 101 executes navigation setting processing (step S2486). In this process, the main CPU 101 receives information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor and information corresponding to the stop operation information included in the chance B one-shot win lock effect end command data (see step S2487). etc. (see step S104 in FIG. 28). As a result, as described above, the instruction monitor notifies the correct pressing order (FIGS. 310A and 310B) of the pressing order bell (see step S2225 in FIG. 344). In addition, as described below, the pressing order of the correct answers is also reported on the main display device 210 .

If it is determined in step S2485 that the sub-flag is not the "push order bell", or after executing the process of step S2486, the main CPU 101 executes a lock effect end command generation and storage process at the time of chance B one-shot victory (step S2487). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates chance B one-shot win lock effect end command data, and stores the generated chance B one-shot win lock effect end command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103 . Chance B one-hit win lock effect end command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32). As a result, the sub-control circuit 200 can recognize that the chance B one-hit victory lock effect has ended, and can determine the timing and the like for executing various effects.

Specifically, when the process of step S2486 is executed, the correct push order of the push order bell determined in the current unit game (Figs. 310A and 310B ) (press order information) is included. Triggered by the receipt of the lock effect end command data for one chance B win, the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 sets effect data (press order navigation image data) corresponding to the pressing order information. The push order navigation image data is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 202 (see FIG. 3), and the push order navigation image is displayed on the main display device 210 by setting the image data. The push order navigation image is an image for notifying the correct push order of the push order bell (bell navigation).

After executing the process of step S2487, the main CPU 101 sets the chance B one-shot win lock effect start flag to OFF (step S2488), and sets the one-shot win Bell Navi permission flag to ON (step S2489). The Bell-Navi permission flag for one-shot victory is a flag used for performing Bell-Navi in the chance B mode (see FIG. 372). After executing the process of step S2489, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

<Processing for Bell Navi during Chance B>
FIG. 372 is a flow chart showing processing for Bell Navi during chance B performed in the main control circuit.

In the main control circuit 100, the main control circuit 100 executes the bell navi processing during chance B shown in FIG. 372 in step S2338 of FIG. This is the process performed in step S2389 of subsequent processes).

In the process for bel-navi during chance B, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is "push order bell" (see FIG. 311). (Step S2501). When determining that the sub-flag is not "press order bell", the main CPU 101 terminates this sub-routine. On the other hand, when determining that the sub-flag is "push order bell", the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the time retrospective lottery win Bell Navi permission flag (see step S2429 in FIG. 366) is set to ON (step S2502).

When it is determined that the Bell Navi permission flag at the time retroactive lottery winning is set to ON, it is determined whether or not the lock effect start flag at chance B one-shot victory (see step S2464 in FIG. 370) is set to ON. (Step S2503). On the other hand, if it is determined that the Bell-Navi permission flag for time retrogression lottery winning is not set to ON, it is determined whether or not the Bell-Navi permission flag for one-shot victory (see step S2489 in FIG. 371) is set to ON. (Step S2504).

If it is determined in step S2503 that the lock effect start flag for one chance B win is set to ON, the main CPU 101 ends this subroutine. If it is determined in step S2504 that the one-shot victory Bell Navi permission flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

If it is determined in step S2503 that the chance B one-shot win lock effect start flag is not set to ON, or if it is determined in step S2504 that the one-shot victory Bell Navi permission flag is set to ON, The main CPU 101 executes navigation setting processing (step S2505). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets information corresponding to the stop operation information notified by the instruction monitor, information corresponding to the stop operation information to be included in the start command data, and the like (see step S104 in FIG. 28).

After executing the process of step S2505, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine. By executing the process of step S2505, as described above, the instruction monitor notifies the correct pressing order of the pressing order bell (FIGS. 310A and 310B) (see step S2225 in FIG. 344). . In addition, as described below, the pressing order of the correct answers is also reported on the main display device 210 .

372 is performed during the advantageous section (chance B basic mode) game start processing (see FIG. 353), the advantageous section (chance B basic mode) game start processing ends. Then, start command generation and storage processing (see step S7 in FIG. 23) is performed. In the start command generation and storage process, the main CPU 101 generates start command data and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103 . The start command data stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 100 to the sub control circuit 200 in the communication data transmission process (see step S204 in FIG. 32).

When the process of step S2505 is executed, the start command data includes information (push order information) corresponding to the correct push order (FIGS. 310A and 310B) in the push order bell determined in the current unit game. is Triggered by the reception of the start command data, the sub CPU 201 of the sub control circuit 200 sets effect data (push order navigation image data) corresponding to the push order information. The push order navigation image data is stored in the ROM cartridge substrate 202 (see FIG. 3), and the push order navigation image is displayed on the main display device 210 by setting the image data. The push order navigation image is an image for notifying the correct push order of the push order bell (bell navigation).

As described above, chance B one-shot victory lottery (Fig. 355 (see step S2322)), in the second game of the set (the second unit game out of the eight unit games that make up the set), when the push order bell is determined as an internal winning combination, When the Chance B one-shot win lock effect ends (for example, after 2000 ms have elapsed since the start lever 7 was operated), the correct pressing order is reported (see step S2486 in FIG. 371). Also, after the 3rd game of the set (the 3rd to 8th unit games out of the 8 unit games that make up the set), when the pushing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination, a start command is generated and stored. Immediately after the process is performed (for example, within 500 ms (or 250 ms or 100 ms) after the start lever 7 is operated), the correct order of pressing is notified (see step S2505 in FIG. 372). In this way, when the Chance B one-shot win lottery is won in one unit game, Bell-navi occurs when the pushing order bell is determined as an internal winning combination from the next unit game until the chance B mode ends. become.

In the AT state or the pseudo-bonus A mode, similarly to the bell navigator processing during the chance B shown in FIG. (game start state control process), the navigation setting process (see step S2505) is performed. As a result, immediately after the start command generation and storage process is performed (for example, within 500 ms (or 250 ms or 100 ms) after the start lever 7 is operated), the correct pressing order is notified.

<Processing when starting a game for an advantageous section (chance B special mode)>
FIG. 373 is a flow chart showing processing at the start of a game for an advantageous section (chance B special mode) performed in the main control circuit. FIG. 374 is a diagram showing a follow-up number UP lottery table.

The advantageous section (chance B special mode) game start time processing shown in FIG. 23 (main process), the process of step S6 (game start state control process). The main CPU 101 refers to the game interval flag storage area (not shown) and mode flag storage area (see FIG. 20) of the main RAM 103 to determine that the current game interval and mode are the advantageous interval and the chance B special mode, respectively. can recognize that

In the advantageous section (chance B special mode) game start processing, first, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the AT confirmation state flag (see step S2350 in FIG. 359 and step S2371 in FIG. 362) is set to ON. (step S2521). When determining that the AT confirmed state flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes a follow-up number UP lottery (step S2522). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the chase number UP lottery table (see FIG. 374) and conducts a lottery based on the ball output flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) and a random number value. As a result of , one of "not winning", "pursuit number +1", "pursuit number +2", and "pursuit number +3" is determined.

In the follow-up number UP lottery table shown in FIG. And "rare LV6"), the lottery value corresponding to the result of the follow-up number UP lottery ("non-winning", "follow-up number +1", "follow-up number +2", and "follow-up number +3") is defined. ing. The probability that each result of the follow-up number UP lottery will be determined can be represented by "the lottery value specified for the result / the number of all possible random numbers to be extracted (random number denominator: 256)". can. For example, if the output ball flag group (normal) is "rare LV3", as a result of the follow-up number UP lottery, "follow-up number +1" is determined with a probability of 128/256, and " Follow-up number +2" is determined.

After executing the process of step S2522, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the result of the follow-up number UP lottery is a winning result ("follow-up number +1", "follow-up number +2", or "follow-up number +3"). (Step S2523). When determining that the result of the follow-up number lottery is any of "follow-up number +1", "follow-up number +2", and "follow-up number +3", the main CPU 101 selects the follow-up number (step S2348 in Fig. 359). and step S2363 in FIG. 362) are updated (step S2524). In this process, if the result of the follow-up number lottery is "pursuit number +1", the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the follow-up number, and the result of the follow-up number lottery is "pursuit number +2". In this case, add "2" to the follow-up number value, and if the result of the follow-up number lottery is "follow-up number + 3", add "3" to the follow-up number value.

If it is determined in step S2521 that the AT definite state flag is set to ON, the main CPU 101 determines whether the heaven transition lottery winning flag (see step S2335 in FIG. 355 and step S2384 in FIG. 364) is set to ON. (step S2525). If the main CPU 101 determines that the heaven transition lottery winning flag is not set to ON, the main CPU 101 executes the heaven transition lottery after the AT is determined (step S2526). Since this process is the same as the process of step S2335 in FIG. 355, the description is omitted here.

If it is determined in step S2523 that the result of the follow-up number UP lottery is neither "follow-up number +1", "follow-up number +2", or "follow-up number +3", the heaven transition lottery winning flag is turned on in step S2525. or after executing the process of step S2524 or step S2526, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value of the follow-up attack number from the value of the chance B points (step S2527). Since the lower limit of the chance B point value is "0", the main CPU 101 sets the chance B point value to "0" when the chance B point value after the subtraction is negative.

Then, main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of chance B points after subtraction is "0" (step S2528). When determining that the value of the chance B point after subtraction is "0", the main CPU 101 executes the processing of steps S2529 to S2531, which are the processing of steps S2403 to S2405 in FIG. Since it is the same processing as , the description here is omitted. On the other hand, when determining that the value of the chance B points after subtraction is not "0", the main CPU 101 executes the processing of step S2532, which is the same as the processing of step S2409 in FIG. Therefore, the description here is omitted.

After executing the process of step S2530, step S2531, or step S2532, the main CPU 101 executes the process for Bell Navi during chance B (step S2533). The processing for Bell Navi during chance B is as described with reference to FIG. After executing the process of step S2533, the main CPU 101 terminates this subroutine.

It should be noted that the follow-up number UP lottery (see step S2522) is described as being performed in the process (game start state control process) of step S6 in FIG. 23 (main process), but this process is It may be performed in the process (game end state control process) of step S15 of the main process). For example, when the sub-flag set by the sub-flag setting process (see step S73 in FIG. 26) is other than "push order bell" (see FIG. 311), the process (game On the other hand, if the sub-flag is "press order bell", this process is performed in step S15 of FIG. 23 (main process) (game end state control process). It may be done.

When this process is performed in the process of step S15 (game end state control process) in FIG. 23 (main process), the payout flag group (normal ) may be different. For example, when the sub-flag is "push order bell", if 11 medals are paid out, the payout flag group (normal) (see FIG. 324) corresponding to the character is determined, while 11 If no medals are paid out, "0" may be determined as the payout flag group (normal) number regardless of the character.

<Appendix G>
Conventionally, there has been known a gaming machine having a chance zone in which a lottery for shifting to AT is treated more favorably than in a normal state (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-77412). In the chance zone, as compared with the normal state, the player's expectation for the ball to be released is increased, and thus the player's interest can be enhanced.

In conventional gaming machines, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous state such as an AT, there is room for improvement in the subsequent game and the notification method to that effect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game when the right to shift to an advantageous state is granted. do.

In this regard, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment has the following features.

(G-1) state control means capable of controlling a state related to a game;
granting means capable of granting the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) advantageous to the player;
A notification means (main CPU 101 that executes the processes of FIGS. 371 and 372) capable of notifying information advantageous to the player,
The granting means can grant the right to transition to the advantageous state when a specific condition (winning a chance B one-shot win lottery) is established in a specific state (chance B basic mode),
The reporting means is capable of reporting information advantageous to the player when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, an advantageous state ( AT state) can be granted, and information advantageous to the player can be notified. As a result, it is possible to increase the player's motivation for the game through the information, and to improve the interest in the game when the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted.

(G-2) The gaming machine of (G-1) above,
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (output of music for chance B one-shot victory) when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state,
The notifying means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S2486 in FIG. 371) notifies information advantageous to the player after the specific effect is started when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state. it is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when a specific condition (winning a chance B one-shot win lottery) is established in a specific state (chance B basic mode), a specific effect (chance B one-shot win After the start of the specific effect (output of music for chance B one-shot victory), it is possible to inform the player of information advantageous to the player. ing. If the information is notified before the specific effect (output of the Chance B one-shot victory song) is started, at the time when the notification is performed, the specific condition (Chance B one-shot victory lottery There is a possibility that the player will perceive that the winning of the game has been established. Then, the player cannot be interested in the specific effect (output of music for chance B one-shot victory) to be started after that, and the specific effect (output of music for chance B one-shot victory) cannot be made to interest the player. There is concern that the significance of conducting In this respect, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, by suppressing the notification of the information before the specific effect (output of the Chance B one-shot victory music piece) is started, It is possible to avoid such a situation, increase the value of the specific effect (output of music at chance B one-shot victory), and enjoyment of the game when the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted. can be further improved.

(G-3) The gaming machine of (G-1) or (G-2) above,
The giving means is
A first granting means (Fig. the main CPU 101) that executes the process of step S2326 of 355;
Second granting means ( The main CPU 101) that executes the processing of step S2350 in FIG. 359,
The state control means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of steps S2404 and S2405 in FIG. 365) controls the second granting means to control the advantageous state by the second granting means when the first granting means grants the right to shift to the advantageous state. It is possible to shift to the advantageous state at an earlier timing than when the right to shift to the state is granted,
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when the first condition (winning the chance B one-shot winning lottery) is established in the specific state (chance B basic mode), it shifts to the advantageous state (AT state). While it is possible to grant the right to do so, it is also an advantageous state when the second condition (the value of the chance B point becomes 0 due to the subtraction of the damage amount) is satisfied in the specific state (chance B basic mode) It is possible to grant the right to transition to (AT state). Then, if the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the establishment of the first condition (winning the chance B one-shot victory lottery), the second condition (chance B by subtracting the damage amount The point value becomes 0) is established so that the transition to the advantageous state (AT state) can be made at an earlier timing than when the right to shift to the advantageous state (AT state) is granted. It is As a result, when the first condition (winning the Chance B one-shot win lottery) is established, it is possible to quickly provide the player with an opportunity to play a game in an advantageous state (AT state). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation for the establishment of the first condition (winning the chance B one-shot victory lottery), and at the same time, it is possible to increase the player's expectation that the first condition (winning the chance B one-shot victory lottery) is satisfied. ) is established, the amusement of the game can be further improved.

(G-4) The gaming machine according to any one of (G-1) to (G-3) above,
A variable update means capable of updating a predetermined variable (chance B point value) in the specific state;
The state control means is capable of shifting to the advantageous state when the predetermined variable becomes a predetermined value (0) in the specific state,
The variable update means (the main CPU 101 that executes the process of step S2324 in FIG. 355) updates the predetermined variable so that it becomes the predetermined value when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state. It is possible to update the variables of
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to update a predetermined variable (chance B point value) in a specific state (chance B basic mode), and in the specific state (chance B basic mode) When a predetermined variable (value of chance B points) reaches a predetermined value (0) in , it is possible to shift to an advantageous state (AT state). Then, when a specific condition (winning a chance B one-shot winning lottery) is established in a specific state (chance B basic mode), a predetermined variable (chance B point value) is set to the predetermined value (0). It is configured so as to be able to update a predetermined variable (value of chance B points). As a result, a predetermined variable (chance B point value) can be unified, and through a specific state (chance B basic mode) using such a predetermined variable (chance B point value), the interest in the game can be further improved. can be done.

(G-5) The gaming machine according to any one of (G-1) to (G-4) above,
A variable update means capable of updating a predetermined variable (chance B point value) in the specific state;
The state control means is capable of controlling multiple times in a predetermined section (set) in the specific state,
The variable update means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S2342 in FIG. 359 and step S2369 in FIG. 362) is capable of updating the predetermined variable in each of the predetermined intervals during the specific state,
The imparting means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processing of step S2350 in FIG. 359 and step S2371 in FIG. 362) causes the predetermined variable to become a predetermined value (0) in one of the predetermined sections in the specific state. It is possible to grant the right to transition to the advantageous state when
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to control multiple times in a predetermined section (set) in the specific state (chance B basic mode), and each predetermined section (set) in the specific state (chance B basic mode) It is possible to update a predetermined variable (chance B point value) in an interval (set). Then, when a predetermined variable (chance B point value) becomes a predetermined value (0) in one predetermined section (set) in the specific state (chance B basic mode), an advantageous state (AT state) It is structured so that it is possible to grant the right to transfer to As a result, it is possible to make the player interested in updating the predetermined variable (chance B point value) in each predetermined section (set) during the specific state (chance B basic mode). , through a specific state (chance B basic mode) using such a predetermined variable (chance B point value), the interest in the game can be further improved.

(G-6) The gaming machine according to any one of (G-1) to (G-5) above,
The notification means is
In the advantageous state, information advantageous to the player can be notified at a first timing (when the process of step S7 in FIG. 23 is performed),
When the specific condition is established in the specific state, information advantageous to the player is reported at a second timing later than the first timing (when the processing of step S2487 in FIG. 371 is performed). it is possible to
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, in the advantageous state (AT state), information advantageous to the player is notified at the first timing (when the processing of step S7 in FIG. 23 is performed). On the other hand, when a specific condition (winning a Chance B one-shot winning lottery) is established in a specific state (Chance B basic mode), information advantageous to the player is provided at the first timing (see FIG. 23). It is configured to be able to notify at a second timing (when the process of step S2487 in FIG. 371 is performed) later than when the process of step S7 is performed. As a result, by delaying the timing at which the information is notified when a specific condition (winning a chance B one-shot victory lottery) is established in a specific state (chance B basic mode), an advantageous state (AT state) It is possible to further improve the amusement of the game when the right to shift to is granted.

(G-7) The gaming machine according to any one of (G-1) to (G-6) above,
The reporting means is capable of reporting information advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition (internal winning of the push order bell) is established in each unit game in the advantageous state. When the specific condition is satisfied, it is possible to notify the information in a plurality of unit games before shifting to the advantageous state.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when a predetermined condition (internal winning of the push-order bell) is established in each unit game in an advantageous state (AT state), information advantageous to the player is announced. It is possible to do, and if a specific condition (winning a chance B one-shot victory lottery) is established in a specific state (chance B basic mode), before moving to an advantageous state (AT state), multiple times It is configured to be able to notify the information in the unit game. As a result, when a specific condition (winning a chance B one-shot victory lottery) is established in a specific state (chance B basic mode), the advantageous state (AT state ), the interest in the game can be further enhanced when the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted.

(G-8) The gaming machine according to any one of (G-1) to (G-7) above,
The giving means is
A first granting means (for example, , the main CPU 101 for executing the processing of step S2326 in FIG. 355;
Second granting means (Fig. 359 step S2350 and the main CPU 101) that executes the processing of step S2371 in FIG.
The state control means is
After controlling to the specific state, it is possible to control to a predetermined state (chance B special mode),
When the right to transition to the advantageous state is granted by the first granting means, the transition to the advantageous state can be made without controlling to the predetermined state, while the second granting means can move to the advantageous state. When the right to transition to a state is granted, it is possible to shift to the advantageous state after controlling to the predetermined state.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when the first condition (winning the chance B one-shot winning lottery) is established in the specific state (chance B basic mode), it shifts to the advantageous state (AT state). On the other hand, even if the second condition (the value of the follow-up attack number is equal to or greater than the value of the chance B point) is satisfied in a specific state (chance B basic mode), the advantageous state ( AT state) can be granted. Then, when the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the establishment of the first condition (winning the chance B one-shot winning lottery), control is performed to a predetermined state (chance B special mode). While it is possible to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) without doing so, the advantageous state (AT state) is established when the second condition (the value of the follow-up attack number is equal to or greater than the value of the chance B point) is satisfied When the right to shift to the state is granted, it is configured to be able to shift to the advantageous state (AT state) after controlling to a predetermined state (chance B special mode). In this way, when the first condition (winning the chance B one-shot victory lottery) is satisfied and when the second condition (the value of the chase number is equal to or greater than the value of the chance B point) is satisfied , by varying whether or not to intervene a predetermined state (chance B special mode) in the process of shifting to the advantageous state (AT state), the performance of the game when the right to shift to the advantageous state (AT state) is granted. Interest can be further improved.

(G-9) The gaming machine according to any one of (G-1) to (G-8) above,
A variable management means capable of managing a predetermined variable (chance B point value) in the specific state;
The state control means is capable of shifting to the advantageous state when the predetermined variable becomes a predetermined value (0) in the specific state,
The variable management means (the main CPU 101 that executes the processes of step S2445 of FIG. 368 and step S2303 of FIG. 354) later it is possible to cause the particular state that occurs to inherit the predetermined variable;
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when a predetermined variable (chance B point value) becomes a predetermined value (0) in a specific state (chance B basic mode), an advantageous state (AT state ). Then, when one specific state (chance B basic mode) ends without a predetermined variable (chance B point value) becoming a predetermined value (0), the later occurring specific state (chance B basic mode) It is configured so that the predetermined variable (value of chance B points) can be inherited. As a result, continuity can be generated between one specific state (chance B basic mode) and a subsequent specific state (chance B basic mode) based on a predetermined variable (chance B point value). It is possible, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the game in the specific state (chance B basic mode).

(G-10) The gaming machine according to any one of (G-1) to (G-9) above,
A variable management means capable of managing a predetermined variable (chance B point value) in the specific state;
The state control means, when controlled to a first state (non-advantageous interval) after one of the specific states ends, prevents the predetermined variable from being inherited by the specific state occurring later. When the second state (advantageous interval) is controlled after the specific state of is completed, it is possible to take over the predetermined variable to the specific state that occurs later.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when the first state (non-advantageous section) is controlled after one specific state (chance B basic mode) ends, the later specific state ( Chance B basic mode) is not allowed to take over a predetermined variable (chance B point value), and after one specific state (chance B basic mode) is completed, when it is controlled to the second state (advantageous section) is configured to be able to take over a predetermined variable (chance B point value) to a specific state (chance B basic mode) that occurs later. As a result, when one specific state (chance B basic mode) is completed and then controlled to the second state (advantageous section), one specific state (chance B basic mode) and the subsequent specific state ( Chance B basic mode), it is possible to create continuity around a predetermined variable (chance B point value), further improving the interest of the game in a specific state (chance B basic mode). be able to. In addition, when the first state (non-advantageous section) is controlled after one specific state (chance B basic mode) ends, such continuity cannot be generated, so one specific state The player's interest in which of the first state (unadvantageous interval) and the second state (advantageous interval) the state to be controlled after the end of the (chance B basic mode) is. can be enhanced. As a result, it is possible to further increase the interest in the specific state (chance B basic mode) and allow the player to fully enjoy the game in the specific state (chance B basic mode).

(G-11) The gaming machine according to any one of (G-1) to (G-10),
First output means (speakers 35a, 35b) capable of outputting games,
a second output means (instruction monitor and main display device 210) capable of outputting a game;
Equipped with production execution means capable of executing production,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a specific effect (output of Chance B one-shot winning music) by output from the first output means when the specific condition is satisfied in the specific state. can be,
The notifying means is capable of notifying information advantageous to the player by outputting from the second output means when the specific condition is established in the specific state.
It is characterized by

According to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the eleventh embodiment, when the specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot winning lottery) is established in the specific state (chance B basic mode), the first output means (speaker 35a, 35b), it is possible to execute a specific effect (output of music at chance B one-shot victory), while output from the second output means (instruction monitor and main display device 210) allows the player to It is configured to be able to notify information that is advantageous to Thus, when a specific condition (winning a chance B one-shot winning lottery) is established in a specific state (chance B basic mode), the first output means (speakers 35a, 35b) and the second output means ( The effect and notification are output using two output means, an instruction monitor and a main display device 210). Therefore, through the output from the two output means, it is possible to stimulate the player's five senses (visual and auditory) in a complex manner, and the game in the case where the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted interest can be further improved.

In the eleventh embodiment, when the Chance B one-hit win lock effect ends, information advantageous to the player (the order of pressing the correct answer on the order of pressing bell) is reported (see FIG. 371). The timing at which the relevant information (the order of pressing the correct answer in the order of pressing the bell) is notified may be substantially at the same time (immediately before or immediately after) the end of the lock effect at the time of one chance B win, or one chance B. It may be in the middle of execution of the lock effect at the time of victory. For example, the navigation setting process is performed before the chance B one-shot win lock effect start command generation and storage process, and the information about the stop operation set by this is included in the chance B one-shot win lock effect start command data. Then, in the sub control circuit, when a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) has passed after receiving the command data for starting the lock effect at the time of chance B first win, the push order navigation image data is set. The information (the order of pressing the correct answer on the order of pressing the bell) can be notified while the B one-shot victory lock effect is being executed.

It should be noted that the timing of informing the player of the information advantageous to the player (the order of pressing the correct answer in the order of pressing the bell) is after the start of the specific effect (the output of the Chance B one-shot win song). It is not essential to perform a time lock effect. For example, a specific effect (output of music at chance B one-shot victory) is started approximately at the same time that the reel starts to rotate, and when a predetermined time (for example, 1000 ms) has passed, the information (correct answer in the order of pressing the bell) ) may be notified. In addition, if the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the establishment of a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) in one unit game, the unit game (one game in the set ), while starting a specific effect (output of music at chance B one-shot victory), even if a predetermined condition (internal winning of the pushing order bell) is satisfied, the information (in the pushing order bell If the predetermined condition (internal winning of the pushing order bell) is satisfied in the next unit game (after the second game in the set) without notifying the correct pushing order), the information (correct pushing order bell) pressing order) may be notified.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, a specific effect (output of music at chance B one-shot victory) is performed through the first output means (speakers 35a, 35b), and information advantageous to the player (correct press of the bell in the pressing order) is performed. It has been explained that the notification of the order) is performed through the second output means (instruction monitor and main display device 210). The first output means and the second output means are not particularly limited, and display means (display device) capable of displaying an image, sound output means (speaker) capable of outputting sound, and emitting light. It is possible to appropriately employ any output means out of output means such as light emitting means (LED) capable of. For example, the specific effect may be image display, sound output, light output, or any combination thereof. Information that is advantageous to the player may be notified by displaying an image, outputting sound, outputting light, or any combination thereof. good too. The specific effect and the notification of information beneficial to the player may be of the same type of output (for example, both display an image). In this case, the display means for performing the specific effect and the display means for notifying information advantageous to the player may be the same display means or different display means (first display means and second display means). means). For example, a main display device and a sub display device may be provided as in the first embodiment, and these may be employed as the first display means and the second display means, respectively.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, when a specific condition (winning a chance B one-shot winning lottery) is established in a specific state (chance B basic mode), a specific It has been explained that the production (output of music at chance B one-shot victory) continues. The length of the specific effect is not particularly limited, and may continue over a plurality of unit games, or be completed in one unit game (unit game in which the specific effect is started). or it may appear only for a short period of time (for example, within 3 seconds). It should be noted that the specific effect (output of the music at chance B one-shot victory) is performed only when the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted (when the specific effect occurs, the advantageous state (AT state ), or if the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) has been granted and the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) has not been granted It may also be performed on In the case of adopting a form in which a specific effect (output of music at chance B one-shot victory) can occur even if the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is not granted, a specific effect (chance B one If the probability of shifting to an advantageous state (AT state) is higher than when the specific effect (output of the song at chance B first win) does not occur when the output of the song at the time of victory) occurs. good. Alternatively, when a specific effect (output of music at chance B one-shot victory) occurs, it is shifted to an advantageous state (AT state) with a relatively high probability (for example, 80% or more) (advantageous state (AT state) high expectation to shift to).

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, an advantageous state (AT It has been explained that when the right to shift to state) is granted, the state is shifted to the advantageous state (AT state) when the predetermined section (set) is completed. The timing of shifting to the advantageous state (AT state) when a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot win lottery) is established is not limited to this example. For example, even if the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted due to the establishment of a specific condition (winning the Chance B one-shot winning lottery), a preset number of times (for example, 5 times) It is also possible to shift to the advantageous state (AT state) after completing all the predetermined sections (sets) of . In addition, when a specific condition (winning a chance B one-shot win lottery) is established in one predetermined section (set), how many times the predetermined section (set) is the predetermined section (set) Depending on whether the transition to the advantageous state (AT state) is made when the predetermined section (set) is completed, or all predetermined sections (sets) of a preset number of times (for example, 5 times) are completed After that, it may be determined whether to shift to the advantageous state (AT state). For example, in the specific state (chance B basic mode), the number of remaining predetermined sections (sets) including the predetermined section (set) is a predetermined number (for example, two times) or more (or less). In such a case, it is also possible to shift to the advantageous state (AT state) after completing all the predetermined intervals (sets) of a preset number of times (eg, 5 times) without fail (or by lottery). Similarly, even when the right to shift to an advantageous state (AT state) is granted by the establishment of the second condition (the value of the chance B point becomes 0 due to the subtraction of the damage amount), the preset It is also possible to transition to the advantageous state (AT state) after completing all of a predetermined interval (set) of the number of times (for example, 5 times), or a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) It may be determined whether or not to end all sections (sets).

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, a specific condition (winning a chance B one-shot winning lottery) is established in the first unit game in one predetermined section (set) in a specific state (chance B basic mode). It has been described as making a decision as to whether or not The timing of determining whether or not to establish a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot winning lottery) is not particularly limited, and any unit game in one predetermined section (set) (for example, the last It is possible to configure such that the decision is made in a unit game).

During the period from the establishment of a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot winning lottery) to the transition to an advantageous state (AT state), information advantageous to the player (the order of pressing the correct answer in the order of pressing the bell) is provided. Although notified, the specific state (chance B basic mode) continues. The appearance of the screen as seen by the player also shows an effect (battle effect) during the specific state (chance B basic mode), which is distinguished from the advantageous state (AT state). When the specific state (chance B basic mode) ends, the ally character wins over the enemy character in the battle presentation and shifts to an advantageous state (AT state). The effect performed in the advantageous state (AT state) can be different from the effect performed in the specific state (chance B basic mode).

In the specific state (chance B basic mode), basically, information advantageous to the player (the order of pressing the correct answer on the order of pressing the bell) is not reported, but under certain conditions (chance B first win lottery If the winning is established, exceptionally advantageous information for the player (the order of pressing the correct answer on the order of pressing the bell) is announced. In a specific state (chance B basic mode), only when a specific condition (winning the chance B one-shot winning lottery) is established, information advantageous to the player (the order of pressing the correct answer in the order of pressing the bell) is reported. Alternatively, the information may be notified when any condition other than a specific condition (winning the chance B first win lottery) is met.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, the lower limit of the predetermined variable (chance B point value) is set to the predetermined value (0), but the lower limit of the predetermined variable (chance B point value) upper limit) may not be set. In this case, when a predetermined variable (chance B point value) in a specific state (chance B basic mode) becomes less than (or greater than) a predetermined value (0), it is shifted to an advantageous state (AT state). It is configurable. Also, in this case, according to the difference between the predetermined variable (the value of chance B points) and the predetermined value (0) (the extent to which the predetermined value (0) is less than (above)), a privilege may be given. good. At this time, it is desirable to provide a larger benefit as the difference between the predetermined variable (value of chance B points) and the predetermined value (0) increases. As such a privilege, for example, it is possible to advance the advantageous state (AT state) advantageously (for example, it increases the probability (avoidance rate) of winning the Bell Navi generation lottery performed during AT danger mode (something that makes it possible to avoid the end of the AT state even if the stop operation cannot be performed by pressing the correct answer in the AT danger mode (plays the same role as a predetermined character)) It is possible to Such benefits may be given according to the value of the damage stock counter. The privilege may be displayed on the display device as a predetermined image (an icon advantageous in the AT state). In addition, when the advantageous state (AT state) is managed by the number of games, the difference number, the number of times of navigation, etc., the privilege is the number of games, the difference number, The number of times of navigation or the like may be directly given. The method of managing the advantageous state (AT state) is as described in the first embodiment. In the eleventh embodiment, the predetermined variable (the value of the chance B points) is managed by the subtraction method, but it may be managed by the addition method. Also, a predetermined variable (chance B point value) can be updated based on the internal winning combination determined in each unit game.

Also, in the eleventh embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko gaming machine. Advantageous states include bonus state (BB state, MB state, etc.), RT state, AT state (ART state), pseudo-bonus, advantageous section, time-saving game state, probability variable game state, jackpot game in pachinko machine It is possible to appropriately adopt the state and the like. The specific state is not particularly limited as long as it is a state in which the right to transition to an advantageous state can be granted, and may be a chance zone or normal mode in a pachislot gaming machine, a time-saving gaming state or non-time-saving gaming state in a pachinko gaming machine It may be a gaming state, a probability variation gaming state, or a non-probability variation gaming state. As the specific condition, a condition for granting the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT or BB in a pachislot machine, winning a jackpot in a pachinko machine, etc.) can be appropriately adopted. The advantageous state and the specific state are not limited to states controlled by the main control circuit, and may be states controlled by the sub-control circuit (effect mode).

The information that is advantageous to the player may be information that allows the player to play the game advantageously, or information that suggests that the right to shift to an advantageous state has been granted. The information for the player to play the game advantageously includes information for the player to perform an advantageous operation (for example, information about the stop operation in the pachislot machine, information about left-handed or right-handed hitting in the pachinko machine, etc.). can be mentioned. As information on the stop operation in the pachislot machine, when a predetermined combination is determined as an internal winning combination, the combination of symbols with the largest number of payouts among the combination of symbols allowed to be stopped and displayed along the activated line. It is possible to appropriately adopt information for performing a stop operation necessary to win a prize. Examples of such information include information indicating the correct pushing order in the pushing order, information indicating the type of the pushing order, information indicating the timing at which the stop operation should be performed (eye pushing), and the like. . Information that suggests that the right to transition to an advantageous state has been granted includes, for example, AT and BB in pachislot gaming machines, jackpots in pachinko gaming machines (e.g., normal jackpots, probability variable jackpots, time-saving jackpots, jackpots with a large number of rounds) ), etc. (output only when these items are won). Therefore, for example, performing an effect that notifies (suggests) that the player has won, or displaying a symbol combination corresponding to the winning (a symbol combination corresponding to a bonus or a big win) is also information that is advantageous to the player. can be said to notify The number of times the information advantageous to the player is notified after the specific condition is met until the transition to the advantageous state is not particularly limited, and may be once or multiple times. good. In addition, when the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine, as a specific effect, out of the effects that suggest the result of one big hit determination (extraction of a random number for judging a big hit), It is also possible to adopt a method in which the contents are determined before the variation display (special symbol variation) of the identification information corresponding to the previously performed big hit determination is completed.

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, it is possible to control a predetermined section (set) multiple times in a specific state (chance B basic mode), and the predetermined section (set) is composed of unit games of a predetermined number of times (8 times). explained as being to be done. The number of unit games constituting a predetermined interval (set) is not particularly limited, and may be multiple times or may be one time. When the number of times of the unit game that constitutes the predetermined section is one, the predetermined section and the unit game are synonymous. A unit game in a pachislot machine can be a period from the start to the end of one main process (see FIG. 23). In addition, the unit game in the pachinko gaming machine is the period during which one special symbol game is played (after the variable display of the special symbols is started, the variable display is completed and the result of the special symbol hit determination process is confirmed and displayed ( derivation)).

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, a predetermined state (chance B special mode) is interposed between one predetermined section (set) and the next predetermined section (set) in the specific state (chance B basic mode). explained as. However, it is not essential to intervene the predetermined state (chance B special mode), and when one predetermined section (set) ends, if the specific state (chance B basic mode) continues, the next It is also possible to shift to a predetermined section (set). The probability of continuing the specific state (chance B basic mode) when one predetermined section (set) ends (chance B continuation lottery winning probability) is within 0 to 100% (or 50 to 70%) It may be determined by lottery, or may be determined with a predetermined probability (eg, 50%). Alternatively, the chance B continuation rate before adding the value of the chance B continuation rate information for addition (see FIG. 351) may be determined by lottery from 0 to 100% (or 50 to 70%). Alternatively, it may be a predetermined probability (eg, 50%).

Further, in the eleventh embodiment, in a specific state (chance B basic mode), control can be performed multiple times in a predetermined section (set), and the specific state (chance B basic mode) is continued in one predetermined section (set). It has been explained that the specific state (chance B basic mode) is terminated when the decision to allow is not made. The end condition of the specific state (chance B basic mode) is not limited to this example, and the specific state (chance B basic mode) is managed by a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games), and a predetermined game The specific state (chance B basic mode) may be ended after the number is consumed. In this case, control may be performed in a predetermined section (set) according to the result of the lottery performed during the specific state (chance B basic mode), and in such a predetermined section (set), an advantageous state ( A determination (for example, battle effect) may be made as to whether or not to grant the right to shift to AT state). In addition, during a predetermined interval (set), the counter value in game number management is not updated (subtraction is stopped), and when the predetermined interval (set) ends, the update of the counter value is started again. You may do so. As a result, when the right to transition to an advantageous state (AT state) is not granted in a predetermined section (set), the number of games played excluding the predetermined section (set) is the predetermined number of games. is reached, the specific state (chance B basic mode) is terminated without transitioning to the advantageous state (AT state). Further, in one predetermined section (set), it may be decided by lottery whether or not to control to the predetermined section (set) again after one predetermined section (set) is completed.

Also, in the medalless gaming machine (a gaming machine that electromagnetically manages the gaming value owned by the player) described in the first embodiment, the gaming machine is normally connected to the gaming value providing device (communication dedicated unit). In this case, if the information corresponding to the number of game values is transmitted to the communication-dedicated unit in response to the operation of any of the return operation means, the information may be lost. Therefore, in order to prevent the game from progressing in a state where the communication dedicated unit is not properly connected, an error state in the main control board is set at the start of the game so that the game cannot be played (for example, the input button (bet button), checkout button, the start lever cannot be accepted, etc.). As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can prevent the information corresponding to the number of game values from disappearing.

[Twelfth Embodiment]
The first to eleventh embodiments have been described above. The twelfth embodiment will be described below. The pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment basically has the same configuration and functions as the pachi-slot machines 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments described above, except for the points described below. be. In addition, the descriptions of the portions in which the descriptions of the first to eleventh embodiments are also applicable to the twelfth embodiment will be omitted.

It should be noted that, in the above description, for example, "in the first embodiment, ~" or "in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, ~", it seems to be limited to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. Even if it is a description, it can be applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment within the scope of the twelfth embodiment. Similarly, in the above description, regarding the description limited to the pachi-slot machines 1 according to the second to eleventh embodiments, the pachi-slot machines according to the twelfth embodiment are not deviated from the spirit of the twelfth embodiment. It can also be applied to machine 1. Therefore, each configuration shown in the first to eleventh embodiments (including each configuration shown in the modified example and each configuration shown in the extended example) is partially replaced with the configuration shown in the twelfth embodiment. can be used or combined.

Further, even if the shape and processing are the same as those of the pachi-slot machines 1 according to the first to eleventh embodiments, different symbols and step numbers may be given for convenience.

[11-1. Processor configuration]
FIG. 375 mainly shows the configuration of the sub-control unit of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment. The sub-control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375 includes a sub-relay board 2200 and a sub-control board 2300. The sub-relay board 2200 corresponds to the sub-relay board 74 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, The sub-control board 2300 corresponds to the sub-control board 72 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. The sub-control board 2300 is electrically connected to the main control board 2010 in the same manner as the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, and based on commands transmitted from the main control board 2010, decides the contents of effects and performs effects. , etc., is executed. The sub-control board 2300 and the sub-relay board 2200 are basically connected to each other by BtoB (Board-to-Board), and in FIG. Further, the sub-control board 2300 and the sub-relay board 2200 are accommodated in separate board boxes in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 375, the sub-control board 2300 is configured as a multi-chip module in which a CPU 2390, GPU 2400, VPU 2410, VRAM 2420, SDRAM 2430, etc. are packaged. Note that GPU and VPU may be collectively referred to as VDP, and each of GPU and VPU may also be referred to as VDP, so VDP is used as a generic term for GPU and VPU as a generic term.

The CPU 2390 determines the content of the effect based on the command or the like transmitted from the main control board 2010, and performs various controls for executing the determined content of the effect. For example, it controls the operations of the GPU 2400, VPU 2410, etc. in order to display a 3D image or a 2D image on the display device. Also, the CPU 2390 is a multi-core CPU having four CPU cores (CPU core #1, CPU core #2, CPU core #3, CPU core #4) in this embodiment. Note that the CPU 2390 is not limited to such a configuration, and may be configured with 5 or more (or 3 or less) CPU cores, or may be configured as a multi-CPU.

The GPU 2400 consists of four GPUs (GPU#1, GPU#2, GPU#3, GPU#4). Also, the GPU 2400 may be composed of 5 or more (or 3 or less) GPUs in the same manner as the CPU 2390 in this embodiment. The SDRAM 2430 is composed of two SDRAMs each having a capacity of 1 GByte in this embodiment.

Next, each component of the sub-control board 2300 will be described. The HSS I/F 2320 is a high-speed serial interface (for example, a standard interface such as SATA3). The sub control board 2300 receives data from the sub ROM 2210 of the sub relay board 2200 via the HSS I/F 2320, (registered trademark) 2220. The sub ROM 2210 stores various control programs executed by the CPU 2390, various data tables, various effect data (for example, video data and drive data for the main display device 2510, video data for the sub display device 2520, lamp/LED group data, etc.). lamp data, sound data related to the speaker group, etc.). The sub ROM 2210 has the same function as the ROM cartridge board 202 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above.

A UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) I/F 2330 is an interface for serial communication. receive. Here, the main control board 2010 corresponds to the main control board 71 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, and the door monitoring unit 2020 corresponds to the 24h door monitoring unit 61 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. corresponds to Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, the medal sensor 31S of the selector 31 is connected to the main relay board 73, but in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is connected to the sub control board 2300. .

Also, the sub control board 2300 exchanges predetermined data with the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520 via the UART I/F 2330 . Here, the main display device 2510 generally corresponds to the main display device 210 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, and the sub-display device 2520 corresponds to the sub-display device 220 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment. handle.

Furthermore, the sub control board 2300 transmits and receives data to and from the RTC (Real-Time Clock) 2230 of the sub relay board 2200 via the I2C I/F 2340 . In addition, the sub control board 2300 outputs setting data to the digital amplifier 2240 and digital amplifier 2240 in order to output sound to the speaker group 2040 for the digital amplifier 2240 of the sub relay board 2200 via the I2C I/F 2340. It transmits and receives data (commands) for acquiring the status (operational state) of the Here, the speaker group 2040 corresponds to the speaker group (35a, 35b, etc.) of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. The game machine can be configured with four speakers consisting of an L/R speaker and an L/R speaker provided at the bottom of the game machine. In this embodiment, the RTC 2230 is connected via the I2C I/F 2340, but it may be connected to the RTC 2230 via the SPI I/F 2360 depending on the RTC communication specifications.

Further, sub control board 2300 transmits sound source data for outputting sound to speaker group 2040 to digital amplifier 2240 of sub relay board 2200 via I2S I/F 2350 .

In addition, the sub control board 2300 transmits data for controlling the light emission of the effect LED group 2050 to the LED driver 2250 of the sub relay board 2200 via the SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) I/F 2360 . Here, the effect LED group 2050 corresponds to the lamps/LEDs 23 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, but in this embodiment, the upper, upper right, upper left, lower right, and lower left , the waist panel, the inside of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (reel lamp), and each button can be equipped with a plurality of full-color LEDs. Note that the 7-segment LED used for payout display and the like is controlled by the main control board 2010 and is not included in the production LED group 2050 . In this embodiment, the LED driver 2250 is connected via the SPI I/F 2360, but it may be connected to the LED driver 2250 via the I2C I/F 2340 depending on the communication specifications of the LED driver.

GZIP (or GUNZIP) 2370 of sub control board 2300 is a circuit for decompressing (decompressing) files. In general, GZIP is a function for compressing files, and GUNZIP is a function for decompressing files, but in this embodiment, GZIP 2370 is a circuit for compressing/decompressing files. In addition, the sub-control board 2300 receives signals from the button group 2060 via a general-purpose I/O port GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) 2380, and controls the movable accessory 2070 via this GPIO 2380. Send a signal. Here, the button group 2060 corresponds to, for example, the performance button group (10a, 10b, etc.) of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above, and does not include a stop button or the like. Also, the movable accessory 2070 is not provided in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment, but can be provided in this embodiment.

The sub-control board 2300 includes four CPUs 2390 and four GPUs 2400 as described above, but the numbers do not necessarily have to be four. The sub control board 2300 further comprises one VPU 2410 . The GPU 2400 and the VPU 2410 are microprocessors dedicated to image processing, and generate images to be displayed on the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520. In this embodiment, the GPU 2400 is controlled by the CPU 2390. The VPU 2410 mainly executes processing related to 3D images (moving images and still images), and the VPU 2410 mainly executes processing related to 2D images (moving images and still images) under the control of the CPU 2390 .

Two frame buffers (a first frame buffer and a second frame buffer) are set in the VRAM 2420 of the sub control board 2300 for each display device, and image data of an image to be displayed on the corresponding display device is written to each buffer. Also, the image data of one frame buffer is transferred to the display device at the timing of the first frame, and the image data of the other frame buffer is transferred to the display device at the timing of the next second frame. A moving image is displayed on the display device by being alternately repeated.

In addition to the method of setting two frame buffers for each display device, a first frame buffer and a second frame buffer having a combined display size (pixels) for a plurality of display devices are set to display image data. When transferring to the device, there is a transfer method that specifies the data range of the frame buffer and transfers it to the display device, and a method that transfers from one frame buffer to multiple display devices is also available. is also not limited to the number of display devices, and becomes one frame buffer. Also, two frame buffers such as the first frame buffer and the second frame buffer are called double frame buffers, and each frame buffer has a "draw" and a "display" function to perform the above operation. It is possible.

The SDRAM 2430 of the sub-control board 2300 corresponds to the sub-RAM 203 of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first embodiment described above. The SDRAM 2430 is provided with a storage area for registering effect contents and various effect data determined by executing the control program, and a storage area for storing data related to various control instructions (commands) transmitted from the main control board 2010. be done.

Via the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling) I/F 2440 of the sub-control board 2300, the image data written to the first frame buffer or the second frame buffer of the VRAM 2420 is transferred to the main display device 2510 or the sub-display device 2520. Then, a display based on the image data is performed on the transmitted display device. Also, a VSYNC signal is transmitted to each display device by the LVDS I/F 2440, and switching of image data (frames) in the display device is performed based on this VSYNC signal.

The VSYNC signal is transmitted (generated) every 16.5 msec period when the frame rate (FPS) is 60 fps, and is transmitted (generated) every 33 msec period when the frame rate (FPS) is 30 fps.

Data transmission/reception is performed between the above-described components of the sub control board 2300 via the bus 2310 of the sub control board 2300 .

[11-2. processes and threads]
The processes and threads of the present embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 376-378.

As shown in FIG. 376, when the power is turned on, the boot loader mounted on the sub ROM 2210 of the sub control board 2300 or the sub relay board 2200 loads the OS (Operating System: Kernel) program (corresponding to the management program of the present application). After loading, start it, then the OS starts the master process program (corresponding to the control program of the present application), and then the master process starts the program of each process (corresponding to the control program of the present application) do. For example, in diagram 376, the master process is shown starting three processes (a graphics process, a sound process, and a lamp process). Here, a process is a program that is being executed, and can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the OS. Also, one process is given one common memory space.

In the master process, five threads (inter-process communication thread, periodic thread, peripheral device thread, main board thread, master thread (main thread)) are executed in parallel and receive commands and the like from the main control board 2010 . A thread is a part that executes instructions of a program (process), and is the smallest unit that uses a CPU core.

As with the master process described above, the graphics process runs four threads (inter-process communication thread, periodic thread, character thread, graphics thread (main thread)), and the sound process runs three threads (process An inter-process communication thread, a periodic thread, and a sound thread (main thread)) are executed, and three threads (inter-process communication thread, periodic thread, and lamp thread (main thread)) are executed in the lamp process. Thus, one process has a plurality of threads, so the processing mode in this embodiment can be said to be "multi-threaded". It can be said that it is "multi-process".

Also, at this time, the OS can be configured to start not only the master process but all processes. Note that "starting" means reading a target process from the sub-ROM 2210, loading it onto the SDRAM 2430, and executing the loaded process, which operates like application software of a personal computer.

As described above, each thread can use a CPU core and give an instruction to the CPU core. However, to which CPU core a thread gives an instruction is basically controlled by the OS. will be The user can also specify the correspondence between a thread and a CPU core on which the thread operates. Specifically, the lamp process always occupies one CPU core, and the master process, graphics process, and sound process have threads running on three unoccupied CPU cores, but the graphics process's file cache In processing (see FIG. 392), the lamp process temporarily occupies one of the three CPU cores. Therefore, all threads of one process do not always use the same CPU core. Also, as described above, each process is assigned a memory space, and threads within the same process can share this memory space.

FIG. 377 shows the relationship between the master process, graphic process, sound process, and lamp process described above and shared memory. This shared memory is different from the above-described memory space that can be shared by threads within a process. In this embodiment, part of the SDRAM 2430 shown in FIG. 375 is used as the shared memory, and each thread (inter-process communication thread) accesses this shared memory to enable data sharing between processes.

As a shared memory configuration, there is a system (centralized shared memory system) in which each CPU core (or each CPU) accesses one shared memory through one shared bus. There is also a system (distributed shared memory system) in which the local memories of each CPU core (or each CPU) are connected via a shared bus so that they can be virtually accessed as one shared memory.

In this embodiment, as described above, the SDRAM 2430 is composed of two SDRAMs. can be set as a shared memory by virtually connecting at least a part of each of them.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 375, a movable character 2070 can be provided, and processes and threads related to this are controlled by the character thread within the graphic process described above. Also, the processes shown in FIG. 376 and the threads associated with the processes are merely examples, and various variations can be considered for their numbers and functions.

In FIG. 377, solid line arrows represent subjects and targets related to shared memory area allocation and writing of data to shared memory, dotted line arrows represent writing of data to shared memory, and dashed line arrows represent shared memory. Represents loading data from . In each process, threads that do not access the shared memory are omitted from the drawing.

For example, in FIG. 377 the master thread of the master process reserves multiple shared memories in SDRAM 2430 . Here, the name of one of the shared memories is "master→graphics", and this shared memory "master→graphics" means a data storage area directed from the master process to the graphics process. Data is written to the shared memory "master→graphics" by the master thread of the master process, and data is read by the inter-process communication thread of the graphics process.

In this embodiment, the thread of the process on the sending side (writing side) secures a storage area in the shared memory so that debugging and restarting can be performed on a process-by-process basis. Alternatively, the storage area may be secured by the thread of the process on the receiving side (reading side). It is also possible to configure all storage areas to be secured by any one process (thread).

Similarly, the graphics thread of the graphics process secures the shared memory "graphics → master", and this shared memory "graphics → master" is written by the graphics thread of the graphics process, and the inter-process communication of the master process Data is read in a thread.

In addition, the sound thread of the sound process secures the shared memory "sound → master", and this shared memory "sound → master" is written by the sound thread of the sound process, and the interprocess communication thread of the master process data is loaded in . In addition, the sound thread of the sound process secures the shared memory "sound -> graphics", and data is written to this shared memory "sound -> graphics" by the sound thread of the sound process, and the inter-process communication thread of the graphics process data is loaded in .

In addition, the lamp thread of the lamp process allocates the shared memory "lamp → master", and this shared memory "lamp → master" is written by the lamp thread of the lamp process, and the interprocess communication thread of the master process data is loaded in .

As described above, in this embodiment, reading (receiving) of data from the shared memory for interprocess communication via the shared memory is all performed by the interprocess communication thread of each process (one point dashed arrow). In addition, the main thread of each process (for example, master thread, graphics thread, sound thread, lamp thread, etc.) is configured to write data to the shared memory (solid line arrow and dotted line arrow ). You can also configure the main thread of each process to read (receive) data from shared memory, and the interprocess communication thread of each process to write (send) data to shared memory. can also be configured to

Also, regarding the sound process and the lamp process, a shared memory is set to which data is written by a plurality of processes. For example, the master thread of the master process secures the shared memory "ANY→sound", and data is written to this shared memory "ANY→sound" by the master thread, the graphics thread, and the lamp thread. Data is read in the intercommunication thread. Also, the master thread of the master process secures the shared memory "ANY→Lamp", and data is written to this shared memory "ANY→Lamp" by the master thread, the graphics thread, and the sound thread. Data is read in the intercommunication thread.

Also, the master process secures a shared memory "ANY→master" for debugging the game machine, and collects data for debugging from inter-process communication threads of all processes including the master process. Note that in FIG. 377, with respect to the shared memory “ANY→master”, securing of the shared memory “ANY→master” and writing of data by the master thread are represented by solid lines. The notation of a dotted line arrow representing writing and the notation of a one-dot chain line arrow representing reading of data from the shared memory are omitted.

For example, a TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) driver or the like can be incorporated in the inter-process communication thread of the master process. Data (messages) written to “ANY→master” can be transferred. The external computer is connected to the sub-control unit 2100 of the pachi-slot machine 1 via a predetermined interface (for example, a LAN line or an IEEE802.3-compliant GMAC interface), and receives data from the shared memory "ANY→Master" according to the above protocol. It can receive and perform the necessary analysis on these data.

Also, in addition to the inter-process communication thread of the master process, the graphics process, sound process, lamp process, etc. are also supported by incorporating a TCP driver, etc., so that the inter-process communication thread of each process can use the communication protocol. It is possible to read from and write to shared memory.

As a result, it is possible to transmit and receive data to and from a predetermined shared memory according to instructions from an external computer connected to the sub control unit 2100, thereby controlling the processing of each process. Such a configuration enables effective debugging in a semi-real machine state. For example, by implementing the first process in the pachi-slot machine 1 so as to execute the first process in each process and executing the second process in accordance with an instruction from an external computer, it is possible to debug the second process and to compare the first process and the second process. Relations can be organized easily. Such a configuration eliminates the conventional task of grasping internal data using a dedicated measuring instrument, and as a result, debugging can be easily performed.

Also, with reference to FIG. 376, the configuration in which the OS starts the master process and then the master process starts each process has been described. After that, the data (message) can be sent to the shared memory of each process.

For example, after the master thread of the master process secures shared memory (shared memory "graphics → master", "sound → master", "lamp → master", etc.) where data is written by the process to be started, each process is executed start it up. Therefore, the main thread of each process allocates the necessary shared memory, and then sends messages to the master process using the inter-process communication thread (shared memory "graphics → master", "sound → master", "lamp → send the specified data to the "master", etc.). Next, the inter-process communication thread of the master process determines whether or not messages from each process have been received in the above shared memory. Then, a message is sent to each process (data is sent to the shared memory "master→graphics", "ANY→sound", "ANY→lamp", etc.).

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 375, a movable accessory 2070 can be provided, but a description of processes and threads related to this is omitted.

Next, referring to FIG. 378, the data transmission/reception system in the shared memory explained in FIG. 377 will be explained. FIG. 378(A) shows the form of data transmission/reception regarding the shared memory "ANY→Sound". That is, with respect to the shared memory "ANY→Sound", as described above, data is written by the master thread of the master process, the graphics thread of the graphic process, and the lamp thread of the lamp process, and the inter-process communication thread of the sound process is executed. Data is loaded. Here, if the writing of data in the three threads described above is regarded as sending a message, and the reading of data in the inter-process communication thread of the sound process is regarded as receiving a message, then the shared memory "ANY→sound" is a so-called "message queue." ” function.

FIG. 378(B) shows a situation in which messages are sent and received (in FIFO format) from processes in the shared memory "ANY→sound" having a message queue depth of N (N message storage areas). It is As shown in the upper part of FIG. 378(B), messages "0", "1" are generated by "transmission 0", "transmission 1", and "transmission 2" from different processes (master process, graphic process, lamp process). , "2" are sent, these messages are added to the message queue in the order of transmission (the number of messages is 3), and the top (for example, the message specified by the top address) is message "0", The termination (eg, the message specified by the termination address) becomes message "2". In the upper part of FIG. 378(B), the hatched area of the message queue indicates that messages are stored.

After that, as shown in the middle part of FIG. 378(B), one process (sound process) receives the first added message "0", as a result the message "1" is placed at the beginning, and the message is stored. Messages "1" and "2" are hatched areas indicating that the message is "1" and "2". At this time, the head address is changed so that message "1" becomes the head and message "2" becomes the end.

Next, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 378(B), one process (sound process) receives messages "1" and "2" in order. The end address is cleared (the hatched area indicating that the message is stored disappears). In FIG. 378, the transmission/reception method related to the shared memory “ANY→Sound” has been described, but the same applies to other shared memories.

Also, when the same shared memory (message queue) is accessed simultaneously from inter-process communication threads of a plurality of processes, exclusive control is performed so that any one write or read has priority. Such exclusive control prevents the simultaneous addition of different messages to the same area of the message queue.

However, since the inter-thread communication area is reserved as memory for use by the sound process, it cannot be accessed from other processes (master process, graphic process, and lamp process), and is managed by the sound process. allocated in memory for

[11-2-1. sound process]
Next, the basic flow of the sound process will be described with reference to FIGS. 379-383.

FIG. 379 is a schematic diagram showing the basic flow of each thread of the sound process. Here, an event code or a sound code executes a single request or a sequence request including a plurality of single requests. A single request is, for example, a request for requesting a new sound, a request for muting or muting a sound being played, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 379, timing information is periodically provided to the inter-process communication thread and the sound thread of the sound process from the periodic thread. Also, if event codes, sound codes, etc. are written from other main threads (for example, the main threads of the master process, graphic process, and lamp process) to the shared memory "ANY→Sound", those data will be transferred between processes. Read by the communication thread and provided to the sound thread.

For example, as shown in FIG. 380(A), in the shared memory "ANY→Sound", in addition to event codes and sound codes, data related to sound requests such as volume setting, sound mute request, sound pause request, etc. is stored.

The sound thread receives event codes, sound codes, etc. from the interprocess communication thread, and provides requests based on that data, etc., and related sound data to the library API. The library API is implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment in the form of firmware or drivers, for example, and controls audio output from the speaker group 2040 connected to the digital amplifier, etc., based on requests and sound data.

The library API sends playback information and the like to the sound thread in response to receiving requests and sound data. When the sound thread sends the playback information received from the library API to the shared memory "sound -> master" or "sound -> graphics", the inter-process communication thread of the master process accesses the shared memory "sound -> master". The reproduction information and the like are read, and the inter-process communication thread of the graphics process accesses the shared memory "sound→graphics" to read the reproduction information and the like.

For example, as shown in FIG. 380(B), the shared memory 'sound→master' contains survival information about each thread of the sound process (information indicating that the thread is operating normally), requested requests request information, etc. are stored.

Also, in the shared memory 'sound→graphics', for example, as shown in FIG. Lamps, sound information (including request and sound information being played), etc. are stored.

[11-2-1a. sound process sound thread]
FIG. 381 shows a flow chart showing the processing flow of the sound thread shown in FIG. The sound thread secures the shared memory "sound->master" and "sound->graphics" when activated (step S3001). Next, in step S3002, an inter-thread communication area is secured. This inter-thread communication area can be secured individually as memory between threads (for example, between a sound thread and an inter-process communication thread, or between a sound thread and a periodic thread), or shared between all threads. There are various forms such as being secured as memory.

In this embodiment, all data are exchanged between threads by inter-thread communication via the inter-thread communication area. It does not use traditional data sharing methods such as referencing its global variables in processing. The inter-thread communication area is a message queue in the same format as the shared memory described in FIG.

Next, in step S3003, the above-described inter-thread communication area is referenced to obtain a request (event code, sound code, request, etc.) from the inter-process communication thread. Next, in step S3004, it is determined whether or not there is a request. If it is determined that a request has been made (YES in step S3004), the request is analyzed in step S3005.

As a result of analyzing the request, it is determined whether or not the request is a new request (step S3006). If it is a new request (YES in step S3006), the new request is registered in step S3007, and then the process proceeds to step S3014. If the requested request is not a new request (NO in step S3006), the request is registered in the currently requested requests in step S3008.

If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3004), it is determined in step S3009 whether or not there is timing information (SID=1) from the fixed cycle thread. If there is no timing information (NO in step S3009), the process proceeds to step S3014. If there is timing information (YES in step S3009), then in step S3010 reproduction information is acquired from the library API, and then in step S3011 the acquired reproduction information is set in the shared memory "sound->graphics".

Next, in step S3012, thread survival information of each thread (inter-process communication thread survival information, periodic thread survival information) is acquired from the inter-thread communication area of the sound process, and in step S3013, the acquired survival information and , sets sound thread survival information indicating that the sound thread itself (sound thread) is alive in the shared memory "sound→master", and then proceeds to step S3014.

In step S3014, it is determined whether the request being executed is a sequence request. If the request being executed is a sequence request (YES in step S3014), sequence update processing is performed in step S3015. If the request being executed is not a sequence request (NO in step S3014), the process proceeds to step S3016.

In step S3016, the requested request is processed, and in step S3017, driver (API) access is performed. Processing of pending requests, e.g., mute, mute, fade in/out, ducking, volume change, requesting (executing) requests for markers, getting a sound to play if a new sound is requested, or getting For example, the registration of the sound that was created. Ducking is editing to reduce the volume of a specific sound source in certain situations to make other sounds easier to hear or stand out. Such editing is assumed, and when playing back BGM, editing is assumed to reduce the volume of sounds of instruments other than the guitar in order to make the guitar sound stand out.

Driver access is a process of reflecting the processing result of the currently requested request in the driver and actually sending sound data from the driver to the digital amplifier. As a result, audio output and the like are controlled for the speaker group 2040 connected to the digital amplifier.

Next, the sound thread update timing is awaited (step S3018), and then the process returns to step S3003 to repeat the subsequent processes. Sound control by the sound thread will be described in detail later.

[11-2-1b. Sound process inter-process communication thread]
FIG. 382 shows a flow chart showing the processing flow of the interprocess communication thread shown in FIG. The inter-process communication thread monitors the shared memory "ANY→sound", and if there is a request in the shared memory, retrieves the request from the shared memory and sends the request to the sound thread through inter-thread communication.

The inter-process communication thread first acquires a request from the shared memory "ANY→sound" (step S3031). Next, in step S3032, it is determined whether or not there is a request (event code, sound code, request, etc.). If it is determined that there is a request (YES in step S3032), the request is set in the inter-thread communication area in step S3033, and the process proceeds to step S3034. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 380, event codes, sound codes, requests, etc. are written from each inter-process communication thread of the master process, graphic process, and lamp process to the shared memory "ANY→sound". be If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3032), the process proceeds to step S3034 without doing anything.

In step S3034, inter-process communication thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (inter-process communication thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This interprocess communication thread liveness information is set even if there is no request to shared memory. After that, in step S3035, it waits for arrival of timing information (SID=2) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3031 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-1c. Periodic Thread of Sound Process]
FIG. 383 shows a flow chart showing the processing flow of the periodic thread shown in FIG. The fixed cycle thread operates at a constant cycle, generates timing information for the sound thread and inter-process communication thread, and uses inter-thread communication to notify the sound thread and inter-process communication thread respectively. do.

First, in step S3051, timing information generation processing is executed. This timing information generation process is a process of generating timing information at a time corresponding to each thread, and generates timing information of a different sound ID (SID) for each thread. The SID is, for example, SID=1 in the case of timing information corresponding to a sound thread, and is timing information generated every 10 msec cycle. In the case of timing information corresponding to an inter-process communication thread, SID=2, which is timing information generated every 20 seconds.

Next, in step S3052, the generated timing information is set in the inter-thread communication area (for inter-thread communication). Information is set in the inter-thread communication area, after that, in step S3054, it waits for a certain period of time (10 msec), returns to step S3051, and repeats the subsequent processing.

In this embodiment, the timing information is generated every 10 msec, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing information may be generated at any cycle between 2 msec and 20 msec.

[11-2-2. lamp process]
Next, referring to Figures 384-388, the basic flow of the ramp process will be described.

FIG. 384 is a schematic diagram showing the basic flow of each thread of the ramp process. Here, a single request or a sequence request including a plurality of single requests is executed by an event code, a pattern request, a sequence request, or the like. A single request is, for example, a request for (turning on) a new lamp, a request for turning off a lamp that is currently on, or the like.

As shown in FIG. 384, timing information is periodically provided to the inter-process communication thread of the ramp process and the ramp thread from the periodic thread. Also, when a sequence request 1 or the like is written from another main thread (for example, the main threads of the master process, the graphic process, and the lamp process) to the shared memory "ANY→Lamp", the sequence request 1 or the like is transferred between processes. Read by the communication thread and provided to the lamp thread.

For example, as shown in FIG. 385(A), the shared memory "ANY→Lamp" stores event code, pattern request, sequence request, table number request, port designation, group designation, lamp clear, lamp pause, Data related to lamp requests, such as lamp brightness settings, etc., are stored.

When the lamp thread receives an event code or the like from the inter-process communication thread, the lamp thread provides the library API with a request regarding the lamp and related lamp data based on the event code or the like. The library API is implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment in the form of, for example, firmware and drivers, and lighting of the performance LED group 2050 connected to the LED driver 2250 is controlled by requests and lamp data.

The library API sends playback information and the like to the lamp thread in response to receiving the request and the lamp data. When the lamp thread sends the playback information received from the library API to the shared memory "Lamp→Master", the inter-process communication thread of the master process accesses the shared memory "Lamp→Master" and reads the playback information. . In the present embodiment, the shared memory "Lamp→Graphics" is not provided because the lamp reproduction information is not required in the graphics process. The data may be read by the inter-process communication thread of the graphics process.

For example, as shown in FIG. 385(B), the shared memory 'lamp→master' stores survival information (information indicating that the thread is operating normally) about each thread of the lamp process, and information about the lamp being regenerated. Playback information including patterns, playback elapsed time, etc., is stored, and request information of requested requests, etc. are also stored.

[11-2-2a. lamp thread of the lamp process]
FIG. 386 shows a flow chart showing the processing flow of the ramp thread shown in FIG. The lamp thread secures the shared memory “lamp→master” at startup (step S3071). Next, in step S3072, an inter-thread communication area is secured. This inter-thread communication area can be secured individually as memory between threads (for example, between a lamp thread and an inter-process communication thread, or between a lamp thread and a periodic thread), or shared between all threads. There are various forms such as being secured as memory.

The inter-thread communication area of the lamp process is similar to the inter-thread communication area of the sound thread of the sound process.

In this embodiment, all data are exchanged between threads by inter-thread communication via the inter-thread communication area. It does not use traditional data sharing methods such as referencing its global variables in processing.

Next, in step S3073, the inter-thread communication area as described above is referenced to obtain a request (event code, sequence request, etc.) from the inter-process communication thread. Next, in step S3074, it is determined whether or not there is a request. If it is determined that a request has been made (YES in step S3074), the request is analyzed in step S3075.

As a result of analyzing the request, it is determined whether or not the request is a new request (step S3076). If it is a new request (YES in step S3076), the new request is registered in step S3077, and then the process proceeds to step S3083. If the requested request is not a new request (NO in step S3076), the request is registered in the currently requested requests in step S3078.

If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3074), it is determined in step S3079 whether or not there is timing information (LID=1) from the periodic thread. If there is no timing information (NO in step S3079), the process proceeds to step S3083. If there is timing information (YES in step S3079), in step S3080, reproduction information and the like are obtained from the library API, and in step S3081, thread survival information of each thread is obtained from the inter-thread communication area of the lamp process. Then, in step S3082, the reproduction information obtained in step S3080, the survival information (inter-process communication thread survival information, periodic thread survival information) obtained in step S3081, and the self (lamp thread) are confirmed to be alive. and the life information of the lamp thread to be displayed are set in the shared memory “lamp→master”, and then the process proceeds to step S3083.

In step S3083, it is determined whether the request being executed is a sequence request. If the request being executed is a sequence request (YES in step S3083), sequence update processing is performed in step S3084. If the request being executed is not a sequence request (NO in step S3083), the process proceeds to step S3085.

In step S3085, the requested request is processed, and in step S3086, driver (API) access is performed. The processing of the requested request includes, for example, acquisition of a lamp to be regenerated when a request such as turning off, fade in/out, brightness change, new lamp is requested, registration of the acquired lamp, and the like. The driver access is a process of reflecting the processing result of the requested request in the driver and actually sending the lamp data from the driver to the LED driver 2250 . As a result, control such as lighting is performed for the performance LED group 2050 connected to the LED driver 2250 .

Next, it waits for the update timing of the lamp thread (step S3087), and then returns to step S3073 to repeat the subsequent processes.

[11-2-2b. Interprocess Communication Thread for Lamp Process]
FIG. 387 shows a flow chart showing the processing flow of the interprocess communication thread shown in FIG. The inter-process communication thread monitors the shared memory "ANY→Lamp", and if there is a request such as an event code in the shared memory, retrieves the request from the shared memory, and sends the request to the lamp thread through inter-thread communication. Send to

The inter-process communication thread first acquires a request from the shared memory "ANY→Lamp" (step S3101). Next, in step S3102, it is determined whether or not there is a request. If it is determined that there is a request (YES in step S3102), the request is set in the inter-thread communication area in step S3102, and the process proceeds to step S3103. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 377, requests are written from the inter-process communication threads of the master process, the graphic process, and the sound process to the shared memory "ANY→Lamp". If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3102), the process proceeds to step S3104 without doing anything.

In step S3104, inter-process communication thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (inter-process communication thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This interprocess communication thread liveness information is set even if there is no request to shared memory. After that, in step S3105, it waits for arrival of timing information (LID=2) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3101 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-2c. Ramp Process Periodic Thread]
FIG. 388 shows a flow chart showing the processing flow of the periodic thread shown in FIG. The fixed cycle thread operates at a constant cycle, generates timing information for the lamp thread and interprocess communication thread, and notifies the lamp thread and interprocess communication thread using interthread communication. do.

First, in step S3121, timing information generation processing is executed. This timing information generation process is a process of generating timing information at a time corresponding to each thread, and generates timing information of a different lamp ID (LID) for each thread. The LID is, for example, LID=1 in the case of timing information according to a ramp thread, and is timing information generated every 2 msec cycle. Also, in the case of timing information corresponding to an inter-process communication thread, LID=2, which is timing information generated every 20 seconds.

Next, in step S3122, the generated timing information is set in the inter-thread communication area (for inter-thread communication). Information is set in the inter-thread communication area, after that, in step S3124, it waits for a certain period of time (2 msec), returns to step S3051, and repeats the subsequent processing.

[11-2-3. graphic process]
The basic flow of the graphics process will now be described with reference to Figures 389-395.

FIG. 389 is a schematic diagram showing the basic flow of each thread of the graphics process. Here is an example where a request is requested. Note that this embodiment can also be configured to have a movable role product 2070, and the role product thread implemented in that case and the flow of data related thereto are indicated by dotted lines.

As shown in FIG. 389, timing information is periodically provided to the interprocess communication thread and the graphics thread of the graphics process from the periodic thread. Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the movable role product 2070, the timing information is also provided to the role product thread from the fixed cycle thread at a constant cycle.

Also, if you write a request to the shared memory "master -> graphics", "sound -> graphics" from another main thread (for example, each main thread of the master process and sound process), the request will be sent by the interprocess communication thread. loaded and provided to the graphics thread.

For example, as shown in FIG. 390(A), the shared memory "master graphic" stores game status, key input information, error screen display information, various information related to screen display, projector information, etc. It can act as a "request" to a process. The game state and the like include, for example, a game state, an RT state, an internal winning combination, and the like. Further, the key input information includes, for example, pressing of a predetermined production button, operation of a chance button, coordinates of a touch panel, information regarding an operation type, and the like. The error screen display information can include an error code for displaying the error screen, and the projector information can include focus information, center coordinate position, and the like.

In this embodiment, since a projector is used as the main display device 2510, the projector information is stored in the shared memory. If so, the main liquid crystal information is stored instead of the projector information. The main liquid crystal information is the specifications of the mounted liquid crystal display device and information according to the specifications.

As described with reference to FIG. 380(C), the shared memory 'sound→graphics' contains playback information including the type of sound being played, sequence pattern, elapsed playback time, etc., markers, and sound-linked lamps linked with the sound. , sound information (including requests and sound information being played), etc., each of which can serve as a "request" to the graphics process.

When the graphics thread receives a request from the interprocess communication thread, it provides 2D/3D request data to the library API based on the request. The library API is implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment in the form of, for example, firmware and drivers, and based on 2D/3D request data, the processing of the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 (under the control of the CPU 2390) of the present embodiment. Control is performed so that images are displayed on the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520 of the pachi-slot machine 1 .

The library API sends various information to the graphics thread in response to receiving 2D/3D request data. When the graphics thread sends various information received from the library API to the shared memory "graphics → master", "ANY → sound", "ANY → lamp", the inter-process communication thread of the master process sends the shared memory "graphics → master ” to read the various information, the inter-process communication thread of the sound process accesses the shared memory “ANY→sound” and reads the various information, and the inter-process communication thread of the lamp process accesses the shared memory “ANY → Access the "Lamp" and read the various information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 390(B), the shared memory "graphics→master" stores survival information (information indicating that the threads are operating normally), projector information, character objects, etc. regarding each thread of the graphics process. Information, generated error information, video information, etc. are stored.

As described with reference to FIG. 380(A), the shared memory "ANY→Sound" stores event codes, sound codes, and sound requests such as volume settings, sound mute requests, and sound pause requests. Data and the like are stored, and the shared memory "ANY→Lamp" stores event codes, pattern requests, sequence requests, table number requests, as well as port designation, Data related to lamp requests such as group designation, lamp clear, lamp pause, and lamp brightness setting are stored.

Further, when the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has the movable accessory 2070, when the accessory thread receives the accessory request from the master process (via the inter-process communication thread of the graphics process and the graphics thread), Request data is provided to the library API based on the accessory request. Note that in this embodiment, the character object thread does not use a sequence request because it does not perform complicated actions with respect to the movable object 2070. However, based on the character object request from the master process, the graphic thread It is also possible to generate a sequence request by combining requests for role items.

The library API is implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment in the form of, for example, firmware and drivers, and based on the request data from the role thread, the movable role connected to the motor driver IC or the like responds to the request. is controlled to drive Also, the character item thread transmits the character item information received from the library API to the graphics thread, and the graphics thread writes the received character item information to the shared memory "graphics->master".

[11-2-3a. graphics thread of graphics process]
FIG. 391 shows a flow chart showing the processing flow of the graphics thread shown in FIG. The graphics thread secures the shared memory "graphics->master" when it starts up (step S3141). Next, in step S3142, an inter-thread communication area is secured. This inter-thread communication area can be secured individually as memory between threads (for example, between a graphics thread and an inter-process communication thread, or between a graphics thread and a periodic thread), or shared between all threads. There are various forms such as being secured as memory.

The inter-thread communication area of the graphics process is similar to the inter-thread communication area of the sound thread of the sound process.

In this embodiment, all data are exchanged between threads by inter-thread communication via the inter-thread communication area. It does not use traditional data sharing methods such as referencing its global variables in processing.

Next, in step S3143, the above-described inter-thread communication area is referenced to obtain a request from the inter-process communication thread. Next, in step S3144, it is determined whether or not there is a request. If it is determined that a request has been made (YES in step S3144), the request is analyzed in step S3145.

The request is analyzed based on the data sent from the master process (that is, based on the data stored in the shared memory “master→graphics”), and the command from the main control board 2010 is registered in the request. For example, when a new effect is executed depending on the type of command (for example, a start command), a new effect is determined based on information such as the game state and internal winning combination that are also registered in the request ( Triggered by the start command, the production lottery is triggered, and the display (winning) command is triggered by the switch to another production), preparations are made to execute the newly determined production, and the production being executed is updated according to the type of command ( For example, preparations are made for updating the production trigger with the stop command as a trigger.

As a result of analyzing the request, it is determined whether or not the request is a new request (step S3146). If it is a new request (YES in step S3146), a new effect object is generated in step S3147, and then the process proceeds to step S3154. Here, when a new effect is determined, a new effect object is generated, the effect sequence of the determined effect, registration information of image data to be used (moving image (2D/3D)/still image (2D/3D)), use Rendering size of the image data to be played, various effects (effects, etc.), trigger information, etc., are selected, and a rendering object is generated from the selected rendering data.

If it is not a new request (NO in step S3146), in step S3148 the request is registered in the effect object being executed.

If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3144), it is determined in step S3149 whether or not there is timing information (GID=1) from the periodic thread. If there is no timing information (NO in step S3149), the process proceeds to step S3154. If there is timing information (YES in step S3149), various information is acquired from the library API in step S3150, and then, in step S3151, the acquired various information is set in the shared memory "graphic→master".

Next, in step S3152, the inter-thread communication area is referred to, and the thread survival information of each thread (inter-process communication thread survival information, periodic thread survival information, character thread survival information ) is acquired, and in step S3153, the acquired survival information and the graphics thread survival information indicating that the self (graphics thread) is alive are set in the shared memory “graphic → master”, and then in step S3154 move on.

In step S3154, the effect object being executed is updated. This processing includes update processing for each frame, update of rendering triggers according to commands from the main control board 2010, and the like, and as a result, rendering objects being executed are updated in units of frames.

Next, in step S3155, 2D/3D CG processing is performed. In this processing, effect instructions for 2D images (including movies), sprite settings, brightness/transparency settings, etc. are performed, and polygon instructions, texture selection, etc. for 3D images (including movies) are performed.

Thereafter, in step S3156, file cache processing is performed. File cache processing is described later with reference to FIG. Next, in step S3157, driver (API) access (drawing processing, data construction processing) is performed. This processing reflects the result of the 2D/3D CG processing in step S3155 in the driver to generate 3D images and 2D images related to effects, etc., and is processing of the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 . Although OpenGL is used here as a driver (API) for accessing the GPU (VPU), other drivers can also be used.

Next, it waits for the update timing of the graphics thread (step S3158), and then returns to step S3143 to repeat the subsequent processing.

[11-2-3b. File cache processing]
FIG. 392 shows a flowchart showing in more detail the flow of the file cache processing shown in FIG.

Here, the CPU 2390 that controls the graphics thread in FIG. 391 and the file cache processing in FIG. , and VPU 2410 correspond to the image processing processor, and the sub control unit 2100 corresponds to the effect control section having the arithmetic processing processor and the image processing processor described above. Also, the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520 on which display is performed by the effect control section correspond to the display section.

First, in step S3171, for example, the sub ROM 2210 is referenced to determine whether or not there is a read list. If it is determined that there is a read list (YES in step S3171), prefetch information is generated from the read list in step S3172. In the prefetch information, data identification information (for example, data name and address) is stored in order of read data.

Next, in step S3173, for example, file cache memory (for example, FIFO type memory) is secured in the SDRAM 2430, and in step S3174, generation of a file cache thread is requested.

In step S3174, when the creation of the file cache thread is requested, the file cache thread is activated as a read-only thread. This file cache thread is executed as a thread of the graphics process by any of the non-operating CPU cores of the CPU 2390, performs file cache processing, and then terminates the processing.

In the file cache thread, prefetching of data used in driver access (drawing processing, etc.) performed by the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 is performed based on the above prefetch information. For example, the data related to the drawing process stored in the sub-ROM 2210 are read in advance into the file cache memory of the SDRAM 2430 in a predetermined order based on the arrangement of the data identification information stored in the prefetch information, and finally, It is transferred to GPU2400 and VPU2410.

Note that the read list may be stored and managed as part of the related data transferred to the GPU 2400 or the like, or may be managed as separate data from the related data.

If it is determined that there is no read list (NO in step S3171), it is determined in step S3175 whether or not there is a cancel request. If it is determined that there is a cancel request (YES in step S3175), the prefetch information is discarded in step S3176, the file cache thread is requested to be discarded in step S3177, and then the file cache processing ends. If it is determined that there is no cancel request (NO in step S3175), the file cache processing ends without doing anything.

When the file cache memory is reserved, if the system and the application use the VRAM 2420, all or part of the unused portion of the VRAM 2420 can be used as the file cache memory.

The prefetch information includes, for example, the order in which the data necessary for drawing one scene on the GPU 2400 or VPU 2410 is provided by a predetermined CPU core (a CPU core different from the file cache thread) (processing order). ), and the file cache thread reads the data into the file cache memory in the order specified by the prefetch information. As a result, the data is arranged in the file cache memory in the order specified by the prefetch information. It will be.

When the GPU 2400 or VPU 2410 performs drawing processing or the like, a predetermined CPU core sequentially extracts data read by the file cache thread in the order in which it was read, transfers the data to the GPU 2400 or VPU 2410 , and writes the processing result to the VRAM 2420 . In addition, when data is read from the file cache memory by a predetermined CPU core, the data is erased from the file cache memory each time. While data is being transferred, another CPU core (file cache thread) can concurrently (in the background) sequentially read (i.e. read ahead) data for use in the next scene, effectively In effect, the time required to read the data can be eliminated (or greatly reduced).

For data used in scenes used for general effects, etc., the content and the order of use are known in advance, and if this content is stored in the prefetch information, the file cache thread can effectively store the data. Read-ahead is implemented. For example, in a 3D image, data used for modeling a target object (polygon object), coordinate transformation, shading, texture mapping, etc., and the order of using these data are known in advance.

If the prefetch information is unknown, prefetching by the file cache thread is not performed and normal reading is performed (necessary data is read directly from the sub ROM 2210 or the like without using the file cache memory). Also, when there is no data in the file cache memory, the predetermined CPU core performs normal reading (reading from the sub ROM 2210 or the like).

Although it is possible to cache related data related to image processing using the functions of the OS (Operating System), a normal cache is a cache memory of the CPU (for example, L1 cache is 64 KB for each CPU core, All CPU cores use L2 cache (512KB), and the storage capacity is not large, so the memory capacity will soon run out and normal read processing will often be performed, resulting in the expected performance. is difficult. On the other hand, in the above-described file cache processing of the present application, a relatively large file cache memory is secured, and related data is allocated in the file cache memory (by a read-only thread) in an arrangement that is conscious of the processing order. is stored, the processing efficiency of data reading is improved, and a plurality of data can be read at high speed.

[11-2-3c. Graphics process inter-process communication thread]
FIG. 393 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the interprocess communication thread shown in FIG. The inter-process communication thread monitors the shared memory "master ->graphics" and "sound ->graphics", and if there is predetermined data (for example, registration data) in the shared memory, it retrieves the data from the shared memory and Send data as a request to the graphics thread via inter-thread communication.

The inter-process communication thread first acquires registration data from the shared memory "master→graphics" and "sound→graphics" (step S3191). Next, in step S3192, it is determined whether there is registration data. If it is determined that there is registration data (YES in step S3192), in step S3193 the registration data is set as a request in the inter-thread communication area, and the process proceeds to step S3194. In this embodiment, the shared memory "master→graphics" and "sound→graphics" store master process and sound process processes as shown in FIGS. From the intercommunication thread, registration data such as game state (stored, for example, in shared memory "master->graphics") is written. If it is determined that there is no registration data (NO in step S3192), the process proceeds to step S3194 without doing anything.

In step S3194, inter-process communication thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (inter-process communication thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This interprocess communication thread liveness information is set even if there is no registration data in the shared memory. After that, in step S3195, it waits for arrival of timing information (GID=2) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3191 to repeat the subsequent processes.

[11-2-3d. Graphics process periodic thread]
FIG. 394 shows a flow chart showing the processing flow of the periodic thread shown in FIG. The periodic thread operates at regular intervals, generates timing information for the graphics thread, the character thread, and the inter-process communication thread, and uses inter-thread communication to transmit the timing information to the graphics thread and the character thread. , to notify the interprocess communication thread, respectively.

First, in step S3211, timing information generation processing is executed. This timing information generation process is a process of generating timing information at a time corresponding to each thread, and generates timing information of a different graphic ID (GID) for each thread. The GID is, for example, GID=1 in the case of timing information according to the graphics thread, and is timing information generated every 16.5 msec cycle (timing synchronized with the VSYNC signal=60 fps). In the case of timing information corresponding to an inter-process communication thread, GID=2, which is timing information generated every 20 seconds. Furthermore, in the case of the timing information corresponding to the accessory thread, GID=3, which is the timing information generated every 1 sec.

Next, in step S3212, the generated timing information is set in the inter-thread communication area (for inter-thread communication). Information is set in the inter-thread communication area, after that, in step S3214, it waits for a certain period of time (0.5 msec), returns to step S3211, and repeats the subsequent processing.

[11-2-3e. Graphic process accessory thread]
FIG. 395 shows a flow chart showing the processing flow of the role product thread for controlling the movable role product 2070 shown in FIG.

The accessory thread first refers to the inter-thread communication area in step S3231 to obtain a request from the graphics thread. Next, in step S3232, it is determined whether or not there is a request. If it is determined that a request has been made (YES in step S3232), the request is analyzed in step S3233.

As a result of analyzing the request, it is determined whether or not the request is a new request (step S3234). If it is a new request (YES in step S3234), the new request is registered in step S3235, and then the process proceeds to step S3237. If the requested request is not a new request (NO in step S3234), the request is registered in the currently requested requests in step S3236.

If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3232), in step S3237 it is determined whether or not there is timing information (GID=3) from the fixed-cycle thread. If there is no timing information (NO in step S3237), the process proceeds to step S3241. If there is timing information (YES in step S3237), in step S3238, the character information is acquired from the library API, and then, in step S3239, the acquired character information is sent to the graphics thread via the inter-thread communication area. , and the graphics thread sets this character item information in the shared memory "graphics->master".

Next, in step S3240, character thread survival information indicating that the self (character thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This accessory thread survival information is set even if there is no request in the shared memory. After that, the process proceeds to step S3241.

In step S3241, the requested request is processed. This processing is, for example, acquisition of a drive pattern to drive when a request to drive a new role object, such as stop, forward rotation/reverse rotation, rotation speed change (acceleration/deceleration), vibration, etc., and acquisition of the acquired drive pattern Register, etc.

Next, in step S3242, driver (API) access is performed. In this process, the result of processing the requested request (request data) is reflected in the driver. In addition, the driver (API) transmits the accessory drive data based on the request data to the motor driver IC or the like (for example, a motor or solenoid for driving the accessory), and controls the movable accessory 2070 to be driven.

Next, it waits for the timing of updating the accessory thread (step S3243), and then returns to step S3231 to repeat the subsequent processes.

If the movable accessory 2070 is not provided, it is desirable to disable the accessory thread or delete it from the graphics process.

[11-2-4. master process]
Next, the basic flow of the master process will be described with reference to FIGS. 396-401.

FIG. 396 is a schematic diagram showing the basic flow of each thread of the master process. As shown in FIG. 396, each thread of the master process is provided with timing information periodically from the periodic thread. In addition, other main threads (for example, the main threads of the graphic process, sound process, and lamp process) write survival information, etc. to the shared memory "graphics → master", "sound → master", and "lamp → master". and its survival information is read by the inter-process communication thread and provided to the master thread.

The master thread receives main board commands from the main board thread, sends requests to the shared memory "master->graphics" in response to the main board commands, and receives inter-device commands from the peripheral thread, which Send a request to the shared memory "master -> graphics" according to the inter-device command. The inter-process communication thread of the graphics process then accesses the shared memory "master->graphics" to read the request.

Since the data stored in the shared memory "graphics->master", "sound->master", "lamp->master", and "master->graphics" has already been explained, the explanation is omitted here. Also, the shared memory "ANY→master" is reserved for debugging of the gaming machine, and the description thereof is omitted here.

[11-2-4a. master thread of the master process]
FIG. 397 shows a flow chart showing the processing flow of the master thread shown in FIG. When the master thread is started, the master thread secures the shared memory “master→graphics”, “ANY→sound”, and “ANY→lamp” (step S3261). Next, in step S3262, an inter-thread communication area is secured. This inter-thread communication area can be secured individually as memory between threads (for example, between the master thread and inter-process communication thread, or between the master thread and periodic thread), or shared between all threads. There are various forms such as being secured as memory.

The inter-thread communication area of the master process is similar to the inter-thread communication area of the sound thread of the sound process.

Next, in step S3263, initialization processing is performed. This initialization process includes checking a backup memory (for example, FRAM (registered trademark) 2220) and initializing communication circuits for peripheral devices. Thereafter, in step S3264, the inter-thread communication area as described above is referenced to acquire a request from the inter-process communication thread, and in step S3265, it is determined whether or not the acquired request is the analysis result. If it is determined that the request is the result of analysis (YES in step S3265), then in step S3266 a command-by-command process is performed, after which the flow advances to step S3267.

The processing for each command is processing performed for each command ID of the analysis result (main board command from the main control board 2010). For example, in the case of a start command, stop (stop) command, winning (display or 3 OFF (detection of the player's third stop operation)) command, command ID, internal winning combination, game state, RT state, advantageous section information etc. to the graphic process (master → graphic), and if it is a bet (throw in) command, it judges the consistency with the information from the peripheral device (CMOS selector) thread, and initializes (setting change / setting confirmation) command, it executes the processing for the maintenance (whole) menu and issues a request for the maintenance menu to the graphic process (master→graphics). If it is an error command, error processing and an error screen display request are sent to the graphic process.

In this embodiment, when the start command is received, the graphics process determines the effect (lottery). ) or the like to determine the effect.

If it is determined that the request is not the analysis result (NO in step S3265), the process proceeds to step S3267. In step S3267, it is determined whether or not the request is peripheral device information (such as an inter-device command from a peripheral device). If it is determined that the request is peripheral device information (YES in step S3267), processing for each peripheral device is performed in step S3268, and then the flow advances to step S3269.

The processing for each peripheral device includes the selector 2030 (eg, CMOS selector), the door monitoring unit 2020 (eg, 24h door monitoring unit), the sub display device 2520 (eg, touch panel liquid crystal display device), the main Processing is performed according to information from the display device 2510 (for example, a projector). For example, if it is a CMOS selector, it processes the number of inserted medals according to the inserted medals, and displays an error when it is determined that illegal medals have been inserted based on the medal color/marking judgment result. Make a request request. In the case of a touch panel display device, the type of touch panel operation (tap, flick, zoom, etc.) and coordinate information of the operation are transmitted (requested) to the graphic process.

If it is determined that the request is not peripheral device information (NO in step S3267), the process proceeds to step S3269. In step S3269, it is determined whether the request is liveness information. If it is determined that the request is survival information (YES in step S3269), survival confirmation processing is performed in step S3270, and then the process proceeds to step S3271.

The survival confirmation process confirms the survival information stored in the shared memory "graphics → master", "sound → master", "lamp → master" and the survival information in the inter-thread communication area of the master process. It is a process of determining whether each thread of the process of is operating normally.

In step S3271, the result of the survival confirmation process in step S3270 is referenced to determine whether or not all threads of each process are operating normally. If it is determined that all the threads are operating normally (YES in step S3271), in step S3272, clear the WDT (watchdog timer: not shown) provided in the multi-module of the sub control board 2300, The process advances to step S3274.

On the other hand, if it is determined that at least one thread is not operating normally (NO in step S3271), process and thread management processing is performed in step S3273, and then the process proceeds to step S3274. The process and thread management processing, for example, controls to restart a process having an abnormal thread, or to display information about a thread that is not operating normally on the main display device 2510 or the like.

Note that the process and thread management process may restart (reboot) the sub control board 2300 by using the WDT function, and restart only the abnormal threads. , to indicate that the target thread should be restarted. Such a restart instruction is performed, for example, by sending a message to the shared memory to cause the restart, and having the process (inter-process communication thread of the process) with the abnormal thread read the message. .

In step S3274, it is determined whether or not a power failure interrupt has occurred. If it is determined that a power interruption has occurred (YES in step S3274), power supply interruption processing is performed in step S3275, and then the process proceeds to step S3276. On the other hand, if no power failure interrupt has occurred (NO in step S3274), the process proceeds to step S3276 without doing anything.

In addition, the power supply disconnection process stores the effect information being executed (for example, game state, effect state, moving image and still image being displayed, lamp emission pattern being executed, lamp sequence information) in FRAM (registered trademark) 2220 , request information of the sound being reproduced, etc.), and enables the resuming of the performance executed before the occurrence of the interruption of power supply.

In step S3276, it waits for timing information (MID=1) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3264 to repeat the subsequent processes.

[11-2-4b. Inter-process communication thread of the master process]
FIG. 398 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the interprocess communication thread shown in FIG. The inter-process communication thread monitors the shared memory "graphics → master", "sound → master", "lamp → master", and if there is a request in the shared memory, it retrieves the request from the shared memory , through inter-thread communication, to the master thread.

The inter-process communication thread first acquires requests from the shared memory "graphics→master", "sound→master", and "lamp→master" (step S3291). Next, in step S3292, it is determined whether a request has been made. If it is determined that there is a request (YES in step S3292), the request is set in the inter-thread communication area in step S3293, and the process proceeds to step S3294. In this embodiment, the shared memory "graphics->master", "sound->master", and "lamp->master" are shown in FIGS. 377, 390B, 380B, and 385B. As shown, requests are written from the inter-process communication threads of the graphics process, sound process, and lamp process. If it is determined that there is no request (NO in step S3292), the process proceeds to step S3294 without doing anything.

In step S3294, inter-process communication thread survival information indicating that the thread itself (inter-process communication thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area. This interprocess communication thread liveness information is set even if there is no request to shared memory. After that, in step S3295, it waits for arrival of timing information (MID=2) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3291 to repeat the subsequent processes.

[11-2-4c. Periodic thread of master process]
FIG. 399 shows a flow chart showing the processing flow of the periodic thread shown in FIG. A periodic thread is one that runs at regular intervals and generates timing information for the master thread, the interprocess communication thread, the main board thread, and the peripheral thread, which is then communicated to the master thread using inter-thread communication. , the interprocess communication thread, the main board thread, and the peripheral thread, respectively.

First, in step S3311, timing information generation processing is executed. This timing information generation process is a process of generating timing information at a time corresponding to each thread, and generates timing information of a different lamp ID (MID) for each thread. The MID is, for example, MID=1 in the case of timing information according to the master thread, and is timing information generated every 4 msec. In the case of timing information corresponding to an inter-process communication thread, MID=2, which is timing information generated every 20 seconds. Further, in the case of the timing information according to the main board thread, MID=3, which is timing information generated every 4 sec. This is timing information generated in each cycle.

Next, in step S3312, the generated timing information is set in the inter-thread communication area (for inter-thread communication). Information is set in the inter-thread communication area, after that, in step S3314, it waits for a certain period of time (1 msec), returns to step S3311, and repeats the subsequent processing.

[11-2-4d. Main board thread of master process]
FIG. 400 shows a flowchart illustrating the processing flow of the main board thread shown in FIG. The main board thread receives commands transmitted by the main control board 2010 and performs processing corresponding to the commands. Commands are stored in the receive buffer by receive interrupt processing that occurs in 1-byte units using the UART I/F 2330 (see Fig. 375). Set (register) in a buffer that can be acquired by the board thread.

First, in step S3331, the above buffer is referenced to obtain a command. It is determined in step S3332 whether or not there is a received command, and if it is determined that there is a received command (YES in step S3332), command analysis is performed in step S3333. In this command analysis, the command is checked and the command ID is saved according to the type of the acquired command. store in

In this embodiment, for example, when a start command is received, the graphics process determines the effect (lottery). Sub-side control processing) can also be configured to determine the effect.

Next, in step S3334, the analysis result of the command analysis in step S3333 is set in the inter-thread communication area. , in the inter-thread communication area, and then proceeds to step S3336.

If it is determined in step S3332 that there is no received command (NO in step S3332), the process proceeds to step S3336. In step S3336, it waits for arrival of timing information (MID=3) from the periodic thread, and then returns to step S3331 to repeat the subsequent processes.

[11-2-4e. master process peripheral thread]
FIG. 401 shows a flowchart showing the processing flow of the peripheral device thread shown in FIG. Peripheral thread for selector 2030 (e.g. CMOS selector), door monitoring unit 2020 (e.g. 24h door monitoring unit), sub display 2520 (e.g. touch panel display), main display 2510 (e.g. projector) process. All of these peripheral devices are capable of two-way communication by serial communication (UART).

As described above, in order to perform processing for the peripheral device, the master thread and the peripheral device are controlled by the CMOS selector processing in step S3351, the 24h door management unit processing in step S3352, the touch panel processing in step S3353, and the projector processing in step S3354. Controls the transmission and reception of inter-device commands on the .

The touch panel processing is processing based on the coordinates of the touch panel provided on the sub display device 2520 and information about the type of operation. This is the process of performing

After that, in step S3355, peripheral device thread survival information indicating that the self (peripheral device thread) is alive is set in the inter-thread communication area, and in step S3356, timing information (MID=4) from the periodic thread is sent. The arrival is waited for, and then the process returns to step S3351 to repeat the subsequent processes.

[11-3. Image processing]
Next, image processing by graphic processes (graphic events) executed in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 402 to 404. FIG. Note that the image processing described here can be realized with a multi-process, multi-thread configuration according to this embodiment, but such a configuration is not essential. It is feasible in configurations with at least one CPU and one GPU (or GPU and VPU).

[11-3-1. Normal decoding process]
FIG. 402A shows time-series processing of sub-control processing (CPU processing), graphics control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing) during normal times. Here, the CPU 2390 that performs the sub-control processing corresponds to the arithmetic processing processor, the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 that perform the graphic control processing correspond to the image processing processor, and the sub-control unit 2100 corresponds to the above arithmetic processing processor. and an effect control unit having an image processor. The main display device 2510 and the sub-display device 2520, which are subject to display control and are displayed by the effect control unit, correspond to the display unit, and this display unit can be expressed as a concept including the VRAM 2420 (Fig. 402(B) and FIG. 402(C)).

The effect control unit generates display data to be output to the display unit by decoding the still image data and the moving image data. For example, in the case of MPEG codecs, compression based on inter-frame prediction is performed, and for video data in these formats, key frames (for example, I frames) that can reproduce display data for one frame with only that data Then, decoding processing is performed using a differential frame (for example, a P frame or a B frame) capable of reproducing one frame of display data by referring to a key frame or the like.

Since the normal playback frame rate is 60 fps, sub control processing (CPU processing) by the CPU 2390 of the sub control board 2300 performs processing related to image control at a cycle of 16.5 msec. Here, 16.5 msec is the time for displaying one frame, so at a frame rate of 60 fps, 16.5 msec is called one frame time.

Each of timings t0, t1, t2, t3, and t4 is an interval of one frame time (16.5 msec). In FIG. 402, each cylindrical shape represents a process related to a frame, and the numbers such as “00”, “01”, and “02” described in the cylindrical shape indicate frame numbers. Also, in FIG. 402, the horizontal axis is the time axis, and the length of the cylindrical shape along the time axis represents the time for the outline processing.

In the CPU processing of FIG. 402(A), the CPU 2390 sequentially acquires data necessary for decoding from the sub-ROM 2210 and the like for eight frames from frame 00 to frame 07 within 16.5 msec, writes them to the SDRAM 2430, and the VPU 2410 to instruct the decoding of the frame. In FIG. 402A, an arrow is drawn from the right end of the cylindrical frame 00 for CPU processing to the left end of the cylindrical frame 00 for GPU (VPU) processing. It shows instructions to the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 and preparation of data, and for frames 01 to 06, the arrows are omitted. As described above, in this embodiment, decoding of a plurality of frames (for example, 8 frames) is performed in less than 2 frame times (for example, 1 frame time).

In the display processing of FIG. 402(A), the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 write frame image data such as frames 00 to 03 to the VRAM 2420, and synchronize the frame image data with the VSYNC signal at timings t1, t2, and t3, respectively. The image corresponding to is displayed on the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520. FIG.

In FIG. 402A, when frame 00 is specified as the frame number to be displayed at t0 (that is, when the display frame position is specified), frame 00 is displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like at timing t1. From timing t0 to t1, CPU 2390 and GPU 2400 etc. perform advanced decoding processing of eight frames from frame 00 to frame 07, after which one frame is displayed (consumed) by CPU 2390, GPU 2400 and VPU 2410. Preceding decoding processing is performed on a frame-by-frame basis.

For example, at t1, when frame 01 is designated as the frame number to be displayed (that is, when the display frame position is designated), at timing t1, advance decoding of frame 08 by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. is started, and frame 01 is displayed. is displayed, at timing t2, the CPU 2390 and the GPU 2400, etc., start predecoding frame 09. When frame 02 is displayed, at timing t3, the CPU 2390, the GPU 2400, etc. start predecoding frame 10, After that, precedent decoding processing is similarly performed.

In the processing shown in FIG. 402(A), eight frames are always decoded first. can be set and stored in the sub ROM 2210 or the like. In this embodiment, for example, the maximum number of frames is 8, but various maximum number of frames can be set, and according to the set maximum number of frames, , the number of previous decoding can be set. Such a precedence decoding number is managed as a "threshold" in this embodiment.

It is also possible to set the number of preceding decodes to 0 and synchronize the decoding process and the display process without performing the preceding decoding in the CPU processing and GPU (VPU) processing.

Further, when the display frame position is specified, if the specified frame number is smaller than the frame number to be displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like after that, decoding processing for displaying the past frame is performed. conduct. However, in this case, the decoding process must search the video data of the corresponding keyframe retroactively and sequentially read the difference frames following this keyframe to generate the frame to be displayed.

[11-3-2. Seek decode processing (1)]
FIG. 402(B) shows the sub-control processing (CPU processing) when seeking for 5 frames (Seek=5) occurs twice in the situation where the number of preceding decodes=8 shown in FIG. 402(A). ), graphics control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing).

Here, seeking is a process of fast-forwarding a moving image, and the above-described process of displaying past frames (also referred to as rewinding or fast-rewinding) is one of seeks.

The seek of “Seek=5” shown in FIG. 402(B) is to fast-forward playback by skipping four frames. The higher the seek number, the faster the fast-forward speed. For example, the moving image fast-forwarding process is performed when the effect moving image displayed on the main display device 2510 is reproduced in fast-forward by the player's operation.

As shown in FIG. 402(B), the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. initially operate to decode eight frames in advance, as in the case of FIG. 402(A). Here, at timing t0a immediately before timing t1, the CPU 2390 receives a seek command of "Seek = 5" (frame number = display frame position designation for adding the number of frames to be sought to the current frame number and displaying = 05). Suppose Then, at this point, the specified frame number is compared with the frame number displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like thereafter. Here, the specified frame number (05) is larger than the frame number (00) displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like, and the difference between the frame numbers is smaller than the above-described threshold "8". has been decoded, and the CPU 2390 displays frame 05 at timing t2 to perform fast-forward video playback. In FIG. 402B, frame 00 is displayed at timing t1, and frame 05 is displayed at the next timing. If a predetermined processing condition is satisfied, it is possible to display frame 05 at timing t1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the current frame number displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like is "00" has been described. When the command is received, it becomes the specified frame number (106).

Further, in the CPU processing, after receiving the seek command of "Seek=5" at the timing t0a, the frames after frame 06 are required, so control is performed so that the eight frames after frame 06 are precedently decoded. . At this point, since it is unknown whether or not a seek command will be received in the future, it is necessary to sequentially decode frames after frame 06 in preparation for subsequent normal video reproduction. Also, since frames 06 and 07 are to be performed between timings t0 and t1, the schedule remains unchanged, and decoding of frames 08 to 12 is newly started from timing t1. Decoding of frame 13 is started from timing t2.

In this regard, during normal decoding shown in FIG. 402(A), only frame 08 was decoded between timings t1 and t2. frames are decoded first. Also, at this time, the decoded frames from frames 01 to 04 are discarded.

Next, at timing t1a, if a seek command of "Seek=5" (specifying a display frame position for displaying frame number=10) is received again, at this point, the specified frame number and then the main The frame numbers displayed on the display device 2510 or the like are compared. Here, the designated frame number (10) is larger than the frame number (05) displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like, and the difference between the frame numbers is smaller than the above threshold "8". has been decoded, control is performed to display frame 10 at timing t3.

In the CPU processing, after receiving the seek command of "Seek=5" at timing t1a, frames after frame 11 are required, so control is performed so that 8 frames after frame 11 are pre-decoded. At this point, it is not known whether or not a seek command will be received in the future, so it is necessary to sequentially decode frames after frame 11 in preparation for normal video reproduction. Also, since frames 11 and 12 are to be performed between timings t1 and t2, the schedule remains unchanged, and decoding of frames 13 to 17 is newly started from timing t2. Decoding of frame 18 is started from timing t3.

In this regard, during normal decoding shown in FIG. 402(A), only frame 09 was decoded between timings t2 and t3. Frames are decoded first. At this time, the previously decoded frames from frame 06 to frame 09 are discarded.

Since no seek instruction is received between timings t2 and t3, the same processing as in normal decoding shown in FIG. At timing t4, frame 11 is displayed, and only frame 19 is decoded at timing t4.

[11-3-3. Seek decode processing (2)]
FIG. 402(C) shows the sub-control processing (CPU processing) when seek for 10 frames (Seek=10) occurs once in the situation where the number of preceding decodes=8 shown in FIG. 402(A). ), graphics control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing).

Here, seeking is processing to fast-forward or rewind a moving image, and seeking with “Seek=10” shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 402(C), the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. initially operate to decode eight frames in advance, as in the case of FIG. 402(A). Here, it is assumed that the CPU 2390 receives a seek command of "Seek=10" (display frame position designation for displaying frame number=10) at timing t0b immediately before timing t1. Then, at this point, the specified frame number is compared with the frame number displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like thereafter. Here, the specified frame number (10) is larger than the frame number (00) displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like, and the difference between the frame numbers is larger than the threshold "8", so the CPU 2390 , at timing t2, it is necessary to display frame 10 and perform control to fast-forward moving image reproduction.

In the CPU processing, after receiving the seek instruction of "Seek=10" at timing t0b, frames after frame 10 are required, so decoding processing for frames 08 and 09 is skipped, and from timing t1, frame 10 and subsequent frames are required. frame is controlled to perform preceding decoding. At this point, since it is unknown whether or not a seek command will be received in the future, it is necessary to sequentially decode frames after frame 10 in preparation for subsequent normal video reproduction. Decoding of frames 10 to 17 is newly started from timing t1, and further decoding of frame 18 is started from timing t2. At this time, the previously decoded frames from frame 01 to frame 07 are discarded.

Since no seek instruction is received between timings t1 and t2, the same processing as in normal decoding shown in FIG. At timing t3, frame 11 is displayed, and at timing t4, only frame 19 is decoded. At timing t4, frame 12 is displayed, and only frame 20 is decoded at timing t4.

Also, for example, in the situation where the preceding decoding process shown in FIG. Then, the designated frame number is compared with the frame number displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like thereafter. Here, the designated frame number (8) is larger than the frame number (00) displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like, and the difference between the frame numbers is the same as the threshold "8" described above. Therefore, at timing t2, the CPU 2390 displays frame 8 and performs control to fast-forward moving image reproduction. In the CPU processing, after receiving the seek command of "Seek=8" at timing t0b, frames after frame 8 are required. Therefore, from timing t1, frames after frame 8 are controlled to be precedently decoded. At this point, it is not known whether or not a seek command will be received in the future, so it is necessary to sequentially decode the frames after frame 08 in preparation for subsequent normal video reproduction. That is, between timing t1 and timing t2, decoding of frames 08 to 15 is newly started, and furthermore, decoding of frame 16 is started from timing t2.

In this way, if the difference between the frame number specified by the seek command and the frame number to be displayed is smaller than the threshold value, it is determined that pre-decoding has been completed, and the pre-decoded frame position is advanced to. On the other hand, if the difference between the frame number for which the display frame position is specified by the seek command and the frame number to be displayed is greater than or equal to the threshold, it is determined that the frame to be displayed has not been pre-decoded, and the pre-decoded frame is discarded. At the same time, the pre-decoding process for unnecessary frames is skipped (if necessary), and pre-decoding is newly started from the seek destination frame. However, skipping the preceding decoding process interrupts the sequential decoding process, and as a result, the original video data is searched for the frame of the frame number for which the display frame position is specified, and the searched frame is the key frame. If there is, it is used as it is, but if the search frame is not a key frame, search the video data of the corresponding previous key frame, and sequentially read the difference frames following this key frame to generate the display frame. Since processing (seek processing) is required, depending on the case, the processing cost may rather increase. Therefore, when a seek command is issued, it is necessary to determine whether to continue the decoding process (including the use of the decoded frame) or to jump to the decoding process of the frame number for which the display frame position is specified. How to set the threshold becomes important.

If the frame to be displayed by the seek instruction has already been pre-decoded, pre-decode processing is newly added for the number of pre-decode processing possible, and this additional pre-decode processing is performed at the timing of the next frame time. By doing so, the processing load can be reduced.

Also, if the frame to be displayed by the seek command has already been pre-decoded, the processing cost (processing time) is the same as the pre-decoding process in normal processing, and some frames are discarded, but the processing load increases. never do. Also, in a situation where a seek instruction is issued as shown in FIG. 402(C), if normal processing is performed as shown in FIG. frames are discarded continuously, resulting in an increase in the processing load.

In this example, the threshold "8" corresponds to the number of frames for which the preceding decoding process is performed. A more appropriate numerical value can be determined based on the relationship between the time and the time to skip the preceding decoding processing of unnecessary frames and perform the decoding processing from the frame for which the display frame position is specified.

[11-3-4.30 fps video playback processing]
In FIG. 403(A), as in FIG. 402(A), time series of sub-control processing (CPU processing), graphics control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing) during normal operation is shown. processing is shown.

In this embodiment, the graphic process is performed at 60 fps (16.5 msec), but it is also possible to use a moving image (movie) created at a frame rate of 30 fps. Also, in this case, the frame rate of the video is fixed to the hardware specifications, and in many cases it is not possible to change it in the initial settings. Also, if moving images with different frame rates are mixed and control is performed to frequently change the frame rate, there is a concern that unpredictable problems may occur. Therefore, it is necessary to use software to cope with the situation described above.

Here, if a 30 fps moving image is reproduced as it is on a platform that reproduces a 60 fps moving image, it will be reproduced at double speed, so processing is performed once every two frames. As a result, one frame is substantially reproduced every 33 msec, and a 30 fps video is reproduced at normal speed. In addition, with such processing, the writing (display processing) to the VRAM 2420 is also performed once every two times, and a 30 fps moving image can be easily reproduced at a processing cycle of 60 fps.

In FIG. 403(A), as in FIG. 402(A) and the like, the sub-control processing (CPU processing) by the CPU 2390 of the sub-control board 2300 performs processing related to image control at a cycle of 16.5 msec. Each of timings t0, t1, t2, t3, and t4 is an interval of one frame time (16.5 msec). In FIG. 403, similarly to FIG. 402, each cylindrical shape represents a process related to a frame, and numbers such as "00", "01", and "02" written on the cylindrical shape indicate frame numbers. there is 402, the horizontal axis is the time axis, and the length of the cylindrical shape along the time axis represents the time for the outline processing.

In the CPU processing of FIG. 403(A), the CPU 2390 sequentially acquires data necessary for decoding from the sub-ROM 2210 and the like for eight frames from frame 00 to frame 07 within 16.5 msec, writes them to the SDRAM 2430, and the VPU 2410 to instruct the decoding of the frame. In FIG. 403A, an arrow is drawn from the right end of the cylindrical frame 00 for CPU processing to the left end of the cylindrical frame 00 for GPU (VPU) processing. It shows instructions to the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 and preparation of data, and for frames 01 to 06, the arrows are omitted.

In the display processing of FIG. 403(A), the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 write frame image data such as frames 00 to 03 to the VRAM 2420, and synchronize the frame image data with the VSYNC signal at timings t1, t2, and t3, respectively. The image corresponding to is displayed on the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520. FIG.

Here, in FIG. 403A, until frame 00 is displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like at timing t1, eight frames from frame 00 to frame 07 are displayed by the CPU 2390 and GPU 2400 and the like from timing t0 to t1. is performed, and thereafter, control is performed so that frame 00 is displayed also at timing t2. Such display control can be realized, for example, by writing frame image data in the VRAM 2420 and setting the VSYNC signal to a period of 33 msec. becomes.

Also, for example, the frame image data of frame 00 is written to the first frame buffer of the VRAM 2420, the frame 00 is displayed by the VSYNC signal at timing t1, and then the frame image data of frame 00 is also written to the second frame buffer. In this state, the same frame 00 is displayed by the VSYNC signal at the timing t2, and as a result, the frame 00 may be displayed continuously for two frames (33 msec) on the display device.

Thereafter, the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, and VPU 2410 perform advance decoding processing on a frame-by-frame basis each time a new frame is displayed for the second time. In FIG. 403A, when frame 00 is displayed for the second time (display at timing t2), decoding of frame 08 by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. starts at timing t2, and frame 01 is displayed for the second time (display at timing t2). display at timing t4) is performed, at timing t4, decoding of frame 09 by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. is started, and thereafter, advance decoding processing is similarly performed.

With such video playback processing, low frame rate video data (for example, 30 fps video data as described above) can be read on a platform that plays high frame rate video (for example, 60 fps video as described above). can be controlled to play the video at normal speed.

[11-3-5.60 fps video playback processing]
In FIG. 403B, as in FIG. 402A and the like, time series of sub-control processing (CPU processing), graphic control processing (GPU (VPU) processing), and display control (display processing) in normal time processing is shown.

In this embodiment, the graphic process is processed at 60 fps (16.5 msec), but it is also assumed that 60 fps video data is reproduced at 30 fps for the purpose of reducing the processing load. Further, in this case, the frame rate of the moving image is fixed to the hardware specifications and often cannot be changed by initial setting or the like. Therefore, it is necessary to use software to cope with the situation described above.

Here, if a video (movie) created at a frame rate of 60 fps is played back at 30 fps as it is, the playback will be doubled, so it is necessary to skip one frame every 33 msec. be. With this, a 60 fps movie is played back at normal speed. In addition, with such processing, the writing (display processing) to the VRAM 2420 is also performed once every two times, and a 30 fps moving image can be easily reproduced at a processing cycle of 60 fps.

In FIG. 403B, as in FIG. 402A and the like, the sub-control processing (CPU processing) by the CPU 2390 of the sub-control board 2300 performs processing related to image control at a cycle of 16.5 msec. Each of timings t0, t1, t2, t3, and t4 is an interval of one frame time (16.5 msec).

In the CPU processing of FIG. 403(B), the CPU 2390 sequentially acquires data necessary for decoding from the sub-ROM 2210 and the like for eight frames from frame 00 to frame 07 within 16.5 msec, writes them to the SDRAM 2430, and the VPU 2410 to instruct the decoding of the frame. In FIG. 403B, an arrow is drawn from the right end of the cylindrical frame 00 for CPU processing to the left end of the cylindrical frame 00 for GPU (VPU) processing. It shows instructions to the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 and preparation of data, and for frames 01 to 06, the arrows are omitted.

In the display processing of FIG. 403B, the GPU 2400 and VPU 2410 write frame image data such as frames 00, 02, and 04 to the VRAM 2420, and synchronize with the VSYNC signal at timings t1, t2, t3, and t4, respectively. It shows the process of displaying an image corresponding to frame image data on the main display device 2510 and the sub display device 2520 .

Here, in FIG. 403B, until frame 00 is displayed on the main display device 2510 or the like at timing t1, eight frames from frame 00 to frame 07 are displayed by the CPU 2390 and GPU 2400 and the like from timing t0 to t1. is performed, and thereafter, control is performed so that frame 00 is displayed also at timing t2. Such display control can be realized, for example, by writing frame image data in the VRAM 2420 and setting the VSYNC signal to a period of 33 msec. becomes.

Also, for example, the frame image data of frame 00 is written to the first frame buffer of the VRAM 2420, the frame 00 is displayed by the VSYNC signal at timing t1, and then the frame image data of frame 00 is also written to the second frame buffer. In this state, the same frame 00 is displayed by the VSYNC signal at the timing t2, and as a result, the frame 00 may be displayed continuously for two frames (33 msec) on the display device.

Thereafter, in FIG. 403B, frame 02 is displayed at timing t3, and frame 02 continues to be displayed at timing t4. In this way, by skipping frames at intervals of 33 msec, 60 fps moving image data can be reproduced as 30 fps moving images.

Each time a new frame is displayed for the second time by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, and VPU 2410, pre-decoding processing is performed on a frame-by-frame basis. In FIG. 403B, when frame 00 is displayed for the second time (display at timing t2), decoding of frame 08 by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. starts at timing t2, and frame 02 is displayed for the second time (display at timing t2). display at timing t4) is performed, at timing t4, decoding of frame 09 by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, etc. is started, and thereafter, advance decoding processing is similarly performed.

Since only even frames such as frames 00, 02, and 04 are used for display processing here, processing of odd frames such as frames 01, 03, and 05 may be omitted in advance decoding processing by the CPU 2390, GPU 2400, and the like. can.

With such video playback processing, on a platform that plays back high frame rate video (eg, 60 fps video as described above), high frame rate video data can be converted to low frame rate video (eg, 30 fps as described above). video) can be controlled so that the video is played back at a normal speed.

[11-3-6. Blend processing]
FIG. 404 shows an overview of the blend processing executed by the GPU 2400 in the graphics process (graphic event) of this embodiment.

FIG. 404A shows a temporary buffer 2610 used for blending images, a work buffer 2620 for storing a base image (background), and a frame buffer 2630. FIG. The temporary buffer 2610 has the same buffer size as the screen size, and the sprite image 1 is arranged at the actual drawing position. The temporary buffer 2610, work buffer 2620, and frame buffer 2630 ("first frame buffer" and "second frame buffer" described above) correspond to the VRAM 2420 shown in FIG. 375 of this embodiment.

Also, it is possible to make the temporary buffer 2610 and the work buffer 2620 correspond to the SDRAM 2430, and it is also possible to make either one of the temporary buffer 2610 or the work buffer 2620 correspond to the VRAM 2420 and the other one to correspond to the SDRAM 2430. is. The correspondence between the temporary buffer 2610 and the work buffer 2620, the VRAM 2420, and the SDRAM 2430 can be appropriately set in advance according to the usage capacity of each RAM.

A shader or the like in the GPU 2400 blends the sprite image 1 in the temporary buffer 2610 and the background image stored in the work buffer 2620 and outputs the blend result to the frame buffer 2630 . In frame buffer 2630 , sprite image 1 is placed at the same coordinate position as in temporary buffer 2610 . As a result, the frame buffer 2630 stores an image in which the sprite image 1 is synthesized in front of the background image.

Similar to FIG. 404A, FIG. 404B shows a temporary buffer 2610 used for blending images, a work buffer 2620 for storing a base image (background), and a frame buffer 2630. FIG. Sprite image 1 and sprite image 2 are arranged at the actual rendering positions in the temporary buffer 2610, unlike FIG. 404(A). Note that the frame buffer 2630 corresponds to the VRAM 2420 shown in FIG. 375 of this embodiment.

A shader or the like in the GPU 2400 blends the sprite images 1 and 2 in the temporary buffer 2610 and the background image stored in the work buffer 2620 and outputs the blend result to the frame buffer 2630 . In frame buffer 2630 , sprite images 1 and 2 are placed at the same coordinate positions as in temporary buffer 2610 . As a result, the frame buffer 2630 stores an image obtained by synthesizing the sprite images 1 and 2 in front of the base image. As shown in FIG. 404B, if the coordinates of sprite images 1 and 2 do not overlap, both can be placed in the temporary buffer 2610, and a shader or the like can perform blend processing at the same time.

Conventionally, when blending images, buffers corresponding to each sprite image were prepared (for example, five buffers for sprite images of five different image sizes, or 10 buffers regardless of image size). 10 buffers for different types of sprite images), as in this embodiment, only one temporary buffer 2610 that is the same as the screen size can be used to store each sprite image. can be used well.

When blending is performed multiple times, the blended image (sprite image) stored in the frame buffer 2630 is temporarily copied to a part of the temporary buffer 2610, and blended with other sprite images. After doing so, the processing results can be written back to the same location in the frame buffer 2630 again.

[11-4. File decompression process]
Next, file decompression processing by a graphic process (graphic event) will be described.

In the graphic process according to the present embodiment described above, when multi-threaded reading is performed, the GZIP 2370 of the sub-control board 2300 is used to decompress image data (see FIG. 375). GZIP2370 is a circuit for decompressing files, and when reading files in multiple threads, this circuit can only be used by one thread. Therefore, the graphics thread using GZIP 2370 locks the GZIP 2370 circuit (device) before decompressing the file.

At this time, if the GZIP 2370 circuit is locked when the file is decompressed by another graphics thread, it will fail, so decompression processing is performed by software. This software decompression process is a software implementation of the decompression process executed by the GZIP2370 circuit. The graphics thread can wait for the GZIP 2370 circuit to become free when the lock of the GZIP 2370 circuit fails. File reading performance can be avoided from being effectively single-threaded (due to the GZIP2370 bottleneck).

Here, referring to FIG. 405, the file decompression processing of the graphics thread will be described. FIG. 405 is a flowchart showing the flow of file decompression processing in one graphics thread.

First, in step S3371, a status indicating whether or not the circuit of GZIP 2370 (hereinafter referred to as "HW GZIP") is being used by another graphics thread is obtained. Next, in step S3372, the acquired status is referenced to determine whether HW GZIP is in operation.

If it is determined that this HW GZIP is not in operation (NO in step S3372), the graphics thread can perform file decompression processing using HW GZIP, and thereafter performs processing for that purpose. First, in step S3373, HW GZIP is device-locked to prevent other graphics threads from using this HW GZIP. Next, in step S3374, HW GZIP is requested to decompress the designated file. After that, when the file decompression processing by HW GZIP is completed, the device of HW GZIP is unlocked in step S3375 so that other graphics threads can use this HW GZIP. After the process of step S3375, the graphics thread ends the file decompression process.

If it is determined that this HW GZIP is in operation (YES in step S3372), then in step S3376 the graphics thread issues a decompression request for the designated file to perform GZIP decompression processing (SW GZIP) by software. . After that, when the file decompression processing by the software ends, the graphics thread ends the file decompression processing.

[11-4. sound control]
Next, sound control executed by the sound process (sound thread) of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 406 to 409. FIG. A CPU 2390 that controls the operation of such a sound process (sound thread) corresponds to an arithmetic processing unit, and a digital amplifier 2240 that is connected to the CPU 2390 and receives and amplifies sound data from the CPU 2390 corresponds to a sound source amplification unit. do. A speaker group 2040 that is connected to the digital amplifier 2240 and outputs sound corresponds to a sound output unit.

The main thread of another process, such as the master process or graphics process, receives an event code request or sound code request via shared memory to the inter-process communication thread of the sound process, then from the inter-process communication thread to the sound thread, These requests are passed. The event code request is an event representing an event that occurs due to operation of the start lever 7, operation of the stop buttons 8L, 8C, 8R, insertion of medals (bet operation), or the like, of the pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment. contains code. Also, the sound code request includes a sound code specifying a request for sound.

When the sound thread receives an event code request, it obtains a sound object based on the event code, then obtains the sound code (hash value) registered in the obtained sound object, and sends the request based on the sound code. I do. Here, there may be a plurality of sound objects, in which case requests corresponding to a plurality of sound codes are made for each sound object. On the other hand, when the sound code is received, the request is made using the sound code as it is. The sound thread calls library APIs to implement requests for that sound code.

When executing a request related to the sound code as described above, when calling the library API, request information including request data corresponding to each sound code is sent to the library API. FIG. 406A shows an example of request data of this embodiment.

The request data shown in FIG. 406(A) includes a plurality of data including the item "target channel/group". Here, the "target channel/group" specifies the control target of the request data, and as shown in FIG. 406(B), even the same area has a plurality of data storage formats. That is, when the control target is a single channel, the channel number is represented by the 7th and 8th bytes (16 bits) of the 8 bytes. group number (a group of two or more specified channels, for example, group number "01" is a grouping number of four channels, channel 10, channel 11, channel 14, and channel 15) show. Also, as shown in FIG. 406(B), when there are multiple channels to be controlled, all bits of 8 bytes are used to designate multiple channels to be controlled from among 64 channels (1ch to 64ch). . For example, if the first bit is "1", use the 64th channel (64ch), if the last bit is "1", use the first channel (1ch), Bits of unused channels are set to "0".

The difference between a single group and multiple channels is that for a single group, channels must be set in advance for each group. Corresponding bits can be specified.

Note that the above-mentioned "channel" represents a logical channel (logical channel), unlike a physical channel (physical channel) corresponding to the speaker. Such logical channels are used to synthesize multiple sound sources and output to one physical channel (speaker). For example, if one logical channel is associated with a BGM sound source and another logical channel is associated with a bet (insertion) sound effect, such as inserting a coin, then these two sounds are synthesized. Then, the voice after synthesis is output from one speaker.

As shown in FIG. 406C, the upper 2 bytes (16 bits) of the "option flag/function type" item represent the option flag, and the lower 2 bytes represent the function type. If the first bit of the option flag is "1", it indicates that the request is for the specified sound code, and the contents of the "target channel/group" have no meaning. For example, "1" is set for requests such as pause/unpause and mute/unmute. If the first bit is "0", the request is not for the designated sound code, so the second bit is evaluated.

If the second bit is "1", it indicates that the request is for multiple channels, and all eight bytes of the "target channel/group" are evaluated as bits representing the channel to be controlled. On the other hand, if the second bit is "0", it indicates that the request is for a single channel or single group, and if there is data in bytes 7-8 of the "target channel/group", the value , represents the channel number to be controlled, and if there is data in the 5th and 6th bytes, the value represents the group number to be controlled.

In addition, the request data shown in FIG. 406(A) includes, for example, delay time, priority, master volume reference index number, command volume value, playback request parameter, own request ID, target request ID, fade attribute, Ducking attributes, fade request parameters, ducking request parameters, etc. are included.

The delay time is the delay time until the start of reproduction in the case of a single tone, and the delay time until the execution in the case of a sequence request (the sequence request will be described later). Also, the master volume reference index number is an index number that refers to master volume information stored in a master volume table, which will be described later. In the master volume table, for example, 32 types and seven levels of volume values are defined. . The reproduction request parameters include, for example, the name of the sound file to be reproduced, the file format, the reproduction start position, and the like.

In addition, the own request ID is the request ID of the request information for a single sound request, and the request ID of the request information (of the sequence request) for a child request (child reproduction request) of the sequence request. The ID and its own request ID have different values.

If the first bit of the option flag indicates that the request is for the specified sound code, the target request ID is, for example, a request ID for pausing/unpausing or muting/unmuting. to specify.

The fading attribute has contents such as none, in, and out, and the ducking attribute has contents such as none, target, and influence. Fade request parameters and ducking request parameters are defined as required by the fade and ducking attributes.

FIG. 407 shows an example of a request table stored in the sub ROM 2210 or the like. In this example, the request table is configured to have common headers and multiple request information. The common header stores versions of tools, encoders, libraries, binary file data formats, system sampling frequency, system frame rate, number of data (of data stored in tables), and so on.

Each piece of request information is associated with a sound code and typically includes one or more pieces of request data. The request information may also contain sequence markers that function as one or more indices specifying the playback position of the sound, for example, by time or frame number. There may also be only request information.

The request table shown in FIG. 407 exemplifies three pieces of request information, and the request information with Index=1 has sound code=0003 and one piece of request data. This request data is a reproduction request for "2ch" whose control target is a single channel, and request ID=1. Further, the reproduction request parameters related to this reproduction request define sound file name=M1, file format=A, reproduction start position=10, and the like.

Also, the request information of Index=2 has sound code=0022 and one request data. This request data is a reproduction request for "2ch" whose control target is a single channel, and request ID=2. Further, the reproduction request parameters related to this reproduction request define sound file name=M2, file format=A, reproduction start position=20, and the like.

The request information of Index=10 is a sequence request including sound code=0101 and three requests (two playback requests and one volume control request). A sequence request is composed of a plurality of sound controls (reproduction, stop, volume control, etc.) arranged on the time axis as one request. In the sequence request, only the playback request is registered by quoting the already registered playback request, and the playback request parameter defined by the quoting source is used as the playback request parameter.

Here, the request information of Index=1 (playback request of request ID=1) and the request information of Index=2 (playback request of request ID=2) are sequence requests (requests) corresponding to the request information of Index=10. ID = 10) and in the request information with Index = 10, the request data of the reproduction request with request ID = 1 refers to the original request information with Index = 1 as reproduction request data (1). own request ID is "1" instead of "10". Similarly, the request data of the reproduction request with request ID=2 refers to the original request information with Index=2 as reproduction request data (2). 2”.

When two playback requests are included in such a sequence request with request ID=10, one playback request is a "child request" and the sequence request is a "parent request".

A sequence request represented by request information with Index=10 may contain several sequence markers, as shown in FIG. Each sequence marker has a marker position (time) and a marker name.

As a specific mechanism, when the sound being played reaches the marker position, the marker name is stored in the playback information, and the playback information in which the marker name is stored is sent to the graphics process and/or the ramp process, It is a function provided for the receiving process to execute an effect corresponding to the marker name stored in the reproduction information, and is information that can be arbitrarily set by the designer. Therefore, depending on the marker name, it is possible to use it in the graphic process but not in the ramp process.

With such a configuration, each request is set with an individual sound code, so for example, if a mute request is executed for the sound code "0101" of the sequence request, the entire sequence (all included playback requests) On the other hand, if a mute request is executed by specifying the sound code "0003" or "0022" of the playback request, the playback of the sound related to the corresponding playback request can be individually muted. can.

Similarly, for example, if a playback stop request is executed for the sound code "0101" of the sequence request, the entire sequence (playback of all included sounds related to the playback request) can be stopped, while the sound code "0003" of the playback request can be stopped. , or "0022" to execute the reproduction stop request, the reproduction of the sound related to the corresponding reproduction request can be individually stopped.

FIG. 408(A) shows an example of the hash value request table. The hash value request table has a common header in the same format as the common header described in relation to the request table shown in FIG. ) is associated with the index value and stored.

The hash value of the hash value request table is generated based on the sound code. Since the order in which each request is stored in the request table and the order in which the hash value request table is stored are the same, the hash value and the request information corresponding to this hash value are stored in the same index (in the same storage order). ) are associated.

As mentioned above, the sound thread receives an event code request and acquires the sound code (hash value) registered in the acquired sound object based on the event code. It is done with reference. After obtaining the hash value, the request information in the request table is specified based on the hash value, and the request is made using the specified request information.

FIG. 408(B) shows an example of the channel group table. The channel group table has a common header in the same format as the common header described in connection with the request table shown in Figure 407, and also stores channel group information for each channel group. Each channel group information includes a group number and channel information of channels belonging to this group. The channel information is, for example, 64-bit data, and each bit indicates whether or not the corresponding channel belongs. , 1ch belongs to the group. A channel with a bit value of "0" indicates that it does not belong to the group.

By using the channel group table in this way, it is possible to flexibly set the correspondence between groups and channels belonging to the groups.

FIG. 408(C) shows an example of the master volume table. The master volume table has a common header in the same format as the common header described in relation to the request table shown in FIG. 407, and also stores a plurality of master volume information. In this example, 32 types of master volume information are stored, and each master volume information stores an index number and 7 volume values. is possible.

As described above, in the request data shown in FIG. 406(A), one master volume information in this master volume table is referenced by the master volume reference index number, and the volume setting can be changed for each request. can.

In this embodiment, the volume of the sound source data to be transmitted to the digital amplifier 2240 is reflected in the master volume information and the player volume that can be selected by the player. Also, the volume of the digital amplifier 2240 may be set based on the master volume information and the player volume that can be selected by the player. The set value of the volume is transmitted to the digital amplifier 2240 via the digital amplifier 2240 .

In this embodiment, there are cases where the master volume information is not referred to. For example, when the master process issues an event code or sound code (see FIG. 380(A)) requesting to emit an abnormal sound when an error occurs (for example, the main board command is an error command), the master volume information Regardless, the abnormal sound is always controlled to play at maximum volume.

FIG. 409 shows an example of sound data. The sound data of this embodiment is sound data created according to the type of encoding, and is, for example, a file in a format such as an SMZ file or PCM. FIG. 409A shows sound data with sound markers, including a common header, marker information, and a data section. The common header includes, for example, data length, size of one frame, number of frames, codec version, data format version, sampling frequency, bit rate, monaural/stereo type, number of sound markers, loop section (number of start position samples) , loop section (end position sample number).

Also, this sound data includes marker information of the number defined by the number of sound markers in the common header, and each marker information includes each marker position (for example, frame position). The data section stores actual sound data such as PCM data and sound source data compressed in the SMA format.

FIG. 409B shows an example of sound data without sound markers. The common header is the same as the common header of the sound data shown in FIG. 409(A), and after the common header is stored a data section containing the actual data of the sound.

The configuration of the game machine described above and the effects of the configuration will be described below.

<Appendix H-1>
A conventional gaming machine has been proposed that can change the display speed of display effects (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-073743).

In the game machine according to such a proposal, the display speed of the display effect is changed by the display speed gradual change unit of the display control device. If the video is played at double speed by changing the , it is necessary to play the 3rd frame after playing the 1st frame. It will be.

However, in such a game machine, when a moving image is reproduced at double speed by a program, there is a problem that the above-described seek processing always occurs, resulting in heavy processing. In addition, as in the game machine described above, if the display control device is provided with a dedicated circuit such as the display speed stepwise change unit, the manufacturing cost will increase.

The present invention has been made in view of such points, and changes the display speed of an image in an effect without increasing the processing load (for example, from normal speed to n times speed (2 times speed or 5 times speed). etc.).

A further object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of changing the display speed of images in an effect at low cost without providing a dedicated circuit.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.
(H-1-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
a display unit (for example, a main display device 2510 and a sub display device 2520 (including a VRAM 2420) shown in FIG. 375);
It has an arithmetic processor (for example, CPU2390 shown in FIG. 375) and an image processor (for example, GPU2400 or VPU2410 shown in FIG. 375) that is connected to the arithmetic processor and performs image processing, and performs effect control. A production control unit that displays on the display unit (for example, a sub control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375),
The production control unit is
decoding means for performing decoding processing from still image data and moving image data to generate display data;
display data output means for displaying the display frame on the display unit by outputting the display data to the display unit every frame time (for example, in the case of 60 fps, one frame time is 16.5 msec); (for example, a pachislot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment).

(H-1-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit (for example, specifies a frame number of a frame to be displayed) to the decoding means,
The decoding means is
capable of performing the decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of display frames in one frame time;
Preceding decoding processing that performs the decoding processing in advance (for example, as shown in FIG. 402A, from timing t0 to timing t1, decoding processing from frame 00 to frame 07 is performed, and display processing for frame 00 is performed. A game machine that is configured to be able to perform processing performed before.

(H-1-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position for specifying a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding means,
The decoding means is
capable of performing the decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames in one frame time;
A preceding decoding process that performs the decoding process in advance is possible,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings of display data that can be generated in advance (the number of frames to be decoded in advance) is set, and
A gaming machine configured such that the upper limit of the number of decoding processes to be performed in one frame time (for example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 402A to 402C, a maximum of 8 frames) is set.

(H-1-4) The invention according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to third embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position for specifying a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding means,
The decoding means is
capable of performing the decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames in one frame time;
A preceding decoding process that performs the decoding process in advance is possible,
The production control unit is
The preceding decoding process is newly performed for the amount used by outputting the display data to the display unit (for example, as shown in FIG. a frame 08 is decoded at , and frame 09 is decoded at timing t2 at which frame 01 is displayed.

(H-1-5) The invention according to the fifth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position for specifying a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding means,
The decoding means is
capable of performing the decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames in one frame time;
A preceding decoding process that performs the decoding process in advance is possible,
The production control unit is
having a threshold for the display data;
According to the frame position value related to the display frame position designation, the frame position value related to the display frame displayed on the display unit, and the relation with the threshold value, the preceding decoding process is performed for the display data output means. and the display data generated by the decoding process to be output to the display unit.

(H-1-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position for specifying a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding means,
The decoding means is
capable of performing the decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames in one frame time;
A preceding decoding process that performs the decoding process in advance is possible,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings of display data that can be generated in advance is set,
The effect control unit has a threshold for the display data,
The threshold is set based on the number of preceding decodes,
The production control unit is
When the frame position value related to the display frame position designation is larger than the frame position value related to the display frame displayed on the display unit, and the difference between the two frame position values is smaller than the threshold value (for example, , as shown in FIG. 402(B), the frame position value (frame 05 indicated by Seek=5) related to the display frame position specification is greater than the frame 00 related to display processing, and the frame position value If the difference "5" is smaller than the threshold "8"), the display unit is controlled to display the display frame related to the display frame position designation using the display data already generated by the preceding decoding process. A game machine configured to.

(H-1-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position for specifying a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding means,
The decoding means is
capable of performing the decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames in one frame time;
A preceding decoding process that performs the decoding process in advance is possible,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings of display data that can be generated in advance is set,
The effect control unit has a threshold for the display data,
The threshold is set based on the number of preceding decodes,
The production control unit is
If the frame position value related to the display frame position designation is larger than the frame position value related to the display frame displayed on the display unit and the difference between the two frame position values is smaller than the threshold value, the The display data output means is configured to select the display data of the frame position related to the display frame position designation from the display data already generated by the preceding decoding process, and to output the display data to the display section. A game machine that is played.

(H-1-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position for specifying a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding means,
The decoding means is
capable of performing the decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames in one frame time;
A preceding decoding process that performs the decoding process in advance is possible,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings of display data that can be generated in advance is set,
The effect control unit has a threshold for the display data,
The threshold is set based on the number of preceding decodes,
The production control unit is
When the frame position value related to the display frame position designation is greater than the frame position value related to the display frame displayed on the display unit, and the difference between the two frame position values is equal to or greater than the threshold value ( For example, as shown in FIG. 402(C), the frame position value (frame 10 indicated by Seek=10) related to the display frame position specification is greater than the frame 00 related to display processing, and the frame position value is equal to or greater than the threshold "8"), without using the display data already generated by the preceding decoding process (for example, as shown in FIG. 402(C), at subsequent timing t1 A game machine configured to display a display frame related to the display frame position designation on the display unit (using the decoded frame 10).

(H-1-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to eighth embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position for specifying a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding means,
The decoding means is
capable of performing the decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames in one frame time;
A preceding decoding process that performs the decoding process in advance is possible,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings of display data that can be generated in advance is set,
The effect control unit has a threshold for the display data,
The threshold is set based on the number of preceding decodes,
The production control unit is
When the frame position value related to the display frame position designation is greater than the frame position value related to the display frame displayed on the display unit, and the difference between the two frame position values is equal to or greater than the threshold, controlling the decoding means to perform a decoding process for generating display data at a frame position related to the display frame position designation, and further causing the display data output means to display the display data generated by the decoding process; A gaming machine configured to control output to the unit.

(H-1-10) A tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position for specifying a display frame to be displayed on the display unit to the decoding means,
The decoding means is
capable of performing the decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames in one frame time;
A preceding decoding process that performs the decoding process in advance is possible,
In the preceding decoding process, the number of preceding decodings of display data that can be generated in advance is set,
The effect control unit has a threshold for the display data,
The gaming machine configured such that the threshold value is set to the preceding decoding number (for example, the preceding decoding number "8" as shown in FIGS. 402(A) to 402(C)).

According to the gaming machine with the above configuration, it is possible to change the image display speed in the effect without increasing the processing load. Furthermore, according to the gaming machine with the above configuration, it is possible to change the image display speed in the effect at low cost without providing a dedicated circuit.

Further, with the above-configured gaming machine, when an instruction is given to play back a moving image at n-times speed, the user does not have to be aware of the moving image playback status, and according to the comparison result between the numerical value based on the designated frame number and the predetermined threshold value, the Therefore, by specifying an arbitrary frame for reproduction at the double speed, optimum video reproduction processing can be performed.

<Appendix H-2>
In a conventional game machine, a configuration is disclosed in which files are grouped together and the grouped files are accessed (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-031586).

In such a proposed gaming machine, a target file is read from a set file list or a file name described in a program, and is expanded or stored in a designated area (RAM).

However, in such a game machine, the file list or the file name described in the program is read, and then the target files are read in order, so it takes a long time to read.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of quickly reading a plurality of files.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-2-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
a display unit (for example, a main display device 2510 or a sub display device 2520 shown in FIG. 375);
It has an arithmetic processor (for example, CPU2390 shown in FIG. 375) and an image processor (for example, GPU2400 or VPU2410 shown in FIG. 375) that is connected to the arithmetic processor and performs image processing, and performs effect control. A production control unit that displays on the display unit (for example, a sub control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375),
A game machine (for example, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment) characterized in that the performance control unit controls data transfer for image processing in the image processor.

(H-2-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
List information (for example, the reading list described in the flowchart of FIG. 392) specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The game machine, wherein the performance control unit is configured to specify data to be transferred based on the list information.

(H-2-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The effect control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The gaming machine configured such that the list information includes information indicating the order of transferring the data.

(H-2-4) The invention according to the fourth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to third aspects.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The effect control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The effect control unit, when the list information exists,
generating prefetch information from the list information;
Securing a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed at a higher speed than the data storage area storing the data,
Based on the prefetch information, the data is read from the data storage area and a data read-only process (for example, the file cache thread described in the flow chart of FIG. 392) is started to be stored in the data memory area. game machine.

(H-2-5) The invention according to the fifth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The effect control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The effect control unit, when the list information exists,
generating prefetch information from the list information;
Securing a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed at a higher speed than the data storage area storing the data,
activating data read-only processing for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
Based on the prefetch information, the data read-only process sequentially stores the data in the data memory area so that the data is arranged in the order required for processing by the image processor in the data memory area. A game machine configured as follows.

(H-2-6) The invention according to the sixth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fifth aspects.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The effect control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The effect control unit, when the list information exists,
generating prefetch information from the list information;
Securing a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed at a higher speed than the data storage area storing the data,
activating data read-only processing for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
An upper limit storage capacity is set in the data memory area,
The data read-only process is a gaming machine configured to perform control so as not to read the data when the data memory area runs out of space.

(H-2-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The effect control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The effect control unit, when the list information exists,
generating prefetch information from the list information;
Securing a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed at a higher speed than the data storage area storing the data,
activating data read-only processing for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
The arithmetic processor is composed of a plurality of core processors (for example, four CPU cores (CPU core #1, CPU core #2, CPU core #3, CPU core #4)),
The data read-only process is configured such that one or more of the data read-only processes are activated by being activated by a non-operating core processor among the plurality of core processors. game machine.

(H-2-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The effect control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The effect control unit, when the list information exists,
generating prefetch information from the list information;
Securing a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed at a higher speed than the data storage area storing the data,
activating data read-only processing for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
The production control unit, based on the cancellation request,
discarding said prefetch information;
A gaming machine configured to issue a request to discard the data read-only process.

(H-2-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to eighth embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The effect control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The effect control unit, when the list information exists,
generating prefetch information from the list information;
Securing a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed at a higher speed than the data storage area storing the data,
activating data read-only processing for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
The game machine is configured such that, when the data stored in the data memory area is processed by the image processing processor, the effect control section deletes the data from the data memory area.

(H-2-10) A tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
List information specifying each of the data to be transferred is stored in advance,
The effect control unit identifies data to be transferred based on the list information,
The effect control unit, when the list information exists,
generating prefetch information from the list information;
Securing a dedicated data memory area that can be accessed at a higher speed than the data storage area storing the data,
activating data read-only processing for reading the data from the data storage area and storing it in the data memory area based on the prefetch information;
A game in which the data read-only process stores data for constructing 3D image data in the order required for processing by the image processor and stored in the data memory area based on the prefetch information. machine.

According to the gaming machine with the above configuration, multiple files can be quickly read in image processing.

Also, with the gaming machine having the above configuration, data related to drawing processing is read in advance in a predetermined order based on the prefetch information generated from the file read list, thereby improving the processing efficiency of data reading in image processing.

<Appendix H-3>
In a conventional game machine, when managing playback channels for sound effects, a configuration is disclosed in which playback channels are managed using a management table and channel numbers (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-119192).

The playback channels in this case are managed by real numbers such as 1 to 32, for example.

However, in such a game machine, since the playback channels are managed by real numbers, even if a plurality of channels are used, it is necessary to define and manage each channel, resulting in wasteful processing. is doing.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of defining and managing a plurality of channels for audio output relating to effects, etc., with simple and efficient processing. for the purpose.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-3-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
Arithmetic processing unit (for example, CPU 2390 shown in FIG. 375);
A sound source amplification unit (for example, a digital amplifier 2240 shown in FIG. 375) connected to the arithmetic processing unit;
A sound output unit (for example, a speaker group 2040 shown in FIG. 375) connected to the sound source amplification unit,
The arithmetic processing unit is
Having a plurality of audio channels (for example, 1 ch to 64 ch logical channels) for outputting sound data to the sound source amplifier,
setting channel data (for example, request data as shown in FIG. 406(A)) corresponding to one or more of the plurality of audio channels, and outputting the channel data to the sound source amplifier; A game machine (for example, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment) characterized by controlling the sound output unit to output a sound.

(H-3-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The gaming machine is configured such that the channel data has a plurality of setting formats (for example, the request data format shown in FIG. 406(B)) for designating the audio channel.

(H-3-3) The invention according to the third aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second aspect.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats for designating the audio channel,
Each of the channel data according to the plurality of setting formats is
have the same data length (e.g. 8 bytes),
The range of the area used to specify the audio channel is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 406(B), when the control target is a single channel, the rightmost (least significant) 16 bits are used, and the control target is a single In the case of a group, the gaming machine is configured to use the 16 bits on the left (higher order) of the 16 bits on the right end.

(H-3-4) The invention according to the fourth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to third aspects.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats for designating the audio channel,
Each of the channel data according to the plurality of setting formats is
have the same data length,
differing ranges of regions used to designate said audio channels;
In the channel data according to the plurality of setting formats,
In different setting formats, the areas used to specify the audio channels overlap at least partially (for example, as shown in FIG. 406(B), when the control target is a single channel , there is overlap in the area used),
A gaming machine configured to separately use information for identifying the different setting formats.

(H-3-5) The invention according to the fifth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
Information indicating whether or not a plurality of audio channels are specified in the channel data (for example, option flag/function identification request data shown in FIG. Gaming machine configured to output to.

(H-3-6) The invention according to the sixth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fifth aspects.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats for designating the audio channel,
The channel data are
A game machine configured to have a setting format for individually designating said audio channels and a setting format for designating said audio channels managed in groups on a group-by-group basis.

(H-3-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats for designating the audio channel,
The first setting format to be set in the channel data (for example, the setting format related to the controlled object=single channel shown in FIG. 406B) is a format for setting the channel number, and the second setting format (for example, , shown in FIG. 406(B), setting format for control target=single group) is a format for setting group numbers for designating a plurality of channels, and the third setting format (for example, FIG. 406(B ) is a gaming machine configured to set bit information that enables setting of the maximum number of channels.

(H-3-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats for designating the audio channel,
The first setting format set in the channel data is a format for setting a channel number, the second setting format is a format for setting a group number for specifying a plurality of channels,
When setting the first setting format, the channel number is set in the first channel area, and when setting the second setting format, the channel number is set in the second channel area that does not overlap with the first channel area. A gaming machine configured to set a group number.

(H-3-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to eighth embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats for designating the audio channel,
A first setting format for setting the channel data is a format for setting a channel number, a second setting format is a format for setting a group number for specifying a plurality of channels, and a third setting format is a format for setting a group number for specifying a plurality of channels. The format is a format for setting bit information that allows the maximum number of channels to be set.
When setting the first setting format, the channel number is set in the first channel area, and when setting the second setting format, the channel number is set in the second channel area that does not overlap with the first channel area. set the group number,
A gaming machine configured to set the bit information in the first channel area, the second channel area, and the third channel area when the third setting format is set.

(H-3-10) A tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
The channel data has a plurality of setting formats for designating the audio channel,
When the channel data is in a setting format that designates the audio channels on a group basis, the arithmetic processing unit refers to a channel group table (for example, the channel group table shown in FIG. 408(B)), Figure out which audio channels belong to the specified group,
The gaming machine is configured such that the channel group table stores, for each group, audio channels belonging to the group as bit information enabling the maximum number of channels to be set.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to define and manage a plurality of sound channels, thereby simplifying the processing relating to sound output.

<Appendix H-4>
In a conventional gaming machine, a configuration using a sound table for managing sound is disclosed in order to control sound effects (see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-015443).

In such a conventional gaming machine, when controlling a plurality of sounds in succession, the sounds are reproduced by requesting a sound sequence that manages the reproduction of the plurality of sounds.

However, when a request for a sound sequence as described above is registered, in order to control the reproduction of individual sounds, management and processing separate from the sound sequence are required.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of these points, and enables management of a plurality of sounds by a sound sequence request (sequence request), and management of individual sounds registered in the sequence request. We aim to make it possible.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-4-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
Arithmetic processing unit (for example, CPU 2390 shown in FIG. 375);
A sound source amplification unit (for example, a digital amplifier 2240 shown in FIG. 375) connected to the arithmetic processing unit;
A sound output unit (for example, a speaker group 2040 shown in FIG. 375) connected to the sound source amplification unit,
The arithmetic processing unit is
It is characterized by having sound source request data (for example, request (request ID=1) and sequence request (request ID=10) shown in FIG. 407) in which a plurality of sound source data are set for output to the sound output unit. gaming machine (for example, the pachislot machine 1 according to the 12th embodiment).

(H-4-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data (for example, the request (request ID=1) shown in FIG. 407) including a request regarding a single sound source data, and second sound source request including requests regarding a plurality of sound source data. A gaming machine configured to include data (for example, a sequence request (request ID=10) shown in FIG. 407).

(H-4-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request for a single sound source data and second sound source request data including a request for a plurality of sound source data,
a sound source request data storage unit (for example, a request table shown in FIG. 407) that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
The arithmetic processing unit is
A gaming machine configured to refer to the first sound source request data related to the reproduction request from the sound source request data storage unit when the second sound source request data includes a reproduction request related to the sound source data.

(H-4-4) The invention according to the fourth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to third aspects.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request for a single sound source data and second sound source request data including a request for a plurality of sound source data,
a sound source request data storage unit that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
in the sound source request data storage unit, each of the sound source request data is individually managed by an identifier (for example, a request ID);
A gaming machine configured such that, when the second sound source request data includes a reproduction request relating to sound source data, the second sound source request data includes an identifier of the first sound source request data relating to the reproduction request.

(H-4-5) The invention according to the fifth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request for a single sound source data and second sound source request data including a request for a plurality of sound source data,
a sound source request data storage unit that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
in the sound source request data storage unit, each of the sound source request data is individually managed by an identifier;
The arithmetic processing unit is
When the second sound source request data includes a reproduction request related to sound source data, the identifier of the first sound source request data related to the reproduction request is used to refer to the sound source request data storage unit, and the corresponding first sound source request data is obtained. gaming machine configured to obtain

(H-4-6) The invention according to the sixth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fifth aspects.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request for a single sound source data and second sound source request data including a request for a plurality of sound source data,
The gaming machine is configured such that the second sound source request data is a set of data for continuously controlling a plurality of sound source data.

(H-4-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request for a single sound source data and second sound source request data including a request for a plurality of sound source data,
a sound source request data storage unit that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
in the sound source request data storage unit, each of the sound source request data is individually managed by an identifier;
A game machine configured to be able to set each of the sound source request data based on the identifier.

(H-4-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request for a single sound source data and second sound source request data including a request for a plurality of sound source data,
When the second sound source request data includes a reproduction request related to the sound source data, the reproduction position can be set in the first sound source request data related to the reproduction request (for example, setting of the reproduction start position of the request data) and the second sound source request data. A gaming machine configured so that one or more playback positions can be set in request data (for example, setting a sequence marker in a sequence request).

(H-4-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to eighth embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request for a single sound source data and second sound source request data including a request for a plurality of sound source data,
In a situation where the second sound source request data includes a reproduction request for sound source data,
when making a predetermined request for the second sound source request data, the request is accepted as a request for all the sound source data included in the second sound source request data;
A gaming machine configured so that, when a predetermined request is made individually for the first sound source request data related to the reproduction request, the request is accepted as a request related to the sound source data of the first sound source request data.

(H-4-10) A tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
The sound source request data includes first sound source request data including a request for a single sound source data and second sound source request data including a request for a plurality of sound source data,
a sound source request data storage unit that stores the second sound source request data and the first sound source request data;
The sound source request data storage unit stores sound source request data in association with a first code (for example, a request ID (the above identifier)),
A second code storage unit (for example, a hash value request table in FIG. 408) stores a second code (for example, a hash value) related to the sound source request data as a sequence of corresponding sound source request data in the sound source request data storage unit. stored in the same order,
The arithmetic processing unit can access target sound source request data by referring to the sound source request data storage unit using the first code, and can access the target sound source request data using the second code. A gaming machine configured to be able to access target sound source request data by referring to a code storage unit and the sound source request data storage unit.

According to the gaming machine with the above configuration, it is possible to manage a plurality of sounds by requesting a sound sequence (sequence request) and to manage individual sounds registered in the sequence request. More freedom.

<Appendix H-5>
In the conventional gaming machine, a configuration is disclosed in which all processing is performed by the main processing of the program of the effect control device (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-213753).

In such a conventional game machine, the production control system program is composed of a program commonly called "single thread".

However, in a system configured with a single thread as described above, if a problem occurs in one of multiple processes, the entire system must be restarted (rebooted) to restore normal operation. .

The present invention has been made in view of these points. Even if a problem occurs in a part of the system, by restarting only the part in which the problem occurred, the entire system can be restarted. The purpose is to operate stably.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-5-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A control unit (for example, has a sub control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375,
The arithmetic processor is composed of a plurality of core processors (for example, four CPU cores (CPU core #1, CPU core #2, CPU core #3, CPU core #4)),
A gaming machine (for example, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the twelfth embodiment), wherein the control unit performs effect control by using the plurality of core processors.

(H-5-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The control unit
a read-only memory (for example, a sub ROM 2210 shown in FIG. 375) storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs (for example, a program for executing an OS);
A rewritable read/write memory (for example, SDRAM 2430 shown in FIG. 375),
The control program stored in the read-only memory is a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program (for example, master process, graphic process, sound process, lamp A game machine that includes a program for executing processes).

(H-5-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The control unit
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
a rewritable read/write memory;
Furthermore, it has a game control unit that controls the lottery in the game,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
A first process (e.g., master process) of the plurality of processes includes:
Receiving a command from the game control unit, executing processing according to the command,
sending a request according to the command to a second process (eg, a graphics process) of the plurality of processes;
The second process executes processing according to the received request and transmits information according to the request to a third process among the plurality of processes;
The third process (eg, sound process or lamp process) is a gaming machine configured to perform processing according to the received information.

(H-5-4) The invention according to the fourth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to third aspects.
The control unit
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
a rewritable read/write memory;
Furthermore, it has a game control unit that controls the lottery in the game,
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
The plurality of processes comprise a first process for managing all other processes, a second process for controlling image display on display means, and at least a process for controlling audio output on audio output means, or including a third process comprising either a process for controlling light emission to the light emitting means;
The first process includes
Receiving a command from the game control unit, executing processing according to the command,
sending a request corresponding to the command to the second process;
The second process executes processing according to the received request and transmits information according to the request to the third process;
The third process is a gaming machine configured to execute processing according to the received information.

(H-5-5) The invention according to the fifth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
The control unit
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
a rewritable read/write memory;
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread that executes instructions of the control program is configured to be controlled to use one core processor among the plurality of core processors.

(H-5-6) The invention according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fifth embodiments.
The control unit
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
a rewritable read/write memory;
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread executing instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor of the plurality of core processors;
Each of the plurality of processes is provided with one intra-process common memory space (e.g., inter-thread communication area);
The thread is configured to transmit and receive data to and from another thread in the same process using the intra-process common memory space.

(H-5-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
The control unit
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
a rewritable read/write memory;
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread executing instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor of the plurality of core processors;
One of the plurality of processes (for example, a master process) collects survival information indicating whether or not the thread is normal from each thread of other processes, and centrally monitors the state of each thread. Gaming machine configured to manage.

(H-5-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
The control unit
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
a rewritable read/write memory;
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread executing instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor of the plurality of core processors;
one of the plurality of processes,
Collecting survival information indicating whether the thread is normal or not from each thread of another process, centrally managing the state of each thread,
If there is a thread that is not normal, control to take a predetermined response,
A gaming machine configured such that the response includes at least one of a process of restarting a process having the abnormal thread and a process of displaying information about the abnormal thread on a predetermined display means. .

(H-5-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to eighth embodiments.
The control unit
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
a rewritable read/write memory;
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread executing instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor of the plurality of core processors;
each of the plurality of processes is provided with one intra-process common memory space;
one of the plurality of processes collects survival information indicating whether or not the thread is normal from each thread of the other processes, and centrally manages the state of each thread;
The survival information is configured such that in each of the other processes, one thread (e.g., the main thread of each process) includes survival information collected from other threads via the intra-process common memory space. game machine.

(H-5-10) A tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
The control unit
a read-only memory storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs;
a rewritable read/write memory;
The control program stored in the read-only memory includes a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program,
In each process, a thread executing instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor of the plurality of core processors;
each of the plurality of processes is provided with one intra-process common memory space;
When the threads of one process repeatedly perform processing in different execution cycles, one thread of the process outputs timing information to the intra-process common memory space, so that the processing timing of the other threads can be grasped. and
A game machine configured such that the timing information is given an identifier (for example, SID=1, 2, etc. for a sound process) so that it can be known which execution cycle of the thread the timing information corresponds to.

According to the gaming machine with the above configuration, even if a problem occurs in a part of the system, by restarting only the part in which the problem occurred, the entire system can be stably operated without stopping. .

Further, according to the gaming machine with the above configuration, each main function is multiprocessed, and each process is multithreaded. Therefore, even if a problem occurs in one process or thread, Since it is only necessary to restart only the process or thread in which an error has occurred, stable operation can be maintained without stopping the entire production control subsystem.

<Appendix H-6>
In the conventional gaming machine, a configuration is disclosed in which all processing is performed by the main processing of the program of the effect control device (see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-213753).

In such a conventional game machine, the exchange of data between each process in the production control system program is configured so that the data stored in the specified position of the memory is read from the memory by referring to the same specified position.

It is easy to create a program that exchanges data as described above, but when it is installed in the actual machine, it is impossible to grasp the contents of the data stored in the memory from the outside, so ICE (In- A dedicated instrument for debugging such as Circuit Emulator is essential.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to facilitate debugging by grasping internal data without using a dedicated measuring instrument.

In order to achieve the above object, the present invention provides the following gaming machine.

(H-6-1) The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
A control unit (for example, has a sub control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375,
The arithmetic processor is composed of a plurality of core processors (for example, four CPU cores (CPU core #1, CPU core #2, CPU core #3, CPU core #4)),
The control unit
a read-only memory (for example, a sub ROM 2210 shown in FIG. 375) storing a plurality of control programs and a management program for managing the control programs (for example, a program for executing an OS);
A rewritable read/write memory (for example, SDRAM 2430 shown in FIG. 375),
The control program stored in the read-only memory is a program for executing a plurality of processes that can be executed independently and in parallel under the control of the management program (for example, master process, graphic process, sound process, lamp program to execute the process),
Data input/output between the plurality of processes is performed via a shared memory (for example, the shared memory shown in FIG. 377) secured in the read/write memory (for example, a gaming machine (for example, A pachi-slot machine 1) according to a twelfth embodiment.

(H-6-2) The invention according to the second embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first embodiment.
The number of shared memories is individually secured according to the plurality of processes (for example, as shown in FIG. 377, the master process exchanges data with the graphic process, sound process, and lamp process, According to the data reception from each process, the shared memory "Graphics → Master", "Sound → Master", "Lamp → Master" is secured, and according to the data transmission to each process, the shared memory " master → graphic”, “ANY → sound”, and “ANY → lamp”),
A gaming machine configured to output data to the shared memory corresponding to the process, and input data output by a process different from the process from a shared memory different from the shared memory.

(H-6-3) The invention according to the third embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in the first or second embodiment.
The shared memory is individually secured in a number corresponding to the plurality of processes,
outputting data to the shared memory according to the process, inputting data output by a process different from the process from a shared memory different from the shared memory,
The shared memory includes a first shared memory (for example, shared memory “graphics→master”, “sound→master”, etc.) that inputs data from one process and outputs data to one process, and a plurality of processes. and a second shared memory (for example, shared memory “ANY→Sound”, “ANY→Lamp”, etc.) for inputting data from and outputting data to one process.

(H-6-4) The invention according to the fourth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to third aspects.
Furthermore, it has a game control unit that controls the progress of the game,
A first process (e.g., master process) of the plurality of processes includes:
Receiving a command from the game control unit, executing processing according to the command,
sending a request according to the command to a second process (e.g., a graphics process) of the plurality of processes via the shared memory;
The second process executes processing according to the received request, and transmits information according to the request to a third process (for example, a sound process or a lamp process) of the plurality of processes. send through shared memory,
The third process is a gaming machine configured to execute processing according to the received information.

(H-6-5) The invention according to the fifth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fourth aspects.
Furthermore, it has a game control unit that controls the lottery in the game,
The plurality of processes comprise a first process for managing all other processes, a second process for controlling image display on display means, and at least a process for controlling audio output on audio output means, or , a third process comprising either the process of controlling light emission to the light emitting means;
The first process includes
Receiving a command from the game control unit, executing processing according to the command,
sending a request according to the command to the second process via the shared memory;
The second process executes processing according to the received request and transmits information according to the request to the third process via the shared memory;
The third process is a gaming machine configured to execute processing according to the received information.

(H-6-6) The invention according to the sixth aspect of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to fifth aspects.
The shared memory is configured to enable input/output of data according to a predetermined communication protocol (for example, TCP) implemented in the process.

(H-6-7) The invention according to the seventh embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to sixth embodiments.
The shared memory is configured so that data can be input and output according to a predetermined communication protocol implemented in the process,
A gaming machine configured so that an externally connected device (for example, a PC connectable to the gaming machine) can transmit and receive data to and from the shared memory using the communication protocol.

(H-6-8) The invention according to the eighth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to seventh embodiments.
The shared memory is configured so that data can be input and output according to a predetermined communication protocol implemented in the process,
An externally connected device can transmit and receive data to and from the shared memory using the communication protocol,
The processes are controlled to perform processing according to data input to the corresponding shared memory;
A gaming machine configured to be able to control the processing of the process based on the data input from the externally connected device to the shared memory.

(H-6-9) The invention according to the ninth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to eighth embodiments.
In each process, a thread executing instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor of the plurality of core processors;
One process (for example, a master process) of the plurality of processes is
centrally managing the state of each thread by collecting survival information indicating whether the thread is normal or not from each thread of another process via the shared memory;
If there is a thread that is not normal, control to take a predetermined response,
A gaming machine configured such that the response includes at least one of a process of restarting a process having the abnormal thread and a process of displaying information about the abnormal thread on a predetermined display means. .

(H-6-10) A tenth embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration in any one of the first to ninth embodiments.
In each process, a thread executing instructions of the control program is controlled to utilize one core processor of the plurality of core processors;
one of the plurality of processes,
centrally managing the state of each thread by collecting survival information indicating whether the thread is normal or not from each thread of another process via the shared memory;
In each of the other processes, the survival information is transmitted by one thread (for example, the main thread of each process) to another thread via a memory space (for example, inter-thread communication area) that can be used in common within the process. A gaming machine configured to include survival information collected from threads.

According to the gaming machine with the above configuration, it is possible to grasp the data inside the gaming machine without using a dedicated measuring instrument, and to easily perform debugging.

Further, according to the gaming machine with the above configuration, data can be sent and received from a personal computer or the like to a process executed in the gaming machine via a LAN line or the like, so debugging can be easily realized.

<Appendix (Other)>
Conventionally, a plurality of reels each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its surface are inserted with game medals, coins, etc. (“medals, etc.”), and it is detected that the start lever has been operated by the player, and a plurality of reels are generated. Detects that the player has pressed a start switch requesting the start of rotation of the reel and a stop button provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels, and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the reel to stop. a stepping motor provided corresponding to each of a plurality of reels to transmit the respective driving force to each reel; and the operation of the stepping motor based on signals output from the start switch and the stop switch. and a reel control unit for controlling the rotation and stopping of each reel, and when it detects that the start lever has been operated, a lottery is conducted based on a random number value, and the result of this lottery ("internal winning combination") 2. Description of the Related Art There is known a so-called pachislot gaming machine that stops the rotation of reels based on the detection timing of operation of a stop button.

In addition, conventionally, when a predetermined variable display start condition is established, such as when a game ball has passed through a start area provided in a game area in which the game ball can roll, a discernible number is displayed on the display area of the variable display device. A variable display control means is provided for performing control to variably display information and to perform control for deriving and displaying the identification information that is being variably displayed, and when the derived and displayed identification information becomes a predetermined combination, the player can There is known a pachinko game machine that shifts to a jackpot game state (so-called "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player.

However, since the conventional pachislot and pachinko machines do not have the configuration and functions of the game machines of the present invention, it has not been possible to effectively improve the amusement. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

The first to twelfth embodiments have been described above. In the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a pachislot gaming machine has been described, but the present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines (for example, pachinko gaming machines, slot machines, etc.).

As described above, the first to twelfth embodiments of the present invention have been described, but these are merely examples, and the present invention is not particularly limited. It is possible. Moreover, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable effects resulting from the present invention, and the effects of the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

In addition, in the above detailed description, the characteristic parts have been mainly described so that the present invention can be understood more easily. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments set forth in the foregoing detailed description, but may be applied to other embodiments and its scope of application is diverse. Moreover, the terms and usage used in this specification are used to describe the present invention precisely, and are not used to limit the interpretation of the present invention. In addition, it is believed that those skilled in the art can easily conceive of other configurations, systems, methods, etc. included in the concept of the present invention from the concept of the invention described herein. Therefore, the claims should be considered to include equivalent configurations within the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to facilitate understanding of the technical content and essence of the application by the Patent Office, general public institutions, and engineers in this technical field who are unfamiliar with patents, legal terms, or technical terms. It is intended to make it possible to make a quick judgment through a thorough investigation. The Abstract, therefore, is not intended to limit the scope of the invention, which should be evaluated by the claims. In addition, in order to fully understand the purpose of the present invention and the unique effects of the present invention, it is desired that the description should be interpreted with sufficient consideration given to the literatures that have already been disclosed.

The foregoing detailed description includes computer-implemented processes. The above explanations and representations are provided for the purpose of most efficient understanding by those skilled in the art. As used herein, each treatment used to derive a result of 1 should be understood as a self-consistent treatment. In each process, transmission/reception, recording, etc. of electrical or magnetic signals are performed. Note that the operations in each process represent such signals as bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., which are used merely for convenience of explanation. There is a need. In addition, the processing in each processing may be described in terms common to human behavior, but the processing described in this specification is basically executed by various devices. Also, other configurations required to perform each process are self-explanatory from the above description.

1 Pachi-slot machine A Display unit B Irradiation unit C Screen device G Cabinet UD Upper door mechanism DD Lower door mechanism 2010 Main control board 2100 Sub control unit 2300 Sub control board 2390 CPU
2400 GPUs
2410 VPUs
2420 VRAMs
2510 main display

The invention according to the first embodiment of the present invention has the following configuration.
a display unit (for example, a main display device 2510 and a sub display device 2520 (including a VRAM 2420) shown in FIG. 375);
It has an arithmetic processor (for example, CPU2390 shown in FIG. 375) and an image processor (for example, GPU2400 or VPU2410 shown in FIG. 375) that is connected to the arithmetic processor and performs image processing, and performs effect control. A production control unit that displays on the display unit (for example, a sub control unit 2100 shown in FIG. 375),
The production control unit is
decoding means for performing decoding processing from still image data and moving image data to generate display data;
display data output means for displaying a display frame on the display unit by outputting the display data to the display unit every frame time (for example, in the case of 60 fps, one frame time is 16.5 msec); ,
The effect control unit specifies a display frame position to specify a display frame to be displayed on the display unit (for example, specifies a frame number of a frame to be displayed) to the decoding means,
The decoding means is
capable of performing the decoding process of a plurality of display data corresponding to a plurality of frames in one frame time;
Preceding decoding processing that performs the decoding processing in advance (for example, as shown in FIG. 402A, from timing t0 to timing t1, decoding processing from frame 00 to frame 07 is performed, and display processing for frame 00 is performed. processing performed before) is possible, and
Furthermore, the production control unit
having a threshold for the display data;
According to the frame position value related to the display frame position designation, the frame position value related to the display frame displayed on the display unit, and the relation with the threshold value, the preceding decoding process is performed for the display data output means. control to instruct which of the display data already generated by and the display data generated by the decoding process is to be output to the display unit;
The threshold value represents the number of pre-decodes of display data that can be generated in advance in the pre-decode process (for example, the number of pre-decodes "8" as shown in FIGS. 402(A) to 402(C)). is a fixed value and can be set in advance,
The decoding means is
A gaming machine characterized by being controlled to perform the preceding decoding process in order to hold a number of display data corresponding to the number of preceding decoding when there is a processable decoding target (for example, the 12th embodiment) . pachislot machine 1).

Claims (1)

a game board having a game area in which game media can flow down;
a shooting means for shooting a game medium to the game area by a player's operation;
a first start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
a second start area arranged in the game area and through which game media can pass;
special game state transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state advantageous to the player, triggered by passage of the game medium into either the first start region or the second start region;
an area dividing means for extracting an area in which the game medium appears from an image related to the image data and dividing the area in which the game medium appears into a plurality of divided areas;
warning screen determination means for determining whether or not to display a warning screen based on the number of rotations detected by the number of rotations detection means within a predetermined period after the gaming machine is activated;
effect executing means for executing the effect determined by the effect determining means by controlling the light emission mode of the optical element based on the control data;
A game machine characterized by comprising:

Images